PROJECT MANUAL for ALMA ARMORY ALMA ARMORY MODIFICATIONS ALMA, MI
Paradigm Project No. 1301006
Issue Date: May 2, 2014
OWNER:
STATE OF MICHIGAN Stevens T. Mason Building 530 West Allegan Second Floor P.O. Box 30026 Lansing, Michigan 48909
ARCHITECT:
PARADIGM DESIGN, INC. 550 - 3 Mile Road, NW, Suite B Grand Rapids, Michigan 49544 Telephone: (616) 785-5656 Fax: (616) 785-5657
MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL ENGINEER:
RHOADES ENGINEERING, INC. 4801 Henry Street Muskegon, Michigan 49441 Telephone: (231) 798-4328 Fax: (231) 798-2981
PROJECT TITLE PAGE
00 0101 - 1
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER & CONTRACTOR)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 00010 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION/PAGE NO. SUBJECT INDEX SECTION 00020 GLOSSARY .............................................................. 00020 - 1 SECTION 00030 ADVERTISEMENT .................................................. 00030 - 1 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ............................. 00100 - 1 ARTICLE 1 ARTICLE 2 ARTICLE 3
BIDDING DOCUMENT INTERPRETATIONS ......................... 00100 - 1 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS ............................................ 00100 - 1 BIDDING DOCUMENTS; SITE CONDITIONS; SAFETY REQUIREMENTS; LAWS ......................................... 00100 - 2 ARTICLE 4 INTERPRETATIONS; ADDENDA............................................ 00100 - 3 ARTICLE 5 BID SECURITY........................................................................ 00100 - 3 ARTICLE 6 CONTRACT TIME; LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ......................... 00100 - 4 ARTICLE 7 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT.............................................. 00100 - 4 ARTICLE 8 SUBCONTRACTORS .............................................................. 00100 - 5 ARTICLE 9 BID FORM AND BID FORM ATTACHMENTS ........................ 00100 - 5 ARTICLE 10 PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF BIDS ........................ 00100 - 6 ARTICLE 11 BID WITHDRAWAL; BID MODIFICATION .............................. 00100 - 6 ARTICLE 12 BID OPENING; OBJECTION TO THE AWARD ...................... 00100 - 7 ARTICLE 13 BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN ........................................................ 00100 - 7 ARTICLE 14 AWARD OF THE CONTRACT ................................................ 00100 - 7 ARTICLE 15 EXECUTION OF THE AGREEMENT ...................................... 00100 - 9 ARTICLE 16 MOBILIZATION PAY ITEM ..................................................... 00100 –10 ARTICLE 17 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL– FINE FOR NON-COMPLIANCE ............................................. 00100 –10 ATTACHMENT A TO SECTION 00100: BIDDER'S CHECK LIST ............... 00110 - 1
SECTION 00120
SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS .................. 00120 - 1
SECTION 00210 SECTION 00300 SECTION 00300
INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS ............................ 00210 - 1 BID SUMMARY ........................................ 00300 - SUMMARY BID FORM ................................................................. 00300 - 1
ARTICLE 1 THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO THE STATE OF MICHIGAN ("THE OWNER"). ...................................................................... 00300 - 1 ARTICLE 2 THE BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS ...................................... 00300 - 1 ARTICLE 3 TIME OF COMPLETION ........................................................... 00300 - 2 ARTICLE 4 ATTACHMENTS INCLUDED WITH THIS BID .......................... 00300 - 2 ARTICLE 5 DEFINED TERMS ..................................................................... 00300 - 2 ARTICLE 6 BID SCHEDULE ........................................................................ 00300 - 3 ARTICLE 7 SCHEDULE OF CHANGE ORDER PRICES .............................. 00300 - 5 ARTICLE 8 BID SUBMITTED ON.................................................................. 00300 - 6
SECTION 00310 SECTION 00320 SECTION 00410
MICHSPEC DTMB
BID BOND ........................................................... 00310 - 1 NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT ............................ 00320 - 1 BID BREAKDOWN ............................................. 00410 - 1
00010 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER & CONTRACTOR)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION/PAGE NO. SECTION 00420 ARTICLE 1 ARTICLE 2 ARTICLE 3 ARTICLE 4 ARTICLE 5
QUESTIONNAIRE ............................................... 00420 ORGANIZATION ...................................................................... 00420 SPECIALTY CONTRACTOR LICENSES ................................. 00420 EXPERIENCE........................................................................... 00420 ADDITIONAL QUALIFICATIONS ............................................. 00420 REFERENCES ......................................................................... 00420 REFERENCES ATTACHMENT ................................................ 00420 -
SECTION 00430 SECTION 00440
1 1 1 1 2 2 3
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS ............................. 00430 - 1 SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................. 00440 - 1
ARTICLE 1 BID MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT LISTED (NAMED OR SPECIFIED) ITEMS .................................................................. 00440 - 1 ARTICLE 2 BID MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT OPEN SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... 00440 - 4
SECTION 00500 ARTICLE 1 ARTICLE 2 ARTICLE 3 ARTICLE 4 ARTICLE 5 ARTICLE 6 ARTICLE 7 ARTICLE 8 ARTICLE 9
AGREEMENT ........................................................... 00500 THE CONTRACT; THE PROJECT; THE WORK ..................... 00500 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ...................................................... 00500 CONTRACT PRICE .................................................................. 00500 CONTRACT TIME; LIQUIDATED DAMAGES .......................... 00500 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR .............................................. 00500 THE PROFESSIONAL SERVICES CONTRACTOR ................ 00500 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS ................................. 00500 MISCELLANEOUS ................................................................... 00500 NOTICE AND SERVICE ........................................................... 00500 -
SECTION 00520
ATTACHMENT “A” TO AGREEMENT ................ 00520 - 1
SECTION 00610 SECTION 00620 SECTION 00700
PERFORMANCE BOND ....................................... 00610 - 1 PAYMENT BOND ................................................... 00620 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS ....................................... 00700 - 1
ARTICLE 1 INTERPRETATIONS .................................................................. 00700 1.1 Section 00020 Glossary: ...................................................................... 00700 1.2 Intent of the Contract Documents: ....................................................... 00700 1.3 Priority of the Contract Documents: ..................................................... 00700 1.4 Interpretation of Indemnification Provisions: ........................................ 00700 1.5 Additional Interpretations: .................................................................... 00700 1.6 Ownership and Use of the Contract Documents: ................................. 00700 1.7 Copies of the Contract Documents: ...................................................... 00700 -
MICHSPEC DTMB
1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 4
00010 2
1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER & CONTRACTOR)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION/PAGE NO. ARTICLE 2 THE OWNERGENERAL PROVISIONS ................................. 00700 2.1 Availability of Lands, Areas, Properties and Facilities: ......................... 00700 2.2 Reference Points; Base Lines and Benchmarks: ................................. 00700 2.3 Stop Work Order: ................................................................................. 00700 2.4 Limitations on the Owner’s Responsibilities: ....................................... 00700 2.5 Additional General Provisions: ............................................................. 00700 2.6 Partnering Charter: .............................................................................. 00700 -
3 3 3 3 4 4 4
ARTICLE 3 THE PROFESSIONAL GENERAL PROVISIONS ................. 00700 3.1 Owner’s Representative:..................................................................... 00700 3.2 Clarifications and Interpretations:......................................................... 00700 3.3 Minor Variations and No-Cost Changes; Minor Delays: ....................... 00700 3.4 Determinations by the Professional: ................................................... 00700 3.5 Limitations on the Professional’s Responsibilities: ............................... 00700 -
4 4 4 5 5 5
ARTICLE 4 CONTROL OF WORK GENERAL PROVISIONS .................. 00700 4.1 Review of the Contract Documents: ..................................................... 00700 4.2 Management, Supervision, and Personnel: ......................................... 00700 4.3 Materials and Equipment: .................................................................... 00700 4.4 Concerning Control of Work: ................................................................ 00700 4.5 Patent Fees and Royalties: .................................................................. 00700 4.6 Use of Premises:.................................................................................. 00700 4.7 Record Documents: ............................................................................. 00700 4.8 Emergencies: ....................................................................................... 00700 4.9 Indemnification: .................................................................................... 00700 -
5 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8
ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS ................................. 00700 5.1 Employment of Subcontractors: ........................................................... 00700 5.2 "Or Equal" and Substitute Materials and Equipment: ........................... 00700 5.3 The Contractor’s Continuing Responsibilities:.................................... 00700 -
8 8 9 9
ARTICLE 6 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................... 00700 - 10 6.1 Shop Drawing, Sample and Other Technical Submittals:.................... 00700 - 10 6.2 Review and Return of Technical Submittals:....................................... 00700 - 10 6.3 Progress Schedule Submittals: ........................................................... 00700 - 10 6.4 Review and Return of Progress Schedule Submittals: ........................ 00700 - 10 6.5 Additional Provisions Concerning Submittals: ..................................... 00700 - 11 ARTICLE 7 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS; INSURANCE ................................ 00700 - 11 7.1 Laws; Permits (Which Include Approvals and Licenses): .................... 00700 - 11 7.2 Sales and Use Tax and Other Similar Taxes: ..................................... 00700 - 12 7.3 Safety and Protection: ......................................................................... 00700 - 12 7.4 Bonds and Insurance - General Requirements: .................................. 00700 - 12 7.5 The Contractor’s Liability Insurance: ................................................. 00700 - 12 7.6 The Owner’s Liability Insurance: ........................................................ 00700 - 13 7.7 Property Insurance (Builder's All Risk Insurance): .............................. 00700 - 13 7.8 Waiver of Rights:................................................................................. 00700 - 14 7.9 Receipt and Application of Proceeds: ................................................. 00700 - 14 7.10 Unfair Labor Practice: ......................................................................... 00700 - 14 7.11 Michigan Right-To-Know Law: ............................................................ 00700 - 14 7.12 Nondiscrimination: .............................................................................. 00700 - 14 7.13 Michigan Residency for Employees: ................................................... 00700 - 15 7.14 Prevailing Wages: .............................................................................. 00700 – 15 7.15 Century Date Compliance Protection .................................................. 00700 - 15 ARTICLE 8 PROSECUTION; SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ................... 00700 - 16 8.1 Starting the Work: ............................................................................... 00700 - 16 8.2 Revision 0 (Rev. 0) Schedule and Cost Submittals: ............................ 00700 - 16 8.3 Compliance with Contract Time Requirements: .................................. 00700 - 16 8.4 Substantial Completion: ...................................................................... 00700 - 16 8.5 Partial Use: ........................................................................................ 00700 – 17 8.6 Division of Responsibilities:................................................................ 00700 – 17
MICHSPEC DTMB
00010 3
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER & CONTRACTOR)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION/PAGE NO. ARTICLE 8 PROSECUTION; SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION (CONT.) 8.7 Suspension of Work: ........................................................................... 00700 - 17 8.8 Sharing of Total Float on Non-Critical Paths: ...................................... 00700 - 17 ARTICLE 9 WARRANTY; TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND APPROVALS; CORRECTION OF WORK ............................... 00700 - 18 9.1 Warranty: ........................................................................................... 00700 - 18 9.2 Tests, Inspections and Approvals: ..................................................... 00700 - 18 9.3 Uncovering Work: .............................................................................. 00700 - 18 9.4 Correction of Work: ............................................................................ 00700 - 18 9.5 Special Correction Period Requirements: .......................................... 00700 - 19 9.6 Special Maintenance Requirements: ................................................. 00700 - 19 ARTICLE 10 CHANGES ............................................................................. 00700 - 20 10.1 Changes in the Work: ........................................................................ 00700 - 20 10.2 Differing Subsurface or Physical Site Conditions: .............................. 00700 - 20 10.3 Responsibilities for Underground Utilities:.......................................... 00700 - 21 10.4 Hazardous Material Conditions: ......................................................... 00700 - 21 10.5 Incidents with Archaeological Features: ............................................. 00700 - 21 10.6 Unit Price Work: ................................................................................. 00700 - 21 10.7 Cash Allowances; Provisionary Allowances: ...................................... 00700 - 22 10.8 Change Orders; Change Authorizations: ........................................... 00700 - 22 ARTICLE 11 CHANGES IN CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGES IN CONTRACT TIME ................................................................. 00700 - 23 11.1 General Provisions:............................................................................ 00700 - 23 11.2 Changes in Contract Time: ................................................................ 00700 - 23 11.3 Methods for Making Adjustments in Contract Price: .......................... 00700 - 23 11.4 Labor, Subcontract and Material/Equipment Costs: ........................... 00700 - 24 11.5 Construction Equipment Costs:.......................................................... 00700 - 24 11.6 Rented or Leased Construction Equipment: ...................................... 00700 - 24 11.7 Owned Construction Equipment: ....................................................... 00700 - 25 11.8 General Conditions Costs: ................................................................. 00700 - 25 11.9 Limitations on Allowable Costs: ......................................................... 00700 - 25 11.10 Costs Covered by the Fee for the Work Involved (and not Allowable as Cost of the Work Involved): ........................................................... 00700 - 25 11.11 Limits on the Fee for the Work Involved: ............................................ 00700 - 26 11.12 Fee for Unabsorbed Home Office Overhead:..................................... 00700 - 26 11.13 Changes in Contract Time for Early Completion: ............................... 00700 - 26 11.14 Access to Records: ............................................................................ 00700 - 27 11.15 Price Reduction for Defective Cost and Pricing Data: ........................ 00700 - 27 ARTICLE 12 PROGRESS PAYMENTS; FINAL PAYMENT ....................... 00700 - 28 12.1. Schedule of Values: ........................................................................... 00700 - 28 12.2 Requests for Payment: ...................................................................... 00700 - 28 12.3 Review of Request for Payment; Intent of Review: ............................ 00700 - 28 12.4 Refusal to Make or to Recommend Payment:.................................... 00700 - 28 12.5 Final Request for Payment:................................................................ 00700 - 29 12.6 Final Payment and Acceptance: ........................................................ 00700 - 29 12.7 Contractor’s Continuing Obligation: ................................................. 00700 - 29 12.8 Waiver of Claims: ............................................................................... 00700 - 29 ARTICLE 13 OTHER WORK ...................................................................... 00700 - 30 13.1 Related Work at Site: ......................................................................... 00700 - 30 13.2 Coordination Requirements: .............................................................. 00700 - 30 13.3 Claims Between the Contractor and Other Parties: .......................... 00700 - 30 ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION ...................................................................... 00700 - 31 14.1 Notice Requiring Assurance of Due Performance: ............................. 00700 - 31 14.2 Contractor Default and Termination for Cause: ................................ 00700 - 31 14.3 Surety Default: ................................................................................... 00700 - 32 14.4 Termination for Convenience of the Owner: ...................................... 00700 - 32 14.5 The Contractor May Suspend Work: ............................................... 00700 – 32 MICHSPEC DTMB
00010 4
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER & CONTRACTOR)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION/PAGE NO. ARTICLE 15 DISPUTES ............................................................................. 00700 - 33 15.1 Claims Under This Article: ................................................................. 00700 - 33 15.2 Requirement for Certification of Contractor Claims: ......................... 00700 - 33 15.3 Recommendations or Decisions from the Professional: ................... 00700 - 33 15.4 Determinations by the Director-FA:................................................... 00700 - 33 15.5 Supplements to AAA Arbitration:........................................................ 00700 - 34 15.6 Interest on a Judgment; Payment of Judgment:................................. 00700 - 34 15.7 Venue; Flow-Through Provision: ........................................................ 00700 - 34
SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ...................... 00800 - 1
PREVAILING WAGES ASBESTOS & LEAD BASED PAIN BUILDING SURVEY
MICHSPEC DTMB
00010 5
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
DOCUMENT 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 0101 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0115 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1000 SUMMARY 01 2100 ALLOWANCES 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5723 SOIL EROSION & SEDIMENTATION CONTROL SOIL REPORT 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 7300 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 4119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 04 2000 UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 2100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 3100 STEEL DECKING 05 4000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 4023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 2100 BUILDING INSULATION 07 5323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 7200 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 3613 SECTIONAL DOORS 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 0110 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 08 8000
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
GLAZING
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD 09 3000 TILING 09 5113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 6513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 6816 SHEET CARPETING 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING DIVISION 10 – SPECIALITIES 10 2113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 2116 SHOWER AND DRESSING COMPARTMENTS 10 2213 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10 2800 TOILET, AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 5113 METAL LOCKERS 10 7516 GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 3419 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 1313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0501 PLUMBING DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 22 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0700 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 1116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1316 SANITARY WASTE, VENT PIPING AND STORM DRAIN PIPING 22 1423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0713 DUCT INSULATION 23 0719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 0900 INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL FOR HVAC TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 0110 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 23 0993 23 1123 23 2113 23 2123 23 3113 23 3300 23 3423 23 3600 23 3713 23 7413 23 7423.16 23 8233
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING HYDRONIC PIPING HYDRONIC PUMPS METAL DUCTS AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES HVAC POWER VENTILATORS AIR TERMINAL UNITS DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS PACKAGED, INDIRECT-FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING-ONLY MAKEUP-AIR UNITS CONVECTORS
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 0010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0510 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 2416 PANELBOARDS 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 26 2813 FUSES 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 27 0528 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 0544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING 27 1500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 1000 SITE CLEARING 31 2000 EARTH MOVING 31 5000 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 1216 ASPHALT PAVING 32 1313 CONCRETE PAVING 32 3113 CHAINLINK FENCES AND GATES 32 9200 TURF AND GRASSES DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 33 4100 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING END OF SECTION 00 0110
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 0110 - 3
This is a Cover Sheet to the State’s Owner and Contractor Standard Construction Contract, known as the MICHSPEC Division 0 Specifications. The MICHSPEC Division 0 Specifications have been developed from the FORMSPEC Michigan Model, 1997 Edition. Although the State’s 2008 Version of the Division 0 Specifications are written as simply as practical, it is nonetheless advisable to consult with companion Guide to Specifiers when preparing specifications for a specific project. These Division 0 Specifications were developed by incorporating provisions and requirements furnished by the State into the FORMSPEC Michigan Model. These Division 0 Specifications have undergone detailed technical reviews by Department of Technology, Management and Budget, Facilities and Business Services Administration representatives and detailed legal reviews by the Department of the Attorney General for the State of Michigan. Specifiers are encouraged to consult with a Division 0 specifications specialist or an attorney knowledgeable in public contracts when preparing specifications for a specific project.
STATE OF MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TECHNOLOGY, MANAGEMENT AND BUDGET FACILITIES AND BUSINESS SERVICES ADMINISTRATION
MICHSPEC 2008 VERSION, OWNER AND CONTRACTOR STANDARD CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT MICHSPEC No. 97.0820 00020 THROUGH 97.0820 00440 RELEASED ON NOVEMBER 1, 1997;
Developed from Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract FORMSPEC Michigan Model and suggested for use with Bidding Requirements
1997 Edition/2011 Version
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR) SECTION 00020
GLOSSARY
GLOSSARY
1.1 Defined Terms: 1.1.1. The following terms or relative pronouns used in Division 0 of the Specifications have these intent and meanings: ActivityAn element in the Progress Schedule establishing a requisite step, or the time and resources required, for completing the part of the Work associated with that Activity. AddendaWritten instruments that are used by the Owner and/or Professional to incorporate interpretations or clarifications, modifications and other information into the Bidding Documents. An Addendum issued after Bid opening to those Bidders who actually submitted a Bid, for the purpose of rebidding the Work without readvertising, is referred to as a post-Bid Addendum. AgreementThe written agreement between the Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be furnished and performed. AlternateRefers to Work specified in the Bidding Documents for which the Bidder shall bid a Bid Price in the space provided in the Schedule of Alternates in Section 00300 Bid Form. Apparent Low BidderThat Bidder whose Base Bid, when added to those specific Alternates the Owner intends to accept, yields the lowest sum of Base Bid and Alternates. Archaeological FeatureAny prehistoric or historic deposit of archaeological value, as determined by a representative of a State agency that is duly authorized to evaluate such findings and render such judgments. An Archaeological Feature deposit may include, but is not limited to Indian habitations, ceremonial sites, abandoned settlements, treasure trove, artifacts or other objects with intrinsic archaeological value and that relate to the history and culture of the State of Michigan. As-Planned ScheduleIs the Contractor’s Revision 0 Progress Schedule returned to the Contractor as "Resubmittal Not Required," with or without comments or objections noted. Authorized Technical DataInformation and data contained in a report of exploration and tests of subsurface conditions that are expressly designated in paragraph 2.0 of Section 00210 Information for Bidders. Also, any physical data (dimension, location, conditions, etc.) contained in those drawings of physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface facilities identified in paragraph 3.0 of Section 00210 Information for Bidders. Bar Chart ScheduleActivity schedule, in a bar chart format, that accounts for the entire Work at a level of detail commensurate with the Progress Schedule requirements of the Contract Documents. ____________________________________________________ STATE OF MICHIGAN MODEL Developed from FORMSPEC Michigan Model ____________________________________________________
BidderThe Person acting directly, or through an authorized representative, who submits a Bid directly to the Owner. Bidding DocumentsThe proposed Contract Documents as advertised, and all Addenda issued before Bid opening, and after Bid opening, if the Work is rebid without readvertising. Bid PriceThe Bidder's price for a lump sum item of Work, or the product of the Bidder's unit price for an item of Unit Price Work times the quantity given on the Bid Form for that item. Bid SecuritySecurity serving as a guarantee that the Bidder will conform to all conditions requisite for its return or as liquidated damages in the event of failure or refusal to conform. Bidding RequirementsThe Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders (including Attachment A), Supplementary Instructions, Information for Bidders, Bid Form, Bid Form Attachments and Qualification Submittals, as advertised and as modified by Addenda, and any other Section included within Division 0 of the Bidding Documents for the purpose of governing bidding and award of the Contract. *BoardThe Administrative Board of the State of Michigan. BondsSection 00310 Bid Bond, Section 00610 Performance Bond and Section 00620 Payment Bond are security furnished by the Contractor, as required by the Contract Documents. Business DayAny Day except Saturdays, Sundays and holidays observed by the Owner. BulletinA standard DTMB form used by the Owner to describe a change in the Work under consideration by the Owner and to request the Contractor to submit a proposal for the corresponding adjustment in Contract Price and/or Contract Time, if any. Calendar DayEvery day shown on the calendar, Saturdays, Sundays and holidays included. Cash AllowanceAn Owner-specified sum included within the Contract Price to reimburse the Contractor for the actual purchase/furnished cost of materials and/or equipment or other designated items, as specifically provided in the Contract Documents. Although the scope (e.g., the required quantity) of any Work covered by a Cash Allowance is sufficiently detailed in the Contract Documents for the purposes of bidding the required labor costs, Subcontract costs, construction equipment costs and general conditions costs and Fee, it is understood that the required materials, equipment or other designated items are of uncertain purchase cost at the time of Bid or are yet to be specified in more detail by the Professional as to quality, appearance, durability, finish and such other necessary features affecting purchase price. Change AuthorizationA written order issued and signed by the Professional, which directs changes in the Work that require no adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time, or which allows for variations in the quantities of Unit Price Work.
BidWritten offer by a Bidder for the Work, as specified, which designates the Bidder’s Base Bid and Bid Prices for all Alternates. The term Bid includes a Rebid.
MICHSPEC DTMB
00020 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GLOSSARY
Change OrderA written order issued and signed by the Owner, which amends the Contract Documents for changes in the Work or an adjustment in Contract Price and/or Contract Time, or both. Contact PersonIndividual in the employ of the Professional or the Owner who is designated as the sole point of contact for prospective Bidders for requests or inquiries concerning the Work and/or the Bidding Documents. ContractRefer to the definition in paragraph 1.1 of Section 00500 Agreement. The term “Contract” encompasses the legal obligations of the Owner and Contractor, as defined by the Contract Documents. Contract AwardThe official action of the Board or the Director-FA awarding the Contract to the Contractor. Contract DocumentsThose documents itemized or designated in paragraphs 2.2 through 2.4 of Section 00500 Agreement. Contract FloatCalendar Days between the Contractor's anticipated date for early completion of the Work, or of a specified portion of the Work, if any, and the corresponding Contract Time. Contract PriceThe Contract price for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, as designated in Section 00500 Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, is the total compensation, including authorized adjustments, payable by the Owner to the Contractor (subject to provisions for Unit Price Work). Contract TimesThe Contract Times for the entire Work are the periods allowed, including authorized adjustments, for Substantial Completion and final completion of the Work. The Contract Times for a designated portion of the Work are the periods allowed for Substantial Completion and final completion of any such portion of the Work, as specified in the Contract Documents.
DefectiveAn adjective which when referring to or when applied to the term “Work” refers to (a) Work not conforming to the Contract Documents or not meeting the requirements of any inspection, test or approval, or (b) Work itemized in a Punch List which the Contractor fails to complete or correct within a reasonable time after issuance of the Punch List by the Professional. DelayAny act or omission or other event that in any manner adversely affects or alters the schedule, progress or completion of all or any part of the Work. Delay is a generic term intended to include deferral, stoppage, slow down, interruption and extended performance, and all related hindrance, rescheduling, disruption, interference, inefficiency and productivity and production losses. *Department (DTMB)Department of Technology, Management and Budget of the State of Michigan. Director is the Director of the Department. Director-FA is the Director of DTMB Facilities and Business Services Administration. DivisionEach of the numbered, distinct parts (starting with Division 0) into which the Specifications are divided. DrawingsPart of the Contract Documents showing the Work. Drawings shall neither serve nor be used as Shop Drawings. Early (Late) DatesEarly (late) times of performance for the Activities. EmergencyA condition affecting the safety or protection of persons, or the Work, or property at or adjacent to the site. Fee for the Work Involved (Fee)A negotiated, percentage markup on the Cost of the Work Involved which is allowed to the Contractor for (a) reasonable administrative costs, and (b) negotiated, reasonable profit on the Cost of the Work Involved. General RequirementsDivision 1 of the Specifications.
ContractorPerson named "the Contractor" in Section 00500 Agreement with whom the Owner has entered into the Contract. Correction PeriodPeriod during which the Contractor shall, in accordance with the Contract Documents, (a) correct or, if rejected, remove and replace Defective Work, and (b) maintain warranties for materials and equipment in full force and effect. Cost of the Work InvolvedThe sum of all costs that would be, or actually were, necessarily incurred by the Contractor in providing any Work Involved with the related change, less the costs that would be, or would have been, incurred by the Contractor to provide such Work without the related change. CPM ScheduleComputerized, Activity-based Progress Schedule, using Critical Path Method (CPM) techniques, and accounting for the entire Work at a level of detail commensurate with the Progress Schedule requirements of the Contract Documents. Critical Path Method (CPM)The Critical Path Method of planning and scheduling. The term “Critical Path” denotes a sequence of Activities controlling achievement of a specified Contract Time. Date of Commencement of the Contract TimeThe date when the Contract Time starts to run.
Hazardous MaterialAsbestos, ACBMs, PCBs, petroleum products, such construction materials as paint thinners, solvents, gasoline, oil, etc., and any other like material the manufacture, use, treatment, storage, transportation or disposal of which is regulated by federal, State or local Laws governing the protection of public health, natural resources or the environment. Facilities and Business Services Administration-Entity in the Department of Technology, Management and Budget responsible for design, construction, and operations and maintenance of facilities and capital renewal. Facilities and Business Services Administration Representative-Designated State employee(s) (a) Responsible for directing and supervising the Professional’s services during the period allowed for completion of the Work; and/or (b) Acting as representative for the Owner and for the enforcement of the Contract Documents, approving payment to the Contractor and coordinating the activities of the State, Owner, Professional and Contractor. Law(s)Means federal, State and local statutes, ordinances, orders, rules and/or regulations. MCLThe Michigan Compiled Laws of the State of Michigan.
MICHSPEC DTMB
00020 2
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GLOSSARY
Means and MethodsIncludes means, methods, techniques, sequences and/or procedures applicable to the Work. Notice of AwardWritten notice accepting the Bid to the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder and designating the Contract Price (and establishing the Alternates accepted by the Owner). Notice to ProceedWritten notice authorizing the Contractor to proceed with the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, and establishing the Date of Commencement of the Contract Time. On-Site Inspection–The Professional’s on-site examination of the Contractor’s completed or in progress Work to determine and verify to the Facilities and Business Services Administration Representative that the quantity and quality of all Work is in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. OwnerThe State of Michigan, named "the Owner" in Section 00500 Agreement, with whom the Contractor has entered into the Contract and for whom the Work is to be provided. The State of Michigan includes its departments, agencies, boards, commissions, officers, employees and agents. Partial UseUse by the Owner of a designated portion of the Work before accomplishing Substantial Completion of the entire Work. Partial Use does not implicate or refer to Substantial Completion of the portion of the Work placed in use by the Owner. PersonIndividuals, partnerships, corporations, receivers, trustees, joint ventures and any combinations of any of them. Political SubdivisionAny county, city, village or other local unit of the State, including any agency, department or instrumentality of any such county, city, village or other local unit. PreAward ScheduleA Qualification Submittal required of the Apparent Low Bidder before Contract Award, and which is used by the Owner in the evaluation of the Apparent Low Bidder’s Bid. Professional Services Contractor (Professional)The Person or its authorized representative licensed to practice architecture and/or engineering, named as "Professional" in Section 00500 Agreement, who has the right and authority assigned in the Contract Documents. The term Professional includes the Professional's consultants practicing the disciplines required by the Contract Documents. If the Owner will function as the Professional, such information will be noted in Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions or at the pre-construction conference. Progress ScheduleWork Schedule that shows the Contractor's approach to planning, scheduling and execution of the Work and that accurately portrays completed Work as to sequencing and timing, as provided in the Contract Documents. ProjectThe total construction, which includes the Work and possibly other work, as indicated in the Contract Documents. Project Manual–The Book of Specifications, containing Division 0 of the Specifications and the technical Specifications. Provisionary AllowanceAn amount included within the Contract Price to reimburse the Contractor for the cost to furnish and perform Work that is uncertain, i.e., may not be required, or is of MICHSPEC DTMB
indeterminate scope, i.e., design information and quantities, complexity, etc. are neither shown nor detailed in the Contract Documents. Work authorized under any Provisionary Allowance may consist of (a) changes required by actual conditions, as determined by the Professional, that are incorporated into the Work in accordance with Section 00700 General Conditions, and (b) any other Work authorized and completed under the pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents. Unlike a Cash Allowance, payments under a Provisionary Allowance shall include not only the purchase/furnished cost of the materials and equipment involved, but also all related labor costs, Subcontract costs, construction equipment costs, general conditions costs and Fee, provided they are calculated in accordance with the requirements of Articles 10 and 11 of Section 00700 General Conditions. Public UtilityAny utility company, utility department or agency of a Political Subdivision, natural gas pipeline company, cable TV company, or any other owner/operator of utilities that are operated or maintained in, on, under, over or across public right-of-way or public or private easements and which is defined as “Public Utility” under the provisions of 1974 PA 53, as amended, MCL 460.701. Punch ListA list of minor items to be completed or corrected by the Contractor, any one of which do not materially impair the use of the Work, or the portion of the Work inspected, for its intended purpose. A Punch List shall be prepared by the Professional upon having made a determination that the Work, or portion of the Work inspected, is substantially complete and shall be attached to the respective certificate of Substantial Completion. Qualification SubmittalsData concerning a Bidder's qualifications and eligibility, as specified in the Bidding Requirements. RebidA revised or new Bid submitted by a Bidder on the Section 00300 Bid Summary and Bid Form and the Bid Form Attachments made available through post-Bid Addenda, in the event the Work is rebid without readvertising, as allowed by post-Bid Addenda. Record DocumentsDrawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Change Authorizations, Bulletins, inspection, test and approval documentation, photographs, written clarifications and interpretations and all other documents recording, or annotated to show, all revisions and deviations between the as-built installation and the Contract Documents, all approved Submittals and all clarifications and interpretations. RecordsBooks, reports, documents and other evidence relating to the bidding, award and furnishing and performance of the Work. Record ScheduleA Progress Schedule Revision Submittal returned to the Contractor as "Resubmittal Not Required," with or without comments or objections noted. *Recycled MaterialRecycled paper products, structural materials made from recycled plastics, rerefined lubricating oils, reclaimed solvents, recycled asphalt and concrete, recycled glass products, retreaded tires, ferrous metals containing recycled scrap metals and all other materials that contain (a) waste materials generated by a business or consumer, (b) materials that have served their intended purpose, and/or (c) materials that have been separated from solid waste for collection, recycling and disposition in the percentage determined by the State as provided by Law.
00020 3
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GLOSSARY
Request for PaymentThe form provided by the Owner (Payment Request DMB-440) to be used by the Contractor in requesting payment for Work completed, which shall enclose all supporting information required by the Contract Documents.
the items covered, after installation or incorporation into the Work, will conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design of the completed Work as a functioning whole as indicated in the Contract Documents.
* Field RepresentativeA DTMB State employee or consultant, acting under the direction of the Facilities and Business Services Administration Representative, providing on-site, periodic observation and documentation of the Work for compliance with the Contract Documents.
Substantial CompletionThe Work, or a portion of the Work designated in the Contract Documents as eligible for separate Substantial Completion, has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, to the extent that the Owner can use or occupy the entire Work, or the designated portion of the Work, for the use intended without any outstanding, concurrent Work at the site, except as may be required to complete or correct Punch List items. Prerequisites for Substantial Completion, over and above the extent of Work completion required, include (a) receipt by the Owner of operating and maintenance documentation, (b) all systems have been successfully tested and demonstrated by the Contractor for their intended use, and (c) the Owner having received all required certifications and/or occupancy approvals from the State and those Political Subdivisions having jurisdiction over the Work. Receipt of all certifications and/or occupancy approvals from those Political Subdivisions with jurisdiction in and of itself does not necessarily connote Substantial Completion.
Resident Project RepresentativeThe authorized representative of the Professional who is assigned to the site. Schedule of ValuesA schedule of pay items, which subdivides the Work into its various parts and which details, for each itemized part, cost and pricing information required for making payments for Work performed. The sum of all pay item costs in the Schedule of Values shall equal the Contract Price for the Work. Shop DrawingsIncludes drawings, diagrams, illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions and other data prepared by or for the Contractor to illustrate some part of the Work, or by a Supplier and submitted by the Contractor to illustrate items of material or equipment. Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control–The planning, design and installation of appropriate Best Management Practices designed and engineered specifically to reduce or eliminate the off-site migration of soils via water runoff, wind, vehicle tracking, etc. Soil erosion and sedimentation control in the State of Michigan is regulated under The Natural Resources Environmental Protection Act; Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control, 1994 PA 451, Part 91, as amended, MCL 324.9101 et seq. Soil erosion and sedimentation control associated with this Contract is monitored and enforced by the Department of Technology, Management and Budget, Facilities and Business Services Administration. SpecificationsParts of the Contract Documents organized into Divisions. "Technical Specifications" means Divisions of the Specifications consisting of technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship. StateThe State of Michigan in its governmental capacity, including its departments, agencies, boards, commissions, officers, employees and agents. Non-capitalized references to a state refer to a state other than the State of Michigan. *State Construction CodeThe Michigan State Construction Code Act, 1972 PA 230, as amended, MCL 125.1501 et seq. SubagreementA subcontract or purchase order awarding a part of the Work to a Subcontractor or Supplier. SubcontractorA Person having a Subagreement for providing labor at the site, or for providing labor at the site and furnishing materials and/or equipment for incorporation into the Work. SubmittalsIncludes technical Submittals, Progress Schedules and those other documents required for submission by the Contract Documents. The term "technical Submittal" includes Shop Drawings, brochures, samples, Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals, test procedures and any other Submittal the Contract Documents require the Contractor to submit to demonstrate how MICHSPEC DTMB
Supplementary ConditionsSection 00800 within Division 0 of the Specifications that amends and/or supplements Section 00700 General Conditions and other designated Contract Documents. Supplementary InstructionsSection 00120 within Division 0 of the Specifications that amends and/or supplements Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders and any other designated Bidding Requirement. SupplierA manufacturer or fabricator, or a distributor, material man or vendor representing a manufacturer or fabricator, who has a Subagreement for furnishing materials and/or equipment. TargetA point of progress for a key part of the Work, which is identified for monitoring progress of the Work. Target Times are not Contract Times. Total FloatNumber of Calendar Days by which the Work or any part of the Work may be delayed from its Early Dates without necessarily causing an overrun in a pertinent Contract Time. Total Float is by definition at least equal to Contract Float. Underground UtilitiesPipelines, piping, conduit, duct, cables, wells, tanks, tunnels and appurtenances, or other similar facilities, installed underground to convey or support conveyance of potable water, sprinkler or irrigation water, fire protection systems, electricity, gases, steam, petroleum products, sewerage and drainage removal, telephone, communications, cable TV, traffic or control systems. Unit Price Work, ContingentWork involving specified but undefined quantities (i.e., related Work quantities are not detailed in the Contract Documents) which when performed is measured by the Professional and paid using the measured quantities and unit prices contained in the Contract Documents. Performance of such Unit Price Work is contingent upon conditions encountered at the site, as determined and authorized by the Professional. Unit Price Work, SpecifiedWork of specified and defined quantities (i.e., quantities are detailed in, and can be taken-off from, the Contract Documents) that when performed is measured by the
00020 4
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GLOSSARY
Professional and paid based on the measured quantities and unit prices contained in the Contract Documents. Work (as in “the Work,” "the entire Work)The entire completed Construction required by the Contract Documents. The Work results from furnishing and performing all services, obligations, responsibilities, management, supervision, labor, materials, equipment, construction equipment, general conditions, permits, taxes, patent fees and royalties, testing, inspection and approval responsibilities, warranties, temporary facilities, small tools, field supplies, Bonds, insurance, mobilization, close-out, overhead and all connections, devices and incidental items of any kind or nature required and/or made necessary by the Contract Documents. Work Involved, any Work InvolvedExisting or prospective Work (a) reflected in any notice, proposal or claim, or (b) reflected in changes ordered or in process, or (c) affected by Delay. 1.1.2. Other defined terms used in Division 0 but not assigned intent and meanings in this Section 00020 Glossary have the intent and meanings set forth in MCL or Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions.
1.1.3. Terms defined in this Section 00020 Glossary and used in other Specifications and/or in the Drawings in lower cases, or as capitalized terms, have the intent and meanings assigned to them in this Section 00020 Glossary, if the context will permit. 1.2 Division 0 Rules of Construction: 1.2.1. Each Article in a Section in Division 0 contains “subarticles,” numbered as this sub-article 1.2 is numbered; “parts,” numbered as this part 1.2.1 is numbered, and “sub-parts,” all of which are considered "paragraphs." A reference to a paragraph means a reference to the sub-article, part or sub-part, or any combination of any of them, if the context will permit. 1.2.2. Any reference to an Article or a paragraph in a Section within Division 0 means a reference to an Article or a paragraph in the very Section in which the reference is made, unless that reference specifically names another Section. 1.2.3. Whenever the context of any provision requires, the singular number includes the plural number and vice versa, and the use of any gender includes all genders.
END OF SECTION 00020
MICHSPEC DTMB
00020 5
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
DOCUMENT 00 0115 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS GENERAL: G100 TITLE SHEET CIVIL: D100 SITE DEMOLITION PLAN C101 SITE LAYOUT AND UTILITY PLAN C102 SITE GRADING AND SESC PLAN C301 DETENTION POND CROSS SECTIONS C401 SITE DETAILS C402 SITE DETAILS DEMOLITION: D101 BASEMENT DEMOLITION PLAN D102 GROUND FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN ARCHITECTURAL: A101 BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN A102 FLOOR PLAN A103 ROOF PLAN AND DETAILS A104 COLD STORAGE PLAN AND SECTIONS A201 COLD STORAGE EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A401 WALL SECTIONS/ROOF DETAILS A501 INTERIOR WALL SECTIONS A601 DOOR/ ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE/ DOOR HEAD DETAILS A602 BATHROOM ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A701 BASEMENT REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A702 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN STRUCTURAL: S001 STRUCTURAL NOTES S101 FOUNDATION PLAN AND DETAILS S102 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S501 STRUCTURAL DETAILS FIRE PROTECTION: F101 FIRE PROTECTION PLAN PLUMBING: P101 PLUMBING DEMOLITION AND REVISED BASEMENT FLOOR PLANS P102 PLUMBING DEMOLITION MAIN LEVEL FLOOR PLAN P103 PLUMBING REVISED MAIN LEVEL FLOOR PLAN P201 PLUMBING DETAILS, NOTES, SYMBOLS, AND LEGEND
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
00 0115 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
MECHANICAL: M101 DEMOLITION AND REVISED HVAC BASEMENT PLAN M102 HVAC FLOOR PLAN M103 HYDRONIC FLOOR PLAN M104 REVISED HVAC FLOOR PLAN M105 REVISED HYDRONIC FLOOR PLAN M106 MECHANICAL ROOF PLAN M201 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES / DETAILS M202 MECHANICAL CONTROL DIAGRAMS ELECTRICAL: E100 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E101 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FLOOR PLANS E102 MAIN LEVEL LIGHTING DEMOLITION PLAN E103 BASEMENT ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN E104 MAIN LEVEL REVISED POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS PLAN E105 MAIN LEVEL REVISED LIGHTING PLAN AND COLD STORAGE POWER/LIGHTING PLAN E106 BASEMENT REVISED ELECTRICAL PLAN E201 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND DIAGRAMS E301 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM
END OF DOCUMENT 00 0115
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
00 0115 - 2
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SECTION 00100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS TABLE OF CONTENTS
Article
ARTICLE 1 BIDDING DOCUMENT INTERPRETATIONS Page
1.1. Section 00020 Glossary assigns specific intent and meanings to capitalized terms and to other defined terms used in Section 00030 Advertisement, this Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders and Section 00210 Information for Bidders. The Glossary also provides specific rules for construing any reference to any Article or paragraph that is made in this Section 00100.
1 BIDDING DOCUMENT INTERPRETATIONS
1
2 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
1
3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS; SITE CONDITIONS; SAFETY REQUIREMENTS; LAWS
2
4 INTERPRETATIONS; ADDENDA
3
5 BID SECURITY
4
6 CONTRACT TIME; LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
4
7 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
4
8 SUBCONTRACTORS
5
9 BID FORM AND BID FORM ATTACHMENTS
5
10 PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF BIDS
6
11 BID WITHDRAWAL; BID MODIFICATION
6
1.4. Neither the Owner nor Professional assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids. The Owner and Professional make Bidding Documents available only for obtaining Bids, and neither the Owner nor Professional grants a license for any other use of the Bidding Documents.
12 BID OPENING; OBJECTION TO THE AWARD
7
ARTICLE 2 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
13 BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN
7
14 AWARD OF THE CONTRACT
7
15 EXECUTION OF THE AGREEMENT
9
2.1. The Apparent Low Bidder shall submit to the Professional, within two (2) Business Days after receipt of the Professional’s request, Section 00430 List of Subcontractors. The Apparent Low Bidder also shall submit to the Professional, within ten (10) Calendar Days after the Professional’s request, a PreAward Schedule and those other Qualification Submittals noted in Sections 00410, 00420 and 00440. The Apparent Low Bidder may be required to attend a pre-award conference(s).
16 MOBILIZATION PAY ITEM
1.2. The deadlines and submission requirements imposed on the Bidders by the provisions of Articles 3 and 4 also shall apply to any prospective subcontractor or supplier seeking access to the site or needing to submit written questions or inquiries. 1.3. Except as otherwise noted, the deadlines and other requirements imposed upon the "Apparent Low Bidder" by the provisions of Articles 2, 5, 8 and 13 also shall apply to any other Bidder remaining or wishing to remain in contention for the award.
10
17 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL– 10 FINE FOR NON-COMPLIANCE __________________________________________________
2.2. The PreAward Schedule shall consist of six (6) blue line drawings of a time-scaled CPM Schedule or a Bar Chart Schedule, as designated by the Professional. The PreAward Schedule shall (a) identify start and completion dates for the Work in summary form, (b) show the sequencing in which the Bidder plans to perform the Work to conform to the Contract Times and sequences of Work indicated in or required by the Bidding Documents, and (c) include a plot with percentages of completion for the Work correlating to the start and completion dates.
STATE OF MICHIGAN MODEL Developed from FORMSPEC Michigan Model
The MICHSPEC 97.0820 Model Specifications, Sections 00020 through 00440, have been licensed to the State of Michigan, Department of Technology, Management and Budget (DTMB). Title to and use of these Specifications is strictly restricted. Except as authorized in writing by the Department of Technology, Management and Budget, Facilities and Business Services Administration, or as may be appropriate for their use in the bidding and execution of the Work, reproduction, translation or substantial use or quotation of any part of any of these Specifications beyond that permitted by the 1976 United States Copyright Act without prior written permission is unlawful. Provisions marked with an asterisk have been furnished by the DTMB or taken from DTMB provided contracts, and are excluded from this copyright limitation. Please, direct requests for
2.3. Unless otherwise determined by the Owner, in its sole discretion, failure, neglect or refusal by the Apparent Low Bidder to submit Qualification Submittals when and as requested justifies the Owner’s refusal to consider the Apparent Low Bidder's Bid and the Apparent Low Bidder's Bid Security will be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages. However, in the case of any other Bidder remaining or wishing to remain in contention for the award, such failure, neglect or refusal will not constitute grounds for forfeiting that other Bidder's Bid Security.
information about FORMSPEC™ to PMA Consultants LLC, Ann Arbor, MI (734-769-0530).
_________________________________________________
MICHSPEC DTMB
00100-1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS or Data, interpretations or opinions contained in those reports or drawings also shall be at the Bidder’s own risk. The Owner, Professional and their respective consultants assume no responsibility for any understanding reached or representation made about subsurface conditions and physical conditions of existing facilities, except as otherwise expressly shown in or represented by the Authorized Technical Data made available.
ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS; SITE CONDITIONS; SAFETY REQUIREMENTS; LAWS 3.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to: (a) examine the Bidding Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site and, if necessary, record conditions at the site (through logs/notes, photographs, video or any other means); (c) study and correlate the Bidder's observations with the Bidding Documents; and (d) submit written questions or inquiries about the Bidding Documents or the Work, as provided in Article 4, immediately after discovering any conflicts, ambiguities, errors or omissions in the Bidding Documents.
3.4.2. Section 00210 Information for Bidders also identifies additional reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and reference documents reflecting physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface facilities that have not been used by the Professional in the preparation of the Bidding Documents. Any such reports and documents are not part of the Bidding Documents, and are made available solely to allow Bidders to have access to the same information available to the Owner and Professional. Neither the Owner nor Professional warrants the accuracy or completeness of any such information nor do they warrant that Section 00210 Information for Bidders identifies all such existing relevant reports and/or documents.
3.2. It is also the responsibility of each Bidder, in the preparation of its Bid, to take those steps that are reasonably necessary to (a) ascertain and satisfy itself of the physical conditions under which the Work will be performed and the condition of existing facilities, including those which may not be a part of the Work, but could be affected by the performance of the Work, and (b) account for all general, local and prevailing conditions at or near the site that may in any manner affect the cost, schedule, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work. Examples of such conditions include, but are not limited to: (a) the nature and location of the Work; (b) conditions related to the transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials; (c) the availability and suitability of labor, materials, water, electric power, telephone, sanitary services and roads; (d) daily and monthly weather variations, including any related subsurface conditions, river stages, or similar conditions; (e) the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface conditions at the site, including but not limited to ground water table variations, and the location, configuration and condition of existing facilities and Underground Utilities; (f) the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during Work performance; (g) conditions related to maintaining the uninterrupted operation/occupancy of existing services or facilities; and (h) the extent to which the nature, characteristics and use of any adjacent or nearby lands, rights-ofway and easements, and facilities (in all cases, inclusive of real and personal property) may affect the Bidder’s activities.
3.5. Section 00210 Information for Bidders also identifies information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents or Underground Utility drawings about Underground Utilities. Such information and data about existing Underground Utilities is based on information and data obtained from record documents of previous construction or furnished to the Owner by the owners of those Underground Utilities or by others. 3.6. Section 00700 General Conditions contain provisions concerning (a) responsibilities for Underground Utilities, (b) changes that may be ordered because of incidents with differing site conditions, and (c) the adequacy and completeness of the Authorized Technical Data of subsurface conditions and existing subsurface and surface facilities made available to Bidders. 3.7. To the extent that any Bidder considers that additional Authorized Technical Data is necessary for determining its Bid, it is the responsibility of that Bidder to request from the Owner the necessary additional Authorized Technical Data. In the event the Owner does not have the requested additional Authorized Technical Data, it shall be the responsibility of the Bidder, at the Bidder's sole cost, to undertake reasonable examinations of the site and any other pertinent available information and data that the Bidder considers necessary for determining its Bid.
3.3. It is the responsibility of each Bidder to inform itself of, and the Bidder awarded the Contract shall comply with, all applicable Laws, including, but not limited to Laws affecting cost, schedule, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work. Examples of those Laws include, but are not limited to, those relating to nondiscrimination in employment, prevailing wages, protection of public and employee health and safety, environmental protection, building codes, fire protection, grading and drainage, use of explosives, vehicular traffic, restoration of lands and property under the control of the State or a Political Subdivision, taxes, permits and licensing.
3.8. If requested by a Bidder at least seven (7) Calendar Days before the date of Bid opening (or as otherwise agreed to by the Owner), the Owner will provide access to the site, when and as designated by the Owner, to allow that Bidder to conduct those reasonable explorations and tests that Bidder considers necessary for preparation and submission of the Bidder's Bid. Any such explorations and/or tests conducted by that Bidder shall comply with the requirements of the Owner, any Public Utilities involved and any Political Subdivisions with jurisdiction. If access to the site is granted, that Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition, to the Owner’s satisfaction, upon completion of those explorations and/or tests.
3.4. Section 00210 Information for Bidders, identifies (a) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions, and (b) drawings of physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface facilities that have been used by the Professional in the preparation of the Bidding Documents. Bidders may rely upon such expressly stated technical information and data contained in those reports which are expressly designated as Authorized Technical Data in Section 00210 Information for Bidders, but those reports and drawings are not part of the Bidding Documents.
3.9. The Bidder awarded the Contract shall be responsible for obtaining any lands, areas, properties, facilities, rights-of-way and easements, in addition to those furnished by the Owner, that the Bidder considers necessary for temporary facilities, storage, disposal of spoil or waste material or any other similar purpose. Neither the Owner nor Professional assumes any responsibility
3.4.1. Any conclusions or interpretations made by any Bidder based on such Authorized Technical Data shall be at the Bidder’s own risk. Reliance by any Bidder on any Non-technical Information MICHSPEC DTMB
00100-2
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
for site conditions at any lands, areas, properties, facilities, rightsof-way and easements obtained by any Bidder.
ARTICLE 4 INTERPRETATIONS; ADDENDA 4.1. All requests for clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents, all proposals for any modifications to the Bidding Documents, all requests for information and all other questions or inquiries about the Bidding Documents and/or the Work shall be submitted in writing to the Contact Person identified in Section 00030 Advertisement, Article 8. Requests or inquiries received less than seven (7) Calendar Days before the date of Bid opening will be answered only if (a) the response can be given through Addenda made available at least seventy-two (72) hours before Bid opening (counting Business Days only), (b) the Bid opening is postponed by Addendum, or (c) the Work is rebid without readvertising following the issuance of post-Bid Addenda.
*3.10. With respect to any earth disturbance associated with this Contract, the Bidder awarded the Contract shall comply with The Natural Resources and Environmental Protection Act; Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control, 1994 PA 451 Part 91, as amended, MCL 324.9101 et seq. Facilities and Business Services Administration is the designated “Authorized Public Agency” under the provisions of Section 9110 of 1994 PA 451, Part 91 as amended. 3.11. Each Bid shall include and be deemed to have included all (a) Michigan sales and use taxes and other similar taxes applicable to the Work that are required by Law as of the date of Bid opening, and (b) the cost of all permits, approvals, licenses and fees necessary for the commencement, prosecution and completion of the Work. Section 00700 General Conditions contain provisions concerning responsibilities of the Bidder for sales and use taxes and other similar taxes and for obtaining permits, approvals, licenses and fees applicable to the Work.
4.2. Any interpretation or clarification, modification to the Bidding Documents (whether by correction, addition, deletion or other revision) and/or information given will be binding only if given by Addenda. Interpretations, clarifications, corrections, additions, deletions or other revisions or information given orally or in any other manner are not binding on the Owner and if relied upon by any Bidder, shall be relied upon at the Bidder’s own risk. Addenda will be sent by registered mail or private carrier or by FAX to all parties who, according to the Professional’s records, have obtained a set of the Bidding Documents and has furnished to the Professional an address and FAX number for receiving Addenda.
3.12. To the extent the Owner or Professional has knowledge of other work at the site, which may be ongoing during the period allowed for the Work, the Bidding Documents shall identify such other work. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall evaluate: (a) the effect that any such other work operations (e.g., dewatering, blasting, etc.) may have on the Work, (b) related conditions and sequences of Work contained in the Bidding Documents, (c) the requirements for coordination and cooperation between the Work and other work, and (d) related Contract Times.
4.3. In the Owner’s sole discretion, subsequent to the opening of Bids, post-Bid Addenda may be issued setting a new date for the receipt and opening of sealed Rebids. 4.4. Any quantities of Unit Price Work given on the Bid Form, whether detailed in the Drawings or Specifications or contingent upon actual conditions, are approximate only, and are to be used solely for comparing Bids and establishing the Contract Price. Neither the Owner nor Professional represents that the actual quantity for any item of Unit Price Work performed will equal the quantity given. Payments will be made only for actual quantities of Unit Price Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Actual quantities of Unit Price Work may overrun or underrun those in the Bid Form without necessarily invalidating the unit prices bid (except as provided in paragraph 10.6 of Section 00700 General Conditions).
3.13. The submission of a Bid constitutes a binding representation by the Bidder that: (a) the Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article and the Bidding Documents; (b) the Bidder has examined and agrees with the Progress Schedule requirements contained in the Specifications, including, but not limited to, requirements concerning the administration of early completion schedules; (c) without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding Documents and in accordance with those Means and Methods indicated in or required by the Bidding Documents; and (d) the Bidder considers the Bidding Documents to be sufficient in scope and detail to indicate a clear understanding of all terms and reasonably foreseeable conditions applicable to the Work, and how such terms and conditions may affect the cost, schedule, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work.
ARTICLE 5 BID SECURITY 5.1. Bid Security shall be made payable to the "State of Michigan" in the form of a certified or cashier's check or money order drawn upon a bank insured by an agency of the Federal Government, or consist of a duly executed Bid Bond. A Bid Bond shall be duly executed by the Bidder and by a surety authorized to do business in the State by the Department of Energy, Labor and Economic Growth and listed on the current U.S. Department of the Treasury Circular 570. Bidders shall attach a certified copy of Power of Attorney to sign Bid Bonds as the Attorney-in-Fact. Copies of the current Circular listing of approved bonding/insurance companies and interim changes may be obtained through the Internet web site http://www.fms.treas.gov/c570/c570.html.
3.14. Any failure of a Bidder to take the actions described and acknowledged in this Article will not relieve that Bidder of the responsibility for (a) properly estimating the difficulty, cost of and schedule for successfully performing and furnishing the Work, or (b) upon award, performing and furnishing the Work successfully at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. 3.15. Neither the Owner nor Professional assumes any responsibility for any conclusions or interpretations made by any Bidder based on the information made available by the Bidding Documents. Nor does the Owner or Professional assume any responsibility for any understanding reached or representation made about conditions that may in any way affect cost, schedule, progress, furnishing or performance of the Work, unless that understanding or representation is expressly stated or indicated in the Bidding Documents (including written Addenda).
MICHSPEC DTMB
5.2. Failure by a Bidder to enclose with its Bid a certified or cashier's check or money order or a duly executed Bid Bond shall disqualify that Bidder from any consideration for the award.
00100-3
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
Formatted: Underline
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
5.3. The Bid Security of the Bidder recommended for award will be retained until that Bidder has fulfilled all the following: (a) submitted Qualification Submittals and required information, (b) executed and delivered Section 00500 Agreement in triplicate, (c) delivered evidence of insurance, and (d) furnished the required Section 00610 Performance Bond and Section 00620 Payment Bond (including separate certifications). If that Bidder fails to do so when and as specified, the Director-FA may annul the Notice of Award recommendation, and the Bid Security of that Bidder will be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages. If the Owner incurs any collection costs in the enforcement of the Bid Security requirement, that Bidder and its surety, if any, agree jointly and severally to reimburse the Owner’s costs of collection, which shall include reasonable fees and charges of attorneys and others, court or hearing costs incurred with or without suit and interest.
to any such proposal by Addendum if, in the Professional’s judgment, the proposed material or equipment also may be used as a named or specified product. Lack of adequate time or information needed to evaluate a proposal, as determined in the sole discretion of the Professional, may justify its rejection. 7.2.1. Any such proposal shall clearly identify differences between the proposed and named or specified material or equipment and demonstrate objectively that the proposed material or equipment: (a) has the same essential characteristics of the item named or specified, (b) will equally perform the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design concept, (c) is suited to the same use as the item named or specified, (d) is at least of equal materials of construction, quality and necessary essential design features to the material or equipment named or specified, (e) conforms substantially to the desired detailed requirements, including, but not limited to durability, strength, appearance and aesthetics (if aesthetics are significant), safety, service, life, reliability, economy of operation and ease of maintenance, and (f) offers a proven record of performance and service for at least three (3) years before the date of Bid opening.
5.4. If the Apparent Low Bidder gives a certified or cashier's check or money order as Bid Security, and the Owner requests a certification by an acceptable surety stating that the Bidder will furnish the Section 00610 Performance Bond and Section 00620 Payment Bond if awarded the Contract, that Bidder shall furnish such certification within seven (7) Calendar Days after the Owner’s request.
7.2.2. Any such proposal shall further include (a) a list of installations that have been in service for at least three (3) years before the date of Bid opening (including the name, address and telephone number of a person familiar with and at the installation), and (b) sufficient drawings, diagrams, brochures, schedules, performance charts, instructions, samples, and other data as may be necessary to allow the Professional to make a determination.
5.5. The Bid Securities of the Apparent Low Bidder and of any other Bidder remaining in contention for the award will be retained by the Owner until the end of the period during which Bids shall remain open, or seven (7) Calendar Days after the Owner executes Section 00500 Agreement, whichever last occurs.
7.3. Each Bidder is responsible for notifying the Professional in writing if the Bidder knows or has reason to know that any material or equipment listed in Section 00440 Schedule of Materials and Equipment, which the Bidder intends to bid requires changes in the Work. Any such notice shall be provided no later than seven (7) Calendar Days before Bid opening. This requirement applies, but is not limited to changes in any testing requirements or Means and Methods indicated in or required by the Bidding Documents. However, this requirement is not intended to make the Bidder responsible for correcting design errors or omissions.
ARTICLE 6 CONTRACT TIME; LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 6.1. The Contract Times, i.e., the number of Calendar Days within, or dates by, which the Work or any part of the Work shall be completed, are specified in Section 00500 Agreement and may be supplemented, as provided in Section 00500 Agreement. As stated in Section 00500 Agreement, the Contract Times are of the essence of the Contract. If any Bidder believes that any of the Contract Times are insufficient or excessive, that Bidder shall advise the Owner in accordance with the requirements of Article 4. 6.2. Liquidated damages are specified in Section 00500 Agreement and may be supplemented, as provided in Section 00500 Agreement.
7.3.1. If any Bidder fails to provide such notice, and is awarded the Contract, that Bidder assumes responsibility for its proportionate share of any excess costs and Delay. Excess costs and Delay are those resulting from changes in the Work that would not have been incurred had that Bidder not failed to provide written notice to the Professional.
ARTICLE 7 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 7.1. Named or Specified Materials and Equipment Materials and equipment described in the Specifications by naming a brand, make, supplier or manufacturer or by using a specification shall establish a standard and shall be intended to convey function, necessary design features, general style, type, materials of construction, character and quality, serviceability and other essential characteristics. A number of Specifications using named or specified materials and equipment are listed in Schedule 1.6 of Section 00440 Schedule of Materials and Equipment.
7.4. Bidding Requirement For those Specifications listed in paragraph 1.6 of Section 00440 Schedule of Materials and Equipment, each Bidder shall bid one of the listed materials and equipment only. This requirement to not bid "or equal" or substitute materials and/or equipment for the listed Specifications applies even if the Bidding Documents state that an "or equal" or substitute may be furnished or used for any listed Specification. 7.5. Contract Condition For those Specifications listed in paragraph 1.6 of Section 00440 Schedule of Materials and Equipment, the Contract will be awarded on the basis that only listed named or specified materials and equipment will be furnished. If an "or equal" or a substitute may be furnished for any listed Specification, if acceptable to the Professional, application for acceptance will not be considered until after Contract Award.
7.2. Proposal for Adding Products by Addenda For those Specifications listed in paragraph 1.6 in Section 00440 Schedule of Materials and Equipment, the Professional will, up to fourteen (14) Calendar Days before the date of Bid opening stated in Section 00030 Advertisement, accept written proposals from non-named manufacturers and suppliers seeking to have the Professional add their products to Schedule 1.6. The Professional will consent MICHSPEC DTMB
00100-4
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (Section 00310 Bid Form and Section 00320 Noncollusion Affidavit) are inserted within the Bidding Documents. Bids shall be submitted on the unbound Section 00300 Bid Summary, Section 00300 Bid Form, Section 00310 Bid Bond (if a Bid Bond is given) and Section 00320 Noncollusion Affidavit, unless revised by Addendum. If revised by Addendum, the latest revision of the appropriate Bid Summary, Bid Form and/or Bid Form Attachment shall be used. All blank spaces shall be legibly and properly printed in ink or typed as required in these Instructions to Bidders and each form. All Bid prices shall be printed or typed in both words and figures.
7.6. Section 00700 General Conditions contains provisions requiring each Supplier (a) to be bound to the requirements of the Contract Documents, (b) to assume toward the Contractor all obligations that the Contractor assumes toward the Owner and Professional, and (c) to furnish Work under a Subagreement containing waiver of rights of subrogation provisions. ARTICLE 8 SUBCONTRACTORS 8.1. For each Division, Section of the Specifications and/or trade itemized in Section 00430 List of Subcontractors, the Apparent Low Bidder shall, when requested by the Professional, nominate the Subcontractor(s) to be awarded a Subagreement(s). When completing Section 00430, the Apparent Low Bidder shall provide licensing data for trades for which contractors' licensing is required and, if applicable, indicate minority, woman or handicapped status. One Subcontractor shall be nominated for each Specification or trade, unless the Apparent Low Bidder, directly or through a Subcontractor, intends to award more than one Subagreement for the listed Specification or trade.
9.2. Bids by individuals shall be signed by the person making that Bid, or the Bid shall enclose a Power of Attorney evidencing authority to sign the Bid in the individual's name. 9.3. Bids by partnerships shall be signed in the name of the partnership. The partner authorized to sign shall be named and sign where indicated. A certified copy of power of attorney authorizing that partner to bind all partners shall be attached to Section 00300 Bid Form. If a certified copy of the partnership’s certificate attached to Section 00300 Bid Form indicates that all partners have signed, no separate authorization is required.
8.2. If the Owner objects, for good cause, to any nominated Subcontractor, the Owner, before issuing the Notice of Award, may request replacement of that Subcontractor. In that event, the Apparent Low Bidder shall nominate a substitute Subcontractor or the Bidder itself, if qualified for the Work involved. In such case, there will be no extension in the Bid hold period nor any increase in the Bidder's Bid or Alternates. If the Bidder declines, that Bidder shall not be recommended for the award; however, such declining will not constitute grounds for forfeiting the Bidder's Bid Security.
9.4. Bids by corporations shall be signed in the legal corporate name. The signature of the president or authorized officer shall be entered below the corporate name, followed by the attesting signature of the corporation secretary or of an authorized officer other than the officer signing the Bid. A certified copy of a pertinent Board Resolution authorizing that individual to bind the corporation shall be attached to Section 00300 Bid Form.
8.3. Except as provided in paragraph 8.2, no removal or replacement of a nominated Subcontractor will be considered by the Owner, except for good cause. Before Contract Award, any removal, replacement or addition of a nominated Subcontractor shall be responsive to the requirements of the Bidding Documents only to the extent it permits the timely evaluation of the newly nominated Subcontractor. After Contract Award, if the Apparent Low Bidder, as the Contractor, nominates for the first time a Subcontractor for any Division, Specification and/or trade listed in Section 00430 List of Subcontractors, and the Owner objects for good cause to any such newly-nominated Subcontractor, the Contractor shall provide a replacement Subcontractor at no increase in Contract Price and/or Contract Time.
9.5. Bids by joint ventures shall be signed by all or one of the joint venturers. If not all joint venturers sign, a certified copy of Power of Attorney authorizing the individual(s) signing to bind all joint venturers shall be attached to Section 00300 Bid Form. If a certified copy of the joint venturer’s certificate attached to Section 00300 Bid Form indicates that all joint venturers have signed, no separate authorization is required. 9.6. The Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of all Addenda by completing the blank spaces in the table provided for that purpose in paragraph 2.1 of Section 00300 Bid Form. ARTICLE 10 PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF BIDS
8.4. Section 00700 General Conditions contains provisions requiring each Subcontractor (a) to be bound to the requirements of the Contract Documents, (b) to assume toward the Contractor all obligations that the Contractor assumes toward the Owner and Professional, and (c) to provide Work under a Subagreement containing waiver of rights of subrogation provisions.
* 10.1. CERTIFICATE OF AWARDABILITY: The Contractor must not discriminate on the basis of religion, race, color, national origin, age, sex, marital status, height, weight, arrest record or disability. Prior to the award of any Contract of $100,000.00 or more, the Michigan Department of Technology, Management and Budget (DTMB) Contract Compliance Representative will notify the Michigan Department of Civil Rights (DCR) Contract Compliance Representative, providing a bid tabulation and providing a description of the recommended awardee(s) including business(es)’ name, business(es)’ designated contact person, last four digits of company(ies)’ tax identification number, business(es)’ address, and business(es)’ contact person telephone number. In the event a contractor doesn’t possess a valid Certificate of Awardability and is the most qualified low bidder, the contractor must immediately submit, upon notification by DTMB, their application to DCR. DO NOT SUBMIT APPLICATION TO DCR UNLESS YOU ARE THE LOW BIDDER.
8.5. These provisions shall not be construed to create any third party beneficiary or joint employer status with respect to the Owner and/or Professional and any Subcontractor. Furthermore these provisions shall not be construed to create or impose any duty or liability on the Owner to exercise this authority for the benefit of any Bidder, nominated or newly nominated Subcontractor or any other third party. ARTICLE 9 BID FORM AND BID FORM ATTACHMENTS 9.1. A second, unbound set of the Section 00300 Bid Summary, Section 00300 Bid Form and Bid Form Attachments MICHSPEC DTMB
00100-5
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS full for, all services, obligations, responsibilities, management, supervision, labor, materials, devices, equipment, construction equipment, general conditions, permits, patent fees and royalties, testing, inspection and approval responsibilities, warranties, temporary facilities, small tools, supplies, Bonds, insurance, taxes, mobilization, close-out, overhead and profit and all connections, appurtenances and any other incidental items of any kind or nature, as are necessary to complete the Work, in a neat, first quality, workmanlike and satisfactory manner in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications and as otherwise required to fulfill the requirements of the Bidding Documents.
*10.2. The time required by the Michigan Department of Civil Rights to process applications for Certificate of Awardabiltiy varies as a function of the Department's total workload. Communications concerning Certificates of Awardability should be directed to: Michigan Department of Civil Rights Business and Community Affairs Cadillac Place 3054 West Grand Boulevard, Suite 3-600 Detroit, Michigan 48202 Telephone: (313) 456-3822 Fax: (313) 456-3826
10.9. Neither the Section 00300 Bid Form nor any Bid Form Attachment made available to the Bidders and submitted with the Bid shall be altered in any way. Bids shall not contain any qualifications or conditions or any recapitulations of the Work whatsoever. No Alternate will be considered, unless any such Alternate is itemized in paragraph 6.2 Schedule of Alternates in Section 00300 Bid Form and specified in the Bidding Documents.
10.3. Bids shall be hand-delivered or sent by mail to the location and address specified in Article 1 of Section 00030 Advertisement. If the Bid is sent by mail, the envelope containing the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope labeled "Sealed Bid Enclosed." Bids submitted orally or by telephone, telegraph, FAX, e-mail or other electronic media are invalid and will be rejected without consideration.
10.10. Before and after Bid submission, and before the time for receiving Bids has expired, any Bidder may alter or revise any price or information the Bidder has entered on its Bid Form or any Bid Form Attachments by: (a) crossing out the entry, (b) legibly printing in ink or typing the new price or information, and (c) placing the initials of the person who signs the Bid adjacent to each change. After Bid opening, the Owner may require a Bidder to verify any such alteration or revision. Ambiguities arising from any alterations or revisions made by any Bidder may be resolved against that Bidder, in the Owner’s sole discretion.
10.4. Each Bid shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed Bid envelope, marked with the Bidder’s name, address and telephone number; the name of the Work; and the Agency No., Index No. and File No. The opaque sealed Bid envelope shall contain the completed Section 00300 Bid Summary, Section 00300 Bid Form, Section 00310 Bid Bond, Section 00320 Noncollusion Affidavit and all other Bidder-provided documents (Drawings and Project Manual are not required).
10.11. Neither the Owner nor Professional assumes any responsibility for any costs any Bidder incurs, however caused, in preparing and submitting its Bid, in withdrawing its Bid, or in objecting to the award or to being disqualified for the award.
10.5. Each bid requesting the Qualified Disabled Veterans (QDV) preference, in accordance with Public Act 22 of 2010, MCL 18.1241(3), shall include a DD 214 Proof of Service and Discharge, a Veterans Administration rating decision letter, proof of disability (if the disability is not indicated on the DD 214), and appropriate legal documents setting forth the 51% natural persons QDV ownership.
10.12. In the event of any conflict between Attachment A To Section 00100–Bidder's Checklist and any requirements specified in any other parts of the Bidding Documents, the requirements of the Bidding Documents taken as a whole shall be binding on the Bidders.
10.6. If Unit Price Work is specified, the Bidder shall, for each Unit Price Work item listed separately on Article 6 of Section 00300 Bid Form, bid a unit price and enter, in the appropriate column, the computation of the respective quantity multiplied by the respective Bidder's bid unit price. Bid prices for each lump sum or "One Each" item listed on the Bid Form shall be printed or typed only in the appropriate "Bid Price" column. The Bidder shall show the sum representing the Bidder's Base Bid and, if Alternates are listed, the Bid prices for all Alternates, in the spaces provided for those purposes.
10.13. All bonds, insurance, Certificate of Awaradability, and other required documents shall be issued in the name of the bidder. ARTICLE 11 BID WITHDRAWAL; BID MODIFICATION 11.1. Any Bidder may withdraw its Bid before Bid opening by submitting to the Owner a document requesting the withdrawal in the manner in which a Bid shall be signed and submitted to the Owner. Withdrawal of a Bid before Bid opening will not prejudice the right of that Bidder to submit a new, modified Bid. After the time for receiving Bids has expired, the following will apply: (a) no Bid may be modified, altered or reformed, except to allow submittal of a Certificate of Awardability, as provided in paragraph 10.2, or to resolve irregularities on the Bid Form or Bid Form Attachments, as provided in paragraph 14.6, and (b) no Bid withdrawal will be accepted by the Owner, except as provided in paragraphs 11.2 through 11.6.
10.7. For each Cash Allowance, the Bidder shall include, within the Bid, all labor costs, construction equipment costs, insurance and Bond premiums and other general conditions costs and Fee (Bidder’s and Subcontractors’) to complete Work associated with the material, equipment or other designated item to be furnished under the Cash Allowance. For each Provisionary Allowance, the Bidder shall include, within the Bid, insurance premiums (not recoverable as labor burden) and Bond premiums required to complete Work that may be ordered under the Provisionary Allowance. Cash Allowances and Provisionary Allowances are defined in Section 00020 Glossary, and are further described in paragraph 10.7 of Section 00700 General Conditions.
11.2. After the time for receiving Bids has expired, no Bid may be withdrawn, unless that Bidder lodges a written claim of a mathematical or clerical error in the Bidder's Bid with the Owner
10.8. The Bidder's Base Bid and Alternate Bid prices shall include, and payment for completed Work shall be compensation in MICHSPEC DTMB
00100-6
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
within two (2) Business Days after the date of Bid opening. The claim shall describe in detail the mathematical or clerical error, include a signed affidavit stating the facts of the alleged error and request that the Bidder be released from the Bidder's Bid.
has been denied, the Owner will notify those Bidders of the time and date on which the Board's Building Committee will meet to consider the Director-FA's, or his/her designee’s recommendation of award. The objecting Bidder and the Apparent Low Bidder will be given an opportunity to be heard at the Building Committee meeting and, at the discretion of the Board, at any subsequent Board meetings. The Building Committee and Board, at its discretion, will review or hear the protest under such terms and conditions as either deems proper.
11.3. If any Bidder's claim to withdraw its Bid due to an alleged mathematical or clerical error is timely filed, the DirectorFA, or his/her designee, will determine the validity of the claim and, as he/she deems necessary within his/her sole discretion, will provide an opportunity to the Bidder making the withdrawal to present its verification claim at a hearing/review session within ten (10) Calendar Days after the Owner received the claim.
12.5. Upon reviewing the protest, the Building Committee and/or the Board will either (a) dismiss the protest, or (b) uphold the protest and send the Bid back to the Director-FA, or his/her designee, for a new Bid evaluation or rebid, consistent with the determination of the Building Committee or Board's findings. The decision of Board as to the protest shall be final and binding.
11.4. At the Bid withdrawal claim review, the Director-FA, or his/her designee shall, within his/her discretion, informally hear testimony and receive evidence as to whether (a) the Bid contains an obvious mathematical or clerical error not involving lack of good faith or fair dealing, (b) the error is subject to objective certification and is of such grave consequences that to enforce the Contract would be unconscionable, (c) the error relates to a material feature of the Contract, and (d) the error was not caused in any way by the Bidder's violation of positive legal duty or culpable negligence.
ARTICLE 13 BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN 13.1. Bids shall remain open for acceptance by the Owner for no less than the period during which Bids shall remain valid (i.e., the Bid hold period) stated in Section 00030 Advertisement.
11.5. Upon completion of the claim review process and before any award recommendation, the Director-FA, or his/her designee, will enter findings and render a determination on the Bidder's withdrawal claim. The Owner will notify the Bidder within a reasonable time after such determination.
13.2. The Owner, by written notice, may elect to request the Apparent Low Bidder and any other Bidder remaining or wishing to remain in contention for the award to hold their Bids beyond the Bid hold period. Any such Bidder who fails or refuses to agree to the Owner-requested extension may be disqualified for further consideration for the award. However, no such Bidder shall forfeit the Bidder’s Bid Security due to its failure or refusal to hold its Bid.
11.6. If the Director-FA, or his/her designee, concurs with the Bid withdrawal claim and the Owner suffers no serious prejudice, except loss of bargain, the Owner will allow the Bidder to withdraw its Bid will return the Bidder's Bid Security within a reasonable time. However, that Bidder will not be allowed to submit another Bid for the Work. The decision of the Director-FA, or his/her designee, shall be final and binding on any such Bidder.
13.3. Any such Bid hold extension request by the Owner and consent by any Bidder shall be based upon no increase in (a) the Bidder's Base Bid, (b) any of the Bidder’s Alternate Bid Prices, and (c) any Contract Times stated in Calendar Days. However, in the event none of the Bidders involved consent to extending their Bids, as conditioned in this paragraph, the Owner will issue a postBid Addendum specifying an additional Alternate for the sought extension in the Bid hold period.
ARTICLE 12 BID OPENING; OBJECTION TO THE AWARD 12.1. Each Bidder bears sole responsibility for delivering its Bid to the address, before the closing time for receipt of Bids designated in Section 00030 Advertisement. Any Bid received after the closing time will not be considered. Any uncertainties about whether a Bid was submitted in time may be resolved against that Bidder, in the Owner’s sole discretion.
ARTICLE 14 AWARD OF THE CONTRACT 14.1. If the Owner elects to award the Contract, the Owner will make the award to the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder who submits a Bid that conforms in all material respects with the requirements of the Bidding Documents, as determined solely by the Owner’s and Professional’s evaluation of the Section 00300 Bid Form, Bid Form Attachments, Bidder-provided documents and Bidder Qualification Submittals received in a timely basis.
12.2. Within reasonable time after the date of Bid opening, the Owner will make available a “Bid tabulation” listing the Bids opened and the Apparent Low Bidder. If any Bidder listed in the Bid tabulation has any objection to the Apparent Low Bidder, the objecting Bidder shall file a written protest with the Owner within seven (7) Calendar Days after the date of Bid opening. The protest shall describe in detail the basis for the protest and request a determination under this Article.
14.1.1. Determination of the lowest Bidder shall be on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and any additive and deductive Alternates the Owner accepts. Alternates shall be accepted in the order listed in paragraph 6.2 Schedule of Alternates in Section 00300 Bid Form only. The Owner will accept an Alternate only if all other previously listed Alternates are also accepted, unless acceptance by the Owner of Alternates in a different order does not affect determination of the lowest Bidder in any way.
12.3. If a written protest is timely filed, the Director-FA, or his/her designee, will review the protest and if he/she determines in his/her sole discretion that a claim review process is necessary, such proceeding shall be conducted within ten (10) Calendar Days after receipt of the written protest.
14.1.2. For the purpose of determining the lowest, responsive bid, when a Qualified Disabled Veterans (QDV) preference is requested, 10% of the lowest responsive bid (the bid that would otherwise receive the contract award if the preference were not being considered) will be deducted from all QDV bids. If
12.4. The Owner will notify the Bidders involved within a reasonable time of the Director-FA's, or his/her designee’s, recommendation to dismiss or uphold the protest. If the protest MICHSPEC DTMB
00100-7
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
the low responsive QDV bid, less the 10% preference, is less than the lowest responsive bid, then the QDV bid will be declared the official lowest, responsive bid. The original QDV bid amount will be the basis of the contract award.
14.5. Except in circumstances leading to a determination obviously in error or inconsistent with the Bidding Documents, irregularities on any Bid shall be resolved using the rules provided in paragraph 14.6. Except as stated in paragraph 14.6(e), any Bid Form and Bid Form Attachment having any such irregularity shall be modified, altered or revised to reflect the resolution of the irregularity, however, no Bidder-provided sum or extension shall be modified, altered or revised and the Bidder’s Bid shall be binding on the Bidder and the Bidder's surety, subject to the provisions governing Bid withdrawals stipulated in Article 11.
14.1.3. Bid irregularities with respect to the Bidding Documents, for which corrective action is not already provided in paragraph 14.6 or elsewhere in the Bidding Documents, may be waived at the sole discretion of the Owner, unless the irregularity was due to the Bidder’s lack of good faith or fair dealing, or where the waiver would lead to a determination obviously in error or inconsistent with the Bidding Documents.
14.6. The following irregularities on any Bid Form or Bid Form Attachment shall be resolved as follows: (a) between words and figures, the words shall be used; (b) between any sum, computed by the Bidder, and the correct sum, the sum computed by the Bidder shall be used; (c) between the product, computed by the Bidder, of any quantity and bid unit price and the correct product of the unit price and the quantity of Unit Price Work, the product extended by the Bidder shall be used; (d) between a stipulated Allowance and the amount entered, the Allowance shall be used; (e) any mobilization pay item exceeding the maximum specified shall be ignored and the Bid shall remain unchanged; (f) if any Bidder fails or neglects to bid a unit price for an item of Unit Price Work but shows a "Bid Price" for that item, the missing unit price shall be computed from the respective quantity and the Bid Price shown; (g) if any Bidder fails or neglects to show a "Bid Price" for an item of Unit Price Work but bids a unit price, the missing Bid Price shall remain as “zero”; and (h) if any Bidder fails or neglects to enter a Bid price in both words and figures, the Bid price printed or typed, whether in words or figures, shall be used.
14.1.4. For Bids over $100,000.00, Bidders that self-certify to be a Michigan business shall be given a preference over an out-of state Bidder in the same manner in which an out-of-state Bidder would be preferred in its home state. Bidders that neither selfcertify as a Michigan business in their Bid nor authorize the Michigan Department of Treasury to release information necessary to verify entitlement will be deemed to have waived their right to claim entitlement to any preference. 14.2. No Bidder shall be considered responsible under the requirements of the Bidding Documents, unless that Bidder delivers the information required in paragraph 2.1 that the Owner considers necessary to the evaluation of the Bid. 14.3. The following may be considered examples of sufficient grounds for determining that a Bidder is not responsible, or for objecting to any of the Bidder's Subcontractors (even if holding a valid license) or Suppliers: *(a) being listed on the Michigan Department of Labor's register of employers who have been found in contempt of court by a Federal Court of Appeals for failure to correct an unfair labor practice as prohibited by Section 8 of Chapter 372 of the National Labor Relations Act, 29 U.S.C. 158 (1980 PA No. 278, as amended, MCL 423.321 et seq.); *(b) being debarred from participation in the bid process pursuant to Section 264 of 1984 PA 431, as amended, MCL 18.1264, or debarred or suspended from consideration for award of contracts by any other State or any federal Agency; (c) a felony conviction in any state (including this State) within the last three (3) years before the date of Bid opening; (d) lack of adequate experience or demonstrated qualifications or capability to perform the trades or classifications of the Work specified in the Bidding Documents; (e) reasonable doubt concerning the ability to maintain adequate construction equipment, quality control, schedule control or financing to meet contractual obligations under the Bidding Documents; (f) a previous termination for cause by the Owner within the last three (3) years before Bid opening; *(g) failure to provide the Bidder's Certificate of Awardability as issued by the Michigan Department of Civil Rights (for contracts over $100,000.00); (h) failure to comply with all requirements for foreign corporations; (i) concealment, misrepresentation or misstatement of any material facts; or (j) failure to pay any federal, State or local taxes.
14.7. If there are reasonable grounds for believing that collusion or unlawful agreements exist between any Bidders, that a Bidder is interested in more than one Bid, or that any Bids are not genuine, those Bidders will be disqualified and their Bids will be rejected without consideration. 14.8. All costs of the Bidder awarded the Contract and that are incurred in responding to requests from the Owner or Professional, whether or not sufficient, shall neither justify any increase in Contract Price or Contract Time nor provide any basis for subsequent consideration by the Owner of a proposal or claim for any increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. *14.9. Michigan and Recycled Products The Bidder awarded the Contract and all Subcontractors and Suppliers shall use (a) Michigan-made products whenever possible where price, quality and performance are equal to or better than non-Michigan products, and (b) supplies, materials and equipment made from Recycled Materials if there is a readily identifiable source or market as determined by the Director-FA and the cost does not exceed one hundred ten percent (110%) of supplies, materials or equipment not containing Recycled Materials (Sections 261 and 261a of the Management and Budget Act, 1984 PA 431, as amended, MCL 18.1261 and MCL 18.1261a).
14.4. If the Owner, either through the Director-FA, or his/her designee, or the Board, intends to disqualify the Apparent Low Bidder, written notice of the impending disqualification will be provided by the Owner (including reasons for the disqualification) to that Bidder and those Bidders remaining under consideration for the award. If the disqualified Bidder has any objection to the disqualification, that Bidder shall, within two (2) Business Days, file a written protest, as provided in paragraph 12.2, and follow the protest procedures in paragraphs 12.3 through 12.5. The decision of the Board shall be final and binding on the disqualified Bidder. MICHSPEC DTMB
*14.10. Subcontractor and Supplier Businesses Owned by Minorities, Women and Persons with Physical or Mental Disabilities Bidders are urged to utilize as Subcontractors and Suppliers, businesses owned by minorities, women and persons with physical or mental disabilities. For assistance in locating and identifying certified businesses, contact the Michigan Department of Civil Rights, Business and Community Affairs, Cadillac Place, 3054 W. Grand Boulevard, Suite 3-600, Detroit, MI 48202, 1-800-482-3604.
00100-8
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS return to the Owner the executed Section 00500 Agreement, Section 00610 Performance Bond and Section 00620 Payment Bond forms, evidence of original certificates of insurance and any other documents required for submission by the Notice of Award.
*14.11. Unfair Labor Practice - Bidders who have been found in contempt of court by a Federal Court of Appeals on not less than three occasions involving different violations during the preceding seven (7) years for failure to correct an unfair labor practice prohibited by Section 8 of Chapter 372 of the National Labor Relations Act, 29 U.S.C. 158 are not eligible to be awarded the Contract. A register of employers in violation of this requirement is compiled by the Michigan Department of Energy, Labor and Economic Growth pursuant to 1980 PA 278, MCL 423.321 et seq. Further, the Bidder awarded the Contract shall not use any Subcontractors or Suppliers on the Work whose name appears on the register. According to Section 4 of 1980 PA 278, any contract entered into by the State may be declared void and rescinded to the extent the Bidder awarded the Contract or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, or Supplier awarded Work under the Contract subsequently appears in the register compiled by the Department of Consumer and Industry Services.
15.3. Evidence of insurance shall consist of certificates of insurance confirming that the policies of insurance that the Contractor has obtained, including the limits of coverage and endorsements provided, are in compliance with the insurance requirements specified in paragraphs 7.4 through 7.7 of Section 00700 General Conditions. Certificates of insurance shall contain a statement confirming that coverage will not be canceled, adversely changed or renewal refused until at least thirty (30) Calendar Days' prior written notice has been delivered or mailed to the Owner and Contractor. 15.4. The Owner will execute the Section 00500 Agreement and compile three (3) full sets of the Contract Documents upon two conditions: (a) receipt of the executed Section 00500 Agreement, Section 00610 Performance Bond and Section 00620 Payment Bond (with each Bond enclosing a separate certified copy of Power of Attorney and a separate certificate of principal) and evidence of insurance; and (b) a determination by the Owner that the Section 00610 Performance Bond and Section 00620 Payment Bond, required certifications and evidence of insurance received conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and are acceptable to the Owner.
*14.12. Nondiscrimination The Bidder awarded the Contract and each Subcontractor and Supplier awarded a Subagreement covenants that it will comply with the nondiscrimination requirements described in paragraphs 7.12.1 through 7.12.3 of Section 00700 General Conditions. *14.12.1. A breach of the covenants set forth in paragraph 7.12 of Section 00700 General Conditions shall be regarded as a material breach of the Contract. *14.12.2. The Bidder awarded the Contract shall include or incorporate by reference paragraph 14.12.1 (above) and the provisions of paragraphs 7.12.1 through 7.12.3 of Section 00700 General Conditions in every Subagreement, unless exempted by rules, regulations or orders of the Michigan Civil Rights Commission. Each Subagreement shall provide that those provisions shall be binding upon the Subcontractor or Supplier.
15.5. Each full set of the executed Contract Documents shall consist of: (a) two (2) or more volumes containing the executed Agreement (conformed Section 00500); executed Performance and Payment Bond and certifications (conformed Section 00610 and Section 00620); the Contractor’s Bid Form and Noncollusion Affidavit (conformed Sections 00300 and 00320) and Certificate of Awardability; and the remainder of the Bidding Documents, including Addenda; and (b) a separate volume with Qualification Submittals submitted by the Contractor that the Owner, in its sole discretion, chooses to include as part of the Contract Documents. The Contractor will receive one full set of the executed Contract Documents with the Notice to Proceed or at the pre-construction conference.
*14.13. Bidders are further directed to Article 7 of Section 00700 General Conditions for terms and conditions concerning the following Michigan legal requirements applicable to this Contract: (a) Laws and permits, paragraph 7.1, (b) taxes, paragraph 7.2, (c) safety and protection, paragraph 7.3, (d) unfair labor practice, paragraph 7.10, (e) Michigan Right-to-Know Law, paragraph 7.11, and (f) Michigan residency for employees, paragraph 7.13.
15.6. Bid prices in the "Schedule of Change Order Prices" on the Contractor’s Bid Form accepted by the Owner upon evaluation of the Contractor’s Bid will be incorporated into the Contract as provided in paragraph 3.2 of Section 00500 Agreement.
ARTICLE 15 EXECUTION OF THE AGREEMENT 15.1. Upon acceptance of a Bid for the Work by the Board or by the Director of the Department of Technology, Management and Budget, the Director-FA or his/her designate will send the Notice of Award to the Bidder awarded the Contract. The Notice of Award will (a) designate the Contract Price and itemize the Alternates that the Owner, in its sole discretion, has accepted, (b) enclose completed, unsigned Section 00500 Agreement forms in triplicate and blank Section 00610 Performance and Section 00620 Payment Bond forms, and (c) outline the procedures to be followed and information to be provided by the Contractor for execution of Section 00500 Agreement.
15.7. The Notice to Proceed shall be authorized by the Director-FA or his/her designee. Subject to the provisions of Article 13 and compliance with paragraphs 15.2 through 15.4, the Notice to Proceed shall designate a Date of Commencement of the Contract Time no later than sixty (60) Calendar Days after the date ending the Bid hold period, or thirty (30) Calendar Days after receipt by the Owner of the executed Section 00500 Agreement and acceptable, executed Section 00610 Performance Bond and Section 00620 Payment Bond, whichever last occurs, unless otherwise directed in writing by the Owner.
15.2. Unless otherwise designated in the Notice of Award, within fifteen (15) Calendar Days after receipt of the Notice of Award, the Bidder recommended for award shall (a) sign Section 00500 Agreement, in triplicate; (b) execute Section 00610 Performance Bond and Section 00620 Payment Bond (and attach to each Bond separate, certified copy of Power of Attorney); and (c) MICHSPEC DTMB
15.8. Within fifteen (15) Calendar Days after receiving the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner any additional Change Order cost and pricing data requested with the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor’s submittal shall be itemized in a breakdown acceptable to the Owner, and shall be certified as 00100-9
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
accurate, current and complete by a duly authorized financial representative of the Contractor. The Contractor shall meet with the Owner to review the cost and pricing data submittal. The Owner shall incorporate into the Contract Documents any acceptable cost and pricing data by Change Authorization issued within a reasonable time after the Notice to Proceed. ARTICLE 16 MOBILIZATION PAY ITEM 16.1. The mobilization pay item, if designated in the Specifications and/or the Bid Schedule in Section 00300 Bid Form, shall be intended to cover, at least in part, up-front costs incurred by the Contractor from Contract Award until sixty (60) Calendar Days after the Contractor starts the Work. Allowable mobilization items shall be as itemized in the Schedule of Values approved by the Professional, and may include costs incurred by the Contractor (a) in establishing temporary site offices and other facilities specified in the Specifications, (b) in obtaining permits required to commence the Work, (c) for premiums for the required Section 00610 Performance Bond and Section 00620 Payment Bond, (d) for insurance obtained by the Contractor to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and (e) in complying with the Revision 0 Schedule and Cost Submittal requirements. 16.2. Total payments to the Contractor under the mobilization pay item shall not exceed four percent (4%) of the Base Bid, unless otherwise expressly provided in the Bidding Documents. If the Contractor incurs costs, which the Contractor considers within the scope of the mobilization pay item, in excess of the four percent (4%) limitation, those excess costs will not be reimbursed under the mobilization pay item and will be deemed to have been included in other parts of the Contractor’s Bid. 16.3. To the extent practicable, the basis of measurement for payment shall be proof of actual payment by the Contractor. Where actual payment by the Contractor does not apply, as in the case of premiums for the Section 00610 Performance Bond, the Section 00620 Payment Bond and the insurance policies the Contractor is required to furnish under the provisions of Article 15, or in connection with the Contractor costs to comply with the Revision 0 Progress Schedule and Cost Submittal requirements of the Contract Documents, the basis of measurement for payment shall be as stipulated in the Schedule of Values approved by the Professional. Payments to the Contractor shall be based on the requirements of the Bidding Documents, subject to the following: 16.3.1. Approval by the Professional of the Schedule of Values (required by paragraph 12.1 of Section 00700 General Conditions) shall be a condition precedent to making any payment under the mobilization pay item. Partial payments shall be based on the breakdown itemized in the Schedule of Values and the extent of completion, as determined by the Professional.
ARTICLE 17 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL -–FINE FOR NON-COMPLIANCE 17.1. All Work within this Contract must comply with the applicable soil erosion and sedimentation control rules and regulations (Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control – 1994 PA 451, Part 91, as amended, MCL 324.9101 et seq.) and specific provisions for same within the Contract Documents. Soil erosion and sedimentation control will be monitored and enforced by the Department of Technology, Management and Budget, Facilities and Business Services Administration. 17.2. Soil erosion and sedimentation control on Department Projects will be monitored and enforced by Facilities and Business Services Administration through the review of Contractor implementation plans and site inspections by Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Unit personnel and/or Facilities and Business Services Administration Resident Inspectors. 17.2.1. In the event, the Owner determines through site inspections by the Facilities and Business Services Administration Representative or by notification by regulatory authorities that the Contractor has not met the soil erosion requirements of the Project and/or is in violation of the applicable soil erosion and sedimentation control statutes, the Contractor shall be notified in writing and stop work orders may be issued by Facilities and Business Services Administration in conjunction with paragraph 2.3 of Section 00700 General Conditions. 17.3. In the event, the Owner determines through site inspections by the Facilities and Business Services Administration Representative or by notification by regulatory authorities that the Contractor has not met the soil erosion requirements of the Project and/or is in violation of the applicable soil erosion and sedimentation control statutes, the Contractor shall be notified in writing and corrective actions undertaken by Facilities and Business Services Administration in conjunction with paragraph 9.4 of Section 00700 General Conditions. 17.4. In the event, the Contractor fails to respond to written notice from Facilities and Business Services Administration regarding noncompliance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and/or soil erosion and sedimentation control regulations applicable to this Work, Facilities and Business Services Administration has the right to assess a fine to the Contractor. Fines shall be in addition to any other remediation costs or liquidated damages applicable to the Project and may exceed the value of the Contract.
16.3.2. Full payment of the amount corresponding to the Revision 0 Schedule and Cost Submittals shall be paid by with the Request for Payment following return to the Contractor of the Revision 0 Submittal, or Revision 0A Submittal (i.e., first resubmission), Revision 0B Submittal (i.e., second resubmission), etc. of the Progress Schedule marked "Resubmittal Not Required."
MICHSPEC DTMB
00100-10
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SECTION 00100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
END OF SECTION 00100
MICHSPEC DTMB
00100-11
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
ATTACHMENT A TO SECTION 00100
ATTACHMENT A TO SECTION 00100 BIDDER’S CHECK LIST PROFESSIONAL Paradigm Design, Inc. WORK
Armory Modifications
AGENCY No.
511 INDEX No. 13721,13921 FILE No. 511/13007.CAK
________________________________________________________________________________________________________ BEFORE BID OPENING: May 14, 2014 Due date for delivery to the Professional of written proposals seeking to have the Professional consent to naming additional materials or equipment by Addenda. (Reference: Section 00100, Paragraph 7.2). May 25, 2014 Bidder inquiries received after this date will not be answered, unless answered through Addenda issued at least seventy-two (72) hours before Bid opening (Business Days only), the Bid opening is postponed by Addendum, or the Work is rebid following post-Bid Addenda. (Reference: Section 00100, paragraph 4.1). CONTENTS IN AND MARKING OF OPAQUE SEALED BID ENVELOPE (ITEMS 1 THROUGH 6 BELOW): NOTE 1: THE BIDDER SHALL USE THE UNBOUND BLANK BID SUMMARY, BID FORM AND BID FORM ATTACHMENTS INCLUDED WITH THE BIDDING DOCUMENTS, UNLESS REVISED BY ADDENDUM, IN WHICH CASE THE LATEST REVISION OF THE BID SUMMARY, BID FORM AND/OR BID FORM ATTACHMENTS ISSUED BY ADDENDUM SHALL BE USED. NOTE 2: THE BIDDER IS NOT REQUIRED TO REMOVE THE BID SUMMARY, BID FORM AND BID FORM ATTACHMENTS FROM THE PROJECT MANUAL. THE BIDDER IS NOT REQUIRED TO INSERT THE PROJECT MANUAL OR DRAWINGS IN THE SEALED BID ENVELOPE, ONLY THE COMPLETED BID SUMMARY, BID FORM AND BID FORM ATTACHMENTS! _____ 1.
Completed Bid Summary provided with Section 00300 Bid Form.
_____ 2.
Completed Section 00300 Bid Form, which requires (a) completing the acknowledgment of Addenda in paragraph 2.1, (b) filling out Article 6 Bid Schedule and, if any prices are designated, completing Article 7 Change Order Prices, and (c) completing Article 8, that is, entering the date the Bid is submitted, completing paragraphs 8.1 through 8.4, and, if the Bidder is a joint venture, paragraph 8.5, and signing, as appropriate, in the spaces provided.
_____ 2.1
Completed Certificate of Principal or other equivalent acceptable certificate or authorization document, which certificate shall be attached to the completed Section 00300 Bid Form.
_____ 3.
Bidder's Certificate of Awardability issued by the Michigan Department of Civil Rights, which certificate shall be attached to the last page of Section 00300 Bid Form.
_____ 4.
If the Bid includes a Bid Bond, ensure that the surety is authorized to do business in the State by the Department of Labor and Economic Growth – Insurance Bureau and is listed on the current U.S. Department of the Treasury Circular 570. Also, ensure that the completed Section 00310 Bid Bond is dated, is signed by both the Bidder and surety and attaches Power of Attorney. If the Bid includes a certified or cashier's check or money order, that check or money order shall be attached to Section 00300 Bid Form, as provided in paragraph 8.1 of Section 00300 Bid Form.
_____ 5.
Completed Section 00320 Noncollusion Affidavit.
_____ 6.
Qualified Disabled Veterans Preference Documentation (if preference requested).
_____ 6.1
DD 214 – Proof of Service/Discharge.
_____ 6.2
Veterans Administration Rating Decision Letter – Proof of Disability, if not indicated in the DD 214.
_____ 6.3
Legal Proof of 51% QDV Ownership
_____ 7.
Bidder's name, address and telephone; name of the Work; and Agency No. 511, Index No. 13721,13921, File No. 511/13007.CAK shall be printed on the OPAQUE SEALED BID ENVELOPE (Reference: Section 00100, paragraph 10.4).
This Bidder’s Check List is provided solely to aid the Bidder in submitting a Bid. It shall not be relied on to include all items necessary to insure a complete Bid. The Bidder is solely responsible for including all items as required by the Bidding Documents, including any items required by Addenda, which may not be listed in this Bidder’s Check List. END OF ATTACHMENT A TO SECTION 00100
MICHSPEC DTMB
00110 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR) SECTION 00120
SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS
SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS
PROFESSIONAL Paradigm Design, Inc. WORK
Armory Modifications
AGENCY No.
511 INDEX No. 13721, 13921 FILE No. 511/13007.CAK
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________ The provisions of this Section 00120 Supplementary Instructions amend or supplement Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders and those other provisions of the Bidding Requirements that are indicated below. All other Bidding Requirements that are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect.
END OF SECTION 00120
MICHSPEC DTMB
00120 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR) SECTION 00210
INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
PROFESSIONAL Paradigm Design, Inc. WORK
Armory Modifications
AGENCY No.
511 INDEX No. 13721, 13921 FILE No. 511/13007.CAK
1.0 RELATED PROVISIONS
3.0 OTHER PHYSICAL CONDITIONS
1.1. Paragraphs 3.4 through 3.7 of Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders, which contain terms and conditions governing the information made available to Bidders in this Section, are made part of this Section 00210 Information for Bidders by this reference.
3.1. The Drawings and technical Specifications and those drawings itemized immediately below contain information or data that have been used by the Professional in the preparation of the Bidding Documents, and that may be properly considered Authorized Technical Data concerning physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface facilities.
2.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 2.1. The reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions itemized immediately below have been used by the Professional in the preparation of the Bidding Documents. If those reports are not attached to this Section 00210, they are available for purchase ($______ per copy) from the Professional. Soil report prepared by Souls and Structures dated April 12, 2013.
2.1.1. Information or data contained in those reports that may be properly considered Authorized Technical Data concerning subsurface conditions include (NOTE: All other information or data excluded from the list below represent Non-Technical Information or Data, interpretations or opinions):
2.2. The reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions itemized immediately below have not been used by the Professional in the preparation of the Bidding Documents. Those reports are available at the office of the Professional for review or purchase. Neither the Owner nor Professional warrants that this list identifies all existing relevant documents.
MICHSPEC DTMB
3.2. The reference documents itemized immediately below have not been used by the Professional in the preparation of the Bidding Documents, and are available at the office of the Professional for review or purchase. Information and data contained in those reference documents, including, but not limited to dimensions, locations and conditions of existing surface and subsurface structures, roadways, piping, raceways, equipment, etc. may not accurately or reliably reflect actual conditions. Neither the Owner nor Professional warrants that this list identifies all existing relevant documents.
4.0 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 4.1. Information or data about physical conditions of existing Underground Utilities, that have been used by the Professional in the preparation of the Bidding Documents, is shown or indicated in the Drawings and technical Specifications and those Underground Utility drawings itemized immediately below.
00210 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
5.0 PERMITS, APPROVALS, LICENSES AND FEES 5.1. To the extent that the Owner has secured or will secure any permits, approvals and licenses and has paid or will pay any associated charges and fees, any such permits, approvals and licenses are itemized in this paragraph: None.
5.3. Except for any permits, approvals, licenses and fees identified in paragraph 5.1, the Contractor shall be responsible for all permits, approvals, licenses and fees applicable to Work. 6.0 SEQUENCING REQUIREMENTS 6.1. Refer to the technical Specifications, including, but not limited to the General Requirements, for information, data and criteria on sequences of Work restraints, constructability and maintenance of service to existing facilities, which, if provided, shall govern the selection of Work sequences.
5.2. In the event any permits, approvals and licenses itemized in paragraph 5.1 have been obtained by the Owner and the fees have been paid, copies of those permits, approvals, licenses and corresponding fee receipts, are either attached to this Section 00210 Information for Bidders or are available for purchase (cost of $ ________ per copy) from the Professional
6.2. Each Bidder shall be responsible for any conclusions or interpretations the Bidder makes related to the selection of sequences and Means and Methods, based on the technical data made available, and/or those additional investigations or studies made or obtained by that Bidder.
END OF SECTION 00210
MICHSPEC DTMB
00210 2
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
BID SUMMARY, BID FORM AND BID FORM ATTACHMENTS
BID SUMMARY, BID FORM AND BID FORM ATTACHMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 00300
BID SUMMARY AND BID FORM
SECTION 00310
BID BOND
SECTION 00320 NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
BID FORM
DMB-401M (R 3/14/2011)
BID SUMMARY DEPARTMENT OF TECHNOLOGY, MANAGEMENT AND BUDGET FACILITIES AND BUSINESS SERVICES ADMINISTRATION General Office Building, 3B P.O. Box 30026 Lansing, MI 48909
SUBMIT BID TO:
EXPRESS MAIL TO: FILE NUMBER
INDEX NUMBER
511/13007.CAK
1 3 7 2 1 , 1 3 9 21
7150 Harris Drive, Dimondale, Michigan 48821
AGENCY CODE
COMPTROLLER CODE
AGENCY NUMBER
COMMODITY CODE
511
DEPARTMENT/AGENCY
PROJECT SCOPE OF WORK DESCRIPTION/LOCATION
Department of Military and Veteran’s affairs
Armory Modifications – Alma, MI
BID OPENING DATE May 28, 2014, 2:00 P.M.
FOR AN EXAMINATION OF THE SITE CONTACT: Will be established at the pre-bod conference
NOTE: SEE SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS AND SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS PROVIDED WITH THE BIDDING DOCUMENTS. BID: WE PROPOSE TO FURNISH, PERFORM AND COMPLETE THE ENTIRE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IN CONSIDERATION OF THE BID PRICE (S) STATED BELOW. FIRM NAME AND COMPLETE ADDRESS
TELEPHONE NUMBER
FEDERAL I.D. NUMBER (IF NONE, SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER)*
□ Qualified Disabled Veteran BIDDER'S SIGNATURE AND TITLE
DATE
WITNESS' SIGNATURE
DATE
*Protected information required for processing payments.
BASE BID
SUMMARY FROM ARTICLE 6 -- BID SCHEDULE, IN SECTION 00300 BID FORM
Base Bid: (Include specified Allowance) ................................................................................................................... $______________________ Alternate 1: .................................................................................................................................................................. $______________________ Alternate 2: .................................................................................................................................................................. $______________________ Alternate 3: .................................................................................................................................................................. $______________________ BID GUARANTEE REQUIRED: A FIVE (5) PERCENT BID SECURITY AND A PERFORMANCE BOND AND A PAYMENT BOND ARE REQUIRED. NOTE: EACH BID SUBMITTED FOR THIS WORK MUST BE ACCOMPANIED BY A BID GUARANTEE AS SPECIFIED IN THE SECTION 100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. BIDDERS ARE ALSO CAUTIONED TO FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITH ALL OF THE OTHER CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AS SET FORTH THROUGHOUT THE SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS PREFACE TEXT. Project Scope of Work: Builders Risk Insurance is provided if marked. The Bidder shall figure its Base Bid on the specified, or Addendum-approved, materials and equipment only. No “or equal” or substitution proposals will be permitted after Bid opening, except as provided in Article 5, Section 00700 General Conditions. Contract Time(s): Addenda: Bidder acknowledges receipt of Addenda: No. ___ dated: __________, No. ___ dated: __________ No. ___ dated: __________ This Bid Summary is intended to serve as a summary page. Failure to complete this Bid Summary may be cause for the Bid to be rejected.
MICHSPEC DTMB
00300 SUMMARY
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR) SECTION 00300
BID FORM
BID FORM
PROFESSIONAL Paradigm Design, Inc. WORK
Armory Modifications
AGENCY No.
511 INDEX No. 13721, 13921 FILE No. 511/13007.CAK
Bond and appropriate evidence of insurance within the times and in the manner specified in the Bidding Documents. TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE BID SUMMARY
i
1 THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO
1
2 THE BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS
1
3 TIME OF COMPLETION
2
4 ATTACHMENTS INCLUDED WITH THIS BID
2
5 DEFINED TERMS
2
6 BID SCHEDULE
3
7 SCHEDULE OF CHANGE ORDER PRICES
__
8 BID SUBMITTED
__
____________________________________________________ ARTICLE 1 THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO THE STATE OF MICHIGAN ("the Owner"). 1.1. The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an agreement with the Owner on the form in Section 00500 Agreement and to furnish and perform the Work as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the Bid prices in the "Bid Schedule" on this Section 00300 Bid Form, within the Contract Times specified in Section 00500 Agreement, and in accordance with all other provisions and terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents, including, without limitation, those dealing with the disposition of the Bid Security. 1.2. The undersigned Bidder agrees to hold this Bid open for acceptance by the Owner for the period specified in Article 9 of Section 00030 Advertisement. ____________________________________________________ STATE OF MICHIGAN MODEL Developed from FORMSPEC Michigan Model ____________________________________________________ 1.3. The Bidder will deliver the signed triplicate originals of Section 00500 Agreement, the executed Section 00610 Performance Bond, the executed Section 00620 Payment
MICHSPEC DTMB
ARTICLE 2 THE BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1. The Bidder has examined the Bidding Documents, including the Addenda acknowledged in the table below. The Bidder has verified that the Addenda acknowledged below include all issued Addenda. Except for Addenda, which solely revise the date of Bid, opening, failure by the Bidder to acknowledge receipt of all Addenda correctly, by either failing to complete or incorrectly completing the table below, shall justify the Owner's refusal to read the Bid and automatically disqualify the Bidder from any consideration for award of the Contract. No. ___ Dated _____________
No. ___ Dated __________
No. ___ Dated _____________
No. ___ Dated __________
No. ___ Dated _____________
No. ___ Dated __________
2.2. The Bidder has taken those steps that are reasonably necessary to (a) ascertain and become familiar with the Work, site and locality; (b) account for all applicable federal, State and other local Laws and all general, local and prevailing conditions that may in any manner affect cost, schedule, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work; and (c) study and account for the terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. The Bidder has carefully correlated the Bidder's observations with the Bidding Documents. 2.3. The Bidder has studied carefully all reports concerning subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface facilities that have been used by the Professional and all documents of physical conditions of existing Underground Utilities facilities that have been used by the Professional in both cases as identified in Section 00210 Information for bidders. The Bidder assumes responsibility for carefully and accurately locating existing Underground Utilities in a manner consistent with paragraph 10.3 of Section 00700 General Conditions and as required by 1974 PA 53, as amended, MCL 460.701 et seq. The Bidder accepts the determinations set forth in the Bidding Documents as to the extent of such Authorized Technical Data and Underground Utilities information and data contained in those reports, drawings, documents or the Bidding Documents, as applicable, upon which the Bidder may rely. 2.4. To the extent Additional Technical Data has been considered by the Bidder as necessary for determining the Bid in Article 6 Bid Schedule, and the Owner, upon request, did not have
00300 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
BID FORM consequences that may result from meeting those requirements and that may in any manner affect cost, schedule, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work.
the necessary Additional Technical Data, the Bidder assumes responsibility for having undertaken or undertaking reasonable examinations of the site and any other pertinent available information and data. The Bidder agrees to perform and furnish the Work affected by the conditions involved, at no increase in Contract Price and Contract Time, to the extent the information and data necessary for determining the Bid could have been discovered through reasonable examinations of the site and any other pertinent information and data available (including, but not limited to the information and data designated in Section 00210 Information for Bidders).
2.12. The Bidder has read and studied each provision of the Bidding Documents. The Bidder has no expectations different from the terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.
2.5. The Bidder has carefully correlated the results of its observations, examinations and studies of those reports of explorations and all that information and data in studies, drawings and specifications, referred to in paragraphs 2.3 and 2.4, with the terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.
3.1. The Contract Times are specified in paragraph 4.1 of Section 00500 Agreement. The Bidder has carefully correlated the provisions in paragraph 4.1 of Section 00500 Agreement with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents and unequivocally accepts the Contract Times for the Work, and any other designated parts of the Work, as specified.
2.6. The Bidder has examined all information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents concerning other work, including, but not limited to provisions in Section 00700 General Conditions. The Bidder assumes responsibility for all reasonably foreseeable terms, conditions and consequences resulting from other work that may in any manner affect cost, schedule, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work.
3.2. The Bidder unequivocally accepts the liquidated damage provisions specified in paragraph 4.2 of Section 00500 Agreement in the event of any failure, neglect or refusal to complete the Work, or designated part of the Work, within the corresponding Contract Times specified in paragraph 4.1 of Section 00500 Agreement.
2.7. The Bidder has carefully examined the terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents concerning Delay, Activity Float times and early completion. The Bidder agrees that increases in Contract Price and/or Contract Time for Delay shall be as provided in Section 00700 General Conditions. The Bidder has correlated those terms and conditions with the Bidder's schedule for the Work and its Base Bid and Alternates.
ARTICLE 4 ATTACHMENTS INCLUDED WITH THIS BID
2.8. The Bidder represents that each unit price covering Specified or Contingent Unit Price Work, whether bid on Article 6 Bid Schedule or on Article 7 Schedule of Change Order Prices, includes sufficient amounts to cover (a) all labor costs, Subcontractor costs, material and equipment costs, construction equipment costs and general conditions costs, and (b) all administrative costs and home office overhead), and (c) profit. The Owner reserves the right to reject any unit prices bid on paragraph 6.2 Schedule of Alternates or in Article 7 Schedule of Change Order Prices, which, in the Owner’s sole discretion, are not in the Owner’s best interest. 2.9. The Bidder has given the Professional written notice of all conflicts, ambiguities, errors or omissions the Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and the written resolution given by the Professional is acceptable to the Bidder. 2.10. This Bid is genuine, is not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association, organization or corporation. To induce the Owner into consideration of this Bid, the Bidder reiterates and makes each of the representations made by the Bidder in Section 00320 Noncollusion Affidavit attached to this Section 00300 Bid Form.
ARTICLE 3 TIME OF COMPLETION
4.1. Attachments to this Section 00300 Bid Form and made a condition of this Bid are: 4.1.1. Evidence of Authority to Sign the Bid. 4.1.2. Section 00310 Bid Bond, with the attached certified copy of Power of Attorney, or Alternate Bid Security. 4.1.3. Certificate of Awardability. 4.1.4. Section 00320 Noncollusion Affidavit. 4.2. Bidder-provided documents, made a condition of this Bid, are as required in the following Section(s) of the Bidding Documents: __________________________________________ ARTICLE 5 DEFINED TERMS 5.1. Section 00020 Glossary assigns specific intent and meanings to capitalized terms and to other defined terms used in (a) this Section 00300 Bid Form, (b) Section 00310 Bid Bond and Section 00320 Noncollusion Affidavit), and (c) Section 00410 Bid Breakdown, Section 00420 Questionnaire, Section 00430 List of Subcontractors and Section 00440 Schedule of Materials and Equipment.
2.11. The Bidder is aware of the Owner's requirements for business owned by minorities, women and persons with physical or mental disabilities, and assumes responsibility for all conditions and MICHSPEC DTMB
00300 2
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
BID FORM
ARTICLE 6 BID SCHEDULE 6.1 Base Bid Schedule - The Bidder will complete the Work and accept in full payment, for the Work items listed, the following unit prices and/or Bid Prices, as applicable: Base Bid Item No.
Bid Quantity
Description (Bidder to write price in words)
Unit Price
Bid Price
None
Base Bid (Sum of Bid Prices for all Base Bid Items):
________________________________________________________________ Dollars and No/Cents $__________________________ (use words) (in figures) Name of the Bidder _________________________________________ Agency No. ________ Index No. ________ File No. _________ Date _________________________ Federal Identification (I.D.) No. or Social Security No. _________________________________ Telephone No. _______________________
MICHSPEC DTMB
00300 3
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
BID FORM
6.2 Schedule of Alternates - The Bidder will complete (or deduct from the Contract) the parts of the Work designated by the Alternates that follow and accept in full payment (or allow in full credit) for those parts of the Work the following Bid Prices: Alternate Item No.
Bid Quantity
Description (Bidder to write price in words)
Unit Price
Bid Price
None
The Bidder further acknowledges and agrees that the separate prices bid on this “Schedule of Alternates,” where they are applicable and deemed acceptable by the Owner, will be used if incorporated into the Contract when the Owner issues the Notice of Award.
Name of the Bidder _________________________________________ Agency No. ________ Index No. ________ File No. _________ Date ________________ Federal Identification (I.D.) No. or Social Security No. _________________________________
MICHSPEC DTMB
00300 4
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
BID FORM
Telephone No. _______________________
ARTICLE 7 SCHEDULE OF CHANGE ORDER PRICES 7.1 The Bidder shall use this “Schedule of Change Order Prices” to propose contingent prices. The proposed contingent Change Order prices set forth in this schedule, at the sole discretion of the Owner, may, or may not be incorporated into the Contract Documents. The Owner reserves the right to negotiate contingent Change Order prices set forth herein prior to their possible incorporation into the Contract Documents. Proposed Change Order prices will not affect determination of the lowest Bid. 7.2 Subject to their incorporation into the Contract Documents, as provided in the Agreement, the Bidder will add to, or deduct from, the Contract Work covered by the contingent prices that follow and accept in full payment, or allow in full credit, for that Work (a) those prices bid by the Bidder, or (b) if a particular price is not bid, the price proposed by the Owner (and shown in the appropriate column): Item No.
Units or Quantity
Description (Bidder to write price in words)
Bidder's Bid Price
Price Proposed By the Owner
None
Name of the Bidder _________________________________________ Agency No. ________ Index No. ________ File No. _________ Date _____________
MICHSPEC DTMB
00300 5
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
BID FORM
Federal Identification (I.D.) No. or Social Security No. _________________________________ Telephone No. _______________________
MICHSPEC DTMB
00300 6
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
BID FORM
ARTICLE 8 BID SUBMITTED ON the _______ day of ________________, 20____. 8.1. Bid Security is in the form of: a Bid Bond _______ Bid Bond form provided in Section 00310 has been duly executed _______; or A Certified or Cashier's check ___ or Money Order ___ is attached to this page ____ Bidder’s Certificate of Awardability is attached to the last page of this Section 00300 Bid Form ____ 8.2. If the Bidder is an Individual: Name of Individual:
_________________________________________________________
Name & Title of Person Authorized to sign:
_________________________________________________________
Signature:
_________________________________________________________ (If not the Individual, Attach Power of Attorney) Date
Doing Business as:
_________________________________________________________
Business Address:
_________________________________________________________
Federal Identification (I.D.) No. or Social Security No. _________________________________________________________ County of registration
_________________________
Telephone:
_________________________
FAX: ______________________
8.3. If the Bidder is a Partnership: By:
_________________________________________________________ (True Name of the Partnership) _________________________________________________________ Partner Authorized to Sign Date
Signature:
_________________________________________________________ (Attach evidence of Authority to sign) Date
Business Address:
_________________________________________________________
Federal Identification (I.D.) No. or Social Security No. _________________________________________________________ County of registration
_________________________
Telephone:
_________________________
FAX _______________________
8.4. If the Bidder is a Corporation: By: Name & Title of Authorized Officer: Signature: Name & Title of Officer Attesting:
_________________________________________________________ (Legal Corporation Name) _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ (Attach evidence of Authority to sign) Date _________________________________________________________
Signature:
_________________________________________________________ Date
Business Address:
_________________________________________________________
Federal Identification (I.D.) No. or Social Security No. _________________________________________________________ Telephone:
_________________________
(State of Incorporation):
_________________________________________________________
MICHSPEC DTMB
FAX _______________________
00300 7
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
BID FORM
8.5. If The Bidder is A Joint Venture: JOINT VENTURE SIGNATURES SHALL BE AS PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 9.5 OF SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. EACH JOINT VENTURER SIGNING THE BID SHALL SIGN IN THE MANNER INDICATED FOR AN INDIVIDUAL, A PARTNERSHIP OR A CORPORATION. IF MORE THAN TWO JOINT VENTURERS OF THE SAME TYPE ARE INCLUDED, USE ADDITIONAL PAGES. JOINT VENTURE STATE OF INCORPORATION ___________________ OR COUNTY OF REGISTRATION _____________________
CERTIFICATE OF PRINCIPAL (BIDDER)
I, ________________________________, certify that I am the Secretary of the Corporation ____, or a General Partner ____ or Managing Partner ____ or Partner ____ of the partnership, named as the Bidder in the attached Section 00300 Bid Form; that __________________ _____________ who signed Section 00300 Bid Form on behalf of the Bidder, was then _____________________ of that corporation ____ or partnership ____; that I know the undersigned's signature, and the signature is genuine; and that Section 00300 Bid Form was duly signed, sealed and attested for and on behalf of that corporation ___ partnership ___ by authority of its governing body ___ or partners ___
___________________________________________________________ Signed by the Secretary or Other Authorized Officer of the Corporation or By General Partner or Managing Partner or Authorized Partner Certifying
Date
___________________________________________________________________________ Name of the Corporation or True Name of the Partnership
Federal Identification (I.D.) No. or Social Security No. _________________________________
Telephone No. ____________________________
(Corporate Seal)
VERIFICATION (BIDDER)
STATE OF MICHIGAN
) ) COUNTY OF __________________ ) Before me, a Notary duly commissioned, qualified and acting, personally appeared (enter name of person who signed the Bid Form on behalf of the Bidder), _______________________________________________ to me well known to be the person described in and who signed Section 00300 Bid Form, who being by me first duly sworn upon oath, says that he/she is the Attorney-in-Fact for (enter the Bidder's name) ___________________________________________________________________ and that he/she has been authorized by (enter name of individual, partnership name, or that governing body of the Bidder named in the attached corporate resolution) _______________ _____________________________________________________________________ to execute the attached Section 00300 Bid Form on behalf of the named Bidder in favor of the STATE OF MICHIGAN. Subscribed and sworn before me this __________ day of ______________________________, 20_____. _______________________________________ Notary, State of Michigan My Commission Expires: _____________________________________
MICHSPEC DTMB
00300 8
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
BID FORM
END OF SECTION 00300
MICHSPEC DTMB
00300 9
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR) SECTION 00030
ADVERTISEMENT
ADVERTISEMENT
1. Bids The State of Michigan as the Owner will receive sealed Bids, delivered to the Department of Technology, Management and Budget, Facilities and Business Services Administration, First Floor, Stevens T. Mason Building, PO Box 30026, 530 West Allegan Street, Lansing, Michigan 48933, for Armory Modifications until 2:00 P.M., local time, on May 28, 2014, when all Bids duly received will be opened publicly and read aloud. 2. Work Description The Work, Armory Modifications, Agency No. 511, Index No. 13721, 13921, File No. 511/13007.CAK includes, but is not necessarily limited to
Parking lot replacement Site work New pre-engineered building Interior renovations/alterations Replace roofing Mechanical system upgrades/addition
conference. All prospective Bidders and other parties interested in the Work are encouraged to attend the tour, if held. Addenda may be issued, in response to issues raised at the pre-bid conference and tour, or as the Owner and/or Professional may otherwise consider necessary. 6. Equal Employment Opportunity Covenants not to discriminate in employment by contractors, subcontractors and suppliers required by Law are contained in paragraph 14.12 of Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders and paragraph 7.12 of Section 00700 General Conditions and are applicable to the Work and any Subagreement under the Contract. 7. Contract Times The Contract Times and the associated liquidated damages are specified in Article 4 of Section 00500 Agreement. 8. Contact Person All requests or inquiries concerning the Bidding Documents or the Work shall be addressed to Paradigm Design, Inc., Todd Ockaskis, (616) 785-5575.
The site is located 710 South State Street Alma, MI, as shown on the Drawings. 3. Bidding Documents Sets of Bidding Documents may be obtained from www.buy4michigan.com. 4. Bid Security Each Bid shall enclose Bid Security, as specified in Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders (and as specified in Section 00310 Bid Bond, if a Bid Bond is enclosed), in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Bidder's Base Bid.
9. Award Subject to any agreed extension of the period for holding Bids, Bids shall remain valid for acceptance by the Owner for sixty (60) Calendar Days after the date of Bid opening. In addition, the Owner expressly reserves the right, within the Owner's sole discretion, to reject any or all Bids, to waive any irregularities, to issue post-Bid Addenda and rebid the Work without readvertising, to readvertise for Bids, to withhold the award for any reason the Owner determines and/or to take any other appropriate action.
5. Pre-Bid Conference A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at Alma Armory, 710 South State Street, Alma, MI on May 16 2014 at 1:00 PM Local Time. A tour of the building and property will be held on the same day, starting immediately after the pre-bid
END OF SECTION 00030
MICHSPEC DTMB
00030 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
BID FORM ATTACHMENT
SECTION 00310 BID BOND AGENCY No. 511 INDEX No. 13721, 13921 FILE No. 511/13007.CAK SURETY COMPANY REFERENCE No. ___________ KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, "the Bidder," ____________________________________________________, a corporation ____, individual ____, partnership ____, joint venture ____, of the State of ____________________, qualified to do business in the State of Michigan, as Principal, and "the Surety," ________________________________________________________, of the State of _______________, as surety, are hereby held and firmly bound unto the State of Michigan, "the Owner," as Obligee, in the amount of _______________________________________________________________________ Dollars ($_______________), and if no amount is entered, in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Bidder's Base Bid designated in paragraph 6.1 Base Bid Schedule in Section 00300 Bid Form, for the payment of which the Bidder and the Surety hereby bind ourselves, our respective heirs, successors, legal representatives and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents in accordance with Michigan Law. WHEREAS, the Bidder has submitted to the Owner a Bid, to which this Bond is attached, to enter into the Contract with the Owner for ______________________________________________________________________________________________________ covered by Bidding Documents prepared by the Professional, which Bidding Documents are incorporated into this Bid Bond by this reference: NOW, THEREFORE: THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS THAT, if the Bidder faithfully performs and fulfills all the understandings, covenants, terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents governing the bidding and award of the Contract (including Addenda issued before Bid opening and any postBid Addenda) within the time specified or any extension thereof, with or without notice to the Surety or fails to do so but pays to the Owner the full amount of the sum set forth in this Section 00310 Bid Bond as liquidated damages - then THIS OBLIGATION SHALL BE NULL AND VOID, OTHERWISE THIS OBLIGATION SHALL REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT. A. If the Owner makes demand on the Surety to perform in accordance with the Surety's obligations under this Section 00310 Bid Bond, the full amount of the sum set forth in this Section 00310 Bid Bond shall be immediately due and payable to the Owner, and the Surety shall pay that sum without delay. Additionally, the Surety shall reimburse the Owner all costs of collection, which
shall include, but not be limited to reasonable fees and charges of architects, engineers, attorneys and others, court or hearing costs incurred with or without suit, and interest. B. The Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that the obligations of the Surety and this Section 00310 Bid Bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept the Bid, and the Surety does, by this agreement, waive notice of any such extension. C. It is the intention of the Bidder, Surety and Owner that the Surety shall be bound by all terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents and this Section 00310 Bid Bond. However, if any provision(s) of this Section 00310 Bid Bond is/are illegal, invalid or unenforceable, all other provisions of this Section 00310 Bid Bond shall nevertheless remain in full force and effect, and the Owner shall be protected to the full extent provided by Michigan Law.
IMPORTANT: The Surety shall be authorized to do business in the State by the Department of Consumer and Industry Services Insurance Bureau and listed on the current U.S. Department of the Treasury Circular 570, and shall be otherwise acceptable to the Owner. Address and Telephone of Surety
Address and Telephone of Agent
Signed and sealed this _________ day of ____________, 20____ (NOTE: Use the date entered on Article 8 of Section 00300 Bid Form). THE BIDDER: (Print Full Name and Sign)
THE SURETY: (Print Full Name and Sign)
By: ______________________________________________
By Agent: _________________________________________
Name & Title: ______________________________________
By Attorney-in-Fact: _________________________________ (Attach Certified Copy of Power of Attorney)
Signature: _________________________________________
Signature: _________________________________________
WITNESS: ________________________________________
WITNESS: ________________________________________
Telephone No. _____________________________________
Telephone No. _____________________________________
END OF SECTION 00310
MICHSPEC DTMB
00310 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR) SECTION 00320
BID FORM ATTACHMENT
NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
PROFESSIONAL Paradigm Design, Inc. WORK
Armory Modifications
AGENCY No.
511 INDEX No. 13721, 13921 FILE No. 511/13007.CAK
Affiant, __________________________________________________________, being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: (1) Affiant is (enter title) _____________________ of _________ ____________________________________________________, "the Bidder." Affiant has personal knowledge of the matters set forth in this Affidavit and is competent to testify about them.
consideration to induce any other person not to Bid for the Work, or to Bid at a specified price; or have secured, proposed or intended to secure through any agreement an unlawful advantage against the Owner or any other person interested in the Work.
(2) The Bidder has submitted to the Owner a "Bid" to enter into the above referenced Contract, also referred to in this Affidavit as "the Work."
(6) No officer or employee of the State of Michigan is personally or financially interested, directly or indirectly, in the Bid, or any Contract which may be under it, or in the purchase or sale of any materials, equipment or supplies for the Work to which it relates, or any portion of any expected profits thereto.
(3) This Section 00320 Noncollusion Affidavit is executed by Affiant for inclusion with the submission to the Owner of the Bid and may be relied upon by the Owner in considering the Bid. (4) Affiant is fully informed about the preparation and contents of the Bid and of all pertinent circumstances surrounding the Bid, has not entered into any contract, combination, conspiracy or other act prohibited by federal, State or any other local Law. The Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid.
(7) The Bid is not intended to secure an unfair advantage or benefit from the Owner or in favor of any person interested in the proposed Contract. (8) The prices bid are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance, or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any other of the Bidder's owners, officers, partners, directors, agents, representatives, employees or parties in interest, including this Affiant; and neither the Bidder nor any of its owners, officers, partners, directors, agents, representatives, employees or parties in interest, including this Affiant, have divulged any information regarding the Bid or any data about the Bid to any other person.
(5) Neither the Bidder nor any of the Bidder's owners, officers, partners, directors, agents, representatives, employees or parties in interest, including this Affiant, have in any way entered or proposed to enter into any combination to prevent the making of any Bid, or to fix any prices (including overhead, profit or other costs) for the Bid; or have made any agreement, or given or promised any By: ______________________________________________
Title: _____________________________________________
Federal Identification (I.D.) No. or Social Security No. ____________________________
Telephone No. _____________________________________
VERIFICATION STATE OF __________________ ) ) COUNTY OF _________________ )
Before me, a Notary Public commissioned, qualified and acting, personally appeared (enter name of the person signing this Affidavit) ________________________________ to me well known to be the person described in and who signed this Section 00320 Noncollusion Affidavit, who being by me first duly sworn upon oath, says that he/she is the Attorney-in-Fact for (enter Bidder's name) ___________________________________________________________________________, that he/she has been authorized by (enter name of individual, partnership name, or the authorized governing body of the Bidder) _____________________________________ to execute this Section 00320 Noncollusion Affidavit on behalf of the named Bidder in favor of the STATE OF MICHIGAN, for the uses and purposes mentioned. Subscribed and sworn to before me this _____ day of ____________________, 20______. ____________________________________________ Notary Public, State of ___________________ My Commission expires: _______________, 20 ___ END OF SECTION 00320
MICHSPEC DTMB
00320 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
SECTION 00400 QUALIFICATION SUBMITTALS
QUALIFICATION SUBMITTALS TO BE SUBMITTED ONLY BY THE APPARENT LOW BIDDER AFTER BID OPENING AS PROVIDED IN SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART A - BIDDER QUALIFICATION SUBMITTALS (FORMS ARE INCLUDED WITH THE BIDDING DOCUMENTS) (Reference Paragraphs 2.1, 7.1 through 7.3 and 8.1, Section 00100) SECTION 00410
BID BREAKDOWN
SECTION 00420
QUESTIONNAIRE
SECTION 00430
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
SECTION 00440
SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT** **Note: Information required by Article 2 is due after Contract Award.
PART B - BIDDER QUALIFICATION SUBMITTALS (A FORM IS NOT INCLUDED WITH THE BIDDING DOCUMENTS) (Reference Paragraphs 2.1 and 2.2, Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders) PREAWARD SCHEDULE
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR) SECTION 00410
QUALIFICATION SUBMITTAL
BID BREAKDOWN
PROFESSIONAL Paradigm Design, Inc. WORK
Armory Modifications
AGENCY No.
511 INDEX No. 13721, 13921 FILE No. 511/13007.CAK
________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 1.0 BID BREAKDOWN: The Apparent Low Bidder shall itemize below a cost breakdown of the Apparent Low Bidder's Bid. The Bid Breakdown shall be organized into separable parts of the Work so that one hundred percent (100%) of the Base Bid plus all Alternates is accounted for. Portions of the Work for which costs are itemized shall include Work to be furnished and performed directly by the Apparent Low Bidder and its Subcontractors and Suppliers, as applicable. Each separable part of the Work identified in this Bid Breakdown shall have a value not exceeding ___________ percent ( ____%) of the Apparent Low Bidder's Base Bid, except parts of the Work designating furnished materials or equipment, which may be itemized as quoted.
2.0 DISCREPANCIES: Discrepancies in this Section 00410 Bid Breakdown shall be resolved in accordance with Article 14 of the Instructions to Bidders. Any discrepancies between the Apparent Low Bidder's Bid Breakdown and Article 6 "Bid Schedule" on the Apparent Low Bidder's Section 00300 Bid Form with respect to a given lump sum item, unit price item or "One Each" item, or any sum of any of them, will be resolved so that the corresponding amount(s) on the Apparent Low Bidder's Section 00300 Bid Form will be binding on the Apparent Low Bidder.
END OF SECTION 00410
MICHSPEC DTMB
00410 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR) SECTION 00420
QUALIFICATION SUBMITTAL
QUESTIONNAIRE
PROFESSIONAL Paradigm Design, Inc. WORK
Armory Modifications
AGENCY No.
511 INDEX No. 13721, 13921 FILE No. 511/13007.CAK
ARTICLE 1 ORGANIZATION 1.1. Date of organization (or incorporation) ____________ State of incorporation ______________ (IRS) EIN _______________ 1.2. Title and name of Principals (President, Vice-Presidents, Secretary and Treasurer, if a corporation; partners, if a partnership) _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 1.3. Is your organization's principal place of business maintained in the State of Michigan? ___ If your organization maintains its principal place of business outside the State, attach a copy of the Certificate of Authority which your organization procured in accordance with MCL 450.2011. 1.4. If your organization, any business entity related to or affiliated with your organization, or any present or former executive employee, officer, director, shareholder (owning twenty percent (20%) or more of the outstanding shares), partner, or owner of your organization or of any such related or affiliated entity has ever been convicted of a felony, or has felony charges pending, in any state within the last three (3) years from the date of Bid opening, furnish with this Bidder's Questionnaire all material facts relating to any such felony conviction or such pending felony charges.
ARTICLE 2 SPECIALTY CONTRACTOR LICENSES 2.1. Does your organization hold valid licenses covering specialty classifications of Work that your organization itself intends to perform and for which a specific specialty license is required by any Political Subdivision with jurisdiction over the Work ______? If so, attach a list with all licenses by number and classification; state the name of the organization holding the license, the renewal date of each license, whether each license is active, and attach a copy of each license.
ARTICLE 3 EXPERIENCE 3.1. What is the general character of the work performed by your organization? _____________________________________ How many years of experience in construction work similar in character and scope to the Work under the Bidding Documents has your organization had: (a) as a General Contractor? ________; (b) as a Subcontractor? ________. 3.2. Attach a list of all public contracts or subcontracts under public contracts that your organization has performed within the last five (5) years which are similar in character and scope to the Work under the Bidding Documents (using the forms in the "References Attachment" provided with this Questionnaire). If the contract or subcontract referenced is not substantially completed, furnish the percent complete for that contract or subcontract. 3.3. Within the last five (5) years, has your organization failed to complete a contract or subcontract awarded to it? _____ If so, attach a list for each contract or subcontract, state when, where and why. 3.4. Within the last five (5) years, has any officer or partner of your organization been an officer or partner of another organization that failed to complete a contract or subcontract? __________. If so, for each contract or subcontract, state the name of each officer or partner and the name of the organization and owner(s), and the reasons why the contract or subcontract was not completed.
MICHSPEC DTMB
00420 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
QUALIFICATION SUBMITTAL
ARTICLE 4 ADDITIONAL QUALIFICATIONS 4.1. (Nominated Subcontractor only) Will you subcontract any part of the Work covered by the intended Subagreement? ___. If so, which parts of the Work covered by the intended Subagreement do you intend to subcontract to a lower tier Subcontractor? _____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 4.2. State the name, address and telephone number of a representative of your organization who personally visited and inspected the site: ______________________________________________________________________________________________. Also, describe, in an attachment to this Section 00420 Questionnaire, subsurface and physical conditions at or contiguous to the site that your representative investigated and how they were accounted for in the preparation of your organization's Bid. 4.3. Attach a list of construction equipment and machinery your organization intends to use in the execution of the Work, as estimated in the preparation of your organization's Bid. 4.4. Does your organization rent or lease equipment or facilities from other affiliate organizations? ______. If so, state the name of the affiliate organization(s) ____________________________________________________________________________ 4.5. (Apparent Low Bidder only) Bank line of credit available? $____________________. 4.6. (Apparent Low Bidder only) Will your organization, i.e., the Bidder named in the Authorized Signature Article on Section 00300 Bid Form, be the only named Principal in Section 00610 Performance Bond and Section 00620 Payment Bond? ______ If not, please identify the organization who will be named as Principal or Co-Principal on Section 00610 Performance Bond and Section 00620 Payment Bond _____________________________________________. Also, state how such organization relates to the Bidder _______________ (NOTE: If another organization is identified, the Apparent Low Bidder shall submit to the Owner a separate Section 00420 Questionnaire filled out by that organization as part of the Qualification Submittals required under Article 2 of Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders).
ARTICLE 5 REFERENCES 5.1. Trade references (Minimum of three (3)):
5.2. Bank references:
5.3. Insurance:
The undersigned Apparent Low Bidder ____ or nominated Subcontractor _____ ____________________________________ certifies that all statements and answers made to the interrogatories in this Section 00420 Questionnaire are current, accurate and complete as of the date stated below. (Note: Attachments shall be fastened at the end of this Section). Signed by: ____________________________ Name _______________________________ Title ________________________ on this __________ day of ____________________, 20_______.
END OF SECTION 00420
MICHSPEC DTMB
00420 2
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
QUALIFICATION SUBMITTAL
REFERENCES ATTACHMENT PROFESSIONAL Paradigm Design, Inc. WORK
Armory Modifications
AGENCY No.
511 INDEX No. 13721, 13921 FILE No. 511/13007.CAK
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCE #___ Public Owner: _______________________________________________________________________________ Project/Contract Name: ________________________________________________________________________ Location of Project/Contract: ____________________________________________________________________ Contract Price: _______________________ Project/Contract Started: ____________ Completed: ____________ Owner's Representative (Name and Telephone): _____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Apparent Low Bidder's ___ or Nominated Subcontractor’s ____ Representative Name and Telephone _______________________________________________________ Scope of Project/Contract: ______________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCE #___ Public Owner: _______________________________________________________________________________ Project/Contract Name: ________________________________________________________________________ Location of Project/Contract: ____________________________________________________________________ Contract Price: _______________________ Project/Contract Started: ____________ Completed: ____________ Owner's Representative (Name and Telephone): _____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Apparent Low Bidder's ___ or Nominated Subcontractor’s ____ Representative Name and Telephone _______________________________________________________ Scope of Project/Contract: _______________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________
MICHSPEC DTMB
00420 3
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
QUALIFICATION SUBMITTAL
REFERENCES ATTACHMENT PROFESSIONAL Paradigm Design, Inc. WORK
Armory Modifications
AGENCY No.
511 INDEX No. 13721, 13921 FILE No. 511/13007.CAK
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCE #___ Public Owner: _______________________________________________________________________________ Project/Contract Name: ________________________________________________________________________ Location of Project/Contract: ____________________________________________________________________ Contract Price: _______________________ Project/Contract Started: ____________ Completed: ____________ Owner's Representative (Name and Telephone): _____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Apparent Low Bidder's ___ or Nominated Subcontractor’s ____ Representative Name and Telephone _______________________________________________________ Scope of Project/Contract: ______________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCE #___ Public Owner: _______________________________________________________________________________ Project/Contract Name: ________________________________________________________________________ Location of Project/Contract: ____________________________________________________________________ Contract Price: _______________________ Project/Contract Started: ____________ Completed: ____________ Owner's Representative (Name and Telephone): _____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Apparent Low Bidder's ___ or Nominated Subcontractor’s ____ Representative Name and Telephone _______________________________________________________ Scope of Project/Contract: _______________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________
MICHSPEC DTMB
00420 4
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR) SECTION 00430
QUALIFICATION SUBMITTAL
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
PROFESSIONAL Paradigm Design, Inc. WORK
Armory Modifications
AGENCY No.
511 INDEX No. 13721, 13921 FILE No. 511/13007.CAK
1. To enable the Owner and Professional to evaluate the Apparent Low Bidder's qualifications to perform the Work, for each Division of the Specifications, Section of the Specifications and/or trade itemized in this Section 00430 List of Subcontractors, the Apparent Low Bidder shall nominate the Subcontractor(s) to be awarded a Subagreement(s). To the extent a contractors' licensing is required for any such classification of Work, the Apparent Low Bidder shall provide the nominated Subcontractor’s license number(s). If the Apparent Low Bidder intends to self-perform any of the listed classifications of Work, the Apparent Low Bidder shall nominate itself in the spaces provided for that purpose, and shall furnish the corresponding Apparent Low Bidder’s license number(s). For each nominated Subcontractor, the Apparent Low Bidder shall enter, if applicable, whether the Subcontractor is a minority, woman or handicapped owned business in the spaces provided for that purpose. The Apparent Low Bidder also shall furnish the amount of the Subagreement that the Apparent Low Bidder, directly or through another higher tier Subcontractor, anticipates awarding to each nominated Subcontractor. 2. Should the Apparent Low Bidder fail to nominate Subcontractors, as required, or provide duplicate nominees for any Division, Specification or trade, or fail to enter the required licensing information, the Apparent Low Bidder shall clarify the omission or ambiguity within two (2) Business Days of the Owner or Professional’s request. Failure by the Apparent Low Bidder to comply with this Subcontractor nominating requirement may render the Bid as not conforming in all material respects with the requirements of the Bidding Documents. 3. Pursuant to the Bidding Documents, the Apparent Low Bidder shall not remove, replace or add a nominated Subcontractor except as provided in paragraph 8.3 of Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders and/or in paragraph 5.1 of Section 00700 General Conditions. Since the requirement to nominate Subcontractors for the listed Divisions, Specification Sections and/or trades survives the award of the Contract, any Subcontractor nominated for any listed Division, Specification Section and/or trade for the first time after Contract Award and who is objected to by the Owner, for good cause, shall be replaced at no increase in Contract Price and/or Contract Time. 4. The requirement to make a definite nomination of Subcontractors or to state that the Apparent Low Bidder intends to self-perform that classification, and to clarify any omissions or ambiguities in this Section 00430 List of Subcontractors, applies to the Apparent Low Bidder and any other Bidder remaining or wishing to remain in contention for the award. 5. This listing requirement is not intended to create any express or implied duty or obligation to the Apparent Low Bidder or the nominated Subcontractors by the Owner or Professional.
(THE REMAINDER OF THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY)
MICHSPEC DTMB
00430 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER & CONTRACTOR)
QUALIFICATION SUBMITTAL
Division, Specification Section and/or Trade
Nominated Subcontractor(s)
License Number(s) Classification
Amount of Subcontract
Minority, Woman, or Handicapped?
1._________________________
_________________________
______________
_____________
______________
2._________________________
_________________________
______________
______________
______________
3._________________________
_________________________
______________
______________
______________
4._________________________
_________________________
______________
______________
______________
5._________________________
_________________________
______________
______________
______________
6._________________________
_________________________
______________
______________
______________
7._________________________
_________________________
______________
______________
______________
8._________________________
_________________________
______________
______________
______________
9._________________________
_________________________
______________
______________
______________
10.________________________
_________________________
______________
______________
______________
11.________________________
_________________________
______________
______________
______________
12.________________________
_________________________
______________
______________
______________
13.________________________
_________________________
______________
______________
______________
14.________________________
_________________________
______________
______________
______________
The undersigned Apparent Low Bidder _____________________________________________________________ certifies that all the information and data furnished in this Section 00430 List of Subcontractors are current, accurate and complete as of the date stated below. Signed by: ____________________________ Name _______________________________ Title ________________________ on this __________ day of ____________________, 20_______.
END OF SECTION 00430
MICHSPEC DTMB
00430 2
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR) SECTION 00440
QUALIFICATION SUBMITTAL
SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PROFESSIONAL Paradigm Design, Inc. WORK
Armory Modifications
AGENCY No.
511 INDEX No. 13721, 13921 FILE No. 511/13007.CAK
ARTICLE 1 BID MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT LISTED (NAMED OR SPECIFIED) ITEMS 1.1. The Apparent Low Bidder has examined the requirements of paragraphs 7.4 and 7.5 of Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders, and by submitting a Bid, commits to bid only a listed named or specified materials and equipment for those Specifications listed in Schedule 1.6. To the extent that any such listed Specification states that an "or equal" or a substitute may be furnished, if acceptable to the Professional, application for any such acceptance will not be considered by the Professional until after Contract Award. Any such application shall comply with the terms and conditions of Article 2 in this Section and paragraph 5.2 of Section 00700 General Conditions. 1.2. For those Sections of the Specifications listed in paragraph 1.6, the Contract will be awarded on the basis that only one of the listed materials or equipment will be furnished. Therefore, to be considered responsible, the Apparent Low Bidder shall nominate, by circling the letters "A," "B," "C," etc. corresponding to each listed manufacturer/Supplier, the Bidder's chosen manufacturers/Suppliers for the corresponding products named or specified in the Specifications and Drawings (including all Addenda). 1.3. If the Apparent Low Bidder fails to circle a manufacturer/Supplier for a listed material or equipment, or circles more than one letter for a listed material or equipment, the Apparent Low Bidder hereby agrees to correct the omission or ambiguity within two (2) Business Days after submittal of this Section 00440 Schedule of Materials and Equipment. The requirement to make a definite selection and to correct any omissions or ambiguities in Schedule 1.6 applies to the Apparent Low Bidder and any other Bidder remaining or wishing to remain under consideration for the award. 1.4. The Apparent Low Bidder’s attention is directed to paragraph 7.3 of Section 00100 Instruction to Bidders, which holds the Apparent Low Bidder responsible, if awarded the Contract, for certain costs and time impacts, provided the Apparent Low Bidder, in the preparation of its Bid, knew or had reason to know, that any listed material or equipment bid by the Bidder requires changes in the Work and failed to provide advanced written notice to that effect to the Professional. 1.5. The Apparent Low Bidder shall insert the provisions of this Section in all Subagreements with Subcontractors and Suppliers furnishing the materials or equipment listed in Schedule 1.6, altering the respective paragraphs only as appropriate to properly identify the contracting parties. Each such Subagreement shall expressly bind the respective Subcontractor or Supplier to the conditions of paragraph 1.4, the other provisions of Section 00440 Schedule of Materials And Equipment and paragraph 5.2 of Section 00700 General Conditions. 1.6. Schedule of Bid Materials and Equipment ITEMS NAMED OR SPECIFIED (ENTERED BY THE PROFESSIONAL) ITEM OF MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT
SPECIFICATION SECTION
CONTRACTOR TO NOMINATE (CIRCLE) ITS CHOSEN NAMED OR SPECIFIED MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS
ITEM 1 -
A. B. C. D.
ITEM 2 -
A. B. C. D.
ITEMS NAMED OR SPECIFIED (ENTERED BY THE PROFESSIONAL) CONTRACTOR TO NOMINATE (CIRCLE) MICHSPEC DTMB
00440 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR) ITEM OF MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT
QUALIFICATION SUBMITTAL
SPECIFICATION SECTION
ITS CHOSEN NAMED OR SPECIFIED MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS
ITEM 3 -
ITEM 4 -
MICHSPEC DTMB
00440 2
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
QUALIFICATION SUBMITTAL
1.7 Use of "Or Equal" or Substitute Materials or Equipment After Contract Award 1.7.1. Paragraph 5.2 of Section 00700 General Conditions provides for the consideration (after the date of Contract Award) and possible acceptance by the Professional of "or equal" or substitute materials or equipment (unless any material or equipment named is followed by words establishing that no "or equal" or substitution is permitted). If sufficient information is submitted to allow the Professional to determine in a timely manner that the material or equipment proposed is equivalent or equal to that named or described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications, then the Professional will consider the proposed "or equal" or substitute material or equipment. 1.7.2. The Apparent Low Bidder assumes responsibility for the cost and time required to make any proposed "or equal" or substitute material or equipment approved by the Professional conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. In addition, if any such "or equal" or substitute material or equipment requires any changes in the drawings, or in any testing requirements, or in any Means and Methods indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, or in work performed by the Owner or others, or requires any other changes in the Work whatsoever, the Apparent Low Bidder shall assume full responsibility for the cost and the time required to carry out such changes in the Work or the work of others. Pursuant to this provision, the Apparent Low Bidder shall bear an appropriate portion of the Delay and costs resulting from the events contemplated in this paragraph. 1.7.3. Paragraph 5.2 of Section 00700 General Conditions provides for reimbursement by the Contractor to the Owner for any additional expenses incurred by the Professional directly attributable to the evaluation of any proposed substitute material or equipment and any proposed “or equal” material or equipment for materials and equipment listed in Schedule 1.6. 1.7.4. The Apparent Low Bidder shall insert the provisions of this Article 1 of Section 00440 Schedule of Materials and Equipment in all Subagreements with Subcontractors and Suppliers furnishing any materials or equipment, altering the respective paragraphs only as appropriate to properly identify the contracting parties. Each such Subagreement shall expressly bind the respective Subcontractor or Supplier to the conditions of paragraph 1.7.2, the other provisions of this Section 00440 Schedule of Materials And Equipment and paragraph 5.2 of Section 00700 General Conditions.
MICHSPEC DTMB
00440 3
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
QUALIFICATION SUBMITTAL
ARTICLE 2 BID MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT OPEN SPECIFICATIONS 2.1. For those Specifications not listed in Schedule 1.6, the Apparent Low Bidder, if and when awarded the Contract, shall disclose to the Owner and Professional (when submitting the Schedule of Values required by paragraph 12.1.1 of Section 00700 General Conditions) the Bidder's chosen manufacturers/Suppliers for the corresponding materials and equipment specified in the Specifications and Drawings (including all Addenda). 2.2. The Apparent Low Bidder has examined the requirements of paragraphs 7.2 and 7.3 of the Instructions to Bidders and commits to furnish materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the Specifications. If any such Bidder-selected material or equipment represents an "or equal" or a substitute material or equipment, no such material or equipment shall be used or furnished in the execution of the Work unless previously approved by the Professional as an acceptable “or equal” or substitute material or equipment. Application for any such acceptance will not be considered until after Contract Award. Any such application shall comply with the terms and conditions of this Article 2 and paragraph 5.2 of Section 00700 General Conditions. 2.3. The Apparent Low Bidder shall insert the provisions of this Section in all Subagreements with Subcontractors and Suppliers furnishing the materials or equipment listed in Schedule 2.4, altering the respective paragraphs only as appropriate to properly identify the contracting parties. Each such Subagreement shall expressly bind the respective Subcontractor or Supplier to the conditions of paragraph 2.2, the other provisions of this Section 00440 Schedule of Materials and Equipment and paragraph 5.2 of Section 00700 General Conditions. 2.4. Schedule of Bid Materials and Equipment
MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT
CONTRACTOR TO NAME ITS CHOSEN MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS
SPECIFICATION SECTION
ITEM 1 ITEM 2 ITEM 3 ITEM 4 ITEM 5 ITEM 6 ITEM 6 ITEM 7 ITEM 8 ITEM 9ITEM 10 ITEM 11ITEM 12 -
MICHSPEC DTMB
00440 4
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT
QUALIFICATION SUBMITTAL
SPECIFICATION SECTION
CONTRACTOR TO NAME ITS CHOSEN MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS
IMPORTANT: The provisions of this Section 00440 Schedule of Materials and Equipment shall not create or impose any express or implied duty or obligation on the Owner or Professional to exercise this authority for the benefit of the Apparent Low Bidder or any listed manufacturer/Supplier. The undersigned Apparent Low Bidder __________________________________________________ certifies that all the information and data furnished in this Section 00440 Schedule of Materials and Equipment are current, accurate and complete as of the date stated below.
Signed by: ____________________________ Name _______________________________ Title ________________________ on this __________ day of ____________________, 20_______.
END OF SECTION 00440
MICHSPEC DTMB
00440 5
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
This is a Cover Sheet to the State’s Owner and Contractor Standard Construction Contract, known as the MICHSPEC Division 0 Specifications. The MICHSPEC Division 0 Specifications have been developed from the FORMSPEC Michigan Model, 1997 Edition. Although the State’s 2008 Version of the Division 0 Specifications are written as simply as practical, it is nonetheless advisable to consult with companion Guide to Specifiers when preparing specifications for a specific project. These Division 0 Specifications were developed by incorporating provisions and requirements furnished by the State into the FORMSPEC Michigan Model. These Division 0 Specifications have undergone detailed technical reviews by Department of Technology, Management and Budget, Facilities and Business Services Administration representatives and detailed legal reviews by the Department of the Attorney General for the State of Michigan. Specifiers are encouraged to consult with a Division 0 specifications specialist or an attorney knowledgeable in public contracts when preparing specifications for a specific project.
STATE OF MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TECHNOLOGY, MANAGEMENT AND BUDGET FACILITIES AND BUSINESS SERVICES ADMINISTRATION
MICHSPEC 2008 VERSION, OWNER AND CONTRACTOR STANDARD CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT MICHSPEC No. 97.0820 00500 THROUGH 97.0820 00800 RELEASED ON NOVEMBER 1, 1997; Developed from Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract FORMSPEC Michigan Model and suggested for use with Bidding Requirements
1997 Edition/2011 Version
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SECTION 00500
AGREEMENT
AGREEMENT
AGENCY No. _________ INDEX No. __________ FILE No. _________ CONTRACT ORDER No. Y_________ All Rights Reserved ____________________________________________________
TABLE OF CONTENTS Article
Page
1* THE CONTRACT; THE PROJECT; THE WORK
1
2** CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1
3** CONTRACT PRICE
2
4* CONTRACT TIME; LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
2
5
3
PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR
6* THE PROFESSIONAL SERVICES CONTRACTOR
3
7
CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS
3
8
MISCELLANEOUS
3
9
NOTICE AND SERVICE
4
* To be Completed With the Bidding Documents ** To Be Completed Upon Award of the Contract ** __________________________________________________ **THIS AGREEMENT TO CONTRACT is made this _______ day of ___________ in the year Two-Thousand And ______________ (______) by and between THE STATE OF MICHIGAN, "Owner,” represented by the Director, Department of Technology, Management
and
Budget,
____________________________,
duly
authorized,
and
______________________
the "Contractor,” a corporation ____, partnership ____, individual ____,
or
joint
venture
____
(between
_________________________________________________ and ______________________________________________), of the
1.2. PROJECT NAME 1.3. THE WORK ARTICLE 2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 2.1. The Contract Documents form the contract between the Owner and Contractor, and represent the entire and final integrated agreement between the Owner and Contractor with respect to the Work. The Contract Documents are incorporated into this Agreement by this reference, and supersede all prior oral or written agreements, if any, between the Owner and Contractor. Any statement, representation, promise or inducement not set forth in the Contract Documents is null and void, and not binding on either the Owner or Contractor. The Contract Documents shall not in any way create a relationship of any kind between the Professional and Contractor, or between the Owner and a Subcontractor, or Supplier or any other third party. The Professional shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract that are consistent with the Professional's authority and responsibilities under the Contract Documents. 2.2. The Contract Documents on the date when the Owner executes this Section 00500 Agreement, which are attached to this Section 00500 Agreement, consist of the following: 2.2.1. This Section 00500 Agreement, fully executed by the Owner and Contractor, including the following attachments: construction documents and Addenda ____ through ____.
State of ____________, whose address is __________________
_______________________, its ____________, duly authorized.
2.2.2. Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions, including ____________________________________________; and Section 00120 Supplementary Instructions, including ____ ____________________________________________________
The Owner and Contractor, in consideration of the mutual covenants and obligations stated in this Section 00500 Agreement and the other parts of the Contract Documents, agree as follows:
2.2.3. Section 00020 Glossary, and Section 00700 General Conditions.
ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT; THE PROJECT; THE WORK
2.2.4. General Requirements, Division 1 of the Specifications.
1.1. THE CONTRACT The Contract entered between the Owner and Contractor for the furnishing and performance of the Work by the Contractor, which consists of the Contract Documents listed or designated in paragraphs 2.2 through 2.4. ____________________________________________________
2.2.5. Divisions 2 through 33 of the Specifications, and Drawings, bearing the title: Armory Modifications, dated May 2, 2014.
_______________________________________, represented by
STATE OF MICHIGAN MODEL Developed from FORMSPEC Michigan Model
2.2.6. Section 00030 Advertisement; Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders, including Attachment ABidder's Check List, and Section 00210 Information for Bidders.
1986 2002 PMA Consultants LLC
MICHSPEC DTMB
00500 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
AGREEMENT
2.2.7. Section 00610 Performance Bond and Section 00620 Payment Bond, fully executed by the Contractor and the sureties, each enclosing separate evidence of Power of Attorney. 2.2.8. The Contractor's Section 00300 Bid Summary and Bid Form (with attachments) and Section 00320 Noncollusion Affidavit (including any revisions delivered after Bid opening). 2.2.9. The following Contractor's Qualification Submittals (post-Bid opening:) _____________________________________ 2.3. Contract Documents that will be issued after the date the Owner executes this Section 00500 Agreement consist of: 2.3.1. Change Orders and Change Authorizations signed as provided in the Contract Documents. 2.3.2. Notice of Award and Notice to Proceed. 2.4. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed or designated in this Article or added through Section 00520 Attachment A to the Agreement. The Contract Documents may be modified, as provided in Section 00700 General Conditions.
suffer costs and damages if the Work is not completed within the Contract Times, including any extensions in Contract Time authorized by Change Orders. Therefore, liquidated damages (in the amounts specified in paragraphs 4.2.3 through 4.2.5) will apply, if the Work is not completed within the limits of the Contract Times. Liquidated damages are not a penalty, are cumulative and represent a reasonable estimate of the Owner's extra costs and damages, which are difficult to estimate with accuracy in advance. 4.2.1. Accordingly, if the Contractor fails, neglects or refuses to complete all or any designated part of the Work within the specified Contract Time, the Contractor agrees to pay to the Owner liquidated damages and to allow, at the appropriate time, a corresponding adjustment in Contract Price. 4.2.2. If under the procedures of paragraph 4.3, the Owner is justified in withholding liquidated damages due to or in anticipation of late completion, the Contractor agrees to allow the Owner to deduct liquidated damages from Requests for Payment. 4.2.3. Liquidated damages for each Calendar Day that expires after the Contract Time specified in paragraph 4.1.1 for Substantial Completion of the entire Work until the Work is substantially complete shall be in the amount of three hundred Dollars and No/Cents ($300.00)
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACT PRICE 3.1. The Contractor will furnish and perform the Work and accept in full payment the Contract Price of __________________ ______________________________ Dollars ($_____________). The Contract Price includes only those Alternates accepted by the Owner, as itemized in the Notice of Award. 3.2. The Contract will include those Change Order prices (bid on Section 00300 Bid Form) accepted by the Owner when the Owner issues the Notice to Proceed or by Change Authorization. 3.3. Payments to the Contractor will be made based on the prices stated on the Contractor's Section 00300 Bid Form, subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT TIME; LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 4.1. The periods allowed for completion of the Work, or a designated part of the Work, will be as follows: 4.1.1. The entire Work will be substantially complete in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: within 180 calendar days. 4.1.2. If separable parts of the Work shall be completed before the period allowed for Substantial Completion of the entire Work, the Contract Times for those parts of the Work will be as specified in Section 00520 Attachment A to Agreement, and as may be supplemented in the Specifications. 4.1.3. The entire Work will be complete and ready for final payment as specified in the Contract Documents: 30 calendar days after substantial completion. 4.2. The Owner and Contractor recognize that the Contract Times are of the essence of the Contract and that the Owner will MICHSPEC DTMB
4.2.4. Liquidated damages for each Calendar Day that expires after each of the Contract Times designated in Section 00520 Attachment A to the Agreement until each such part of the Work is sufficiently complete shall be in the amounts stated in Section 00520 Attachment A to the Agreement. 4.2.5. Liquidated damages for each Calendar Day after Substantial Completion of the entire Work that expires after the Contract Time specified in paragraph 4.1.3 for completion and readiness for final payment until the entire Work is complete and ready for final payment shall be in the amount of two hundred Dollars and No/Cents ($200.00) Assessment and/or Withholding of Liquidated Damages 4.3. If the Contractor fails to complete the Work, or a specified part of the Work, within the corresponding Contract Time, or if at any time after the Work is eighty percent (80%) in place, the Contractor does not prosecute the balance of the Work with the diligence required to comply with the Contract Times, the Contractor shall be requested to submit a schedule recovery plan acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor’s schedule recovery plan shall describe the cause of schedule slippage or delayed progress and the actions proposed and taken to recover schedule. In addition, to the extent that the Contractor believes that an extension in Contract Time is justified, the recovery plan shall include a request for an appropriate extension in Contract Time. 4.3.1. Within fifteen (15) Calendar Days after the Contractor receives any such request, the Contractor shall meet with the Owner and present the Contractor’s written schedule recovery plan. If, upon evaluation of the Contractors’ schedule recovery plan, and after consultation with the Professional, the Owner, in its sole discretion, determines that there is sufficient cause to withhold liquidated damages, the Owner may deduct from Requests for Payment the liquidated damages then due or that
00500 2
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
AGREEMENT
would become due using the Owner's estimate of late completion of the Work. 4.3.2. For the purposes of returning liquidated damages, schedule recovery implementation shall not be complete until such slippage or delayed progress has been corrected and the Progress Schedule once again supports compliance with the Contract Times. Once late completion has been corrected, the Contractor shall be entitled to reimbursement of all liquidated damage sums previously withheld. Any such reimbursement of liquidated damages previously withheld shall not constitute a waiver of any claims that the Owner may otherwise have. ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR *5.1. The Owner will pay one hundred percent (100%) of the amount due upon completion of any Schedule of Value pay item. The Professional may require, for each Request for Payment, consent of surety, waivers of lien (from the Contractor, Subcontractors and Suppliers), Record Documents, guarantees, operating and maintenance manuals and such other documents required by the Contract Documents. Payment to the Contractor will be made within thirty (30) Calendar Days from receipt by the Owner of the Professional’s certification representing to the Owner the amount of payment to be due to the Contractor. *5.2. Processing of Requests for Payment by the Owner may be deferred until Work having a prior sequence, as provided in the Contract Documents, is in place and is approved. 5.3. Payments shall be subject to the terms and conditions of Section 00700 General Conditions and the other parts of the Contract Documents, and shall be made less such deductions as the Owner and/or Professional determines are appropriate, as specified in paragraph 12.4 of Section 00700 General Conditions. 5.4. If any portion of the Work is funded by a federal or State agency, the Owner will have fifteen (15) Calendar Days after receiving those funds in which to make payment. This provision shall take effect only after the thirty (30) Calendar Day period following certification by the Professional has expired. ARTICLE 6 THE PROFESSIONAL SERVICES CONTRACTOR 6.1. The Owner has retained Paradigm Design, Inc. to assume all duties and responsibilities of, and have the rights and authority assigned to, the Professional Services Contractor in the Contract Documents with respect to completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 7 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.1. The Contractor reiterates and makes each of the representations itemized in Article 2 of the Contractor's Section 00300 Bid Form. Article 2 in the Contractor's Section 00300 Bid Form is by this reference repeated verbatim in this Section 00500 Agreement as paragraphs 7.2 through 7.13 just as though those paragraphs had been written in this Article 7, except that the term "Contractor" shall replace the term "Bidder" in every instance.
MICHSPEC DTMB
ARTICLE 8 MISCELLANEOUS 8.1. If any provision of the Contract Documents is invalid, illegal or unenforceable, all other provisions of the Contract Documents shall remain in full force and effect. If any provision of the Contract Documents is inapplicable to any Person or circumstance, that provision shall remain applicable to all other Persons and circumstances. 8.2. It is the intent of the Owner and Contractor that all provisions of Law required to be inserted or referenced in the Contract Documents are in fact so inserted or referenced. If any provision of Law is not so inserted or referenced, or is inserted or referenced improperly, then each such provision shall be considered inserted or referenced in the Contract Documents in proper form at no increase in Contract Price and/or Contract Time. 8.3. The duties, obligations, criteria or procedure imposed by, and the rights and remedies made available in, the Contract Documents are in addition to, and not in any way a limitation of, any rights and remedies that are otherwise allowed or imposed by Law, except that in the event a specific part or detailed requirement of a provision, criterion or procedure in the Contract Documents and a specific part or detailed requirement of a provision, criterion or procedure imposed by Law conflict, the specific part or detailed requirement of such provision, criterion or procedure imposed by Law shall govern. All other specific parts or detailed requirements in the provisions, criteria or procedures imposed by Law and the Contract Documents shall remain in full force and effect and be read with the controlling specific part or detailed requirement. These provisions will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 8.4. The Contractor shall not sell, assign, transfer or otherwise convey any of the Contractor's rights and shall not delegate any of the Contractor's duties under this Agreement without the prior written consent of the Owner and the sureties for the Contractor. In its sole discretion, the Owner may refuse to consent to any proposed assignment or delegation. Any attempted sale, assignment, transfer or other conveyance in violation of this paragraph shall be void and shall relieve the Owner of any further liability under the Contract Documents but shall not relieve the Contractor's sureties of any liability. If the Owner consents in writing to an assignment, unless specifically stated to the contrary in the consent, that assignment shall not release or discharge the Contractor from any duty or responsibility set forth in the Contract Documents, and shall not release or discharge the Contractor's sureties under the Bonds required by the Contract Documents. 8.5. The Owner reserves the right to correct any error in any Request for Payment that may have been paid. The Owner reserves the right, should proof of Defective Work be discovered after final payment, to claim and recover from the Contractor and/or the Contractor's surety(ies), sufficient sums to correct or remove and replace the Defective Work. 8.6. Any waiver by the Owner of any provision of the Contract Documents shall be specific and in writing and apply only to the specific matter and not to other similar or dissimilar matters. Any waiver of any breach of this Contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach.
00500 3
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
AGREEMENT
8.7. Nothing contained in this Agreement shall in any manner authorize, empower or constitute the Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers (a) to act as agents of the Owner, (b) to assume or create any obligation or responsibility whatsoever, express or implied, on behalf of or in the name of the Owner; (c) to bind the Owner in any manner, or (d) to make any representation, warranty, covenant, agreement or commitment on behalf of the Owner. It is the intent and understanding of the parties that the Contractor shall perform the Work as an independent contractor. This Agreement does not create, and shall not be construed as creating, any rights enforceable by any third party. 8.8. If the Owner or Contractor suffers injury or damage to person or property because of error, omission or act of the other, any of the other's employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observation of that injury or damage. This provision is not and shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or time requirements set forth in Section 00700 General Conditions. 8.9. All computer programs which are not the subject of copyrights by third parties and which are delivered, developed, produced or paid for under a specific requirement of the Contract Documents and all plans, drawings, designs, specifications, technical reports, operating manuals and other data which are delivered, developed, produced or paid for under the Contract Documents shall be the property of the Owner. The Owner maintains all rights to such programs and deliverables, including the right to use, duplicate, and disclose the programs and deliverables, in whole or in part, in any manner and for any purpose. If any program or deliverable is copyrightable, the Contractor may copyright it subject to the Owner's rights. The Owner reserves a royalty-free, nonexclusive and irrevocable
license to use, duplicate, publish and disclose such programs and deliverables, in whole or in part, and to authorize others to do so. 8.10. The Contractor warrants that all costs in proposals and claims for adjustments in Contract Price shall not exceed those allowed under the Contract Documents, and that proposals and claims for adjustments in Contract Price shall grant prices, terms and warranties comparable to or better than prices, terms and warranties offered to others for similar work. 8.11. This Agreement shall be binding on the Contractor, Owner and their respective successors and legal representatives and, if the Owner has consented to an assignment or other conveyance, on all their respective assigns and delegates. *8.12. The Contract Documents shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the Laws of the State of Michigan in effect on the date of Bid opening. Any change in Michigan Law after that date shall be binding only to the extent the Owner and Contractor agree or to the extent such change is beyond the capacity of the parties to avoid. ARTICLE 9 NOTICE AND SERVICE 9.1. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or consented to by the Owner in writing, any notice, demand or communication shall be in writing and shall be deemed to have been given when received by the individual required to be given notice at the address designated in this Agreement. A copy of any notice, demand or notification shall be sent to the address below. 9.2. Any written notice or other written communication to the sureties shall be sufficiently given if delivered to the individual required to be given notice at the address designated in the Bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner and Contractor have signed this Section 00500 Agreement in triplicate and initialed three (3) full sets of the Contract Documents. One (1) full set of the executed Contract Documents will be delivered to the Contractor. THE STATE OF MICHIGAN
THE CONTRACTOR
BY: ______________________________________________
BY: ______________________________________________ Title: Date
Director, Department of Technology, Management and Budget
NAME: ___________________________________________
NAME: ___________________________________________
Witness: __________________________________________
Federal Identification (I.D.) No. or Social Security No. ____________________________
Date: _____________________________________________ Telephone No. _____________________________________ Address for giving notices: Witness: __________________________________________ Department of Technology, Management and Budget Facilities and Business Services Administration st 1 Floor, Stevens T. Mason Building P.O. Box 30026 Lansing, MI 48909
MICHSPEC DTMB
Date: _____________________________________________ Address for giving notices:
00500 4
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
AGREEMENT
CERTIFICATE OF PRINCIPAL (If Contractor is Other Than a Sole Proprietor) I, _________________________, certify that I am the Secretary of the Corporation ____, or a General Partner ____ or Managing Partner ____ or Partner ____ of the partnership, named as the Contractor in the attached Section 00500 Agreement, that __________________ _____________ who signed Section 00500 Agreement on behalf of the Contractor, was then __________________ of that corporation ___ or partnership ___; that I know the undersigned's signature, and the signature is genuine; and that Section 00500 Agreement was duly signed, sealed and attested for and on behalf of that corporation ___ partnership ___ by authority of its governing body ___ or partners ___
___________________________________________________________________________ Signed by the Secretary or Other Authorized Officer of the Corporation Date or By General Partner or Managing Partner or Authorized Partner Certifying
________________________________________________________________________ Name of the Corporation or True Name of the Partnership
Federal Identification (I.D.) No. or Social Security No. _________________________________
Telephone No. _______________________________
(Corporate Seal)
VERIFICATION (by Contractor) STATE OF __________________ ) ) COUNTY OF ________________ ) Before me, a Notary Public duly commissioned, qualified and acting, personally appeared (enter name of person who signed Section 00500 Agreement on behalf of the Bidder), ______________________________________ to me well known, who being by me first duly sworn upon oath, says that he/she is the Attorney-In-Fact for (enter the Contractor's name) ____________________________________ ____________________________ and that he/she has been authorized by (enter name of individual, partnership name, or that governing body of the Bidder named in the attached corporate resolution) __________________________________________________________ to execute Section 00500 Agreement on behalf of the named Contractor in favor of the STATE OF MICHIGAN. Subscribed and sworn before me this __________ day of ______________________________, A.D., 20________. __________________________________________________ Notary Public, State of ____________________ My Commission Expires: ____________________________________
MICHSPEC DTMB
00500 5
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
AGREEMENT
RESOLUTION OF CORPORATE AUTHORITY (If Contractor is a Corporation)
I, __________________________, Corporate Officer of ______________________________________, a ________________________ (Print or type) Corporation (the "Company") (Indicate State) DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the following is a true and correct excerpt from the minutes of the meeting of the Board of Directors, wherein a quorum was present, duly called and held on _______________________ and that the same is now in full force and effect: "RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, each Vice President, the Treasurer, and the Secretary and each of them, hereby is authorized to execute and deliver, in the name and on behalf of the Company and under its corporate seal or otherwise, any agreement or other instrument or document in connection with any matter or transaction that shall have been duly approved; the execution and delivery of any agreement, document, or other instrument, or document in connection with any matter or transaction that shall have been duly approved; the execution and delivery of any agreement, document, or other instrument by any of such officers to be conclusive evidence of such approval." I FURTHER CERTIFY that _____________________________ is Chairman of the Board, __________________________________ is President, ______________________________ is Treasurer, and ______________________________ is Secretary. I FURTHER CERTIFY that any of the officers of the Company named in this Resolution of Corporate Authority are authorized to execute or guarantee and commit the Company to the conditions, obligations, stipulations and undertakings contained in the Contract Documents for Agency No. __________, Index No. ___________, File No. ___________ Work _____________________________________________, _________________________________________ and that all necessary corporate approvals have been obtained in relationship thereto. IN WITNESS THEREOF, I have set my hand this _____ day of ____________________, 20___.
CORPORATE SEAL
_____________________________________________________________ Corporate Officer's Signature
_____________________________________________________________ Title Federal Identification (I.D.) No. or Social Security No. ______________________ Telephone No. _______________________________
MICHSPEC DTMB
00500 6
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
AGREEMENT
CERTIFICATE OF PARTNERSHIP AUTHORITY (If Contractor is a Partnership)
I, ______________________________, General Partner in ________________________________________, a ___________________ (Print or Type) Partnership (the "Partnership") (Indicate State) DO HEREBY CERTIFY that I am a General Partner in the Partnership formulated pursuant to a Partnership Agreement dated ____________________________________, 20___, and that the following is a true and correct excerpt from the minutes of the meeting of the General Partnership held on ____________________ and that the same is now in full force and effect: "That each General Partner is authorized to execute and deliver, in the name and on behalf of the Partnership, any agreement or other instrument or document in connection with any matter or transaction that shall have been duly approved; the execution and delivery of any agreement, document, or other instrument, or document in connection with any matter or transaction that shall have been duly approved; the execution and delivery of any agreement, document, or other instrument by a General Partner to be conclusive evidence of such approval." I FURTHER CERTIFY that any of the aforementioned General Partners of the Partnership are authorized to execute or guarantee and commit the assets of the Partnership to the conditions, obligations, stipulations and undertakings contained in the Contract Documents for Agency No. _________, Index No. ___________, File No. ___________ Work ______________________________________________, _______________________________________ and that all necessary partnership approvals have been obtained in relationship thereto. IN WITNESS THEREOF, I have set my hand this _____ day of ____________________, 20___.
_______________________________________________________________ General Partner's Signature _______________________________________________________________ Title Federal Identification (I.D.) No. or Social Security No. ________________________ Telephone No. _______________________________
END OF SECTION 00500
MICHSPEC DTMB
00500 7
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR) SECTION 00520
ATTACHMENT A TO AGREEMENT
ATTACHMENT “A” TO AGREEMENT
PROFESSIONAL Paradigm Design, Inc. WORK
Armory Modifications
AGENCY No.
511 INDEX No. 13721, 13921 FILE No. 511/13007.CAK
This Section 00520 Attachment A to Agreement supplements those specific provisions in Section 00500 Agreement designated below. All other provisions in Section 00500 Agreement that are not so supplemented remain in full force and effect. The terms “Agreement”, “Contract Documents” and “Contract” have specific intents and meanings assigned as stated in Section 00500 Agreement and Section 00020 Glossary. SUPPLEMENTARY TERMS AND CONDITIONS TO ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT TIME; LIQUIDATED DAMAGES The following separable parts of the Work will be completed, as specified in the Contract Documents: (a) within _________ (___) Days from the date when the Contract Time commences to run, or on or before _____________, 20____. (b) within _________ (___) Days from the date when the Contract Time commences to run, or on or before _____________, 20____. (c) within _________ (___) Days from the date when the Contract Time commences to run, or on or before _____________, 20____.
These interim Contract Times are of the essence so as to: (a) not Delay work by others as provided in Article 13 of the General Conditions; (b) conform to the sequences of Work indicated in or required by the Contract documents; and (c) comply with the coordination requirements of the Contract Documents. The Owner and Contractor recognize that the Contract Time(s) specified in this Attachment A is(are) of the essence to this Agreement in that the Owner will suffer costs and damages if the Work is not completed within the Contract Time(s) plus any extensions authorized in accordance with Section 00700 General Conditions. Accordingly, liquidated damages will apply based on the following schedule: (a) ____ ___________________________________________________________________________ Dollars and No/Cents ($______________); (b) ____________________________________________________________________ Dollars and No/Cents ($ _______________); and (c) ____________________________________________________________________ Dollars and No/Cents ($_______________) for each Calendar Day that expires after each of the respective Contract Times specified in this Section 00520 Attachment A to the Agreement for the completion of each of those designated parts of the Work, respectively, until each of those parts of the Work is complete. Any deduction by the Owner of liquidated damages from Requests for Payment shall be undertaken only after consultation with the Professional and shall be subject to the procedures outlined in paragraph 4.3, Section 00500 Agreement.
END OF SECTION 00520
MICHSPEC DTMB
00520 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SECTION 00610
PERFORMANCE BOND
PERFORMANCE BOND
AGENCY No. 511 INDEX No. 13721, 13921 FILE No. 511/13007.CAK SURETY COMPANY REFERENCE No. _________ KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That "the Contractor," ___________________________________________________, a corporation ___, individual ___, partnership ___, joint venture ___ of the State of __________________, qualified to do business in the State of Michigan, as Principal, and "the Surety," ____________________________________________________________________, of the State of _________________, as surety, are hereby held and firmly bound unto the State of Michigan, "the Owner," as Obligee, in the amount of __________________________________________________________________________ Dollars ($_________________), for the payment of which the Contractor and Surety hereby bind themselves, their respective heirs, successors, legal representatives and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents in compliance with 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq. WHEREAS, the Contractor has entered into "the Contract" with the Owner for _______________________________________________ _______________, "the Work," covered by the Contract Documents, which are incorporated into this Performance Bond by this reference; NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS THAT, if the Contractor faithfully performs and fulfills all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, warranties, indemnifications and agreements of the Contract Documents within the Contract Time (including any authorized changes, with or without notice to the Surety) and during the Correction Period, and if the Contractor also performs and fulfills all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, warranties, indemnifications and agreements of any and all duly authorized modifications of the Contract Documents, then THIS OBLIGATION SHALL BE NULL AND VOID, OTHERWISE TO REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT. A. No change in Contract Price or Contract Time, "or equal" or substitution or modification of the Contract Documents (including addition, deletion or other revision) shall release the Surety of its obligations under this Section 00610 Performance Bond. The Surety hereby expressly waives notice of any such change in Contract Price or Contract Time, "or equal" or substitution or
modification of the Contract Documents (including addition, deletion or other revision). B. This Section 00610 Performance Bond shall be solely for the protection of the Owner and its successors, legal representatives or assigns. The prevailing party in a suit on this Bond is entitled to recover as part of that party's judgment reasonable attorneys' fees. C. It is the intention of the Contractor and Surety that they shall be bound by all terms and conditions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to Article 14 of Section 00700 General Conditions and this Section 00610 Performance Bond). However, this Section 00610 Performance Bond is executed pursuant to 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq., and if any provision(s) of this Section 00610 Performance Bond is/are illegal, invalid or unenforceable, all other provisions of this Section 00610 Performance Bond shall nevertheless remain in full force and effect, and the Owner shall be protected to the full extent provided by 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq.
IMPORTANT: The Surety shall be authorized to do business in the State of Michigan by the Department of Consumer and Industry Services Insurance Bureau, shall be listed on the current U.S. Department of the Treasury Circular 570, and, unless otherwise authorized by the Owner in writing, shall have at least an A Best's rating and a Class VII or better financial size category per current A. M. Best Company ratings. Name, Address and Telephone of the Surety:
Address and Telephone of Agent, who is either a resident of, or whose principal office is maintained in, the State of Michigan
Signed and sealed this __________ day of _______________________, 20_____. THE CONTRACTOR: (Print Full Name and Sign)
By: __________________________________________________________
WITNESS ______________________________
Name & Title: __________________________________________________ Telephone No. _________________________________________________
THE SURETY: (Print Full Name and Sign)
Agent: _______________________________________________________
WITNESS ______________________________
Attorney-in-Fact: _______________________________________________ Telephone No. ________________________________________________ END OF SECTION 00610
MICHSPEC DTMB
00610 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SECTION 00620
PAYMENT BOND
PAYMENT BOND
AGENCY No. 511 INDEX No. 13721, 13921 FILE No.511/13007.CAK SURETY COMPANY REFERENCE No.__________
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That "the Contractor," ___________________________________________________, a corporation ___, individual ___, partnership ___, joint venture ___ of the State of __________________, qualified to do business in the State of Michigan, as Principal, and "the Surety," ____________________________________________________________________, of the State of _________________, as surety, are hereby held and firmly bound unto the State of Michigan, "the Owner," as Obligee, in the amount of __________________________________________________________________________ Dollars ($_________________), for the payment of which the Contractor and Surety hereby bind themselves, their respective heirs, successors, legal representatives and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents in compliance with 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq. WHEREAS, the Contractor has entered into "the Contract" with the Owner for _____________________________________________ __________________, "the Work," covered by the Contract Documents, which are incorporated into this Payment Bond by this reference; NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS THAT, if the Contractor promptly pays all claimants supplying labor or materials to the Contractor or to the Contractor's Subcontractors in the prosecution of the Work, then THIS OBLIGATION SHALL BE NULL AND VOID, OTHERWISE TO REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT. A. All rights and remedies on this Section 00620 Payment Bond shall be solely for the protection of all claimants supplying labor and materials to the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors in the prosecution of the Work, and shall be determined in accordance with Michigan Law. B. No change in Contract Price or Contract Time, "or equal" or substitution or modification of the Contract Documents (including addition, deletion or other revision) shall release the Surety of its
obligations under this Section 00620 Payment Bond. The Surety hereby expressly waives notice of any such change in Contract Price or Contract Time, "or equal" or substitution or modification of the Contract Documents (including addition, deletion or other revision). C. It is the intention of the Contractor and Surety that they shall be bound by all terms and conditions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to this Section 00620 Payment Bond). However, this Section 00620 Payment Bond is executed pursuant to 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq., and if any provision(s) of this Section 00620 Payment Bond is/are illegal, invalid or unenforceable, all other provisions of this Section 00620 Payment Bond shall nevertheless remain in full force and effect, and the Owner shall be protected to the full extent provided by 1963 PA 213, as amended, MCL 129.201 et seq.
IMPORTANT: The Surety shall be authorized to do business in the State of Michigan by the Department of Consumer and Industry Services Insurance Bureau, shall be listed on the current U.S. Department of the Treasury Circular 570, and, unless otherwise authorized by the Owner in writing, shall have at least an A Best's rating and a Class VII or better financial size category per current A. M. Best Company ratings. Name, Address and Telephone of the Surety:
Address and Telephone of Agent, who is either a resident of, or whose principal office is maintained in, the State of Michigan
Signed and sealed this __________ day of _______________________, 20_____. THE CONTRACTOR: (Print Full Name and Sign)
By: __________________________________________________________
WITNESS ______________________________
Name & Title: __________________________________________________ Telephone No. _________________________________________________
THE SURETY: (Print Full Name and Sign)
Agent: _______________________________________________________
WITNESS ______________________________
Attorney-in-Fact: _______________________________________________ Telephone No. ________________________________________________
MICHSPEC DTMB
00620 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
PAYMENT BOND
END OF SECTION 00620
MICHSPEC DTMB
00620 2
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR) SECTION 00700
GENERAL CONDITIONS
GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1 INTERPRETATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS Article
Page
1 INTERPRETATIONS
1
2 THE OWNER GENERAL PROVISIONS
3
3 THE PROFESSIONAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
4
4 CONTROL OF WORK GENERAL PROVISIONS
5
5 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS
8
1.1 Section 00020 Glossary: 1.1.1. Section 00020 Glossary assigns specific intent and meanings to capitalized terms and to other defined terms used in this Section 00700 General Conditions, Section 00500 Agreement, Section 00520 Attachment A to the Agreement, Section 00610 Performance Bond, Section 00620 Payment Bond and Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions. 1.1.2. Section 00020 Glossary also provides specific rules for construing any reference to any Article or paragraph that is made in this Section 00700 General Conditions.
6 SUBMITTALS
10
7 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS; INSURANCE
11
1.2 Intent of the Contract Documents:
8 PROSECUTION; SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
16
9 WARRANTY; TESTS, INSPECTIONS AND APPROVALS; CORRECTION OF WORK
18
10 CHANGES
20
1.2.1. The intent of the Contract Documents is to describe the entire Work, including its various parts, to the extent necessary for the Contractor to discharge its obligation to execute and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all Contract Documents.
11 CHANGES IN CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGES IN CONTRACT TIME
23
12 PROGRESS PAYMENTS; FINAL PAYMENT
28
13 OTHER WORK
30
14 TERMINATION
31
15 DISPUTES 33 __________________________________________________ STATE OF MICHIGAN MODEL Developed from FORMSPEC Michigan Model These Model Specifications, known as the MICHSPEC 97.0820 Model Specifications, Sections 00500 through 00700 have been licensed to the State of Michigan, Department of Technology, Management and Budget (DTMB). Title to and use of these Specifications is strictly restricted. Except as authorized in writing by the Department of Technology, Management and Budget, Facilities and Business Services Administration, or as may be appropriate for their use in the bidding and execution of the Work, reproduction, translation or substantial use or quotation of any part of any of these Specifications beyond that permitted by the 1976 United States Copyright Act without the prior written permission is unlawful. Provisions marked with an asterisk have been furnished by the DTMB or have been taken from DTMB provided contracts, and are excluded from this copyright limitation. Written requests for information about FORMSPEC™ should be made to PMA Consultants LLC, Ann Arbor, MI (734-769-0530). __________________________________________________
1.2.2. The entire Work required by the Contract Documents includes Work, which is reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom and trade usage. The Contractor shall provide any Work reasonably inferable to the extent such Work is required to properly complete the installation of other Work expressly shown or specified in the Contract Documents. If the Contractor disagrees that Work that is not expressly shown or detailed in the Contract Documents is Work reasonably inferable, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 10.1.3. 1.2.3. The breakdown of the Work by Divisions and Sections, or the identification of any Drawing, shall not delineate or be construed to delineate Work to be performed by any trade. The breakdown shall not control the manner in which the Work may be divided by the Contractor among Subcontractors and Suppliers. *1.2.4. Reference to the State Construction Code Act of 1972, 1972 PA 230, as amended, MCL 125.1501 et seq., or to standard specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, whether specifically or by implication, means the issue in effect on the date of Bid opening, unless otherwise expressly stated. Work indicated in or required by the Contract Documents that is above standards set in the State Construction Code shall be provided to the higher standard. 1.2.5. The provisions of the Contract Documents shall govern over any standard specification, manual or code of any technical society, organization or association. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, words with an accepted technical or trade meaning used to describe any Work shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. 1.2.6. If any Work indicated in, or required by, the Contract Documents is above the standards set by any Law applicable to the Work and the Project, the higher standard shall govern.
MICHSPEC DTMB
00700 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.2.7. The terms "the Contract Documents," "as specified in the Contract Documents," "in accordance with the Contract Documents" or such other similar terms shall be construed as including all valid Change Orders and Change Authorizations. 1.2.8. "Execution of the Work" and “shall provide” includes the furnishing and/or performance of the Work. "Work" as in "Unit Price Work," or “any Work” or "acceptable Work," etc. refers to a specific part(s) of the Work. 1.2.9. Subject to the Contractor's continuing responsibilities for the acts of Subcontractors and Suppliers, whenever in the Contract Documents the term "the Contractor" is used concerning any action, obligation, cost or event, it shall cover, even if not expressly stated, actions or obligations or costs of, or events involving, any Subcontractor, Supplier or anyone for whom any of them may be liable, unless the context requires otherwise. 1.2.10. Use of the terms "as ordered," "as directed," "as required," "as allowed," "as approved" or similar terms, or the adjectives "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper" or "satisfactory" or similar adjectives, to describe a requirement, direction, review or judgment of the Professional or Owner as to the Work will be solely to evaluate the Work for compliance with the Contract Documents. No use of any such term or adjective, or provision of any standard specification, manual or code (whether expressly incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents or not), or Suppliers' instructions, shall be effective to (a) change the duties and responsibilities of the Owner or Professional from those assigned in the Contract Documents, (b) assign to the Owner or Professional any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or assume responsibility contrary to the provisions of the Contract Documents. 1.2.11. A provision stating "the Contractor shall bear its proportionate share of the Delay and costs" shall be construed as entitling the Owner to an appropriate decrease in Contract Price and Contract Time for all the Owner’s direct, indirect and consequential costs and damages that are attributable to the Contractor. 1.2.12. Contract Time computations shall be made in Calendar Days. If the Progress Schedule is in the form of a Critical Path Method schedule, Total Float and Contract Float values stated in Business Days shall be converted to Calendar Days when used for the purpose of calculating changes in Contract Time. 1.2.13. Any computation of a Contract Time which adds Calendar Days to a date shall include both the first and last Day. Any computation of a notice period shall exclude the first Day and include the last Day. In any case, if the computed Day falls on a non-Business Day, it shall be omitted from the computation. 1.2.14. In the Contract Documents, the terms "substantially completed" and "substantially complete" have in context the same meaning as Substantial Completion. 1.3 Priority of the Contract Documents: 1.3.1. Whenever an issue of priority involves two Sections within the Contract Documents, the following will apply: Unless the Owner and Contractor mutually agree otherwise, a Section of the Contract Documents will supersede another conflicting Section, if
MICHSPEC DTMB
the superseding Section is listed in paragraph 2.2 of Section 00500 Agreement ahead of the conflicting Section. 1.3.2. Whenever an issue of priority involves Work called for in the technical Specifications or Drawings figured dimensions shall govern scaled dimensions, detail Drawings shall govern general Drawings and Drawings shall govern Submittals. Whenever specifications, dimensions, notes, schedules or details conflict (whether within the Specifications or Drawings, or between the Specifications and Drawings, or between Change Order Drawings and the Drawings), the Contractor shall be required to provide the higher performance requirement only to the extent such outcome results in Work reasonably inferable. 1.4 Interpretation of Indemnification Provisions: 1.4.1. Paragraphs 1.4.2 and 1.4.3 will be as effective as if repeated in paragraphs 4.5.2, 4.6.1, 4.9.1, 10.4.4, 13.3.1 and in any other paragraph requiring the Contractor to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and Professional. 1.4.2. Any indemnification provision requiring the Contractor to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and Professional against all claims, or covering liability of the Owner or Professional, shall include claims caused in part by the negligence or other liability-creating conduct or omission of the Contractor. 1.4.3. The terms "against all claims" in any such obligation shall be construed as covering all claims, of whatever type and nature, and all judgments, costs, losses and damages, whether direct, indirect or consequential (including, but not limited to, charges of architects, engineers, attorneys and others and all court, hearing and any other dispute resolution costs). 1.5 Additional Interpretations: 1.5.1. The term "the Professional" shall be construed as covering, even if not expressly stated, the Professional's consultants, agents and employees. This interpretation shall not be construed as relieving the Professional of its sole responsibility for the performance of the Professional's obligations and responsibilities, whether performed by the Professional directly or through any consultant, agent, or employee. 1.5.2. The expression "any act or omission within the control of" shall include, but is not limited to, the fault or negligence of the party involved and any other act, cause and event for which that party is responsible. The expression "any cause beyond the control of" shall include any act or omission not within the reasonable control of the party involved and any other act, cause and event for which that party is not responsible. 1.5.3. Whenever in the Contract Documents, the term "first tier" is used concerning a Subcontractor or Supplier, it means a Subcontractor or Supplier having a direct Subagreement with the Contractor. Relatedly, the term "lower tier" refers to a Subcontractor or Supplier having a direct Subagreement with another Subcontractor. 1.5.4. The expression "materials and/or equipment" shall not be construed to equate materials with equipment, but rather shall be interpreted as a general reference to materials or equipment,
00700 2
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
whichever actually applies. The term "stored materials" shall include materials and equipment. Where a differentiation between materials or equipment is necessary, such as for payments for approved equipment Shop Drawings, use of the term “equipment” shall exclude materials. In any such case, examples of equipment shall be conveying equipment, tanks, pumps, vessels, fans, boilers, air handling units, heat exchangers, compressors, incineration equipment, motor control centers, switchgears, transformers, control panels and so forth; and such components as pipe fittings and specialties, valves, ductwork, plumbing fixtures, cable tray, conduit and cable, electrical fixtures, panel boards and so forth shall be materials and not equipment.
2.1.2. The Contractor shall obtain, at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time, any other lands, areas, properties, facilities, rights-of-way and easements the Contractor requires for temporary facilities, storage, disposal of spoil or waste material or any other such purpose. If public property, the Contractor shall obtain all required permits from the federal agency, State agency, Political Subdivision or Public Utility with jurisdiction. If private property, the Contractor shall obtain prior permission by written agreement. The Contractor shall submit copies of the permits and written agreements to the Owner.
1.5.5. The term "registered mail" includes registered U.S. mail and certified U.S. mail with return receipt requested. The term "hand delivered" includes delivery by private carriers.
2.2.1. The Owner will provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction that the Professional considers necessary for the Contractor to proceed with the Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for surveying and laying out the Work from those reference points. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and preserving those reference points as well as any base lines and benchmarks provided for the Work.
1.5.6. The term "self-performed Work” means Work performed by the Contractor, as opposed to Work performed by a Subcontractor, which is referred to as “Subcontractor Work.” 1.5.7. An "early completion" Progress Schedule is a Contractor-prepared Revision Progress Schedule Submittal that anticipates completion of the entire Work, or of any portion of the Work having a separate, specified Contract Time, ahead of the correspondingly specified Contract Time. 1.6 Ownership and Use of the Contract Documents: 1.6.1. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor or Supplier shall have or acquire title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications or documents identified in Section 00210 Information for Bidders, and they shall not reuse any of them on extensions of the Project or any other project without prior written consent of the Owner and Professional. 1.6.2. The Contractor, Subcontractors and Suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce parts of the Contract Documents and those documents identified in Section 00210 Information for Bidders as appropriate for their use in the furnishing and performance of their Work. All copies of the Drawings and Project Manual and other documents made under this license shall retain all copyright and trademark notices, if any. 1.7 Copies of the Contract Documents: 1.7.1. The Owner will furnish, at no cost to the Contractor, ten (10) copies of the Drawings and Project Manual. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
ARTICLE 2 THE OWNER GENERAL PROVISIONS 2.1 Availability of Lands, Areas, Properties and Facilities: 2.1.1. The Contract Documents indicate the lands, areas, properties and facilities upon which the Work is to be performed and those rights-of-way and easements for access to the site furnished by the Owner. Easements for permanent structures or for permanent changes in any existing lands, areas, properties and facilities will be obtained by the Owner, unless otherwise expressly stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. MICHSPEC DTMB
2.2 Reference Points; Base Lines and Benchmarks:
2.2.2. The Contractor shall make no changes on any reference points, base lines and benchmarks without the Professional’s prior written approval. The Contractor shall report to the Professional whenever any reference point, base line or benchmark is lost, destroyed or requires relocation. The Contractor shall replace and relocate any lost or destroyed reference points accurately, with professionally, licensed personnel, if so directed by the Professional. 2.2.3. The Contractor shall bear its proportionate share of the Delay and costs resulting from any loss, destruction, replacement and/or relocation of reference points, base lines and/or benchmarks, to the extent any such loss, destruction, replacement and/or relocation results in whole or in part from any act or omission within the control of the Contractor. 2.3 Stop Work Order: 2.3.1. The Owner may order the Contractor in writing to stop the Work, in the whole or in part, in the event any of these situations occur: (a) any Work is Defective, (b) any Work, when completed, will not conform to the Contract Documents, (c) any materials or equipment are unsuitable, or (d) any workers are insufficiently skilled. The Contractor shall bear its proportionate share of the Delay and costs resulting from any such stop Work order, unless the Contractor is/was not at fault.
2.3.2. If the Contractor is/was not at fault, the Owner will amend the Contract Documents to provide for any adjustments in Contract Price and/or Contract Time made necessary by any resulting Delay which is unreasonable under the circumstances. This authority to stop the Work or any Work shall not create or impose any duty or responsibility on the Owner to exercise such authority for the benefit of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor, Supplier, surety to any of them or any other third party. 2.4 Limitations on the Owner's Responsibilities: 2.4.1. The Owner is not responsible for the Contractor's Means and Methods, safety precautions and programs related to
00700 3
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
safety, or the Contractor's failure to execute the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Nor is the Owner responsible for any act or omission of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier or anyone for whose acts the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier may be liable. 2.4.2. The Owner is not responsible for verifying whether the Contractor's Progress Schedule Submittals, any certificates and/or policies of insurance or any technical Submittals are in accordance with the Contract Documents, or for verifying their accuracy or completeness in any way. 2.4.3. Neither the Owner's authority to review any of those Submittals, nor the Owner's decision to raise or not raise any objections about any such Submittals, shall create or impose any duty or responsibility on the Owner to exercise any such authority or decision for the benefit of the Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, any surety to any of them or any other third party. 2.5 Additional General Provisions: 2.5.1. Written communications from the Owner to the Contractor will generally be issued through the Professional. If there is need to issue communications directly, a copy will be sent concurrently to the Professional. Written communications from the Contractor to the Owner may be issued directly to the Owner or through the Professional, if such is more appropriate. Any such communication shall attach two (2) copies for the other party.
3.1.2. The Professional will make On-Site Inspections at intervals appropriate to the stages of the Work to observe the quality and quantity of progress and completed Work; to determine actual quantities of Unit Price Work completed by the Contractor and to determine whether the Work is being executed so that the Work, when completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. Based on the On-site Inspections, the Professional will endeavor to guard the Owner from Defective Work and to keep the Owner informed of the progress of the Work. 3.1.3. If the Professional assigns Resident Project Representatives, their duties, responsibilities and limits of authority will be given in the Contract Documents or at the pre-construction conference. Unless delegated by specific written notice from the Owner, the Resident Project Representative does not have any authority to order any changes in the Work or authorize any adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Time. 3.1.4. The Professional will have authority to disapprove or reject Work that the Professional believes to be Defective, and to require inspection or testing of any Work, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall take prompt corrective action upon receiving any Defective Work notice from the Professional. 3.1.5. On-Site Inspections by the Professional and/or Resident Project Representatives shall not create or impose any duty on the Professional or Resident Project Representatives to make the On-Site Inspections for the benefit of the Contractor or any other third party. On-Site Inspections will not relieve the Contractor from its obligation to provide the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or represent acceptance of Defective Work.
2.5.2. The Facilities and Business Services Administration Representative shall be the representative for the Owner. The Facilities and Business Services Administration Representative may be represented on-site by a Field Represenative(s). Neither the Facilities and Business Services Administration Representative nor the Field Representative shall have authority to interpret the requirements of the Contract Documents. Unless delegated by specific written notice from the Owner, the Field Representative does not have any authority to order any changes in the Work or authorize any adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Time.
3.1.6. Inspections by the Field Representative(s) shall not create or impose any duty on such Field Representative to make the observations for the benefit of the Contractor or any other third party. Any such inspection will not relieve the Contractor from its obligation to provide the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or represent acceptance of Defective Work.
2.6 Partnering Charter:
3.2 Clarifications and Interpretations:
2.6.1. If the Contract Documents indicate the Owner’s intent to implement a bilateral partnering charter, unless the Contractor declines in writing, the Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in implementing such a partnering charter for the Contract. Unless the possibility is expressly allowed for in the Contract Documents, no provision, requirement or other aspect of the Contract Documents shall be open for change, revision or modification in any such partnering charter.
3.2.1. The Professional will issue with reasonable promptness written clarifications or interpretations as the Professional may determine necessary or in response to a Contractor written request for interpretation. If the Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation issued by the Professional justifies an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Professional in writing before proceeding with the Work Involved.
ARTICLE 3 THE PROFESSIONAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
3.2.2. In any such case, if the Contractor is properly authorized in writing to proceed with the Work Involved before full agreement is reached on the extent of any such adjustments (if any are determined to be due at all), the Contractor shall furnish to the Professional, upon request from the Professional, those actual cost Records specified in paragraphs 11.4 and 11.5.
3.1 Owner's Representative: 3.1.1. The Professional shall be the Owner's representative during the Contract Time period. The Professional’s duties, responsibilities and limits of authority set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be changed without the prior written consent of both the Owner and Professional.
MICHSPEC DTMB
3.3 Minor Variations and No-Cost Changes; Minor Delays: 3.3.1. The Professional may authorize minor variations in the Work, order no-cost changes consistent with the Contract
00700 4
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Documents or cause minor Delay if, in the Professional's judgment, such variation, no-cost change or Delay does not justify any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time. Minor variations will be ordered in writing; no-cost changes will be authorized by Change Authorization. If the Contractor believes any minor variation or no-cost change justifies an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Professional in writing before proceeding with the Work Involved and follow the procedures in paragraph 3.2. Notice requirements for minor Delays are provided in paragraph 8.7.4. 3.4 Determinations by the Professional: 3.4.1. The Professional will be the interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in such capacity, will render determinations on the acceptability of the Work. Notices, proposals, claims or other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work, the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents or any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time shall be referred to the Professional in writing requesting a formal, written determination, which the Professional will render within a reasonable time. If the Contractor disagrees with any such Professional determination, the Contractor may deliver notice of a claim and a claim submittal within thirty (30) Calendar Days in accordance with the procedures and within the deadlines set forth in Article 15 Disputes. 3.4.2. The rendering of any interpretation or of any determination on any notice, proposal, claim or other matter relating to the acceptability of the Work or to any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time will be a prerequisite to the exercise by the Contractor of any rights or remedies the Contractor may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Law concerning any such issue. 3.5 Limitations on the Professional's Responsibilities: 3.5.1. The Professional's authority to act under this Article 3 or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, or any decision made by the Professional in good faith to exercise or not to exercise such authority, shall not give rise to any duty or responsibility of the Professional to the Contractor, to any Subcontractor or any Supplier, to any surety or to any third party. 3.5.2. The Professional is not responsible for the Contractor's Means and Methods, safety precautions and programs related to safety, or for the Contractor's failure to execute the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Furthermore, the Professional is not responsible for any act or omission of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor, Supplier or anyone for whose acts the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier may be liable.
4.1.2. The Contractor shall bear its proportionate share of the Delay and costs resulting from any Work undertaken before apprising the Professional and/or obtaining a written clarification or interpretation from the Professional, if the Contractor knows or has reason to know that any such Work (a) involves a conflict, error or omission, or (b) is subject to a specified Means and Method which is inappropriate, unworkable or unsafe, or (c) is subject to a specified method of installation, performance or test procedure and/or result which is contrary to the recommendations provided by or for the respective manufacturer. 4.2 Management, Supervision and Personnel: 4.2.1. The Contractor shall manage, supervise and direct the Work competently, applying the management, supervision, skills, expertise, scheduling, coordination and attention necessary to provide the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, while insuring timely and unhindered access to the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for any Means and Methods, unless a specific Means and Method is indicated in or required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall verify that completed Work complies with the Contract Documents, all approved Submittals and all clarifications and interpretations. 4.2.2. The Contractor shall maintain a competent, full-time superintendent on the Work at all times during its progress. The superintendent shall be the Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of the Contractor. The Superintendent shall not be assigned or replaced without the Owner's consent. If the Owner, in the reasonable exercise of its discretion, objects to the superintendent, the Contractor shall use a replacement superintendent at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. All communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. 4.2.3. The Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work. As part of this responsibility, the Contractor shall engage a registered land surveyor to accurately locate base lines and Project elevations. The Contractor shall be required to furnish certifications that lines and grades for all concrete slabs were checked before and after placing of concrete, and that final grades are as required by the Contract Documents.
4.2.4. The Contractor shall provide competent and suitably qualified trade foremen and craft workers to construct the Work, in all cases as required by the Contract Documents. At all times, the Contractor shall maintain good discipline and order at the site.
ARTICLE 4 CONTROL OF WORK GENERAL PROVISIONS 4.1 Review of the Contract Documents: 4.1.1. Before undertaking each part of the Work, the Contractor shall study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and against manufacturers' recommendations for installation and handling. Before undertaking each part of the Work, the Contractor shall verify dimensions and take field measurements, and the Contractor shall coordinate the location, MICHSPEC DTMB
dimensions, access, fit, completeness, etc. of dependent Work. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Professional in writing of any conflict, error or omission in the Contract Documents and deviation from manufacturers' recommendations for installation and handling discovered.
4.2.5. Whenever activities of the Contractor are carried out beyond the limits of the site or the indications of temporary fences or barricades, the Contractor shall schedule trenching, utility Work, site development, landscaping and all other activities in the way that will cause minimum disturbance to or interference with
00700 5
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
adjoining property, service to the public or the normal operation of the Owner or others affected by such activities.
the restoration of such system and of any extensions of such systems.
4.2.6. If a Means and Method is indicated in, or required by, the Contract Documents, a substitute Means and Method may be used by the Contractor only after obtaining the Professional's approval that it meets the applicable criteria in paragraph 5.2 without increasing Contract Price or Contract Time. If any such substitution causes earlier completion of the Work, the Owner and Contractor may negotiate an appropriate shortening in Contract Time, a level of liquidated damages appropriate to the shortened Contract Time, and a decrease in the Contract Price. If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on the extent of any such adjustments, the Owner may deliver a claim in accordance with the procedures and within the deadlines set forth in Article 15.
4.4.2. To the extent specified Work on an existing system may cause damage to, or imbalances in extensions of such systems, and restoration of the entirety of such systems is not designated in the Drawings and/or Specifications as required Work, the Contractor shall be responsible for seeking an appropriate clarification or interpretation from the Professional before proceeding with the Work Involved.
4.2.7. The Contractor shall post appropriate construction signs to advice the occupants and visitors of occupied facilities of the limits of construction work areas, hardhat areas, excavations, construction parking and staging areas, etc. 4.3 Materials and Equipment: 4.3.1. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall furnish and be responsible for all materials, equipment, transportation, construction equipment, tools, supplies, fuel, utilities, water for flushing and testing, temporary facilities and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing and performance, which includes, without limitation, the testing and completion of the Work. 4.3.2. All materials and equipment shall be of good quality, free of defect and new, unless otherwise allowed in the Contract Documents. For each material and equipment, the Contractor shall provide complete information on preventive maintenance, operating requirements, parts lists, ordering of parts and other applicable conditions. Materials and equipment shall be protected against any damage at all times so that they remain new. 4.3.3. If required for the Professional’s acceptance of any materials or equipment, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (which shall include test procedures and reports of required tests) as to the kind and quality of the materials and equipment. Materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned following the manufacturer’s and Suppliers' instructions, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
4.4.3. The Contractor shall perform Work and operate vehicles and construction equipment in a safe manner and without becoming a hazard to the public, while at the same time ensuring the least practicable interference with pedestrians and traffic. In addition, such operations shall be carried out without interfering with overhead utilities. When transporting materials or equipment, vehicles shall not be loaded beyond the capacity set by their manufacturers or applicable Laws. When crossing sidewalks, curbs or landscaped areas, the Contractor shall protect them from damage. Safe and adequate pedestrian and vehicular access shall be maintained to fire hydrants, commercial and industrial establishments, churches, schools, parking lots, hospitals, fire and police stations and like establishments. 4.4.4. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing the pumping, draining and controlling of surface water and groundwater in the way that will not endanger the Work or any adjacent facility or property, or interrupt, restrict or interfere with the use of any adjacent facility or property. 4.4.5. Paragraph 3.10, Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders, invoking the “Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control,” 1994 PA 451, Part 91, as amended, MCL 324.9101 et seq., is made part of Section 00700 General Conditions by this reference. 4.4.6. To the extent the Contractor knows, or has reason to know, the Contractor shall be responsible for performing the Work taking fully into account any dewatering, blasting, etc. operations from other work bearing a potential impact on the Work. 4.4.7. Any damaged Work corrected by the Contractor shall be corrected and made equal in all respects (quality, finish, appearance, function, etc.) to similar non-damaged Work otherwise required by the Contract Documents.
4.4 Concerning Control of Work:
4.4.8. The Contractor shall verify that Work already in-place is in proper condition to receive dependent Work, and that dependent Work connecting to the in-place Work is properly coordinated. Whether or not expressly specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting, drilling, fixing-up and patching of concrete, masonry, gypsum board, piping and other materials that may be necessary to make in-place Work and dependent Work fit together properly.
4.4.1. The Contractor shall prosecute the Work in the way that will cause the least practicable interference with and avoid prolonged interruption of, or damage to, existing facilities. The Contractor shall obtain written approval from the Owner ten (10) Calendar Days before connecting to existing facilities or interrupting service. If the Contractor’s Means and Methods require tapping into an existing system(s), the Contractor shall be responsible for
4.4.9. The Contractor shall not obstruct access to municipal structures, hydrants, valves, manholes, fire alarms, etc., nor operate valves or otherwise interfere with the operation of any Public utilities without first securing the necessary approvals and permits. Except as may be otherwise provided in the technical Specifications, the Owner will charge the Contractor for all utilities used based on the charges the Owner actually incurs.
4.3.4. Paragraph 7.3, Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders, dealing with materials and equipment listed in Schedule 1.6 of Section 00440 Schedule of Materials and Equipment is made part of this Section 00700 General Conditions by this reference.
MICHSPEC DTMB
00700 6
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
4.4.10. In the event of any unauthorized interruption of service to any operating facility, the Contractor shall take immediate action to restore that service as soon as practicable. The Contractor shall be directly responsible for the charges of any manufacturer’s representative called to the site to repair or adjust any systems damaged by the Contractor. 4.4.11. Whenever the Contractor has caused an operating security system to go out of service, or left unsecured openings in existing facilities or security fences, the Contractor shall furnish a security guard acceptable to the Owner to maintain security of the facility outside of normal working hours. The Contractor will be held responsible for any losses on account of the Contractor's interruption of security systems or barriers at existing facilities. 4.4.12. The Contractor shall take steps, procedures or means as may be required to prevent dust nuisance resulting from the Contractor's operations. The dust control measures shall be maintained at all times to the satisfaction of the Owner and any Political Subdivision with jurisdiction. 4.4.13. The Contractor shall, before final inspection, mark in a permanent and readily identifiable manner, all reference points provided by the Owner. 4.5 Patent Fees and Royalties: 4.5.1. The Contractor shall be responsible for paying all royalties and license fees and assuming all costs resulting from the use in the furnishing and performance of the Work and/or the incorporation into the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device covered by patent rights or copyrights, whether specified in the Contract Documents or chosen by the Contractor. The Contractor shall sign suitable agreement(s) with the patentee or copyright owner and, if requested, provide copies to the Owner. 4.5.2. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and Professional from and against all claims, as construed in paragraph 1.4, arising from any patent or copyright infringement by the Contractor including, but not limited to, patent or copyright infringements resulting from “or equal” substitution of any invention, design, process, product or device that is specified in the Contract Documents. 4.5.3. If the Contractor knows, or should know, that the specified invention, design, process, product or device infringes on a patent or copyright, the Contractor's obligation to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Professional from and against all claims arising from any patent or copyright infringement shall apply, unless the Contractor promptly furnishes that information to the Professional in writing. 4.6 Use of Premises: 4.6.1. The Contractor shall confine its operations (including, but not limited to construction equipment and laydown and storage) to the site and lands, areas, properties, facilities, rights-of-way and easements (“the premises”) identified and permitted by the Contract Documents, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to the premises (including, but not limited to, damage to any real and personal property) and for any damage to any adjacent lands, areas, properties, facilities, rights-of-way and easements (including,
MICHSPEC DTMB
but not limited to, damage to any real and personal property) resulting from the Contractor's operations. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and Professional against all claims, as construed in paragraph 1.4, arising from any damage to such premises or adjacent lands, areas, properties, facilities, rights-of-way and easements (inclusive of real and personal property), including loss of use, to the extent resulting from the Contractor's operations. 4.6.2. The Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris, and shall not remove, injure, cut, alter or destroy trees, shrubs, plants or grass, unless otherwise provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. At the completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove all obstructions, waste and surplus materials, rubbish, debris, tools and construction equipment and shall leave the site clean and ready for occupancy by the Owner. 4.6.3. The Contractor shall restore to pre-existing conditions all walks, roadways, paved or landscaped areas and other real and personal property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. To the extent the Contractor refuses, fails or neglects to replace all such altered premises and/or restore to its pre-existing condition any walk, roadway, paved or landscaped area and other property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear its proportionate share of the Delay and costs resulting from the Contractor’s refusal, failure or neglect to do so. 4.6.4. The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any way that will endanger the structure. The Contractor shall not subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will damage or endanger the Work or adjacent property, or both. 4.7 Record Documents: 4.7.1. The Contractor shall maintain at the site one copy of all Record Documents in good order and annotated in a neat and legible manner using a contrasting, reproducible color to show (a) all revisions made, (b) dimensions noted during the furnishing and performance of the Work, and (c) all deviations between the asbuilt installation and the Contract Documents, all approved Submittals and all clarifications and interpretations. 4.7.2. Record Documents, along with a properly annotated copy of all approved Submittals, shall be available to the Professional and Owner at all times during the progress of the Work. The finalized Record Documents and approved Submittals shall be required for processing final payment to the Contractor.
4.7.3. The Contractor shall maintain and make available to the Owner and Professional daily field reports recording the onsite labor force and equipment (Contractor and Subcontractors); materials/equipment received (at the site or at another location); visits by Suppliers; significant in-progress and completed trade Work within major areas; and other pertinent information. 4.7.4. Such daily field reports shall be furnished by the Contractor promptly to the Professional and Owner upon their request, and shall be accepted by the Owner for information only.
00700 7
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Neither the Owner nor Professional's review of any daily field report shall be construed as agreement with the information contained in any such daily field report. 4.8 Emergencies: 4.8.1. In Emergencies affecting the safety or protection of Persons, the Work or property at or adjacent to the site, the Contractor, without any special instruction or authorization from the Professional and/or the Owner, is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, death, injury or loss. 4.8.2. The Contractor shall give the Owner prompt written notice of any changes in the Work resulting from the action taken. If the Owner concurs, the Owner will amend the Contract Documents to provide for those changes and, unless the Emergency results in whole or in part from any act or omission within the control of the Contractor, to provide for any corresponding adjustment in Contract Price and/or Contract Time. 4.9 Indemnification: 4.9.1. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and Professional from and against all claims, as construed in paragraph 1.4, for bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or injury to the destruction of property, including loss of use, arising out of, relating to, or being in any way connected with the Work, that are in any way (a) caused by any negligent act or omission of the Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, or (b) related to the Contractor's failure to maintain the required insurance and coverages. As a point of emphasis, and as set forth in paragraph 1.4, such claims shall include, but are not limited to charges of architects, engineers, attorneys and others and all court, hearing and other dispute resolution costs. 4.9.2. As a point of emphasis, as set forth in paragraph 1.4, this indemnification obligation shall include claims caused in part by the negligence or other liability-creating conduct or omissions of the Owner (including State departments, agencies, boards, commissions, officers and employees) or Professional; however, the Contractor shall not be required to indemnify the Owner or Professional against liability for loss or damage resulting from the sole negligence of the Owner and/or Professional. 4.9.3. With respect to claims against the Owner or Professional by any employee of the Contractor, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph 4.9 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier under workers' compensation, disability benefit or other benefit acts.
Subcontractors. Any such revocation of the Owner’s consent shall not justify any increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. 5.1.2. After Contract Award, if the Contractor intends to add or substitute a Subcontractor for Work in a Division, Specification and/or trade for which Subcontractor nomination was required in Section 00430 List of Subcontractors, the Contractor shall nominate that Subcontractor for review by the Owner and/or Professional. The Contractor shall not award such Work to any Subcontractor to whom the Owner objects for good cause. No adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time shall be allowed for any such newly-nominated Subcontractor. 5.1.3. Whenever the Owner objects, for its convenience, to any Subcontractor nominated, but not objected to, before Contract Award or to any Subcontractor nominated after Contract Award, the Contractor shall nominate a substitute Subcontractor or shall proceed to self-perform the Work involved, if the Contractor is so qualified. If any such Owner objection requires a Subcontractor substitution or the Contractor to self-perform the Work Involved, in either case at an increase of the Contractor's cost for the part of the Work Involved, the Owner will amend the Contract Documents to provide for a corresponding adjustment in Contract Price and/or Contract Time made necessary by the Subcontractor substitution or self-performance and by any resulting Delay which is not reasonably anticipatable under the circumstances and which is attributable to the Owner and/or Professional. 5.1.4. Failure of the Owner to object to any nominated Subcontractor shall not constitute a waiver of any right of the Owner or Professional to reject Defective Work; nor shall the authority given to the Owner under this paragraph create or impose any duty on the Owner or Professional to exercise such authority for the benefit of the Contractor or any other third party. 5.1.5. Installation of any self-performed or Subcontractor Work shall constitute acceptance by the Contractor of all previously placed dependent Work. Consistent with this responsibility, the Contractor, directly or through the Contractor’s choice of Subcontractors, shall supply, install and/or cause items to be built into previously placed Work, shall verify dimensions of previously placed Work and shall notify the Professional of previously placed Work that is unsatisfactory for, or prevents satisfactory installation of, other dependent Work. 5.1.6. Work performed by any Subcontractor or Supplier shall be through an appropriate written Subagreement that (a) expressly binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the requirements of the Contract Documents, (b) requires such Subcontractor or Supplier to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations that the Contractor assumes toward the Owner and Professional, and (c) contains the waiver of rights of subrogation provisions of Article 7 and the dispute resolution provisions of Article 15.
ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS 5.2 "Or Equal" and Substitute Materials and Equipment: 5.1 Employment of Subcontractors: 5.1.1. Upon due investigation, the Owner may revoke, because of subsequent violation of a material requirement of the Contract Documents, the Owner’s consent to any Subcontractor previously given pursuant to the provisions of Article 8 of Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders and Section 00430 List of
MICHSPEC DTMB
5.2.1. Materials or equipment described in the Contract Documents by using a brand name, make, manufacturer, supplier or specification shall be intended to denote the essential characteristics desired and establish a standard. 5.2.2. For materials and equipment which are actually listed in Schedule 1.6 of Section 00440 Schedule of Materials and
00700 8
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Equipment, no “or equal” or substitute material or equipment will be acceptable or permitted unless the Contractor complies with the terms and conditions of paragraphs 5.2.2.1 through 5.2.2.5. 5.2.2.1. Unless words are used in a technical Specification indicating that no "or equal" or substitution is permitted, a proposal for an "or equal" or substitution may be accepted by the Professional if, in the Professional’s judgment, the proposal (a) meets the criteria set forth in paragraphs 5.2.2.2 through 5.2.2.5, (b) demonstrates a net positive deduction, i.e., the deductive value of the proposal exceeds all direct, indirect and consequential costs and damages attributable to the "or equal" or substitution, and (c) offers a Contract Price decrease of one hundred percent (100%) of the net deduction, or another percentage reflecting a sharing of the savings which is agreed between the Owner and Contractor. 5.2.2.2. The Contractor's written application for the "or equal" or substitute material or equipment shall provide sufficient information to allow the Professional to determine whether the material or equipment proposed (a) will equally perform the functions and achieve the results called for by the Contract Documents, (b) is at least of equal materials of construction, quality and necessary essential design features, (c) is suited to the same use as that named or specified, (d) conforms substantially to the desired detailed requirements, e.g., durability, strength, appearance, aesthetics (if aesthetics are significant), safety, useful life, reliability, economy of operation and ease of maintenance, (e) evidences a proven record of performance and the availability of responsive service, and (f) will not extend any Contract Times. 5.2.2.3. Each such application shall certify whether or not acceptance of the proposed "or equal" or substitute material or equipment will require a change in any of the Work or any of the Means and Methods indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, or in work performed by the Owner or others, and whether or not incorporation or use of the proposed material or equipment is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. All variations of the proposed material or equipment from the material or equipment named or specified shall be identified (operation, materials or construction finish, thickness or gauge of material, dimensions, loads, tolerances, deleted and added features, etc.), and information regarding available maintenance, repair and replacement service shall be indicated. 5.2.2.4. The application shall contain an itemized estimate of all direct, indirect and consequential costs and damages that will result from evaluation and acceptance of the proposed "or equal" or substitute material and equipment, including but not limited to costs and delays of redesign, or claims of other contractors affected by the proposed item, and changes in operating, maintenance, repair, replacement or spare part costs. The Professional may require the Contractor to furnish a manufacturer's performance Bond, an analysis of the effects of the evaluation/acceptance of the “or equal” or substitution on the Progress Schedule, a list of locations of similar installations that have been in service for at least three (3) years before the date of the application, and any other relevant data. 5.2.2.5. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying that "or equal" or substitute materials and equipment conform to the Contract Documents, and that all dimensions, arrangement, design and construction details and other features are suited to the specified purpose. If any "or equal" or substitute material or equipment differs materially from the material or equipment named
MICHSPEC DTMB
or specified, and that difference was not expressly identified in the Contractor's application, or results in changes in the Work, the Professional has authority to require removal and replacement of that "or equal" or substitute material or equipment. The Contractor shall bear its proportionate share of the Delay and costs resulting from (a) any such removal and replacement of "or equal" or substitute materials or equipment, (b) making "or equal" or substitute materials or equipment conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, and (c) any changes in the Work and/or in other work required to accommodate the "or equal" or substitute material or equipment, or both. 5.2.2.6. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for any costs incurred by the Owner in the evaluation of any "or equal" or substitution proposal. Such costs shall include, but are not limited to, related charges of the Professional made necessary by the evaluation and acceptance or rejection, as the case may be, of the proposed "or equal" or substitute material or equipment. 5.2.3. For materials and equipment not listed in Schedule 1.6 of Section 00440 Schedule of Materials and Equipment, no substitute material or equipment will be acceptable or permitted unless the Contractor meets with the requirements of paragraphs 5.2.2.1 through 5.2.2.5. Further, the reimbursement provisions of paragraph 5.2.2.6 shall apply equally to such substitutions. 5.2.4. Unless approved by the Professional, for materials and equipment not listed in Schedule 1.6 of Section 00440 Schedule of Materials and Equipment, no “or equal” material or equipment will be acceptable or permitted unless the Contractor complies with the requirements of paragraphs 5.2.2.2 5.2.2.5. 5.2.5. No "or equal" or substitute item shall be ordered, installed or utilized without the Owner's prior acceptance. The Owner's acceptance shall be evidenced by a signed Change Order or Change Authorization, or if so specifically designated by the Professional, by an approved Shop Drawing or sample. 5.3 The Contractor's Continuing Responsibilities: 5.3.1. The Contractor shall be fully responsible to the Owner and Professional for all acts and omissions of Subcontractors and Suppliers, at any tier, to the same extent as the Contractor is responsible for the Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between the Owner or Professional and any Subcontractor or Supplier. No provision in Article 12 or in the other Contract Documents shall create or impose any express or implied duty or obligation on the Owner or Professional to any Subcontractor or Supplier or the Contractor's sureties to pay or to see to the payment of any monies owed to any of them. ARTICLE 6 SUBMITTALS 6.1 Shop Drawing, Sample and Other Technical Submittals: 6.1.1. After complying with those requirements in paragraphs 6.1.2 through 6.1.5 and the technical Specifications, the Contractor shall submit to the Professional (a) a mylar or sepia together with blue line drawings and electronic file(s) of the drawing(s) compatable with the latest version of Autocad of all Shop Drawings required by the Contract Documents; (b) all required samples (whether color or otherwise); and (c) all other
00700 9
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
technical Submittals (test results, test procedures, safety procedures, O&M manuals, etc.) that are required by the Contract Documents. 6.1.2. Submissions shall be delivered to the Professional with due diligence, as delineated in or required by the Progress Schedule, and shall allow reasonable times for the Professional’s review and turnaround. Each Submittal shall be uniquely identified as the Professional and Contractor may agree. 6.1.3. Each Submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written indication certifying that the Contractor has satisfied the requirements of this Article and the technical Specifications and the Contractor’s responsibilities for prior review of the submission. In addition, each sample shall have been checked and be accompanied by a certificate guaranteeing that the material sampled complies with the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise allowed by the Professional, Submittals without the Contractor's indication of approval will be returned without review. 6.1.4. Before each submission, the Contractor shall (a) determine and verify all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, instructions for installation and handling of equipment and systems, installation requirements (including location, dimensions, access, fit, completeness, etc.), materials, color, catalog numbers and other similar data as to correctness and completeness, and (b) have reviewed and coordinated that technical Submittal with other technical Submittals and the requirements of the Contract Documents. Technical Submittals of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be coordinated with those of other Subcontractors or Suppliers (location, dimensions, fit, completeness, consistency, integration, etc.), and so represented in the Contractor's stamp or specific written approval before submission to the Professional. 6.1.5. With each submission, the Contractor shall give the Professional specific written notice of each variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall cause a specific notation of each variation to be made on that Shop Drawing, sample or other technical Submittal. 6.1.6. Where a Shop Drawing, sample or other technical Submittal is required by the technical Specifications, any related Work performed by the Contractor before the Professional's approval of the pertinent technical Submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of the Contractor.
6.2.2. The review of Submittals by the Professional shall not be conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of such details as dimensions or quantities shown or indicated on the Submittals, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment and systems developed by or for the Contractor, the correctness of which shall remain the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Further, any such Professional’s review and approval will not extend to any Means and Methods (except where a specific Mean and Method is indicated in or required by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs related to safety. 6.2.3. Approval by the Professional of a separate item or partial Submittal shall not translate to approval of the assembly in which the item functions or to the approval of related Submittals not yet reviewed and approved by the Professional. 6.3 Progress Schedule Submittals: 6.3.1. After complying with the appropriate Progress Schedule requirements in the technical Specifications, the Contractor shall submit to the Professional four (4) copies of the Progress Schedule Submittal then due, which shall include an electronic computer disk with the Contractor’s data files. Each Progress Schedule Submittal shall bear the Contractor's stamp or written indication of approval as representation to the Owner that the Contractor has determined or verified all data on that Progress Schedule, and that the Contractor and Subcontractors and Suppliers have reviewed and coordinated the sequences in that Progress Schedule with the requirements of the Work. Progress Schedule Submittals are not Contract Documents. 6.3.2. Progress Schedule Submittals are intended to show: (a) the priority and sequencing by which the Contractor intends to execute the Work (or Work remaining) to comply with the Contract Times, those sequences of Work indicated in or required by the Contract Documents and any other requirements of the Contract Documents; (b) how the Contractor anticipates foreseeable events, site conditions and all other general, local and prevailing conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, schedule, performance and furnishing of the Work; (c) how the Means and Methods chosen by the Contractor translate into Activities and sequencing; (d) the actual timing and sequencing of completed Work; and (e) if required by the Contract Documents, the allocation of the Contract Price to the Activities. 6.4 Review and Return of Progress Schedule Submittals:
6.1.7. The Professional shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy or completeness of any designs, calculations or certifications made by licensed or certified professionals attached to a specific technical Submittal, whether or not that stamp or written certification is required by the Contract Documents. 6.2 Review and Return of Technical Submittals: 6.2.1. The Professional's review of a technical Submittal will be to evaluate whether the items covered by the Submittal, after installation or incorporation into the Work, will conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design of the completed Work as a functioning whole as indicated in the Contract Documents.
MICHSPEC DTMB
6.4.1. The Owner's and Professional's review of Progress Schedule Revision 0 Submittals may result in comments relating to conformance with (a) the Contract Times, (b) those sequences of Work indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and (c) any other Contract Document requirements that may have a significant bearing on the use of Revision 0 Progress Schedule Submittals to resolve issues affecting Contract Price and/or Contract Time. Progress Schedule review comments may also result in the selection of Targets and recording of Target Times. 6.4.2. The review of Progress Schedule Revision Submittals may, in addition to the types of comments outlined in paragraph 6.4.1, result in comments as to whether the Contractor's scheduling of Work remaining continues to conform with the Contract Times and those sequences of Work indicated in or
00700 10
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
required by the Contract Documents. Progress Schedule Revision Submittal review comments may also respond to suggested Contractor schedule recovery plans, when and as appropriate, and to Contractor requests for extensions in Contract Time. 6.4.3. Progress Schedule reviews shall not impose on the Owner or Professional any responsibility for verifying whether Work is omitted; Activity durations are reasonable; the adequacy of the level of labor, materials and construction equipment; the reasonableness of the Contractor's chosen Means and Methods; or whether Work sequences and Activity timing are practicable. Even if any comments or objections are noted from the reviews of Progress Schedule Submittals, no such reviews or objections noted shall be effective or construed to create or impose on the Owner or Professional any responsibility for the timing, planning, scheduling or execution of the Work or for the correctness of any such Progress Schedule details. The correctness of the Progress Schedule shall remain the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 6.5 Additional Provisions Concerning Submittals: 6.5.1. Unless otherwise designated in a more specific technical Specification, a Submittal will be returned to the Contractor within fifteen (15) to twenty (20) Calendar Days, as designated by the Professional in writing. If a Submittal cannot be returned when it comes due, the Professional shall give appropriate notice to the Contractor of its return date. The Contractor shall revise and correct Submittals returned for revision and resubmittal, and resubmit them to the Professional directing specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by the Professional on previous submissions of the same Submittals. 6.5.2. No review or approval of Submittals shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the following: (a) variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents, unless the Contractor has called attention to each variation, as provided in paragraph 6.1.5, and the Professional has given written approval of that variation by a specific notation within or attached to the returned Submittal, (b) compliance with the “or equal” and substitution requirements of paragraph 5.2, (c) errors or omissions in the Submittal, or (d) compliance with the requirements of this Article. 6.5.3. Unless the Professional determines that additional resubmissions are reasonable under the circumstances, all costs incurred by the Owner made necessary by the Professional’s review of a Submittal after the first resubmission of that Submittal shall be reimbursed by the Contractor to the Owner. 6.5.4. All time consumed by the resubmissions and rereviews of a particular Submittal shall constitute time required to furnish that Submittal, or shall represent Delays not justifying any increase in Contract Time or Contract Price, or both. ARTICLE 7 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS; INSURANCE 7.1 Laws; Permits (Which Include Approvals and Licenses): 7.1.1. The Contractor shall comply with, and shall require all Subcontractors and Suppliers to comply with, all applicable Laws. The Contractor shall insure that everyone employed on the Work discharge their responsibilities consistent with all Laws.
MICHSPEC DTMB
*7.1.2. The Contractor shall secure from the State Department of Labor and Economic Growth and from all Political Subdivisions with jurisdiction, all construction permits necessary for the commencement, prosecution and completion of the Work before starting any Work at the site. All fees for securing the permits shall be paid by the Contractor, including all inspection costs which may be legally assessed by the Bureau of Construction Codes according to authority granted under 1972 PA 230, as amended, MCL 125.1501 et seq. The time incurred by the Contractor in obtaining construction permits shall constitute time required to complete the Work and shall not justify any increases in Contract Time or Contract Price, except to the extent any related Delay is attributable to the fault of the Drawings or Specifications or to revisions to the Drawings and/or Specifications required by the Political Subdivision with jurisdiction. 7.1.3. Unless expressly required by any Laws or permits, neither the Owner nor Professional shall be responsible for monitoring the Contractor's compliance with any Law, the State Construction Code or any permits. The Contractor is not responsible to make certain that the Contract Documents comply with applicable Laws and the State Construction Code; however, if the Contractor believes the Contract Documents deviate from the requirements of any Law, the State Construction Code or any permit, the Contractor shall give the Professional prompt written notice. If the Contractor provides any Work knowing or having reason to know such Work conflicts with any Laws, or the State Construction Code or any permits, the Contractor shall be responsible for that performance. The Contractor shall be proportionately responsible for the time required and the costs involved in complying with the obligations stated in this paragraph. *7.1.4. All Work shall be provided in accordance with the State Construction Code and the requirements of paragraph 1.2.4. If the Contractor observes that any Contract Document is at variance with any Laws or the State Construction Code in any respect, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Professional in writing, and any necessary changes shall be accomplished by an appropriate Change Order. The Contractor shall pay all charges of Public Utilities for connections to the Work, unless otherwise provided by Cash Allowances specific to those connections. *7.1.5. In accordance with the Michigan State Construction Code Act, 1972 PA 230, as amended, MCL 125.1501 et seq., the State Department of Labor and Economic Growth, Construction Code Commission has adopted and filed with the Secretary of State the following Construction Code Reference Standards: (a) Michigan Building Code; (b) Michigan Plumbing Code; (c) National Electric Code; (d) Michigan Mechanical Code; (e) State Elevator Code; (f) State Boiler Code; and (g) State Barrier Free Design Rules. 7.2 Sales and Use Tax and Other Similar Taxes: 7.2.1. The Contractor shall be responsible for and pay all Michigan sales and use taxes and any other similar taxes covering the Work that are currently imposed by legislative enactment and as administered by the Michigan Department of Treasury, Revenue Division. The Owner shall make a corresponding adjustment in Contract Price for any increase or decrease in sales, use and other similar taxes (excluding payroll taxes) covering the Work that are enacted after the date of Bid opening.
00700 11
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
7.3 Safety and Protection: 7.3.1. The Contractor shall comply with, and shall require all Subcontractors and Suppliers to comply with, all Laws governing the safety and protection of persons or property, including, but not limited to the Michigan Occupational Safety and Health Act (1974 PA 154, as amended, MCL 408.1001 et seq.) and all rules promulgated under the Act. The Contractor shall be responsible for all fines and penalties imposed for any related violation(s) of federal and State health and safety requirements. The Contractor's safety representative at the site shall be the superintendent required by the provisions of paragraph 4.2.2, unless otherwise designated in writing by the Contractor. 7.3.2. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (a) all employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected by the Work, (b) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, whether stored on or off the site, and (c) other property at or adjacent to the site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement. In the event of severe weather, the Contractor shall immediately inspect the Work and the site and take all reasonably necessary actions and precautions to protect the Work and ensure that public access and safety are maintained. 7.3.2.1. All damage, injury or loss to the Work, materials and equipment and such other property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by the Contractor shall be remedied by the Contractor, except to the extent due to fault of the Drawings or Specifications or to act or omission of the Owner or Professional, and not due to, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier. 7.3.2.2. The Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and Underground Utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. 7.3.2.3. Except as the division of responsibilities for safety may be otherwise delineated in writing between the Owner and Contractor in a Substantial Completion certificate, the Contractor duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall continue until such time as the Professional is satisfied that the Work, or Work inspected, is completed and ready for final payment.
7.3.3. Use of Explosives The Contractor shall comply with all federal, State and local Laws governing the use of explosives, obtain and pay for any required permits before their use and furnish a copy of the permits to the Professional before using explosives. The Contractor shall, under the supervision of competent and suitably trained and qualified personnel, exercise the utmost care not to endanger life or damage property in the transportation, storage, handling, use and disposal of explosives, and in the use of Means and Methods. The Contractor shall be responsible for all injury, damage and adverse impacts outside the permit area
MICHSPEC DTMB
resulting from the use of explosives (including an appropriate portion of the Delay and costs resulting from such injury, damage and impacts). 7.4 Bonds and Insurance General Requirements: 7.4.1. Both the Section 00610 Performance Bond and Section 00620 Payment Bond shall remain in full force and effect from the date of Contract Award until final completion of the Work or the end of the Correction Period, whichever comes later. The Contractor shall furnish any other bonds (e.g., manufacturer performance Bond or maintenance Bond) required by Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions or the technical Specifications. 7.4.2. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance providing the coverages and limits designated in this Article. Insurance shall be provided by insurers authorized to do business as insurer in the State, as evidenced by a Certificate of Authority issued by the Department of Consumer and Industry Services Insurance Bureau. Also, and unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Owner, insurers shall have an "A-" A.M. Best Company Rating and a Class VII or better financial size category as shown in the most current A.M. Best Company ratings. The Contractor shall not start to perform and furnish the Work, or continue with any part of the Work, unless the Contractor has in full force and effect all the required insurance. 7.4.3. Insurance policies shall contain a provision or endorsement stating that coverage will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused unless at least thirty (30) Calendar Days prior written notice has been personally delivered or sent by registered mailed to the Owner and Contractor. Any coverage nearing expiration during the period in which it is to remain in full force and effect shall be renewed before its expiration, and an acceptable certificate of insurance shall be filed with the Owner at least thirty (30) Calendar Days before it expires. 7.4.4. If any of the Contractor's sureties or insurers is declared bankrupt or placed into receivership, ceases to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents or its authority to do business in the State is revoked or expires, the Contractor shall immediately substitute other Bonds/sureties or insurers/policies, which shall meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. 7.5 The Contractor's Liability Insurance: 7.5.1. The Contractor shall maintain Workers' Compensation and Employer's Liability, Commercial General Liability, Commercial Automobile Liability, Excess Liability and such other insurance as may be designated in Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions or as is appropriate for the Work. The Contractor's liability insurance shall provide protection from claims which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and the Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed or furnished by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. 7.5.2. Liability Insurance shall be endorsed to list as additional insureds the Professional, the Owner's consultants and agents and the Professional’s consultants and agents, including their respective subsidiaries and affiliates and their respective directors, officers, shareholders, agents or employees. The
00700 12
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Contractor shall use the current Insurance Services Office (ISO) Form CG 20 09 for general liability insurance or equivalent, ISO Form CA 20 01 for automobile liability insurance or equivalent, and manuscripted form for excess liability insurance. The insurance afforded to the additional insureds shall be primary, and neither the coverages nor limits under the Contractor's policies shall be reduced or prorated by the existence of any other insurance applicable to any loss that the additional insureds may have sustained. Workers' Compensation, Employer's Liability Insurance and all other liability insurance policies shall be endorsed to include a waiver of rights to recover from the Owner, Professional and the other additional insureds. 7.5.3. The Contractor's liability insurance shall remain in effect through the Correction Period and through any special correction periods that are implemented pursuant to the requirements of paragraph 9.5.3. Liability insurance issued on a claims-made basis and completed operations insurance shall be maintained for two (2) years after final payment, and evidence of coverage shall be furnished to the Owner yearly. 7.5.4. For any employee, resident of and hired in Michigan, the Contractor shall have insurance for benefits payable under Michigan's Workers' Compensation Law. For any other employee protected by Worker's Compensation Laws of any other state, the Contractor shall have insurance or participate in a mandatory state fund, where applicable, to cover the benefits payable to any such employee. 7.5.5. Commercial General Liability Insurance shall be equivalent to that provided by the current edition of standard ISO Form CG 00 01, and shall include contractual liability and underground, explosion and collapse hazard exposure operations and pile driving operations (if risk is present). 7.5.6. Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance coverage shall be equivalent to that provided by the current edition of the ISO Form CA 00 01, and include Michigan statutory requirements. 7.5.7. Excess Liability Insurance shall provide the following protections: employer's liability, general liability and automobile liability. Excess Liability Insurance shall be at least as broad as the underlying policies of liability insurance. 7.5.8. Coverage Limits - Workers' Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance shall conform to statutory limits under Michigan Law. Commercial General Liability limits shall be $2,000,000.00 each occurrence, $2,000,000.00 general aggregate, $2,000,000.00 products and completed operations aggregate, and $2,000,000.00 personal and advertising injury. Commercial Automobile Liability limits shall be $2,000,000.00 combined single limit. Excess Liability limits shall be $2,000,000.00 each occurrence and aggregate, if the Contract Price is less than $10,000,000.00, and $5,000,000.00 each occurrence and aggregate, otherwise. Deductible amounts shall not exceed $25,000.00. 7.5.9. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner in writing of (a) any reduction in coverage limits over $100,000.00 resulting from Work under the Contract Documents or otherwise, and (b) any claim notice involving the Work. Notification of a claim shall provide full details and an estimate of the amount of loss or liability. If it turns out that the aggregate limits have been impaired to the extent that they are no longer adequate for the Work, the MICHSPEC DTMB
Contractor shall promptly reinstate the coverage limits and submit to the Owner certificates of insurance confirming that coverage has been reinstated to the specified limits. 7.5.10. These requirements shall not be construed to limit the liability of the Contractor or its insurers. The Owner does not represent that the specified coverages or limits of insurance are sufficient to protect the Contractor's interests or liabilities. 7.6 The Owner's Liability Insurance: 7.6.1. The Contractor shall purchase, maintain and submit to the Owner an Owners and Contractors Protective (OCP) Liability Insurance policy, issued on an occurrence basis, naming the Owner as named insured. The OCP insurance shall be primary insurance for the Owner and serve in place of adding the Owner as an insured in the Contractor's policy. The OCP insurance shall be obtained from the insurer providing the Contractor’s liability insurance to avoid duplication of coverage. 7.6.2. The OCP policy limit shall be $1,000,000.00 combined single limits, bodily injury and property damage, and shall not contain any exclusion relative to any supervisory functions by the Owner which may arise out of or result from operations under the Contract. 7.7 Property Insurance (Builder's All Risk Insurance): *7.7.1. The Owner or its designee shall purchase and maintain property insurance for one hundred percent (100%) of the actual cash replacement value of the insurable Work while in the course of construction, including foundations, unless foundations are specifically excluded, additions, attachments, and all fixtures, machinery and equipment belonging to and constituting a permanent part of the building structure. The property insurance also shall cover temporary structures, materials and supplies of all kinds, to be used in completing the Work, only while on the building site premises or within five hundred (500) feet of the site. The property insurance shall insure the interests of the Owner, Contractor and all Subcontractors and Suppliers at any tier as their interests may appear. The property insurance shall insure against "all risk" of physical loss or damage to the extent usually provided in policy forms of insurers authorized to transact this insurance in Michigan, and shall be subject to a deductible of $10,000.00 dollars for each loss occurrence. *7.7.2. A copy of the master insurance policy will be kept at Facilities and Business Services Administration, for review by the Contractor and Subcontractors.
7.7.3. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in determining the actual cash replacement value of any insured loss. Any deductible amount shall be assumed or shared by the Contractor and Subcontractors, at any tier, in accordance with any agreement the parties in interest may reach. 7.7.4. The Owner shall purchase and maintain for its benefit boiler and machinery insurance for boiler and machinery required to be registered and inspected by Law.
00700 13
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
7.8 Waiver of Rights:
*7.11 Michigan Right-To-Know Law:
7.8.1. To the extent any losses and damages caused by any of the perils covered by property insurance covering the Work (whether under paragraph 7.7 or otherwise) are covered and payments are made, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other for any such losses and damages and also waive all such rights against the Professional and all other Persons named as insureds or additional insureds in such policies. Each Subagreement shall contain similar waiver provisions by the Subcontractor or Supplier in favor of the Owner, Professional, and all other Persons named as insureds or additional insureds. None of these waivers shall extend to the rights that any of the insureds may have to the proceeds of insurance held by the Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under a policy so issued.
*7.11.1. The Contractor shall comply with Section 14a-14n of the Michigan Occupational Safety and Health Act (MIOSHA), 1974 PA 154, as amended, MCL 408.1014a MCL 408.1014n, commonly referred to as the “Michigan Right-to-Know Law” and the rules promulgated under the Act. The Act places certain requirements on employers to develop a communication program designed to safeguard the handling of hazardous chemicals through labeling of chemical containers and development and availability of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), and to provide training for employees who work with these chemicals and develop a written hazard communications program.
7.8.2. The Owner and Contractor intend that the required policies of property insurance shall protect all the parties insured and provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered. Accordingly, all such policies shall be endorsed to provide that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurer will have no rights of subrogation or other recovery against any of the parties named as insureds or additional insureds, and if the insurers require separate waiver forms to be signed by the Professional or the Owner's and Professional’s consultants, the Owner will obtain such waiver forms, and if required of any Subcontractor or Supplier, the Contractor will obtain such waiver forms as well.
*7.11.2. Provisions of the Michigan Right-to-Know Law may be found in those sections of the Michigan Occupational Safety and Health Act (MIOSHA), which contain Right-to-Know provisions, and the Federal Hazard Community Standard, which is part of the MIOSHA Right-to-Know Law through adoption. The Act, rules and standards should be reviewed for additional requirements. *7.11.3. The Michigan Right-to-Know Law also provides for specific employee rights, including the right to be notified of the location of MSDS and to be notified at the site of new or revised MSDS within five (5) Business Days after receipt and to request MSDS copies from their employers. The Contractor, employer or Subcontractor shall post and update these notices at the site. *7.12 Nondiscrimination:
7.9 Receipt and Application of Proceeds: 7.9.1. Any insured loss under the policies of property insurance will be adjusted with the Owner and will be made payable to the Owner as trustee for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the conditions of paragraph 7.9.2. The Owner shall deposit, in a separate account, and shall distribute monies received based on any agreement the parties in interest may reach. If no other distribution agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be replaced or repaired, the monies received shall be used for that purpose and the Work Involved and resulting costs shall be covered by Change Order. 7.9.2. The Owner, as trustee, shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless a party in interest objects in writing within fifteen (15) Calendar Days after the occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power. If an objection is made, the Owner as trustee shall settle with the insurers pursuant to any agreement the parties in interest may reach.
*7.12.1. The Contractor and each Subcontractor and Supplier covenants to comply with the following requirements: *7.12.1.1. Not to discriminate against any employee or employment applicant because of race, religion, color, national origin, age, sex, height, weight, marital status, or a physical or mental disability that is unrelated to the individual’s ability to perform the duties of the particular job or position. *7.12.1.2. To take action to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, national origin, age, sex, height, weight, marital status, or a physical or mental disability that is unrelated to the individual’s ability to perform the duties of the particular job or position. Such action shall include, but is not limited to employment upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship;
*7.10 Unfair Labor Practice: *7.10.1. The Owner, pursuant to 1980 PA 278, as amended by MCL 423.321(b), may void and rescind the Contract if, at any time, the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier appears on the register maintained by the Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services of employers who have been found in contempt of court by a Federal Court of Appeals on not less than three occasions involving different violations during the preceding seven (7) years for failure to correct unfair labor practices as prohibited by Section 8 of Chapter 372 of the National Labor Relations Act, 29 U.S.C. 158.
MICHSPEC DTMB
*7.12.1.3. To state, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees, that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, national origin, age, sex, height, weight, marital status, or a physical or mental disability that is unrelated to the individual’s ability to perform the duties of the particular job or position; *7.12.1.4. To send, or have its collective bargaining representative send, each labor union or representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising that labor union or worker’s representative of commitments under this provision;
00700 14
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
*7.12.1.5. To comply with the Elliot-Larsen Civil Rights Act, 1976 PA 453, as amended, MCL 37.2201 et seq.; the Michigan Persons With Disabilities Civil Rights Act, 1976 PA 220, as amended, MCL 37.1101 et seq.; and all published rules, regulations, directives and orders of the Michigan Civil Rights Commission which may be in effect on or before the date of Bid opening. *7.12.1.6. A breach of the covenants set forth in paragraphs 7.12.1.1 through 7.12.1.5 shall be regarded as a material breach of the Contract. *7.12.2. The Contractor shall furnish and file compliance reports within the times, and using the forms, prescribed by the Michigan Civil Rights Commission. Compliance report forms may also elicit information as to the practices, policies, programs, and employment statistics of the Contractor and Subcontractors. The Contractor shall permit access to Records by the Michigan Civil Rights Commission and its agent for the purposes of ascertaining compliance with the Contract Documents and with rules, regulations and orders of the Michigan Civil Rights Commission. *7.12.3. If, after a hearing held pursuant to its rules, the Michigan Civil Rights Commission finds that the Contractor has not complied with the nondiscrimination requirements of the Contract Documents, the Michigan Civil Rights Commission may, as part of its order, certify said findings to the Board. Upon receipt of certification, the Board may order the cancellation of the Contract and/or declare the Contractor ineligible for future contracts with the State, until the Contractor complies with said order of the Michigan Civil Rights Commission.
Michigan Department of Labor and Economic Growth, Wage/Hour Division in its schedule of occupational classification and wage and fringe benefit rates for the locality in which the Work is to be performed. The schedule of wage and fringe benefit rates applicable to Work on this Contract is attached to Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions. *7.14.3. The Contractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates as prescribed in Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions and the address and telephone number of the Michigan Department of Labor and Economic Growths’ office responsible for enforcement of these provisions. The Contractor also shall keep an accurate Record showing the name and classification of each person performing Work on the site, the dates on which Work was performed, the hours each person worked on the site, and the actual hourly wages and benefits paid to each person. This Record shall be made available for inspection to the Department of Technology, Management and Budget, Facilities and Business Services Administration, and the Michigan Department of Labor and Economic Growth, at any time, upon their request. In addition, the Contractor must have available to DTMB and DELEG, certified payroll of those working on the project. *7.14.4. In case there is an omission of any trade from the schedule of wages and fringe benefits attached to Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions, it shall be understood that the trades omitted also shall be paid not less than the wage and fringe benefit rates prevailing in the locality in which the Work is to be performed. *7.14.5. A finding by the Michigan Department of Labor and Economic Growth that the Contractor or any Subcontractor is in violation of the requirements of these provisions shall be final.
*7.13 Michigan Residency for Employees: *7.13.1. Fifty percent (50%) of the persons employed on the Work by the Contractor shall have been residents of the State of Michigan for not less than one year before beginning employment on the Work. This residency requirement may be reduced or omitted in writing, at the sole discretion of the Owner, to the extent that Michigan residents are not available or to the extent necessary to comply with federal Law concerning federal funds used for the Project. A breach of this requirement shall be considered a material breach of the Contract. *7.13.2. This residency requirement shall not apply to the Contractor or to any Subcontractor if the Contractor or any such Subcontractor is signatory to collective bargaining agreements which allow for the portability of employees on an interstate basis (The Management and Budget Act, 1984 PA 431, as amended, MCL 18.1241a).
*7.14.6. The Contractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, notice that as the intended beneficiaries of 1965 PA 166, as amended, MCL 408.551 et seq. construction mechanics who have not been paid in accordance with the Act may file a claim with the Department of Labor and Economic Growth. *7.14.7. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Electrical Administrative Act, 1956 PA 215, as amended, MCL 338.881 et seq., as amended; and all Laws pertaining to occupational classifications. 7.14.8. The Schedule of Prevailing Wage and Fringe Benefit Rates applicable to the Work is attached to this Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions.
*7.14 Prevailing Wages:
7.15 Century Date Compliance Protection:
*7.14.1. The term “the Contractor”, as used in this paragraph, shall include the Contractor and all the Contractor’s Subcontractors and their respective lower tier Subcontractors and all construction persons (whether general contractors, prime contractors, project managers or trade contractors) in privity of contract with any of them.
7.15.1 All fixtures, equipment or operating systems which require firmware or software systems and that are provided with and/or incorporated into the Work shall include, at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time, design and performance such that they will not experience firmware or software abnormality and/or generate incorrect results or performance deficiencies due to date oriented processing.
*7.14.2. The rates of wages and fringe benefits to be paid to each class of construction mechanics by the Contractor shall not be less than the wage and fringe benefit rates issued by the
7.15.2. The firmware and software design to ensure century date compliance capability, shall include, but not be
MICHSPEC DTMB
00700 15
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
limited to data structures (databases, data files, etc.) that provide four (4) digit date century; stored data that contain date century recognition, including, but not limited to, data stored in databases and hardware device internal system date; calculations and program logic (e.g. sort algorithms, calendar generation, event recognition, and all processing actions that use or produce date values) that accommodates same century and multi-century formulas and date values; and user interfaces (i.e. screen reports, etc.) that accurately treats four (4) digit year 2000 as a leap year within all calculations and calendar logic. 7.15.3 When requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall promptly provide written assurances to the Owner from any manufacturer of any fixtures, equipment or operating systems provided with and/or incorporated into the Work that its fixtures, equipment, or operating systems have been reasonably tested and will not experience any firmware or software abnormality and/or generate incorrect results or performance deficiencies due to date oriented processing. Whether the Owner chooses to request such assurances, and whether such assurances are provided, will not relieve the Contractor from the Contractor’s obligation to provide fixtures, equipment and operating systems in accordance with the Contract Documents or will represent acceptance of Defective Work. 7.15.4. If the Contractor knows or has reason to know of any incorrect results and/or performance deficiencies due to date oriented processing, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Professional and Owner in writing of any such Defective Work. 7.15.5 The Contractor specifically warrants and represents that all fixtures, equipment or operating systems provided with and/or incorporated into the Work will not experience firmware or software abnormality and/or generate incorrect results or performance deficiencies due to date oriented processing. This Contractor warranty shall extend until the applicable warranty otherwise covering the fixture, equipment or operating system at issue expires. 7.15.6. The Contractor shall take prompt corrective action upon receiving any written notice of any Defective Work because any fixtures, equipment or operating systems experience firmware or software abnormality and/or generate incorrect results or performance deficiencies. ARTICLE 8 PROSECUTION; SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 8.1 Starting the Work: 8.1.1. Within fifteen (15) Calendar Days after the Owner executes the Section 00500 Agreement, a pre-construction conference will be held. The conference will be intended, without limitation, to (a) review the Contractor's Schedule of Shop Drawing submissions; (b) review the qualifications of key Contractor personnel; (c) review the Contractor's proposed normal working hours and plans for laydown, staging, construction traffic, access to the site, parking and other similar matters; (d) review procedures for Submittals, clarifications and interpretations (including reasonable times for response turnaround), Change Orders, Change Authorizations and Record Documents; and (e)
MICHSPEC DTMB
exchange twenty-four (24) hour emergency telephone numbers for key personnel. 8.1.2. The Contractor shall start the Work on the Date of Commencement of the Contract Time. No Work shall be started at the site before such is allowed by the Contract Documents. 8.2 Revision 0 (Rev. 0) Schedule and Cost Submittals: 8.2.1. The Contractor shall deliver the interim Rev. 0 Progress Schedule, Schedule of Shop Drawing submissions and Rev. 0 Progress Schedule as required in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall correct and adjust any Rev. 0 Submittal returned for revision. The finalized Revision 0 As-Planned Schedule shall be the Progress Schedule from which Revision Schedules shall be developed and used by the Contractor when making proposals or claims for adjustments in Contract Time and/or Contract Price. 8.3 Compliance with Contract Time Requirements: 8.3.1. The Contractor shall prosecute the Work with the diligence necessary to ensure its completion within the Contract Times. The Contractor shall provide sufficient management, supervision, labor, materials and equipment, and the Contractor shall undertake appropriate action promptly to recover schedule when necessary to comply with the Contract Times. 8.3.2. Unless disallowed by any Law or modified in another Section of the Specifications, a daily schedule from 06:00 AM to 06:00 PM, during Business Days, shall be normal working hours. Except in an Emergency, or as may be required by the Contractor's safety and protection obligations, or as the Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree, all Work at the site shall take place during normal working hours. The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Owner twenty-four (24) hours before performing Work outside of normal working hours. 8.3.3. Unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner, for any Work actually performed outside of normal working hours, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner any related increases in costs the Owner incurs, provided those costs are costs which the Contractor could reasonably have foreseen and which are not offset through the earlier completion of the Work resulting from working outside of normal working hours. Examples of Owner costs include, but are not limited to, overtime charges of the Professional and payments for custodial and security personnel. 8.3.4. Early Dates in the Progress Schedule shall be based on proceeding with all or part of the Work exactly on the date when the corresponding Contract Time commences to run. Late Dates shall be based on completing all or part of the Work exactly on the corresponding Contract Time, regardless of whether the Contractor anticipates early completion or not. If sequences of Work are indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, the Progress Schedule shall show in sufficient detail the Contractor's approach to conforming with those sequences. 8.3.5. The Progress Schedule shall reflect the Contractor's approach to Work remaining, be employed when reporting on progress or schedule recovery and facilitate the evaluation of Requests for Payment, as provided in the Contract Documents.
00700 16
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
8.3.6. The Contractor shall carry on the Work with due diligence during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements. The Contractor shall exercise reasonable precautions, efforts and measures to avoid or mitigate situations that would cause Delays. 8.4 Substantial Completion: 8.4.1. The Contractor shall conduct inspections of the Work to verify the extent of completion. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner a list of items to be completed or corrected resulting from the inspections whenever the Contractor, upon completing all pre-requisite testing of the Work, considers that the Work, or any portion of the Work designated in the Contract Documents as having a separate, specified Substantial Completion, has progressed to the point that it is substantially complete. 8.4.2. Within a reasonable time after receiving the Contractor’s list of items to be completed or corrected, the Owner, Professional and Contractor shall jointly conduct a Substantial Completion inspection. If, after consulting with the Owner, the Professional does not consider the Work, or portion of the Work inspected, substantially complete, the Professional, within twenty (20) Calendar Days after the inspection, will deliver to the Owner and Contractor a list of incomplete or Defective Work sufficient to demonstrate the basis for that determination. 8.4.3. If the Professional and Owner agree that the entire Work, or that the portion of the Work inspected, is substantially complete, the Professional will deliver to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of Substantial Completion with a Punch List. The certificate shall (a) fix a reasonable date of Substantial Completion, (b) fix a date for completion of the Punch List to the satisfaction of the Professional, and (c) recommend the division of responsibilities between the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Work, nor any portion of the Work inspected, shall be substantially complete, unless the Owner can use the Work, or designated portion of the Work inspected, for the use intended. 8.4.4. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, or designated part of the Work on which separate Substantial Completion and Contract Price are specified, payment may be made in full subject to (a) a withholding of two hundred percent (200%) of the value of any uncompleted Work, as determined by the Professional, and (b) any other deductions as the Professional may recommend or the Owner may withhold to cover Defective Work, liquidated damages and the fair value of any other items entitling the Owner to a withholding. 8.4.5. To the extent Owner training is required before Substantial Completion, the Contractor will provide the Owner copies of all related operating and maintenance (O&M) documentation before the start of training. Where Owner training for a portion of the Work is not required before Substantial Completion, the related O&M documentation will be provided no later than Substantial Completion. Final O&M documentation (with revisions made after Substantial Completion), will be furnished by the Contractor to the Owner before the request for final payment.
MICHSPEC DTMB
8.5 Partial Use: 8.5.1. Before Substantial Completion of the entire Work, the Owner may, at its sole option, use any portion of the Work for which a separate Substantial Completion has been specified in the Contract Documents. Before Substantial Completion of the entire Work, the Owner may, at its sole option, use any portion of the Work considered by the Owner, Professional and Contractor to be separately functioning Work that can be used without significant interference with the Contractor’s completion of the balance of the Work, even though a Substantial Completion for such Work is not specified in the Contract Documents. 8.5.2. If the Owner decides to use any portion of the Work, it shall inform the Contractor in writing. Unless such portion of the Work has undergone a Substantial Completion inspection under paragraph 8.4.2, within a reasonable time after receipt of the notice, the Owner, Contractor and Professional shall jointly make an inspection to determine the extent of completion. If the portion of the Work inspected is substantially complete, the provisions of paragraph 8.4.3 shall be followed by the Owner, Professional and Contractor. If the portion of the Work inspected is not substantially complete, the Professional will prepare a list of items remaining to be completed or corrected before that portion of the Work is considered substantially complete. Upon completing the list, the Professional will deliver the prepared list of items to the Owner and Contractor. 8.5.3. There shall be attached to the list a written recommendation about the division of responsibilities between the Owner and Contractor for those matters enumerated in paragraph 8.6.1 with respect to that portion of the Work, pending Substantial Completion of that portion of the Work and the entire Work. During Partial Use, and before Substantial Completion of the portion of the Work under Partial Use, the Owner shall allow the Contractor reasonable access to complete or correct listed items and to complete other Work. The Owner will not start any Partial Use unless the property insurer, by endorsement or like acceptable procedure, has acknowledged receipt of notice of and consent to Partial Use. 8.6 Division of Responsibilities: 8.6.1. A certificate of Substantial Completion will include the Professional’s recommendation about the division of responsibilities between the Owner and Contractor for utilities, security, safety, insurance, maintenance, etc. The Owner and Contractor will accept the division of responsibilities recommended by the Professional or shall negotiate a mutually agreeable split of responsibilities, which shall bind the Owner and Contractor when the Owner starts Partial Use. 8.7 Suspension of Work: 8.7.1. Suspension of Work Order The Owner may, at any time, order the Contractor in writing to defer, stop, slow down, suspend or interrupt all or any part of the Work for such period as the Owner may determine appropriate for its convenience. If any such written order Delays performance for an unreasonable period, the Owner will amend the Contract Documents to provide for a corresponding adjustment in Contract Time and/or Contract Price (excluding Fee under paragraph 11.11).
00700 17
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
8.7.2. Constructive Suspension of Work If performance of all or any part of the Work is, for an unreasonable period, deferred, stopped, slowed down, suspended or interrupted by any other act or failure to act of the Owner or Professional, or act or event attributable to the Owner under the Contract Documents, the Owner will negotiate with the Contractor or authorize an adjustment in Contract Time and/or Contract Price (excluding Fee under paragraph 11.11.1) for any increase in the time required to complete the Work and/or the Contractor's cost of performance. 8.7.3. Suspension of Work Limitation No adjustment in Contract Price under paragraphs 8.7.1 or 8.7.2 shall be made to the extent performance is delayed by any other cause, including any act or omission within the control of the Contractor. Further, no suspension of Work shall justify an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time unless the resulting Delay exceeds the time allowed in the Contract Documents for the act or failure to act. 8.7.4. If the Contractor believes a suspension of Work justifies an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time, the Contractor shall give prompt written notice to the Owner and submit a written proposal promptly after the extent of the Delay becomes known. However, no proposal or claim by the Contractor on account of a suspension of Work shall be allowed (a) for any Delay or costs incurred more than thirty (30) Calendar Days before the Contractor gives written notice (except for written orders under paragraph 8.7.1), or (b) if made after final payment. 8.8 Sharing of Total Float On NonCritical Paths: 8.8.1. If the Progress Schedule is in the form of a Critical Path Schedule, Total Float on non-Critical Paths shall be available to the Owner, to the extent the Owner’s use is reasonable given the Total Float remaining for the Work affected. If any such Owner’s use of Total Float causes Delay which materially increases the Contractor’s cost to complete the Work affected, and the Contractor notifies the Owner in writing and proceeds to support the assertion to the Owner’s satisfaction, the Owner will correspondingly adjust Contract Price for any such material changes in the Contractor’s cost to complete the Work. 8.8.2. The amount of Total Float available in the Progress Schedule shall not be artificially reduced by suppressing Total Float merely for the sake of voiding Total Float. Total Float hidden through the use of such techniques as preferential sequencing; slow or late starts of follow-on trades; restraining a Contract Time by Work actually required for a later Contract Time; the use of small crews, extended durations, imposed dates; and so forth, shall be Total Float otherwise available for sharing with the Owner under the provisions of paragraph 8.8.1.
MICHSPEC DTMB
00700 18
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 9 WARRANTY; TESTS, INSPECTIONS AND APPROVALS; CORRECTION OF WORK 9.1 Warranty: 9.1.1. The Contractor warrants to the Owner that all Work will conform to the Contract Documents and will not be Defective. Reasonably prompt notice of Defective Work of which the Owner or Professional has actual knowledge shall be given to the Contractor, but failure to do so will not void the Contractor's warranty unless actual prejudice results from such untimely notice. The Contractor’s warranty excludes defect or damage caused by (a) abuse, modification by others, insufficient or improper operation or maintenance, or (b) normal wear and tear under normal usage. 9.1.2. Manufacturer warranties for materials and equipment received by the Contractor shall be assigned and promptly delivered to the Owner. Manufacturer warranties shall be in full force and effect for the entire duration of the Correction Period. 9.2 Tests, Inspections and Approvals: 9.2.1. The Owner, Professional, their representatives and consultants, testing agencies and those State agencies and Political Subdivisions with jurisdiction shall be permitted access to the Work at reasonable times while the Work is in progress for OnSite Inspection and/or inspection, testing or approval. The Contractor shall provide proper and safe conditions for such access. The Contractor shall give the Professional timely notice whenever any Work is ready for inspections, tests or approvals, so that the Professional may observe such inspections, tests or approvals. Tests, inspections or approvals shall not in any way relieve the Contractor from the Contractor's obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or warrant the Work as provided in the Contract Documents. 9.2.2. Unless otherwise provided in Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions, the Owner will retain a testing agency, directly or through the Professional, to perform inspections, tests or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The Owner will pay the charges of the testing agency, except if related to tests, inspections or approvals required by Law or otherwise charged to the Contractor under the provisions of paragraph 9.2.4 or 9.3. 9.2.3. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any testing, inspection or approval (a) required by Law, (b) indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, or (c) required for the Professional's acceptance of a Supplier, materials or equipment or mix designs submitted for prior approval by the Contractor. The Contractor shall (a) pay all related costs, except costs assumed by the Owner under paragraph 9.2.2, (b) schedule related activities, and (c) secure and furnish to the Professional the required certificates of inspection, testing or approval. 9.2.4. The Contractor shall be responsible for any testing, inspection or approval that reveals Defective Work, including an appropriate portion of the Delay and costs occasioned by such discovery of Defective Work. Examples of such costs assumed by the Contractor include, but are not limited to, charges of the Professional for repeated On-Site Inspections and, to the extent designated in the pertinent Specification, repeat testing, inspection or approval charges by testing agencies.
MICHSPEC DTMB
9.3 Uncovering Work: 9.3.1. Any Work covered without the Professional's prior written concurrence shall, when requested by the Professional, be uncovered, exposed or otherwise made available for On-Site Inspection, testing, inspection or approval as the Professional may require, and replaced, if necessary. This requirement applies to Work, which requires On-Site Inspection by the Professional, based on the Contract Documents or on specific On-Site Inspection procedures of which the Professional notifies the Contractor in advance. This requirement also applies to Work, which is to be inspected, tested or approved by others. The Contractor shall be responsible for any such uncovering, exposure, On-Site Inspection, testing, inspection and satisfactory reconstruction, including an appropriate portion of the Delay and costs, unless the Contractor gave the Professional timely written notice of the Contractor’s intentions to cover such Work and the Professional failed to act with reasonable promptness in response to such written notice. 9.3.2. The Contractor, at the Professional's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for On-Site Inspection, inspection, testing or approval any covered Work otherwise not required to be observed or inspected, tested or approved before covering, if the Professional determines that such covered Work shall be on-site inspected by the Professional or inspected, tested or approved by others. The Contractor shall be responsible for any such uncovering, exposure, On-Site Inspection, inspection, testing and satisfactory reconstruction, including an appropriate portion of the Delay costs, whenever any such uncovered Work is found to be Defective. If, however, any such Work uncovered at the Professional's request is not found Defective, the Owner will amend the Contract Documents to provide for a corresponding adjustment in Contract Price and/or Contract Time. 9.4 Correction of Work: 9.4.1. Before the Correction Period If required by the Professional, the Contractor shall correct all Defective Work, whether fabricated, installed or completed or not. If any Work is rejected by the Professional or if any testing, inspection or approval reveals Defective Work, the Contractor shall promptly, as directed, remove the Defective Work from the site and replace it with non-Defective Work. The Contractor shall bear responsibility for its proportionate share of the Delay and costs resulting from the correction and/or the removal and replacement of Defective Work. 9.4.1.1. If the Contractor, within reasonable time after receipt of written notice, (a) fails to correct Defective Work or remove and replace rejected Work, or (b) fails to correct or complete items on any Punch List, or (c) fails to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or (d) fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner, after seven (7) Calendar Days' written notice to the Contractor, may correct and remedy the deficiency. To the extent necessary to correct and remedy such deficiency, the Owner shall be allowed to exclude the Contractor from all or part of the site; take possession of all or part of the Work and stop related operations of the Contractor; take possession of the Contractor's tools, plant and office and construction equipment at the site; and incorporate into the Work materials and equipment for which the Owner has paid the Contractor. The Contractor shall allow the Owner and
00700 19
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Professional access to the site as the Owner may require to complete corrective and remedial action. The Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in Contract Price for all claims, costs, losses, damages and Delay incurred or sustained by the Owner which are attributable to the Contractor. Costs assumed by the Contractor under this provision include, without limitation, costs of correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work, costs of repair and replacement of other work destroyed or damaged by the action and related charges of the Professional.
9.4.5. It is not the intent of paragraph 9.4 or paragraph 9.5 to establish a period of limitations for the Contractor’s warranty or to limit the obligations of the Contractor to warrant that the Work will not be Defective. The specified correction of Work requirements relate only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct or remove and replace Defective Work. The specified correction of Work requirements have no limitation on the rights of the Owner to have Defective Work corrected or removed and replaced, if rejected, except as otherwise provided by Michigan Law.
9.4.1.2. Instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of any Defective Work, the Owner, with the advice of the Professional, may prefer to accept any Defective Work. In any such case, the Contractor shall bear its proportionate share of the Delay and costs associated with the Owner’s determination to accept the Defective Work. If the Owner's acceptance of the Defective Work takes place before the Professional’s recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents, and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly.
9.5 Special Correction Period Requirements:
9.4.2. Correction Period The Contract Documents provide for one Correction Period for the entire Work, whether Partial Use of any portion of the Work is designated as eligible by the Contract Documents or not. The Correction Period shall start on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work, or on a later date, if so provided in the Contract Documents. The Correction Period shall last one year, or longer, if so specified in the Contract Documents. 9.4.3. Correction of Work During the Correction Period The Contractor shall correct Defective Work or, if rejected by the Owner, remove from the site and replace any Defective Work with non-Defective Work. The Contractor’s corrective action shall be in accordance with the Owner's written instructions, and shall be accomplished at the Contractor’s sole expense. If the Defective Work causes an Emergency or unacceptable risk of loss or damage, the Contractor shall take immediate action to correct or remove and replace the Defective Work. 9.4.3.1. If the Contractor fails to take corrective action in accordance with the terms of any such Owner written instruction, the Owner, directly or through others under contract with the Owner, may correct or remove and replace the Defective Work. In any such case, the Contractor shall bear its proportionate share of all resulting claims, costs, losses and damages. If the Owner and the Contractor are unable to agree as to the amounts due by the Contractor to the Owner under the provisions of this paragraph, the Owner may deliver a claim, in accordance with the procedures and within the deadlines set forth in Article 15. If the discovery of the Defective Work takes place after final payment and the Contractor fails to pay the Owner any of the amounts due under the provisions of this paragraph, the Owner shall demand due performance under Section 00610 Performance Bond and Article 14 or deliver a claim, in accordance with the procedures and within the deadlines set forth in Article 15, or both. 9.4.4 After the Correction Period Until the period of limitation provided by Michigan Law, the Contractor shall promptly correct Defective Work upon receipt of written notice from the Owner. If appropriate under the circumstances or, in the event of an Emergency or unacceptable risk of loss or damage, the Owner, directly or through others under contract with the Owner, may correct or remove and replace the Defective Work.
MICHSPEC DTMB
9.5.1. Whenever the Owner undertakes Partial Use of any portion of the Work specifically designated as eligible for Partial Use in the Contract Documents, the warranties for all materials and equipment incorporated into that portion of the Work shall remain in full force and effect between the start of such Partial Use and the date when the Correction Period starts. If no separate price for such special correction period was requested in Section 00300 Bid Form and made part of the Contract Documents, the Owner will appropriately adjust the Contract Price. 9.5.2. Whenever the Owner undertakes Partial Use of any portion of the Work because any act or omission within the control of the Contractor Delays completion of the Work, or any portion of the Work, within a designated Contract Time, the warranties for all materials and equipment incorporated into that portion of the Work shall, at no adjustment in Contract Price, be maintained in full force and effect between the beginning date of such Partial Use and the date when the Correction Period stars. 9.5.3. The correction period for any Defective Work that is corrected or rejected and replaced within the last three (3) months of the Correction Period shall be extended by an additional six (6) months, starting on the date such Work was made non-Defective. 9.5.4. The Contract Documents may require the Correction Period to start on a date later than the date of Substantial Completion of the entire Work. If such is the case, and the Owner advances or defers the start of the Correction Period, the Contractor shall maintain the warranties for materials and equipment until the revised starting date of the Correction Period. If no separate price for such advance or deferment was requested in Section 00300 Bid Form and made part of the Contract Documents, the Owner will amend the Contract Documents to appropriately adjust the Contract Price. 9.6 Special Maintenance Requirements: 9.6.1. If the Contract Documents specify that the entire Work, or a portion of the Work, upon reaching Substantial Completion, shall not be placed in use by the Owner, the Contractor shall maintain the Work, or specified part of the Work, in good order and proper working condition and shall take all other actions necessary for its protection between the certified date of Substantial Completion and the date when the Work, or designated part of the Work, is placed in use. 9.6.2. If no separate price for such special maintenance period was requested in Section 00300 Bid Form and made part of the Contract Documents, the Owner will amend the Contract Documents to appropriately increase the Contract Price.
00700 20
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 10 CHANGES
10.2 Differing Subsurface or Physical Site Conditions:
10.1 Changes in the Work:
10.2.1. The Contract Documents make available Authorized Technical Data concerning subsurface site conditions and physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface facilities at the site. Consistent with Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders, except for reasonable reliance on the accuracy of Authorized Technical Data, the Owner does not warrant that Authorized Technical Data is necessarily sufficient and complete for the purposes of selecting Means and Methods, initiating, maintaining and supervising safety precautions and programs or discharging any other obligation assumed by the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
10.1.1. Changes in the Work The Owner is entitled to make changes within the general scope of the Work consisting of (a) additions, deletions or other revisions in the Specifications and Drawings, any Means and Methods or the Owner-furnished lands, equipment, materials or services, or (b) directing acceleration of the Work. Changes in the Work may be accomplished through negotiated, bilateral Change Orders or unilateral Change Orders or result from any other properly authorized written order from the Owner or Professional which represents a constructive change. 10.1.2. Negotiated Changes The Owner may negotiate changes in the Work by directing the Professional to prepare a Bulletin in numerical sequence describing the change being considered. Upon receiving a Bulletin, the Contractor (with the appropriate Subcontractors) shall evaluate the described change and quote the Bulletin. In estimating adjustments in Contract Price and/or Contract Time, the Contractor shall follow the provisions, including the breakdown requirements, specified in Article 11. 10.1.3. Constructive Changes Any written order (including instruction, interpretation, determination, authorization or approval) from the Owner or Professional that causes a change in the Contract Documents shall constitute a change in the Work, provided the Contractor or the Owner gives prompt, written notice of a change to the other (with copy to the Professional) stating the date, circumstances and source of the change. 10.1.3.1. Upon receipt and evaluation of the written notice, if the Owner agrees, with the Professional’s advice, that a change within the general scope of the Work has been ordered, the Owner shall, by Change Order or Change Authorization, correspondingly amend the Contract Documents. If the Owner finds that a change within the general scope of the Work has not been ordered, and the Contractor disagrees, the Contractor may deliver notice of a claim and a claim Submittal in accordance with the procedures and within the deadlines set forth in Article 15. 10.1.3.2. No proposal or claim by the Contractor on account of changes under paragraphs 3.2.1 or 10.1.3 shall be allowed for any costs or Delay incurred more than thirty (30) Calendar Days before the Contractor gives written notice as required. 10.1.4. Unilateral Changes If, in negotiations, the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on the adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time corresponding to any change in the Work, the Owner may issue a unilateral Change Order. Upon receiving any such Change Order, the Contractor shall promptly proceed or continue with the Work Involved as required by the Change Order. 10.1.4.1. Unilateral Change Orders may adjust Contract Price and/or Contract Time, as the Owner, with the advice of the Professional, may determine appropriate. Contract Price may be adjusted on a lump sum basis or an actual cost, not to exceed basis. If the Contractor disagrees with the extent of the adjustments in Contract Price and/or Contract Time made by any such unilateral Change Order, the Contractor may deliver notice of a claim and a claim Submittal in accordance with the procedures and within the deadlines set forth in Article 15.
MICHSPEC DTMB
10.2.2. The Contractor or Owner shall notify the other in writing if the Contractor or Owner, respectively, discovers that (I) actual subsurface conditions or latent physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface facilities encountered at the site differ materially from those shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or (II) unknown subsurface conditions or unknown physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface facilities encountered at the site, of an unusual nature, differ materially from those ordinarily encountered and recognized as inherent in work similar in character to the Work. A written notice from the Contractor shall be delivered promptly before the conditions are disturbed and before proceeding with the affected Work. A written notice from the Owner shall be delivered promptly after the Owner has knowledge of the differing subsurface or physical conditions. 10.2.2.1. Upon receipt or delivery of any such notice, the Owner shall investigate the differing conditions asserted. If, with the Professional's advice, the Owner determines that conditions on which the Contractor is entitled to rely do differ materially, the Owner will amend the Contract Documents to provide for any changes in the Work and adjustments in Contract Price and Contract Time made necessary by the differing conditions and any resulting Delay which is not reasonably anticipatable under the circumstances and which is attributable to the Owner and/or Professional. Unless the Owner and Contractor otherwise agree, no increase in Contract Time shall be made for any suspension of Work made necessary by any differing subsurface conditions, if the suspension of Work lasts less than ten (10) Calendar Days. 10.2.2.2. If the Owner determines that the actual conditions encountered and those conditions on which the Contractor is entitled to rely do not differ materially, and the Contractor disagrees with the Owner’s determination, the Contractor may deliver notice of a claim and a claim Submittal in accordance with the procedures and within the deadlines set forth in Article 15. 10.2.2.3. No proposal or claim by the Contractor due to differing site conditions shall be allowed (a) if the Contractor knew of their existence before submitting its Bid or if those conditions could have been discovered by any reasonable examinations for which the Contractor, as Bidder, was made responsible under the Bidding Requirements, and/or (b) unless the Contractor's notice is provided on a timely basis and gives the Owner adequate opportunity to investigate the asserted differing site conditions. 10.2.3. The provisions of paragraph 10.2.2 through 10.2.2.3 also shall apply to situations where the Contractor or Owner discovers that any reference points provided by the Owner need correction to enable the Contractor to proceed with the Work.
00700 21
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS Owner shall terminate the affected Work or the Contract for the Owner's convenience.
10.3 Responsibilities for Underground Utilities: 10.3.1. The Contractor shall comply with 1974 PA 53, as amended, MCL 460.701 et seq., and all other Laws concerning Underground Utilities. In addition, the Contractor shall be responsible for immediately notifying the Owner of any contact with or damage to Underground Utilities, and for the safety, protection of and repairing of any damage done to any Work and any surface and subsurface facilities. Except as provided under 1974 PA 53, as amended, MCL 460.701 et seq., paragraph 10.3.2 or by any Allowance specific to Underground Utilities, the Contractor shall bear an appropriate portion of the Delay and costs relating to the obligations set forth in this paragraph. 10.3.2. Shown or Indicated If the Contractor encounters Underground Utilities shown or indicated (whether in the Contract Documents or those documents itemized in Section 00210 Information for Bidders) that are inaccurately shown or are inaccurately located, responsibility for any damage shall be as provided in MCL 460.701 et seq. To the extent the Drawings and/or Specifications inaccurately show or locate, through error or omission, the actual physical conditions and/or location of existing Underground Utilities (when compared with the information and data provided by the owners of such Underground Utilities), the Owner will amend the Contract Documents to provide for a corresponding adjustment in Contract Price and/or Contract Time. 10.3.3. Not Previously Located If the Contractor encounters not previously located Underground Utilities, which could not reasonably have been foreseen, the Owner will amend the Contract Documents to provide for any changes in the Work and corresponding adjustments in Contract Price and/or Contract Time made necessary by such changes in the Work and by any resulting Delay which is not reasonably anticipatable under the circumstances and which is attributable to the Owner and/or Professional. 10.4 Hazardous Material Conditions: 10.4.1. The Contractor shall use, handle, store, dispose of, process, transport and transfer any material considered a Hazardous Material in accordance with all federal, State and local Laws. If the Contractor encounters material reasonably believed to be a Hazardous Material and which may present a substantial danger, the Contractor shall immediately stop all affected Work, give written notice to the Owner of the conditions encountered, and take appropriate health and safety precautions. 10.4.2. Upon receipt of the written notice, the Owner will investigate the conditions. If (a) the material is a Hazardous Material that may present a substantial danger and which was not described in the Drawings and/or Specifications, or identified in the Contract Documents as Work under the Contract Documents, and (b) the Hazardous Material was not brought to the site by the Contractor, or does not result in whole or in part from any violation by the Contractor of any Laws covering the use, handling, storage, disposal of, processing, transport and transfer of Hazardous Materials, the Owner shall order a suspension of Work in writing. The Owner shall proceed to have the Hazardous Material removed or rendered harmless by negotiating a change in the Work with the Contractor, by means of separate contract or as the Owner may deem otherwise expedient. In the alternative, the
MICHSPEC DTMB
10.4.3. Once the Hazardous Material has been removed or rendered harmless by any of the means outlined in paragraph 10.4.2, the affected Work shall be resumed as directed in writing by the Owner. Any determination by the Michigan Department of Community Health and/or the Michigan Department of Environmental Quality (whichever is applicable) that the Hazardous Material has either been removed or rendered harmless shall be binding upon the Owner and Contractor for the purposes of resuming the Work. If any such incident with Hazardous Material results in Delay not reasonable anticipatable under the circumstances and which is attributable to the Owner or Professional, the Owner will amend the Contract Documents to provide for a corresponding adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time, or both, made necessary by such Delay. 10.4.4. If the Hazardous Material was brought to the site by the Contractor, or results in whole or in part from any violation by the Contractor of any Law covering the use, handling, storage, disposal of, processing, transport and transfer of Hazardous Materials or from any other act or omission within its control, the Contractor shall bear its proportionate share of the Delay and costs involved in cleaning up the site and removing and rendering harmless the Hazardous Material to the satisfaction of the Owner, State and all Political Subdivisions with jurisdiction. If the Contractor fails to proceed with due diligence to take appropriate action pursuant to applicable Law and consistent with the Owner requirements, the Owner may act accordingly, in which case the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from and against all claims, as construed in paragraph 1.4, arising from the Owner's exercise of such appropriate action. 10.5 Incidents with Archaeological Features: 10.5.1. The Contractor shall at once notify in writing the Owner of any Archaeological Feature deposits that are encountered or unearthed during the execution of the Work. The Contractor shall protect the deposits in a satisfactory manner and no further disturbance of the Archaeological Features shall take place until Work is allowed to be resumed in the affected areas. 10.5.2. If the Owner, with the advice of the Professional, concludes that the Contract Documents require changes because of Archaeological Features encountered, the Owner will amend the Contract Documents to provide for any changes in the Work and corresponding adjustment in Contract Price and/or Contract Time made necessary by the changes due to the Archaeological Features encountered and by any resulting Delay which is not reasonably anticipatable under the circumstances, and which is attributable to the Owner and/or Professional. 10.6 Unit Price Work: 10.6.1. If the Contract Documents specify Unit Price Work, the Contract Price shall contain the sum of each unit price times its estimated quantity. The Contractor shall be responsible for completing, within the Contract Times, one hundred twenty (120%) of the estimated quantities of Specified Unit Price Work and reasonable quantities of Contingent Unit Price Work.
00700 22
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
10.6.2. The Contractor shall promptly, before proceeding with any affected Unit Price Work, deliver a written notice to the Professional (a) whenever actual quantities for an item of Specified Unit Price Work differs materially from those estimated and request an adjustment in the estimated quantity, or (b) requesting authorization to provide any or differing quantities of any item of Contingent Unit Price Work. The Contractor or the Owner shall submit to the other and the Professional, a proposal for adjusting that item's unit price and/or the Contract Time. The proposal shall be properly substantiated.
10.7.2. The Contractor shall complete Work covered by Provisionary Allowances as approved in writing by the Owner and directed by the Professional. The Cost of the Work Involved for Work authorized under any Provisionary Allowance shall be determined pursuant to Article 11, except that payments within the limits of any Allowance shall exclude Bond and insurance premiums under paragraph 11.8.1.5, since these costs are already included within other elements of the Contract Price.
10.6.2.1. Promptly after being notified by the Contractor, the Professional will evaluate the affected Unit Price Work and provide its determination to the Owner and Contractor. If the Owner adjusts the estimated quantity of Specified Unit Price Work or authorizes any, or any additional, quantities of Contingent Unit Price Work, the Contractor shall proceed with that Unit Price Work as directed by the Professional. The Contractor shall proceed with the Unit Price Work regardless of whether the Owner, after conferring with the Professional determines that a variation in quantity justifies an adjustment in the unit price, or that the existing unit price is valid for the additional or reduced quantities, or that no adjustment in the Contract Time is warranted. In the event the Contractor disagrees with any such determination, the Contractor shall deliver a notice of claim and a claim submittal in accordance with the procedures and within the deadlines set forth in Article 15.
10.8.1. The terms “Change Order“ and “Change Authorization” are defined in Section 00020 Glossary. Further, Division 1 includes prototype Change Order and Change Authorization forms which shall be used by the Owner and Contractor in connection with modifications to the Contract.
10.6.2.2. Any adjusted Unit Price agreed upon by the Owner will only apply to the actual quantities above one hundred twenty percent (120%) or to the actual quantities less than eighty percent (80%) of the estimated quantity. For additional quantities over one hundred twenty percent (120%) or reduced quantities below eighty percent (80%) of the estimated quantity, the Owner may negotiate a Unit Price with the Contractor, or direct a unilateral change as provided by Article 10, or rebid that Work. In no case however, will a Unit Price change resulting from a reduction in quantity be renegotiated such that the changed Unit Price produces a modified Bid Price for any line item that exceeds the initial Bid Price for that line item. 10.6.3. No adjustment due to quantity variations shall be allowed (a) unless the Contractor met the notice requirements of paragraph 10.6.2, (b) to the extent that the Bid Price for a line item will increase due to reduced quantities at a higher unit, (c) for under runs in any quantities of Contingent Unit Price Work, unless the unit price times the estimated quantity exceeds the lesser of $50,000.00 or two percent (2%) of the Contract Price, or (d) if any unit price increase results in whole or in part from any act or omission within the control of the Contractor (errors in the Contractor’s Bid, unbalanced unit prices, etc.). 10.7 Cash Allowances; Provisionary Allowances: 10.7.1. The Contractor shall obtain the Professional's written acceptance before providing materials, equipment or other items covered by a Cash Allowance. Payments under a Cash Allowance shall be on actual costs, and exclude costs for supervision, handling, unloading, storage, installation, testing, etc., which shall be considered to be included within other elements of the Contract Price. Payments within the limits of an Allowance shall exclude Fee and Bond and insurance premiums, since these are already included within other elements of the Contract Price.
MICHSPEC DTMB
10.8 Change Orders; Change Authorizations:
*10.8.2. A bilateral Change Order which does not incorporate a Contractor reservation of rights to claim additional adjustments, shall memorialize the Owner’s and Contractor’s agreement as to the adjustments in Contract Price and/or Contract Time made by the Change Order. Any such bilateral Change Order shall constitute an all inclusive settlement for all changes, Delay and costs, whatsoever, and the Contractor's signature on the Bulletin and proposal incorporated into that Change Order represents a waiver of all rights to file a subsequent proposal or a claim under Article 15 on account of that Change Order or the Work. 10.8.3. A presumed bilateral Change which includes a proposal signed by the Contractor with a reservation to claim additional adjustments shall be regarded as a notice of claim as to those adjustments and shall be pursued as provided in Article 15, except as the Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree. 10.8.4. A Change Order issued by the Owner after unsuccessful Contract Price and/or Contract Time negotiations with the Contractor and stating the Owner’s proposed basis for the necessary adjustments in Contract Price and/or Contract Time shall be a unilateral Change Order. 10.8.5. The Owner will issue Change Orders to amend the Contract Documents for changes in the Work and for any adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Time agreed to in total or in part by both the Owner and Contractor; or to correspondingly adjust the Contract Price for Work furnished under Cash Allowances, Work completed that was authorized under Provisionary Allowances and actual quantities of Unit Price Work. Amounts for Work Involved in a Change Order signed by the Owner may be included in subsequent Requests for Payment. 10.8.6. The Owner may use Change Authorizations (a) to document agreed-upon minor variations in the Work, and/or (b) to document or order changes in the Work not warranting any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time. Examples of the second category include, but are not limited to the Owner's authorization for drawing payments against a Provisionary Allowance or the Owner’s consent to quantity variations not increasing the Contract Price. 10.8.7. Before, or in conjunction with, the Professional’s certification of final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued, with the Professional’s advice, to correspondingly adjust the Contract Price for the value of Work furnished under Cash
00700 23
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Allowances, Work completed that was authorized under Provisionary Allowances and actual quantities of Unit Price Work. 10.8.8. Subject to the provisions of paragraphs 10.8.2 through 10.8.4, it is a requirement of the Contract Documents that all Change Orders duly signed and issued by the Owner shall incorporate Bulletins, which are duly signed by the Contractor, regardless of whether the Contractor uses a reservation of rights. ARTICLE 11 CHANGES IN CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGES IN CONTRACT TIME 11.1 General Provisions: 11.1.1. Contract Price or Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order duly signed by the Owner. Neither Contract Price nor Contract Time may be changed by Change Authorization (subject to the provisions for constructive changes). 11.1.2. Contractor proposals for adjusting Contract Price and/or Contract Time shall be due within fifteen (15) Calendar Days after the Contractor receives a Bulletin or delivers to the Owner a notice of a change or a Delay. Proposals not complying with the requirements of paragraphs 11.1.4 and 11.1.5 shall be returned for resubmission. This turnaround period is of the essence and any Delay in delivering a bulletin or resulting from resubmission of an incomplete Bulletin shall not justify any increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. The Owner, in its sole discretion, may extend or shorten the 15Day period for Bulletin quotations estimated at more than $250,000 or less than $25,000. 11.1.3. The Professional will review each Contractor proposal, and the Professional will recommend to the Owner, within a reasonable time, whether or not the Bulletin quotation is acceptable. Due to the time required to obtain Board and Director approvals, a Contractor proposal shall be irrevocable for sixty (60) Calendar Days after it is submitted to the Professional. 11.1.4. Contractor proposals or claims for Work Involved shall detail all affected items of Work, whether increased, revised, added or deleted, and shall be fully documented and itemized as to (a) individual adds and deducts in Work quantities and labor manhours; (b) corresponding itemized Cost of Work Involved (paragraphs 11.4 through 11.9; and (c) Fee. Proposals or claims including Fee of five percent (5%) for Work Involved of a Subcontractor shall nominate the performing Subcontractor and enclose the Subcontractor’s pricing data, if available. 11.1.5. For Contractor proposals or claims for adjustments in Contract Price arising from Delays (whether or not such Delays extend any Contract Time or any early completion date), the Contractor's estimates shall be as comprehensive and detailed as may be appropriate to support the proposal or claim. Examples of germane information include labor productivity, labor manpower levels, production data and Progress Schedule revisions. 11.1.6. If the Contractor’s surety(ies) requires notice of any adjustment in Contract Price and/or Contract Time, whether made pursuant to Article 11 or otherwise; any "or equal" material or equipment or substitution approved by the Professional; any change within the scope of Article 10; or any other addition, deletion or revision in the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether made by Change Order or Change Authorization, it shall
MICHSPEC DTMB
be the Contractor's responsibility, and not the Owner's, to give notice to the Contractor’s surety(ies). It is agreed that none of these modifications to the Contract Documents and/or the Work shall invalidate the Agreement.
11.2 Changes in Contract Time: 11.2.1. An extension in Contract Time will be justified only to the extent that the Contractor demonstrates, with comprehensive and detailed documentation, that the Delay is not reasonably anticipatable under the circumstances, is not caused by act or omission within the control of the Contractor, and, furthermore, that the Delay necessarily extends the Work, or portion of the Work in question, beyond the pertinent Contract Time. If the Owner determines that the Contractor’s documentation is insufficient to allow a thorough evaluation of the time extension request, the Contractor shall further support the request through a detailed analysis of the Progress Schedule Revision Submittal. 11.2.2. Examples of events that may justify an extension in Contract Time include acts of God or the public enemy; acts of the U.S. Government, the State or a Political Subdivision, each acting in its public capacity (including acts as permitting agency); acts of a Public Utility acting in its public capacity; fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions; strikes, freight embargoes; unusual weather (unusual in the sense of frequency or severity vis-à-vis the prior five (5) year average); unusually severe shortages of construction materials (considering all feasible sources of supply); Underground Utilities which the Contract Documents, through error or omission, inaccurately show or indicate; Underground Utilities not previously located; objection, for the Owner's convenience, to a nominated Subcontractor; Archaeological Features; suspension of Work; changes in the Work, differing site conditions; variation in quantities; and Delay, as provided in this paragraph, of Subcontractors or Suppliers, at any tier, not caused in whole or in part by any act or omission within the control of both the Contractor and any such Subcontractors and Suppliers. 11.2.3. If upon evaluation of the Contractor's analysis, the Owner approves an extension in Contract Time for Delay not caused in whole or in part by any act or omission within the control of the Owner and/or Professional, the Owner shall authorize the necessary adjustment in Contract Time only. If the Owner approves an extension in Contract Time for Delay caused in whole or in part by any act or omission within the control of the Owner and/or Professional, the Owner shall authorize the necessary adjustments in Contract Time and Contract Price. 11.3 Methods for Making Adjustments in Contract Price: 11.3.1. The method to be used to determine any adjustment in Contract Price shall be selected by the Owner from one of the methods in paragraph 11.3.1.1 through 11.3.1.3, or otherwise shall be limited to the methods in paragraph 11.3.1.4 or 11.3.1.5. 11.3.1.1. If any Work Involved is covered by lump sum prices or unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, those prices shall be used (subject to the terms and conditions of paragraph 10.6 Unit Price Work). In the latter case, the unit prices shall be applied to the quantity of Unit Price Work Involved.
00700 24
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
11.3.1.2. If any Work Involved is not covered by lump sum or unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then application of a lump sum price may be negotiated using the Contractor's itemized estimate of the anticipated Cost of the Work Involved, as specified in this Article, and a Fee for the Work Involved, as specified in paragraph 11.11.1. 11.3.1.3. If the Work Involved is not covered by the first two methods, the Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed with the Work Involved on an actual cost basis, with or without a guaranteed maximum, based on an itemized breakdown of the actual Cost of the Work Involved, as specified in this Article, and a Fee for the Work Involved, as specified in paragraph 11.11.2. 11.3.1.4. If the Work Involved is not covered by the first two methods, the Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed through a unilateral Change Order on a lump sum basis or a not-toexceed basis, based on the Professional's estimate of the anticipated Cost of Work Involved and a Fee for the Work Involved, as specified in paragraph 11.11.1 or 11.11.2. 11.3.1.5. If payment for the Work Involved is to be determined by the Michigan Court of Claims or a AAA arbitration panel, it is agreed by the Contractor that the actual cost and Fee method in paragraph 11.3.1.3 shall represent the appropriate method for determining such payment. 11.3.2. Items making-up the Cost of the Work Involved shall be allowable to the extent (a) consistent with those prevailing in the Project locality, (b) necessary, reasonable and clearly allocable to the Work Involved, and (c) limited to labor costs, Subcontract costs, material and equipment costs, construction equipment costs and general conditions costs, as specified in this Article. 11.4 Labor, Subcontract and Material/Equipment Costs: 11.4.1. The Cost of any Work Involved includes the Contractor's payroll costs for craft workers resident at the site (through crew foremen) assigned to furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the Work Involved. If craft labor manhours exceed those that can be gleaned from the Means Cost Data, or other cost guide acceptable to the Owner, the Contractor shall provide proper justification, which shall be acceptable to the Professional. 11.4.1.1. Payroll costs shall include wages, labor burdens and a factor for field supplies and purchase costs (less market value if not consumed) of tools not owned by the workers. Labor burdens shall be certified by an authorized financial representative of the Contractor and may include social security, unemployment taxes, workers' compensation, health and retirement benefits, vacation and holiday pay. The factor for field supplies and tools (individually valued at less than $1,000.00) shall not exceed four percent (4%) of the wages without burdens, unless the Contractor furnishes detailed data which supports a higher factor. For actual payroll costs, Contractor time sheets verified by the Professional and/or certified payrolls shall be the only valid Records. For actual payroll costs under paragraph 11.3.1.5, time sheets shall be valid only if they expressly correlate to the Work Involved and were recorded at that time and/or used for certified payrolls. 11.4.2. The Cost of the Work Involved includes the Contractor's costs for the labor costs, (lower tier) Subcontract
MICHSPEC DTMB
costs, material and equipment costs and general conditions costs of Subcontractors nominated for the Work Involved. Except for a higher six percent (6%) limit on the factor for field supplies and small tools, the methods for calculating Subcontractors' costs shall be the same as those for Contractor costs, except that the term "Subcontractor" shall replace the term "Contractor," context permitting. If the Owner and Contractor agree in advance, the Contractor shall obtain detailed quotations and shall nominate at least two (2) Subcontractors, acceptable to both the Contractor and Professional, for selection by the Owner. 11.4.3. The Cost of any Work Involved includes the Contractor's costs for materials and equipment, including transportation, storage and necessary Suppliers' field services. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from surplus sales that can be realized at the time of pricing shall accrue to the Owner, and the Contractor shall make arrangements so that they may be obtained. If the Bulletin for the Work Involved lists specific Suppliers, the Contractor shall obtain written quotations from them and shall nominate one of the listed Suppliers to allow a comprehensive review of the proposal by the Professional. Invoices segregating items relating to the Work Involved shall be valid Records in support of actual Supplier costs. 11.5 Construction Equipment Costs: 11.5.1. The cost of any Work Involved includes costs for individual construction equipment with replacement value in excess of $1,000.00. Transportation, loading and unloading, installation, dismantling and removal and shipping costs shall be allowed to the extent required by the Work Involved and reasonable under the circumstances. Equipment costs shall cease when the equipment is no longer needed for the Work Involved. Payroll costs for labor operating the equipment are as specified in paragraph 11.4.1. Equipment costs shall be computed using the same accounting and estimating rules and prices, whether related to added or deleted Work. 11.5.2. When determining actual construction equipment costs (a) under paragraph 11.3.1.3, daily logs of the equipment, operators and actual usage, verified by the Professional, shall be the valid Records; (b) under paragraph 11.3.1.5, such daily Records shall be valid only if developed when any such Work Involved was performed and used for accounting purposes. 11.5.3. Rented (or owned) equipment, idled solely by actions of the Owner or Professional, shall be paid at the rate for rented equipment (or at fifty percent (50%) of the rate for owned equipment) provided the idle period exceeds what is normal for the equipment and occurs during normal working hours. 11.6 Rented or Leased Construction Equipment: 11.6.1. Construction equipment rented or leased from third parties shall be priced using the rates negotiated between the Owner and Contractor. If no agreement is reached, those rates listed in the Rental Rate "Blue Book" published by Primedia Information Inc. of San Jose, Ca, for the region where the Project is located applicable to the equipment (model number and year) shall be used. For equipment leased or rented on an hourly basis, the rate for second or third shifts shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the base rate. Operating costs shall not exceed the hourly operation rate in the Blue Book. Hourly rates for equipment previously in use at the site for a month or longer shall use the
00700 25
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
monthly rate divided by 176 hours. Equipment previously in use for only one week or not previously in use at the site shall be invoiced to the Owner using the following schedule of equipment use:
Less than 8 hours 1 Day but less than 7 Calendar Days 1 week but less than 30 Calendar Days 30 Calendar Days or more (when in use)
11.8.1.6. Costs of consultants not in the direct employ of the Contractor, or Subcontractors not covered under paragraph 11.4.2; to the extent authorized by the Owner before proceeding with the Work Involved, and provided that those costs are neither covered by paragraph 11.4 nor excluded by paragraph 11.10; and 11.8.1.7. Taxes on the Work Involved, and for which the Contractor is liable; and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses, provided they relate solely to the Work Involved.
Hourly Rate Daily Rate Weekly Rate Monthly Rate
11.9 Limitations on Allowable Costs:
11.7 Owned Construction Equipment: 11.7.1. Construction equipment owned by the Contractor, or rented or leased from lessors associated with or owned by the Contractor, shall be priced using the rates negotiated between the Owner and Contractor based on the Contractor's normal accounting practices. If no agreement is reached, the hourly rates in the "Contractor's Equipment Cost Guide," published by Primedia Information Inc. for the region where the Project is located shall be used. Operating costs shall not exceed the hourly operation rate in the Blue Book. For multiple shifts, rates shall not exceed the shift Work adjustments recommended in the Cost Guide.
11.9.1. The Contractor shall not include as part of the Cost of any Work Involved any construction equipment costs, small tool costs, or general conditions costs that do not increase on account of, or are not directly attributable to, the furnishing and/or performance of any Work Involved. Examples of such unallowable costs include: 11.9.1.1. Charges for Contractor’s superintendent, general foremen and management personnel assigned full-time to the Work, if the charges relate to Work Involved which does not extend the Contract Time or cause Delay under paragraph 11.13.5, or to Work Involved not performed beyond normal working hours; 11.9.1.2. Fixed percent mark-ups for construction equipment (as opposed to specific construction equipment costs); or
11.8 General Conditions Costs: 11.8.1. The Cost of any Work Involved may include necessary general conditions costs to the extent those costs increase or decrease on account of, or are directly attributable to, the performance of Work Involved, or are required due to an extension in Contract Time or Delay under paragraph 11.13.5. Categories of general conditions which are allowable under this paragraph (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.9) include:
11.9.1.3. Cost of field supplies and/or small tools solely for extensions in Contract Time or Delay under paragraph 11.13.5.
11.8.1.1. To the extent agreed to in advance by the Owner, payroll costs for the Contractor’s project manager or construction manager, but not both, for Work activities conducted at the site;
11.9.2.1. Operating costs of construction equipment assigned to the Work for the duration, to the extent used in the incorporation of materials and equipment into the Work, provided the equipment is not subject to increased usage because of the extension in Contract Time or the Delay in early completion;
11.8.1.2. Payroll costs for the Contractor's superintendent and full-time general foremen, if any are assigned to the Work, for Work Involved performed beyond normal working hours and/or to the extent those costs and subsistence expenses arise solely from an extension in Contract Time or Delay under paragraph 11.13.5; 11.8.1.3. If agreed to in advance by the Owner, payroll costs for management personnel resident and working at the site and for workers not covered under paragraph 11.4.1, resident at the site and engaged as support workers (i.e., loading/unloading, clean-up, etc.) to workers covered under paragraph 11.4.1; 11.8.1.4. Costs of office and temporary facilities at the site, including office materials, office supplies, office equipment, minor expenses, utilities, fuel, sanitary facilities, and telephone service at the site, provided those cost arise solely from an extension in Contract Time or Delay under paragraph 11.13.5; 11.8.1.5. Costs of liability insurance premiums for insurance not included within the labor burdens charged under paragraph 11.4.1, and costs of Bond premiums;
MICHSPEC DTMB
11.9.2. Changes in Contract Price for extensions in Contract Time or Delay under paragraph 11.13.5 shall exclude any costs that are unaffected or do not relate to the extension in Contract Time or the Delay in early completion. Examples include:
11.9.2.2. Operating costs plus owned/rental costs of construction equipment brought to the site for a specific activity (crane used for specific lifts, concrete pump used for pours, etc.), provided the equipment is not subject to increased usage because of the extension in Contract Time or the Delay in early completion; 11.9.2.3. Construction equipment and site facilities which are fully paid under the Contract Price for the Work, as awarded. 11.9.3. The Contractor shall not include as part of the Cost of any Work Involved acceleration costs incurred, for the Contractor’s benefit, to make-up Delay which warrant extensions in Contract Time but do not justify increases in Contract Price. 11.10 Costs Covered by the Fee for the Work Involved (and not Allowable as Cost of the Work Involved): 11.10.1. Contractor administrative costs and home office overhead, whether at the Contractor’s principal or branch offices, shall not be allowable as elements of the Cost of Work Involved. Rather, those administrative costs and home office overhead shall
00700 26
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
be non-reimbursable expenses covered by the Fee for the Work Involved. Examples of administrative costs or home office overhead covered by this provision include, without limitation: 11.10.1.1. Payroll costs and other compensation of executives, general and administrative managers, estimators (except to the extent agreed to in advance by the Owner), claim consultants, attorneys, accountants, labor relation coordinators, purchasers, expeditors and other administrative staff, whether resident at the Contractor's principal or branch offices; 11.10.1.2. Payroll costs and other compensation of project managers, construction managers, architects, engineers, schedulers, detailers, safety personnel, clerks and other administrative staff not resident at the site and who are not part of the Contractor’s general conditions personnel contingent; 11.10.1.3. Costs of engineers, architects, accountants, consultants, attorneys and others, in the direct employ of the Contractor or otherwise, utilized for services related to a controversy or claim about the acceptability of the Work; 11.10.1.4. Costs incurred in the preparation of Contract Change Orders (whether or not ultimately authorized by the Owner), except as otherwise authorized by the Owner; and costs incurred in the preparation or filing of claims; and 11.10.1.5. Any interest on the Work Involved, unless otherwise allowed by the Michigan Court of Claims or an arbitration panel; charges for delinquent payments; lost interest on unpaid withholdings; lost profits and lost opportunities; and home office storage and yard facilities. 11.11 Limits on the Fee for the Work Involved: 11.11.1. Any adjustment in Contract Price made by bilateral Change Order which stipulates a lump sum price (developed from the Contractor's itemized estimate of the anticipated Cost of the Work Involved) without incorporating a Contractor reservation of rights to claim additional adjustments, shall include a Fee for costs under paragraph 11.10 and for profit, not to exceed the following: 11.11.1.1. For Work Involved to be self-performed by the Contractor, the Contractor's Fee shall not exceed fifteen percent (15%) of the Cost of the Work Involved. For Work Involved to be performed by any nominated Subcontractor, regardless of tier, the nominated, performing Subcontractor's Fee also shall not exceed fifteen percent (15%) of the Cost of the Work Involved. 11.11.1.2. For Work Involved to be performed by any nominated Subcontractor, the Contractor's Fee shall be five percent (5%) of the performing Subcontractor's Cost of the Work Involved, excluding that Subcontractor's Fee. For Work Involved of any nominated lower tier Subcontractor, any corresponding higher tier Subcontractors shall share equally a Fee of five percent (5%) of the performing lower tier Subcontractor's Cost of the Work Involved, excluding the lower tier Subcontractor’s Fee.
11.11.2. Any adjustment in Contract Price made by a bilateral Change Order (whether based on a lump sum or on the actual cost of the Work Involved) which incorporates a Contractor
MICHSPEC DTMB
reservation of rights to claim additional adjustments, shall include a Fee of only two-thirds (2/3) of the Fee otherwise resulting from the application of paragraphs 11.11.1 or 11.11.2.
11.11.3. The credit to be allowed to the Owner for any individual change consisting of deletions, or additions and deletions, that yields a negative net Cost of the Work Involved, shall be the amount of the net decrease and, if the negative net Cost of the Work Involved exceeds $10,000.00, a Fee credit of one-fifth of the Fee resulting from the application of paragraphs 11.11.1.1 through 11.11.1.3 shall be added to that amount. 11.11.4. For any change in the Work combining additions, revisions and deletions, one single Fee for the Work Involved shall be added to the net Cost of the Work Involved, unless the change in the Work combines self-performed Contractor Work and Subcontractor Work, or Work of more than one Subcontractor, or both, in which case separate Fees for the Contractor Work and for the Subcontractor Work shall be calculated, as appropriate. 11.11.6. In the event unrelated changes in the Work are grouped in a Bulletin, or included in a claim, and each of the changes yields a net increase or decrease in the Cost of the Work Involved, the combined Fee for the changes in the Work so grouped shall be computed as the sum of the individual Fees otherwise calculated under paragraphs 11.11.1 through 11.11.5. 11.12 Fee for Unabsorbed Home Office Overhead: 11.12.1. It is intended that the Fee for the Work Involved allowed under paragraph 11.11 shall be included with any adjustment in Contract Price for any Cost of Work Involved. However, the Fee under paragraph 11.11.1 shall not be intended to cover unabsorbed home office overhead resulting from an extension of the Contract Time stated in paragraph 4.1.1 of Section 00500 Agreement. When justified under the Contract Documents, Fee for unabsorbed home office overhead shall be calculated as detailed in paragraph 11.12.2. 11.12.2. If an extension of the Contract Time stated in paragraph 4.1.1 of Section 00500 Agreement and an increase in Contract Price for such an extension in Contract Time is justified under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall negotiate with the Contractor the reimbursement of an amount for the Contractor's home office overhead (under paragraph 11.10) that will be or were unabsorbed before the expiration of that Contract Time. Any such reimbursement shall be based on the lesser of: (a) the product of the ratio of the Contractor's home office overhead to its contract billings times the Contract Price in paragraph 3.1 of Section 00500 Agreement that remains unbilled on the expiration of that Contract Time, or (b) that amount derived from the Eichleay formula. 11.13 Changes in Contract Time for Early Completion: 11.13.1. The Contract Times specified in paragraph 4.1 of Section 00500 Agreement represent the Professional’s best estimate of the time required to complete the Work, and take into account comparisons with completed work similar in scope and character to the Work and constructed under similar conditions.
00700 27
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
11.13.2. Since “time is of the essence” in performing this Contract, any early completion Rev. 0 Progress Schedule considered acceptable by the Owner shall be construed as setting forth a corresponding amount of Contract Float, unless the Contractor delivers notice of a request for a shortening of the Contract Time within thirty (30) Calendar Days after receiving the Owner’s written notice of “no objection” to such Rev. 0 Progress Schedule. 11.13.3. If the Contractor requests that the Contract Times be shortened to eliminate the Contract Float on any such early completion Progress Schedule, and the Owner agrees to the Contractor’s request, the Owner and Contractor may negotiate a reduction in the affected Contract Time. Concurrently, the Owner will develop a level of liquidated damages appropriate to the revised Contract Time(s) or, if more appropriate under the circumstances, the Owner will specify actual damages, applicable from the negotiated, earlier Contract Time to the Contract Time under revision. In such case, the aggregate actual damages shall not exceed the sum liquidated damages that may have resulted from the originally-specified liquidated damages. Such agreement shall be memorialized through an appropriate Change Order. 11.13.4. If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree to such reduction in the Contract Times, or the Contractor rejects the Owner’s assessment of liquidated or the stipulation of actual damages, or both, the Contract Times in question shall remain unaltered and the early completion Progress Schedule shall be employed as provided in the Contract Documents. 11.13.5. To the extent that the Progress Schedule supports an early completion date, and a Delay extends performance of the Work beyond the Contractor’s early completion date but not beyond the corresponding Contract Time, if the Contractor pursues an increase in Contract Price for such Delay in early completion, the Owner shall consider such request, subject to the following: (a) the early completion is reasonably achievable, i.e., includes proper allowances for weather, Owner and Professional activities, rework and other foreseeable events within the control of the Contractor, (b) the Progress Schedule used to support the request is loaded with Activity manpower data, and (c) the adjustment in Contract Price shall equal fifty percent (50%) of the Contractor's Delay costs otherwise allowable under this Article. 11.13.6. As a point of emphasis, under these provisions, an increase in Contract Time and an increase in Contract Price equaling the Contractor’s costs occasioned by the Delay (as opposed to only fifty percent (50%) of the Contractor’s Delay costs), shall be justified only if the Delay attributable to the Owner and/or Professional necessarily extends Substantial Completion of the Work, or the portion of the Work having a specified Contract Time, beyond the correspondingly specified Contract Time. 11.14 Access to Records: 11.14.1. The Contractor shall maintain and keep, and shall require all Subcontractors and Suppliers to maintain and keep, in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, Records pertaining to the bidding, award and performance of the Work, including, but not limited to payroll and employment Records and all data used in estimating the Contractor's Bid and in pricing and negotiating Work covered by any Change Order, Change Authorization, proposal or claim.
MICHSPEC DTMB
11.14.2. For changes payable on an actual cost basis, or in the event of any claim, dispute, litigation, audit exception or appeal or termination, the Owner and any of the Owner’s duly authorized representatives shall have access to those Records for the purpose of inspection, audit/review and copying. The Contractor shall provide appropriate facilities for access promptly after receiving a request. The Owner and any of its duly authorized representatives shall have the right to interview Contractor employees. The Contractor shall make employees available on Business Days between 8:00 AM and 4:00 PM, as requested. 11.14.3. Payroll and other employment Records of workers assigned to the site, including apprentices and trainees, maintained to comply with the requirements of this provision, shall contain the name and address of each worker, correct wage classification, rate of pay (including contributions, or costs assumed to provide, for fringe benefits), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. The Contractor shall maintain Records that show: (a) the anticipated costs or actual costs incurred in providing such benefits, (b) that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, and (c) that the plan or program is financially responsible and has been communicated in writing to the workers affected. 11.14.4. Access to Records, as prescribed in this paragraph, shall be allowed at any time during the execution of the Work and shall remain in full force and effect for five (5) years after final payment, or termination (in the event of termination), or date of final resolution of any dispute, litigation, audit exception or appeal whichever event actually applies to this Contract. 11.15 Price Reduction for Defective Cost and Pricing Data: 11.15.1. If at any time during the prosecution of the Work, there is good cause to doubt the Contractor's compliance with the Defective Cost and Pricing Data requirements of this paragraph 11.15, the Owner shall be entitled to make an appropriate withholding from any payment otherwise owed to the Contractor. 11.15.2. Whenever the Contractor signs a proposal for a Contract Price or Contract Time adjustment, a Change Order or a claim settlement, the Contractor will be deemed to have certified, to the Contractor's best knowledge and belief, that the representations made and data submitted in pricing and negotiating the Cost of the Work Involved in that price proposal, Change Order, or claim settlement: (a) were made in good faith and are consistent with the facts, (b) are consistent with the provisions of Articles 10 and 11, and (c) are complete, accurate and current as of the date agreement was reached on the corresponding adjustments in Contract Price and/or Contract Time. This certification shall apply in each and every respect to any Subcontractor and Supplier who signs any cost and pricing data attached to any such a proposal for a Contract Price or Contract Time adjustment, Change Order or claim settlement. 11.15.3. If any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time made by any Change Order, claim or dispute settlement was increased by a material and significant amount because the Contractor, or any Subcontractor or Supplier, at any tier, made representations or furnished cost or pricing data of any kind that were false, contained math errors or were incomplete, the Contract Price shall be correspondingly reduced by Change Order.
00700 28
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 12 PROGRESS PAYMENTS; FINAL PAYMENT 12.1 Schedule of Values: 12.1.1. The Schedule of Values shall be approved by the Professional and divide the Work into pay items for significant Sections and areas, facilities or structures, with subtotals for first tier Subcontractors. If required in Division 1, the Schedule of Values shall be supported by a more detailed breakdown allocating the pay items to the Progress Schedule Activities. 12.1.2. The Schedule of Values shall tabulate labor costs, Subcontract costs and material and equipment costs. Labor costs shall include appropriate sums for construction equipment costs, general conditions costs, administrative costs (paragraph 11.10) and profit, unless separate pay items are itemized for those costs. *12.1.3. The Schedule of Values shall include the following close-out pay items: (a) two percent (2%) of the Contract Price for Fire Marshall approval, certificate of occupancy and other code approvals, as specified in the Contract Documents, (b) two percent (2%) of the Contract Price for manufacturer warranties, finalized operating and maintenance documentation, Owner training documentation, and test and balance reports, and (c) two percent (2%) of the Contract Price to cover finalized Record Documents. 12.2 Requests for Payment: 12.2.1. Once each month, the Contractor shall submit to the Professional a Request for Payment on the Owner’s form signed by the Contractor certifying Work completed and enclosing all supporting documentation. Each Request for Payment shall certify that all monies owed by the Contractor to Subcontractors and Suppliers for which payment previously has been sought has been paid from payments received. No Request for Payment shall include amounts for a Subcontractor or Supplier if the Contractor does not intend to use the payments requested, when received, to reduce the Contractor’s outstanding obligations on the Work.
12.2.4. The Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Request for Payment, whether incorporated in the Work or not, will pass to the Owner free and clear of all liens no later than at the time of payment by the Owner to the Contractor. 12.3 Review of Request for Payment; Intent of Review: 12.3.1. Within ten (10) Calendar Days after receipt of a Request for Payment, the Professional shall certify to the Owner the amount the Professional determines to be due, or shall return the Request for Payment to the Contractor indicating the reasons for withholding certification. Certification shall be based on the Professional’s review of the Request for Payment and enclosed documentation, On-Site Inspections and on-site Project representation, if any has been provided. If a Request for Payment is returned to the Contractor, the Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit that Request for Payment. 12.3.2. The Professional's certification of any Request for Payment constitutes a representation to the Owner that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that to the best of the Professional's knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents; and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. Any such representation by the Professional, however, shall be subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole before and upon Substantial Completion; to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; to a final determination of quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work (if any is specified) and to any other qualifications stated in the certification. 12.3.3. In the case of final payment, the Professional's certification of final payment and recommendation that the Work is acceptable shall be a further representation that conditions governing final payment to the Contractor have been met. 12.4 Refusal to Make or to Recommend Payment:
12.2.2. Payment to the Contractor, if approved by the Owner, will be made within thirty (30) Calendar Days after the Owner receives and approves a certified Request for Payment from the Professional. Payment for authorized reimbursable expenses shall be made monthly in the amount incurred before the cut-off date, provided each payment request expense is properly documented in spreadsheet form detailing the information about the request. The Contractor will provide a certification in writing that the payment request submittal is true and accurate.
12.4.1. The Owner may withhold from any payment an amount based on the Professional's refusal to recommend payment or the Owner's estimate of the fair value of items entitling the Owner to a withholding. Such may include, but not be limited to liquidated damages, claims made against the Owner arising out of or related to the Work, payment claims, or failure by the Contractor to reimburse the Owner any costs the Owner is entitled to recover. The Owner will give the Contractor reasonably prompt written notice supporting such action.
12.2.3. If payment is requested based on materials and equipment stored at the site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Request for Payment also shall be accompanied by (a) consent of surety, (b) a bill of sale, invoice or other documentation warranting that the Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all liens, and (c) evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance and other arrangements to protect them and the Owner's interests. If the documentation provided by the Contractor to comply with the intent of this paragraph is unsatisfactory, the Owner shall be entitled to withhold an appropriate amount from that Request for Payment until the Contractor provides documentation acceptable to the Owner.
12.4.2. The Professional may refuse to recommend all or any part of any payment, or because of subsequently discovered evidence, inspections or tests or the value of the Punch List, nullify all or any portion of any payment previously recommended, as the Professional may consider necessary to protect the Owner from loss because (a) the Work is Defective or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (b) the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Order, (c) it has been necessary that the Owner correct Defective Work or complete Work, (d) reasonable evidence exists that all or a part of the Work will not be completed within the corresponding Contract Time, (e) of the Contractor's failure to comply with all material requirements of the Contract, including, but not limited to the failure to submit Progress Schedule Submittals or Record Documents when due, (f)
MICHSPEC DTMB
00700 29
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
stored materials for which payment has been made or is sought has been determined by the Professional to be damaged or missing, (g) amounts are requested for a Supplier which is not the Supplier named in the Contractor’s completed Section 00440 Schedule of Materials and Equipment or a Supplier approved by the Professional through an “or equal” or substitution procedure, or (h) the Professional reasonably believes or knows of the occurrence of an event justifying termination for cause. 12.5 Request for Final Payment: 12.5.1. The Contractor shall complete the Substantial Completion Punch List within the Contract Time and date fixed by the Professional. The Contractor shall assemble all requisite documentation before requesting final inspection. 12.5.2. Upon written notice from the Contractor that the Contractor considers the entire Work, or a part of the Work for which final payment is specified in the Contract Documents, to be complete and ready for final payment, the Professional will make a final completion inspection with the Owner and Contractor and notify the Contractor in writing of all instances of incomplete or Defective Work revealed by the final inspection. The Contractor shall immediately undertake all necessary measure to complete Work in the final completion inspection. 12.5.3. The Contractor may request final payment after completing the incomplete or Defective Work to the satisfaction of the Professional and delivering final operating and maintenance documentation (with revisions made after Substantial Completion), warranties, inspection certificates, Record Documents (with revisions made after Substantial Completion), release of payment claim forms and all other required documents. 12.5.4. The Contractor's request for final payment shall enclose evidence of completed operations insurance and affidavit certifying that the insurance coverage will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused except as provided in paragraph 7.4.3, and an affidavit certifying that the surety agrees that final payment shall not relieve the surety of any of its obligations under the Performance Bond and Payment Bond. The Contractor's request for final payment shall further include (a) a Contractor's "Guarantee and Statement" (available from the Owner, form DMB-437) containing a statement of guaranteed indebtedness acceptable to the Owner in the full amount of the Contract Price, or a release of payment claims in the form of a release of liens, or a Bond or other security acceptable to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any payment claim, and (b) a list of all pending insurance claims rising out of or resulting from the Work being handled by the Contractor and/or its insurer. 12.6 Final Payment and Acceptance: 12.6.1. If the Professional is satisfied that the Work, or a part of the Work for which separate final payment is specified in the Contract Documents, has been completed and the Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, the Professional will, within thirty (30) Calendar Days after receipt of the final payment request, furnish to the Owner and Contractor the Professional's certification of final payment and acceptance. If the Professional is not satisfied, the Professional will return that request to the Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for not certifying final payment, in which case the Contractor shall make
MICHSPEC DTMB
the necessary corrections and request that final payment again be considered. 12.6.2. If the Owner concurs with the Professional's certification of final payment, the Owner will, within thirty (30) Calendar Days after receipt by the Owner of the Professional's certified recommendation of final acceptance, pay the balance of the Contract Price, subject to those provisions governing final payment specified in the Contract Documents. If the Owner does not concur with the Professional's determination, the Owner will return the request for final payment to the Contractor indicating in writing the reasons for refusing final payment and acceptance. In that case, the Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and shall request that final payment be again considered by the Owner. The Owner's written determination will be binding upon the Contractor, unless the Contractor delivers a notice of a claim and a claim Submittal within the deadlines set forth in Article 15. 12.6.3. If final completion of the Work is significantly delayed through no fault of the Contractor, the Owner may, upon receipt of the Contractor's final Request for Payment, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. Payment of the balance due shall be made under the provisions for final payment, but shall not constitute a waiver of claims. 12.6.4. The Owner shall pay with reasonable promptness any amounts deducted from the final payment, upon resolution of the claims justifying withholding of such monies. 12.7 Contractor's Continuing Obligation: 12.7.1. The following does not constitute acceptance of the Work in the event the Work or any Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, and therefore does not release the Contractor from its obligation to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (a) a certification by the Professional of any Request for Payment or final payment; (b) the issuance of a Substantial Completion certificate; (c) any payment by the Owner to the Contractor; (d) any Partial Use; (e) any act of acceptance by the Owner or any failure to do so; (f) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing, sample, test procedure or other Submittal; (g) any review of a Progress Schedule; (h) any On-Site Inspection; (i) any inspection, test or approval; (j) any issuance of a notice of acceptability by the Professional; or (k) any correction of Defective Work or any completion of Work by the Owner. 12.8 Waiver of Claims: 12.8.1. The making and acceptance of final payment do not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any rights as to the Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents, nor will it constitute a waiver of any claims by the Owner against the Contractor still unsettled, or arising from unsettled payment claims, Defective Work appearing after final inspection or failure by the Contractor to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special warranties provided by the Contract Documents or by Law. 12.8.2. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor against the Owner, other than those claims previously made in writing, on a timely basis in accordance with Article 15, and still unsettled.
00700 30
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS another organization either by provision in Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions or at the pre-construction conference.
ARTICLE 13 OTHER WORK 13.1 Related Work at Site:
13.3 Claims Between the Contractor and Other Parties: 13.1.1. During the period allowed for the furnishing and performance and completion of the Work, the Owner may undertake other work at the site with its own forces, or have other work performed at the site by other parties (including, but not limited to contractors or Public Utilities). If the Contract Documents do not note the performance of any such other work, written notice will be given to the Contractor before starting that work. 13.1.2. Whenever Work to be performed by the Contractor interfaces with other work, the Contractor shall coordinate that Work with the interfacing work. Paragraphs 13.2 and 13.3 outline representative duties and responsibilities assumed by the Contractor under this requirement. Such duties and responsibilities are for the benefit of the parties on the other work to the extent there are comparable provisions for the benefit of the Contractor in the contracts between those parties and the Owner. 13.2 Coordination Requirements: 13.2.1. If other work is ongoing concurrently with the Work, the Contractor shall afford the responsible party proper and safe access to the site. The Contractor shall afford the other party a reasonable opportunity for the handling, unloading and storage of their materials and equipment and for the execution of their work. 13.2.2. If any part of the Work, for proper execution or results, interfaces on the work of the Owner or another party, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Professional in writing conditions in that work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for proper execution and results. The Contractor's failure to do so will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with the Work except for latent or nonapparent defects and deficiencies in the other work. 13.2.3. The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, patching and interfacing of the Work that may be required to make any part of the Work come together properly and integrate with other work. The Contractor shall not cut, excavate or otherwise alter any other work without prior written consent of the party responsible for such other work. The Contractor shall supply, install and/or cause items to be built into interfacing Work, verify dimensions of interfacing Work, and notify the Professional of interfacing work that is unsatisfactory for, or prevents satisfactory installation of, any Work. Installation of any Work shall constitute acceptance by the Contractor of all previously placed interfacing work. 13.2.4. The Contractor shall be responsible for cooperating with the Professional fully in the coordination of the Contractor Submittals with interfacing submittals of other parties whose work in any way integrates with the Work or vice versa. Any such coordinated Submittal of the Contractor shall identify, by specific written notation, Work which integrates with the other work and of which the Contractor knows or has reason to know. 13.2.5. If the Owner contracts for other work, the Owner will have authority and responsibility for coordinating the operations of the Contractor and the other work. The Owner may delegate the specific authority and responsibility for coordinating the operations of the Contractor and of those parties performing the other work to
MICHSPEC DTMB
13.3.1. If the Contractor causes damage to the work or property of others, or if a claim arising out of the Contractor's execution of Work is made by another party against the Contractor, Owner or Professional, the Contractor shall promptly attempt to settle with that party by agreement or otherwise resolve the claim. The Contractor shall in any event, defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and Professional from and against all claims, as provided in paragraph 1.4, and/or judgments arising out of or resulting from damage by the Contractor to the work or property of others. 13.3.2. If another party causes damage to the Work or property of the Contractor, or if the performance of other work results in any claim by the Contractor, the Contractor shall promptly resolve the issue by agreement or otherwise resolve the claim. The Contractor shall not begin any action against the Owner (or its departments, agencies, boards, commissions, officers and employees) or Professional (or their consultants, agents or any of their directors, officers, shareholders, agents or employees), or permit any action against them to be maintained in the Contractor's name or for the Contractor's benefit before any court or tribunal, which action seeks to impose liability or recover damages from the Owner or Professional for such claim. 13.3.3. If the Contractor becomes involved in settling or otherwise resolving claims and disputes with other parties performing other work from events covered under paragraphs 13.3.1 or 13.3.2, or because of any other similar controversy, including damage to the Work or other work, or a dispute about responsibility for clean-up or any other issue, neither the Owner or Professional nor any of their respective consultants, agents, directors, shareholders, officers or employees will be involved in any way in such action (unless subpoenaed or ordered by a court). If the Owner incurs costs or damages of the types barred by the provisions paragraphs 13.2.1 and 13.2.2, the Contractor shall reimburse those costs and damages to the Owner. 13.3.4. Except as excluded in paragraph 13.3.5, if any party performing other work causes Delay upon the Work and if, upon a request from the Contractor, the Owner determines that any such Delay justifies an increase in Contract Price and/or Contract Time, the Owner shall amend the Contract Documents to provide the necessary adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time, or both. 13.3.5. If a party performing other work is granted an extension in a contract time only (on account of Delay not reasonably anticipatable under the circumstances nor caused, in whole or in part, by any act or omission of the other party, the Owner, Professional or the Owner's representative on that other work), and if, upon a request from the Contractor, the Owner determines that the time extension granted to the other work requires a change in a coterminous Contract Time in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall amend the Contract Documents to provide for the necessary change in Contract Time only.
00700 31
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION 14.1 Notice Requiring Assurance of Due Performance: 14.1.1. The Owner may request the Contractor (with copy to the surety) to provide written assurance of due performance if, at any time, any of the following non-conformances occur, any of which, if not corrected, may justify defaulting the Contractor: 14.1.1.1. The Contractor fails to complete the Work, or a specified part of the Work, within the corresponding Contract Time; fails or refuses to supply sufficient management, supervision, workers, materials or equipment; or otherwise fails to prosecute the Work, or any specified part of the Work, with the diligence required to comply with the Contract Time(s); *14.1.1.2. The Contractor persistently disregards the authority of the Professional or violates or disregards a provision of the Contract Documents or the Laws of any Political Subdivision with jurisdiction; or 14.1.1.3. The Contractor admits in writing, or the Owner otherwise establishes, the Contractor's inability or refusal to pay the Contractor's debts generally as they become due; or in response to the Owner's demand, fails to provide adequate, written assurance that the Contractor has the financial resources necessary to complete the Work within the Contract Time. 14.1.2. Within seven (7) Calendar Days after the Contractor receives a notice requiring assurance of due performance, the Contractor shall meet with the Owner and present the Contractor’s plan to correct the non-performance with supporting documentation. If the Owner determines that the Contractor’s plan provides adequate assurance of due performance, that determination shall not waive the Owner's right to subsequently default the Contractor or affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against the Contractor and/or surety then existing or that may accrue in the future. 14.2 Contractor Default and Termination for Cause: 14.2.1. The Owner, after giving the Contractor and surety seven (7) Calendar Days’ written notice of intent to default, may declare the Contractor in default and terminate the services of the Contractor for cause upon the occurrence of one or more of the following events: 14.2.1.1. At or after the meeting referred to in paragraph 14.1.2, the Owner determines that there is sufficient cause, giving the issues raised, to default the Contractor; *14.2.1.2. The Contractor fails to comply with the Michigan Residency requirements (1984 PA 431, as amended, MCL 18.1241a); or is found to be in violation of Section 4 of 1980 PA 278 concerning unfair labor practices, or any nondiscrimination requirements imposed by Law; 14.2.1.3. The Contractor violates or breaches any material provision of the Contract Documents which provides contractually for the for cause termination or rescission of the Contract or of the Contractor’s right to complete the Work;
MICHSPEC DTMB
14.2.1.4. A trustee, receiver, custodian or agent of the Contractor is appointed under contract, as opposed to under bankruptcy Law, whose appointment or authority to take over the Contractor's property is for the purpose of enforcing a lien against such property or for the general administration of such property for the benefit of the Contractor's creditors; or 14.2.1.5. It is determined that gratuities, including, but not limited to entertainment, gifts or donations were given by or on behalf of the Contractor to an official, agent, servant or employee of the Owner or Professional to secure the Contract or favorable treatment with respect to the awarding or amending or the making of any determination relative to the execution of the Work. 14.2.2. Unless otherwise agreed between the Owner and Contractor, at the expiration of the seven (7) Day (intent to default) period, the Contractor shall immediately stop all Work and proceed in accordance with the Owner’s instructions. Following receipt, and expiration, of a second seven (7) Day written notice period intended to allow the surety to complete an investigation of the default, the surety shall immediately: 14.2.2.1. If approved by the Owner, arrange for the Contractor to continue with performance and prosecution of the Work to completion; or 14.2.2.2. Undertake to perform and complete the Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents, in place of the Contractor, either through the surety's agents or by executing Subagreements with qualified contractors (excluding the Contractor and any of the Contractor's affiliates), or both; or 14.2.2.3. If agreed to by the Owner, waive the surety's rights set forth elsewhere in this Article, and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances, after investigating in good faith and with due care and diligence, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner, and present that determination to the Owner. If the Owner rejects that amount, the surety shall negotiate a sum acceptable to the Owner and promptly pay that amount to the Owner in full and with interest from the date the termination of the Contractor's services became effective. If the Owner rejects the sum determined by the surety, or if the surety fails to negotiate an agreement with the Owner on the amount of the surety's liability, the Owner shall have full power and authority to default the surety. 14.2.3. If the Owner has terminated the Contractor, and the surety elects to act under paragraph 14.2.2.2, the Owner will determine in good faith the amount necessary to cover the total direct, indirect and consequential costs (including, but not limited to liquidated damages, costs of correcting Work, fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and others and any other costs and damages for which the surety is liable under Section 00610 Performance Bond) that the Owner believes it will sustain from that default. The Owner will communicate its determination to the surety, and the Owner will deduct that amount in its entirety from Requests for Payment under the Contract Documents. Upon completion of the Work, if the unpaid balance of the Contract Price is not sufficient to reimburse the Owner for all actual direct, indirect and consequential costs resulting from the default of the Contractor, the surety and Contractor, jointly and severally, are liable to the Owner for the difference, which they shall pay to the Owner promptly.
00700 32
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
14.2.4. If the Owner has terminated the Contractor, and the surety elects to act under paragraph 14.2.2.2, the surety's contract with another contractor makes that contractor a Subcontractor under the Contract, in which case: (a) the provisions of Article 11 shall remain in full force and effect, (b) the methods and criteria to be used to compute the surety's (in lieu of the Contractor's) and that contractor's Cost of and Fee for any Work involved shall be limited to those provided in Article 11, and (c) all Work performed by any such contractor pursuant to a Subagreement with the surety shall be governed by the flow-through requirement in paragraph 5.1.6, the waiver of rights of subrogation provision in paragraph 7.8 and any other requirements of the Contract Documents governing Subagreements. 14.2.5. If the Owner has terminated the Contractor, any such termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against the Contractor or surety, or both, then existing or that may accrue after termination. All provisions of the Contract Documents that, by their nature, survive final acceptance of the Work shall remain in full force and effect after a termination for cause of the Contractor or default of the surety, or both.
monies due the Contractor or surety by the Owner will not release the Contractor or surety from liability. All provisions of the Contract Documents that, by their nature, survive final acceptance of the Work shall remain in full force and effect after a termination for cause of the Contractor or default of the surety, or both. 14.4 Termination for Convenience of the Owner: 14.4.1. Upon fifteen (15) Calendar Days' written notice to the Contractor and surety, or sooner if reasonable under the circumstances, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy it may have, elect to terminate any part of the Work, or the Agreement in whole or in part, as the Owner may deem appropriate for its convenience. Upon receipt of any such termination notice, the Contractor shall immediately proceed in accordance with any specific instructions, protect and maintain the Work, and make reasonable and diligent efforts to mitigate costs associated with the termination.
14.3 Surety Default:
14.4.2. In any termination for convenience, the Contractor shall be paid for (a) Work completed, in accordance with the Contract Documents, before receipt of the notice of termination, and (b) reasonable termination settlement costs for commitments that had become firm before the termination. The Contractor shall not be paid any anticipated and unrealized general conditions costs, administrative expenses and profit for uncompleted Work. If no agreement can be reached as to reasonable termination costs, the Owner will make a determination in writing which shall be final and binding on the Contractor unless the Contractor delivers notice of a claim and a claim Submittal in accordance with the procedures and within the deadlines set forth in Article 15.
14.3.1. If upon receipt of a notice of termination for cause, the surety fails to proceed immediately and as provided in paragraph 14.2.2, the Owner shall declare the surety in default under Section 00610 Performance Bond in accordance with the terms and conditions of this paragraph.
14.4.3. Upon termination for convenience, the Owner shall have full power and authority to take possession of the Work, assume any Subagreements with Subcontractors and Suppliers that the Owner selects, and prosecute the Work to completion by contract or as the Owner may deem expedient.
14.3.1.1. No default of the surety under the Section 00610 Performance Bond shall be declared, however, until the expiration of fifteen (15) Calendar Days after receipt by the surety of an additional written notice from the Owner demanding that the surety perform its obligations under Section 00610 Performance Bond.
14.4.4. If after notice of termination of the services of the Contractor, it is determined the Contractor was not in default, the termination shall be deemed to have been for the convenience of the Owner. In such event the Contractor may recover from the Owner payment in accordance with paragraph 14.4.2.
14.3.2. If the Owner declares the surety in default, the Owner shall have full power and authority to exclude the surety and Contractor from the site, assume any Subagreements that the Owner so selects and take possession of the Work and of all the surety's and Contractor's tools, plant and office, and construction equipment at the site (without liability to the surety or Contractor for trespass, rent or conversion). The Owner will (a) proceed to the full extent that the surety and Contractor could have proceeded, (b) incorporate into the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or elsewhere, and (c) prosecute the Work to completion as the Owner may deem expedient. When the Owner exercises any of the rights or remedies provided in this paragraph, the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for Work performed.
14.5 The Contractor May Suspend Work:
14.2.6. The Owner may, in its sole discretion, permit the Contractor to continue to perform Work when the Contractor is in default or has been defaulted. Such decision by the Owner shall in no way operate as a waiver of any of the Owner's rights under the Contract Documents or Section 00610 Performance Bond, nor in the event of a subsequent default, entitle the Contractor or surety to continue to perform or prosecute the Work to completion.
14.3.3. If the Owner has defaulted the surety, any such termination or default will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against the Contractor or surety, or both, then existing or that may accrue after termination. Any retention or payment of
MICHSPEC DTMB
14.5.1. In addition to being entitled to earning interest on unpaid Requests for Payment, the Contractor may, upon fifteen (15) Calendar Days written notice to the Owner, suspend the Work for the Owner's convenience if, through no act or fault of the Contractor, the Professional fails, for thirty (30) Calendar Days, to initiate processing of any Request for Payment or the Owner fails, for ninety (90) Calendar Days, to pay the Contractor any Request for Payment finally certified by the Professional to be due. 14.5.2. Except as specifically provided in paragraph 14.5.1, this provision shall not relieve the Contractor of the Contractor’s obligations to prosecute the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule and without Delay during any disputes and disagreements with the Owner.
00700 33
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 15 DISPUTES
15.3 Recommendations or Decisions from the Professional:
15.1 Claims Under This Article:
*15.3.1. For Contractor claims under $100,000.00, if requested in writing by the Contractor, the Professional will render a recommendation or decision within thirty (30) Calendar Days after the request and the Owner will issue, if necessary, a determination within thirty (30) Calendar Days after the Professional's recommendation or decision. For Contractor claims exceeding $100,000.00, the Professional will issue its recommendation or decision and the Owner, if necessary, will issue its determination, within sixty (60) Calendar Days after completing an audit of the claim, or after deciding not to conduct such an audit or, in the alternative, will notify the Contractor of the date when the determination will be made. In the latter case, a final determination will be concluded within sixty (60) Calendar Days from the date of such notification.
15.1.1. All claims, counterclaims, disputes and other matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof, shall be submitted in writing to the Professional and otherwise processed and resolved as provided in this Article. 15.1.2. A claim means a written demand or assertion by the Owner or Contractor, which is properly certified, seeking an adjustment in Contract Price and/or payment of moneys due, an extension or shortening in Contract Time, the adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, or other relief arising under or relating to the Contract, which becomes a claim or dispute after a written determination by the Professional or Owner under the appropriate provision of the Contract Documents. 15.1.3. Unless otherwise agreed between the parties, any claim that can be resolved under a provision of the Contract Documents providing for or excluding the relief sought by the claimant shall be resolved in accordance with that provision. 15.1.4. Notice of Claim - Except for Owner claims for liquidated damages, no claim shall be valid unless it is based upon written notice delivered by the claimant to the other party promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) Calendar Days after the Professional's or Owner's determination giving rise to the claim. The notice shall include a supporting statement stating the nature of the dispute, the amount involved, if any, and the remedy sought. The claim submittal with all supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) Calendar Days after the determination giving rise to the claim (unless the Professional allows an extension). The responsibility to substantiate claims shall rest with the claimant. *15.1.5. A claim by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Professional and Owner for a recommendation or decision from the Professional and, if necessary, an Owner determination. A claim by the Owner shall be submitted to the Contractor and the Professional for a written recommendation or decision by the Professional. The Owner reserves the right to audit, using the provisions in paragraph 11.14, any Contractor claim (or claim package) that the Contractor values at more than $50,000.00. 15.1.6. Pending final resolution of any claim under this Article, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with the Work and comply with any decision of the Owner and/or Professional. 15.2 Requirement for Certification of Contractor Claims: 15.2.1. For all Contractor claims seeking an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time, the Contractor shall submit an affidavit, certifying that the amount claimed accurately reflects any Delay and all costs that the Contractor is entitled from the occurrence of the claimed event and that supporting cost and pricing data are current, accurate, complete and represent the Contractor's best knowledge and belief. The affidavit shall be executed by an officer or partner of the Contractor with proper authority or his/her designee.
MICHSPEC DTMB
*15.3.2. For Owner claims under $100,000.00, the Professional will render a recommendation or decision within thirty (30) Calendar Days of the request. For Owner claims over $100,000.00, the Professional, within sixty (60) Calendar Days, will render a recommendation or decision or notify the Owner and Contractor when such will be rendered. *15.3.3. To the extent any Professional's decision is to deny a Contractor claim or to agree with an Owner claim, that decision shall be final and binding on the Contractor, without any determination by the Owner, unless the Contractor files a request for a presentation with the Director-OOF within thirty (30) Calendar Days as required by paragraph 15.4.1. Unless a claim is made in accordance with these requirements, it shall be waived. *15.3.4. To the extent that any recommendation from the Professional is partly or wholly adverse to a claim from the Owner, that determination shall be final and binding on both the Owner and Contractor unless either party files a request for a presentation with the Director-OOF as required in paragraph 15.4.1. *15.3.5. To the extent the Professional recommends payment of any Contractor claim which increases the Contract Price, that recommendation shall be subject to a determination from the Owner in a written opinion. In the event any such determination from the Owner is partly or wholly adverse to the preceding recommendation from the Professional, that determination shall be final and binding on the Contractor unless the Contractor files suit in the Michigan Court of Claims within thirty (30) Calendar Days after receipt of such determination. Unless a claim is made in accordance with these requirements, it shall be waived. 15.4 Determinations by the Director-IS: *15.4.1. If either the Contractor or Owner is not satisfied with any decision of the Professional rendered pursuant to paragraph 15.3.3 or 15.3.4, that party shall, within thirty (30) Calendar Days of receiving that decision, file a written appeal with the Director-OOF. If a Contractor or Owner appeal is timely filed, the claimant shall be entitled to present its claim, unless waived, to the Director-OOF, or his/her designee, provided that a claim narrative with complete supporting documentation is delivered to the Director-OOF, or his/her designee, within thirty (30) Calendar Days of that party's written notice of appeal.
00700 34
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
*15.4.2. Within thirty (30) Calendar Days after receipt of any such claim narrative, the Director-OOF, or his/her designee, shall schedule the time to start the presentations taking into account the dispute’s complexity and the urgency of its resolution. Subject to any recognized privilege, discovery shall be available to either party as provided by the Director-OOF, and his/her designee, and shall be concluded thirty (30) Calendar Days before the start of the presentations. *15.4.3. During the presentations, the Director-OOF, or his/her designee, shall hear presentations and receive evidence on the matters in dispute, as supported by the statement of the dispute. The Director-OOF, or his/her designee, shall have discretion concerning the allowability of evidence submitted, and shall not be bound to any rules of evidence other than those he/she promulgates. *15.4.4. If the right to a presentation is waived or if a presentation is conducted and the dispute remains unresolved, the Director-OOF, or his/her designee, at his/her sole option, shall specify in which forum the dispute shall thereafter be conducted by issuing a written determination to the Contractor that the dispute if the Contractor so elects, be submitted in writing to: *15.4.4.1. The Court of Claims maintained by the State of Michigan for the purpose of adjudicating claims against the State or other appropriate court, or *15.4.4.2. Arbitration in accordance with the construction industry rules of arbitration of the American Arbitration Association, subject to the provisions of paragraphs 15.5.1 and 15.5.2, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise. *15.4.5. The Director-OOF's, or his/her designee’s, determination on the forum in which the dispute shall be conducted is final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor. The Director-OOF's, or his/her designee’s determination on the dispute shall be final and binding on the Contractor unless the Contractor files a lawful action in the forum so chosen (Michigan Court of Claims or arbitration) within thirty (30) Calendar Days after receiving the Director-OOF's, or his/her designee’s, determination.
except by written consent containing a specific reference to the Agreement and signed by all the parties involved. Consent shall be deemed given by any party who has executed an agreement directly with the Owner affected by the Project and containing provisions comparable to those in this Article 15. Any consent to arbitration involving any additional party or parties shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any dispute not permitted in this Article. The agreement to arbitrate with any additional party or parties duly consented to by the parties to this Contract shall be specifically enforceable under the prevailing arbitration Law. 15.5.2. Subject to any recognized privilege, discovery shall be available to each party to the arbitration as it would be available under the general court rules of the Michigan Court of Claims which shall be enforced by the American Arbitration Association. All discovery and amendments to the prehearing summary shall conclude thirty (30) Calendar Days before the arbitration date. Failure to provide the foregoing discovery shall render any claim supported by witnesses or documents not so disclosed excludable by the arbitration panel in its discretion. 15.6 Interest on a Judgment; Payment of Judgment: *15.6.1. If, subsequent to a determination by the DirectorOOF, or his/her designee, the Owner or Contractor files a Michigan Claims Court or AAA arbitration action, and the party filing for such action increases its recovery by thirty (30%) percent or more above that awarded by the Director-OOF, or his/her designee, that party shall be entitled to interest calculated in accordance with MCL 600.6013, as amended, whether the action is filed with the Michigan Court of Claims or the American Arbitration Association. *15.6.2. After settlement or final adjudication of any claim under this Article if, upon demand, payment by the Contractor is not made to the Owner, the Owner may offset the appropriate amounts against (a) payments due to the Contractor under any other contract between the Owner and the Contractor, or (b) any amounts for which the Owner may be obligated to the Contractor in any capacity. 15.7 Venue; Flow-Through Provision:
*15.4.6. If, after such determination from the Director-OOF, or his/her designee, the Contractor properly submits the dispute to the Michigan Court of Claims or requests arbitration, and the final determination of either forum does not increase the Contractor's recovery by thirty (30%) percent or more above that awarded by the Director-OOF, or his/her designee, or voluntarily withdraws the action, the Contractor shall pay all resulting expenses of the Owner (including, but not limited to reasonable charges of attorneys, engineers, others and court or arbitration costs). 15.5 Supplements to AAA Arbitration:
15.7.1. The Contractor agrees to waive jurisdiction and venue, to consent and submit to the jurisdiction of, and not commence any action in other than, a competent State court in Ingham County, Michigan, unless original jurisdiction is vested in the Michigan Court of Appeals, the Michigan Court of Claims or the Michigan Supreme Court, regardless of residence or domicile, for any action or suit at law or in equity arising out of or under the Contract Documents. The Contractor further agrees that it will have each of its Suppliers and Subcontractors provide similar waivers as those required in this paragraph.
*15.5.1. No arbitration, arising out of, or relating to the Contract Documents shall include, by consolidation, joinder or in any other manner, any additional party not a party to this Contract,
15.7.2. The Contractor shall insert the provisions of this Article in all Subagreements, altering those paragraphs only to identify properly the contracting parties.
END OF SECTION 00700
MICHSPEC DTMB
00700 35
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
PROFESSIONAL Paradigm Design, Inc. WORK
Armory Modifications
AGENCY No.
511 INDEX No. 13721, 13921 FILE No. 511/13007.CAK
____________________________________________________________________________________________________ The provisions of this Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement Section 00700 General Conditions and those other provisions of the Contract Documents, as indicated below. All other provisions of the Contract Documents that are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. SC-7: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TO ARTICLE 7 LEGAL REQUIREMENTS; INSURANCE SC – 1.7.1: Delete the first sentence of section 00700 General Conditions and insert the following in its place, “The Owner will furnish, at no cost to the Contractor, two (2) copies of the drawings and project manual.” SC-6.5.3: Delete paragraph 6.5.3 of section 00700 General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place: “Unless the Professional determines that additional resubmissions are reasonable under the circumstances, all cost for the Professionals review of a submittal after the first resubmission of that submittal shall be paid by the Contractor directly to the Architect/Engineer.” SC-9.2.2: Delete paragraph 9.2.2 of section 00700 General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place, “The Contractor will retain a testing agency to perform inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor will pay the charges of the testing agency.”
END OF SECTION 00800
MICHSPEC DTMB
00800 1
(Rev. 3/14/2011)
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
State of Michigan
[email protected]
Official Request #:
734
Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921
Gratiot County
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 1 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Asbestos & Lead Abatement Laborer Asbestos & Lead Abatement Laborer 4 ten hour days @ straight time allowed Monday-Saturday, must be consecutive calendar days
MLDC
$39.75
$53.04
$66.32 H H H X X X X D Y
$39.75
$53.08
$66.40 H H H X X X X D Y
$54.70
$81.08 $107.45 H H H H H H H D Y
$40.31 $41.45 $42.57 $43.69 $44.81 $49.53 $49.32 $51.58
$59.49 $78.67 $61.21 $80.95 $62.88 $83.19 $64.57 $85.43 $66.24 $87.67 $73.40 $97.26 $73.01 $96.69 $76.40 $101.21
8/14/2013
Asbestos & Lead Abatement, Hazardous Material Handler Asbestos and Lead Abatement, Hazardous Material Handler AS207 9/16/2013
4 ten hour days @ straight time allowed Monday-Saturday,
Boilermaker Boilermaker
BO169 8/14/2009
Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months 7th 6 months 8th 6 months
Official Request #:
734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 1 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 2 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Bricklayer Bricklayer, Stone, and Artificial Masonry
BR9-7-BL
$41.44
$54.38
$67.31 H H H H H H H D Y
$31.09 $32.39 $33.68 $34.97 $36.27 $37.56 $38.85 $40.15
$38.85 $40.80 $42.73 $44.67 $46.62 $48.55 $50.49 $52.44
$46.61 $49.21 $51.79 $54.37 $56.97 $59.55 $62.13 $64.73
$35.00
$43.75
$52.50 X X H H H H H D Y
$28.00 $29.75 $30.62 $32.38
$33.25 $35.88 $37.18 $39.82
$38.50 $42.00 $43.74 $47.26
$41.48
$53.15
$64.81 X X H H H H H D Y
$32.15 $34.48 $35.65 $37.98
$39.15 $42.65 $44.40 $47.89
$46.15 $50.81 $53.15 $57.81
$38.10
$50.11
$62.11 X X H X X X H D Y
$29.70 $30.90 $32.10 $33.30 $34.50 $35.70
$37.51 $39.31 $41.11 $42.91 $44.71 $46.51
$45.31 $47.71 $50.11 $52.51 $54.91 $57.31
3/8/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-749 hours 750-1499 hours 1500-2249 hours 2250-2999 hours 3000-3749 hours 3750-4499 hours 4500-5249 hours 5250-6000 hours
Carpenter Resilient Floorlayer
CA706FL 10/10/2013
Apprentice Rates: 1st year 2nd year 3rd year 4th year Carpenter, piledriver
CA706Z4-CA 10/10/2013
Apprentice Rates: 1st year 2nd year 3rd year 4th year
Cement Finisher Cement Finisher
BR9-7-CF 3/8/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-749 hours 750-1499 hours 1500-2249 hours 2250-2999 hours 3000-3749 hours 3750-4499 hours
Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 2 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 3 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Cement Mason Cement Mason PL16-12 Four 10s allowed Monday-Thursday with Friday or Saturday inclement weather make up days. Saturday hours for inclement weather make up shall be paid straight rate unless over 40 hours worked.
$37.85
$50.59
$63.32 H H H H H H H D Y
$28.94 $31.48 $34.03
$37.22 $41.03 $44.86
$45.50 $50.58 $55.68
$36.34
$47.60
$58.85 H H H H H H H D Y
$25.09 $28.46 $31.84 $34.09
$30.72 $35.77 $40.85 $44.22
$36.35 $43.09 $49.85 $54.35
$50.53
$73.30
$96.06 H H H H H H H D Y
$32.32 $34.59 $36.88 $39.15 $41.43 $45.97
$45.98 $49.39 $52.82 $56.23 $59.65 $66.46
$59.64 $64.18 $68.76 $73.30 $77.86 $86.94
10/23/2012
Apprentice Rates: 1st year 2nd year 3rd year
Drywall Drywall Finisher
PT-1803-DF 8/2/2013
4 10 hour days allowed on consecutive days, MondayFriday. Make up day allowed M-F for work missed due to holidays or inclement weather. Apprentice Rates: 0 - 900 hours 901- 1800 hours 1801 - 2700 hours 2701 - 3600 hours
Electrician Road Way Electrical Work EC-17 Double time due after 16 hours on any calendar day and all hours Sunday.
8/6/2013
Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months
Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract.
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Page 3 of 27
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 4 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Inside Wireman
EC-557-IW
$48.62
$69.28
$89.94 H H H H H H H D Y
3/11/2013
Apprentice Rates:
Subdivision of county
1st Period $22.40 $30.60 2nd Period $26.51 $36.77 3rd Period $30.61 $42.92 4th Period $32.66 $45.99 5th Period $36.75 $52.12 6th Period $41.88 $59.82 Townships of Seville, Pine River, Bethany, Wheeler, Sumner, Arcada, Ithaca, Emerson, LaFayette, New Haven, Newark, North Star, Hamilton, Washington and Elba ONLY.
Voice-Data-Video Installer/Technician
EC-557-SC
$33.50
$46.88
$38.80 $47.02 $55.22 $59.32 $67.50 $77.76
$60.27 X X H X X X H D Y
3/6/2007
Apprentice Rates:
Subdivision of county
1st Period $21.05 $29.02 2nd Period $23.71 $33.01 3rd Period $26.36 $36.98 4th Period $29.02 $40.97 Townships of Seville, Pine River, Bethany, Wheeler, Sumner, Arcada, Ithaca, Emerson, LaFayette, New Haven, Newark, North Star, Hamilton, Washington, & Elba
Inside Wireman
EC-665-IW
$36.98 $42.30 $47.60 $52.92
$51.75
$68.20
$84.65 H H D H H H D D Y
$29.63 $31.28 $32.93 $36.42 $38.07 $39.72
$37.86 $40.31 $42.81 $47.12 $49.59 $52.06
$46.07 $49.35 $52.68 $57.80 $61.10 $64.39
9/13/2013
A four day schedule of ten hours a day is allowed Monday thru Friday. Apprentice Rates:
Subdivision of county
0-1000 hours 1000-2000 hours 2000-3500 hours 3500-5000 hours 5000-6500 hours 6500-8000 hours North Shade & Fulton townships
Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 4 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 5 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Sound and Communication Journeyman A four day schedule of ten hours a day is allowed Monday thru Friday.
EC-665-SD
$40.92
$54.31
$67.69 H H D H H H D D Y
$23.84 $25.56 $27.28 $28.98 $30.87 $32.41
$30.82 $33.25 $35.67 $38.07 $40.66 $42.89
$37.80 $40.94 $44.05 $47.14 $50.44 $53.37
$47.05
$68.11
$89.17 H H H H H H H D Y
$30.20 $32.32 $34.42 $36.53 $38.63 $40.74 $42.84
$42.69 $46.02 $49.16 $52.33 $55.47 $58.64 $61.79
$55.26 $59.70 $63.90 $68.12 $72.32 $76.54 $80.74
9/13/2013
Apprentice Rates:
Subdivision of county
1st period 2nd period 3rd period 4th period 5th period 6th period North Shade and Fulton townships
Lineman/Technician outside utility and commercial power and high voltage pipe type cable work and electrical underground.
EC-876 11/18/2009
Four 10s allowed Monday-Thursday with Friday makeup or Tuesday-Friday with Monday makeup. Apprentice Rates: 1st period 2nd period 3rd period 4th period 5th period 6th period 7th period
Elevator Constructor Elevator Constructor Mechanic
EL-85
$70.77
$116.32 D D D D D D D D Y
4/8/2013
Apprentice Rates: 1st year 2nd year 3rd year 4th year
Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
$50.27 $54.83 $57.10 $61.66
$75.32 $84.44 $88.98 $98.10
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 5 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 6 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Glazier Glazier 4 tens allowed on consecutive days
GL-826
$42.89
$57.34
$71.79 H H H H H H H D Y
$30.29 $31.79 $33.30 $34.80 $36.30 $37.80 $39.31 $40.82
$38.96 $41.18 $43.41 $45.63 $47.86 $50.08 $52.32 $54.55
$47.63 $50.57 $53.53 $56.47 $59.42 $62.36 $65.32 $68.28
$20.14
$29.14
H H H H H H H H N
$44.40
$58.76
$73.12 H H H H H H H D Y
$25.78 $29.50 $33.22 $36.95 $40.68
$32.96 $38.11 $43.27 $48.44 $53.61
$40.14 $46.73 $53.32 $59.93 $66.53
$44.11
$55.52
$66.93 X X H H H H D D Y
$27.18 $29.29 $31.41 $33.53 $35.64 $37.76
$33.53 $36.27 $39.03 $41.78 $44.53 $47.28
$39.88 $43.25 $46.64 $50.02 $53.40 $56.78
8/2/2013
Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months 7th 6 months 8th 6 months
Heat and Frost Insulator Spray Insulation
AS25S 3/5/2007
Heat and Frost Insulator and Asbestos Worker Heat and Frost Insulator and Asbestos Worker AS47 4 ten hour work days shall be either Monday thru Thursday or Tuesday thru Friday
3/11/2013
Apprentice Rates: 1st year 2nd year 3rd year 4th year 5th year
Ironworker Siding, Glazing, Curtain Wall 4 tens may be worked Monday thru Thursday @ straight time.
IR-25-GZ2 4/11/2013
Apprentice Rates: Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6
Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 6 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 7 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Pre-engineered Metal Work
IR-25-PE-Z2
$42.37
$51.88
$61.39 X X H X X X X D Y
$25.46 $27.58 $29.71 $31.83 $33.96
$30.77 $33.64 $36.53 $39.40 $42.29
$36.08 $39.70 $43.35 $46.97 $50.61
$54.61
$81.78 $108.95 H H D H D D D D N
$34.66 $37.11 $39.54 $42.16 $44.76 $47.38
$51.56 $55.23 $58.70 $62.80 $66.71 $70.64
$60.28
$90.26 $120.24 H H H H H H H D N
$34.93 $37.80 $40.66 $43.53 $46.41
$52.39 $56.71 $60.99 $65.29 $69.62
$52.24
$78.08 $103.92 X X H H H H D D Y
6/3/2013
Apprentice Rates: 1st Year 3rd 6 month period 4th 6 month period 5th 6 month period 6th 6 month period Reinforced Iron Work
IR-25-RF 6/25/2013
Apprentice Rates: Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Rigging Work
IR-25-RIG
$68.45 $73.35 $77.84 $83.45 $88.65 $93.89
6/25/2013
Apprentice Rates: Level 1& 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Decking 4 tens may be worked Monday thru Thursday @ straight time. If bad weather, Friday may be a make up day. If holiday celebrated on a Monday, 4 10s may be worked Tuesday thru Friday. Work in excess of 12 hours per day must be paid @ double time.
IR-25-SD
Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
$69.86 $75.60 $81.32 $87.06 $92.82
6/25/2013
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 7 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 8 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Structural, ornamental, conveyor, welder and pre-cast 4 tens may be worked Monday thru Thursday @ straight time. If bad weather, Friday may be a make up day. If holiday celebrated on a Monday, 4 10s may be worked Tuesday thru Friday. Work in excess of 12 hours per day must be paid @ double time.
IR-25-STR
$60.41
$90.34 $120.26 H H H H H H D D Y
$35.06 $37.89 $40.71 $43.54 $46.37 $49.19 $52.02
$52.64 $69.98 $56.52 $75.14 $60.74 $80.78 $65.37 $86.94 $69.24 $92.10 $73.47 $97.74 $77.71 $103.40
$40.97
$61.13
$81.29 H H H H H H D D Y
$29.15
$39.15
$49.15 X X H X X X H D Y
$20.35 $21.45 $22.56 $23.65 $24.75 $25.85
$26.35 $27.95 $29.56 $31.15 $32.75 $34.35
$32.35 $34.45 $36.56 $38.65 $40.75 $42.85
6/25/2013
Apprentice Rates: Levels 1 & 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 Level 8 Industrial Door erection & construction
IR-25-STR-D 6/27/2013
Fence, Sound Barrier & Guardrail erection/installation and Exterior Signage work
IR-340-F2 4/2/2013
Four ten hour work days may be worked during MondaySaturday. Apprentice Rates: 60% Level 65% Level 70% Level 75% Level 80% Level 85% Level
Official Request #:
734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 8 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 9 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Laborer Class A Laborer on building and heavy construction work, L1098-S-A mortar mixers, mason tender, carpenter tender, fire watch, all 3" pumps and below, plaster mixers, plaster tenders, pipe or crock layers, signal men and top men on caisson work, mechanized buggy operators, cement finisher tender, air, electric and gas-driven tools, concrete vibrators & demolition work
$31.54
$41.05
$50.56 X X H H H H H D Y
$26.78 $27.74 $28.69 $30.59
$33.91 $35.35 $36.78 $39.62
$41.04 $42.96 $44.86 $48.66
$32.04
$41.80
$51.56 X X H H H H H D Y
$27.16 $28.14 $29.11 $31.06
$34.48 $35.95 $37.40 $40.33
$41.80 $43.76 $45.70 $49.60
$32.54
$42.55
$52.56 X X H H H H H D Y
$27.54 $28.54 $29.54 $31.54
$35.05 $36.55 $38.05 $41.05
$42.56 $44.56 $46.56 $50.56
8/9/2013
Cleaning and clearing of all debris, including wire brushing of windows, scraping of floors, removal of surplus material from all fixtures within confines of structure and cleaning all debris in building and construction area. The general cleanup, including sweeping, cleaning, washdown and wiping of construction facility, equipment and furnishings and removal and loading or burning of all debris including crates, boxes, packaging waste material. Washing and cleaning of walls, partitions, ceilings, windows, bathrooms, kitchens, laboratory, and all fixtures and facilities therein. Cleanup, mopping, washing, waxing and polishing or dusting of all floors or areas. Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours Class B Laborer air or electric-driven pavement breakers L1098-S-B and jackhammers over 50 lbs., tunnel miners and tunnel muckers, tunnel and shaft underpinning contributing to the structural support of buildings
8/9/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours Class C Laborer-drillers, blasters, burners, welders, & refractory work
L1098-S-C 11/21/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours
Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract.
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Page 9 of 27
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 10 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Laborer - Hazardous Class A Laborer - performing work in conjunction with site preparation and other preliminary work prior to actual removal, handling, or containment of hazardous waste substances not requiring use of personal protective equipment required by state or federal regulations; or a laborer performing work in conjunction with the removal , handling, or containment of hazardous waste substances when use of personal protective equipment level "D" is required.
LHAZ-Z8-A
$31.54
$44.41
$57.27 H H H H H H H D Y
$26.78 $27.74 $28.69 $30.59
$37.27 $38.71 $40.14 $42.98
$47.75 $49.67 $51.57 $55.37
$32.54
$45.91
$59.27 H H H H H H H D Y
$27.54 $28.54 $29.54 $31.54
$38.41 $39.91 $41.41 $44.41
$49.27 $51.27 $53.27 $57.27
$35.67
$47.07
$58.47 X X X X X X X D Y
$30.52 $31.55 $32.58 $34.64
$39.35 $40.90 $42.44 $45.53
$48.17 $50.23 $52.29 $56.41
11/1/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours Class B Laborer - performing work in conjunction with the removal, handling, or containment of hazardous waste substances when the use of personal protective equipment levels "A", "B" or "C" is required.
LHAZ-Z8-B 11/1/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours
Laborer Underground - Tunnel, Shaft & Caisson Class I - Tunnel, shaft and caisson laborer, dump man, shanty man, hog house tender, testing man (on gas), and watchman.
LAUCT-Z2-1 9/9/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours
Official Request #:
734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 10 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 11 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class II - Manhole, headwall, catch basin builder, bricklayer LAUCT-Z2-2 tender, mortar man, material mixer, fence erector, and guard rail builder
$35.76
$47.21
$58.65 X X X X X X X D Y
$30.58 $31.62 $32.66 $34.72
$39.44 $41.00 $42.56 $45.65
$48.29 $50.37 $52.45 $56.57
$35.86
$47.36
$58.85 X X X X X X X D Y
$30.66 $31.70 $32.74 $34.82
$39.56 $41.12 $42.68 $45.80
$48.45 $50.53 $52.61 $56.77
$36.02
$47.60
$59.17 X X X X X X X D Y
$30.78 $31.83 $32.88 $34.97
$39.74 $41.32 $42.89 $46.02
$48.69 $50.79 $52.89 $57.07
$36.28
$47.99
$59.69 X X X X X X X D Y
$30.98 $32.04 $33.10 $35.22
$40.04 $41.63 $43.22 $46.40
$49.09 $51.21 $53.33 $57.57
9/9/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours Class III - Air tool operator (jack hammer man, bush LAUCT-Z2-3 hammer man and grinding man), first bottom man, second bottom man, cage tender, car pusher, carrier man, concrete man, concrete form man, concrete repair man, cement invert laborer, cement finisher, concrete shoveler, conveyor man, floor man, gasoline and electric tool operator, gunnite man, grout operator, welder, heading dinky man, inside lock tender, pea gravel operator, pump man, outside lock tender, scaffold man, top signal man, switch man, track man, tugger man, utility man, vibrator man, winch operator, pipe jacking man, wagon drill and air track operator and concrete saw operator (under 40 h.p.).
9/9/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours Class IV - Tunnel, shaft and caisson mucker, bracer man, liner plate man, long haul dinky driver and well point man.
LAUCT-Z2-4 9/9/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours Class V - Tunnel, shaft and caisson miner, drill runner, keyboard operator, power knife operator, reinforced steel or mesh man (e.g. wire mesh, steel mats, dowel bars)
LAUCT-Z2-5 9/9/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 11 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 12 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class VI - Dynamite man and powder man.
LAUCT-Z2-6
$36.59
$48.45
$60.31 X X X X X X X D Y
$31.21 $32.28 $33.36 $35.51
$40.38 $41.99 $43.61 $46.84
$49.55 $51.69 $53.85 $58.15
$28.86
$36.86
$44.85 X X X X X X X D Y
$25.41 $26.10 $26.79 $28.17
$31.68 $32.72 $33.76 $35.82
$37.95 $39.33 $40.71 $43.47
$27.45
$37.91
$48.37 X X H X X X H D Y
$23.25
$31.61
$39.97 X X H X X X H D Y
9/9/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours Class VII - Restoration laborer, seeding, sodding, planting, LAUCT-Z2-7 cutting, mulching and topsoil grading and the restoration of property such as replacing mail boxes, wood chips, planter boxes and flagstones.
9/9/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours
Landscape Laborer Landscape Specialist includes air, gas, and diesel equipment operator, skidsteer (or equivalent), lawn sprinkler installer on landscaping work where seeding, sodding, planting, cutting, trimming, backfilling, rough grading or maintenance of landscape projects occurs. Sundays paid at time & one half. Holidays paid at double time.
Skilled Landscape Laborer: small power tool operator, lawn sprinkler installers' tender, material mover, truck driver on when seeding, sodding, planting, cutting, trimming, backfilling, rough grading or maintaining of landscape projects occurs Sundays paid at time & one half. Holidays paid at double Time
LLAN-Z2-A 7/5/2013
LLAN-Z2-B
Official Request #: 734 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
7/5/2013
Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 12 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 13 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Operating Engineer Class C- Regular equipment operator, crane, stiff leg derrick, scraper dozer, grader, front end loader, hoist, job mechanic, head grease man, concrete pump truck and hydro excavators
EN-324-BH2C
$48.75
$62.62
$76.49 H H H H H H H D Y
$39.83 $41.21 $42.60 $43.99 $45.38 $46.76
$49.54 $51.61 $53.69 $55.78 $57.87 $59.93
$59.25 $62.01 $64.79 $67.57 $70.35 $73.11
$43.95
$55.42
$66.89 H H H H H H H D Y
$43.35
$54.52
$65.69 H H H H H H H D Y
$40.90
$50.85
$60.79 H H H H H H H D Y
10/22/2013
Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday. Apprentice Rates: 0 - 999 hours 1,000 - 1,999 hours 2,000 - 2,999 hours 3,000 - 3,999 hours 4,000 - 4,999 hours 5,000 - 5,999 hours Class D- Air tugger (single drum), material hoist, boiler operator, sweeping machine, winch truck, Bob Cat and similar equipment, elevators (when operated by an operating engineer), and fork truck over 20' lift
EN-324-BH2D 9/12/2013
Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.
Class E- Pump 6" or over, well points, freeze systems, boom truck (non-swinging), end dumps and laser/power screed, concrete wire saw 20 h.p. and over and brokk concrete breaker
EN-324-BH2E 9/12/2013
Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.
Class F- Air compressor, welder, generators, conveyors, pumps under 6", Grease man, and fork truck 20' or less lift
EN-324-BH2F 9/12/2013
Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Official Request #: 734 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 13 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 14 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class G- Oiler, fireman and heater operator
EN-324-BH2G
$39.20
$48.30
$57.39 H H H H H H H D Y
$50.10
$64.65
$79.19 H H H H H H H D Y
$51.60
$66.90
$82.19 H H H H H H H D Y
$53.10
$69.15
$85.19 H H H H H H H D Y
$49.85
$64.27
$78.69 H H H H H H H D Y
$52.80
$79.20 $105.60 H H H H H H H D N
$65.00
$84.85 $104.70 X X H H H H H D Y
9/12/2013
Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.
Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 220' or longer
EN-OSA 9/12/2013
Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.
Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 300' or longer
EN-OSA3 9/12/2013
Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.
Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 400' or longer
EN-OSA4 9/12/2013
Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.
Class B- Crane Operator with main boom and jib 140' or longer, tower cranes, gantry crane, whirley derrick
EN-OSB 9/12/2013
Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday-Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.
Operating Engineer - DIVER Diver/Wet Tender/Tender/Rov Pilot/Rov Tender
GLF D 4/2/2014
Operating Engineer - Marine Construction Diver/Wet Tender, Engineer (hydraulic dredge)
GLF-1 2/12/2014
Holiday pay= $124.55 per hour, wages & fringes Subdivision of county
all Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters
Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications copy
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Statewide
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 14 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 15 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Crane/Backhoe Operator, 70 ton or over Tug Operator, Mechanic/Welder, Assistant Engineer (hydraulic dredge), Leverman (hydraulic dredge), Diver Tender
GLF-2
$63.50
$82.60 $101.70 X X H H H H H D Y
2/12/2014
Holiday pay = $120.80 per hour, wages & fringes Subdivision of county
All Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters
Friction, Lattice Boom or Crane License Certification
GLF-2B
$64.50
$84.10 $103.70 X X H H H H H D Y
2/12/2014
Holiday pay = $123.30 Subdivision of county
All Great Lakes, islands, therein, & connecting & tributary waters
Deck Equipment Operator, Machineryman, Maintenance of Crane (over 50 ton capacity) or Backhoe (115,000 lbs or more), Tug/Launch Operator, Loader, Dozer on Barge, Deck Machinery
GLF-3
$76.30
$93.30 X X H H H H H D Y
$67.75
$81.90 X X H H H H H D Y
$50.13
$65.29
$80.45 H H H H H H H D Y
$40.44 $41.96 $43.48 $44.98 $46.50 $48.02
$51.06 $53.34 $55.62 $57.87 $60.15 $62.43
$61.67 $64.71 $67.75 $70.75 $73.79 $76.83
$59.30 2/12/2014
Holiday pay = $110.30 per hour, wages & fringes Subdivision of county
All Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters
Deck Equipment Operator, (Machineryman/Fireman), (4 equipment units or more), Off Road Trucks, Deck Hand, Tug Engineer, & Crane Maintenance 50 ton capacity and under or Backhoe 115,000 lbs or less, Assistant Tug Operator
GLF-4
$53.60 2/12/2014
Holiday pay = $96.05 per hour, wages & fringes Subdivision of county
All Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters
Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Class I Level A - Fully encapsulating chemical resistant suit w/ EN-324-HWCI-Z2A pressure demand, full face piece SCBA or pressure demand 1/20/2012 supplied air respirator w/ escape SCBA. The highest available level of respiratory, skin and eye protection. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.
Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months
Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR) Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS prescribed in a contract. Page 15 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 16 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Level B & C protection. B - Pressure demand, full face EN-324-HWCI-Z2B SCBA or pressure demand supplied air respirator w/ 1/23/2012 escape SCBA w/chemical resistant clothing. C - Full face piece, air purifying canister-equipped respirator w/chemical resistant clothing.
$49.18
$63.87
$78.55 H H H H H H H D Y
$39.77 $41.24 $42.70 $44.18 $45.65 $47.11
$50.05 $52.26 $54.44 $56.66 $58.87 $61.06
$60.33 $63.27 $66.19 $69.15 $72.09 $75.01
$47.88
$61.92
$75.95 H H H H H H H D Y
$38.86 $40.27 $41.67 $43.07 $44.48 $45.88
$48.69 $50.80 $52.91 $55.00 $57.12 $59.21
$58.51 $61.33 $64.13 $66.93 $69.75 $72.55
$47.63
$61.54
$75.45 H H H H H H H D Y
$38.68 $40.07 $41.46 $42.85 $44.25 $45.64
$48.42 $50.50 $52.58 $54.67 $56.78 $58.86
$58.15 $60.93 $63.71 $66.49 $69.29 $72.07
Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day. Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months Level D - Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.
EN-324-HWCI-Z2D 1/23/2012
Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day. Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months Level D When Capping Landfill Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.
EN-324-HWCI-Z2DCL 1/23/2012
Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day. Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months Official Request #:
734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 16 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 17 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Class II Level A - Fully encapsulating chemical resistant suit w/ EN-324-HWCII-Z2A pressure demand, full face piece SCBA or pressure demand 1/20/2012 supplied air respirator w/ escape SCBA. The highest available level of respiratory, skin and eye protection.
$45.73
$58.69
$71.65 H H H H H H H D Y
$44.79
$57.28
$69.77 H H H H H H H D Y
$43.49
$55.33
$67.17 H H H H H H H D Y
$43.24
$54.96
$66.67 H H H H H H H D Y
$52.78
$69.27
$85.75 H H H H H H H D Y
Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.
Level B & C protection. B - Pressure demand, full face EN-324-HWCII-Z2B SCBA or pressure demand supplied air respirator w/ 1/23/2012 escape SCBA w/chemical resistant clothing. C - Full face piece, air purifying canister-equipped respirator w/chemical resistant clothing. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.
Level D - Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.
EN-324-HWCII-Z2D 1/23/2012
Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.
Level D When Capping Landfill Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.
EN-324-HWCII-Z2DCL 1/23/2012
Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.
Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Crane w/ Boom & Jib leads 140' or longer Level A - Fully encapsulating chemical resistant suit w/ EN-324-HW140-Z2A pressure demand, full face piece SCBA or pressure demand 1/20/2012 supplied air respirator w/ escape SCBA. The highest available level of respiratory, skin and eye protection. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day. Official Request #: 734 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 17 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 18 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Level B & C protection. B - Pressure demand, full face EN-324-HW140-Z2B SCBA or pressure demand supplied air respirator w/ 1/23/2012 escape SCBA w/chemical resistant clothing. C - Full face piece, air purifying canister-equipped respirator w/chemical resistant clothing.
$51.72
$67.68
$83.63 H H H H H H H D Y
$50.53
$65.89
$81.25 H H H H H H H D Y
$50.28
$65.52
$80.75 H H H H H H H D Y
$53.08
$69.72
$86.35 H H H H H H H D Y
$52.04
$68.16
$84.27 H H H H H H H D Y
$50.83
$66.34
$81.85 H H H H H H H D Y
Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.
Level D - Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.
EN-324-HW140-Z2D 1/23/2012
Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.
Level D When Capping Landfill Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.
EN-324-HW140-Z2DCL 1/23/2012
Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.
Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Crane w/ Boom & Jib leads 220' or longer Level A - Fully encapsulating chemical resistant suit w/ EN-324-HW220-Z2A pressure demand, full face piece SCBA or pressure demand 1/20/2012 supplied air respirator w/ escape SCBA. The highest available level of respiratory, skin and eye protection. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.
Level B & C protection. B - Pressure demand, full face EN-324-HW220-Z2B SCBA or pressure demand supplied air respirator w/ 1/23/2012 escape SCBA w/chemical resistant clothing. C - Full face piece, air purifying canister-equipped respirator w/chemical resistant clothing. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.
Level D - Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.
EN-324-HW220-Z2D 1/23/2012
Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.
Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 18 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 19 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Level D When Capping Landfill Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.
EN-324-HW220-Z2DCL
$50.58
$65.97
$81.35 H H H H H H H D Y
$51.10
$66.75
$82.39 H H H H H H H D Y
$50.15
$65.32
$80.49 H H H H H H H D Y
$48.85
$63.37
$77.89 H H H H H H H D Y
$48.60
$63.00
$77.39 H H H H H H H D Y
$57.11
$75.12
$93.13 H H D H H H D D Y
1/23/2012
Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.
Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Regular Crane, Job Mechanic, Dragline Operator, Boom Truck Operator, Power Shovel Operator and Concrete Pump with boom Level A - Fully encapsulating chemical resistant suit w/ EN-324-HWRC-Z2A pressure demand, full face piece SCBA or pressure demand 1/20/2012 supplied air respirator w/ escape SCBA. The highest available level of respiratory, skin and eye protection. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.
Operating Engineer Hazardous Waste Regular Crane, Job Mechanic, Dragline Operator, Boom Truck Operator, Power Shovel Operator and Concrete Pump with Boom Operator Level B & C protection. B - Pressure demand, full face EN-324-HWRC-Z2B SCBA or pressure demand supplied air respirator w/ 1/23/2012 escape SCBA w/chemical resistant clothing. C - Full face piece, air purifying canister-equipped respirator w/chemical resistant clothing. Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.
Level D - Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.
EN-324-HWRC-Z2D 1/23/2012
Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.
Level D When Capping Landfill Coveralls, safety boots, glasses or chemical splash goggles and hard hats.
EN-324-HWRC-Z2DCL 1/23/2012
Four 10 hour days may be worked Monday-Thursday with Friday as a straight-time make up day.
Operating Engineer Steel Work Forklift, 1 Drum Hoist
EN-324-ef 6/17/2013
Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory posted
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR) Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 19 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 20 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Crane w/ 120' boom or longer
EN-324-SW120
$98.53 H H D H H H D D Y
$59.81
$79.17
$60.81
$80.67 $100.53 H H D H H H D D Y
$60.99
$80.94 $100.89 H H D H H H D D Y
$61.99
$82.44 $102.89 H H D H H H D D Y
$61.26
$81.35 $101.43 H H D H H H D D Y
$62.26
$82.85 $103.43 H H D H H H D D Y
$62.76
$83.60 $104.43 H H D H H H D D Y
$63.76
$85.10 $106.43 H H D H H H D D Y
$64.26
$85.85 $107.43 H H D H H H D D Y
$65.26
$87.35 $109.43 H H D H H H D D Y
$59.45
$78.63
$97.81 H H D H H H D D Y
$47.09 $49.01 $50.93 $52.85 $54.76 $56.68
$60.51 $63.40 $66.28 $69.16 $72.02 $74.91
$73.94 $77.78 $81.62 $85.46 $89.28 $93.12
$60.45
$80.13
$99.81 H H D H H H D D Y
6/14/2013
Crane w/ 120' boom or longer w/ Oiler
EN-324-SW120-O 6/14/2013
Crane w/ 140' boom or longer
EN-324-SW140 6/14/2013
Crane w/ 140' boom or longer W/ Oiler
EN-324-SW140-O 6/14/2013
Boom & Jib 220' or longer
EN-324-SW220 6/14/2013
Crane w/ 220' boom or longer w/ Oiler
EN-324-SW220-O 6/14/2013
Boom & Jib 300' or longer
EN-324-SW300 6/14/2013
Crane w/ 300' boom or longer w/ Oiler
EN-324-SW300-O 6/14/2013
Boom & Jib 400' or longer
EN-324-SW400 6/14/2013
Crane w/ 400' boom or longer w/ Oiler
EN-324-SW400-O 6/14/2013
Crane Operator, Job Mechanic, 3 Drum Hoist & Excavator
EN-324-SWCO 6/17/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-999 hours 1,000-1,999 hours 2,000-2,999 hours 3,000-3,999 hours 4,000-4,999 hours 5,000 hours Crane w/ Oiler
EN-324-SWCO-O 6/17/2013
Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 20 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 21 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Compressor or Welder Operator
EN-324-SWCW
$52.00
$67.46
$82.91 H H D H H H D D Y
$58.81
$77.67
$96.53 H H D H H H D D Y
$50.59
$65.34
$80.09 H H D H H H D D Y
$60.54
$80.27
$99.99 H H D H H H D D Y
$61.54
$81.77 $101.99 H H D H H H D D Y
$48.63
$62.77
$76.90 H H H H H H H D Y
$38.70 $40.09 $41.48 $42.87 $44.26 $45.64
$48.42 $50.50 $52.59 $54.68 $56.76 $58.83
$58.14 $60.92 $63.70 $66.48 $69.26 $72.02
$43.74
$55.43
$67.12 H H H H H H H D Y
6/17/2013
Hoisting Operator, 2 Drum Hoist, & Rubber Tire Backhoe
EN-324-SWHO 6/17/2013
Oiler
EN-324-SWO 6/17/2013
Tower Crane & Derrick where work is 50' or more above first level
EN-324-SWTD50
Tower Crane & Derrick 50' or more w/ Oiler where work station is 50' or more above first level
EN-324-SWTD50-O
Operating Engineer Underground Class I Equipment - Backfiller Tamper, Backhoe, Batch Plant Operator, Clamshell, Concrete Paver 2 drums or larger, Conveyor Loader Euclid type, Crane (crawler, truck type or pile driving), Dozer, Dragline, Elevating Grader, endloader, gradall, grader, hydro excavator, power shovel, roller asphalt, scraper self-propelled or tractor drawn, side boom tractor, slip form paver, slope paver, trencher over 8 ft. digging capacity, well drilling rig, concrete pump with boom operator
6/14/2013
6/14/2013
EN-324A2-UC1 9/13/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-999 hours 1,000-1,999 hours 2,000-2,999 hours 3,000-3,999 hours 4,000-4,999 hours 5,000-5,999 hours Class II Equipment - Boom Truck, Crusher, Hoist, Pump 6 inch discharge or larger, side boom tractor, Tractor (pneutired other than backhoe or front end loader), Trencher 8 ft. digging capcity and smaller, Vac Truck
EN-324A2-UC2
Official Request #: 734 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
9/13/2013
Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 21 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 22 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class III Equipment - Air Compressors 600 cfm or larger, Air Compressors 2 or more less than 600 dfm, Boom Truck non-swinging non-powered type boom, Concrete Breaker self-propelled or truck mounted, Concrete paver 1 drum 1/2 yd. or larger, Elevator other than passenger, Pump 4 inch to 6 inch discharge, pumpcrete machine, wagon drill, welding machine or generator 2 or more 300
EN-324A2-UC3
Class IV Equipment - Boiler, Concrete Saw 40 hp or over, curing machine self propelled, end dumps, extend a boom forklift, farm tractor with attachment, finishing machine concrete, firemen, hydraulic pipe pushing machine, mulching equipment, oiler, pumps up to 4 inch discharge, roller other than asphalt, stump remover, sweeper wayne type, trencher, vibrating compaction equipment self propelled 6 ft. wide or over, water wagon.
EN-324A2-UC4
Painter Painter
$43.24
$54.68
$66.12 H H H H H H H D Y
$42.96
$54.26
$65.56 H H H H H H H D Y
$34.03
$44.75
$55.46 H H H H H H H D Y
$22.60 $26.53 $29.74
$27.60 $33.50 $38.31
$32.60 $40.46 $46.88
$27.20
$36.70
H H H H H H H H N
$31.70
$43.45
H H H H H H H H N
$30.45
$41.57
H H H H H H H H N
9/13/2013
9/13/2013
PT-1803-P 8/2/2013
4 10 hour days allowed on consecutive days, MondayFriday. Make up day allowed M-F for work missed due to holidays or inclement weather. Apprentice Rates: 1st year 2nd year 3rd year
Pipe and Manhole Rehab General Laborer for rehab work or normal cleaning and cctv work-top man, scaffold man, CCTV assistant, jettervac assistant
TM247 10/15/2012
Tap cutter/CCTV Tech/Grout Equipment Operator: unit driver and operator of CCTV; grouting equipment and tap cutting equipment
TM247-2
CCTV Technician/Combo Unit Operator: unit driver and operator of cctv unit or combo unit in connection with normal cleaning and televising work
TM247-3
10/15/2012
10/15/2012
MICHSPEC DTMB Official Request #:
734
Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
00800 27(Rev. 3/14/20 Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Statewide
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract.
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Page 22 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 23 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Boiler Operator: unit driver and operator of steam/water heater units and all ancillary equipment associated
TM247-4
Combo Unit driver & Jetter-Vac Operator
TM247-5
$32.20
$44.20
H H H H H H H H N
$32.20
$44.20
H H H H H H H H N
$33.20
$45.70
H H H H H H H H N
$39.67
$51.98
$64.28 H H H H H H H D Y
$31.06 $32.29 $33.52 $34.75 $35.98 $37.21
$39.06 $40.90 $42.75 $44.60 $46.44 $48.28
$47.06 $49.52 $51.98 $54.44 $56.90 $59.36
$39.20
$52.36
$65.52 H H H H H H H D N
$29.99 $32.62 $35.25
$38.54 $42.49 $46.44
$47.10 $52.36 $57.62
$49.78
$64.80
$79.81 X X H H H H H D Y
$30.09 $32.13 $34.17 $36.22 $38.26 $40.31 $42.35 $44.41 $46.45
$37.60 $40.39 $43.18 $45.98 $48.77 $51.57 $54.36 $57.18 $59.96
$45.11 $48.65 $52.19 $55.74 $59.28 $62.83 $66.37 $69.94 $73.48
10/15/2012
10/15/2012
Pipe Bursting & Slip-lining Equipment Operator
TM247-6 10/15/2012
Plasterer Plasterer
BR9-7-PL 3/8/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-749 hours 750-1499 hours 1500-2249 hours 2500-2999 hours 3000-3749 hours 3750-4499 hours Plasterer
PL16-4 10/23/2012
Apprentice Rates: 1st year 2nd year 3rd year
Plumber, Pipefitter, Welder Plumber, Pipefitter, Welder
PL-85-Z1 10/14/2013
Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months 7th 6 months 8th 6 months 9th & 10th 6 months
Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 23 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 24 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Roofer Commercial Roofer
RO-149-MMA
$38.61
$50.72
$62.82 H H H H H H H D Y
$23.23 $25.14 $27.09 $29.00 $30.92 $32.83
$27.64 $30.51 $33.44 $36.30 $39.18 $42.04
$32.06 $35.88 $39.78 $43.60 $47.44 $51.26
$42.07
$56.90
$71.72 H H H H H H H D N
$40.54
$54.60
$68.66 H H H H H H H D N
$45.28
$59.06
$72.84 H H D H H H D D Y
$15.21 $17.67 $19.49 $21.92 $23.75 $26.19 $28.01 $30.45
$20.46 $23.58 $26.06 $29.14 $31.63 $34.72 $37.20 $40.30
$25.71 $29.49 $32.62 $36.36 $39.51 $43.26 $46.39 $50.15
8/15/2008
Straight time is not to exceed ten (10) hours per day or forty (40) hours per week. Apprentice Rates: Apprentice 1 Apprentice 2 Apprentice 3 Apprentice 4 Apprentice 5 Apprentice 6
Sewer Relining Class I-Operator of audio visual CCTV system including remote in-ground cutter and other equipment used in conjunction with CCTV system.
Class II-Operator of hot water heaters and circulation system; water jetters; and vacuum and mechanical debris removal systems and those assisting.
Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker 4 10s allowed as consecutive days, M-Th or T-F
SR-I 3/27/2013
SR-II 3/27/2013
SHM-7-3 10/22/2012
Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months 2nd 6 months 3rd 6 months 4th 6 months 5th 6 months 6th 6 months 7th 6 months 8th 6 months
Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 24 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 25 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Sprinkler Fitter Sprinkler Fitter
SP 669
$46.51
$61.99
$77.47 H H H H H H H D Y
$23.44 $29.35 $30.93 $35.50 $37.07 $38.65 $40.22 $41.79 $43.36
$31.31 $37.75 $40.12 $45.47 $47.83 $50.20 $52.55 $54.91 $57.27
$39.17 $46.15 $49.31 $55.45 $58.59 $61.75 $64.89 $68.03 $71.17
$30.57
$39.66
$48.75 H H H H H H H D Y
$24.21 $25.12 $26.03 $26.93 $27.84 $28.75
$30.12 $31.49 $32.85 $34.20 $35.57 $36.93
$36.03 $37.85 $39.67 $41.47 $43.29 $45.11
$35.94
$46.71
$57.47 H H H H H H H D Y
$28.40 $29.48 $30.56 $31.63 $32.71 $33.79
$35.39 $37.01 $38.63 $40.24 $41.86 $43.48
$42.39 $44.55 $46.71 $48.85 $51.01 $53.17
$41.92
$37.85
H H H H H H H H Y
$41.82
$37.70
H H H H H H H H Y
9/17/2009
Apprentice Rates: Class 1 & 2 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6 Class 7 Class 8 Class 9 Class 10
Tile, Terrazzo and Mosiac Finisher
BR9-31-TF 3/7/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-749 hours 750-1,499 hours 1,500-2,249 hours 2,250-2,999 hours 3,000-3,749 hours 3,750-4,499 hours Setter
BR9-31-TS 3/7/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-749 hours 750-1499 hours 1500-2249 hours 2250-2999 hours 3000-3749 hours 3750-4499 hours
Truck Driver of all trucks of 8 cubic yd capacity or over
TM-RB2 8/8/2013
of all trucks of 8 cubic yard capacity or less (except dump trucks of 8 cubic yard capacity or over, tandem axle trucks, transit mix and semis, euclid type equipment, double bottoms and low boys)
TM-RB2A
Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
8/8/2013
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 25 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 26 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== on euclid type equipment
TM-RB2B
$41.35
$38.08
H H H H H H H H Y
$32.52
$42.35
$52.17 X X X X X X X D Y
$28.17 $29.04 $29.91 $31.65
$35.83 $37.13 $38.43 $41.05
$43.47 $45.21 $46.95 $50.43
$32.65
$42.54
$52.43 X X X X X X X D Y
$28.27 $29.14 $30.02 $31.77
$35.97 $37.28 $38.60 $41.23
$43.67 $45.41 $47.17 $50.67
$32.76
$42.71
$52.65 X X X X X X X D Y
$28.35 $29.23 $30.11 $31.88
$36.09 $37.41 $38.73 $41.39
$43.83 $45.59 $47.35 $50.89
8/8/2013
Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class I Construction Laborer
LAUC-Z4-1 9/11/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours
Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class II Mortar and material mixer, concrete form man, signal man, well point man, manhole, headwall and catch basin builder, guard rail builders, headwall, seawall, breakwall, dock builder and fence erector.
LAUC-Z4-2 9/11/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours
Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class III Air, gasoline and electric tool operator, vibrator operator, LAUC-Z4-3 drillers, pump man, tar kettle operator, bracers, rodder, reinforced steel or mesh man (e.g. wire mesh, steel mats, dowel bars, etc.), cement finisher, welder, pipe jacking and boring man, wagon drill and air track operator and concrete saw operator (under 40 h.p.), windlass and tugger man, and directional boring man.
9/11/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours
Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 26 of 27
STATE OF MICHIGAN (OWNER AND CONTRACTOR)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Official 2014 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/28/2014 Contract must be awarded by: 7/27/2014 Page 27 of 27 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class IV Trench or excavating grade man.
LAUC-Z4-4
$32.83
$42.81
$52.79 X X X X X X X D Y
$28.40 $29.29 $30.17 $31.94
$36.17 $37.51 $38.83 $41.48
$43.93 $45.71 $47.47 $51.01
$32.95
$42.99
$53.03 X X X X X X X D Y
$28.49 $29.38 $30.28 $32.06
$36.31 $37.64 $38.99 $41.66
$44.11 $45.89 $47.69 $51.25
$30.17
$38.82
$47.47 X X X X X X X D Y
$26.41 $27.16 $27.91 $29.42
$33.19 $34.31 $35.43 $37.70
$39.95 $41.45 $42.95 $45.97
$28.51
$36.33
$44.15 X X X X X X X D Y
$25.16 $25.83 $26.50 $27.84
$31.31 $32.31 $33.32 $35.33
$37.45 $38.79 $40.13 $42.81
9/11/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours
Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class V Pipe Layer
LAUC-Z4-5 9/11/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours
Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class VI Grouting man, top man assistant, audio visual television operations and all other operations in connection with closed circuit television inspection, pipe cleaning and pipe relining work & the installation and repair of water service pipe and appurtenances.
LAUC-Z4-6 9/11/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours
Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class VII Restoration laborer, seeding, sodding, planting, cutting, mulching and topsoil grading and the restoration of property such as replacing mail boxes, wood chips, planter boxes, flagstones etc.
LAUC-Z4-7 9/11/2013
Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours 1,001-2,000 work hours 2,001-3,000 work hours 3,001-4,000 work hours
Official Request #: 734 Requestor: DTMB- DMVA/Alma Armory
Official Rate Schedule Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep
posted Project Description: DMVA/Alma Armory Modifications
on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a
copy Project Number: File No. 511/13007.CAK – Index Nos. 13721 & 13921 County: Gratiot
of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates prescribed in a contract. Page 27 of 27
Complaint Investigation Non-Compliance Summary Report Closed with Violations
Date Produced 04/01/2014
ER/CA Failure to provide records Violations Employer 1 HALE GROUP & ASSOCIATES LLC 2 METRO JOINT SEALANTS OF MICHIGAN 3
1-27-2011
SUPERIOR STRUCTURES
Address 16623 PLYMOUTH RD DETROIT, MI 48227 1397 PIEDMONT STE 200 TROY, MI 48083 4034 SCHOOL ST METAMORA, MI 48455
Page 1
Claim 168254 163544 163543 154355 153948 153581
Date 10/29/2013 06/06/2012 06/06/2012 05/03/2010 05/03/2010 05/03/2010
Complaint Investigation Non-Compliance Summary Report Closed with Violations
Date Produced 04/01/2014
Contractor Violation Unpaid Violations Employer 1 A & R ENTERPRISES INC
Address 3721 W MICHIGAN AVE STE 102 LANSING, MI 48917 33849 GATES CLINTON TWP, MI 48035 9196 SIOUX REDFORD, MI 48239 1940 E FOREST AVE DETROIT, MI 48207
1 1 3
A & R ENTERPRIZES LLC BEST COMMERCIAL PAINTING LLC BOOMER COMPANY
1
FOUR SEASONS BUILDING MAINTENANCE FOUR SEASONS ROOFING & SHEETMETAL LLC G & B ELECTRICAL
14315 INDUSTRIAL CENTER SHELBY TWP, MI 48315 14315 INDUSTRIAL CENTER DR SHELBY TWP, MI 48315 5393 DEERFIELD VILLAGE DR WEST BLOOMFIELD, MI 48322
2
METRO JOINT SEALANTS OF MICHIGAN
1397 PIEDMONT STE 200 TROY, MI 48083
1 7
PENINSULA INSULATING PENINSULA INSULATION
833 N ELMOSES LAKE CITY, MI 49651 833 N AL MOSES RD LAKE CITY, MI 49651
1 6
1-27-2011
Page 2
Claim 165580
Date 06/17/2013
165502 166703 170005 169934 169307 165205
07/15/2013 09/10/2012 04/17/2013 04/17/2013 04/17/2013 02/11/2013
168556
03/06/2013
174355 174354 174353 168558 164289 164057 163544 163543 174032 173527 173526 173525 173524 172748 172654 172653
12/03/2013 12/03/2013 12/03/2013 12/03/2013 01/09/2013 01/09/2013 06/06/2012 06/06/2012 09/20/2013 08/23/2013 08/23/2013 08/23/2013 01/15/2014 12/11/2013 08/02/2013 11/26/2013
RICK. SNYDER GOVERNOR
STATE OF MICHIGAN Prevailing Wages PO Box 30476 Lansing, MI 48909 517-322-1825
Informational Sheet: Prevailing Wages on State Projects REQUIREMENTS OF THE PREVAILING WAGES ON STATE PROJECTS ACT, PUBLIC ACT 166 OF 1965 The State of Michigan determines prevailing rates pursuant to the Prevailing Wages on State Projects Act, Public Act 166 of 1965, as amended. The purpose of establishing prevailing rates is to provide minimum rates of pay that must be paid to workers on construction projects for which the state or a school district is the contracting agent and which is financed or financially supported by the state. By law, prevailing rates are compiled from the rates contained in collectively bargained agreements which cover the locations of the state projects. The official prevailing rate schedule provides an hourly rate which includes wage and fringe benefit totals for designated construction mechanic classifications. The overtime rates also include wage and fringe benefit totals. Please pay special attention to the overtime and premium pay requirements. Prevailing wage is satisfied when wages plus fringe benefits paid to a worker are equal to or greater than the required rate. State of Michigan responsibilities under the law: •
The department establishes the prevailing rate for each classification of construction mechanic requested by a contracting agent prior to contracts being let out for bid on a state project. Contracting agent responsibilities under the law: •
If a contract is not awarded or construction does not start within 90 days of the date of the issuance of rates, a redetermination of rates must be requested by the contracting agent.
•
Rates for classifications needed but not provided on the Prevailing Rate Schedule, must be obtained prior to contracts being let out for bid on a state project.
•
The contracting agent, by written notice to the contractor and the sureties of the contractor known to the contracting agent, may terminate the contractor's right to proceed with that part of the contract, for which less than the prevailing rates have been or will be paid, and may proceed to complete the contract by separate agreement with another contractor or otherwise, and the original contractor and his sureties shall be liable to the contracting agent for any excess costs occasioned thereby. Contractor responsibilities under the law: •
Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing rates prescribed in a contract.
•
Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep an accurate record showing the name and occupation of and the actual wages and benefits paid to each construction mechanic employed by him in connection including certified payroll, as used in the industry, with said contract. This record shall be available for reasonable inspection by the contracting agent or the department.
•
Each contractor or subcontractor is separately liable for the payment of the prevailing rate to its employees.
•
The prime contractor is responsible for advising all subcontractors of the requirement to pay the prevailing rate prior to commencement of work.
•
The prime contractor is secondarily liable for payment of prevailing rates that are not paid by a subcontractor.
•
A construction mechanic shall only be paid the apprentice rate if registered with the United States Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training and the rate is included in the contract. Enforcement: A person who has information of an alleged prevailing wage violation on a state project may file a complaint with the State of Michigan. The department will investigate and attempt to resolve the complaint informally. During the course of an investigation, if the requested records and posting certification are not made available in compliance with Section 5 of Act 166, the investigation will be concluded and a referral to the Office of Attorney General for civil action will be made. The Office of Attorney General will pursue costs and fees associated with a lawsuit if filing is necessary to obtain records.
(06/11)
Page 1 of 1
STATE OF MICHIGAN
RICK. SNYDER GOVERNOR
Prevailing Wages PO Box 30476 Lansing, MI 48909 517-322-1825
Informational Sheet: Prevailing Wages on State Projects General Information Regarding Fringe Benefits Certain fringe benefits may be credited toward the payment of the Prevailing Wage Rate: o o o
If a fringe benefit is paid directly to a construction mechanic If a fringe benefit contribution or payment is made on behalf of a construction mechanic If a fringe benefit, which may be provided to a construction mechanic, is pursuant to a written contract or policy If a fringe benefit is paid into a fund, for a construction mechanic
o When a fringe benefit is not paid by an hourly rate, the hourly credit will be calculated based on the annual value of the fringe benefit divided by 2080 hours per year (52 weeks @ 40 hours per week). The following is an example of the types of fringe benefits allowed and how an hourly credit is calculated: Vacation Dental insurance Vision insurance Health insurance Life insurance Tuition Bonus 401k Employer Contribution Total Hourly Credit
40 hours X $14.00 per hour = $560/2080 = $31.07 monthly premium X 12 mos. = $372.84 /2080 = $5.38 monthly premium X 12 mos. = $64.56/2080 = $230.00 monthly premium X 12 mos. = $2,760.00/2080 = $27.04 monthly premium X 12 mos. = $324.48/2080 = $500.00 annual cost/2080 = 4 quarterly bonus/year x $250 = $1000.00/2080 = $2000.00 total annual contribution/2080 =
$.27 $.18 $.03 $1.33 $.16 $.24 $.48 $.96 $3.65
Other examples of the types of fringe benefits allowed: Sick pay Holiday pay Accidental Death & Dismemberment insurance premiums The following are examples of items that will not be credited toward the payment of the Prevailing Wage Rate: o Legally required payments, such as: Unemployment Insurance payments Workers’ Compensation Insurance payments FICA (Social Security contributions, Medicare contributions) o Reimbursable expenses, such as: Clothing allowance or reimbursement Uniform allowance or reimbursement Gas allowance or reimbursement Travel time or payment Meals or lodging allowance or reimbursement Per diem allowance or payment o Other payments to or on behalf of a construction mechanic that are not wages or fringe benefits, such as: Industry advancement funds Financial or material loans
(06/11)
Page 1 of 1
State of Michigan DEPARTMENT OF LICENSING AND REGULATORY AFFAIRS MICHIGAN OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION MARTHA B. YODER DIRECTOR
OVERTIME PROVISIONS for MICHIGAN PREVAILING WAGE RATE COMMERCIAL SCHEDULE 1.
Overtime is represented as a nine character code. Each character represents a certain period of time after the first 8 hours Monday thru Friday. Monday thru Friday First 8 Hours
Saturday
Sunday & Holidays
Four 10s
4
9th Hour
1
5
10th Hour
2
6
Over 10 hours
3
7
8
9
Overtime for Monday thru Friday after 8 hours: the 1st character is for time worked in the 9th hour (8.1 - 9 hours) the 2nd character is for time worked in the 10th hour (9.1 - 10 hours) the 3rd character is for time worked beyond the 10th hour (10.1 and beyond) Overtime on Saturday: the 4th character is for time worked in the first 8 hours on Saturday (0 - 8 hours) the 5th character is for time worked in the 9th hour on Saturday (8.1 - 9 hours) the 6th character is for time worked in the 10th hour (9.1 - 10 hours) the 7th character is for time worked beyond the 10th hour (10.01 and beyond) Overtime on Sundays & Holidays The 8th character is for time worked on Sunday or on a holiday Four Ten Hour Days The 9th character indicates if an optional 4-day 10-hour per day workweek can be worked between Monday and Friday without paying overtime after 8 hours worked, unless otherwise noted in the rate schedule. To utilize a 4 ten workweek, notice is required from the employer to employee prior to the start of work on the project. 2. Overtime Indicators Used in the Overtime Provision: H - means TIME AND ONE-HALF due X - means TIME AND ONE-HALF due after 40 HOURS worked D - means DOUBLE PAY due Y - means YES an optional 4-day 10-hour per day workweek can be worked without paying overtime after 8 hours worked N - means NO an optional 4-day 10-hour per day workweek can not be worked without paying overtime after 8 hours worked 3. EXAMPLES: HHHHHHHDN - This example shows that the 1½ rate must be used for time worked after 8 hours Monday thru Friday (characters 1 - 3); for all hours worked on Saturday, 1½ rate is due (characters 4 - 7). Work done on Sundays or holidays must be paid double time (character 8). The N (character 9) indicates that 4 ten-hour days is not an acceptable workweek at regular pay. XXXHHHHDY - This example shows that the 1½ rate must be used for time worked after 40 hours are worked Monday thru Friday (characters 1-3); for hours worked on Saturday, 1½ rate is due (characters 4 – 7). Work done on Sundays or holidays must be paid double time (character 8). The Y (character 9) indicates that 4 ten-hour days is an acceptable alternative workweek. LARA is an equal opportunity employer. Auxiliary aids, services and other reasonable accommodations are available upon request to individuals with disabilities. Wage & Hour Division 7150 HARRIS DRIVE P.O. BOX 30476 LANSING, MICHIGAN 48909 www.michigan.gov/wagehour Phone : (517) 322-1825
ENGINEERS - CLASSES OF EQUIPMENT LIST UNDERGROUND ENGINEERS
HAZARDOUS WASTE ABATEMENT ENGINEERS
CLASS I
CLASS I
Backfiller Tamper, Backhoe, Batch Plant Operator, Clam-Shell, Concrete Paver (2 drums or larger), Conveyor Loader (Euclid type), Crane (crawler, truck type or pile driving), Dozer, Dragline, Elevating Grader, End Loader, Gradall (and similar type machine), Grader, Power Shovel, Roller (asphalt), Scraper (self propelled or tractor drawn), Side Broom Tractor (type D-4 or larger), Slope Paver, Trencher (over 8’ digging capacity), Well Drilling Rig, Mechanic, Slip Form Paver, Hydro Excavator.
Backhoe, Batch Plant Operator, Clamshell, Concrete Breaker when attached to hoe, Concrete Cleaning Decontamination Machine Operator, Concrete Pump, Concrete Paver, Crusher, Dozer, Elevating Grader, Endloader, Farm Tractor (90 h.p. and higher), Gradall, Grader, Heavy Equipment Robotics Operator, Hydro Excavator, Loader, Pug Mill, Pumpcrete Machines, Pump Trucks, Roller, Scraper (self-propelled or tractor drawn), Side Boom Tractor, Slip Form Paver, Slope Paver, Trencher, Ultra High Pressure Waterjet Cutting Tool System Operator, Vactors, Vacuum Blasting Machine Operator, Vertical Lifting Hoist, Vibrating Compaction Equipment (self-propelled), and Well Drilling Rig.
CLASS II Boom Truck (power swing type boom), Crusher, Hoist, Pump (1 or more 6" discharge or larger gas or diesel powered by generator of 300 amps or more, inclusive of generator), Side Boom Tractor (smaller than type D-4 or equivalent), Tractor (pneu-tired, other than backhoe or front end loader), Trencher (8’ digging capacity and smaller), Vac Truck.
CLASS III Air Compressors (600 cfm or larger), Air Compressors (2 or more less than 600 cfm), Boom Truck (non-swinging, non-powered type boom), Concrete Breaker (self-propelled or truck mounted, includes compressor), Concrete Paver (1 drum, ½ yard or larger), Elevator (other than passenger), Maintenance Man, Mechanic Helper, Pump (2 or more 4" up to 6" discharge, gas or diesel powered, excluding submersible pump), Pumpcrete Machine (and similar equipment), Wagon Drill Machine, Welding Machine or Generator (2 or more 300 amp or larger, gas or diesel powered).
CLASS IV Boiler, Concrete Saw (40HP or over), Curing Machine (self-propelled), Farm Tractor (w/attachment), Finishing Machine (concrete), Firemen, Hydraulic Pipe Pushing Machine, Mulching Equipment, Oiler (2 or more up to 4", exclude submersible), Pumps (2 or more up to 4" discharge if used 3 hrs or more a day-gas or diesel powered, excluding submersible pumps), Roller (other than asphalt), Stump Remover, Vibrating Compaction Equipment (6’ wide or over), Trencher (service) Sweeper (Wayne type and similar equipment), Water Wagon, Extend-a-Boom Forklift.
CLASS II Air Compressor, Concrete Breaker when not attached to hoe, Elevator, End Dumps, Equipment Decontamination Operator, Farm Tractor (less than 90 h.p.), Forklift, Generator, Heater, Mulcher, Pigs (Portable Reagent Storage Tanks), Power Screens, Pumps (water), Stationary Compressed Air Plant, Sweeper, Water Wagon and Welding Machine.
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 01 1000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Related Requirements: 1.
1.3
Project information. Work covered by Contract Documents. Access to site. Coordination with occupants. Work restrictions. Specification and drawing conventions.
Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
PROJECT INFORMATION A.
Project Identification: Armory Modifications. 1.
B.
Project Location: Refer to title sheet.
Owner: Department of Military and Veterans Affairs. 1.
Owner's Representative: Brian Bushnell.
C.
Architect: Paradigm Design, Inc.; 550 3 Mile Rd NW, Grand Rapids, MI 49544, Todd Ockaskis (616) 785-5575.
D.
Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 1.
Civil Engineer: Paradigm Design.
2.
Structural: Soils and Structures.
3.
Mechanical/Electrical/Plumbing: Rhoades Engineering.
SUMMARY
01 1000 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 E.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Project Web Site: A project FTP site administered by Architect will be used for purposes of managing communication and documents during the construction stage. 1.
1.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
See Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements for using the Project FTP site.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A.
The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1.
B.
Type of Contract: 1.
1.5
Alma Armory Modifications.
Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
ACCESS TO SITE A.
General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's daily use of the occupied building.
B.
Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.
1.6
COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A.
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1.
2.
1.7
Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.
WORK RESTRICTIONS A.
Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1.
SUMMARY
Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
01 1000 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Weekend Hours: Only allowed with Owner’s permission. Early Morning Hours: Only allowed with Owner’s permission.
Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.
Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.
D.
Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.
E.
Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the existing building is not permitted.
1.8
SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1.
2.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.
B.
Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
C.
Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. 2. 3.
SUMMARY
Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
01 1000 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 1000
SUMMARY
01 1000 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 01 2100 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 00 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1.
B.
C.
Types of allowances include the following: 1.
Utility Company allowances.
2.
Contingency allowance.
Related Requirements: 1.
1.3
Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.
Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting.
SELECTION AND PURCHASE A.
At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.
B.
At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C.
Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders.
ALLOWANCES
01 2100 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
1.6
Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. COORDINATION
A.
1.7
Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. UTILITY COMPANY ALLOWANCES
A.
Refer to Division 00 Section 00700, 10.7 Cash Allowances; Provisionary Allowances for directions on the use of Allowances.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
3.2
Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A.
Utility Company Allowance: Bidders must include in their Base Proposal Sum a Utility Company Allowance of $2,000.00 for the cost of installing a new gas line to the building and the new meter. All other costs associated with installation from Contractor and sub-contractors to be included in the base bid outside this allowance.
B.
Contingency Allowance: Bidders must include in their Base Proposal Sum a Contingency Allowance of $40,000. END OF SECTION 01 2100
ALLOWANCES
01 2100 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. Division 31 Section "Dewatering" for disposal of ground water at Project site. Division 31 Section "Termite Control" for pest control. Division 31 Section "Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt paving for temporary roads and paved areas. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for construction and maintenance of cement concrete pavement for temporary roads and paved areas.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. USE CHARGES
A.
General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not Limited, to Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. Obtain required certifications and permits from governing jurisdictions.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Temporary Utilities: At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service; to use of permanent service.
B.
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.
C.
Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary service and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. 2.
Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-) thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails.
B.
Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts.
C.
Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D. 2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Water: Potable. TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B.
Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
C.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1.
2.3
Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. Drinking water and private toilet. Coffee machine and supplies. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F (20 to 22 deg C). Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk height.
Store combustible materials apart from building.
EQUIPMENT A.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.
B.
HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. 2. 3.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.
B.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A.
General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide and install the remainder with matching, compatible material and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations and requirements. 1.
B.
Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. 1.
C.
Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1.
Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy.
D.
Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
E.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
F.
Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 G.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1.
Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.
H.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
I.
Telephone Service: Provide superintendent with cellular telephone
J.
Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail, in common-use facilities.
3.3
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A.
General: Comply with the following: 1.
B.
Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving."
Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2.
Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
D.
Parking: Provide temporary or Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personal.
E.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 F.
Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.
Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1.
3.4
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1.
G.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1.
Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
B.
Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Division 31 Section "Site Clearing."
C.
Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.
D.
Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
E.
Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. 2.
F.
Comply with requirements specified in
Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys.
Temporary Partitions: Provide full-height dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. 1.
Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant plywood on construction operations side.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 G.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
3.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Store combustible materials in containers in safe locations. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection facilities, stairways and other access routes for firefighting. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. 2.
3.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
END OF SECTION 01 5000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 5000 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 01 5723 – SOIL EROSION & SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Related Sections include the following: 1.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" regarding dewatering and drains.
DEFINITIONS A.
Best Management Practice (BMP): Structural, Vegetative, or managerial practice used to treat, prevent, or reduce water pollution.
B.
Stabilized: The proper placement, grading, and/or covering of soil or rock to insure their resistance to soil erosion, sliding, or other earth movement.
C.
Certified Storm Water Operator: An individual who has been certified by the Michigan Department of Environmental Quality, pursuant to the provisions of section 3110 of Part 31 of 1994 PA 451, as properly qualified to operate treatment or control facilities for storm water discharges.
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan: 1. 2.
B.
Scheduling: 1. 2. 3.
C.
Minimum control required per plan sheet. Additional unforeseen measures shall be implemented as needed or as outlined in the permit.
Establish an inspection and maintenance table (reference table on drawings) Applicable BMP’s shall be implemented as needed. Clean Up: Within one week after BMP is no longer needed.
Staging:
SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
01 5723 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Construction planning shall be designed to minimize the amount and duration of exposed soil at any given time.
Responsibilities: 1. 2.
3.
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain the Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control permit from the Department of Military and Veteran’s Affairs. The Contractor shall furnish, erect and maintain the controls in accordance with the requirements of the permitting agency and as otherwise deemed necessary during construction, until permanent restoration has been established. There is no cost for the permit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SILT FENCE MATERIALS A.
MDOT 916.02
B.
ODOT 712.09
C.
IDOT 1080.02
D.
INDOT 918.04
E.
KYTC 827.08
F.
PENNDOT 735
G.
WVDOT 715.11.5
H.
WISDOT 628.2.6
I.
TDOT 209.02 (h)
J.
NCDOT 1605-2
2.2
CATCH BASIN AND EXISTING DRAINAGE STRUCTURE PROTECTION MATERIALS A.
2.3
Dandy Bag by Dandy Products, Inc. or approved equal. EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS
A.
1:4 Slopes 1.
B.
North American Green – DS75 single net short term blanket or approved equal.
1:3 and 1:2 Slopes, Ditches, and Swales
SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
01 5723 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
North American Green – S150BN double net biodegradable blanket or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PERFORMANCE A.
Site Preparation: 1.
B.
Construction Sequencing: 1. 2. 3.
C.
3.
Maintain temporary control measures until not needed or site is stabilized. Contractor shall begin repairs to damaged control measures or begin implementing required control measures within 24 hours of notification from Storm Water Operator or Authorized Public Agency. Permanent control measures for all disturbed land shall be completed within 15 calendar days after the final earth change has been completed.
Erosion Control Blanket: 1.
3.2
Install all temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control measures in accordance with the approved plan and special permit conditions. Inspect job site at least weekly and after every rainfall event to evaluate the effectiveness of the control measures. Maintain all temporary and permanent control measures per plan or as needed based on the site inspections.
Site Stabilization: 1. 2.
D.
Protect existing drainage structures from sediment-laden runoff.
Install per manufacturer’s recommendations.
PENALTIES A.
Fines: 1.
B.
A stop work order may be issued until compliance is obtained.
Back Charges: 1. 2.
Any fines issued to the Owner resulting from Contractor negligence will be back charged to the Contractor. The Owner can install or maintain control measures to bring a non-conforming site into compliance with the permit and back charge the Contractor for the costs incurred.
END OF SECTION 01 5723
SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
01 5723 - 3
Table of Contents Page Location of Soil Investigation ................................................................................ 1 Purpose of Investigation ......................................................................................... 1 Design Information ................................................................................................. 1 Tests Performed ...................................................................................................... 2 Description of Soil .................................................................................................. 3 Description of Groundwater Conditions ................................................................ 3 Description of Site .................................................................................................. 4 Settlement ............................................................................................................... 4 Recommendations Construction Considerations ...................................................................... Site & Building Pad Preparation ............................................................... Foundations ............................................................................................... Floors ......................................................................................................... Retaining Walls & Lateral Earth Pressures ................................................ Excavations ................................................................................................ Fill ............................................................................................................. Groundwater Management & Drainage ..................................................... Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) Pavement .............................................. Inspection & Quality Control Testing .......................................................
4 4 5 6 7 7 7 8 8 9
General Conditions & Reliance ............................................................................ 10 Appendix Test Boring Location Plan General Soil Profile Test Boring Logs Laboratory Tests General Soil Information
Location of Soil Investigation The soil investigation was located immediately north of the existing Armory Facility at 710 South State Street, Alma, Michigan. Purpose of Investigation The purpose of this investigation is to provide soil related recommendations for a new building and pavement. Design Information The proposed building is anticipated to be a combination of steel frame and masonry structure with a slab on grade floor. The plan area of the proposed structure is 2400 square feet with dimensions of 40.0 by 60.0 feet. The maximum column load is anticipated to be less than 100,000 pounds. The maximum wall load is anticipated to be less than 3000 pounds per linear foot. Average floor loads are assumed to be less than 250 pounds per square foot. An allowable maximum settlement of 0.6 inches and an allowable differential settlement of 0.4 inches have been assumed. The floor elevation is anticipated to be in the range of 498.0 to 499.0 feet. These elevations are within 1.0 feet of the existing grade and floor elevation of the existing building. The depth of fill under the building will be 1.0 feet or less with the floor elevation in this range. Fill for this project will also include backfill over foundations and utilities as well as the sand base under the floor and pavement. The fill is anticipated to be clean sand obtained off-site from a source still to be determined. The greatest depth of excavation is anticipated to be less than 5.0 feet. This depth will occur for the construction of utilities and building foundations. Extensive dewatering is not anticipated for these excavations. Control of surface water may be necessary.
Tests Performed Four test borings were drilled to depths of 10.0 and 20.0 feet in accordance with ASTM D 1586 Standards. The test borings were performed at the locations recommended by Soils & Structures, Inc. The ASTM D 1586 standard describes the procedure for sampling the soil and is included in the Appendix.
Page 1 – Armory Building Addition – Alma, Michigan Project No. 2013.0063 – April 12, 2013
Soil samples were classified according to the Unified Soil Classification System. This is a system which is standardized ASTM D 2487 for classifying soil according to its engineering properties. A chart showing the Unified Soil Classification System is included in the Appendix. The classification is shown in the right hand column of the test boring logs. The soil strength and the allowable soil bearing value were evaluated using the “N” value. The “N” value is the number of blows required to drive a soil sampler one foot with a standard 140 pound drop hammer and is generally proportional to the strength and density. The sampler is driven a distance of 18.0 inches. The number of blows for each 6.0 inch increment is recorded. The sum of the second and third intervals is the “N” value. The number of blows for each 6.0 inch interval is shown on the test boring logs under the column labeled “Penetration.” The “N” value for each sample is shown in the adjacent column. Laboratory tests consisted of unconfined compression tests and water content tests performed on representative samples of the soil. The tests were performed in accordance with applicable ASTM standards. The unconfined compression test is performed by placing a cylindrical sample of soil under a compressive load and measuring the greatest load that the soil will support. The unconfined compression test measures the shear strength of clay and is used to determine the allowable soil bearing value and seismic site classification. The U.S. NRCS Geological Survey map and the Quaternary Geology map of Ottawa County, Michigan were reviewed. These maps provide general information about the geologic deposits in the area of the site. Surface elevations were obtained from the drawing titled in part “Sheet C101, … Armory Modifications, … Alma Armory, Alma, Michigan, …” by Paradigm Design dated March 7, 2013.
Page 2 – Armory Building Addition – Alma, Michigan Project No. 2013.0063 – April 12, 2013
Description of Soil The general soil profile consists of a clay to a depth of 5.5 to 9.0 feet over silt and sand. Topsoil and pavement are present at the surface. The topsoil layer at the surface consists of a dark brown sandy clay with a moderate organic content. The thickness is approximately 7.0 inches. The pavement consists 7.0 inches of asphalt over 5.0 inches of gravel. The natural clay layer consists of a brown and gray clay with varying amounts of sand or gravel. The clay is a fine-textured glacial till and is part of an end moraine. Most of the clay is stiff with a shear strength between 1200 and 3000 pounds per square foot. Some soft clay with a shear strength of less than 1000 pounds per square foot is present at the top of the layer along the proposed drive and in the parking lot area. The water content in most of the layer ranges from 10.0 to 20.0 percent which is low. The “N” value throughout the clay layer is in the range of 6 to 16 which is moderate to high. The moderate “N” value and low water content indicates the clay is slightly overconsolidated and will compress only moderate amounts under the light loads anticipated for this project. The lower sand layer consists of brown fine sand with occasional pockets of silty sand and silt. The sand is a glacial outwash or fluvial deposit formed in conjunction with the overlying till. The “N” Value is low in most of the layer indicating that the sand is in a loose to slightly compact state. The internal angle of friction is in the range of 28 to 30 degrees in the sand’s existing state. The sand will support foundations that are located in the overlying clay. Foundations located in the sand will require compaction of the bearing surface. Description of Groundwater Conditions The water table is present at a depth of 18.0 feet. Description of Site The existing Armory building is located in the middle of the site. The ground cover over the remainder of the site consists of asphalt and gravel pavement and grass. The topography is slightly undulating. Surface elevations range of 493.0 to 500.0 feet.
Page 3 – Armory Building Addition – Alma, Michigan Project No. 2013.0063 – April 12, 2013
Settlement The maximum settlement will be approximately 0.1 to 0.6 inches provided the recommendations in this report are observed. Differential settlement will be approximately one half to three quarters of the maximum value. These levels of settlement should be acceptable for the proposed building. Recommendations Construction Considerations Construction considerations are anticipated to include moisture control of fill, drainage, and staging areas. The site drainage is poor and so earthworkmay not be possible in wet conditions. Drainage and moisture control may require temporary ditches in conjunction with sumps and ditch pumps to remove surface water from the construction area as well as the proposed building addition location prior to placing fill. Due to the possible presence of surface water over a clay subgrade, the recommended detail for the staging and storage area is 12.0 inches of coarse aggregate such as an MDOT 6A aggregate or larger gradation placed over a filter fabric. The recommended filter fabric is a Skaps GT 160-6 or the equivalent nonwoven fabric. Site & Building Pad Preparation The topsoil and soil containing roots should be removed from the surface. Roots should be removed to the extent that all roots over 0.5 inches are removed. Soil containing roots should be removed to the extent that the root content by volume is less than 5 percent. Topsoil should be removed to the extent that all soil with an organic content of 3.0 percent or greater is removed. The subgrade should be examined and tested for soft soil prior to placing fill. For this project soft soil is defined as soil with a shear strength of less than 1500 pounds per square foot as measured with a hand penetrometer of torvane. Soft soil was identified in Test Borings Three and Four between 2.5 to 3.5 and 4.5 to 6.0 feet, respectively. Soft soil, where identified should be removed to its full extent under foundations and to the lesser of 3.0 feet or its full depth under pavement and floors. In addition, the sandy clay identified between 1.0 to 2.5 feet in Test Borings Three and Four should be removed to its full extent under foundations, pavement, and floors.
Page 4 – Armory Building Addition – Alma, Michigan Project No. 2013.0063 – April 12, 2013
Proof compaction with heavy construction equipment is not recommended because high pore pressures will be induced in the clay, softening it and resulting in unnecessary over excavation. Fill should be placed in accordance with the “Fill” section of this report. Fill imported to the site should be sand meeting MDOT Class II specifications. Fill should be compacted to 95.0 percent of its maximum density, as determined by the modified proctor method per the ASTM D 1557. The soil which will be used for fill should be kept free of topsoil and other organic materials. Compaction tests are recommended to check the compaction of the fill. Foundations Spread foundations are recommended for the proposed building. The foundations are anticipated to bear on the existing clay and new fill. The thickness of new fill below foundations is anticipated to be less than 5.0 feet. Fill below foundations should possess 95.0 percent of its maximum density to its full depth. Compaction and dynamic cone tests should be performed in the foundation subgrade to verify this level of compaction. Fill that possesses a lower density should be re-compacted. The undisturbed natural clay below foundations should possess a minimum shear strength of 1500 pounds per square foot as measured with a hand penetrometer or torvane. Clay with a lower shear strength should be removed to its full extent until a suitable bearing surface is encountered for a distance of 1.0 feet beyond all sides of the foundation. The recommended minimum cover over exterior foundations is 42 inches for protection against frost heave. Foundations should not be constructed on frozen soil. Foundations should be protected from freezing with insulated blankets. The blankets should be left in place under the backfill on both sides of the wall is placed or the building is enclosed and heated. Foundations exposed to extended periods of freezing temperatures will heave which may damage the foundation and any overlying structures. Damaged foundations should be removed and replaced. The site classification for seismic design is “E” based on the Michigan Building Code. The short period acceleration is 8.0 percent and the long period or 1.0 second acceleration is 3.8 percent. The design spectral response acceleration parameters (SD) are 0.13g for the short term response and 0.089g for the one second response. Page 5 – Armory Building Addition – Alma, Michigan Project No. 2013.0063 – April 12, 2013
Building foundations may be designed using an allowable soil bearing value of 3500 pounds per square foot for isolated column foundations and 3000 pounds per square foot for wall foundations provided the recommendations in this report are observed. The allowable soil bearing values may be increased 25 percent when evaluating transient loads such as earthquake and wind. A minimum width of 16.0 inches and 24.0 inches is recommended for new wall and column foundations, respectively. Floors The floor subgrade should be prepared in accordance with the “Site Preparation” and “Fill” sections of this report. Fill under floors should be compacted to a density of 95.0 percent of its maximum density. A base of 12.0 inches of clean sand is recommended under the floor. The sand should meet MDOT Class II specifications. In some areas clay will have to be excavated to place the sand base. A modulus of subgrade reaction of 100 pounds per inches cubed is recommended for the design of floor slabs. A vapor barrier is recommended under areas that will be heated. The vapor barrier should consist of a 10 mil polyethylene sheet located directly under the floor slab. In unheated areas the vapor barrier may be omitted. Retaining Walls & Lateral Earth Pressures Foundation walls with different soil levels on either side of the wall should be designed as retaining walls. Sand meeting MDOT Class II specifications should be used as backfill behind retaining and foundation walls. The walls should be designed using a soil density of 120 pounds per cubic foot and a coefficient of active earth pressure of 0.30 for sand backfill. The equivalent fluid pressure is 36 pounds per cubic foot. The effects of any surcharge or sloping backfill should be included in the design. A passive earth pressure coefficient of 4.0 is recommended for calculating the resisting force of the sand. A cohesion of 1000 pounds per square foot is recommended for calculating the resistance force of the clay. Excavations The clay encountered is estimated to be an OSHA type “A” and “B” soil. Excavations should be based on OSHA requirements for a type “B” soil. Based on OSHA requirements for trench excavations in type “B” soil a maximum allowable side slope of 45 degrees (1H:1V) is recommended for trench excavations 4.0 to 15.0 feet deep. For non-trench type excavations a side slope of 60 degrees Page 6 – Armory Building Addition – Alma, Michigan Project No. 2013.0063 – April 12, 2013
(2H:1V) is recommended provided the excavation is less than 15.0 feet deep. For excavations over 15.0 feet deep retaining systems are recommended. Excavations less than 4.0 feet deep may have vertical side slopes. A trench excavation is an excavation in which the depth exceeds the width. Fill Fill should be compacted to 95.0 percent of the soil’s maximum density. The maximum density should be determined in accordance with the ASTM D 1557 standard. A maximum thickness per layer of 6.0 inches is recommended. In sand the lift thickness may be increased to 12.0 inches if a vibratory roller is used for compaction. In clay the lift thickness should be maintained at 6.0 inches regardless of the equipment used for compaction. A sheepsfoot roller is recommended for the compaction of clay fill. Where a free draining porous fill is required the fill should be sand meeting MDOT Class II requirements or ASTM requirements for a SP or SW which are the designations for clean sand. No source of sand with significant volume was observed in the test borings within the anticipated maximum excavation depth. The sand required for this project will have to be imported to the site. Compaction tests are recommended to confirm that the fill is compacted to the required density. The tests should be performed at the rate recommended in the “Inspection & Quality Control Testing” section of this report. Fill should not be placed over frozen ground, snow or ice. Soil which contains frozen material should not be used for fill. In winter construction removal of frozen ground may be necessary prior to placing fill. Groundwater Management & Drainage Dewatering to control groundwater should not be necessary to construct foundations or utilities. The groundwater encountered in the test borings was present in limited quantities at depths exceeding anticipated maximum excavation depths. In the event water is encountered excavating equipment should be able to remove wet soil without dewatering. Drains are recommended around the building perimeter foundations. The recommended drain detail is a 4.0 inch diameter plastic pipe wrapped in filter fabric with pea gravel backfill within 6.0 inches of the drain. The drains should be connected to a storm sewer or have an outlet at a detention area.
Page 7 – Armory Building Addition – Alma, Michigan Project No. 2013.0063 – April 12, 2013
New Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Pavement For heavy duty pavement a bituminous thickness of 3.5 inches with an MDOT 22A aggregate base of 10.0 inches and an MDOT Class II sand subbase of 12.0 inches is recommended. For standard duty pavement a bituminous thickness of 3.0 inches with an MDOT 22A aggregate base of 8.0 inches and an MDOT Class II sand subbase of 12.0 inches is recommended. The bituminous mixture should be placed in two lifts. The subgrade should be prepared in accordance with the "Site Preparation" and “Fill” section of this report. Drains are recommened The paving contractor should submit the proposed mix designs for review. The bituminous paving mixture should meet and be installed to the following criteria: Table One: Bituminous Mixture Requirements Base Course Wearing Course Criteria minimum maximum minimum maximum MDOT Mix Type 3B 36A Asphalt Content (%) 4.5 7.0 5.5 8.0 Air Void Content Target 3.5 3.0 (%) VMA (%) 15.0 16.5 RAP (%) 20.0 20.0 Crushed Aggregate (%) 50 60 Lift Thickness (inches) Heavy duty 2.0 1.5 Standard duty 1.5 1.5 The asphalt grade should be PG 58-28. The base course should be compacted to 92.0 percent of the Theoretical Maximum Density (TMD). The paving contractor should submit the proposed mix design for review.
Page 8 – Armory Building Addition – Alma, Michigan Project No. 2013.0063 – April 12, 2013
Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) Pavement The subgrade should be prepared in accordance with the “Site Preparation” and “Fill” sections of this report. A base of 12.0 inches of clean sand is recommended under the pavement. The sand should meet MDOT Class II specifications. A modulus of subgrade reaction of 150 pounds per inches cubed is recommended for the design of concrete pavement. A minimum slab thickness 5.5 inches is recommended. The reinforcing should be designed by a structural engineer. Inspection & Quality Control Testing The subgrade should be examined and tested after topsoil, soft clay, and/or the sandy clay fill is removed and before clean granular fill is placed. A hand penetrometer, density gauge and probe rod should be used to verify that the subgrade possesses the required compaction. Compaction tests are recommended to confirm that fill and natural soil in the building area are compacted to the specified density. The test should be performed in accordance with the ASTM D 2922 Standard. The recommended testing frequency is one test per 400 cubic yards with tests performed at elevation intervals of 1.0 feet throughout the depth of the fill. Compaction tests should be performed under foundations at the rate of one test per 25 linear feet for wall foundations and one test per column foundation. The recommended testing frequency in the floor subgrade is one test per 2000 square feet. Tests should also be performed in the pavement subgrade and aggregate layers and in the backfill over foundations and utilities. In clay a hand penetrometer or torvane should be used to verify the shear strength of the clay. The tests should be performed at the same frequency as the compaction tests. A smooth 0.5 to 0.75 inch diameter rod should be used in conjunction with compaction tests to probe for loose areas under foundations, in fill and under floors. The maximum density should be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 or ASTM D 4253 procedures. Testing should be performed by technicians supervised by a registered geotechnical engineer. Page 9 – Armory Building Addition – Alma, Michigan Project No. 2013.0063 – April 12, 2013
General Conditions & Reliance The report was prepared in accordance with generally accepted practices of the geotechnical engineering profession. The scope of work consisted of performing four test borings and providing soil related recommends for the design and construction of building. The scope of work did not include an environmental study or wetland determination. The report and the associated test borings were prepared specifically for the previously described project and site. Soils & Structures should be consulted if a significant change in the scope of the project is made. The test borings represent point information and may not have encountered all of the soil types and materials present on this site. This report does not constitute a guarantee of the soil or groundwater conditions or that the test borings are an exact representation of the soil or groundwater conditions at all points on this site. The descriptions and recommendations contained in this report are based on an interpretation of the test borings and laboratory tests. The test borings should not be used independently of the report. If soil conditions are encountered which are significantly different from the test borings Soils & Structures should be consulted for additional recommendations. The report and test boring information may be relied upon by Paradigm Design for the design, construction, permitting and financing associated with an addition to the building at 710 South State Street in Alma, Michigan. The use of the report and test borings by third parties or for other sites has not been agreed upon by Soils & Structures. Soils & Structures does not recommend or consent to third party use or reliance of the report or test borings unless allowed to review the proposed use of these materials. Unless obtained in writing no consent to third party use should be assumed. Third parties using the report or test boring information do so at their own risk and are offered no guarantee or promise of indemnity.
Page 10 – Armory Building Addition – Alma, Michigan Project No. 2013.0063 – April 12, 2013
General Information for Method of Field Investigation This soil investigation was performed in accordance with the American Society of Testing and Materials method ASTM D 1586, which describes the method of “Standard Penetration and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils”. Samples of compressible clays or organic soils are obtained with a thin walled steel tube in accordance with ASTM D1587 procedures when consolidation is a consideration. Rock may be cored in conjunction with the above methods as specified in ASTM D 2113 “Diamond Core Drilling for Site Investigation”. Field Testing Standard Penetration Tests in accordance with ASTM D 1586 were performed at depths of 2.5 ‘, 5.0’, 7.5’, 10.0’ and 5.0’ intervals thereafter. Laboratory Testing Samples obtained from the Standard Penetration Test, ASTM D 1586 or thin walled tube method, ASTM D 1587 was tested in the laboratory for the moisture content and density. When a soils sample possessed sufficient cohesive properties, it was tested for its’ compressive strength in the unconfined state. Natural Percent Moisture content (N.P.M.) of the soil is the percentage by weight of water contained in the soils compared to the dry weight of the solids of which the soil is composed. Natural Density (N.D.) of soil as reported on the appended boring logs is the natural wet density of the soils expressed in pounds per cubic foot. The unconfined compressive strength of cohesive soils, ASTME D 2166, is determined in the laboratory on “undisturbed” samples. This test determined the maximum load required at a specified rate to deform the length of the cohesive soils specimen twenty (20%) percent. The primary purpose of the unconfined compression test is to obtain approximate quantitative values of the compressive strength of soils possessing sufficient coherence to permit testing in the unconfined state. Color When the color of the soils is uniform throughout, the color recorded will be such as brown, gray, and black and may be modified by adjectives such as light and dark. If the soils predominant color is shaded by secondary color, the secondary color precedes the primary color, such as gray-brown, or yellow-brown. If two major and distinct colors are swirled throughout the soil, the colors will be modified by the term mottled; such as; mottled brown and gray. Water Observations Depth of water recorded in the test boring is measured from the ground surface to the water surface. Initial depth indicates water level during boring; completing depth indicates water level immediately after boring and depth after “X” number of hours indicates water level after letting water rise or fall over a period of time. Water observations in pervious soils are considered reliable groundwater levels for accurate groundwater measurements for that date unless records are made over several days’ time. Factors such as weather, soils porosity, etc., will cause the groundwater level to fluctuate for both pervious and impervious soils.
1
Soils & Structures, 6480 Grand Haven Road, Muskegon, MI 49441 Method of Field Investigation General Information
Sample Type If not otherwise indicated, the sample is a split-barrel liner sample ASTM D 1586. “S.T.’ – Shelby tube sample, ASTM D 1587 “A” – disturbed augered sample “C” – rock core sampled ASTM D 2113 N.P.M. – Natural Percent Moisture of insitu soils sample N.D. – Natural Density of insitu soils sample in p.c.f. S.S. –Shear Strength of cohesive soils samples as determined by the Unconfined Compression tests in k.s.f. Classification Data – Laboratory data to assist in classification of soils and classification of soils characteristics; i.e., plastic limit or liquid limit Test Boring Logs Particle Size Boulders Cobbles Gravel – Course Gravel – Fine Sand- Coarse Sand - Medium Sand - Fine Silt Clay
Visual Larger than 8” 8” to 3” 3” to ¾” 2mm. to ¾ mm 2mm to 0.6mm 0.6 – 0.2mm 0.2mm to .06mm 0.06mm to 0.002mm 0.002mm and smaller
Soils Components Major Component Gravel Sand Clay
Minor Component Trace 1-10% Some 11-35% And 35-50%
Condition of Soil Relative to Compactness Granular Material Very Loose Loose Slightly Compact Compact Very Compact Extremely Compact
“N” Value 0-1 1-1 ½ 2-4 ½ 5-16 7-25 26 and above
“N” values in clay soils are not to be used as a measure of shear strength. However, they may be used as a general indication of strength.
2
Soils & Structures, 6480 Grand Haven Road, Muskegon, MI 49441 Method of Field Investigation General Information
Unified Soil Classification System Chart Major Divisions Coarse Grained Soils
More than 50% of material is larger than no.200 sieve size
Fine Grained Soils
Gravel – Gravelly Soils – more than 50% of coarse fraction retained on no.4 sieve
Sand and Sandy Soils
Letter Symbol GW
Typical Descriptions
GP
Poorly graded gravels, gravel-sand mixtures, little or no fines
Gravel w/fines appreciable amount of fines
GM
Silty gravels, gravel –sandy-clay mixtures. Well graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines
Clean sand little or no fines
SW
Clean gravels, little or no fines
GC
SM
Well graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines Poorly graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines Silty sands, sand-silt mixtures
SC
Clayey sands, sand-clay mixtures
Silts and clays
ML
Liquid limit less than 50
CL
Inorganic silts and very fine sands, rock flour, silty or clayey fine sands or clayey silts with slight plasticity Inorganic clays or low to medium plasticity, gravelly clays, sandy clays, silty clays, lean clays Organic silts and organic silty clays or low plasticity
SP More than 50% of coarse fraction passing no.4 sieve
Sand with fines appreciable amount of fines
OL Silts and clays
Liquid limit greater than 50
Highly organic soils
3
Well graded gravels, gravel-sand fixtures, little or no fines
MH
Inorganic silts, micaceous or diatomaceous fine sand of silty soils
CH
Inorganic clays of high plasticity, fat clays
OH
Organic clays or medium to high plasticity, organic silts
PT
Peat, humus, swamp soils with high organic contents
Soils & Structures, 6480 Grand Haven Road, Muskegon, MI 49441 Method of Field Investigation General Information
For Laboratory Classification of Fine Grained Soils Plasticity Chart 60 50 CH
40
CL
30 20 MH & OH
Plasticity Index
10
4
0 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Soils & Structures, 6480 Grand Haven Road, Muskegon, MI 49441 Method of Field Investigation General Information
90
100
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted.
DEFINITIONS A.
Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1.
2.
3.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 6000 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. 1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. 2.
1.5
Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Delivery and Handling: 1. 2.
3.
4. C.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Storage: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 6000 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PRODUCT WARRANTIES A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.
2.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. 2. 3.
C.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 6000 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 7.
B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
Product Selection Procedures: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a.
10.
If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a.
b.
Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 6000 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 6000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 6000 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 01 7300 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2.
B.
1.3
Construction layout. Field engineering and surveying.
Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualifications Data: for land surveyor or professional engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION A.
Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1.
2.
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01 7300 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PREPARATION A.
3.3
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B.
General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines as needed to locate each element of Project. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E.
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used.
3.4
FIELD ENGINEERING A.
Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks and control points.
B.
Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01 7300 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
2. C.
2. 3.
3.5
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.
Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of [two]
permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. 1.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.
Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 01 7300
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01 7300 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.3
Inspection procedures. Project record documents. Operation and maintenance manuals. Warranties. Demonstration and training of owner’s personnel. Final cleaning.
Division 01 Section 01 2900 "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. Division 01 Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures” for requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, Photographs and other submittals. Division 01 Section 01 7300 "Execution” for progress cleaning of Project site. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. Complete startup testing of systems.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7700 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Submit test/adjust/balance records. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems (submit copy of sign-in sheet).
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. 2.
1.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
FINAL COMPLETION A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. 2.
3. 4. 5.
6. 7. B.
Submit a final Application for Payment. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7700 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A.
Preparation: Submit one copy of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. 2. 3.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. b. c. d. e.
1.6
Project name. Date. Name of Architect. Name of Contractor. Page x of y number.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A.
Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible, condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect’s reference during normal working hours.
B.
Record Drawings: Maintain one set of blue or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1.
Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, Subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. b. c. d.
2.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7700 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. 4. 5.
6. C.
2. 3. 4.
1.7
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. Identify and date each Record Drawing: Include the designation “PROJECT RECORD DRAWING” in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. Provide a digital copy in PDF format.
Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project’s Specifications, including Addenda, and contract modifications. Mark copy to include the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, Addenda, and contract modifications. 1.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable. Provide a digital copy in PDF format.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, sub-system, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Provide (3) binders and a digital copy in PDF format. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1.
Operation Data: a. b. c. d. e.
2.
Emergency instructions and procedures. System, sub-system, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal and weekend operations. Description of controls and sequence of operations. Pipe diagrams.
Maintenance Data: a. b. c. d. e. f.
Manufacturer’s information, including list of spare parts. Name, address, and telephone number of installer or supplier. Maintenance procedures. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. Maintenance record forms. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7700 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 g. h. B.
1.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Copies of maintenance service agreements. Copies of warranties and bonds.
Organize operations and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive oversized sheets. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the printed title “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL,” Project Name, and subject matter of contents. WARRANTIES
A.
Submittal Time: Submit written warranties for all work for one (1) year duration, as well as components herein specified with longer periods, to be effective starting from the date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Submit written warranties on request of the Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties are concurrent for phased construction, and are effective different from Substantial Completion. Architect and Owner to verify and approve all warranties and timing prior to official filing.
C.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1.
2.
3. 4. D.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. Provide three (3) binder copies and one (1) digital copy in PDF format.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7700 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A.
3.2
Instruction: Instruct Owner’s personnel to adjust, operate and maintain systems, sub-systems, and equipment not part of a system. FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a.
b. c. d. e. f.
g. h. i. j.
k. l.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. Remove labels that are not permanent. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7700 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1) m.
n. o. p. q. r.
s. C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01 7700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 7700 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 02 4119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.
1.3
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and belowgrade improvements.
DEFINITIONS A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A.
Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner’s property, demolished materials shall become Contractor’s property and shall be removed from project site.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
02 4119 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SUBMITTALS A.
Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
B.
Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B.
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours’ notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner’s operations.
B.
Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1.
Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Owner assumes no responsibility for conditions of areas to be selectively demolished.
D.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
E.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.
F.
Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.
G.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
H.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
02 4119 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
WARRANTY A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
REPAIR MATERIALS A.
Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1. 2.
B.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.
Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.
C.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E.
Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.
F.
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.
3.2
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A.
Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
02 4119 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
Provide at least 72 hours’ notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover.
Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. a.
D.
3.3
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the wall.
Utility Requirements: Refer to Civil, Plumbing, Mechanical, and Electrical Divisions-Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. PREPARATION
A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1.
B.
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. 2.
3. 4. 5.
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
02 4119 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
C.
Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
D.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1.
3.4
Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
POLLUTION CONTROLS A.
Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. 1. 2.
B.
3.5
Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas.
Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1.
2.
3. 4.
5. 6. 7.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
02 4119 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 8. 9. 10.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
B.
Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager’s requirement for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations.
C.
Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval.
D.
Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
E.
Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. 2. 3. 4.
F.
3.6
Clean salvaged items. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. Transport items to Owner's storage area. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A.
Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.
B.
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
C.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
02 4119 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D.
Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI.
Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. Refer to Division 07 Section for new roofing requirements. 1. 2.
3.7
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. 1.
E.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate.
PATCHING AND REPAIRS A.
General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations.
B.
Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. 1.
Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer’s written recommendations.
C.
Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
D.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 1. 2.
3. E.
Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
02 4119 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.9
CLEANING A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION 02 4119
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
02 4119 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
Footings. Foundation walls. Slabs-on-grade.
Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for Testing and Inspecting Services. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blastfurnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1.
C.
Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 318, MCP-3(06) and SP-66(04) “Detailing Manual”. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 3000 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
D.
Welding certificates.
E.
Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer
F.
Field quality-control testreports.
1.5
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1.
B.
Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. 2.
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician Grade II.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.
D.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
E.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. 2.
F.
ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.] ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
FORM-FACING MATERIALS A.
Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 3000 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
C.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1.
D.
2.2
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
B.
Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C.
Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars, assembled with clips.
D.
Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82.
E.
Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496.
F.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.
2.3
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A.
Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.
B.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete , or fiber reinforced concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete.
2.4
CONCRETE MATERIALS 1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. a.
B.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 3000 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
2.5
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class: severe weathering region, but not less than 3S coarse aggregate or better, uniformly graded, and as follows: 1. 2.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) nominal. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. ADMIXTURES
A.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. (exterior concrete mixes only – refer to Sitework Section – Concrete Paving)
B.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
2.6
VAPOR RETARDERS A.
Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressuresensitive joint tape. 1.
Nonwoven, polyester-reinforced, polyethylene coated sheet; 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick.
2.
Three-ply, nylon- or polyester-cord-reinforced, laminated, high-density polyethylene sheet; 7.8 mils (0.18 mm) thick
3.
Available Products: a. b.
B.
2.7
Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Plus. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type-65.
Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch (9.5mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve, and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates. CURING MATERIALS
A.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: sheet.
B.
Water: Potable.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
03 3000 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
C.
Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.
D.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.
Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: a. b. c. d. e.
2.8
Spray-cure & Seal Plus: Chem Masters. UV Super Seal; Lambert Corporation. Lumiseal Plus; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. CS-309/30; W. R. Meadows, Inc. Seal N Kure 30; Metalcrete Industries.
RELATED MATERIALS A.
Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
B.
Bonding Agent: butadiene.
2.9
ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
CONCRETE MIXTURES A.
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data basis, or both as follows: 1.
Proportional normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.
B.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
C.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.
D.
Use high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
Footings, Foundation Walls and Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.52. Exterior Concrete Only: Maximum water cement ratio of 0.48 for air-entrained concrete (refer to Sitework Section – Cement Concrete Pavement). Do not entrain air in mixes for interior slab-on-grade and other concrete not exposed to weather. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 3000 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.10 A. 2.11 A.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." CONCRETE MIXING Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information as follows: 1.
Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
FORMWORK A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 318 and ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
3.2
EMBEDDED ITEMS A.
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. 2.
3. 3.3
Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations and positions required. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
VAPOR RETARDERS A.
Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.
B.
Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
Install Vapor Retarder directly below floor slab where soil conditions and/or moisture-sensitive floor coverings require it.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 3000 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
STEEL REINFORCEMENT A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.
C.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
D.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E.
Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.
3.5
JOINTS A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1.
2.
3.
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. Form keyed joints from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. a.
4. 5. C.
Locate joints at thirty feet on center unless noted otherwise on drawings.
Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1.
Located joints at 15 feet on center unless noted otherwise on drawings.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 3000 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
3.
D.
2.
3.
3.6
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1.
E.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.
Doweled Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.
C.
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
D.
Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceeding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. 1. 2.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete according to ACI 301. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 3000 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 E.
2. 3. 4. 5.
2. 3.
When air temperature has fallen to, or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1.
2. 3.
3.7
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1.
G.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1.
F.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A.
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1.
3.8
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 3000 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
Apply float finish to surfaces indicated to receive trowel finish and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1.
2.
3.9
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Floors with improved flatness/levelness requirements (Thin-set flooring, resilient floor covering): Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A.
3.10
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hotweather protection during curing.
B.
Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
C.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1.
Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 3000 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.11
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A.
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B.
Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.
C.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1.
2.
3.
Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance.
D.
Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
E.
Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.
F.
Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.
3.12
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing and Inspecting: engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests and inspections and to submit reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article.
C.
Inspections: 1. 2. 3.
Steel reinforcement placement. Steel reinforcement welding. Headed bolts and studs.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 3000 - 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 4. 5. 6. 7. D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Verification of use of required design mixture. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs.
Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1.
Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. b.
6.
b.
8.
9.
Cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. Cast and field cure set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a.
7.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 3000 - 12
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
10.
11.
12. 13.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply with the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 03 3000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 3000 - 13
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 04 2000 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
1.3
Concrete masonry units (CMUs). Mortar and grout. Reinforcing steel. Masonry joint reinforcement. Ties and anchors. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry, furnished under Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications." 2. Hollow metal frames in Unit Masonry openings, furnished under Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.” DEFINITIONS
A. 1.4
Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days.
B.
Determine net-area compressive strength (f'm) of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, or determine net-area compressive strength (f’m) of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314. 1.
For Concrete Unit Masonry: As indicated.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified.
B.
Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. 2.
Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
C.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
D.
Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following: 1.
Masonry units. a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4. 5. E.
Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. For bricks, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. For exposed brick, include material test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. For surface-coated brick, include material test report for durability of surface appearance after 50-cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.
Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. Reinforcing bars. Joint reinforcement. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. 2.
Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.
F.
Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, or determined by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314.
G.
Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
B.
Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required.
C.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
D.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.
D.
Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.
E.
Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.
B.
Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads and concentrated loads until after building masonry walls or columns are fully capable of sustaining the required loads.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
2. 3. 4.
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. At the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt from the scaffold boards near the wall onto completed masonry.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1.
E.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. 1.
When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F or 80 deg F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A.
2.2
Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)
A.
Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. 2.
Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated or unless indicated to be concealed by other finishes.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1. Weight Classification: Lightweight, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight, below grade. 3. Provide Type II, non-moisture controlled units. 4. Unit sizes to be as indicated in construction documents, manufactured to referenced industry standard dimensions, 3/8 inches less than nominal dimensions, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer’s standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. a.
2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Exposed Faces: Where units are to be left exposed, provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect’s sample.
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
B.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.
D.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
E.
Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
F.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1.
For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.
G.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
H.
Water: Potable.
2.4
REINFORCEMENT A.
Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).
B.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951 and as follows. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 7. C.
2.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods, and cross-rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. TIES AND ANCHORS
A.
Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick by 24 inches (600 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (50 mm) or with cross pins, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
2.6
Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A.
2.7
Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated. MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A.
Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
B.
Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
2.8
MASONRY CLEANERS A.
Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of ½-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and ½-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water.
B.
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.9
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A.
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.
B.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 BIA Technical Notes 8A, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. 2. 3.
For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type S.
4. C.
Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1.
2.
Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. 2.
Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
B.
Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C.
Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
D.
Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
E.
Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.
F.
Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.
G.
Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.
H.
Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
3.3
LAYING MASONRY WALLS A.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. 1.
Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in one-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
B.
Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
C.
Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.
3.4
Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A.
Lay hollow brick and concrete masonry units as follows:
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3. 4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted.
B.
Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.
C.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
D.
3.5
Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1.
Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
B.
Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D.
Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
E.
Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
3.6
CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A.
General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry and built-in related items as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.
B.
Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: 1.
2.
Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. C.
Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant.
Form open joint full depth of masonry wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm) for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm). 1.
3.7
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Form expansion joints in concrete masonry veneer or brick made from clay or shale as follows: 1.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer, and attached to structure behind masonry veneer.
LINTELS A.
Install steel lintels where indicated.
B.
Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for brick-size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. 1.
C. 3.8
Provide prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.
Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A.
Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
B.
Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1.
3.9
Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports: 1.
If undertaken, payment for these services will be made from Testing and Inspecting Allowance.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B.
Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof.
C.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content.
D.
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019.
E.
Prism Test: For each type of wall construction indicated, prepare one (1) set of prisms per ASTM C 1314 at 28 days.
3.10
REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B.
Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.
C.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. 2.
3.
4. 5. 6. 7.
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. Using job-mixed detergent solution. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.11 A.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL Recycling: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
END OF SECTION 04 2000
UNIT MASONRY
04 2000 - 12
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 05 1200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1.3
Structural steel. Grout.
Division 01 Section “Project Management and Coordination” for preinstallation conference procedures and administrative requirements. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications not defined as structural steel. Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and priming requirements. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems" for structural steel.
DEFINITIONS A.
Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads.
B.
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Structural steel designated as architecturally exposed structural steel in the Contract Documents.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand ASD-service loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. 2.
Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated. Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified professional engineer to prepare structural analysis data for structural-steel connections.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05 1200 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B. 1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Construction: Type 2, simple framing. SUBMITTALS
A. 1.6
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category Cbd.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
D.
Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.7
AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Supplement No. 2." AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design.” AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections." RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. 2.
1.8
Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.
COORDINATION A.
Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05 1200 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.
B.
W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M
C.
Channels, Angles-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M
D.
Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M
E.
Corrosion-Resisting Structural Steel: ASTM A 588/A 588M, Grade 50 (345).
F.
Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade [B] [C], structural tubing.
G.
Corrosion-Resisting Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 847, structural tubing.
H.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.
I.
Medium-Strength Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 65-35 (Grade 450-240), carbon steel.
J.
High-Strength Steel Castings: ASTM A 148/A 148M,Grade 80-50 (Grade 550-345), carbon or alloy steel.
K.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.2
BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers. 1.
B.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts[ or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends]; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers, plain. 1.
C.
Finish: Plain or Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C
Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490 (ASTM F 959M,) Type 10.9, compressible-washer type, plain.
Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05 1200 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
D.
Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1030, cold-finished carbon steel.
E.
Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold-finished carbon steel.
2.3
PRIMER A.
Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer.
B.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20
2.4
GROUT A.
2.5
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. FABRICATION
A.
Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design” 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Camber structural-steel members where indicated. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/ A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shoppriming operations.
Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1.
Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.
C.
Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
D.
Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
E.
Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. 2. 3.
Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05 1200 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SHOP CONNECTIONS A.
High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
B.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. 2.
3.
Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. a. b.
2.7
Grind butt welds flush. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds.
SHOP PRIMING A.
Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). Surfaces to be field welded. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Galvanized surfaces.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C.
Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. 2.
2.8
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
GALVANIZING A.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/ A 123M.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05 1200 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.
2.9
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.
Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1.
Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.
C.
Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
D.
Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-inplace concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05 1200 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
ERECTION A.
Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
B.
Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. 2. 3.
4.
Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steelwithin AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
D.
Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. 2.
Level and plumb individual members of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service.
E.
Splice members only where indicated.
F.
Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.
G.
Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
H.
Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
I.
Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4
FIELD CONNECTIONS A.
High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05 1200 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1.
3.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds.
B.
Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.
3.6
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A.
Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories[, bearing plates,] and abutting structural steel. 1. 2.
C.
Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.
Touchup Painting: Sections.
Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 09 painting
END OF SECTION 05 1200
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05 1200 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 05 2100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2.
B.
1.3
K-series steel joists. Joist accessories.
Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry. 2. Division 04 Section “Metal Fabrications” for furnishing steel bearing plates. DEFINITIONS
A.
SJI "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."
B.
Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's "Specifications."
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
B.
Design special joists to withstand design loads with live load deflections no greater than the following: 1. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span.
1.5
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, joist accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
05 2100 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation.
C.
Welding certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D.
Manufacturer Certificates: requirements.
E.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
F.
Field quality-control test and inspection reports.
1.6
Signed by manufacturers certifying that joists comply with
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables of SJI "Specifications." 1.
Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements.
B.
SJI Specifications: Comply with standard specifications in SJI's "Specifications" that are applicable to types of joists indicated.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel"; and AWS D1.3 “Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel.”
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."
B.
Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for web and steel-angle chord members.
B.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.2
PRIMERS A.
Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
05 2100 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS A.
Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord.
B.
Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members.
C.
Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
D.
Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.
E.
Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top-chord extensions where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."
F.
Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."
G.
Do not camber joists.
H.
Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications."
I.
Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48).
2.4
JOIST ACCESSORIES A.
Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.
B.
Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications."
C.
Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist installation.
2.5
CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING A.
Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.
B.
Apply 1 coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil (0.025 mm) thick.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
05 2100 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing with installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION A.
Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.
B.
Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1. 2. 3.
Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads have been applied.
C.
Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
D.
Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts, where indicated and where required to comply with SJI erection requirements and occupational safety requirements.
E.
Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports.
B.
Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C.
In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following procedures, as applicable: 1. 2.
Radiographic Testing: ASTM E 94. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
05 2100 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. 4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
D.
Bolted connections will be visually inspected.
E.
High-strength, field-bolted connections will be tested and verified according to procedures in RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts."
F.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in compliance with specified requirements.
G.
Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.
3.4
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A.
Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting structural steel, and accessories. 1. 2.
B.
Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, which ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05 2100
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
05 2100 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 05 3100 - STEEL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1.
B.
1.3
Roof deck.
Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors. 2. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes. 3. Division 09 painting Sections for repair painting of primed deck. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.
C.
Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer.
D.
Welding certificates.
E.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements: 1.
F. 1.4
Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
STEEL DECKING
05 3100 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed steel deck similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code – Steel,” and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
D.
AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
B.
Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
1.6
Protect with a
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate installation of sound-absorbing insulation strips in topside ribs of acoustical deck with roofing installation specified in Division 07 Section "EPDM Roofing” to ensure protection of insulation strips against damage from effects of weather and other causes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
Steel Deck: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
STEEL DECKING
Canam Steel Corp.;The Canam Manac Group. Epic Metals Corporation. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. Roof Deck, Inc. United Steel Deck, Inc. Verco Manufacturing Co. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.
05 3100 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
ROOF DECK A.
Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the following: 1.
2. 3. 2.3
Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230) minimum, shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. a. Color: Manufacturer's standard Deck Profile: As indicated Profile Depth: As indicated
ACCESSORIES A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.
B.
Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C.
Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter.
D.
Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
E.
Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
F.
Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile indicated, or if not indicated, as recommended by SDI Publication No. 30 for overhang and slab depth.
G.
Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, [0.0598 inch (1.52 mm)] [0.0747 inch (1.90 mm)] thick, with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter.
I.
Flat Sump Plate: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.
J.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
K.
Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.
STEEL DECKING
05 3100 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
3.2
Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B.
Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations.
C.
Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D.
Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.
E.
Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
F.
Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.
G.
Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.
H.
Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
3.3
ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION A.
Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long, and as follows: 1. 2.
3. B.
Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm) nominal. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds 12 inches (305 mm) apart in the field of roof and 6 inches (150 mm) apart in roof corners and perimeter, based on roof-area definitions in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28, unless otherwise indicated. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.
Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 36 inches (910 mm), and as follows:
STEEL DECKING
05 3100 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. C.
3.4
Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.
End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum
Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 1.
E.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows: 1.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels, unless otherwise indicated.
Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure. Use U.L. rated closures and closure-methods at fire-rated partitions. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C.
Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D.
Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
E.
Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.
3.5
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on top surface of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. 1.
C.
Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of deck exposed to view.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05 3100 STEEL DECKING
05 3100 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 05 4000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. Ceiling joist framing.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board” for gypsum board applications on metal-studframed assemblies.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1.
Design Loads: As indicated.
2.
Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span.
B.
Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C).
C.
Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1. 2. 3.
Headers: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design." Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for strength contribution of sheathing materials. Roof Trusses: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing Truss Design."
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 4000 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. 1.
For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
E.
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests for current products.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer.
B.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
D.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1. 2.
1.6
Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design." Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 4000 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.2
Dale/Incor. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries. United Metal Products, Inc.
MATERIALS A.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. 2.
2.3
Grade: As required by structural performance. Coating: AZ50 (AZ150), or GF30 (ZGF90).
CEILING JOIST FRAMING A.
Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2.
2.4
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
FRAMING ACCESSORIES A.
Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members, unless otherwise required.
B.
Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Supplementary framing. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. Web stiffeners. Anchor clips. End clips. Foundation clips. Gusset plates.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 4000 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 8. 9. 10. 11. 2.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. Joist hangers and end closures. Hole reinforcing plates. Backer plates.
ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A.
Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
B.
Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
C.
Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
D.
Mechanical Fasteners: steel drill screws. 1.
E. 2.6
ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping
Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035 or ASTM A 780.
B.
Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.
C.
Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
2.7
FABRICATION A.
Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. 2. 3.
Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a.
Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 4000 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 b. 4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.
Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
B.
Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.
C.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1.
2. D.
Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-ofsquare tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Marking and Identification: Individual members shall be marked as follows: 1. 2. 3.
Rollformer’s identification. Minimum steel thickness. Minimum yield strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION A.
Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.
B.
Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 4000 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C.
Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1.
D.
Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer’s written recommendations and requirements in this Section. 1. 2.
Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. b.
Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration of joined members by not less than three (3) exposed screw heads.
E.
Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.
F.
Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.
G.
Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.
H.
Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.
I.
Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.
J.
Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1.
Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 4000 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
JOIST INSTALLATION A.
Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated.
B.
Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track. 1. 2.
C.
Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers, steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections.
Space joists not more than 2 inches (51 mm) from abutting walls, and as follows: 1.
Joist Spacing: As indicated.
D.
Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or another combination of connected joists if indicated.
E.
Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as indicated. 1.
F.
Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.
Install bridging at each end of joists at intervals indicated. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as follows: 1.
Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs.
G.
Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.
H.
Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly.
3.5
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, which ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05 4000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 4000 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 3. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 4. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections. 5. Metal bollards.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.3
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing." Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings." Division 06 Section “Rough Carpentry” for metal framing anchors.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. Prefabricated building columns. Metal nosings and treads. Paint products. Grout.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. 2.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C. 1.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Welding certificates. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2.
C.
1.5
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes in involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional Engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.6
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicated measurements on Shop Drawings. COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS
2.2
METALS, GENERAL A.
2.3
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, exposed pitting or blemishes. FERROUS METALS
A.
W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M or ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345).
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Steel Plates, Channels, M and S-Shapes, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C.
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D.
Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316L.
E.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
F.
Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
G.
Steel Bars for Gratings: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
H.
Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510.
I.
Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 569/A569M; or structural quality, complying with ASTM A 570/A 570M, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads.
J.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
K.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated.
L.
Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads.
2.4
FASTENERS A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B.
Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Grade A, with hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
C.
Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
D.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1.
Provide hot-dip mechanically deposited, zinc coating anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
E.
Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
F.
Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
G.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
H.
Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.
I.
Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).
J.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).
K.
Cast-In-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1.
L.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM D 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. 2.
M. 2.5
Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.
Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy [Group 1 (A1)] [Group 2 (A4)] stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).
Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-whip type, class and style as needed. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
B.
Shop Primers for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modifiedalkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664, selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. 1.
Use primer with VOC content of 420g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
D.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 E.
2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
D.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
F.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G.
Fabricate all seams, joints, and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H.
Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of handrail and railing members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources.
I.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
J.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1.
Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.7
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A.
General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.
B.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hanger, and similar items.
C.
Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
2.8
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A.
Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
B.
Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 8 inches (200 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Galvanize loose steel lintels in exterior walls.
2.9
LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A.
2.10 A.
2.11
Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two (2) integrally welded steel strap anchors fro embedding in concrete. MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.
B.
Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
C.
Provide with integrally welded strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 6 inches from each end, 6 inches from corners, and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
2.12
PIPE BOLLARDS
A.
Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe.
B.
Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 1/4-inch (6.4mm) wall-thickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) less than ID of bollards. Match drill sleeve and bollard for 1/2 inch (12 mm) steel machine bolt.
2.13
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.14 A.
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. 2.
B.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. 2.
C.
ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
Exterior (SSPC Zone 1B) SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.
E.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
3.2
INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A.
General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings, if any.
B.
Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.
C.
Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. 1.
Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. 1.
3.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled.
INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A.
Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B.
Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. 2.
3.4
Use nonshrink metallic nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS A.
Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align sleeves in holes 3 inches (75 mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace sleeves in position until concrete has cured.
B.
Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 3/4-inch (19-mm) machine bolts and nuts. After tightening nuts, drill holes in bolts for inserting padlocks. Owner will furnish padlocks.
C.
Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 1.
3.5
Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 1.
B.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
END OF SECTION 05 5000
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 5000 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 05 5213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes the following: 1.
1.3
Steel pipe and tube handrails and railings.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
General Minimum Standards: 1. 2.
B.
1.4
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. Pipe Railing Systems Manual. 4th edition Chicago: NAAMM, 2001, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with local Building Code requirements.
Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings capable of withstanding structural loads required by ASCE 7 without exceeding allowable design working stresses of materials for handrails, railings, anchors, and connections. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following: 1. 2.
B.
Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of handrails and railings. Include plans, elevations, sections, components details, and attachments to other work. 1.
For installed handrails and railing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified Professional Engineer responsible for their preparation.
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Qualification Data: For professional Engineer.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05 5213 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2.
C.
1.6
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
Profession Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of handrails and railings that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Field Measurements: Verify handrail and railing dimensions, actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
B.
Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
METALS, GENERAL A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, free from pitting, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations and other imperfections or blemishes.
B.
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
2.2
STEEL AND IRON A.
Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513 (mandrel drawn).
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05 5213 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
2.3
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1. 2.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Black finish, unless otherwise indicated. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide the following: 1. Steel Handrails, Railings and fittings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc fasteners.
B.
Fasteners for Anchoring Handrails Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C.
Anchors: Provide cast-in-place or chemical anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 1.
Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler and electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.
B.
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664, selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
C.
Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer formulated for priming zinccoated steel and for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and complying with SSPC-Paint.
D.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
E.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
F.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05 5213 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 G.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. 1.
2.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Water-Resistant Product: Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
FABRICATION A.
General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.
B.
Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
D.
Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E.
Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G.
Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Fabricate all seams, joints and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
I.
Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings for connecting members by welding. Cope components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections continuously, including at fittings. Comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
J.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
Form changes in direction as follows: 1.
By bending.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05 5213 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
K.
Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration require; maintain cylindrical cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.
L.
Close exposed ends of railing members with fillers made from steel.
M.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.
N.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
O.
Fillers: At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant fillers, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size filler to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
P.
Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by handrails and railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
Q.
For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure.
2.6
FINISHES, GENERAL A.
2.7
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A.
Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filling off smooth.
B.
For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.
C.
For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry.
D.
Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic-phosphate process.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05 5213 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
E.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed railings: 1. Interior Railings (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 7/NACE NO. 4, “Brush-off Blast Cleaning.”
F.
Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of handrails and railing components unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces. 2. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing handrails and railings. Set handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1.
2. 3.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m).
C.
Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated, but not less than that required by structural loads.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrails and railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.2
RAILING CONNECTIONS A.
3.3
Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting handrail and railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. ANCHORING POSTS
A.
Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05 5213 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B.
Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring material.
C.
Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring materials; and with 1/8-inch (3-mm) buildup, sloped away from post.
D.
Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. 2.
3.4
For stainless-steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting surfaces. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
ANCHORING RAILING ENDS A.
Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction with post-installed anchors and bolts.
B.
Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends.
3.5
ANCHORING RAILING ENDS A.
Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2 inch (38mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
B.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
C.
Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.
3.6
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. For steel-framed gypsum board or plaster partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. Use fire-retardant treated wood in fire-rated partitions.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water.
B.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05 5213 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
3.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. PROTECTION
A.
Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period so no evidence remains of correction approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
END OF SECTION 05 5213
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05 5213 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
1.3
Framing with dimension lumber. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. Wood blocking and nailers.
Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section “Interior Architectural Woodwork” for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. DEFINITIONS
A.
Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
C.
Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.
D.
Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) or greater in least dimension.
E.
Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1.
2.
1.5
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.6
Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.
Laminated-Veneer Lumber: a. b. c.
2.
Metal Framing Anchors: a. b. c.
2.2
Boise Cascade Corporation Georgia-Pacific Corporation Trus Joist MacMillan
Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. United Steel Products Company, Inc.
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. 2.
3. 4.
B.
Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1.
2.3
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content (KD19) for exterior lumber and 15 percent maximum moisture content (KD15) for interior lumber at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1.
D.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. 2. 3.
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 4. 5. 2.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A.
General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). 1.
2. 3.
Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated wood after exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664, for lumber and ASTM D 5516, for plywood. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.
B.
Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C.
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.
D.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
E.
Application: Treat all rough carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.
2.5
DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A.
General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent.
C.
Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 3. Douglas fir-south; WWPA. 4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA. 6. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Construction or No. 2
grade
06 1000 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A.
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Blocking. Nailers. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. Cants. Furring. Grounds.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at exterior locations of any of the following species. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Hem-fir (north); NLGA. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA.
C.
For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
D.
For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
E.
For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.7
FASTENERS A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1.
Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.
B.
Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D.
Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E.
Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.
F.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
G.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
H.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).
2.8
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A.
General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and size indicated, and as follows:
B.
Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project.
C.
Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
D.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. 1.
steel
sheet
complying
with
Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Metal Framing Anchors: instructions.
E.
Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
G.
Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
H.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. 2.
I.
Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written
Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. 2.
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
J.
Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. Predrill as required.
K.
For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.
3.2
WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A.
Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B.
Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
C.
Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
D.
Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
END OF SECTION 06 1000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 1000 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 06 4023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. Wood cabinets. 2. Plastic-laminate countertops.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1.
2. 1.3
Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. Division 09 Section "Painting” for field finishing of interior architectural woodwork.
DEFINITIONS A.
Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
B.
Rough carriages for stairs are a part of interior architectural woodwork. Platform framing, headers, partition framing, and other rough framing associated with stairwork are specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. 2. 3.
Show details full size. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for all items to be installed in architectural woodwork.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 4023 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indication. 1. Plastic laminates.
D.
Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer of woodwork certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
E.
Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.
F.
Qualification Data: For installer and fabricator: For firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1.
Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
D.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with WI's "Manual of Millwork" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
E.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 4023 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
1.7
Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. 2.
1.8
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Red oak, plain sawn or sliced
C.
Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1.
2.
Recycled Content of Medium-Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: Provide products with an average recycled content so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than percent. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 4023 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. D.
2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1 Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1
Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear) Quality-Q3, 6 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated. FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified. 1. 2.
3.
B.
Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 1.
2.
3.
2.3
Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
For panels 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: density, 45-lb/cu. ft. (720-kg/cu. m) modulus of rupture, 1600 psi (11 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi (2070 MPa); internal bond, 80 psi (550 kPa); and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf (1100 and 1000 N), respectively. For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches (20 to 32 mm) thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: density, 44-lb/cu. ft. (705kg/cu. m), modulus of rupture, 1300 psi (9 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi (1720 MPa); linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 175 lbf (1100 and 780 N), respectively. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Duraflake FR" by Weyerhaeuser.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)."
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 4023 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): opening.
C.
Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter.
D.
Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.
E.
Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: B04112.
F.
Aluminum Slides for Sliding Glass Doors: BHMA A156.9, B07063.
G.
Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
H.
Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
I.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1.
J.
2.4
BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of
BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets,
black molded-plastic grommets and
Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
C.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
D.
Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
E.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement. 1.
2.5
Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
FABRICATION, GENERAL A.
Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 4023 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.
C.
Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.
D.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. indicated for the following: 1. 2.
E.
2.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.
Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1.
2.6
Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick or Less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1.
F.
Ease edges to radius
Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
SHOP FINISHING A.
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500 unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
C.
General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
D.
General: The entire finish of interior Architectural woodwork is specified in this Section, regardless of whether shop applied or applied after installation. The extend to which the final finish is applied at fabrication shop is Contractor’s option, except shop apply at least the prime coat before delivery.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 4023 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 E.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1.
Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative panels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
B.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
Grade: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B.
Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
D.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
E.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork.
F.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
G.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 4023 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
2. 3. 4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
H.
Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats were applied in shop.
I.
Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished.
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06 4023
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 4023 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 07 2100 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed building insulation. 2. Sound attenuation insulation.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing for insulation specified as part of roofing construction. 2. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board" for installation in metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section. 3. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation." 4. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
1.3
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
BUILDING INSULATION
07 2100 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3. 1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B.
Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. 2. 3.
Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS
2.2
GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A.
Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
CertainTeed Corporation. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. Johns Manville. Knauf Fiber Glass. Owens Corning.
B.
Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
C.
Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated: 1. 2.
3-1/2 inches (89 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 11 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (1.9 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C) 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (3.3 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C).
BUILDING INSULATION
07 2100 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A.
Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation manufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings.
B.
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
C.
Asphalt Coating for Cellular-Glass Block Insulation: Cutback asphalt or asphalt emulsion of type recommended by manufacturer of cellular-glass block insulation.
D.
Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves.
E.
Caulking Compound: Material approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for insulation for sealing joint between foil backing of safing insulation and edge of concrete floor slab against penetration of smoke.
F.
Safing Clips: Galvanized steel safing clips approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for holding safing insulation in place.
2.4
INSULATION FASTENERS A.
Acoustical Liner Insulation Anchors: Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements: 1.
Products: a. b. c.
2. 3. B.
AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners. Gemco; Spindle Type.
Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements: 1.
Products: a.
2.
Gemco; 90-Degree Insulation Hangers.
Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch- (0.762-mm-) thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet with each leg 2 inches (50 mm) square.
BUILDING INSULATION
07 2100 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square or in diameter. 1.
Products: a. b. c. d. e.
2.
AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150. AGM Industries, Inc.; SC150. Gemco; Dome-Cap. Gemco; R-150. Gemco; S-150.
Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap with black finish and in the following locations: a. b. c. d.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Crawlspaces. Ceiling plenums. Attic spaces. Where indicated.
Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. 1.
Products: a. b. c.
AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type S Adhesive. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. 1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION A.
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.
BUILDING INSULATION
07 2100 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.
C.
Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D.
Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.
E.
For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A.
Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B.
Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C.
Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm-in-winter side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
D.
Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
Install acoustical liner insulation on substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows: 1.
2.
3.
Fasten insulation anchors to substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer’s written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles.
BUILDING INSULATION
07 2100 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PROTECTION A.
Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 07 2100
BUILDING INSULATION
07 2100 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 07 5323 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING-ADHERED PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.
B.
1.3
Adhered EPDM membrane roofing system. Roof insulation. Walkways.
Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for roof penetration flashings, flashings, and counterflashings. 3. Division 07 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” for field-formed fasciae, copings, flashings, and other roof specialties not part of roof assemblies. DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.
B.
Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C.
Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
D.
FM Approvals Listing: Provide membrane roofing, base flashings, and component materials that comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as part of a
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
07 5323 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
membrane roofing system, and that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals' markings. 1. 2. 1.5
Fire/Windstorm Classification: Peak gust wind speed exceeding 72 mph rating. Hail Resistance: MH.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For roofing system. attachments to other work. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
Base flashings and membrane terminations. Tapered insulation, including slopes. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of membrane roofing and fastening spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened membrane roofing. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
C.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
D.
Manufacturer Certificate: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that membrane roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 1.
Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements.
E.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system.
F.
Maintenance Data: For membrane roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
G.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty. An experienced installer who has specialized in stalling roofing similar to that required for this Project.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation fasteners for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
07 5323 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B.
Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1.
Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.
C.
Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D.
Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
1.9
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
2. B.
Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, perimeter flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, roofing accessories, roof pavers, and other components of membrane roofing system. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing system such as membrane roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: 1.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
07 5323 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING A.
EPDM: ASTM D 4637, Type I, non-reinforced, uniform, flexible EPDM sheet. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c.
2. 3. 2.2
Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. Firestone Building Products. GenFlex Roofing Systems.
Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal. Exposed Face Color: Black
AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS A.
General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 1.
Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Sheet Flashing: application.
60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to
C.
Protection Sheet: Epichlorohydrin or neoprene non-reinforced flexible sheet, 55- to 60-mil(1.4- to 1.5-mm-) thick, recommended by EPDM manufacturer for resistance to hydrocarbons, non-aromatic solvents, grease, and oil.
D.
Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard
E.
Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- (75mm-) wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film.
F.
Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, single-component sealant
G.
Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant.
H.
Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors.
I.
Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick (25 mm wide by 1.3 mm thick), prepunched.
J.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
07 5323 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 K.
2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM securement strips, Tjoint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. ROOF INSULATION
A.
General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by EPDM membrane roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Approvals-approved roof insulation.
B.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class I, Grade 3, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. 1.
Facer Type: Provide type compatible with adhered membrane system for adhering of membrane.
C.
Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to an installed slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48) unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.4
INSULATION ACCESSORIES A.
General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing.
B.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
C.
Full-Spread Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended sprayapplied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer.
2.5
WALKWAYS A.
Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
07 5323 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. B. 3.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.
B.
Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.
C.
Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.3
INSULATION INSTALLATION A.
Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B.
Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
C.
Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
D.
Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches (50 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. 1.
Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers, install noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable, and install composite board insulation for top layer.
E.
Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.
F.
Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with insulation. 1.
Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
07 5323 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION A.
Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before installing.
B.
Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
C.
Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area of membrane roofing.
D.
In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeters.
E.
Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of membrane roofing terminations.
F.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.
G.
Spread sealant or mastic bed material approved by roofing manufacturer over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.
H.
Install membrane roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing membrane roofing to maintain weather-tightness of transition
3.5
BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A.
Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C.
Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.
D.
Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations.
E.
Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
07 5323 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
WALKWAY INSTALLATION A.
3.7
Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion.
B.
Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
C.
Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.8
PROTECTING AND CLEANING A.
Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.
B.
Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
C.
Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 07 5323
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
07 5323 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 07 6200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1.
Manufactured Products: a. b.
2.
Formed Products: a. b. c. d. e. f.
B.
Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. Roof-edge gravel stops, fasciae and trim. Metal flashings. Metal copings.
Related Sections: 1. 2.
1.3
Manufactured through-wall flashing and counterflashing. Manufactured reglets and counterflashing.
Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry " for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. Division 07 Section “EPDM Roofing” for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with membrane roofing.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B.
Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
1.5
Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable. Details of special conditions. Details of connections to adjoining work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.
C.
Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes. Comply with all necessary warranty requirements relating to adjacent and interfaced materials including, but not limited to, wall and roof assemblies.
D.
Copper Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B.
Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
WARRANTY A.
Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1.
Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. b. c.
2.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SHEET METALS A.
General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, G 90 (ASTM A 526M, Z 275), commercial quality, or ASTM A 527, G 90 (ASTM A 527M, Z 275), lock-forming quality, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with 0.20 percent copper, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; not less than 0.0396 inch (1.0 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. 2. 3.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: designation; structural quality. Surface: Smooth, flat Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a.
4. 5.
2.2
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated. B.
Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal. 1.
General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. b. c.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C.
Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.
Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze or Series 300 stainless steel. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. Fasteners for Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.
Solder: 1. 2. 3. 4.
For Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. For Zinc-Tin Alloy-CoatedCopper: ASTM B 32, 100 percent tin. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead. Use with rosin flux.
D.
Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof weatherresistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal.
E.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
F.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants.”
G.
Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.
H.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
I.
Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A.
Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c.
2. 3.
4. 5.
Material: Coil-coated galvanized steel, 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint. Accessories: a.
b. 6. 2.4
Fry Reglet Corporation. Hickman, W. P. Company. Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.
Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.
Finish: With manufacturer's standard color coating.
FABRICATION, GENERAL A.
General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1.
2. 3.
4.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.
B.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
C.
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
D.
Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
E.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
F.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
G.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
H.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
I.
Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
J.
Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.5
LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A.
Roof-Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, joint cover plates. 1. 2.
Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch- (300-mm-) wide, concealed backup plate. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.
B.
Roof, Roof to Wall Transition and Roof to Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) Transition Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel: 0.034 inch (0.86 mm) thick.
C.
Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.
D.
Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.
E.
Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.
F.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A.
Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches (150 mm) beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. 2. 3.
2.7
Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick) Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.
MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A.
Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick. 2. Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. Install sealant tape where indicated. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 7.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet.
C.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.
D.
Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws metal decking not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
E.
Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. 1.
2.
Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealanttype joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C). Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
F.
Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 2. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. 3. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper.
G.
Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength.
3.3
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A.
General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch (400mm) centers, unless a closer spacing is required to meet Project’s Wind Zone requirements.
C.
Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. 1.
2.
Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch (400-mm) centers, unless a closer spacing is required to meet Project’s Wind Zone requirements. Anchor interior leg of coping with screw fasteners and washers at 20-inch (500-mm) centers, unless a closer spacing is required to meet Project’s Wind Zone requirements.
D.
Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
E.
Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant, or interlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant or, anchor and washer at 36-inch (900-mm) centers.
F.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.
3.4
WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A.
General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
B.
Through-Wall Flashing: Section "Unit Masonry.”
C.
Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry."
3.5
Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Division 04
MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A.
Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans independent from structure above as indicated on Drawings. Pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drainage system.
B.
Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
ERECTION TOLERANCES A.
3.7
Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
B.
Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C.
Clean off excess sealants.
D.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
E.
Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07 6200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 6200 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 07 7200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
1.3
Roof curbs. Equipment supports. Roof hatches.
Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and stairs for access to roof hatches. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing, wood cants, and wood nailers. Division 07 low-slope roofing Sections for roofing accessories. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated metal flashing and counterflashing, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories. Division 23 Section “Mechanical Equipment supports and curbs” for power roofmounted equipment.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard product warranty.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07 7200 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
1.6
Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent damage. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles. METAL MATERIALS
A.
Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by hot-dip process and prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. 2.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coated. Exposed Finishes: High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use, mill finished.
C.
Stainless-Steel Shapes or Sheet: Type 316, No. 2D finish.
D.
Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, baked-enamel finished.
F.
Galvanized Steel Tube: ASTM A 123/A 123M.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304 or
ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized to comply with
07 7200 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 G. 2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Insulation: Manufacturer’s standard rigid or semirigid glass-fiber board of thickness indicated.
B.
Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick. 1.
Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft..
C.
Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners.
D.
Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
E.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
2.4
ROOF HATCHES A.
Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated double-wall curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous weathertight perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware. 1.
Manufacturers: a. b. c.
2. 3.
Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 30 by 36 inches. Curb and Lid Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick. a.
4. 5. 6. 7.
Bilco Company (The). Dur-Red Products. Milcor Inc.; a Gibraltar Company.
Finish: Prime painted.
Interior Lid Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as metal curb. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07 7200 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 8. 9.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate hatch curbs with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. Hardware: Galvanized steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. 2. 3.
3.2
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION A.
General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.
B.
Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
C.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
E.
Roof Hatch Installation: 1.
F.
Roof Walkway Installation: 1.
G.
Check roof hatch for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware.
Verify location of points of access to roof-mounted equipment via use of roof walkways.
Preformed Flashing Installation: 1.
Secure to roof membrane according to vent and stack flashing manufacturer's written instructions.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07 7200 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 H. 3.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Seal joints with sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories. TOUCH UP
A.
Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting in accordance with Division 09 painting Sections.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.4
CLEANING A.
Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 07 7200
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07 7200 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.3
Silicone joint sealants. Urethane joint sealants. Polysulfide joint sealants. Latex joint sealants. Solvent-release-curing joint sealants. Preformed joint sealants. Acoustical joint sealants.
Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints. Division 09 Section "Tiling" for sealing tile joints. Division 09 Section “Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters with acoustical sealant.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.4
Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. Joint-sealant formulation. Joint-sealant color.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.
C.
Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.
D.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
E.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations: manufacturer.
1.6
Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.7
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C). When joint substrates are wet. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.
WARRANTY A.
Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1.
B.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1.
C.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
2. 3. 4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B.
VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. 2. 3.
C.
Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1.
Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
E.
Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
F.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Match adjacent finish color.
2.2
SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A.
Multicomponent, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.
JOINT SEALANTS
ASTM C 920, Type M,
07 9200 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 4TS.
Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1.
ASTM C 920,
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2.3
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.
B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
BASF Building Systems; Omniplus. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 100 WF. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.
URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A.
Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: Grade NS, Class 50, for Use T. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c.
2.4
ASTM C 920, Type M,
Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-270. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240 FC. .
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A.
Latex Joint Sealant: Grade NF. 1.
Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
JOINT SEALANTS
BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex 600. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
07 9200 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
JOINT SEALANT BACKING A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
C.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
2.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. b. c. d.
3. 4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Concrete. Masonry. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. Exterior insulation and finish systems.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. b. c. d.
Metal. Glass. Porcelain enamel. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A.
General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. 2. 3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
D.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.
E.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. 2. 3.
F.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a.
G.
Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements: 1. 2.
3.
4.
Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm). Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch (6 mm) inside masking tape. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife.
H.
Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
I.
Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
perimeters and through penetrations. written recommendations. 3.4
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1.
Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. a.
2.
3.5
For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.
CLEANING A.
3.6
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. PROTECTION
A.
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS
07 9200 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.3
Standard hollow metal doors and frames. Fire-rated frame and door assemblies.
Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. Division 08 Section “Glazing” for glass in steel doors and sidelights.
DEFINITIONS A.
Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
B.
Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, provide product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Include sound ratings, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. 2. 3.
Elevations of each door design. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
4.
Locations of and type reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 1113 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Details of each different wall opening condition. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. Details of accessories. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
Other Action Submittals: 1.
Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. a.
Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
D.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.
E.
Warranty: Provide Warranty documents specified herein.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252, UBC Standard 7-2, UL 10B, or UL 10C, whichever is acceptable and required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1.
Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.
B.
Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.
C.
Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. If cardboard wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. 1.
Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 1113 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
2.2
Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. Mesker Door Inc. Pioneer Industries, Inc. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. Windsor Republic Doors. Amweld Building Products
MATERIALS A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.
D.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1.
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
E.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.
G.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
H.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 1113 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 I.
2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A.
General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. 2.
Design: Flush panel. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core. a. b.
Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 12.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 1)
3. 4. 5. B.
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1.
C.
Locations: Exterior doors and interior doors where indicated.
Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).
Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1.
Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).
D.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.
E.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
2.4
STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A.
General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 1113 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
2.5
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.
Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. 1. 2. 3. 4.
D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. 2. 3.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate knocked-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. FRAME ANCHORS
A.
Jamb Anchors: 1.
2. 3. 4.
B.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 1.
2.6
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inchdiameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
HOLLOW METAL PANELS A.
2.7
Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for adjoining hollow metal work. STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A.
Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 1113 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
FABRICATION A.
Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B.
Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
C.
Hollow Metal Doors: 1. 2. 3.
D.
Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.
Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows, unless fire-ratings require more: a.
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4)
b.
Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 1113 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 c. d. 5.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. b.
Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
E.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
F.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. 2. 3. 4.
G.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.9
Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections.
Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated.
STEEL FINISHES A.
Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1.
B.
Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 1113 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
B.
Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
3.3
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1.
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a.
At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 1113 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 b.
c. d. e. f. g.
Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
3. 4.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
6.
a. b. c. d.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1.
Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. b. c. d.
2. D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
2.
5.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch.
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 1113 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
C.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D.
Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 08 1113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 1113 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 08 3613 - SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section includes manually operated sectional doors.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.3
Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components.
B.
Structural Performance: Exterior sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1.
Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. a. b. c.
2.
C.
Deflection Limits: Design sectional doors to withstand design wind loads without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components. Deflection of door in horizontal position (open) shall not exceed 1/120 of the door width.
Seismic Performance: Sectional doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. 2.
D.
Basic Wind Speed: As indicated on drawings. Importance Factor: As indicated on drawings. Exposure Category: As indicated on drawings.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." Seismic Component Importance Factor: 1.0.
Operation Cycles: Provide sectional door components and operators capable of operating for not less than number of cycles indicated for each door. One operation cycle is complete when a
SECTIONAL DOORS
08 3613 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. 1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. Include the following: 1.
2. B.
Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.
2.
C.
Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profile door sections, and finishes. Provide roughing-in diagrams, operating instructions, and maintenance information. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring and between components provided by door manufacturer and those provided by others.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and textures available for units with factory-applied finishes. 1.
Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.
D.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For sectional doors, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
F.
Maintenance Data: For sectional doors to include in maintenance manuals.
G.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain sectional doors from single source from single manufacturer. 1.
C.
Obtain operators and controls from sectional door manufacturer.
Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated.
SECTIONAL DOORS
08 3613 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D.
1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1. WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d.
2. B.
Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. Faulty operation of hardware. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use; rust through. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
STEEL DOOR SECTIONS A.
Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Fabricate from zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with indicated zinc coating and thickness. 1.
Fabricate section faces from single sheets to provide sections not more than 24 inches (610 mm) high and of indicated thickness. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-groove weathertight seal, with a reinforcing flange return.
B.
Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet not less than 0.064-inch- (1.63-mm-) nominal coated thickness and welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed from not less than 0.064-inch- (1.63-mm-) thick galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles not more than 48 inches (1219 mm) apart.
C.
Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom-section profile and allowing installation of astragal.
SECTIONAL DOORS
08 3613 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
D.
Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized-steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed to depth and bolted or welded in place. Ensure that reinforcement does not obstruct vision lites.
E.
Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.
F.
Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned, with tight hairline joints and free of warp, twist, and deformation.
2.2
TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES A.
Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown on Drawings, and complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M for minimum G60 (Z180) zinc coating. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches (51 mm) apart for door-drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. Weld or bolt track supports.
B.
Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel track reinforcement and support members, complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 123/A 123M. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. 1. 2.
C.
2.3
Vertical Track Assembly: Track with continuous reinforcing angle attached to track and attached to wall with jamb brackets. Horizontal Track Assembly: Track with continuous reinforcing angle attached to track and supported at points from curve in track to end of track by laterally braced attachments to overhead structural members.
Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise indicated. HARDWARE
A.
General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainlesssteel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.
B.
Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges of not less than 0.079-inch- (2.01-mm-) nominal coated thickness at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is not possible. Provide double-end hinges where required, for doors over 16 feet (4.88 m) wide unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer.
C.
Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double
SECTIONAL DOORS
08 3613 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
hinges are required. Provide 3-inch- (76-mm-) diameter roller tires for 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide track and 2-inch- (51-mm-) diameter roller tires for 2-inch- (51-mm-) wide track. D.
2.4
Push/Pull Handles: For push-up or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized-steel lifting handles on each side of door. LOCKING DEVICES
A.
2.5
Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on single-jamb side, operable from inside only. COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM
A.
Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs fabricated from steel-spring wire complying with ASTM A 229/A 229M, mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles indicated.
B.
Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft. Provide one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet (4.88 m) long and two additional brackets at one-third points to support shafts more than 16 feet (4.88 m) long unless closer spacing is recommended by door manufacturer.
C.
Cables: Galvanized-steel lifting cables with cable safety factor of at least 7 to 1.
D.
Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded steel or spring-loaded bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks.
E.
Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag.
F.
Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.
2.6
MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS A.
Equip door with manufacturer's recommended manual door operator unless another type of door operator is indicated.
B.
Push-up Operation: Lift handles and pull rope for raising and lowering doors, with counterbalance mechanism designed so that required lift or pull for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf (111 N).
C.
Chain-Hoist Operator: Consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain-pocket wheel and guard, and gear-reduction unit with a maximum 35-lbf (155-N) force for door operation. Provide alloy-steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide.
SECTIONAL DOORS
08 3613 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
DOOR ASSEMBLY A.
Steel Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Haas Door; a Nofziger company. b. Overhead Door Corporation. c. Raynor. d. Wayne-Dalton Corp. e. Windsor Republic Doors.
B.
Operation Cycles: Not less than 20,000.
C.
Steel Sections: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet with G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 1. 2.
Section Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm). Exterior-Face, Steel Sheet Thickness: 0.064-inch- (1.63-mm-) nominal coated thickness. a.
3. 4.
Surface: Flat.
Insulation: None. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet of 0.028-inch- (0.71-mm-) nominal coated thickness.
D.
Roller-Tire Material: Case-hardened steel.
E.
Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock.
F.
Counterbalance Type: Torsion spring.
G.
Manual Door Operator: Chain-hoist operator.
H.
Door Finish: 1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color and gloss as selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range. 2. Finish of Interior Facing Material: Finish as selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range.
2.8
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
SECTIONAL DOORS
08 3613 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.9
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES A.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine locations of electrical connections.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.
B.
Tracks: 1. 2.
3. C.
3.3
Fasten vertical track assembly to opening jambs and framing, spaced not more than 24 inches (610 mm) apart. Hang horizontal track assembly from structural overhead framing with angles or channel hangers attached to framing by welding or bolting, or both. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and dooroperating equipment. Repair galvanized coating on tracks according to ASTM A 780.
Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. STARTUP SERVICES
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. 2.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
SECTIONAL DOORS
08 3613 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
ADJUSTING A.
Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.
B.
Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
D.
Align and adjust motors, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Touch-up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.5
DEMONSTRATION A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors.
END OF SECTION 08 3613
SECTIONAL DOORS
08 3613 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Door Schedule
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mark # 003A 004A 100A 100B 100C 103A 103B 104A 105A 106A 107A 108A 111A 113A 115A 118A 119A 120A 121A 122A 123A 123B 124A
HW Set 01 01 02 02 03 04A 05 04A 04 06 07B 01 07 08 09 01 01 01 01 01 01 10 07A
Mode SGL SGL RU RU SGL SGL SGL SGL SGL SGL SGL SGL SGL SGL SGL SGL SGL SGL SGL SGL SGL BF SGL
Width 3' 0" 3' 0" 16' 0" 16' 0" 3' 0" 3' 0" 3' 0" 3' 0" 3' 0" 3' 0" 3' 0" 3' 0" 3' 0" 3' 0" 4' 0" 3' 0" 3' 0" 3' 0" 3' 0" 3' 0" 3' 0" 5' 0" 3' 0"
Height 7' 0" 7' 0" 14' 0" 14' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0" 7' 0"
Thick 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 2" 2" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4"
Door HMD HMD STL STL HMD HMD HMD HMD HMD HMD HMD HMD HMD HMD EX HMD HMD HMD HMD HMD HMD WD HMD
Frame HMF HMF STF STF HMF HMF HMF HMF HMF HMF HMF HMF HMF HMF HMF HMF HMF HMF HMF HMF HMF WDF HMF
Rating NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD NONRTD
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100-1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
Refer to "General and Special Conditions", and "Instructions to Bidders", Division 1 of Specifications. Requirements of these Sections and the project drawings shall govern work in this section.
1.2
Work Included: A.
Furnish all items of Finish Hardware specified, scheduled, shown or required herein except those items specifically excluded from this section of the specification.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1.3
Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry: Installation of Finish Hardware Section 08111 – Standard Steel Doors Section 08112 – Standard Steel Frames Section 16725 – Security Access Systems Section 16000 – Electrical rough-in, conduit junction boxes, wiring, primary power and final hook-up of all finish hardware components requiring electrical connections.
Quality Assurance A.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations of the governmental authorities having jurisdiction where such requirements exceed the requirements of the Specifications. Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of the regulations for public building accommodations for physically handicapped persons of the governmental authority having jurisdiction and to comply with Americans with Disabilities Act. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA 80 and state local building code requirements. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors that carry supplementary marking on the doors UL labels indicating "Fire Door to be equipped with Fire Exit Hardware" provide UL label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".
Hardware Supplier: 1.
Shall be an established firm dealing in contract builders’ hardware. He must have adequate inventory, qualified personnel on staff and be located within 100 miles of the
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100-1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
project. Only domestic manufacturers are acceptable and the distributor must be a factory-authorized dealer for all materials required. The supplier shall be or have in employment an Architectural Hardware Consultant. (AHC) C.
Manufacturer: 1.
2.
1.4
Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
Submittals: A.
Hardware Schedule 1.
2.
Submit proper number of Hardware Schedules to allow the Architect to retain two copies for his use, plus the number of copies required by the Contractor for his distribution and use. In any event, do not submit more than six copies. Include the following: Preface sheet listing category only and manufacturer's names of items being furnished as follows: CATEGORY Hinges Lock sets Kick Plates
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
SPECIFIED Manufacturer A Manufacturer X Open
SCHEDULED Manufacturer B Manufacturer X Manufacturer Z
Hardware Locations: Refer to Article 3.1 B.2 Locations. Opening Description: Single or pair, number, room locations, hand, active leaf, degree of swing, size, door material, frame material, and UL listing. Hardware Description: Quantity, category, product number, fasteners, and finish. Headings that refer to the specified Hardware Set Numbers. Scheduling Sequence shown in Hardware Sets. Product data of each hardware item, and shop drawings where required, for special conditions and specialty hardware. Riser drawings, wiring drawings and system operation description. "Vertical" scheduling format only. "Horizontal" schedules will be returned "Not Approved." Typed Copy. Double-Spacing. 8-1/2 x 11 inch sheets U.S. Standard Finish symbols or BHMA Finish symbols. Generally, follow guidelines established in Door & Hardware Institute Handbook (DHI) Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule. Modified as above.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100-2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
2.
1.5
Submit, in booklet form using supplier's schedule covers as binders. Product data of items of hardware listed in supplier's schedule. Submit product data concurrently with hardware schedule.
Inspection Report: 1.
D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Product Data: 1.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Submit inspection report specified in 3.1.C.2. for locksets, exit devices, ADA special closers, door closers and all electrical hardware.
Submit to General Contractor/Construction Manager, two copies each of parts and service manuals and two each of any special installation or adjustment tools. Include for locksets, exit devices, door closers and any electrical products. Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A.
1.6
Label each item of hardware with the appropriate door number and Hardware Schedule heading number, and deliver to the installer so designated by the contractor. Warranties
A.
Mortise locksets shall carry manufacturer’s 3-year warranty against manufacturing defects and workmanship.
B.
Closers shall carry manufacturer's 10-year warranty against manufacturing defects and workmanship.
C.
Balance of items shall carry a manufacturer's 1-year warranty against manufacturing defects and workmanship.
D.
During the warranty period, replace defective work, including labor, materials and other costs incidental to the work. Inspect the work within 24 hours after receipt of notice from the Owner. Replace work found to be defective as defined in the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.1
Furnish each category with the products of only one manufacturer unless specified otherwise; this requirement is mandatory whether various manufacturers are listed or not.
2.2
Provide the products of manufacturer designated or if more than one manufacturer is listed, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers listed. Where only one manufacturer or product is listed, "no substitution" is implied.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100-3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 A.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Hinges: 1. 2. 3.
B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Unless specified otherwise in sets furnish hinges of class and size as follows: Furnish class 5BB1 and size as shown in Hardware Sets. Numbers used are Ives. Equal products of Stanley,Hager and McKinney are acceptable.
Locksets and Latchsets - Mortise Type: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5. 6.
Locksets shall be manufactured from heavy gauge steel, minimum lockcase thickness 1/8”, containing components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. Locks are to have a standard 2 ¾” backset with a full ¾” throw two-piece stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Deadbolt shall be a full 1” throw, constructed of stainless steel. Lockcase shall be easily handed without chassis disassembly by removing handing screw on lockcase and installing in opposite location on reverse side. Changing of door hand bevel from standard to reverse hand shall be done by removing the lockcase scalp plate, and pulling and rotating the latchbolt 180 degrees. Lock trim shall be through-bolted to the door to assure correct alignment and proper operation. Lever trim shall have external spring cage mechanism to assist in support of the lever weight. Thumb turns shall have “EZ” thumbturn equal to IR-Schlage 11-800. Verify all lock functions with owner Prior to ordering Function numbers are IR-Schlage. a. b.
IR-Schlage Best
L9000 Series 45H Series
IR-Schlage Best
17A 14H
Trim: c. d. 7.
Provide strikes with extended lips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt. Provide strike lips that do not project more than 1/8" beyond door frame trim at single doors and have 7/8" lip to center at pairs of 1-3/4" doors. Provide wrought box strikes on all locks and latches.
C.
Push plates and Pulls: 1. Security pulls shall be VR900 Series by Ives or equivalent by Rockwood. 2. Pull Plates shall be Ives 10” center to center 1” round pulls with back plate as shown
D.
Closers: 1.
2.
Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength cast iron cylinder. Cylinder body shall be 1 ½” in diameter, and double heat treated pinion shall be 11/16” in diameter with double D slab drive arm connection. Hydraulic fluid shall be of a type requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to –30 degrees F.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100-4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.
4. 5. 6. 7.
8. E.
2. 3.
Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced opening force for the physically handicapped. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck. All closers shall have solid forged steel main arms (and forged forearms for parallel arm closers). All surface mounted mechanical closers shall be certified to exceed ten million (10,000,000) full load cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory. Powder coating finish to be certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing by ETL, an independent testing laboratory used by BHMA for ANSI certification. Refer to door and frame details and furnish accessories such as drop plates, panel adapters, spacers and supports as required to correctly install door closers. State degree of door swing in the hardware schedule. IR-LCN Series as listed in sets. No Substitution- Owners Standard
Furnish .050 inches thick 10" high x door width less 2" at single doors and less 1" at pairs. Where glass or louvers prevent this height, supply with height equal to height of bottom rail less 2”. Kickplates shall be drilled and counter sunk for oval head, counter sunk screws. Pan head not acceptable. Any BHMA manufacturing product meeting above is acceptable.
Bumpers: 1. 2.
G.
Ives WS407CVX BHMA L02101. Wrought, forged, or cast, approximately 2-1/2 inch diameter, convex or concave rubber center, concealed fasteners.
Thresholds: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1/2" high - 5" wide. Heavy Duty .244 minimum wall thickness. Cope at jambs. Furnish full wall opening width when frames are recessed. Cope in front of mullions if thresholds project beyond door faces. Furnish with non-ferrous Stainless Steel Screws and Lead Anchors. a. b. c.
H.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Kick Plates: 1.
F.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Pemko Reese National Guard
425HD
Cover Plates: National Guard 800 Series Aluminum. 1. Length to be wall to wall. Must notch around frame and cover floor GAP all the way to wall 2. Coordinate width with VCT and GAP to cover
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100-5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 I.
Apply to head and jamb stops. Solid Bar stock all sides a. Pemko b. Reese c. National Guard 700S
Furnish items not categorized in the above descriptions but specified by manufacturer’s names in Hardware Sets.
Fasteners: 1.
2.3
C627
Miscellaneous: 1.
L.
Surface Sweeps: a. Reese b. Pemko c. National Guard
Weather-stripping at Hollow Metal Openings 1. 2.
K.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Door Sweeps: 1.
J.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Furnish fasteners of the proper type, size, quantity and finish. Use machine screws and expansion shields for attaching hardware to concrete or masonry, and wall grip inserts at hollow wall construction. Supply sex bolts for closers at lead-lined or UL listed wood doors only. Supply sex bolts when UL listing of wood doors requires them. Furnish machine screws for attachment to reinforced hollow metal doors and frames and reinforced aluminum doors and frames. Furnish full thread wood screws for attachment to solid wood doors and frames. "TEK" type screws are not acceptable.
Finishes: A.
2.4
Generally, Dull Chrome, US26D / BHMA 626 1. 2.
Hinges interior, Steel US26D / BHMA 652 Hinges exterior, Stainless Steel US32D / BHMA 630
3. 4.
Closers: Powder coated finish, color Aluminum BHMA 689 Thresholds: Mill finish Aluminum finish
Templates and Hardware Location: A.
Furnish hardware made to template. Supply required templates and hardware locations to the door and frame manufacturers.
B.
Furnish metal template to frame/door supplier for continuous hinge.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100-6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C. 2.5 .
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Refer to Article 3.1 B.2, Locations, and coordinate with templates. Cylinders Key Control and Keying:
A.
The intent of this key and cylinder specification is to provide key control in order to assure complete security throughout the construction and occupancy phases of this project. The project owner is assured that the cylinders and keys used during construction are replaced before project completion.
B.
The owner to supply final master keyed cores and all required keys for permanent cores
C.
Provide cylinder housings that are compatible with the existing Stanley Best Premier System Interchangeable core grand master system..
D.
Provide cylinders with construction keying for use during the construction period. When so directed, and in the presence of the Owner’s security department or representative, convert construction cores to final cores.
E.
Provide construction master keys as required by the Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
Installation A.
General: 1.
2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7.
B.
Install hardware according to manufacturers installations and to manufacturers template dimensions. Attach all items of finish hardware to doors, frames, walls, etc. with fasteners furnished and required by the manufacture of the item. Reinforced hollow metal doors and frames and reinforced aluminum door and frames: drilled and tapped machine screws. Solid wood doors and frames: full thread wood screws. Drill pilot holes before inserting screws. Continuous gear hinges attached to hollow metal doors and frames and aluminum doors and frames: 12-24 x 1/2" #3 Phillips Keenform self-tapping. Use #13 or 3/16 drill for pilot. Continuous Gear Hinges require continuous mortar guards of foam or cardboard 1/2" thick x frame height, applied with construction adhesive. Refer to Article 2.3, cylinders and keying regarding conversion of construction cores to final cores. Install weather-strip gasket prior to parallel arm closer bracket, rim exit device or any stop mounted hardware. Gasket to provide a continuous seal around perimeter of door opening. Allow for gasket when installing finish hardware. Door closers will require special templating. Exit devices will require adjustment in backset.
Locations:
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100-7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Dimensions are from finish floor to center line of items. Include this list in Hardware Schedule.
CATEGORY
DIMENSION
Hinges Levers Push Plates Pull Plates Wire Pulls C.
Door Manufacturer's Standard Door Manufacturer's Standard 52" 42" 42"
Final Adjustment: 1.
2.
3.2
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Provide the services of a representative to inspect material furnished and its installation and adjustment, to make final hardware adjustment, and to instruct the Owner's personnel in adjustment, care and maintenance of hardware. Locksets, closers and exit devices shall be inspected by the factory representative and adjusted after installation and after the HVAC system is in operation, to insure correct installation and proper adjustment in operation. The manufacturer's representative shall prepare a written report stating compliance, and also recording locations and kinds of noncompliance. The original report shall be forwarded to the Architect with copies to the Contractor, hardware distributor, hardware installer and building owner.
Hardware Sets:
Hardware Group No. 01 For use on mark/door #(s): 003A 004A 121A 122A
108A 123A
118A
119A
Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA OFFICE/ENTRY LOCK L9050BDC 17A 1 EA MASTERKEYED CORE BY OWNER 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 3 EA SILENCER SR64
120A
Finish 652 626 626 630 GRY
Mfr IVE SCH BES IVE IVE
Finish
Mfr UNK
Hardware Group No. 02 For use on mark/door #(s): 100A 100B Provide each RU door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 1 EA NOTE ALL HDWE BY DR SUPPLIER DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100-8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Hardware Group No. 03 - Mount weatherstrip prior to closer. Requires ST for closer For use on mark/door #(s): 100C Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080BDC LLL 17A 1 EA MASTERKEYED CORE BY OWNER 1 EA DOOR PULL VR900 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 1 SET SEALS 700SA 1 EA DOOR SWEEP C627A 1 EA THRESHOLD 425HD
Finish 630 626 626 630 689 630 CL CL AL
Mfr IVE SCH BES IVE LCN IVE NGP NGP NGP
Finish 652 630 630 689 630 630 GRY
Mfr IVE IVE IVE LCN IVE IVE IVE
Finish 652 630 630 689 630 630 GRY
Mfr IVE IVE IVE LCN IVE IVE IVE
Hardware Group No. 04 For use on mark/door #(s): 105A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 6" X 16" 1 EA PULL PLATE 8303 10" 3.5" X 15" 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 3 EA SILENCER SR64 Hardware Group No. 04A For use on mark/door #(s): 103A 104A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 6" X 16" 1 EA PULL PLATE 8303 10" 3.5" X 15" 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 3 EA SILENCER SR64 DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100-9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Hardware Group No. 05 For use on mark/door #(s): 103B Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA DBL CYL STORE L9466BDC 17A W/DB 2 EA MASTERKEYED CORE BY OWNER 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 3 EA SILENCER SR64
Finish 652 626
Mfr IVE SCH
626 689 630 630 GRY
BES LCN IVE IVE IVE
Hardware Group No. 06 - Cover plate to be wall to wall. Notch around frame. Bevel 1 edge only (edge to rubber flooring needs to be square) For use on mark/door #(s): 106A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070BDC 17A 1 EA MASTERKEYED CORE BY OWNER 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 3 EA SILENCER SR64 1 EA COVER PLATE 838 X 6" X 40"
Finish 652 626 626 689 630 GRY AL
Mfr IVE SCH BES LCN IVE IVE NGP
Finish 652 626 626 689 630 630 GRY
Mfr IVE SCH BES LCN IVE IVE IVE
Hardware Group No. 07 - Template closer for 180 degrees where possible For use on mark/door #(s): 111A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070BDC 17A 1 EA MASTERKEYED CORE BY OWNER 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 3 EA SILENCER SR64
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100-10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Hardware Group No. 07A - Template closer for 180 degrees For use on mark/door #(s): 124A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070BDC 17A 1 EA MASTERKEYED CORE BY OWNER 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 3 EA SILENCER SR64
Finish 652 626 626 689 630 GRY
Mfr IVE SCH BES LCN IVE IVE
Finish 652 626 626 689 630 630 GRY AL
Mfr IVE SCH BES LCN IVE IVE IVE NGP
Finish 652 626 626 689 630 GRY
Mfr IVE SCH BES LCN IVE IVE
Hardware Group No. 07B - Template closer for 180 degrees where possible Cover plate to be wall to wall. Notch around frame. Bevel both edges For use on mark/door #(s): 107A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070BDC 17A 1 EA MASTERKEYED CORE BY OWNER 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 3 EA SILENCER SR64 1 EA COVER PLATE 814 X 6" X 40"
Hardware Group No. 08 - Template closer for 180 degrees where possible For use on mark/door #(s): 113A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070BDC 17A 1 EA MASTERKEYED CORE BY OWNER 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SHCUSH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 3 EA SILENCER SR64 DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100-11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Hardware Group No. 09 - Cover plate to be wall to wall. Notch around frame. Bevel both edges For use on mark/door #(s): 115A Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 1 EA COVER PLATE 814 X 6" X 52" 1 EA NOTE REUSE ALL EXISTING HDWE
Finish AL
Mfr NGP UNK
Finish 628 630
Mfr JOH IVE
Hardware Group No. 10 For use on mark/door #(s): 123B Provide each BF door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number 1 EA TRACK 100FD 4DR 60 2 EA DOOR PULL 8111 5" STD
DOOR HARDWARE
08 7100-12
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 08 8000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Storefront framing.
B.
Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts.” 2. Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories” for framed mirrors provide with toilet accessories.
1.3
DEFINITIONS A.
Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.
B.
Glass Thicknesses: ASTM C 1036.
C.
Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.
1.4
Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
1.5
General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B.
Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.
C.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
GLAZING
08 8000 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association’s Certified Glass Installer Program.
B.
Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
C.
Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
D.
Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.
E.
Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.
F.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
G.
Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
1.8
Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1.
1.9
Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
WARRANTY A.
General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
GLAZING
08 8000 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1.
Warranty Period: [10] years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A.
Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 1. 2.
Provide glass lites in
Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than [6.0] mm. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project.
B.
Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heattreated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
C.
Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 2. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 3. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 4. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
2.2
GLASS PRODUCTS A.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 1. 2.
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
GLAZING
08 8000 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. 2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).
INSULATING GLASS A.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.
Pilkington North America.
2.
PPG Industries, Inc.
Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. 2. 3.
C.
2.4
Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article[ and in "Laminated Glass" Article] as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article[ and in "Insulating-Laminated-Glass Types" Article]. GLAZING GASKETS
A.
Dense Compression Gaskets: To be used with drive-in wedges or for use with pressurized stops. Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following, except that neoprene is not to be considered compativle with silicone glazing sealants: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene or EPDM or silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1.
C.
2.5
Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.
Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.
Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black. GLAZING SEALANTS
A.
General:
GLAZING
08 8000 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
2.
3. 4. B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions as well as glass framing system manufacturer’s requirements for selecting and applying glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2.
2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Dow Corning Corporation; 790. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290. Pecora Corporation; 890. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1 (base curing).
Applications: Use for non-traffic substrates type M, G, A, and as applicable to type O glazing substrates indicated and only where approved for low-modulus applications by manufacturers of glazing, sealant, and substrate materials.
GLAZING TAPES A.
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. 2.
B.
AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. 2.
AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.
GLAZING
08 8000 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).
F.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.
G.
Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fireprotection rating indicated.
2.8
FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A.
Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.
B.
Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
C.
Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. Presence and functioning of weep systems. Minimum required face and edge clearances. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
GLAZING
08 8000 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B. 3.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION
A.
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B.
Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.
3.3
GLAZING, GENERAL A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.
B.
Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.
E.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1.
2.
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
GLAZING
08 8000 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
J.
Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
K.
Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.
L.
Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4
TAPE GLAZING A.
Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B.
Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.
C.
Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E.
Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F.
Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
H.
Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5
GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A.
Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B.
Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C.
Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
GLAZING
08 8000 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
D.
Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E.
Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08 8000
GLAZING
08 8000 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 09 2216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1. 2.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1.
2. 3.
1.3
Interior, non-load bearing framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). Suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, interior and exterior suspended soffits, etc.).
Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation installed in members. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for gypsum panels, and other components of wall and ceiling assemblies.
SUBMITTALS A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A.
Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 2216 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.
2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.
SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS, GENERAL A.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
B.
Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.
C.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-mm) diameter.
D.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 1.
E.
Depth: 2 ½” (63.5 mm) unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. 2.
Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. a. b.
3.
0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) unless otherwise
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep. a.
F.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: indicated. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. 2.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 2216 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 a. b. c. 2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A.
Components, General: As follows: 1. 2.
B.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. 2.
C.
Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), not-dip galvanized zinc coating.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Depth: 3 5/8 inches (92.1 mm) unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where required, provide one of the following: 1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 2) 3)
D.
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges. 1. 2.
E.
Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73mm-) thick, galvanized steel.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. 2.
F.
Fire Trak Corp.; Posi-Clip or Rediklip system. Steel Network Inc.; VertiClip SLD Series. Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1.
Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 2216 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 G.
3.
2.4
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges. 1. 2.
H.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum baresteel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. 2.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates and each other. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. a.
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION A.
Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1.
Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 2216 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer’s written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum’s “Gypsum Construction Handbook.” 1.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, bracing and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4
INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A.
Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated.
B.
Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C.
Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a.
2.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a.
3.
4. 5. 6.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach to structural members. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 2216 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 7.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D.
Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
E.
Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
F.
Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.
3.5
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B.
Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
C.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1.
2.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. b.
c. 3.
D.
Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.
Direct Furring: 1. 2.
Screw to wood or metal framing as required. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 2216 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 E.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Z-Furring Members: 1. 2.
3.
F.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation") vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced [24 inches (610 mm)] [600 mm] o.c. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (300 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 09 2216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 2216 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 09 2900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2 A.
B.
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Fiberglass mat faced moisture resistant gypsum backer board. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 2. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board. 3. Division 09 Section "Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile. 4. Division 09 painting Sections for primers applied to interior or exterior gypsum board surfaces, and sheen of paint topcoats effecting gypsum board finishing level. SUBMITTALS
A. 1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
1.5
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 2900 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PANELS, GENERAL A.
2.2
Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.
B.
Regular Type: 1. 2.
C.
Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Plastic-Film Thickness: 0.030 inch (0.762 mm).
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces. 1. 2.
2.3
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Long Edges: Tapered.
High-Impact Type: Manufactured with Type X core, plastic film laminated to back side for greater resistance to through-penetration (impact resistance). 1. 2.
D.
American Gypsum Co. G-P Gypsum. National Gypsum Company. USG Corporation.
Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. Long Edges: Tapered.
WATER-RESISTANT GYPSUM A.
Water-Resistant Gypsum: ASTM C 630/C 630M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
GYPSUM BOARD
09 2900 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 a. b. c. d. 2. B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
American Gypsum Co. G-P Gypsum. National Gypsum Company. USG Corporation.
Core: 5/8 inch, Type X, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C1178, Type X: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
2.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Thickness: 5/8 inch. Width: 4 feet. Length: 8 feet. Weight: 2.5 lb/sq. ft. Edges: Square Surfacing: Coated fiberglass-mat on face, back and long edges. Mold Resistance (ASTM D3273): Not less than 10, in a test as manufactured. Microbial Resistance (ASTM D6329, EPA 12-week protocol): Will not support microbial growth. Permeance (ASTM E96): Not more than 1.0 perms when tiled. Robinson Floor Test Rating (ASTM C627): Light commercial. Acceptable Products: 5/8 inch DensShield Fireguard Tile Backer, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum.
TRIM ACCESSORIES A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. 2.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. Shapes: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2.5
Cornerbead. Bullnose bead. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. Expansion (control) joint.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape: 1. 2.
C.
Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 2900 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.
D.
Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound or high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.
Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1.
2.6
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a.
3. 4. 5.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and settingtype, sandable topping compound.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1.
C.
Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 2900 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A.
Comply with ASTM C 840. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer’s written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum’s “Gypsum Construction Handbook.”
B.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
G.
Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
3.3
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A.
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Regular Type: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. High-Impact Type: As indicated on Drawings. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
Single-Layer Application: 1. 2.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. b.
GYPSUM BOARD
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
09 2900 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. 4. 3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
B.
Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.5
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 1. 2. 3.
C.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
3.6
Partition Walls: 30’ maximum in either direction. Interior ceiling with perimeter relief: 50’ maximum in either direction. Interior ceilings without perimeter relief: 30’ maximum in either direction.
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. Bullnose Bead: Only where indicated. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges, unless otherwise indicated. L-Bead: Use where indicated. U-Bead: Use where indicated. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 2900 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D.
Level 5: Finish must be equal to Level 4 (embedding coat and three finish coats) plus a skim coat over the entire gypsum board surface. Surfaces must be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. a.
3.7
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1.
E.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Typical for all surfaces to be painted with topcoats with satin, semi-gloss, or gloss sheens (MPI Gloss Levels 4, 5, or 6), and where indicated on drawings.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: instructions.
Finish according to manufacturer's written
APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A.
Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.
B.
Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. 1.
C.
3.8
Provide mockup submittal for approval to Architect, then kept for quality control verification.
Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations. PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. 2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 09 2900
GYPSUM BOARD
09 2900 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 09 3000 - TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
1.3
Ceramic tile: Including glazed and unglazed paver tile, quarry tile, mosaic tile, wall tiles, decorative tile, and related trim accessories. Stone thresholds. Waterproof membrane. Metal edge strips.
Related Sections: 1. Division 02 Section “Selective Demolition” for removing existing tile. 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 3. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units or glass-mat, waterresistant backer board. DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.
B.
ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."
C.
Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.
D.
Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
TILING
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
09 3000 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.
C.
Samples for Verification: 1. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12 inches (300 mm) square, but not fewer than 4 tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths. 4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths.
D.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in subsequent “Quality Assurance” to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of comparable completed projects with name, locations, Owner, and Architect contact information.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or producer, and product from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
C.
Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.
D.
Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
E.
1.6
Stone thresholds. Waterproof membrane. Crack isolation membrane. Joint sealants. Cementitious backer units. Metal edge strips.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to review conditions, schedule, and coordination for preparations by other trades. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
TILING
Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.
09 3000 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes.
C.
Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
1.8
Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 3.
Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. Deliver all extra materials to Owner, unless directed otherwise.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PRODUCTS, GENERAL A.
ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
B.
ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.
C.
Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. 1.
2.2
of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.
TILE PRODUCTS A.
TILING
Tile Type: Glazed paver tile. 09 3000 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
2.3
Base: Coved with surface bullnose top edge, face size as selected by Owner.
Tile Type: Glazed wall tile and Decorative thin wall tile. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Manufacturer: As indicated on drawings or as selected by owner from manufacturer’s full range. Nominal Face Dimensions: As indicated on drawings or as selected by owner from manufacturer’s full range. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on drawings or as selected by owner from manufacturer’s full range. Face Style and Finish: As indicated on drawings or as selected by owner from manufacturer’s full range. Tile Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings or as selected by owner from manufacturer’s full range. Grout Color: As indicated on drawings or as selected by owner from manufacturer’s full range Module size, thickness, face style, finish, color, pattern, and grout color as selected by Owner from manufacturer’s full range. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a.
B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Manufacturer: As indicated on drawings. Nominal Face Dimensions: As indicated on drawings. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on drawings. Face Style and Finish: As indicated on drawings. Tile Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings. Grout Color: As indicated on drawings or as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range
Accessories: Provide vitreous china accessories of type and size indicated, suitable for installing by same method as adjoining wall tile. THRESHOLDS
A.
General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1.
B.
Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of [10] [12] per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. 1.
TILING
Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less above adjacent floor surface.
Description: color as selected by Owner.
09 3000 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A.
General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch (0.76-mm) nominal thickness. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a.
C.
Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement. 1.
2.5
Noble Company (The); Nobleseal TS.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
SETTING MATERIALS A.
Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02. 1.
B.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1.
2. C.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. c. C-Cure. d. Custom Building Products. e. Laticrete International, Inc. f. MAPEI Corporation. g. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. h. Summitville Tiles, Inc. i. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3[, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)]. 1.
TILING
Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.
Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 deg F (60 deg C) and 212 deg F (100 deg C), respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use.
09 3000 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
GROUT MATERIALS A.
2.7
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following product, no substitutions: a. TEC 550 Power Grout. ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A.
General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
B.
Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated.
2.8
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.
B.
Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; stainless-steel, exposed-edge material. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.
C.
Shluter Systems: Schluter-SCHIENE
Temporary Protective Coating: Product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1.
Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.
D.
MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
E.
Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.
F.
Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
G.
Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.
TILING
09 3000 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1.
2.
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with bonded mortar bed or thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. b.
3. B. 3.2
Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION
A.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tilesetting material manufacturer.
B.
Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains.
C.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
3.3
TILE INSTALLATION A.
TILING
Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.
09 3000 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 1.
F.
3.4
At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set).
Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION
A.
Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
B.
Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTING A.
Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. 2.
3.
TILING
Remove epoxy and latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging.
09 3000 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to the manufacturer and Installer, that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 1.
2. 3. 4.
3.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.
INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE 1.
Tile Installation F131: Water-cleanable, tile-setting epoxy; epoxy grout; TCA F131. a. b.
B.
Interior Wall Installations, Masonry or Concrete: 1.
Tile Installation W202: Thin-set mortar; TCA W202. a. b. c.
2.
3.
Tile Type: Unglazed natural porcelain tile. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. Grout: TEC 550 Power Grout.
Tile Installation B421: Thin-set mortar on waterproof membrane; TCA B421. a. b. c. d.
Tile Type: Unglazed natural Porcelain Tile. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. Grout: TEC 550 Power Grout.
Shower Receptor and Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1.
Tile Installation B421: Thin-set mortar on waterproof membrane over cementitious backer units or fiber cement underlayment; TCA B421. a.
TILING
Tile Type: Unglazed natural porcelain tile. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex portland cement mortar. Grout: TEC 550 Power Grout.
Tile Installation W245: Thin-set mortar on coated glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board; TCA W245. a. b. c.
C.
Tile Type: Glazed porcelain paver tile. Grout: TEC 550 Powergrout.
Tile Type: Unglazed Natural Porcelain tile.
09 3000 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 b. c.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. Grout: TEC 550 Power Grout.
END OF SECTION 09 3000
TILING
09 3000 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 09 5113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. Divisions 21, 23, and 26 for light fixtures, sprinklers, and air distribution components.
C.
Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete at ceilings.
1.3
DEFINITIONS A.
AC: Articulation Class.
B.
CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.
C.
LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.
D.
NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. 2.
D.
Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples of each type, finish, and color.
Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 5113 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Source Limitations: 1. 2.
B.
1.6
Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1.
Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surfaceburning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.
C.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
1.8
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 5113 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.9
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 3.
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. Deliver all extra materials to Owner, unless directed otherwise.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectance, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 1.
C.
2.2
Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
A. 2.3
As indicated on drawings, or equal METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
B.
Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 5113 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1.
Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
2.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3.
Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.
E.
Hanger Rods and Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F.
Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch(1-mm-) thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts.
2.4
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A.
2.5
As indicated on drawings, or equal. METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product(s) from one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; BPB USA; Chicago Metalic Corporation; Fry Reglet Corporation; Gordon, Inc.; USG Interiors, Inc.;
Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 5113 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1.
2.
3.
Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION A.
3.3
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and UBC Standard 25-2 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1.
B.
Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. 2.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 5113 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.
4.
5.
6. 7. 8. 9.
10.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, movement, or elevated temperatures. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
C.
Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. 2.
3.
Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E.
Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a.
2.
As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 5113 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.
3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fireresistance-rated assembly.
CLEANING A.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09 5113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 5113 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 09 6513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2.
1.3
Resilient base. Resilient molding accessories.
Division 09 Section "Resilient Sheet Flooring" for resilient sheet floor coverings. Division 09 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient floor tile.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type and color of product specified from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09 6513 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.
C.
Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 2. 3.
48 hours before installation. During installation. 48 hours after installation.
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).
C.
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
B.
Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
Deliver extra materials to Owner unless directed otherwise.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
RESILIENT BASE, VINYL As indicated on drawings. A.
Resilient Base, Vinyl: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product(s) from one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. Johnsonite. Mondo Rubber International, Inc.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09 6513 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 f. g. B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Roppe Corporation, USA. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.
Resilient Base Standard, Vinyl: ASTM F 1861. 1. 2. 3.
Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic). Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). Style: Cove (base with toe)
C.
Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
D.
Height: 4 inches (102 mm)
E.
Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F.
Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
G.
Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
H.
Finish: As selected by owner from manufacturer's full range
I.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by owner from manufacturer’s full range of colors][As indicated on drawings.
2.2
RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY, VINYL As indicated on drawings if only one selection A.
Resilient Molding Accessory, Vinyl: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product(s) from one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. Johnsonite. R.C.A. Rubber Company (The). Roppe Corporation, USA. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.
B.
Description: Transition and reducer strips
C.
Material: Vinyl.
D.
Profile and Dimensions: As indicated on drawings
E.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by owner from full range of industry colors.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09 6513 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
INSTALLATION MATERIALS A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with material manufacturer’s and adhesive manufacturer’s requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C.
Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1.
D.
3.3
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B.
Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09 6513 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
C.
Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
D.
Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E.
Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F.
On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G.
Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
H.
Job-Formed Corners: 1. 2.
3.4
Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.
RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B.
Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. 2. 3.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D.
Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 6513
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09 6513 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 09 6519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. Rubber floor tile. 2. Vinyl composition floor tile.
B.
Related Sections: 1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings. 2. Division 09 Section “Resilient Sheet Flooring” for floor coverings.
1.3
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated.
C.
Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. 1.
For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches (230 mm) long, of each color required.
D.
Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
E.
Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09 6519 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of product specified from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.
B.
Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 2. 3.
48 hours before installation. During installation. 48 hours after installation.
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).
C.
Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E.
Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
B.
Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.
Deliver all extra materials to Owner unless directed otherwise.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09 6519 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
RUBBER FLOOR TILE A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide basis-of-design product exclusively: 1. Nora Systems, Inc.: Norament 992, Article 1955.
B.
Tile Standard: ASTM F 1344, Class I-A, homogeneous rubber tile, solid color.
C.
Hardness: Not less than 85 as required by ASTM F 1344, measured using Shore, Type A durometer per ASTM D 2240.
D.
Wearing Surface: Textured.
E.
Thickness: 0.36 inch.
F.
Size: 39.45 inches x 39.45 inches.
G.
Seaming Method: Heat welded.
H.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by owner from full range of industry colors.
2.2
VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, product(s) from one of the following. 1. 2. 3.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Congoleum Corporation; Mannington Mills, Inc.; Tarkett, Inc.; Only use subsequent paragraphs if no basis-ofdesign product listed and this is performance based.
B.
Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 1, solid-color tile.
C.
Wearing Surface: Smooth.
D.
Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm)
E.
Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).
F.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by owner from full range of industry colors.
2.3
INSTALLATION MATERIALS A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09 6519 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.
C.
Seamless-Installation Accessories: 1.
Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat welding seams. a.
D.
Color: Match floor tile
Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with flooring materials manufacturer’s and adhesive manufacturer’s requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. 2.
3. 4.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
C.
Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method recommended by access flooring manufacturer.
D.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
E.
Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09 6519 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. F.
3.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B.
Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1.
C.
Lay tiles square with room axis unless otherwise indicated.
Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1.
Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.
D.
Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
G.
Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
H.
Seamless Installation: 1.
2.
Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. Chemically Bonded Seams: Bond seams with chemical-bonding compound to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare seams and apply compound to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps, overlays, or excess bonding compound on floor covering surfaces.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09 6519 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C.
Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Use commercially available product acceptable to flooring manufacturing. 2.
E.
Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner’s maintenance service.
Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 6519
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09 6519 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 09 6816 - SHEET CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1.
B.
1.3
Carpet installation and accessories
Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type of substrate: 1.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
C.
Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.
Carpet type, color, and dye lot. Seam locations, types, and methods. Type of installation. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. Pile direction. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. Transition details to other flooring materials.
Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. 2.
Carpet: 12-inch- square Sample. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples.
SHEET CARPETING
09 6816 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
D.
Product Schedule: For carpet Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
E.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
F.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
G.
Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. 2.
H. 1.4
Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
1.6
Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation."
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
C.
Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D.
Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items.
SHEET CARPETING
09 6816 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
WARRANTY A.
General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. 2. 3.
C.
Special Warranty for Carpet Cushion: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet cushion installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.8
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty includes consequent removal and replacement of carpet and accessories. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
B.
Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd..
Deliver all extra materials to Owner unless directed otherwise.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
TUFTED CARPET A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide basis-of-design product exclusively: 1.
Mohawk Group (The)
SHEET CARPETING
09 6816 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. 2.
2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Style Name – ENTERPRISE III. Product Type – Broadloom. Construction – Woven Interlock. Surface Appearance – Textured Heathered Loop. Fiber Type – Colorstrand Infinity SD Nylon. Pitch/Gauge – 212 (309 ends per meter). Pile Weight – 28.0 oz per SY. Pile Thickness - .165”. Stitches/Rows per Inch – 6.0. Dye Method – Solution Dyed. Protective Treatment – Sentry Plus. Density – 6,109. Weight Density – 171,052. Primary Backing – Not applicable. Backing Foundation – Interlaced into pile. Secondary Backing – Duraloc AC. Pattern Repeat – None. Width – 12’.
Carpet must have stain protection – AATCC175, equal to or greater than 8.0 on Red 40 stain test.
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer. 1.
VOC Limits: Provide adhesives with VOC content not more than 50g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).
C.
Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood, in strips as required to match cushion thickness and that comply with CRI 104, Section 12.2.
D.
Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.
E.
Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.
SHEET CARPETING
09 6816 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.
B.
Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1.
2. 3. C. 3.2
Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet[ cushion] manufacturer. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-inPlace Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates.
B.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
D.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.
3.3
INSTALLATION A.
Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following: 1.
Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down Installation."
SHEET CARPETING
09 6816 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. 1.
Bevel adjoining border edges at seams with hand shears and Level adjoining border edges.
C.
Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.
D.
Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
E.
Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTING A.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. 2. 3.
Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B.
Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations."
C.
Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet adhesive manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09 6816
SHEET CARPETING
09 6816 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 09 9113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1. Galvanized metal.
B.
Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, notify Architect for clarification. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.
C.
Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1.
Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. b. c. d.
2.
Aluminum framing and glass. Decorative architectural metals. Mechanical and electrical equipment, unless noted otherwise. Light fixtures.
Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: Formatted: Bullets and Numbering
c.a. d.b. 3.
Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. b. c. d. e.
4.
Ceiling or canopy plenums. Utility tunnels.
Anodized aluminum. Stainless steel. Chromium plate. Copper. Bronze and brass.
Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a.
Valve and damper operators.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 9113 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 b. c. d. e. D.
1.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Linkages. Sensing devices. Motor and fan shafts. Gas, electric, and water meters.
Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 08 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in this Section. 2. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. 2.
1.4
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. Label each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application area.
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
MPI Standards: 1. 2.
B.
1.5
Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
Source Limitations: Obtain all filler, primer, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coat, unless finish coat manufacturer recommends, in writing, alternate products. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 9113 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Product name or title of material. Product description (generic classification or binder type). Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. Thinning instructions. Application instructions. Color name and number. VOC content.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. 2. 3.
1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. Protect from freezing.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B.
Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.
1.7
Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature and humidity limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
B.
Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material color and sheen applied.
Deliver all extra materials to Owner, unless directed otherwise.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 9113 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Benjamin Moore & Co. Duron, Inc. ICI Paints. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
PAINT, GENERAL A.
Material Compatibility: 1.
2. B. 2.3
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
Colors: As indicated on drawings. PRODUCTS LIST
A.
Refer to painting schedule in Part 3 for all product specification relating all selective conditions and paint systems to MPI standards and VOC content.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Concrete: 12 percent. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. Wood: 15 percent. Plaster: 12 percent. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.
D.
Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 9113 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
3.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.
PREPARATION A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B.
Thoroughly examine all surfaces to be painted prior to any application and notify Architect immediately if any are unacceptable to receive product, color, and sheen specified.
C.
Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surfaceapplied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. 2.
D.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.
E.
Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Clay Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content of surfaces or alkalinity of mortar joints to be painted exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
G.
Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
H.
Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
I.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
J.
Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation.
K.
Wood Substrates:
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 9113 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3. 4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
L.
Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.
M.
Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry.
N.
Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. Verify finish level of drywall required for paint sheen specified.
3.3
APPLICATION A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. Finish exterior doors on top, bottom, and side edges the same as the exterior face, unless noted otherwise.
B.
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
E.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 9113 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1.
2. 3.
3.5
Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product requirements. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplyingpaint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.6
EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1.
Latex System: MPI EXT 5.3A. a. b. c.
Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer: MPI #26, VOC Content Range of E1. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. Topcoat: Exterior latex Semigloss: MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5), VOC Content Range of E, E2, or E3.
END OF SECTION 09 9113
EXTERIOR PAINTING
09 9113 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, notify Architect for clarification. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1.
C.
Concrete. Concrete masonry units (CMU). Steel. Galvanized metal. Wood. Gypsum board (and skim coat surfaces).
Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.
Formatted: Border: Top: (No border), Bottom: (No border), Left: (No border), Right: (No border)
Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1.
Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. b. c. d. f.e. g.f. h.g. i.h. j.i. j.
Formatted: Border: Top: (No border), Bottom: (No border), Left: (No border), Right: (No border)
Architectural woodwork and casework. Acoustical wall panels. Metal toilet enclosures. Metal lockers. Elevator entrance doors and frames. Elevator equipment. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment, unless noted otherwise. Light fixtures. Distribution cabinets. Aluminum framing and glass.
INTERIOR PAINTING
Formatted: Bullets and Numbering
09 9123 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
D.
Formatted: Border: Top: (No border), Bottom: (No border), Left: (No border), Right: (No border)
Valve and damper operators. Linkages. Sensing devices. Motor and fan shafts.
Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.3
Formatted: Border: Top: (No border), Bottom: (No border), Left: (No border), Right: (No border)
Anodized aluminum. Stainless steel. Chromium plate. Copper. Bronze and brass.
Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. b. c. d.
5.
Formatted: Border: Top: (No border), Bottom: (No border), Left: (No border), Right: (No border)
Foundation spaces. Furred areas. Ceiling plenums. Utility tunnels. Pipe spaces. Duct shafts. Elevator shafts.
Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. b. c. d. e.
4.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
3.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. Division 09 Section "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on interior wood substrates. Division 09 Section "High Performance Coatings" for surface preparation and the applications of specialty coating products and epoxy based systems for various substrates.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.
C.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 9123 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.
1.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
MPI Standards: 1. 2.
B.
1.5
Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
Source Limitations: Obtain all filler, primer, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coat, unless finish coat manufacturer recommends, in writing, alternate products. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
B.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. 2. 3.
1.6
Product name or title of material. Product description (generic classification or binder type). Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. Thinning instructions. Application instructions. Color name and number. VOC content.
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. Protect from freezing.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B.
Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 9123 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
B.
Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material, color, and sheen applied.
Deliver all extra materials to Owner, unless directed otherwise.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.2
Benjamin Moore & Co. Duron, Inc. ICI Paints. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
PAINT, GENERAL A.
Material Compatibility: 1.
2. B.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. Dry-Fog/Dry-Fall (Flat) Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 9123 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 8. 9. C.
2.
Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340 g/L. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: VOC content of not more than 420 g/L.
Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w. x. y.
2.3
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Acrolein. Acrylonitrile. Antimony. Benzene. Butyl benzyl phthalate. Cadmium. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. Di-n-butyl phthalate. Di-n-octyl phthalate. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. Diethyl phthalate. Dimethyl phthalate. Ethylbenzene. Formaldehyde. Hexavalent chromium. Isophorone. Lead. Mercury. Methyl ethyl ketone. Methyl isobutyl ketone. Methylene chloride. Naphthalene. Toluene (methylbenzene). 1,1,1-trichloroethane. Vinyl chloride.
Colors: As selected by owner from manufacturer's full range PRODUCTS LIST
A.
Refer to Painting Schedule in Part 3 for all product specifications relating selevtive conditions and paint systems to MPI standards and VOC Content.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 9123 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Concrete: 12 percent. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. Wood: 15 percent. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. Plaster: 12 percent.
C.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.
D.
Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1.
3.2
Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.
PREPARATION A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Thoroughly examine all surfaces to be painted prior to any application and notify Architect immediately if any are unacceptable to receive product, color, and sheen specified.
C.
Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surfaceapplied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. 2.
D.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 9123 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
E.
Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Clay Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content of surfaces or alkalinity of mortar joints to be painted exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
G.
Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
H.
Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
I.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
J.
Wood Substrates: 1. 2. 3. 4.
K.
3.3
Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
Gypsum Board Substrates and other Skim Coated Surfaces: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. Verify finish level of drywall required for paint sheen specified APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2.
3.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
B.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
C.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 9123 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D.
Mechanical Work: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
2.
Uninsulated metal piping. Uninsulated plastic piping. Pipe hangers and supports. Insulated ducts having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
Electrical Work: a. b. c. d.
Switchgear. Panelboards. Electrical equipment that is indicated to be field painted. Conduits, junction boxes, and fittings.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.
3.4
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 1.
E.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1.
2. 3.
Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplyingpaint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 9123 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.6
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A.
Colors: All colors are to be selected by Owner at later date. 1.
B.
Contractors to qualify on bid any premium associated with future selection of unknown dark colors effecting pricing on tinted or specialty primers.
Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1.
Latex System: MPI INT 3.1E. a. b. c.
C.
CMU Substrates: 1.
Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A. a. b. c.
D.
Prime Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. Topcoat: Interior latex Semigloss: MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5), VOC Content Range of E1, E2, or E3.
Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler: MPI #4, VOC Content Range of E2 or E3. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. Topcoat: Interior latex Semigloss: MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5), VOC Content Range of E1, E2, or E3.
Steel Substrates: 1.
High performance Architectural Latex System:
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 9123 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 a. b.
E.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Prime Coat: Rust-inhibitive water based primer: MPI #107, VOC Content Range of E1, E2, or E3. Intermediate and Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex. Sheen chosen by Owner [low sheen: MPI #138] [Eggshell: MPI #139] [Satin: MPI #140] [Semi gloss: MPI #141]
Gypsum Board Substrates: 1.
Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. a. b. c.
2.
Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer: MPI #50, VOC Content Range of E1, E2, or E3. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. Topcoat: Interior latex Semigloss: MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5), VOC Content Range of E1, E2, or E3.
Epoxy System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex interior [MPI #50] b. Intermediate Coat: epoxy, gloss [MPI #77] c. Top Coat: epoxy, gloss [MPI #77]
END OF SECTION 09 9123
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 9123 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 10 2113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. Phenolic-core toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.
B.
Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for blocking. 2. Division 10 Section "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. 2. 3.
C.
1.4
Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. 1.5
Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment, from manufacturer. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10 2113 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Comply with requirements in GSA's CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete."
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. 2.
C.
1.7
Flame-Spread Index: [25] [75] [200] or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.
B.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
C.
Brass Castings: ASTM B 584.
D.
Brass Extrusions: ASTM B 455.
E.
Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected for smoothness. 1.
Hot-Dip Galvanized: ASTM A 653/A 653M, either hot-dip galvanized or galvannealed.
F.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
G.
Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.
H.
Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings.
I.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 with 45-lb (20.4-kg) density.
J.
Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, general-purpose HGS grade, 0.048-inch (1.2-mm) nominal thickness.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10 2113 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 K.
2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." PHENOLIC-CORE UNITS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.
B.
Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced.
C.
Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung.
D.
Door, Panel and Screen Construction: Solid phenolic-core panel material with melamine facing on both sides fused to substrate during panel manufacture (not separately laminated), and with eased and polished edges. Provide minimum 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick panels.
E.
Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Fabricated from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.031inch (0.79-mm) nominal thickness and 3 inches (76 mm) high, finished to match hardware.
F.
Brackets (Fittings): 1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; aluminum.
G.
Phenolic-Panel Finish: 1. 2.
2.3
Facing Sheet Finish: One color and pattern in each room. Color and Pattern: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range with manufacturer's standard through-color core matching face sheet.
ACCESSORIES A.
Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6.
Material: Stainless steel. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard recessed latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10 2113 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
C.
Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistanttype heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.
2.4
FABRICATION A.
Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
B.
Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
C.
Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide, inswinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1.
Maximum Clearances: a. b.
Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm). Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm).
B.
Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.
C.
Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches (51 mm) into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb, and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10 2113 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D.
3.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact. ADJUSTING
A.
Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION 102113
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10 2113 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 10 2213 - WIRE MESH PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
Section Includes: 1.
Standard-duty wire mesh partitions. 1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Intermediate Crimp: Wires pass over one and under the next adjacent wire in both directions, with wires crimped before weaving and with extra crimps between the intersections.
B.
Lock Crimp: Deep crimps at points of the intersection that lock wires securely in place. 1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: 1. 2.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Indicate clearances required for operation of doors and gates. 1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
10 2213 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver wire mesh items with cardboard protectors on perimeters of panels and doors and with posts wrapped to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Use vented plastic.
B.
Inventory wire mesh partition door hardware on receipt, and provide secure lockup for wire mesh partition door hardware delivered to Project site. 1.
Tag each item or package separately with identification, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. 1.7
A.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with wire mesh units by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1.
Wire Crafters, LLC; 6208 Strawberry Lane, Louisville, KY, 40214-2900; Style 840 Wire Partitions. a. Request for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Division 01 Section “Product requirements.” b. Acceptable subsitutions: 1) Acorn Wire & Iron Works, LLC. 2) American Woven Wire Corporation. 3) Indiana Wire Products, Inc. 4) Miller Wire Works, Inc. 2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Steel Wire: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).
B.
Steel Plates, Channels, Angles, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C.
Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
D.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.
E.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed structural-steel tubing or ASTM A 513, Type 5, mandrel-drawn mechanical tubing.
WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
10 2213 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
F.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with G60 (Z180) zinc (galvanized) or A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.
G.
Panel-to-Panel Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
H.
Post-Installed Anchors: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1.
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components are zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Power-Driven Fasteners: ICC-ES AC70.
J.
Seismic Bracing: Angles with legs not less than 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) wide, formed from 0.040inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel sheet; with bolted connections and 1/4-inch- (6mm-) diameter bolts.
K.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer, complying with MPI#79. 1.
Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.
L.
Zinc-Rich Primer: Compatible with topcoat, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29.
M.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. 2.3
A.
STANDARD-DUTY WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
Wire Mesh Partitions: Factory-assembled modular sized panels stacked between post uprights, complete with all components, accessories, hardware, and fasteners; interchangeable units that allow expansion without waste of components. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Style: Full mesh. Provide fixed sections unless otherwise indicated. Post Spacing: As required to suit dimensions, using manufacturer's standard panel widths. Provide special panels of same construction as adjacent panels to achieve horizontal partition dimensions indicated. Panel frames bolted together and to posts. Height: Floor to bottom of roof deck. Toe Space - Storage Compartments: No open space below bottom panel; fit panel tight to floor. Finish: Electrostatic sprayed enamel, in manufacturer's standard color.
WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
10 2213 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Posts: Square 2 by 2 inch (50 by 50 mm) 14 gauge steel tube. 1. Factory drilled holes for attaching panels. 2. Welded-on base plate, 2 by 7 by 1/4 inch (50 by 178 by 6 mm), with factory drilled holes for floor anchors. 3. Corner Posts: Same as in-line posts. 4. Provide appropriate hardware for attaching panels to posts and posts to floor.
C.
Wire Mesh Panels: Steel angle frames with wire mesh securely welded in place; frame joints coped at corner and securely welded; factory drilled holes for fasteners. 1. Wire Mesh: 8 gauge, 0.162 inch (4 mm) steel wire woven into 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) square mesh. 2. Frame: 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 1/8 inch (32 by 32 by 3 mm) hot rolled steel angle. 3. Vertical Panel Stiffeners: 1/4 by 3/4 inch (6 by 19 mm) steel bar securely welded to frame behind mesh on panels 4 feet (1219 mm) or wider.
D.
Door Sections: Matching wire mesh panels. 1. Frame: 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 1/8 inch (32 by 32 by 3 mm) hot rolled steel angle. 2. Stiffeners: Two horizontal and one vertical stiffener of 1/4 by 3/4 inch (6 by 19 mm) flat hot rolled steel bar. 3. Hinged Doors: a. Single Door Width: 36 inches (915 mm). b. Door Opening Height: 87-1/4 inches (2216 mm), with transom of similar construction to full height of partition. c. Hinges: 3 5-knuckle tight-pin butt hinges fastened to door panel and frame. 4. Sliding Doors: a. Sliding door width: 60 inches b. Door Opening Height: 96-1/4 inches with transom of similar construction to full height of partition. c. Sliding door shall be equipped with two 4 wheel trolley trucks, 1 7/8” x 2 3/8” door track, pad lock lugs, and keeper assembly. 5. Locking: Padlock lugs. 6. Locking: Mortise cylinder lock operated by key outside, recessed thumb turn knob inside.
E.
Accessories: 1. Adjustable Filler Panels: 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick steel sheet, capable of filling openings from 2 to 12 inches (50 to 300 mm). 2. Wall Clips: Manufacturer's standard, cold-rolled steel sheet; allowing up to 1 inch (25 mm) of adjustment.
F.
Finish: Enamel finish. 2.4
A.
FABRICATION
General: Fabricate wire mesh items from components of sizes not less than those indicated. Use larger-sized components as recommended by wire mesh item manufacturer. Furnish bolts,
WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
10 2213 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
hardware, and accessories required for complete installation with manufacturer's standard finishes. 1. 2. B.
Fabricate wire mesh items to be readily disassembled. Welding: Weld corner joints of framing and grind smooth, leaving no evidence of joint.
Standard- Duty Wire Mesh Partitions: Fabricate wire mesh partitions with cutouts for pipes, ducts, beams, and other items indicated. Finish edges of cutouts to provide a neat, protective edge. 1. 2.
Mesh: Weld mesh to framing. Framing: Fabricate framing with mortise and tenon corner construction. a.
b. c. 3. 4. 5.
Fabricate wire mesh partitions with 3 to 4 inches (75 to 100 mm) of clear space between finished floor and bottom horizontal framing. Fabricate wire mesh partitions with bottom horizontal framing flush with finished floor. Doors: Align bottom of door with bottom of adjacent panels. a.
6.
For doors that do not extend full height of partition, provide transom over door, fabricated from same mesh and framing as partition panels.
Hardware Preparation: Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors and framing as required to install hardware. 2.5
A.
Provide horizontal stiffeners as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by panel height and as recommended by wire mesh partition manufacturer. Weld horizontal stiffeners to vertical framing. Fabricate three- and four-way intersections using intersection posts and manufacturer's standard connecting clips and fasteners. Fabricate partition and door framing with slotted holes for connecting adjacent panels.
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1.
Do not quench or apply post-galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.
B.
Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean items of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.
C.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
D.
Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of wire mesh units unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
10 2213 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 E.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard enamel finish, suitable for use indicated, with a minimum dry film thickness of [2 mils (0.05 mm)] 1.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine floors for suitable conditions where wire mesh items will be installed.
C.
Examine walls to which wire mesh items will be attached for properly located blocking, grounds, and other solid backing for attachment of support fasteners.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2
A.
Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter postinstalled expansion anchors at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. through anchor clips located at each post and corner. Shim anchor clips as required to achieve level and plumb installation. 1.
B.
Anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if indicated on Shop Drawings.
Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter postinstalled expansion anchors at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through floor shoes located at each post and corner. Adjust wire mesh partition posts in floor shoes to achieve level and plumb installation. 1.
C.
WIRE MESH PARTITIONS ERECTION
Anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if indicated on Shop Drawings.
Anchor wire mesh partitions to walls at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through back corner panel framing and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use expansion anchors. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. For wood stud partitions, use lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, use lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.
WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
10 2213 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 5.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads.
D.
Secure top capping bars to top framing channels with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter "U" bolts spaced not more than 28 inches (700 mm) o.c.
E.
Provide line posts at locations indicated or, if not indicated, as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.
On each side of sliding-door openings. For partitions that are 7 to 9 feet (2.1 to 2.7 m) high, spaced at 15 to 20 feet (4.6 to 6.1 m) o.c. For partitions that are 10 to 12 feet (3.0 to 3.7 m) high, located between every other panel. For partitions that are more than 12 feet (3.7 m) high, located between each panel.
F.
Provide seismic supports and bracing as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer and as required for stability, extending and fastening members to supporting structure.
G.
Where standard-width wire mesh partition panels do not fill entire length of run, provide adjustable filler panels to fill openings.
H.
Install doors complete with door hardware.
I.
Install service windows complete with window hardware.
J.
Bolt accessories to wire mesh partition framing. 3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjust doors gates to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. Adjust hardware to function smoothly. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
B.
Remove and replace defective work, including doors and framing that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
C.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
D.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
E.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
10 2213 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
END OF SECTION 102213
WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
10 2213 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 10 2800 - TOILET, AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.3
Public-use washroom accessories. Public-use shower room accessories. Underlavatory guards.
Division 10 Section “Toilet Compartments” for compartments and screens
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Construction details and dimensions. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. Material and finish descriptions. Features that will be included for Project. Manufacturer's warranty.
Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. 2.
Identify locations using room designations indicated. Identify products using designations indicated.
C.
Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
D.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
TOILET, AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10 2800 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.5
Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer. COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B.
Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.
1.6
WARRANTY A.
Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.
C.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036inch minimum nominal thickness.
D.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.
E.
Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: fabrication.
F.
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-andtheft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
G.
Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
H.
Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.
TOILET, AND BATH ACCESSORIES
ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after
10 2800 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 I. 2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
C.
Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
D.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick; B-4262. Mounting: Surface mounted. Minimum Capacity: 400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). Lockset: Tumbler type. Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front.
Liquid-Soap Dispenser: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
F.
Basis-of-Design Product: Kimberly-Clark Professional; Everyday Best Value Single Roll Tissue Dispensor; Model #09021. Description: Double-roll dispenser. Mounting: Surface mounted. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- diameter tissue rolls. Material and Finish: ABS plastic, smoke gray.
Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
E.
A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. American Specialties, Inc. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Bradley Corporation. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. Kimberly-Clark Professional.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick – 4112. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted. Capacity: 40 oz. Materials: Corrosion Resistant Valve, Stainless Steel, No. 4 Finish (Satin) Container. Lockset: Tumbler type. Refill Indicator: Window type.
Grab Bar:
TOILET, AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10 2800 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3.
G.
4. 5.
Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. Configuration and Length: Straight, 36 inches and 42 inches long long.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick – B270. Mounting: Surface mounted. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with tumbler lockset. Receptacle: Removable. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Mirror Unit: 1. 2.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick – B290. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch thick. a.
3.
4.
Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.
Size: As indicated on Drawings for multiple occupancy toilet rooms. 18” x 36” for single occupancy toilet rooms.
Robe Hook: 1. 2. 3.
2.3
Corners: Welded and ground smooth.
Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a.
I.
Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin).
Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit: 1. 2. 3.
H.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick – B6806.99x36 and B6806.99x42. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. a.
4. 5.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick – B76717. Mounting: Single-prong unit. Dispenser Face: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
PUBLIC-USE SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1.
A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
TOILET, AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10 2800 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C.
American Specialties, Inc. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Bradley Corporation. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.
Basis-of-Design Product: ASI – 1204. Description: 1-1/4-inch OD; fabricated from nominal 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel. Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed fasteners. Finish: No. 4 (satin).
Shower Curtain – Provide one (1) each per shower stall: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
2.4
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Shower Curtain Rod – Provide one (1) each per shower stall: 1. 2. 3. 4.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Basis-of-Design Product: ASI – 1200V. Size: Minimum 12 inches wider than opening by 72 inches high. Material: Nylon-reinforced vinyl, minimum 10 oz. or 0.012-inch- thick vinyl, with integral antibacterial agent. Color: White. Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches o.c. through top hem. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless-steel, spring wire curtain hooks with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain grommet.
UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2.
C.
Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. Truebro by IPS Corporation.
Underlavatory Guard: 1. 2.
3.
Basis-of-Design Product: Truebro; Lavguard 2. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
TOILET, AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10 2800 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
FABRICATION A.
General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B.
Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B.
Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B.
Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C.
Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION 10 2800
TOILET, AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10 2800 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 105113 - METAL LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes: 1. Welded corridor lockers. 2. Locker benches. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of metal locker. 1.
B.
Shop Drawings: For metal lockers. 1. 2. 3.
C.
1.4
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal locker and bench.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show locker trim and accessories. Include locker identification system and numbering sequence.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.
METAL LOCKERS
10 5113 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
Full-size units of the following metal locker hardware items equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than five units: a. b. c.
1.7
Locks. Identification plates. Hooks.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
1.8
Do not deliver metal lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for their installation. FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of recessed openings by field measurements before fabrication. COORDINATION
A.
1.10 A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that metal lockers can be supported and installed as indicated. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period. 1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.
2. 3.
Structural failures. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.
Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded. Warranty Period for Welded Metal Lockers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
METAL LOCKERS
10 5113 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Source Limitations: Obtain metal lockers, locker benches, and accessories from single source from single locker manufacturer. 1.
2.2
Obtain locks from single lock manufacturer.
WELDED CORRIDOR LOCKERS A.
Products: Basis of design is identified on the drawings. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
B.
Art Metal Products; Bulldog Corridor DeBourgh Mfg. Co; Angle Iron Corridor. List Industries Inc; Marquis Protector. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC; All-Welded. Olympus Lockers & Storage Products, Inc; Hercules. Penco Products, Inc; All-Welded. Republic Storage Systems Company; All-Welded Ventilated.
Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.075-inch (1.90-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at horizontal edges. 1. 2.
Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches (381 mm) wide; welded to inner face of doors. Door Style Vented panel as follows: a.
C.
Body: Assembled by welding body components together. Fabricate from unperforated steel sheet with thicknesses as follows: 1. 2. 3.
D.
Louvered Vents: No fewer than three louver openings at top and bottom for double-tier.
Tops, Bottoms, and Sides: 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal thickness. Backs: 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal thickness. Shelves: 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal thickness, with double bend at front and single bend at sides and back.
Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral, full-height door strikes on vertical main frames. 1.
Cross Frames between Tiers: Channel formed and fabricated from same material as main frames; welded to vertical main frames.
METAL LOCKERS
10 5113 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
E.
Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-installed rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed; fabricated to swing 180 degrees. 1. Continuous Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel, full height.
F.
Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so locking device does not protrude beyond door face; pry and vandal resistant. 1.
Single-Point Latching: Nonmoving latch hook with steel padlock loop that projects through recessed cup and is finished to match metal locker body. a.
Latch Hook: Equip each door with one latch hook, fabricated from 0.120-inch (3.04-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded midway up full-height door strike; with resilient silencer.
G.
Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard, etched, embossed, or stamped plates, with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch (9 mm) high.
H.
Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.
I.
Coat Rods: Manufacturer's standard.
J.
Coat Rods: 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter steel, chrome finished nickel plated.
K.
Continuous Zee Base: Fabricated from, 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet. 1.
L.
Height: 4 inches (102 mm).
Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet, with a pitch of approximately 20 degrees. 1.
Closures: Vertical end type.
M.
Recess Trim: Fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.
N.
Filler Panels: Fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.
O.
Boxed End Panels: Fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.
P.
Materials: 1.
Q.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed applications.
Finish: powder coat. 1.
Color: As selected by owner from manufacturer's full range.
METAL LOCKERS
10 5113 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
LOCKER BENCHES A.
Provide bench units with overall assembly height of 17-1/2 inches.
B.
Size: Locker room bench tops shall be 1½” thick, 9½” wide x specified length with a homogeneous color throughout, constructed from High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) resins. Locker benches tops shall be fabricated from polymer resins compounded under high pressure, forming a single component which is waterproof, nonabsorbent and has a self lubricating surface that resists marks from pens, pencils, markers, and other writing instruments. All plastic components shall be covered with a protective plastic masking. a.
C.
Fixed Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard supports, with predrilled fastener holes for attaching bench top and anchoring to floor, complete with fasteners and anchors, and as follows: 1.
D.
2.4
Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range.
Aluminum pedestals shall be 16” high, and secured to bench tops with stainless steel tamper resistant torx head screws and secured to the floor using lead expansion shields with 2” stainless steel Phillips head machine bolts.
Freestanding Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard supports, with predrilled fastener holes for attaching bench top, complete with fasteners, and as follows: FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs. 1. 2.
Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for complete installation.
B.
Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.
C.
Equipment: Provide each locker with an identification plate and the following equipment: 1. Double-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall hooks. 2. Coat Rods: For each compartment of each locker.
D.
Welded Construction: Factory preassemble metal lockers by welding all joints, seams, and connections; with no bolts, nuts, screws, or rivets used in assembly of main locker groups. Factory weld main locker groups into one-piece structures. Grind exposed welds flush.
E.
Continuous Base: Formed into channel or zee profile for stiffness, and fabricated in lengths as long as practical to enclose base and base ends of metal lockers; finished to match lockers.
METAL LOCKERS
10 5113 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 F.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical, without visible fasteners at splice locations; finished to match lockers. 1.
Sloping-top corner fillers, mitered.
G.
Individual Sloping Tops: Fabricated in width to fit one locker frame in lieu of flat locker tops; with integral back; finished to match lockers. Provide wedge-shaped divider panels between lockers.
H.
Recess Trim: Fabricated with minimum 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) face width and in lengths as long as practical; finished to match lockers.
I.
Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. Provide slipjoint filler angle formed to receive filler panel.
J.
Boxed End Panels: Fabricated with 1-inch- (25-mm-) wide edge dimension, and designed for concealing fasteners and holes at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers. 1.
K.
Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers. 1.
L.
2.5
Provide one-piece panels for double-row (back-to-back) locker ends.
Provide one-piece panels for double-row (back-to-back) locker ends.
Center Dividers: Full-depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; finished to match lockers. ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.
B.
Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate. 1. 2.
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
METAL LOCKERS
10 5113 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
General: Install lockers level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. 1.
2. 3.
Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36 inches (910 mm) o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers of lockers and to floor. Anchor back-to-back metal lockers to floor.
B.
Welded Lockers: Connect groups together with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on face frames.
C.
Equipment: 1. 2. 3.
Attach hooks with at least two fasteners. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on Drawings. a. b.
D.
Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two aluminum rivets. Attach plates to upper shelf of each open-front metal locker, centered, with a least two aluminum rivets.
Trim: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockers with concealed clips. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated on Drawings. Attach sloping-top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends. Attach boxed end panels using concealed fasteners to conceal exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers. Attach finished end panels using fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers.
E.
Fixed Locker Benches: Provide no fewer than two pedestals for each bench, uniformly spaced not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) apart. Securely fasten tops of pedestals to undersides of bench tops, and anchor bases to floor.
F.
Freestanding Locker Benches: Place benches in locations indicated on Drawings.
METAL LOCKERS
10 5113 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
ADJUSTING A.
3.4
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. PROTECTION
A.
Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use during construction.
B.
Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 10 5113
METAL LOCKERS
10 5113 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 10 7516 - GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section includes ground-set flagpoles made from aluminum.
B.
Owner-Furnished Material: (2) Flags.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product. 1.
B.
Shop Drawings: For flagpoles. 1. 2.
1.4
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operating characteristics, fittings, accessories, and finishes for flagpoles.
Include plans, elevations, and attachment details. Show general arrangement, jointing, fittings, accessories, grounding, anchoring, and support. Include section, and details of foundation system.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Data: manuals.
For flagpoles to include in operation and maintenance
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other protective container.
GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES
10 7516 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain flagpoles as complete units, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices, from single source from single manufacturer. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports, shall withstand design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. 2.
2.3
Wind Loads: Determine according to NAAMM FP 1001. Basic wind speed for Project location is 90 MPH. Base flagpole design on nylon or cotton flags of maximum standard size suitable for use with flagpole or flag size indicated, whichever is more stringent.
ALUMINUM FLAGPOLES A.
Aluminum Flagpoles: Entasis-tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241/B 241M, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch (4.8 mm). 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.
Acme/Lingo Flagpoles LLC. American Flagpole; a Kearney-National Inc. company. Baartol Company. Concord Industries, Inc. Eder Flag Manufacturing Company, Inc. Ewing Flagpoles. Morgan-Francis Flagpoles and Accessories. Pole-Tech Company Inc. U.S. Flag & Flagpole Supply, LP.
B.
Exposed Height: 25 feet (7.5 m).
C.
Construct flagpoles in one piece if possible. If more than one piece is necessary, comply with the following: 1. 2.
D.
Fabricate shop and field joints without using fasteners, screw collars, or lead calking. Provide flush hairline joints using self-aligning, snug-fitting, internal sleeves.
Metal Foundation Tube: Manufacturer's standard corrugated-steel foundation tube, 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) wall thickness with 3/16-inch (4.8-mm) steel bottom plate and support plate; 3/4-
GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES
10 7516 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
inch- (19-mm-) diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges welded together. Galvanize foundation tube after assembly. Furnish loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation tube for plumbing pole. 1. 2.4
Flashing Collar: Same material and finish as flagpole.
FITTINGS A.
Finial Ball: Flush-seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match flagpole-butt diameter. 1. Spun copper alloy, finished to match flagpole.
B.
External Halyard: Ball-bearing, nonfouling, revolving truck assembly of cast metal with continuous 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter, braided polypropylene halyard and 9-inch (228-mm) cast-metal cleats with fasteners. Finish exposed metal surfaces to match flagpole. 1. 2. 3.
Halyards and Cleats: Provide one Halyard and one Cleat at each flagpole. Halyard Flag Snaps: Stainless-steel swivel snap hooks Furnish two per halyard. Plastic Halyard Flag Clips: Made from injection-molded, UV-stabilized, acetal resin (Delrin). Clips attach to flag and have two eyes for inserting both runs of halyards. Furnish two per halyard. a.
2.5
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Quiet Halyard" flag clasp by Acme/Lingo Flagpoles LLC.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Drainage Material: Crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; coarse aggregate.
B.
Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M, fine aggregate.
C.
Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone joint sealant complying with requirements in Division 09 Section “Joint Sealants” use NT (Non Traffic) and for use M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, for use O.
D.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
2.6
ALUMINUM FINISHES A.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31.
GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES
10 7516 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Prepare uncoated metal flagpoles that are set in foundation tubes by painting below-grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
B.
Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. Place and compact drainage material at excavation bottom.
C.
Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of flagpole base at grade. Secure and brace forms to prevent displacement during concreting.
D.
Foundation Tube: Place foundation tube, center, and brace to prevent displacement during concreting. Place concrete. Plumb and level foundation tube and allow concrete to cure.
E.
Sleeves: Locate and secure sleeves in forms by bracing to reinforcement and forms.
F.
Anchor Bolts: reinforcement.
G.
Place concrete, as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist-cure exposed concrete for no fewer than seven days or use nonstaining curing compound.
H.
Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of concrete base.
3.2
Locate and secure anchor bolts in forms with templates and by tying to
FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION A.
General: Install flagpoles where indicated and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Foundation Tube: Place flagpole in tube, seated on bottom plate between steel centering wedges, and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2-inch (50mm) layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing collar.
END OF SECTION 10 7516
GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES
10 7516 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 13 3419 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2.
1.3
Structural-steel framing. Metal roof panels. Metal wall panels. Thermal insulation. Doors and frames. Accessories.
Division 08 Section “Sectional Doors.” Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.”
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
Terminology Standard: See MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual" for definitions of terms for metal building system construction not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of metal building system component. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Structural-steel-framing system. Metal roof panels. Metal wall panels. Insulation and vapor retarder facings. Flashing and trim. Doors. Accessories.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Shop Drawings: For the following metal building system components. elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.
2.
Include plans,
Anchor-Bolt Plans: Submit anchor-bolt plans and templates before foundation work begins. Include location, diameter, and projection of anchor bolts required to attach metal building to foundation. Indicate column reactions at each location. Structural-Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of primary and secondary framing; include provisions for openings. Indicate welds and bolted connections, distinguishing between shop and field applications. Include transverse cross-sections.
3.
Metal Roof and Wall Panel Layout Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels including methods of support. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factoryand field-assembled work; show locations of exposed fasteners. a. Show wall-mounted items including doors, windows, louvers, and lighting fixtures.
4.
Accessory Drawings: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 11/2 inches per 12 inches (1:8): a. b.
Flashing and trim. Louvers.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finish.
D.
Door Schedule: For doors and frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Include details of reinforcement.
E.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal building systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Qualification Data: For qualified erector and manufacturer.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Metal Building System Certificates: manufacturer. 1.
For each type of metal building system, from
Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following: a. b. c. d. e.
Name and location of Project. Order number. Name of manufacturer. Name of Contractor. Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 f. g. h.
i. j.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI standards for cold-rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard. Governing building code and year of edition. Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof snow load, deflection, wind loads/speeds and exposure, seismic design category or effective peak velocity-related acceleration/peak acceleration, and auxiliary loads (cranes). Load Combinations: Indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously with concentrated loads, according to governing building code. Building-Use Category: Indicate category of building use and its effect on load importance factors.
D.
Erector Certificates: For each product, from manufacturer.
E.
Manufacturer Certificates: For each product, from manufacturer.
F.
Material Test Reports: For each of the following products: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. Shop primers. Nonshrink grout.
G.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for insulation and vapor-retarder facings. Include reports for thermal resistance, fire-test-response characteristics, water-vapor transmission, and water absorption.
H.
Source quality-control reports.
I.
Field quality-control reports.
J.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
1.7
Maintenance Data: For metal panel finishes and door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer and member of MBMA. 1. 2.
Accreditation: According to the International Accreditation Service's AC472. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of comprehensive engineering analysis and Shop Drawings by a professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who practices in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing surveying services of the kind indicated.
C.
Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who specializes in erecting and installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
D.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
E.
Source Limitations: Obtain metal building system components, including primary and secondary framing and metal panel assemblies, from single source from single manufacturer.
F.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
G.
Structural Steel: Comply with AISC 360, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," for design requirements and allowable stresses.
H.
Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" for design requirements and allowable stresses. a. Wall observation and repair after metal wall panel installation.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.
B.
Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C.
Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
D.
Protect foam-plastic insulation as follows: 1. 2. 3.
Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic insulation materials to Project site before installation time. Complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.9
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when weather conditions permit metal panels to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.
B.
Field Measurements: 1.
2.
1.10
Established Dimensions for Foundations: Comply with established dimensions on approved anchor-bolt plans, establishing foundation dimensions and proceeding with fabricating structural framing without field measurements. Coordinate anchor-bolt installation to ensure that actual anchorage dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Established Dimensions for Metal Panels: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, either establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal panels without field measurements, or allow for field trimming metal panels. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual building dimensions, locations of structural members, and openings correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-bolt inserts into foundation walls and footings. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B.
Coordinate metal panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of supports and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.11 A.
WARRANTY Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1.
Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. b. c.
2. B.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Weathertightness Warranty for Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that leak or otherwise fail to remain weathertight within specified warranty period. 1.
Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35.
2.2
A&S Building Systems, Inc.; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. Alliance Steel, Inc. American Buildings Company; Division of Magnatrax Corp. American Steel Building Co., Inc. BC Steel Buildings, Inc. Behlen Mfg. Co. Bigbee Steel Buildings, Inc. Butler Manufacturing Company; a BlueScope Steel company. CBC Steel Buildings; Division of Magnatrax Corp. Ceco Building Systems; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. Chief Buildings; Division of Chief Industries, Inc. Elite Structures, Inc. Garco Building Systems; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. Gulf States Manufacturers, Inc.; Division of Magnatrax Corp. Inland Buildings; Subsidiary of Behlen Mfg. Co. Kirby Building Systems; Division of Magnatrax Corp. Mesco Building Solutions; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. Metallic Building Company; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. Metco Metal Supply. Mid-West Steel Building Company; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. Nucor Building Systems. Oakland Metal Buildings, Inc. Olympia Steel Building Systems. Package Industries, Inc. Pinnacle Structures, Inc. Robertson Building Systems; an NCI company. Ruffin Building Systems, Inc. Schulte Building Systems, LLP. Spirco Manufacturing. Star Building Systems; an NCI company. Tyler Building Systems, L.P. USA, Inc. VP Buildings; a United Dominion company. Vulcan Steel Structures, Inc. Whirlwind Building Systems.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS A.
Description: Provide a complete, integrated set of metal building system manufacturer's standard mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a metal building system
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
capable of withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building interior. 1. B.
Provide metal building system of size and with bay spacings, roof slopes, and spans indicated.
Primary-Frame Type: 1.
Rigid Clear Span: Solid-member, structural-framing system without interior columns.
C.
End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard, for buildings not required to be expandable, consisting of load-bearing end-wall and corner columns and rafters.
D.
End-Wall Framing: Engineer end walls to be expandable. Provide primary frame, capable of supporting full-bay design loads, and end-wall columns.
E.
Secondary-Frame Type: (bypass) girts.
F.
Eave Height: As indicated on drawings.
G.
Bay Spacing: As indicated on drawings.
H.
Roof Slope: As indicated on drawings.
I.
Roof System: Manufacturer's standard vertical-rib, standing-seam metal roof panels with fieldinstalled insulation.
J.
Exterior Wall System: Manufacturer's standard tapered-rib, exposed-fastener metal wall panels.
2.3
Manufacturer's standard purlins and joists and exterior-framed
METAL BUILDING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A.
Delegated Design: Design metal building system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Structural Performance: Metal building systems shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to procedures in MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual." 1. 2. 3.
Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. Design Loads: As required by ASCE/SEI 7 and as indicated on structural drawings. Deflection Limits: Design metal building system assemblies to withstand design loads with deflections no greater than the following: a. b. c. d.
Purlins and Rafters: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. Girts: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the span. Metal Roof Panels: Vertical deflection of 1/180 of the span. Metal Wall Panels: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the span.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 e. 4.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Design secondary-framing system to accommodate deflection of primary framing and construction tolerances, and to maintain clearances at openings.
Drift Limits: Engineer building structure to withstand design loads with drift limits no greater than the following: a.
5.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Lateral Drift: Maximum of 1/400 of the building height.
Metal panel assemblies shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASTM E 1592.
C.
Seismic Performance: Metal building systems shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
D.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; material surfaces.
E.
Air Infiltration for Metal Roof Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at negative test-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
F.
Air Infiltration for Metal Wall Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft of wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
G.
Water Penetration for Metal Roof Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at test-pressure difference of 2.86 lbf/sq. ft.
H.
Water Penetration for Metal Wall Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a wind-load design pressure of not less than 2.86 lbf/sq. ft.
I.
Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for Class 90.
J.
Thermal Performance: Provide insulated metal panel assemblies with the following maximum U-factors and minimum R-values for opaque elements when tested according to ASTM C 1363 or ASTM C 518: 1.
Metal Roof Panel Assemblies: As chosen by Owner from manufacturer’s selection.
2.
Metal Wall Panel Assemblies: N/A
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
STRUCTURAL-STEEL FRAMING A.
Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary-framing system, designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse and lean-to frames; rafter, rake, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, end-wall, and corner columns; and wind bracing. 1.
General: Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for field-bolted assembly. Provide frame span and spacing indicated. a.
2. 3. 4. 5. B.
Rigid Clear-Span Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Interior columns are not permitted. Frame Configuration: Single gable. Exterior Column Type: Tapered. Rafter Type: Tapered.
End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary end-wall framing fabricated for fieldbolted assembly to comply with the following: 1. 2.
C.
Slight variations in span and spacing may be acceptable if necessary to comply with manufacturer's standard, as approved by Architect.
End-Wall and Corner Columns: I-shaped sections fabricated from structural-steel shapes; shop-welded, built-up steel plates; or C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet. End-Wall Rafters: C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; or I-shaped sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes.
Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard secondary framing, including purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural members. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate framing from either cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or roll-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, prepainted with coil coating, to comply with the following: 1.
Purlins: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from built-up steel plates, steel sheet, or structural-steel shapes; minimum 2-1/2-inch- (64-mm-) wide flanges. a.
2. 3.
Purlins: Steel joists of depths indicated. Girts: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from built-up steel plates, steel sheet, or structural-steel shapes. Form ends of Z-sections with stiffening lips angled 40 to 50 degrees from flange, with minimum 2-1/2-inch- (64-mm-) wide flanges. a.
4. 5.
Depth: As needed to comply with system performance requirements.
Depth: As indicated.
Eave Struts: Unequal-flange, C-shaped sections; fabricated from built-up steel plates, steel sheet, or structural-steel shapes; to provide adequate backup for metal panels. Flange Bracing: Minimum 2-by-2-by-1/8-inch (51-by-51-by-3-mm) structural-steel angles or 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter, cold-formed structural tubing to stiffen primaryframe flanges.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
11.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Sag Bracing: Minimum 1-by-1-by-1/8-inch (25-by-25-by-3-mm) structural-steel angles. Base or Sill Angles: Minimum 3-by-2-inch (76-by-51-mm) zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. Purlin and Girt Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips fabricated from steel sheet. Provide galvanized clips where clips are connected to galvanized framing members. Secondary End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from structural-steel sheet. Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or structural-steel shapes. Frame head and jamb of door openings and head, jamb, and sill of other openings. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet; designed to withstand required loads.
Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing as follows: 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 (345); minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter steel; threaded full length or threaded a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) at each end. Cable: ASTM A 475, 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter, extra-high-strength grade, Class B, zinc-coated, seven-strand steel; with threaded end anchors. Angles: Fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing, of size required to withstand design loads. Rigid Portal Frames: Fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structuralsteel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads. Fixed-Base Columns: Fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structuralsteel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads. Diaphragm Action of Metal Panels: Design metal building to resist wind forces through diaphragm action of metal panels. Bracing: Provide wind bracing using any method specified above, at manufacturer's option.
E.
Bolts: Provide plain-finish bolts for structural-framing components that are primed or finish painted. Provide hot-dip galvanized bolts for structural-framing components that are galvanized.
F.
Materials: 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 6.
W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380). Channels, Angles, M-Shapes, and S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380). Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380). Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B or C, structural tubing. Structural-Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 30 through 55 (205 through 380), or High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70 (310 through 480); or cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
7.
8.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Structural Steel (SS), Grades 25 through 80 (170 through 550), or High-Strength LowAlloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70 (310 through 480). Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80 (230 through 550,) or High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 50 through 80 (340 through 550); with G60 (Z180) coating designation; mill phosphatized. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. a.
9.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80 (230 through 550,) or High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 50 through 80 (340 through 550); with G90 (Z275) coating designation. b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50 or 80 (340 or 550); with Class AZ50 (AZM150) coating. Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), carbon-steel, hex-head bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) carbon-steel hex nuts; and ASTM F 844 plain (flat) steel washers. a.
10.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers. a.
11.
12.
Finish: Plain
Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. a. b. c. d. e.
14.
Finish: Plain
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with spline ends; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers, plain. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex-head steel structural bolts with spline ends. a.
13.
Finish: Plain
Configuration: Straight. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel. Finish: Plain
Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 a. b. c. d.
Configuration: Straight. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 e. 15.
G.
Finish: Plain
Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel. Finish: Plain
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
Finish: Factory primed. Apply specified primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1.
Apply primer to primary and secondary framing to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm). a.
2. 3. 2.5
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M a. b. c.
16.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Prime secondary framing formed from uncoated steel sheet to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm) on each side.
Prime galvanized members with specified primer after phosphoric acid pretreatment. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide.
METAL ROOF PANELS A.
Vertical-Rib, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels. 1.
Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet,0.028-inch (0.71-mm) nominal thickness. a. b.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2.6
Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer Color: As selected by owner from manufacturer's full range
Clips: Manufacturer's standard, floating type to accommodate thermal movement; fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. Joint Type: Panels snapped together. Joint Type: Mechanically seamed, folded according to manufacturer's standard. Panel Coverage: 16 inches (406 mm) Panel Height: 2 inches (51 mm) Uplift Rating: UL 60
METAL WALL PANELS A.
Tapered-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with raised, trapezoidal major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between major ribs; designed to be installed by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 12
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
2.7
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.022-inch (0.56-mm) nominal thickness. a. b.
2. 3. 4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer. Color: As selected by owner from manufacturer's full range.
Major-Rib Spacing: 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. Panel Coverage: 36 inches (914 mm) Panel Height: 1.25 inches (32 mm)
THERMAL INSULATION A.
Faced Metal Building Insulation: ASTM C 991, Type II, glass-fiber-blanket insulation; 0.5lb/cu. ft. (8-kg/cu. m) density; 2-inch- (51-mm-) wide, continuous, vapor-tight edge tabs; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less.
B.
Retainer Strips: 0.025-inch (0.64-mm) nominal-thickness, formed, metallic-coated steel or PVC retainer clips colored to match insulation facing.
C.
Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
2.8
DOORS AND FRAMES A.
2.9
Swinging Personnel Doors and Frames: As specified in Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames." ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. 1.
B.
Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3.
Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same material as metal roof panels. Clips: Manufacturer's standard, formed from steel sheet, designed to withstand negativeload requirements. Cleats: Manufacturer's standard, mechanically seamed cleats formed from steel sheet.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 13
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 4. 5.
6.
C.
2. 3.
Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. Thermal Spacer Blocks: Where metal panels attach directly to purlins, provide thermal spacer blocks of thickness required to provide 1-inch (25-mm) standoff; fabricated from extruded polystyrene.
Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same material as metal wall panels. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.022-inch (0.56-mm) nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match adjacent metal panels. 1.
2.
2.10
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels unless otherwise indicated. 1.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Opening Trim: Formed from [0.022-inch (0.56-mm)] [0.034-inch (0.86-mm)] nominalthickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Trim head and jamb of door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate product.
B.
Special Inspector: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following tests and inspections and to submit reports. Special inspector will verify that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and will review the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 1.
Special inspections will not be required if fabrication is performed by manufacturer registered and approved by authorities having jurisdiction to perform such Work without special inspection.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 14
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 a.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
After fabrication, submit copy of certificate of compliance to authorities having jurisdiction, certifying that Work was performed according to Contract requirements.
Testing: Test and inspect shop connections for metal buildings according to the following: 1. 2.
Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections shall be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections shall be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at inspector's option: a. b.
c. d.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
D.
Product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
2.11 A.
FABRICATION General: Design components and field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly. 1. 2.
Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals. Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of proper size, shape, and location. Members shall be free of cracks, tears, and ruptures.
B.
Tolerances: Comply with MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual" for fabrication and erection tolerances.
C.
Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly. 1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
Make shop connections by welding or by using high-strength bolts. Join flanges to webs of built-up members by a continuous, submerged arc-welding process. Brace compression flange of primary framing with steel angles or cold-formed structural tubing between frame web and purlin web or girt web, so flange compressive strength is within allowable limits for any combination of loadings. Weld clips to frames for attaching secondary framing. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime primary framing with specified primer after fabrication.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 15
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section by rollforming or break-forming, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing. 1. 2.
E.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Make shop connections by welding or by using non-high-strength bolts. Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime uncoated secondary framing with specified primer after fabrication.
Metal Panels: Fabricate and finish metal panels at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. 1.
Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of metal panel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with erector present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments to receive structural framing, with erector present, for compliance with requirements and metal building system manufacturer's tolerances. 1.
C. 3.2
Engage land surveyor to perform surveying.
Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION
A.
Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition.
B.
Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural framing secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural framing, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 16
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING A.
Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection instructions and erection drawings.
B.
Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer's professional engineer.
C.
Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated, according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.
D.
Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. 2.
3.
E.
Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. 2.
F.
Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
Level and plumb individual members of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure will be completed and in service.
Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with doublenutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line elevation. Moist-cure grout for not less than seven days after placement. 1.
Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for bolt type and joint type specified. a.
G.
Joint Type: Snug tightened or pretensioned.
Secondary Framing: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Field bolt secondary framing to clips attached to primary framing. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows. Locate canopy framing as indicated. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows, louvers, ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 17
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 H.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings. 1. 2.
Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag. Locate interior end-bay bracing only where indicated.
I.
Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing.
J.
Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC 303.
3.4
METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Examination: Examine primary and secondary framing to verify that structural-panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by manufacturer. 1.
B.
Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels, to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seams before metal panel installation.
General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1.
Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings as small as possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel finishes. a.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C.
Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports unless otherwise indicated. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar elements. Fasten with self-tapping screws. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Locate metal panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports with end laps in alignment. Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material.
Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners using power tools with controlled torque adjusted to compress EPDM washers tightly without damage to washers, screw threads, or metal panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 1.
D.
Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved in writing by manufacturer.
Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply metal panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 18
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. E.
Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer. 1. 2.
3.5
Seal metal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant the full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A.
General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. 1. 2.
B.
Install ridge and hip caps as metal roof panel work proceeds. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves and rakes. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint, at location and spacing and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Install clips to supports with self-drilling or self-tapping fasteners. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging factory-applied sealant. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so that clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners. Provide metal closures at peaks, rake edges, rake walls, and each side of ridge and hip caps.
C.
Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or selfdrilling or self-tapping screws. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings.
D.
Metal Roof Panel Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 19
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION A.
General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
Unless otherwise indicated, begin metal panel installation at corners with center of rib lined up with line of framing. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels. When two rows of metal panels are required, lap panels 4 inches (102 mm) minimum. When building height requires two rows of metal panels at gable ends, align lap of gable panels over metal wall panels at eave height. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete, and elsewhere as indicated; or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-drilling or self-tapping screws. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
B.
Metal Wall Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach metal wall panels to supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal wall panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nonaccumulative, on level, plumb, and on location lines as indicated, and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.7
THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION A.
General: Install insulation concurrently with metal panel installation, in thickness indicated to cover entire surface, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder toward warm side of construction unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces except for firestopping. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to the surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. Install factory-laminated, vapor-retarder-faced blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths, with both sets of facing tabs sealed, to provide a complete vapor retarder.
Blanket Roof Insulation: Comply with the following installation method: 1.
Over-Framing Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing. Hold in place by metal roof panels fastened to secondary framing.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 20
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
3.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place.
DOOR AND FRAME INSTALLATION A.
General: Install doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place according to manufacturers' written instructions. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components. Seal perimeter of each door frame with elastomeric sealant used for metal wall panels.
B.
Personnel Doors and Frames: Install doors and frames according to SDI A250.8. Fit non-firerated doors accurately in their respective frames, with the following clearances: 1. 2. 3. 4.
3.9
Between Doors and Frames at Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm). Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm). At Door Sills with Threshold: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). At Door Sills without Threshold: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm).
ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A.
General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1.
2. 3.
B.
Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly, including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly, including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1.
2.
Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 21
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
3.10 A.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Circular Roof Ventilators: Set ventilators complete with necessary hardware, anchors, dampers, weather guards, rain caps, and equipment supports. Mount ventilators on flat level base. Install preformed filler strips at base to seal ventilator to metal roof panels. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. 2.
Inspection of fabricators. Steel construction.
B.
Testing Agency: inspections.
C.
Tests and Inspections: 1.
2.
Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
High-Strength, Field-Bolted Connections: Connections shall be tested and inspected during installation according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, field-welded connections shall be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at inspector's option: a. b.
c. d.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
D.
Product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.11
ADJUSTING
A.
Doors: After completing installation, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.
B.
Door Hardware: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation and function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended.
C.
Roof Ventilators: After completing installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test, and adjust units to operate easily and be free of warp, twist, or distortion as needed to provide fully functioning units.
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 22
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.12
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.
C.
Touchup Painting: After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted structural framing, bearing plates, and accessories. 1. 2.
Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or by SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.
D.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
E.
Metal Panels: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. 1.
F.
Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
Doors and Frames: Immediately after installation, sand rusted or damaged areas of prime coat until smooth and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer. 1.
Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames.
END OF SECTION 13 3419
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
13 3419 - 23
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 21 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
1.3
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. Mechanical sleeve seals. Sleeves. Escutcheons. Grout. Fire-suppression equipment and piping demolition. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. Painting and finishing. Concrete bases. Supports and anchorages.
DEFINITIONS A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1.
G.
CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. 2.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 0500 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For the following: 1. 2.
B. 1.5
Mechanical sleeve seals. Escutcheons.
Welding certificates. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
B.
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. 2.
C.
1.6
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.
Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B.
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7
COORDINATION A.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for fire-suppression installations.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors to be equal to Milcor or Vent-Lock, 10” x 18” steel access, flush type for mounting in walls or ceilings with prime coating, ready for field painting. Access panels shall be provided by Fire Protection Contractor for installation by General Trades. Locate so as to provide access for all required maintenance. Provide more than one where required. Provide UL labeled panels where installed in rated walls or ceilings, these should match the rating of the structure.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 0500 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A.
Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3
JOINING MATERIALS A.
Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. b.
2.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
F.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H.
Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Plastic Piping: ASTM F 493.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 0500 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A.
Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1.
Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4.
2.5
Advance Products & Systems, Inc. Calpico, Inc. Metraflex Co. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. Others as voluntary alternate.
Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
SLEEVES A.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: longitudinal joint.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1.
0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E.
Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G.
Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.6
ESCUTCHEONS A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.
B.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 0500 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
E.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
F.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.
G.
One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
H.
Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.7
GROUT A.
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. 2. 3.
Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
noncorrosive,
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations are required by field conditions. Coordinate with all other trades prior to installation and/or fabrication.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 0500 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
H.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
I.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
K.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1.
New Piping: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw or spring clips. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.
Existing Piping: Use the following: a. b. c. d. e.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set screw or spring clips. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate type.
L.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
M.
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
N.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.
O.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 0500 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3.
c.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing. 1)
P.
Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. 2. 3.
Q.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. b.
4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
R.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
S.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
T.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 0500 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. 2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I.
Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. 2.
J. 3.3
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. PAINTING
A.
Painting of fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B.
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 0500 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A.
Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.5
ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A.
Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor firesuppression materials and equipment.
B.
Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.
C.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.6
GROUTING A.
Mix and install grout for fire-suppression equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.
B.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D.
Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E.
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F.
Place grout around anchors.
G.
Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 21 0500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 0500 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 21 1313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.3
Pipes, fittings, and specialties. Fire-protection valves. Sprinklers. Manual control stations. Pressure gages.
Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for standpipe piping.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175 psig maximum. SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A.
1.5
Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.
B.
Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2.
Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: a. b. c. d.
Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
21 1313 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. 1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing and latest edition of NFPA-13.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, calculations, and attachments to other work. 1.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified NICET professional responsible for their preparation.
D.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E.
Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.
F.
Welding certificates.
G.
Fire-hydrant flow test report.
H.
Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
I.
Field quality-control reports.
J.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: 1.
Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing design engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test. a.
B.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified design engineer.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
21 1313 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D.
NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following: 1.
1.8
NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.
1.9
Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than three days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Construction Manager's and Owner's written permission.
COORDINATION A.
1.10 A.
Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with all other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies. Mount piping as high as structure will allow and with as little interference with other trades as possible. EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted steel cabinet and hinged cover with space for spare sprinklers. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PIPING MATERIALS A.
2.2
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Standard Weight, Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
B.
Thinwall Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 and equal to or greater than Schedule 10. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
21 1313 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
C.
Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
D.
Galvanized and Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.
E.
Galvanized and Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.
F.
Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
G.
Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.
H.
Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
I.
Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.
J.
Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c.
2. 3.
4.
2.3
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. Victaulic Company. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum. Galvanized and Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
CPVC PIPE AND FITTINGS (by voluntary alternate only) A.
CPVC Pipe: ASTM F 442/F 442M and UL 1821, SDR 13.5, for 175-psig rated pressure at 150 deg F, with plain ends. Include "LISTED" and "CPVC SPRINKLER PIPE" markings.
B.
CPVC Fittings: UL listed or FM approved, for 175-psig rated pressure at 150 deg F, socket type. Include "LISTED" and "CPVC SPRINKLER FITTING" markings. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
NPS 3/4 to NPS 1-1/2: ASTM F 438 and UL 1821, Schedule 40, socket type. NPS 2 to NPS 3: ASTM F 439 and UL 1821, Schedule 80, socket type. CPVC-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC, one piece, with dimensions equivalent to pipe; one end with threaded brass insert, and one socket end. CPVC-to-Metal Transition Unions: CPVC, with dimensions equivalent to pipe; one end with threaded brass insert, and one socket end. Flanges: CPVC, one or two pieces.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
21 1313 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free. 1. 2.
Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets. Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type gaskets.
B.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
D.
Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and Tubing: ASTM F 493, solvent cement recommended by pipe and fitting manufacturer, and made for joining CPVC sprinkler pipe and fittings. Include cleaner or primer recommended by pipe and fitting manufacturer.
E.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, and Bolts and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
2.5
LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES AND DEVICES A.
General Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig. Minimum Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Piping: 250 psig. Refer to specification section 22 0523 for general duty valves.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
Specialty Valves and Devices: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
2.
Central Sprinkler Corp. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corp. Grinnell Corp. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. Star Sprinkler Corp. Viking Corp.
Sprinkler, Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: a. b. c. d.
Central Sprinkler Corp. Fire-End and Croker Corp. Grinnell Corp. Victaulic Co. of America.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
21 1313 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.
Badger Fire Protection, Inc. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. Fire-End and Croker Corp. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. Smith Industries, Inc.; Potter-Roemer Div.
Indicator Valves: a. b. c. d. e.
8.
Central Sprinkler Corp. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corp. Grinnell Corp. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. Star Sprinkler Corp. Viking Corp.
Hose Connections and Hose Stations: a. b. c. d. e.
7.
Badger Fire Protection, Inc. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. Fire-End and Croker Corp. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. Grinnell Corp. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. Smith Industries, Inc.; Potter-Roemer Div.
Sprinklers: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
6.
Fire-End and Croker Corp. G/J Innovations, Inc. Triple R Specialty of Ajax, Inc.
Fire Department Connections: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
5.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Sprinkler, Inspector's Test Fittings: a. b. c.
4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Central Sprink, Inc. Grinnell Corp. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. Nibco, Inc. Victaulic Co. of America.
Keyed Couplings for Steel Piping: a. b. c. d.
Central Sprink, Inc. Ductilic, Inc. Grinnell Corp. National Fittings, Inc.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
21 1313 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 e. f. 9.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Star Pipe Products, Inc.; Star Fittings Div. Victaulic Co. of America.
Mechanically Formed Tee Outlets: a.
2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
T-Drill Industries, Inc.
ALARM DEVICES A.
Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B.
Electrically Operated Alarm Bell: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c.
2. 3. 4. 5. C.
Standard: UL 464. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell. Size: 6-inch minimum-diameter. Finish: Red-enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use.
Water-Flow Indicators: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2. 3. 4.
2.7
Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell company. Notifier; a Honeywell company. Potter Electric Signal Company.
ADT Security Services, Inc. McDonnell & Miller; ITT Industries. Potter Electric Signal Company. System Sensor; a Honeywell company. Viking Corporation. Watts Industries (Canada) Inc.
Standard: UL 346. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, fieldadjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
ESCUTCHEONS A.
General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.
B.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: Polished chrome-plated finish with set-screws.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
21 1313 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
C.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Escutcheons: finish.
D.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with set-screw or spring clips.
E.
Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: concealed hinge and set-screw.
F.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge, set-screw or spring clips.
G.
One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
H.
Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
2.8
Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated
Polished chrome-plated or rough-brass finish with
SLEEVES A.
Cast-Iron Wall Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Molded-PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
C.
PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
D.
Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, standard weight, zinc coated, plain ends.
E.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1.
2.9
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set-screws.
SLEEVE SEALS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc. Calpico, Inc. Metraflex, Inc. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. 2. 3.
Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Stainless steel. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating or Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
21 1313 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.10
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
GROUT
A.
Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, posthardening and volume adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
B.
Characteristics: Nonshrink, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B.
Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.2
PIPING INSTALLATION A.
Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical. 1.
Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.
B.
Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.
C.
Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.
D.
Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
E.
Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
F.
Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13.
G.
Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
H.
Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside building.
I.
Install alarm devices in piping systems.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
21 1313 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
J.
Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.
K.
Fill sprinkler system piping with water.
3.3
JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.
Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
C.
Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
D.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
E.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.
F.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
G.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. 2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
H.
Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join lightwall steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
I.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article. 1.
Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
J.
Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
K.
Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
21 1313 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 L.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Plastic-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. 2.
3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. Apply primer. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A.
Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C.
Specialty Valves: 1. 2.
3.5
General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main supply to system. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection.
SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A.
Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels.
B.
Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid.
3.6
ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION A.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
B.
Escutcheons for New Piping: 1. 2. 3.
4.
5. 6.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish or stamped steel with spring clips. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish, One piece or split casting, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish, Split casting, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish, One piece, stamped steel with set-screw, One piece or split plate, stamped steel with setscrew, or Split plate, stamped steel with set-screw. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chromeplated finish, stamped steel with set-screw, stamped steel with spring clips, or stamped steel with set-screw or spring clips. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, stamped steel with set-screw or spring clips. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor plate.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
21 1313 - 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SLEEVE INSTALLATION A.
General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C.
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
D.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
F.
For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for joint sealants in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
G.
For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for joint sealants in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
H.
For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using sleeve seals.
I.
Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
J.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.
K.
Install sleeve materials according to the following applications: 1.
Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum-Board Partitions: a. b.
2.
Sleeves for Piping Passing through Interior Concrete Walls: a.
L.
3.8
PVC-pipe or Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6. Exception: Sleeves are not required for water-supply tubes and waste pipes for individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover openings.
PVC-pipe or Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestop materials and installations in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries into building.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
21 1313 - 12
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
3.9
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.
B.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.10
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment.
C.
Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.11
CLEANING
A.
Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B.
Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
3.12 A.
DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.
END OF SECTION 21 1313
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
21 1313 - 13
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 22 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
1.3
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. Transition fittings. Dielectric fittings. Mechanical sleeve seals. Sleeves. Escutcheons. Grout. Plumbing demolition. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. Painting and finishing. Concrete bases. Supports and anchorages.
CODES, ORDINANCES, PERMITS, FEES OR ASSESSMENTS
A.
All work and materials shall be installed in accordance with the standards as described by local and state codes or ordinances including the rules of the National Plumbing Code, National Board of Fire Underwriters, American Standards Association, and with the prevailing rules and regulations pertaining to adequate protection and guarding of any moving parts or otherwise hazardous locations.
B.
Should the drawings or specifications call for sizes and grades different than required by the governing code, this Contractor shall furnish and install the larger size of the higher grade.
C.
In addition, this Contractor shall give all notices, file all drawings, obtain all necessary approvals, obtain all permits and pay for all fees, deposits and expenses required for installation of all work under this contract, as stated therein and in the General Requirements. In such instances where permits are not required, the contractor shall engage a third party, preferably the local official, to inspect the work.
D.
In addition to all applicable federal, state and local codes, the standards and codes listed below shall apply to all mechanical work. Where standards or codes are mentioned in these specifications, the latest edition or revision shall be followed; hence, the specified numbers may be superseded by new numbers. 1. 2.
American National Standard Institute (ANSI) American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 0500 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 1.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) American Water Works Association (AWWA) Air Moving and Condition Association, Inc. (AMCA) National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) ANSI Code of Pressure Piping and Unfired Pressure Vessels Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Occupational Safety and Health Acts (OSHA) State of Michigan Plumbing Code State of Michigan Building Code ICC International Plumbing Code All local codes
DEFINITIONS A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. 2. 3.
G.
The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. 2.
1.5
CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. PE: Polyethylene plastic. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Transition fittings. Dielectric fittings. Mechanical sleeve seals. Escutcheons.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 0500 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 5. 6. B. 1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Valves Plumbing fixtures & supports.
Welding certificates. RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1 Section, Project Closeout. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate the following installed conditions: 1.
2. 3. 1.7
Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed.
MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.
Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 Section, Project Closeout. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: 1.
2.
3. 4. 1.8
Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
SUBSTITUTIONS A.
This Contractor shall be considered liable for all added costs both to himself and others (including those costs as incurred by the Engineer, for redesigning or redrawing) resultant from the substitution of products not the basis of the design.
B.
This Contractor shall be responsible for the verification of adequate space (considering dimensions, required clearances, weights, and roughing-in requirements) for the installation of items or systems not the basis of the design. He shall be responsible for advising all other trades. He shall submit revised drawing layouts for the approval of the Engineer and shall not proceed without this approval.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 0500 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.9
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
B.
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. 2.
C.
1.10
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.
Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B.
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.11
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate with all other trades for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors to be equal to Milcor or Vent-Lock, 10” x 18” steel access, flush type for mounting in walls or ceilings with prime coating, ready for field painting. Access panels shall be provided by Plumbing Contractor for installation by General Trades. Locate so as to provide access for all required maintenance. Provide more than one where required. Provide UL labeled panels where installed in rated walls or ceilings, and shall match the rating of the structure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 0500 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified, and all others by voluntary alternate.
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A.
Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3
JOINING MATERIALS A.
Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a) b)
2.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
F.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H.
Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. 2.
2.4
CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
TRANSITION FITTINGS A.
AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 0500 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
B.
Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
Manufacturers: a) b) c)
Eslon Thermoplastics. Sioux Chief Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end. 1.
Manufacturers: a) b) c) d) e)
2.5
Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. JCM Industries. Smith-Blair, Inc. Viking Johnson.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings and Adaptors: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end. 1.
C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Manufacturers: a) b) c) d) e) f)
2. 3. 4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. Fernco, Inc. Mission Rubber Company. Plastic Oddities, Inc. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A.
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C.
Dielectric Unions, Flanges and Couplings: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. 1.
Manufacturers: a) b) c)
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 0500 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SLEEVE SEALS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a) b) c) d)
B.
Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, used to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. 2. 3.
2.7
Advance Products & Systems, Inc. Metraflex, Inc. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. Others by voluntary alternate.
Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or stainless steel. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, or stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
SLEEVES A.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: longitudinal joint.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1.
0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E.
Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
2.8
ESCUTCHEONS A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.
B.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.
C.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 0500 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
E.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
F.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chromeplated finish.
G.
One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
H.
Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.9
GROUT A.
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. 2. 3.
Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
noncorrosive,
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PLUMBING DEMOLITION A.
Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. C.
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 0500 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are required due to field conditions. Coordinate with all other trades prior to installation or fabrication.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G.
Install piping at indicated slopes and as required by code.
H.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
I.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
L.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1.
New Piping: a) b) c) d) e) f) g)
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw or spring clips.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 0500 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 h)
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.
M.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
N.
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
O.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a)
2. 3.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a) b) c)
PVC or Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing. 1)
4.
P.
Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. 2. 3.
Q.
Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 0500 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
R.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
S.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
T.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.
3.3
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. 2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I.
Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 0500 - 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3.
4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
J.
Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K.
Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
3.4
PIPING CONNECTIONS A.
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4.
3.5
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6
PAINTING A.
Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B.
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 0500 - 12
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
CONCRETE BASES A.
Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 3.8
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A.
Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.9
ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A.
Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.
B.
Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.
C.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.10
GROUTING
A.
Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.
B.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D.
Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 0500 - 13
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
E.
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F.
Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G.
Place grout around anchors.
H.
Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 22 0500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 0500 - 14
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 22 0501 – PLUMBING DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior demolition, removal and abandonment of interior plumbing systems, including sanitary sewer/vent systems, storm systems, domestic hot and cold water systems, water heaters, plumbing fixtures, equipment, etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching work: As specified individual sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping systems and equipment serve only areas scheduled for demolition. B.
Demolition shall be based on a field observation and existing record drawings if available. Contractor to field verify exact conditions that exist.
C.
Beginning of demolition means the contractor accepts the existing conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Disconnect piping systems in walls, floors and ceilings scheduled for removal. B.
3.3
Provide temporary connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction as directed in field. DEMOLITION EXISTING PLUMBING WORK
A. Remove existing installations to accommodate requirements for new construction. B.
Remove abandoned piping and equipment.
END OF SECTION 22 0501
PLUMBING DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
22 0501 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 22 0523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.3
Bronze angle valves. Brass ball valves. Bronze ball valves. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves. Bronze ball cone check valves. Bronze gate valves. Iron gate valves. Bronze globe valves. Iron globe valves.
Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
DEFINITIONS A.
CWP: Cold working pressure.
B.
EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
C.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
D.
NRS: Nonrising stem.
E.
OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
F.
RS: Rising stem.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 0523 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
1.6
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
ASME Compliance: 1. 2. 3.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Use the following precautions during storage: 1. 2.
B.
Maintain valve end protection. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A.
Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
B.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.
C.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Valve Actuator Types: 1. 2. 3.
E.
Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. 2.
3. F.
Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.
Gate Valves: With rising stem. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.
Valve-End Connections: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 0523 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 G. 2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. BRONZE ANGLE VALVES
A.
Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze or nonmetallic Disc: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c.
2.
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
2.3
Nibco, Inc. Milwaukee Valve Company. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternates.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. CWP Rating: 200 psig. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. Ends: Threaded. Stem and Disc: Bronze. Packing: Asbestos free. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
BALL VALVES A.
Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Body ASTM B584 Ball Valves with Brass or Stainless Steel Trim: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2.
Apollo Valves 77C-LF or 77 CLF-11 (with Thermal Seal Stem Extension for Insulated Lines) Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Others
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.
Standard: MSS SP-110. SWP Rating: 150 psig. CWP Rating: 600 psig. Body Design: Two piece. Body Material: ASTM B584 Bronze Body. Ends: Threaded. Seats: PTFE or TFE. Stem: Brass or Stainless Steel. Ball: Chrome-plated brass or Stainless Steel. Port: Full.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 0523 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES A.
200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2.
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
2.5
Apollo Valves Series 143 ABZ Valves Series 397 Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Others by voluntary alternate.
Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. CWP Rating: 200 psig. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. Seat: EPDM. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. Disc: Aluminum bronze.
CHECK VALVES A.
Class 125, Ball Cone Check Valves. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2.
Description: a. b. c. d. e.
2.6
Apollo Valves 61-500-LF. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternates.
CWP Rating: 200 psig. Body Design: Inline 2-piece. Body Material: ASTM B584 Bronze. Ends: Threaded. Disc: EPDM Check Disc.
GATE VALVES A.
Class 125, Gate Valves:
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 0523 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
Apollo Valves 101T/101S-LF (Rising Stem), 102T/102S (Non-Rising Stem) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Others by voluntary alternate.
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
2.7
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. CWP Rating: 200 psig. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze or ASTM A126 (gray iron). Ends: Threaded or solder joint. Stem: Bronze. Disc: Solid wedge. Packing: Asbestos free. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
GLOBE VALVES A.
Class 125, Globe Valves. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2.
Apollo Valves 102T-LF/120S-LF Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Others by voluntary alternate.
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
Standard: MSS SP-80 (bronze), MSS SP-85 (iron) Type 1. CWP Rating: 200 psig. Body Material: ASTM B 62, (bronze), ASTM A126 (gray iron). Ends: Threaded or solder joint. Packing: Asbestos free. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. Disc: PTFE
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 0523 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
B.
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.
C.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
E.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2
VALVE INSTALLATION A.
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E.
Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. 2. 3.
3.3
Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. Center-Guided and Plate-Type Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
ADJUSTING A.
3.4
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type. Throttling Service: Ball, or butterfly valves. Pump-Discharge Check Valves: a. b. c.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with spring or iron, center-guided, metal-seat check valves. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger for Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or spring.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 0523 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
B.
If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C.
Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections: 1. 2. 3. 4.
3.5
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valveend option is indicated in valve schedules below. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A.
Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125 bronze disc. Ball Valves: One or Two pieces, full port, brass or bronze with brass, bronze, or stainless-steel trim. Bronze Swing Soft Seated Check Valves: Class 125 bronze disc.
Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends. Iron Ball Valves: Class 125. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, EPDM or NBR seat, aluminum-bronze, ductile-iron or stainless-steel disc. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS or OS&Y. Iron Globe Valves: Class 125.
END OF SECTION 22 0523
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 0523 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 22 0529 - HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical systems piping and equipment.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code-Steel. 1.
Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
B.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 13 for hangers and supports used as components of fire protection systems.
C.
International Plumbing and Mechanical Codes Compliance: Comply with International Plumbing and Electrical Codes for hanger spacing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS
A.
Hangers, Supports and Components: Factory-fabricated according to MSS SP-58. 1. 2.
Components include galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that will not have a field-applied finish. Pipe attachments include nonmetallic coating for electro-lytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
B.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi average compressive strength, waterproofed calcium silicate, encased with sheet metal shield. Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe and are of length indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation.
2.2
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes and bars, black and galvanized.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 0529-1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
B.
Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex-head, track bolts and nuts.
C.
Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink, nonmetallic. 1.
2. 3. 4.
Characteristics include post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement-type grout that is non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous and is recommended for interior and exterior applications. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. Water: Potable. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping specification sections.
3.2
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments as required to properly support piping for building structure.
B.
Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible.
C.
Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69 and table below. 1. Nominal Pipe Or Tube Size ¼ 3/8 ½ ¾ 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ 3 & Up
STD WT STEEL PIPE
COPPER TUBE
WATER SERVICE
VAPOR SERVICE
WATER SERVICE
VAPOR SERVICE
Ft 7 7 7 7 7 7 9 10 11 12
Ft 8 8 8 9 9 9 12 13 14 15
Ft 5 5 5 5 6 6 8 8 9 10
Ft 5 6 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14
M 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.7 3.0 3.4 3.7
M 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.7 2.7 3.7 4.0 4.3 4.6
M 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.8 2.1 2.4 2.4 2.7 3.0
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
m 1.5 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.4 2.7 3.0 3.4 4.0 4.3
22 0529-2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
2. 3. 4. 5.
6.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Fiberglass Reinforced: Follow pipe manufacturer's recommendations for material and service condition. Plastic: Follow pipe manufacturer's recommendations for material and service condition. Cast Iron Soil: 10ft Max spacing; min. of one (1) hanger per pipe section close to joint on the barrel, also at change of direction and branch connections. Ductile Iron Pipe: 20ft. Max spacing; min. of one (1) hanger per pipe section close to the joint behind the bell and at change of direction and branch connections. For pipe sizes six (6) inches and under, installed on ANSI B31 projects, that are subjected to loadings other than weight of pipe and contents, the span should be limited to the maximum spacing for water service steel pipe. Follow requirements of the National Fire Protection Association.
D.
Where pipes of various sizes are supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.
E.
Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms. Install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
F.
Install concrete inserts in new construction prior to placing concrete.
G.
Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install according to fastener manufacturer's written instructions. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 4" thick.
H.
Support fire protection systems piping independent of other piping.
I.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
J.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
K.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, Building Services Piping, is not exceeded.
L.
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. 1. 2.
3.
Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. Shields: Install MSS Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields span an arc of 180 degrees and have dimensions in inches not less than the following:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 0529-3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
NPS (Inches) 1/4 to 3-1/2 4 5 and 6 8 to 14 16 to 24 4. 5. 6.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
LENGTH 12 12 18 24 24
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
THICKNESS 0.048 0.060 0.060 0.075 0.105
Pipes 8" and Larger: Include wood inserts. Insert Material: Length at least as long as the protective shield. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping.
3.3
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment above floor.
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make a smooth bearing surface.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slop of pipe.
3.5
PAINTING
A.
Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas immediately after erection of hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1.
B.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizingrepair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 22 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 0529-4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 22 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
1.3
Equipment labels. Warning signs and labels. Pipe labels. Duct labels. Stencils. Valve tags. Warning tags.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.
C.
Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.
D.
Valve numbering scheme.
E.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
EQUIPMENT LABELS A.
Metal Labels for Equipment:
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 0553 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
2. 3.
4. 5. B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch, Stainless steel, 0.025-inch, Aluminum, 0.032-inch, or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
C.
Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
D.
Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.2
WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
C.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
D.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 0553 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
E.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
F.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
G.
Label Content: instructions.
2.3
Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
PIPE LABELS A.
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B.
Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. 2.
2.4
Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
STENCILS A.
Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions. 1. 2. 3.
2.5
Stencil Material: Aluminum or Brass. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated.
VALVE TAGS A.
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2inch numbers. 1.
2. B.
Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch, Stainless steel, 0.025-inch, Aluminum, 0.032-inch, or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 0553 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
WARNING TAGS A.
Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE." Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
3.2
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B.
Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A.
Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting."
B.
Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system. 1. 2.
C.
Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.
Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Near each valve and control device. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 0553 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 6. 7. D. 3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 15 feet in areas of congested piping, equipment and within equipment rooms. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings.
Pipe Label Color Schedule: Utilize the industry standards. VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A.
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and plumbing terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of enduse fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B.
Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs: 1.
Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a.
3.5
Hot, Cold and Dom. Recirc. Water: 2 inches round.
WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A.
Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.
END OF SECTION 23 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 0553 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 22 0700 – PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1.
Insulation Materials: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. B.
Insulating cements. Adhesives. Mastics. Lagging adhesives. Sealants. Factory-applied jackets. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh. Field-applied cloths. Field-applied jackets. Tapes. Securements. Corner angles.
Related Sections include the following. 1.
1.3
Calcium silicate. Glass Fiber. Flexible elastomeric. Mineral fiber. Phenolic. Polyisocyanurate. Polyolefin. Polystyrene.
Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B.
Shop Drawings: 1.
Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3. 4. 5.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. Detail application of field-applied jackets. Detail application at linkages of control devices. Detail field application for each equipment type.
C.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.
D.
Field quality-control reports.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. 2.
1.5
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
1.6
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and fieldapplied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
1.7
SCHEDULING A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS A.
Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
D.
Calcium Silicate: 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b.
2.
3.
4. E.
Industrial Insulation Group (The); Thermo-12 Gold. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I. Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for dimensions used in performing insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
Glass Fiber 1. 2. 3.
Material: Inorganic glass fibers, bonded with a thermosetting resin. Jacket: All purpose, factory-applied, laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil having self-sealing lip. Board: ASTM C 612, Class 2, semi-rigid jacketed board. a. b.
4.
Blanket: ASTM C 553, Type II, Class F-1, jacketed flexible blankets. a.
5.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 average maximum at 75°F mean temperature. Density: 12 pcf average maximum.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.32 average maximum at 75°F mean temperature.
Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1, rigid pipe insulation, jacketed. a. b.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 average maximum at 75°F mean temperature. Density: 10 average maximum.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 6.
F.
Vapor Barrier Coating: Waterproof coating recommended by insulation manufacturer for outside service.
Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. Johns Manville; Microlite. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2.
I.
Comply with
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
H.
Type: Non-flammable, solvent-based. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180°.
Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1.
G.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Adhesive: Produced under the UL Classification and Follow-up service. a. b.
7.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ or with factoryapplied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ or FSK jacket complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Kingspan Corp.; Koolphen K. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Preformed pipe insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type III, Grade 1. Block insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type II, Grade 1. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. Factory-Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. a. b.
Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASJ. Board for Equipment Applications: ASJ.
Polyisocyanurate: Unfaced, preformed, rigid cellular polyisocyanurate material intended for use as thermal insulation. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Apache Products Company; ISO-25. Dow Chemical Company (The); Trymer. Duna USA Inc.; Corafoam. Elliott Company; Elfoam. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Comply with ASTM C 591, Type I or Type IV, except thermal conductivity (k-value) shall not exceed 0.19 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F after 180 days of aging. Flame-spread index shall be 25 or less and smoke-developed index shall be 50 or less for thickness up to 1-1/2 inches as tested by ASTM E 84. Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. Factory-Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. a. b.
L.
CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Phenolic: 1.
K.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
J.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Pipe Applications: ASJ, ASJ-SSL, PVDC, or PVDC-SSL. Equipment Applications: ASJ, ASJ-SSL, PVDC, or PVDC-SSL.
Polyolefin: Unicellular, polyethylene thermal plastic insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534 or ASTM C 1427, Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials and Type II, Grade 1 for sheet materials.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
Armacell LLC; Tubolit. Nomaco Inc.; IMCOLOCK, IMCOSHEET, NOMALOCK, and NOMAPLY. RBX Corporation; Therma-cell. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Polystyrene: Rigid, extruded cellular polystyrene intended for use as thermal insulation. Comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV or Type XIII, except thermal conductivity (k-value) shall not exceed 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F after 180 days of aging. Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
2.2
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.
M.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam. Knauf Insulation; Knauf Polystyrene. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
INSULATING CEMENTS A.
Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
B.
Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b.
C.
P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Thermal-V-Kote. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting ASTM C 449/C 449M. 1.
Insulating
and
Finishing
Cement:
Comply
with
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2.3
Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
ADHESIVES A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2.
For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
2.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. E.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-97. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-27/81-93. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 290. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-30. Vimasco Corporation; 760. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Glass Fiber, Phenolic, Polyisocyanurate, and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F. 1.
D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F. 1.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. F.
For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 2.4
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 97-13. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1.
H.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water-based, synthetic resin adhesive with a service temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F. 1.
G.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
MASTICS A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II. 1.
B.
For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
3. 4. 5. C.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. Color: White.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-30. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-10. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. Color: White.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
2. 3. 4. 5. E.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40. Vimasco Corporation; 749. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1.
D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Childers Products, Division of ITW; Encacel. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-70. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. Color: White.
Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight. Color: White.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SEALANTS A.
Joint Sealants: 1.
Joint Sealants for Glass Fiber, Phenolic, and Polyisocyanurate Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
2.
Joint Sealants for Polystyrene Products: provide one of the following: a. b. c.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B.
Subject to compliance with requirements,
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. Vimasco Corporation; 750. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. Color: White or gray. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. Vimasco Corporation; 750. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. Vimasco Corporation; 750. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. Color: Aluminum. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. Color: White.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 6. 2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A.
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) 2)
5.
PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) 2)
2.7
Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A.
Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2.
Johns Manville; Zeston. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.
2.8
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a.
4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.
Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
TAPES A.
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B.
Width: 3 inches. Thickness: 11.5 mils. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 2 percent. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Width: 3 inches. Thickness: 6.5 mils. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 2 percent. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 12
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 a. b. c. d. e. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. D.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. Compac Corp.; 130. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Width: 2 inches. Thickness: 6 mils. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 500 percent. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. Compac Corp.; 120. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. Venture Tape; 3520 CW. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Width: 2 inches. Thickness: 3.7 mils. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 5 percent. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
PVDC Tape: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.9
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1.
E.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Width: 3 inches. Film Thickness: 4 mils. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch in width.
SECUREMENTS A.
Bands: 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
Childers Products; Bands. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 13
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3. 4. B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c.
C & F Wire. RPR Products, Inc. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. 2. 3.
3.2
Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3
Comply with
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 14
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. 2.
3.
4.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. 2.
3.
Draw jacket tight and smooth. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a.
4. 5.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 15
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
O.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
P.
For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
3.4
Vibration-control devices. Testing agency labels and stamps. Nameplates and data plates. Manholes. Handholes. Cleanouts.
PENETRATIONS A.
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: penetrations. 1. 2.
3. 4.
Install insulation continuously through roof
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: continuously through wall penetrations. 1. 2.
3. 4.
Install insulation
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1.
Install insulation
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" and fireresistive joint sealers.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 16
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 F.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. 2.
3.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A.
Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7. C.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. Label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 17
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1.
2.
3. 4.
5. 3.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A.
Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
C.
Draw jacket material smooth and tight. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end joints. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.
Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1.
D.
Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.
Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 18
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 E.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. 2.
3.
4.
5. 3.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2-inch-circumference limit allows for 2-inch-overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.
FINISHES A.
Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 1.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a.
Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C.
Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.
D.
Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
C.
Tests and Inspections: 1.
Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing fieldapplied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 19
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
2.
D. 3.9
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Extent of inspection shall be limited to three location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.
3.10
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. 2. 3.
3.11 A.
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. Underground cold water piping. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE Domestic Cold Water condensate and Irrigation Water: 1.
NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a.
2.
NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following: a.
B.
Glass Fiber: 1/2 inch thick.
Glass Fiber: 1 inch thick.
Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: 1.
NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a.
Glass Fiber: 1/2 inch thick.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 20
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a.
All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a.
2.
Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities: 1.
All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. b. c.
Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick. Polyolefin: 1/2 inch thick.
Field Applied P.V.C. Jacket: 1.
G.
Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
Roof Sump Panning: Insulation shall be as follows: a.
F.
Glass Fiber: 1 inch thick.
Roof Drain, Emergency Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies: 1.
E.
Glass Fiber: 1 inch thick.
Storm Water and Emergency Drain Piping: First vertical drop and all horizontal to 3’ vertical drop (unless otherwise noted) 1.
D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following: a.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Provide as indicated on plans: Thickness minimum 20 mil thick, white in color.
Pre-Manufactured Insulation Systems: 1.
White Pre-Molded white, molded vinyl with 1/8" internal ribs. ASTM G21 and G22 Bacteria/Fungus Resistance. Furnished with Built-In Fasteners. Equal to TrueBro, Lav Guard.
END OF SECTION 22 0700
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 0700 – 21
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 22 1116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
B.
Related Section: 1.
1.3
Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building. Encasement for piping. Specialty valves. Flexible connectors. Escutcheons. Sleeves and sleeve seals. Wall penetration systems.
Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water-service piping outside the building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For the following products: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
B. 1.4
Specialty valves. Transition fittings. Dielectric fittings. Flexible connectors. Vacuum breakers. Escutcheons. Sleeves and sleeve seals. Water penetration systems.
Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B.
Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 1116 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.
1.6
Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than four days in advance of proposed interruption of water service. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Construction Manager's and Owner's written permission.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PIPING MATERIALS A.
2.2
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and ASTM B 88, Type M water tube, drawn temper. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-andsocket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings: a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) 2) 3) 4)
b. c. 6.
Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division. NIBCO INC. Vega; Plumbing and Heating Systems. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternates.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.
Copper Push-on-Joint Fittings: a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 1116 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1) 2) b.
7.
NVent LLC. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternates.
Description: Cast-copper fitting complying with ASME B16.18 or wroughtcopper fitting complying with ASME B 16.22; with stainless-steel teeth and EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end instead of solder-joint ends.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) 2)
b.
T-DRILL Industries Inc. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternates.
Description: Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014.
Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper. 1. 2.
Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings: a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) 2) 3) 4)
b. c. 2.3
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Copper-Tube Extruded-Tee Connections: a.
B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division. NIBCO INC. Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternates.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end. NPS 3 and NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber Oring seal in each end.
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
D.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for generalduty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 1116 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING A.
Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
B.
Form: Tube.
C.
Material: (High-density, cross-laminated PE film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness.
2.5
SPECIALTY VALVES A.
Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty metal valves.
B.
Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.
2.6
TRANSITION FITTINGS A.
2.7
Refer to specification section 22 0500. DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. 2.8
Refer to specification section 22 0500. FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
B.
Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing. 1. 2. 3.
C.
Flex-Hose Co., Inc. Flexicraft Industries. Flex Pression, Ltd. Flex-Weld, Inc. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. Mercer Rubber Co. Metraflex, Inc. Proco Products, Inc. Tozen Corporation. Unaflex, Inc. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company
Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.
Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 1116 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3. 2.9
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.
ESCUTCHEONS A.
2.10 A. 2.11 A. 2.12 A.
Refer to specification section 22 0500. SLEEVES Refer to specifications section 22 0500. SLEEVE SEALS Refer to specification section 22 0500. GROUT Refer to specification section 22 0500.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EARTHWORK A.
3.2
Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B.
Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C.
Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.
D.
Install underground copper tube and ductile-iron pipe in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
E.
Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.
F.
Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 1116 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
G.
Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure-reducing valves.
H.
Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.
I.
Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.
J.
Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
K.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
L.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.
M.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
N.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
O.
Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
P.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Q.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
R.
Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.
S.
Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages.
T.
Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Pumps" for thermostats.
3.3
JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.
3.4
Refer to specification section 22 0500. VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 1116 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
B.
Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
C.
Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." 1. 2.
Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.
D.
Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves.
E.
Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for calibrated balancing valves.
3.5
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A.
Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation. 1. 2.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. b. c.
3. 4.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. Longer than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
C.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
D.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 1116 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
E.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
F.
Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod.
G.
Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.
H.
Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6
CONNECTIONS A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. 2. 3.
4.
3.7
Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
SLEEVE INSTALLATION A.
General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C.
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
D.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 1116 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
F.
For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.
G.
For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.
H.
For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using sleeve seals specified in this Section.
I.
Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
J.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.
K.
Install sleeve materials according to the following applications: 1. 2.
Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs Molded PVC or Steel pipe. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical Equipment Areas or Other Wet Areas: Steel pipe or Stack sleeve fittings. a. b.
3.
Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum-Board Partitions: a. b. c.
4.
PVC pipe or Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6. Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger. Exception: Sleeves are not required for water supply tubes and waste pipes for individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover openings.
Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls: a. b. c. d.
5.
Extend sleeves 2 inches above finished floor level. For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6. Cast-iron wall pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when sleeve seals are used. Do not use sleeves when wall penetration systems are used.
Sleeves for Piping Passing through Interior Concrete Walls: a. b.
PVC pipe or Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6. Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 1116 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 L.
3.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestop materials and installations. SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries into building.
B.
Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.9
WALL PENETRATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A.
Install wall penetration systems in new, exterior concrete walls.
B.
Assemble wall penetration system components with sleeve pipe. Install so that end of sleeve pipe and face of housing are flush with wall. Adjust locking devices to secure sleeve pipe in housing.
3.10
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.
B.
Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
3.11
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Piping Inspections: 1. 2.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. b.
3. 4.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 1116 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Piping Tests: 1. 2.
3.
4.
5. 6.
Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
D.
Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.12 A.
ADJUSTING Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. Open throttling valves to proper setting. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow. a. b.
5. 6. 7. 8. 3.13 A.
Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
CLEANING Clean and disinfect potable and non-potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. 2.
Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 1116 - 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 a. b.
d. B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1)
c.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. 2.
Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below: a. b.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
C.
Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
D.
Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
END OF SECTION 22 1116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 1116 - 12
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 22 1119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1.3
Vacuum breakers. Balancing valves. Hose bibbs. Wall hydrants. Drain valves. Water hammer arresters.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
1.4
Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise indicated. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
NSF Compliance: 1. 2.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9."
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 1119 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
VACUUM BREAKERS A.
Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B.
Standard: ASSE 1001. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping. Body: Bronze. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. Finish: Rough bronze or Chrome plated.
Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4. 5. C.
Conbraco Industries, Inc. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. Others by voluntary alternate.
Conbraco Industries, Inc. MIFAB, Inc. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. Others by voluntary alternate.
Standard: ASSE 1011. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated or Rough bronze.
Pressure Vacuum Breakers: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2. 3. 4.
Conbraco Industries, Inc. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. Others by voluntary alternate.
Standard: ASSE 1020. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 1119 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 5.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Accessories: a.
2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Valves: Ball type, on inlet and outlet.
BALANCING VALVES A.
Copper-Alloy and Cast Iron Calibrated Balancing Valves: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4. 5. B. 2.3
ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Div. NIBCO INC. Taco, Inc. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. Others by voluntary alternate.
Type: Ball or Y-pattern globe valve with two readout ports and memory setting indicator. Body: Brass or bronze. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.
Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case. HOSE BIBBS
A.
Hose Bibbs: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
2.4
Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. Body Material: Bronze. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze or Chrome or nickel plated. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.
WALL HYDRANTS A.
Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 1119 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
6. 7. 2.5
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
2. 3. 4. 5.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Josam Company. MIFAB, Inc. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. Watts Drainage Products Inc. Woodford Manufacturing Company. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. Others by voluntary alternate.
Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for exposed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. Operation: Loose key. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall clamp. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1. Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant.
WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A.
Water Hammer Arresters: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
2. 3. 4.
Josam Company. MIFAB, Inc. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. Watts Drainage Products Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. Others by voluntary alternate.
Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. Type: Metal bellows or Copper tube with piston. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B.
Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 1119 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.
3.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
C.
Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D.
Install water control valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
E.
Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
F.
Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet. 1. 2.
G.
Install thermometers and water regulators if specified. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.
Install hose stations with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with thermometer on outlet. 1. 2.
Install shutoff valve on outlet if specified. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. Install 2by-4-inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking wall reinforcement between studs. Fireretardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."
H.
Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201 and Manufacturers installation recommendations based on the design documents.
I.
Install air vents at high points of water piping.
J.
Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
3.2
CONNECTIONS A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.
B.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
C.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 1119 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A.
Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
B.
3.4
Pressure vacuum breakers. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies. Dual-check-valve backflow preventers. Reduced-pressure-detector, fire-protection backflow-preventer assemblies. Double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventers. Water pressure-reducing valves. Calibrated balancing valves. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.
Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following tests and prepare test reports: 1.
B. 3.5
Test each pressure vacuum breaker, reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer, double-check backflow-prevention assembly, and double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.
Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above. ADJUSTING
A.
Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
B.
Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
C.
Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
END OF SECTION 22 1119
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 1119 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 22 1316 - SANITARY WASTE, VENT PIPING AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
Pipe, tube, and fittings. Special pipe fittings. Encasement for underground metal piping.
DEFINITIONS A.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B.
LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.
C.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
D.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2.
1.5
Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. Storage Drainage Piping: 10 foot head of water.
SUBMITTALS A.
1.6
Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
SANITARY WASTE, VENT PIPING AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
22 1316 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
PIPING MATERIALS A.
Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.
B.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, solid-wall drain, waste and vent. 1.
PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste and vent patterns.
C.
Hub and Spigot, Cast-iron Soil Pipe Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service Class.
D.
Hubless, Cast-iron Soil Pipe Fittings: CISPI 301. 1.
CISPI Couplings for Hubless Cast-iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: CISPI 310, having ASTM C 564 neoprene sealing sleeve, with 300 Series stainless-steel corrugated shield-and-clamp assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXCAVATION A.
3.2
Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. 2. 3.
C.
Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. Cast-iron hub or no-hub pipe and fittings. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Rigid, unshielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.
Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. 2.
Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. Cast-iron hub or no-hub pipe and fittings.
SANITARY WASTE, VENT PIPING AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
22 1316 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Rigid, unshielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.
Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
3.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. Sewer and Drain Series, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. Cast-iron hub or no-hub pipe and fittings. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Rigid, unshielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.
PIPING INSTALLATION A.
Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Sanitary Sewers."
B.
Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
C.
Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
D.
Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.
E.
Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping.
F.
Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
G.
Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight.
H.
Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
I.
Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
SANITARY WASTE, VENT PIPING AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
22 1316 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 J.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3.
Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping and Storm Building Drains: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
K.
Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.
L.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.4
JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.
Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
B.
PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
3.5
VALVE INSTALLATION A.
3.6
General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following: 1. 2.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following: a. b. c.
3. 4.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. Longer than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B.
Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
C.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D.
Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
SANITARY WASTE, VENT PIPING AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
22 1316 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 E.
3.7
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
F.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. NPS 4 and 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
C.
Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
3.8
Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
SANITARY WASTE, VENT PIPING AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
22 1316 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
2.
3.
4.
5. 6. 3.9
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug ventstack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
CLEANING A.
Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
3.10 A.
PROTECTION Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of waterbased latex paint.
END OF SECTION 22 1316
SANITARY WASTE, VENT PIPING AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
22 1316 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 22 1423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following storm drainage piping specialties: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.3
Cleanouts. Through-penetration firestop assemblies. Roof drains. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties. Flashing materials.
DEFINITIONS A.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B.
FOG: Fats, oils, and greases.
C.
FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
D.
PE: Polyethylene plastic.
E.
PUR: Polyurethane plastic.
F.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. 1.6
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 1423 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce list, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1.
2.2
Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to Part 3 “Piping Applications” article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting and joining materials.
B.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, solid-wall drain, waste and vent. 1.
2.3
PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste and vent patterns.
CLEANOUTS A.
Exposed Metal Cleanouts: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B.
Josam Company; Josam Div. MIFAB, Inc. Sioux Chief Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. Watts Drainage Products Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. Josam Company; Blucher-Josam Div. Others by voluntary alternate.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. Size: Same as connected drainage piping Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match connected piping. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, brass, cast-iron or plastic plug. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal.
Metal Floor Cleanouts: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 1423 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. Watts Drainage Products Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. Josam Company; Josam Div. Josam Company; Blucher-Josam Div. Others by voluntary alternate.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for threaded, adjustable housing cleanout. Size: Same as connected branch. Type Threaded, adjustable housing. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. Clamping Device: Required. Outlet Connection: Inside calk, Spigot or Threaded. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket, Brass plug with tapered threads, or Plastic plug. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron or Plastic with threads or set-screws or other device. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy, Polished bronze, Rough bronze, or Stainless steel. Frame and Cover Shape: Round or Square. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. Standard: ASME A112.3.1. Size: Same as connected branch. Housing: Stainless steel. Closure: Stainless steel with seal. Riser: Stainless-steel drainage pipe fitting to cleanout.
Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Josam Company; Josam Div. Sioux Chief MIFAB, Inc. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. Watts Drainage Products Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. Others by voluntary alternate.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, drilled-and-threaded, brass or cast-iron plug. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 1423 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 7. 8. 2.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze or stainless-steel wall-installation frame and cover.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES A.
Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b.
2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 2.5
ProSet Systems Inc. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternates.
Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug. Size: Same as connected pipe. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
ROOF DRAINS AND EMERGENCY ROOF DRAINS A.
Metal Roof Drains: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B.
Froet Josam Company; Josam Div. MIFAB, Inc. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. Watts Drainage Products Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. Wade. Others by voluntary alternate.
Standard: ASME A112.6.4, ICC-ES LC1021 Body Material: Cast iron. Combination Flashing Ring with 1 3/8”Gravel Stop: Required. Dome Material: Cast iron. Underdeck Clamp: Required.
Roof Drain RD/ERD-1: 1.
Combination Roof and Emergency Roof Drain: Roof sumps shall have fully cast, iron bodies, flashing clamp with integral gravel stop, deck clamp, and large roof flange.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 1423 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Domes shall be 11” diameter cast-iron, mushroom types with not less than 100 square inches of free area. Separate strainers required for primary and overflow. Drain pan, elevation ring for 2” insulation. Roof sumps equal to Froet 100C* OFS-DP-DC-ER2. C.
Roof Drain RD-1: 1.
D.
Emergency Roof Drain RD-2: 1.
2.6
Roof sumps shall have cast iron bodies, flashing clamp, deck clamp, gravel stop and large roof flange. Domes shall be 12” diameter cast-iron, mushroom types with not less than 100 square inches of free area. Roof sumps equal to Wade W-3000-42.
Similar to standard roof drain except with adjustable 6” diameter plastic standpipe. Equal to Wade model W-3000-SD.
FLASHING MATERIALS A.
Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, 12 oz./sq. ft. thickness.
B.
Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, millphosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
C.
Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum thickness.
D.
Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
E.
Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
F.
Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
G.
Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 1423 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
C.
For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.
D.
For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E.
Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor penetrations.
F.
Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 07. 1. 2.
Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so that there will be no leakage between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
G.
Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.
H.
Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance.
I.
Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.
J.
Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
3.2
PIPING APPLICATIONS A.
Storm Drainage Piping below Ground: Use the following: 1.
B.
Storm Drainage Piping above Ground: Use the following: 1.
2.
3.3
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic DWV pipe; PVC socket-type drain pipe pattern fittings in 5” and 6” sizes; PVC socket-type Schedule 40 fittings in 8” and larger sizes; and solvent-cemented joints.
2 to 8 inches: Hubless cast-iron soil pipe; hubless cast-iron soil pipe fittings; stainless steel, cast-iron, or FM-type heavy-duty couplings for hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; and hubless joints. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic PVC socket-type Schedule 40 fittings and solventcemented joints. PVC allowed only in areas outside of studio's.
CONNECTIONS A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 1423 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
FLASHING INSTALLATION A.
Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: 1. 2.
B.
Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. 2. 3.
Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty.
C.
Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D.
Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E.
Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
3.5
PROTECTION A.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 22 1423
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 1423 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
Friday, May 2, 2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PD Project #1301006
SECTION 22 4000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.3
Floor drains Service Sinks Hose Bibbs Sill cock
DEFINITIONS A.
Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.
B.
Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes cultured-marble and solid-surface materials.
C.
Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating.
D.
Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.
E.
FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
F.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G.
Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.
B.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, control wiring, and fixtures.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: maintenance manuals.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
For plumbing fixtures to include in operation and
22 4000 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D. 1.5
Friday, May 2, 2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PD Project #1301006
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.
Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.
D.
NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
E.
Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.
F.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
G.
Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M. Plastic Lavatories: ANSI Z124.3. Plastic Mop-Service Basins: ANSI Z124.6. Plastic Sinks: ANSI Z124.6. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1. Stainless-Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction. Stainless-Steel Residential Sinks: ASME A112.19.3. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 4000 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. H.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PD Project #1301006
NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
I.
Friday, May 2, 2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
FIXTURE LIST Water Closets WC-1:
Floor-mounted, vitreous china, elongated bowl. Fully glazed, 2-1/8” trapway, 15” rim height, siphon jet, 1½” inlet spud, 1.1, 1.28 or 1.6 gallons per flush. Equal to American Standard, Madera 3451.001. Trim – Sloan, Dual Flush Flushometer. 1.1 and 1.6 gallons per flush. Sloan WES-111. Seat – White solid plastic, open front, extended back, less cover, check hinge with self sustaining hinges. Equal to Olsonite 10CC.
WC-2:
Floor-mounted, barrier-free, vitreous china, elongated bowl. Fully glazed, 2-1/8” trapway, 16½ ” rim height, siphon jet, 1½” inlet spud, 1.1, 1.28 or 1.6 gallons per flush. Equal to American Standard, Madera 3461.001. Trim – Same as WC-1. Seat – Same as WC-1.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 4000 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
Friday, May 2, 2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PD Project #1301006
Urinals UR-1:
Wall mounted urinal, vitreous china, high efficiency 0.5 gallons per flush, flushing rim, siphon jet action, ¾” top spud, equipped for wall carrier. Equal to American Standard, Allbrook, Flo-Wise #6550.001. Flush Valve – Exposed urinal flushometer for a ¾” top spud urinal, 0.5 gallons per flush, chrome plated. Equal to Sloan, model 186-0.5. Carrier – Carrier with support plate, bearing plate, fixture bolts, steel pipe uprights and web or block type feet as required by construction. Equal to Wade W400 AMII.
C.
Lavatories LAV-1:
Multiple three (3) bowl, one piece seamless solid surface top and bowl equal to Bradley model LD-3010/MOP-93”, 3” backsplash, side splash, 3” front apron, single hole at each bowl, round over edging, TBRKT-1 mounting bracket, chrome-plated p-trap, drain, strainer and tailpiece and LD-trap stainless steel trap cover. Color as selected by Architect. Trim – Deck mounted 4” fixed centers, 3½” x 9½” high rigid gooseneck, 2.2 gpm aerator, 4” wrist blade handle. Equal to Chicago Faucet 895-317 RGD1XKABCP. Waste – Wheelchair lavatory cast grid drain plug with strainer and offset drain assembly with 1¼” O.D. tailpiece. Mixing Valve – ASSE 1070 approved. Watts MMV thermostatic mixing valve.
D.
Showers SH-1:
Shower – The shower enclosure shall be Aqua Bath model IS483684BF-OT-FUS 2” acrylic and be molded from a single sheet so as not to have any joints or seams, shall meet ANSI Z124.2. Unit shall have a backside flame spread of less than 30 (Class B). Shall be designed to be NAHB listed. The enclosure shall have inside dimensions of 43” W x 36” D x 78” H. Outside dimensions to the top nailing flanges of the unit are 45½” left to right and 37¼” front to back. A soap tray is molded on the valve wall corner 28” above the shower floor. The approximate weight of the unit shall be 255 lbs. The unit shall be formed with a patented recessed trench system so as to direct water to the center drain. Provide the following accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
1” diameter, 18 gauge stainless steel curtain rod. Ribbed bottom, slip resistant. Self caulking brass drain, 2” pipe with stainless steel strainer, field installed. Weighted shower curtain, antibacterial, with hooks.
22 4000 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
Friday, May 2, 2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PD Project #1301006
Trim – Concealed thermostatic water mixing valve for use on shower and tub/shower installations. Powerful advanced thermal actuator compensates for both temperature and pressure fluctuations. A built-in adjustable metal-to-metal temperature limit stop reduces chances of accidental scalding due to over adjustment of handle. Heavy cast-brass body, integral check-stops, durable brass faceplate, lever-type handle and corrosion-resistant material. Valve and accessories equal to Powers E420T12M2. E.
Floor Drains FD-1: Finished Areas: Six inch (6”) diameter top, use 6x6 square in tiled areas, nickel-bronze alloy adjustable strainer secured with screws. Provide clamping device in and for drains located above first floor. Provide 4# lead flashing extending out 24” in all directions where clamping devices are required. Equal to Wade W-1100-AX6-1 (round top) or Wade W-1100-G6-1 (square top) or Zurn.
F.
Trap Seals TS-1:
G.
Floor drain trap seal equal to “TRAPSEAL” models 2”-SS2009, 3”-SS3000 and 4”-SS4009.
Electric Water Cooler EWC-1:
Wall hung, lead free hi-low electric water cooler with front & side push bars for barrier free compliance. Capacity of 8.0 GPH with 80° water inlet and 50° water outlet @ 90°F ambient. Equal to Elkay LZTL-8-C. Manufactures standard color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.
B.
Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.
B.
Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures. 1. 2.
Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 4000 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.
Friday, May 2, 2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PD Project #1301006
Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
C.
Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
D.
Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.
E.
Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
F.
Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and wall bracket and onto waste fitting seals.
G.
Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
H.
Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
I.
Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. 1.
Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture. Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
J.
Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.
K.
Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.
L.
Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment.
M.
Install toilet seats on water closets.
N.
Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
O.
Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.
P.
Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
Q.
Install traps on fixture outlets. 1. 2.
Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 4000 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
Friday, May 2, 2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PD Project #1301006
R.
Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
S.
Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.3
CONNECTIONS A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
C.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
D.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.
B.
Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.
C.
Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D.
Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.
E.
Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
3.5
ADJUSTING A.
Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.
B.
Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.
C.
Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
D.
Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 4000 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.6
Friday, May 2, 2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PD Project #1301006
CLEANING A.
Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following: 1. 2.
B. 3.7
Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. PROTECTION
A.
Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B.
Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
END OF SECTION 22 4000
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 4000 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 0513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Motor controllers. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A.
2.2
Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet (1000 m) above sea level.
B.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
2.3
POLYPHASE MOTORS A.
Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B.
Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C.
Service Factor: 1.15.
D.
Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 0513 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E.
Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
F.
Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
G.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
H.
Insulation: Class F.
I.
Code Letter Designation: 1.
J. 2.4
Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T. POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.
B.
Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1.
2. 3. 4. C. 2.5
Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.
Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor. SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A.
Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1.
Permanent-split capacitor.
B.
Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
C.
Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 0513 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 23 0513
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 0513 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 0523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.3
Bronze swing check valves. Iron swing check valves. Bronze gate valves. Eccentric plug valves.
Section 23 0553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.
DEFINITIONS A.
CWP: Cold working pressure.
B.
EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
C.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
D.
NRS: Nonrising stem.
E.
OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
F.
RS: Rising stem.
G.
SWP: Steam working pressure.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
ASME Compliance: 1.
ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 0523 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3. 1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Use the following precautions during storage: 1. 2.
C.
Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
Maintain valve end protection. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A.
Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
B.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.
C.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Valve Actuator Types: 1. 2. 3. 4.
E.
Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10 plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.
Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. 2.
3.
Gate Valves: With rising stem. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 0523 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 F.
2.2
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Valve-End Connections: 1. 2. 3. 4.
G.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. BRASS BALL VALVES
A.
Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2.
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.
2.3
Hammond Valve. Jamesbury; a subsidiary of Metso Automation. Legend Valve. Marwin Valve; a division of Richards Industries. Milwaukee Valve Company. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Standard: MSS SP-110. SWP Rating: 150 psig. CWP Rating: 600 psig. Body Design: Two piece. Body Material: Forged brass. Ends: Threaded. Seats: PTFE or TFE. Stem: Brass. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. Port: Regular.
BRONZE BALL VALVES A.
Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
American Valve, Inc. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. DynaQuip Controls. Hammond Valve. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 0523 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 h. i. j. 2.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.
2.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Standard: MSS SP-110. SWP Rating: 150 psig. CWP Rating: 600 psig. Body Design: Two piece. Body Material: Bronze. Ends: Threaded. Seats: PTFE or TFE. Stem: Bronze. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. Port: Regular.
IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES A.
200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q.
2.
ABZ Valve and Controls; a division of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corp. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. DeZurik Water Controls. Flo Fab Inc. Hammond Valve. Kitz Corporation. Legend Valve. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Norriseal; a Dover Corporation company. Red-White Valve Corporation. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Description: a. b. c. d. e.
Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. CWP Rating: 200 psig. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. Seat: EPDM.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 0523 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 f. g. B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. Disc: Aluminum bronze.
200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q.
2.
ABZ Valve and Controls; a division of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corp. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. DeZurik Water Controls. Flo Fab Inc. Hammond Valve. Kitz Corporation. Legend Valve. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Norriseal; a Dover Corporation company. Red-White Valve Corporation. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. CWP Rating: 200 psig. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. Seat: NBR. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. Disc: Aluminum bronze.
200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
ABZ Valve and Controls; a division of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc. American Valve, Inc. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corp. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. DeZurik Water Controls. Flo Fab Inc.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 0523 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. 2.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Hammond Valve. Kitz Corporation. Legend Valve. Milwaukee Valve Company. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation. NIBCO INC. Norriseal; a Dover Corporation company. Red-White Valve Corporation. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International. Sure Flow Equipment Inc. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. CWP Rating: 200 psig. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. Seat: EPDM. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. Disc: Stainless steel.
200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t.
ABZ Valve and Controls; a division of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc. American Valve, Inc. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corp. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. DeZurik Water Controls. Flo Fab Inc. Hammond Valve. Kitz Corporation. Legend Valve. Milwaukee Valve Company. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation. NIBCO INC. Norriseal; a Dover Corporation company. Red-White Valve Corporation. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International. Sure Flow Equipment Inc. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 0523 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
2.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. CWP Rating: 200 psig. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. Seat: NBR. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. Disc: Stainless steel.
BRONZE GATE VALVES A.
Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.
2.
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
B.
American Valve, Inc. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. Hammond Valve. Kitz Corporation. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Powell Valves. Red-White Valve Corporation. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. CWP Rating: 200 psig. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. Stem: Bronze. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. Packing: Asbestos free. Handwheel: Malleable iron or aluminum.
Class 125, RS Bronze Gate Valves: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b.
American Valve, Inc. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 0523 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. 2.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. Hammond Valve. Kitz Corporation. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Powell Valves. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. CWP Rating: 200 psig. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. Stem: Bronze. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. Packing: Asbestos free. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
Class 150, NRS Bronze Gate Valves: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
2.
Kitz Corporation. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Powell Valves. Red-White Valve Corporation. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Other manufactures by voluntary alternate.
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. CWP Rating: 300 psig. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet. Ends: Threaded. Stem: Bronze. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. Packing: Asbestos free. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
Class 150, RS Bronze Gate Valves: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 0523 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. 2.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. Hammond Valve. Kitz Corporation. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Powell Valves. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. CWP Rating: 300 psig. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet. Ends: Threaded. Stem: Bronze. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. Packing: Asbestos free. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
IRON GATE VALVES A.
Class 125, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n.
2.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. Flo Fab Inc. Hammond Valve. Kitz Corporation. Legend Valve. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Powell Valves. Red-White Valve Corporation. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Description: a. b. c. d.
Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. Ends: Flanged.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 0523 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 e. f. g. 2.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Trim: Bronze. Disc: Solid wedge. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.
BRONZE GLOBE VALVES A.
Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.
2.
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
2.8
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Hammond Valve. Kitz Corporation. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Powell Valves. Red-White Valve Corporation. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. CWP Rating: 300 psig. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet. Ends: Threaded. Stem: Bronze. Disc: PTFE or TFE. Packing: Asbestos free. Handwheel: Malleable iron or aluminum.
ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES A.
175 CWP, Eccentric Plug Valves with Resilient Seating. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
Clow Valve Co.; a division of McWane, Inc. DeZurik Water Controls. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. M&H Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. Milliken Valve Company. Henry Pratt Company. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 0523 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Description: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
Standard: MSS SP-108. CWP Rating: 175 psi minimum. Body and Plug: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray iron; ASTM A 126, gray iron; or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel. Ends: Flanged. Stem-Seal Packing: Asbestos free. Plug, Resilient-Seating Material: Suitable for potable-water service unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.
B.
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.
C.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
E.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2
VALVE INSTALLATION A.
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E.
Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. 2. 3.
Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. Center-Guided and Plate-Type Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 0523 - 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
ADJUSTING A.
3.4
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, gate, or plug valves. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type. Throttling Service except Steam: Globe or ball valves. Pump-Discharge Check Valves: a. b.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with spring or iron, center-guided, metal or resilient-seat check valves.
B.
If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C.
Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
3.5
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valveend option is indicated in valve schedules below. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. For Grooved-End Copper Tubing and Steel Piping except Steam and Steam Condensate Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.
HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A.
Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Smaller: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. Ball Valves: Two piece, regular port, bronze with brass trim. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, bronze disc. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 150, NRS or RS. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
END OF SECTION 23 0523
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 0523 - 12
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
1.3
Steel pipe hangers and supports. Trapeze pipe hangers. Fiberglass pipe hangers. Metal framing systems Fiberglass strut systems. Fastener systems. Equipment supports.
DEFINITIONS A.
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B.
Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
1.5
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Steel pipe hangers and supports. Fiberglass pipe hangers. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. Powder-actuated fastener systems.
Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1.
Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 0529 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3. 4. 5. C. 1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components. Fiberglass strut systems. Include Product Data for components. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components. Equipment supports.
Welding certificates. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel”.
B.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2.
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B.
Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. Unistrut Corp. Miro Industries Others by voluntary alternate.
C.
Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
D.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
E.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 0529 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A.
2.4
Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. FIBERGLASS PIPE HANGERS
A.
Clevis-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers: Similar to MSS Type 1, steel pipe hanger except hanger is made of fiberglass and continuous-thread rod and nuts are made of polyurethane or stainless steel. 1.
Manufacturers: a. b. c.
B.
Strap-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers: Made of fiberglass loop with stainless-steel continuousthread rod, nuts, and support hook. 1.
Manufacturers: a. b.
2.5
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. Unistrut Corp. Others by voluntary alternate.
Plasti-Fab, Inc. Others by voluntary alternate.
METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A.
Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components.
B.
Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. Unistrut Corp. Miro Industries. Others by voluntary alternate.
C.
Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.6
FIBERGLASS STRUT SYSTEMS A.
Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, similar to MFMA-3, made of fiberglass channels and other components.
B.
Manufacturers: 1.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 0529 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 2.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Others by voluntary alternate.
FASTENER SYSTEMS A.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1.
Manufacturers: a. b. c.
B.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated or stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1.
Manufacturers: a. b. c. d.
2.8
Hilti, Inc. Powers Fasteners. Others by voluntary alternate.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. Hilti, Inc. Powers Fasteners. Others by voluntary alternate.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A.
2.9
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. 2.
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 0529 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
C.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.
D.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 7.
8.
G.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1.
H.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. 2. 3. 4.
I.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 0529 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. J.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. 2.
Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
K.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
L.
Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
M.
Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.
3.2
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A.
Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
B.
Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1.
2.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C.
Fiberglass Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
D.
Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 0529 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
E.
Fiberglass Strut System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled fiberglass struts.
F.
Fastener System Installation: 1.
2.
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
G.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.
H.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
I.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
J.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
K.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
L.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
M.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.
N.
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. b. c.
2.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 0529 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 a. 3.
3.3
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. b. c. d.
5.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a.
4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4
METAL FABRICATIONS A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
3.5
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
ADJUSTING A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 0529 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B. 3.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. PAINTING
A.
Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B.
Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 23 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 0529 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
1.3
Equipment labels. Warning signs and labels. Pipe labels. Duct labels. Stencils. Valve tags. Warning tags.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.
C.
Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.
D.
Valve numbering scheme.
E.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
EQUIPMENT LABELS A.
Metal Labels for Equipment:
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 0553 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
2. 3.
4. 5. B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch, Stainless steel, 0.025-inch, Aluminum, 0.032-inch, or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
C.
Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
D.
Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.2
WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
C.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
D.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 0553 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
E.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
F.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
G.
Label Content: instructions.
2.3
Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
PIPE LABELS A.
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B.
Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. 2.
2.4
Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
STENCILS A.
Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions. 1. 2. 3.
2.5
Stencil Material: Aluminum or Brass. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated.
VALVE TAGS A.
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2inch numbers. 1.
2. B.
Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch, Stainless steel, 0.025-inch, Aluminum, 0.032-inch, or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 0553 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
WARNING TAGS A.
Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE." Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
3.2
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B.
Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A.
Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting."
B.
Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles , complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system. 1. 2.
C.
Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.
Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Near each valve and control device. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 0553 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 6. 7. D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 15 feet in areas of congested piping, equipment and within equipment rooms. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings.
Pipe Label Color Schedule: 1.
Heating Water Piping: a. b.
2.
Background Color: White. Letter Color: Black.
Refrigerant Piping: a. b.
3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Background Color: White. Letter Color: Red.
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A.
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B.
Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs: 1.
Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. b. c.
3.5
Refrigerant: 2 inches round. Hot Water: 2 inches round. Gas: 2 inches round.
WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A.
Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.
END OF SECTION 23 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 0553 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1.
Balancing Air Systems: a. b.
2.
Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems: a. b.
1.3
Constant-volume air systems. Variable-air-volume systems.
Constant-flow hydronic systems. Primary-secondary hydronic systems.
DEFINITIONS A.
AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B.
NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C.
TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D.
TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E.
TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B.
Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
C.
Certified TAB reports.
D.
Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 1. 2. 3.
Instrument type and make. Serial number. Application.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 4. 5. 1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Dates of use. Dates of calibration.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB. 1. 2.
B.
TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician.
Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. 2.
Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.
C.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect.
D.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."
E.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."
F.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."
1.6
requirements
in
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.
B.
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.
1.7
COORDINATION A.
Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.
B.
Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B.
Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C.
Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D.
Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E.
Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Section 23 3113 "Metal Ducts" and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.
F.
Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1.
2.
Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
G.
Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H.
Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I.
Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J.
Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
K.
Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
L.
Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.
M.
Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
N.
Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
O.
Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
P.
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B.
Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
3.3
Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section. 1.
B.
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. 2.
C.
Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."
After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 23 0713 "Duct Insulation," and Section 23 0719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."
Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D. 3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C.
For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
E.
Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F.
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G.
Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I.
Check for airflow blockages.
J.
Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
L.
Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 23 3113 "Metal Ducts."
3.5
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A.
Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1.
Measure total airflow. a.
2.
Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.
Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure: a. b. c.
Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 d. 3.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.
Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heatrecovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. Obtain approval from Construction Manager for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, fullheating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. a.
2. 3.
Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.
Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1.
D.
Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1.
C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment. a.
4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.
Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1.
2.
Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A.
Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point airflow with the remainder at maximum-airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
B.
Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. 2.
3. 4.
5.
Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems. a.
6.
Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a.
7.
8. C.
If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. Record final fan-performance data.
Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. 2. 3.
Balance variable-air-volume systems the same as described for constant-volume air systems. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of the static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 4. 5. 6. 7.
Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1.
2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7.
3.7
If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a.
D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan if one is installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems. a.
8.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow controller set at maximum airflow. Set terminal units at full-airflow condition. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow. Measure static pressure at the sensor. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A.
Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C.
Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. 2.
Open all manual valves for maximum flow. Check liquid level in expansion tank.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. 4. 5.
6. 7. 8. 3.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A.
Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement pumps: 1.
Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. a.
2.
Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved. a.
3.
4.
If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval from Construction Manager and comply with requirements in Section 23 2123 "Hydronic Pumps."
Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in overload conditions.
Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
B.
Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
C.
Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
D.
Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
E.
Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. 1.
System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
F.
Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.
G.
Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows: 1. 2.
3.
Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
H.
Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.
I.
Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.
J.
Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
3.9
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A.
3.10 A. 3.11 A.
Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY-SECONDARY HYDRONIC SYSTEMS Balance the primary circuit flow first and then balance the secondary circuits. PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
B.
3.12 A.
Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. Motor horsepower rating. Motor rpm. Efficiency rating. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data. PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B. 3.13 A.
PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
2.
3.
4.
A.
New filters are installed. Coils are clean and fins combed. Drain pans are clean. Fans are clean. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.
Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work. 1.
3.14
Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. Check the refrigerant charge. Check the condition of filters. Check the condition of coils. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies.
Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Steam Boilers: Measure and record entering-water temperature and flow and leaving-steam pressure, temperature, and flow.
1. 2.
B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer. If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required. Balance each air outlet.
TOLERANCES Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. 2. 3.
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.15
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
REPORTING
A.
Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.
B.
Status Reports: Prepare bi-monthly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.16 A.
FINAL REPORT General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. 2.
B.
Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
C.
Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
Pump curves. Fan curves. Manufacturers' test data. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
Title page. Name and address of the TAB contractor. Project name. Project location. Architect's name and address. Engineer's name and address. Contractor's name and address. Report date. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. Summary of contents including the following: a. b.
Indicated versus final performance. Notable characteristics of systems.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 12
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 c. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. Conditions of filters. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
E.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. Water and steam flow rates. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. Terminal units. Balancing stations. Position of balancing devices.
Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following: 1.
Unit Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.
2.
Unit identification. Location. Make and type. Model number and unit size. Manufacturer's serial number. Unit arrangement and class. Discharge arrangement. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. Number, make, and size of belts. Number, type, and size of filters.
Motor Data: a. b. c. d.
Motor make, and frame type and size. Horsepower and rpm. Volts, phase, and hertz. Full-load amperage and service factor.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 13
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 e. f. 3.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.
F.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Total air flow rate in cfm. Total system static pressure in inches wg. Fan rpm. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. Outdoor airflow in cfm. Return airflow in cfm. Outdoor-air damper position. Return-air damper position. Vortex damper position.
Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: 1.
Coil Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.
2.
System identification. Location. Coil type. Number of rows. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. Make and model number. Face area in sq. ft.. Tube size in NPS. Tube and fin materials. Circuiting arrangement.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.
Air flow rate in cfm. Average face velocity in fpm. Air pressure drop in inches wg. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. Water flow rate in gpm. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. Entering-water temperature in deg F. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 14
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 n. o. G.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F. Inlet steam pressure in psig.
Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following: 1.
Unit Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n.
2.
System identification. Location. Make and type. Model number and unit size. Manufacturer's serial number. Fuel type in input data. Output capacity in Btu/h. Ignition type. Burner-control types. Motor horsepower and rpm. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. Motor full-load amperage and service factor. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o.
H.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Total air flow rate in cfm. Entering-air temperature in deg F. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. Air temperature differential in deg F. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h. Manifold pressure in psig. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F. Operating set point in Btu/h. Motor voltage at each connection. Motor amperage for each phase. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h.
Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1.
Fan Data: a. b. c. d. e.
System identification. Location. Make and type. Model number and size. Manufacturer's serial number.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 15
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 f. g. h. 2.
Motor make, and frame type and size. Horsepower and rpm. Volts, phase, and hertz. Full-load amperage and service factor. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. Number, make, and size of belts.
Total airflow rate in cfm. Total system static pressure in inches wg. Fan rpm. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. Suction static pressure in inches wg.
Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1.
Report Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.
J.
Arrangement and class. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. b. c. d. e.
I.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Motor Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
3.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
System and air-handling-unit number. Location and zone. Traverse air temperature in deg F. Duct static pressure in inches wg. Duct size in inches. Duct area in sq. ft.. Indicated air flow rate in cfm. Indicated velocity in fpm. Actual air flow rate in cfm. Actual average velocity in fpm. Barometric pressure in psig.
Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 1.
Unit Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
System and air-handling unit identification. Location and zone. Apparatus used for test. Area served. Make. Number from system diagram. Type and model number.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 16
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 h. i. 2.
Size. Effective area in sq. ft..
Air flow rate in cfm. Air velocity in fpm). Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. Final air flow rate in cfm. Final velocity in fpm. Space temperature in deg F.
System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following: 1.
Unit Data: a. b. c. d. e.
2.
System and air-handling-unit identification. Location and zone. Room or riser served. Coil make and size. Flowmeter type.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. b. c. d. e. f.
L.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
K.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Air flow rate in cfm. Entering-water temperature in deg F. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig. Entering-air temperature in deg F. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following: 1.
Unit Data: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.
Unit identification. Location. Service. Make and size. Model number and serial number. Water flow rate in gpm. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig. Pump rpm. Impeller diameter in inches. Motor make and frame size. Motor horsepower and rpm. Voltage at each connection.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 17
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 n. o. p. 2.
Instrument type and make. Serial number. Application. Dates of use. Dates of calibration.
INSPECTIONS Initial Inspection: 1.
2.
After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report. Check the following for each system: a. b. c. d. e.
B.
Static head in feet of head or psig. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig. Actual impeller size in inches. Full-open flow rate in gpm. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig. Final water flow rate in gpm. Voltage at each connection. Amperage for each phase.
Report Data: a. b. c. d. e.
A.
Amperage for each phase. Full-load amperage and service factor. Seal type.
Instrument Calibration Reports: 1.
3.17
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.
M.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to the set point. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.
Final Inspection: 1.
After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Architect.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 18
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
3.
4.
C.
2.
3.18
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Architect shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows: 1.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.
Prepare test and inspection reports. ADDITIONAL TESTS
A.
Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B.
Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 23 0593
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593 - 19
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 0713 - DUCT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section includes insulating the following duct services: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2.
1.3
Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.
Section 23 0719 "HVAC Piping Insulation." Section 23 3113 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any). INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
DUCT INSULATION
23 0713 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
1.7
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 23 0529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C.
Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.8
SCHEDULING A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS A.
Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
DUCT INSULATION
23 0713 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 F.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap. Johns Manville; Microlite. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap. Others manufactures by voluntary alternate.
Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2.2
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1.
G.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series. Other manufactures by voluntary alternate.
ADHESIVES A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2. 3.
C.
Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
DUCT INSULATION
23 0713 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 a. b. c. 2. 3.
D.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127.Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-60/85-70.Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. Others by voluntary alternate.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2. 3.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-82. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-50.Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. Others by voluntary alternate.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3.
2.3
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1.
E.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone. Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. Other Manufactures by voluntary alternates. Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
MASTICS A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
DUCT INSULATION
23 0713 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. B.
For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. Color: White.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-30. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-35. Others manufactures by voluntary alternates.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. Color: White.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
2. 3. 4. 5. E.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-80/30-90. Vimasco Corporation; 749. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1.
D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Encacel. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 60-95/60-96. Others manufactures by voluntary alternates.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. Color: White.
Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
DUCT INSULATION
23 0713 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
b. c.
2.4
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.
2. 3. 4. 5.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-10. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 46-50. Others manufactures by voluntary alternates.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F). Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. Color: White.
LAGGING ADHESIVES A.
Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. 2.
For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.
b. 3. 4. 5. 2.5
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-50 AHV2.Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-36. Other manufactures by voluntary alternates.
Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fireresistant lagging cloths over duct insulation. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. Color: White.
SEALANTS A.
FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76.Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. Other manufactures by voluntary alternates.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. Color: Aluminum.
DUCT INSULATION
23 0713 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 6. B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76. Others manufactures by voluntary alternates
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. Color: White. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A.
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.7
ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A.
Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
C.
PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b.
2.
Johns Manville; Zeston. Others manufactures by voluntary alternate.
Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
DUCT INSULATION
23 0713 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. 2.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Color: White.
TAPES A.
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B.
Width: 3 inches. Thickness: 11.5 mils. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 2 percent. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternates.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternates.
Width: 3 inches. Thickness: 6.5 mils. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 2 percent. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.
DUCT INSULATION
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape. Compac Corporation; 130. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternates.
23 0713 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Width: 2 inches. Thickness: 6 mils. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 500 percent. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.9
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. Compac Corporation; 120. Venture Tape; 3520 CW. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternates.
Width: 2 inches. Thickness: 3.7 mils. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 5 percent. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
SECUREMENTS A.
Bands: 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2. 3. B.
ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs. Childers Products Bands Others by voluntary alternate
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1.
2.
3.
Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch thick, galvanized-steel, aluminum or stainless-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
DUCT INSULATION
23 0713 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C. 2.10
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel. CORNER ANGLES
A.
PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
B.
Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.
C.
Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. 2.
B. 3.2
Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION
A. 3.3
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
B.
Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
DUCT INSULATION
23 0713 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
H.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
I.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. 2.
3.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
J.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
K.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. 2.
3.
Draw jacket tight and smooth. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a.
4. 5.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
L.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
M.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
N.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
3.4
PENETRATIONS A.
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
DUCT INSULATION
23 0713 - 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
3. 4. B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. 2.
3. 4.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
D.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 1.
E.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1.
2. 3.5
Comply with requirements in Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping" and fireresistive joint sealers.
Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."
INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION A.
Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. 2. 3.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitordischarge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
DUCT INSULATION
23 0713 - 12
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 a.
b.
c. d. e. f.
4.
b.
6.
7.
B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vaporbarrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a.
5.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.
Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. 2. 3.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitordischarge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a.
DUCT INSULATION
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
23 0713 - 13
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 b.
c. d. e.
4.
b.
6.
3.6
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vaporbarrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a.
5.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.
Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A.
Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1.
3.7
Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.
DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A.
Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space. Outdoor, concealed supply and return. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.
DUCT INSULATION
23 0713 - 14
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Items Not Insulated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
3.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Fibrous-glass ducts. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. Flexible connectors. Vibration-control devices. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A.
Concealed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following: 1. 2.
B.
Concealed, round and flat-oval, return-air duct insulation shall be one of the following: 1. 2.
C.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
Concealed, return-air plenum insulation shall be one of the following: 1. 2.
3.9
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
Concealed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be one of the following: 1. 2.
E.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following: 1. 2.
D.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
ABOVEGROUND, OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A.
Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a duct system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Exposed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following: 1. 2. 3.
C.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1-1/2 inches thick.
Exposed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:
DUCT INSULATION
23 0713 - 15
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3.10
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A.
Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B.
If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C.
Ducts and Plenums, Concealed: 1. 2.
D.
None. PVC:30 mils thick.
Ducts and Plenums, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches: 1. 2. 3.
Aluminum, Smooth: 0.024 inch thick. Painted Aluminum, Smooth: 0.024 inch thick. Stainless Steel, Type 304 or Type 316, Smooth 2B Finish: 0.016 inch thick.
END OF SECTION 23 0713
DUCT INSULATION
23 0713 - 16
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 0719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems: 1.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.3
Heating hot-water piping, indoors.
Section 23 0713 "Duct Insulation."
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any). INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Use materials indicated for the completed Work. 1.
Piping Mockups: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.
2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 7. 1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
One 10-foot section of NPS 2 straight pipe. One each of a 90-degree threaded, welded, and flanged elbow. One each of a threaded, welded, and flanged tee fitting. One NPS 2 or smaller valve, and one NPS 2-1/2 or larger valve. Four support hangers including hanger shield and insert. One threaded strainer and one flanged strainer with removable portion of insulation. One threaded reducer and one welded reducer. One pressure temperature tap. One mechanical coupling.
For each mockup, fabricate cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for insulation materials, adhesives, mastics, attachments, and jackets. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
1.7
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 23 0529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C.
Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SCHEDULING A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS A.
Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
F.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
G.
CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap. Johns Manville; Microlite. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap. Other manufactures by voluntary alternate.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 e. f. 2.
H.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Type II, 1200 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
Knauf Insulation; Permawick Pipe Insulation. Owens Corning; VaporWick Pipe Insulation. Other manufactures by voluntary alternate.
Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied FSK jacket complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2.2
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Mineral-Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wicking System: Preformed pipe insulation complying with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with absorbent cloth factory-applied to the entire inside surface of preformed pipe insulation and extended through the longitudinal joint to outside surface of insulation under insulation jacket. Factory apply a white, polymer, vapor-retarder jacket with self-sealing adhesive tape seam and evaporation holes running continuously along the longitudinal seam, exposing the absorbent cloth. 1.
I.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation. Others manufactures by voluntary alternate.
INSULATING CEMENTS A.
Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.
B.
Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super-Stik.
Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 a. 2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.
ADHESIVES A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2. 3.
C.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.
2. D.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-97. - Marathon Industries; 290. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 81-27. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-30. Vimasco Corporation; 760. Other manufactures by voluntary alternate.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 81-84.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Phenolic and Polyisocyanurate Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-96. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33. Other manufactures by voluntary alternate.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. E.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127. - Marathon Industries; 225. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-60/85-70. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. Other manufactures by voluntary alternate.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water-based, synthetic resin adhesive with a service temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
H.
Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive. Other manufactures by voluntary alternate.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1.
G.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. 1.
F.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-96. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-60. Other manufactures by voluntary alternate.
ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. I.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1.
2.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
MASTICS A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II. 1.
B.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services. 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. Color: White.
Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services. 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.5
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. Color: White.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient services. 1. 2. 3. 4.
E.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. Color: White.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services. 1. 2. 3. 4.
D.
For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. Color: White.
LAGGING ADHESIVES A.
Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. Color: White.
SEALANTS A.
Joint Sealants: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. Color: White or gray. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
C.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76. - Marathon Industries; 405. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. Other manufactures by voluntary alternate.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. Color: Aluminum. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
2.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. Color: White. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A.
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 7. 2.8
ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perm when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A.
Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3.
Johns Manville; Zeston. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe. Other manufactures by voluntary alternate.
Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. Color: White.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 4.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a.
2.9
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.
TAPES A.
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
C.
Width: 2 inches. Thickness: 6 mils. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 500 percent. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
E.
Width: 3 inches. Thickness: 6.5 mils. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 2 percent. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
D.
Width: 3 inches. Thickness: 11.5 mils. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 2 percent. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
Width: 2 inches. Thickness: 3.7 mils. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 5 percent. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. 2. 3.
Width: 3 inches. Film Thickness: 4 mils. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 4. 5. 2.10 A.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Elongation at Break: 145 percent. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch in width.
SECUREMENTS Bands: 1. 2. 3.
B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. 2. 3.
3.2
Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1.
2.
Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
C.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. 2.
3.
4.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. 2.
3.
Draw jacket tight and smooth. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 12
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 a. 4. 5.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
O.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
P.
For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
3.4
Vibration-control devices. Testing agency labels and stamps. Nameplates and data plates. Manholes. Handholes. Cleanouts.
PENETRATIONS A.
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. 2.
3. 4.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 13
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
3. 4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1.
F.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. 2.
3.5
Comply with requirements in Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A.
Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 14
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
6.
7.
8.
9.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.
C.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D.
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1.
2.
3. 4.
5. 3.6
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.
INSTALLATION OF CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 15
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.
3.
B.
3.
4.
2. 3.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation. Finish flange insulation same as pipe insulation.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. When preformed insulation sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. Finish fittings insulation same as pipe insulation.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. 2. 3.
3.7
Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. Install two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals. Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to insulation surface. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1.
D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. 2.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Install mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. Finish valve and specialty insulation same as pipe insulation.
INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 16
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
3.
4.
2.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. 2. 3.
3.8
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1.
D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. 2.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A.
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. 2. 3.
4. C.
Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. 2.
Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 17
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. 2.
3. 4.
3.9
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. 2.
D.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. 2.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 18
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. 4. 3.10 A.
2. 3. 4.
Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. 2. 3.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1.
E.
Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1.
D.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
General Installation Requirements:
2.
C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
INSTALLATION OF PHENOLIC INSULATION
1.
B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. 2. 3.
Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 19
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.11 A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
2.
3.
3.
3.
A.
Install preformed sections of polyisocyanurate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
INSTALLATION OF POLYOLEFIN INSULATION Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1.
B.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. 2.
3.12
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, same thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1-1/2-inch thickness. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyisocyanurate block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
Insulation Installation on Fittings and Elbows: 1.
D.
Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with tape or bands and tighten without deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3- and 9-o'clock positions on the pipe. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier system.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. 2.
C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
INSTALLATION OF POLYISOCYANURATE INSULATION
1.
B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Seal split-tube longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. 2. 3.
Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyolefin sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 20
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 4. C.
3. 4.
A.
3.
Secure each layer of insulation with tape or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3- and 9-o'clock positions on the pipe. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier system.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. 2. 3.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, and make thickness same as adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1-1/2-inch. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polystyrene block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1.
D.
Install cut sections of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
2.
C.
Install mitered sections of polyolefin pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
INSTALLATION OF POLYSTYRENE INSULATION
1.
B.
Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. 2.
3.13
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. 2.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1.
Install preformed section of polystyrene insulation to valve body.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 21
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3. 3.14 A.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Draw jacket material smooth and tight. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end joints. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.
Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1.
Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.
C.
Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.
D.
Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint. Continuous jacket can be spiral-wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2-inch-circumference limit allows for 2-inch-overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 22
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.15 A.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
FINISHES Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." 1.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a.
Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C.
Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.
D.
Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.16
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections: 1.
C. 3.17
Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. 2. 3.
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. Underground piping. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 23
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.18 A.
Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F: All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a.
NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a.
2.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 2 inches thick.
Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, above 200 Deg F: 1.
NPS 3/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a.
2.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I or II: 1-1/2 inches thick.
NPS 1 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following: a.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I or II: 3 inches thick.
Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: 1.
All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
3.19
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch thick.
NPS 14 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following: a.
D.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below: 1.
C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
1.
B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. Phenolic: 1 inch thick. Polyisocyanurate: 1 inch thick. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick.
INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A.
Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B.
If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C.
Piping, Concealed: 1. 2.
None. PVC: 30 mils thick.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 24
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Piping, Exposed: 1. 2.
None. PVC: 30 mils thick.
END OF SECTION 23 0719
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 0719 - 25
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 0900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
DESCRIPTION A.
This section defines the Basic Materials and Methods used in the installation of LonWorks Control products to provide the functions necessary for control of the mechanical systems on this project. Please be advised that the requirements of this specification will be strictly enforced. Systems that do not meet the requirements of the specification as outlined below, in Part 1.01 of this specification, shall not be accepted.
B.
Provide a Facility Management and Control System incorporating LonWorks, Direct Digital Control, equipment monitoring, and control consisting of microprocessor based plant control processors interfacing directly with sensors, actuators, and environmental delivery systems (i.e. HVAC units); electric controls and mechanical devices for all items indicated on drawings described herein including dampers, valves, panels, sensing devices; a primary communications network to allow data exchange between microprocessor based devices.
C.
The system will consist of a flat, open architecture that utilizes the EIA 709.1 LonTalk Protocol as the common communication protocol between all controlled and controlling devices. Where necessary or desired, LonTalk packets may be encapsulated into TCP/IP messages to take advantage of existing infrastructure or to increase network bandwidth. Hierarchal systems consisting of master or global controllers that poll and/or control less intelligent unitary controllers on a secondary bus will not be considered.
D.
The system network shall be an Echelon LON. All nodes shall communicate with each other over a twisted pair of wires, utilizing Echelon’s free topology transceiver (FTT-10A). There will be no consideration given to any System Network which does not use an Echelon LON as the primary communications network. System controllers shall be capable of sharing standard network variable data with other LON-based devices that utilize the same transceivers.
E.
System controllers shall utilize either the 3120 or 3150 Neuron microprocessor as manufactured by Toshiba or Cypress for network communications. “Hosted” controllers that utilize a 3rd party chip coprocessor for communications are not acceptable. Controllers shall be capable of accepting control programs downloaded over the LON.
F.
The system installed shall seamlessly connect devices other than HVAC throughout the building regardless of subsystem type, i.e. HVAC, lighting, and security devices should easily coexist on the same network channel without the need for gateways. Use of layer 3 transparent routers is the only acceptable method spanning multiple channels and is the recommended method for system scalability. These components shall share common software for network communications, configuration, time scheduling, alarm handling, history logging, and custom programming.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
G.
Gateways shall not be used unless specifically authorized by the project engineer. Use of a gateway requires submittal of the documentation as required by the owner or owner’s representative. It is the intent of this specification that gateways be limited to integrating legacy systems where applicable. Acceptance of gateways is at the sole discretion of the owner and/or owner’s representative.
H.
System Monitoring and Supervisory Control shall be provided through the installation of GUI software applications that support either a direct driver to the Lonworks database. GUI workstations shall provide complete access to any point in the system at any time. Remote Operator interfaces and configuration tools shall be supported by the database in a client-server fashion.
I.
The control system shall be able to accommodate multiple user operation. Access to the control system data should be limited only by operator password. Multiple users shall have access to all valid system data
J.
The control system shall be designed such that mechanical equipment will be able to operate under stand-alone control. In general, the operation of any controllers on the network shall not rely on any other controller for its operation. Functionality such as scheduling, trending, and alarming shall be resident in each and every controller including both programmable and configurable controllers regardless of where they reside on the network. System controllers that require a master computer or a dedicated function module such as an alarm, schedule, trend, or data-logging module are not acceptable, although function specific modules may be used to supplement the functionality resident in each controller. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of any other controller on the LON, the control system shall continue to independently operate under control of the resident time clock in each controller and the resident program stored in nonvolatile memory as detailed herein. In such a case, each individual controller shall continue to trend and alarm data commensurate with the data storage capabilities of each controller until a network connection can be restored.
K.
The documentation contained in this section and other contract documents pertaining to HVAC Controls is schematic in nature. The Contractor shall provide hardware and software necessary to implement the functions shown or as implied in the contract documents.
L.
System configuration and monitoring shall be performed via a PC-type computer. Under no circumstances shall the PC be used as a control device for the network. It can be used for storage of data.
M.
LonWorks components not supplied by the primary manufacturer shall be integrated to share common software for network communications, time scheduling, alarm handling, and history logging.
N.
All system controllers shall utilize a peer-to-peer communications scheme to communicate with each other and with the PC-type monitoring computer(s).
O.
Controllers shall contain non-volatile memory for storage of control programs, configuration, setpoints, time schedules, and historical log data. All such data shall be retained in the event of a power failure. At least one controller shall have an on-board battery-backed real-time clock to ensure correct time-of-day operation following a power failure.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Nonbattery-backed controllers (VAV’s, heat pumps, etc...) shall be peers on the network and be able to obtain time synchronization from a battery-backed controller and/or controllers upon network power up. P.
History data logging and alarm detection shall be attained from all LonWorks controllers in the network, including third party LonWorks devices from alternate manufacturers. This data shall be monitored in the user interface software.
Q.
Controllers shall use a software mechanism for network addressing and identification. It shall not be necessary to set physical network address switches on each controller.
R.
System shall utilize Lonmark defined standard network and command protocol types (implicit messaging) for all system data including, but not limited to physical input and output values, input and output overrides, as well as general purpose input and output values used by the controller’s control program. The utilization of explicit messaging or protocol converters shall not be acceptable unless approved in writing by the owner representative prior to bid.
S.
In general, only LonMark certified devices will be accepted on this control network. Each device must be LonMark certified version 3.0 or higher. In those instances in which LonMark devices are not available, the Network Integrator shall provide LonWorks devices with application source code, device resource files, and external interface definitions. Any controller that does not meet this spec must be stated and submitted with specific reason why it is not LonMark certified. Exceptions may be granted for programmable controllers utilizing a custom programming software tool exclusive to the manufacturer of the controller, and for which no LonMark standard exists. In such cases, exceptions shall be limited to the software used to program the controllers, and shall not be granted for any other requirement of the LonMark certification. Acceptance of such a device is at the sole discretion of the Consulting Engineer.
T.
The Network Management and Operating System shall conform to the LonWorks Network Services (LNS) standard. Any device that is to be added to the system must be able to be installed with a standard tool such as LonMaker for Windows, or Network Integrator.
U.
All configurable devices must be provided with either an LNS plugin or a dedicated configuration tool that communicates is configuration data to the central LNS Server.
V.
Network Management shall be performed in a client/server architecture in that multiple clients shall be able to install and commission devices simultaneously on the network.
W.
The network infrastructure shall adhere to the LonMark and Echelon published guidelines for network wiring and architecture. Wire type, distance, termination, and use of routers shall be strictly adhered to. The number of nodes per channel shall be no more than 80% of the defined limit in order to provide future system enhancement with minimal infrastructure modifications.
X.
Upon job completion, the network integrator shall provide all drawings, LNS databases, resource files, configuration files, etc on CD. All Custom Programs and UDD files for setup will be turned over to owner and become the owner’s property.
Y.
The network integrator shall provide a legal copy of all software tools, configuration tools, management tools, and utilities used during system commissioning and installation. All tools shall be generally available in the market. No closed and/or unavailable tools will be permitted.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 Z.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Specification Compliance Checklist
Architecture: Flat Peer to Peer Lon w/ Layer 3 Routing Only Communication Protocol: Lontalk (EIA Std. 709.1) Transceiver: FTT-10 Free Topology Transceiver Processor: Neuron 3120 or 3150 Network Operating System: LNS Message Tags: Lonmark Defined Standard Network Variable Types & Standard Configuration Parameter Types Use of Gateways: Pre-approved Only. For Converting Proprietary to Lon Only Network Management/Commissioning Lonmaker for Windows or Network Tool: Integrator Integrator Certification: Authorized Network Integrator and/or Authorized Lonworks Integrator Product Certification: Lonmark 3.0 Media Type: Media Independent Topology: Topology Free, Polarity Insensitive 1.2
Check
SUMMARY OF WORK A.
Provide LonWorks based products that communicate on multiple channels to meet the functional specifications as indicated on the Drawings and the dedicated product functional specifications and profiles specified in other Sections.
B.
Provide FTT-10A LonTalk™ routers and repeaters as required to combine different communication channels onto a central field bus or as required to segment groups of Intelligent Devices and/or Control Units.
C.
Provide Intelligent Devices (ID’s), Programmable Control Units (PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER’s), and Terminal Device Control Units (TDCU’s) as herein specified, as needed to perform functions indicated in the input/output summaries and sequences of operation, and/or indicated on the HVAC drawings.
D.
Provide control cabinets, wire, raceway systems, 24 DC and/or 24 AC power supplies and final connections to nodes provided by this contract and the following Control Units. 1. Control Cabinets will have wire Duct and din rail. All Transformers with breaker and 120 Volt plugin.
E.
The Building Management System Contractor shall provide all controls, sequences of operation, and systems monitoring as required by these specifications and by the drawings. Provide all required devices, sensors, hardware, software, wiring, controllers, etc. The Building Management System shall be configured to provide all controls, sequences of operation, and systems monitoring as required by these specifications and by the drawings. Provide all required devices, sensors, hardware, software, wiring, controllers, etc.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
F.
The Facility Management System shall be configured to provide all controls, sequences of operation, and systems monitoring as required by these specifications and by the drawings. Provide all required devices, sensors, hardware, software, wiring, controllers, etc.
G.
If required, the system shall allow the future integration of other systems (Card Access, Lighting, and Intrusion Monitoring) on the network proposed in this document, and also share common software for network communications, time scheduling, alarm handling, and history logging.
1.3
PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION. A.
Control Valves
B.
Sensor Wells
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
General 1.
B.
The HVAC Control System shall be furnished, engineered, and installed by Licensed Trade Technicians. The contractor shall be an Echelon Certified Network Integrator or LonWorks Integrator. The contractor shall employ technicians who have completed Echelon factory authorized training. The contractor shall employ technicians to provide instruction, routine maintenance, and emergency service within 24 hours upon receipt of request.
System Integrator Qualifications 1.
Owner Approved System Integrator Contractors include the following: a. Control Net……..(5688 E. ML AVE. KALAMAZOO, MI 49048, (269) 373-5555) b. High tech electric ……..(Address, Phone) c. Nelson Trane……..(5335 HILL 23 DR FLINT, MI, (810) 767-7800)
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
The system integrator must be regularly engaged in the service and installation of Lonworks based systems as specified herein, and must have been so for a minimum of three (3) years. The system integrator must be an authorized representative in good standing of the manufacturer of the proposed hardware and software components, and must have been so for a minimum of three (3) years. The system integrator shall have an office that is staffed with designers trained in integrating interoperable systems and technicians fully capable of providing Lonworks instruction and routine emergency maintenance service on all system components. The system integrator shall have in house capabilities to provide control strategies for whole building control. This includes HVAC, lighting, access, and security applications. The system integrator shall have a service facility, staffed with qualified service personnel, capable of providing instructions and routine emergency maintenance service for networked control systems. The system integrator shall Submit a list of no less than three(3) similar projects, which have Lonworks based Building Systems as specified herein installed by the system
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
8.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
integrator These projects must be on-line and functional such that the Owners/Users representative can observe the system in full operation. The system integrator must be a certified Lonworks Integrator, or submit resumes with the proposal indicating passing certificates for Echelon Corporation’s approved interoperable, or proof of equivalent training. Such proof must include summary of coursework and indicate both written and laboratory requirements of alternate training.
Hardware and Software Component Manufacturer Qualifications 1.
Owner Approved Manufacturers of hardware and software components include the following: a. Smart Controls……..(Address, Phone) b. Circon EBS Systems……..(Address, Phone) c. Nelson Trane Office only……..(5335 HILL 23 DR FLINT, MI, (810) 767-7800)
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
D.
The manufacturer of the hardware and software components must be primarily engaged in the manufacture of Lonworks based systems as specified herein, and must have been so for a minimum of three (7) years. The manufacturer of the hardware and software components as well as its subsidiaries must be a member in good standing of the LonMark Organization. The manufacturer of the hardware and software components shall have an authorized representative capable of providing service and support as referenced in section B above, and must have done so for a minimum of three (3) years. The manufacturer of the hardware and software components shall have a technical support group accessible via a toll free number that is staffed with qualified personnel, capable of providing instruction and technical support service for networked control systems. The manufacturer of the hardware and software components must be authorized to certify Lonworks Integrators as defined by Echelon Corporation. They also must provide for Echelon Corporation’s approved Lonworks curriculum. The manufacturer of the hardware and software components must have no less than three(3) similar projects, which have Lonworks based building systems as specified herein installed by the authorized representative referenced above. These projects must be on-line and functional such that the Owners/Users representative can observe the system in full operation.
Reference Standards 1.
Control system components shall be new and in conformance with the following applicable standards for products specified: a. LonMark certified, and LNS Based. b. ANSI EIA 709.1 LonTalk Protocol
E.
Products 1.
Utilize standard PC components for all assemblies. Custom hardware, operating system, and utility software are not acceptable.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3.
1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
All products (PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER’s, TDCU’s and ID’s) shall contain ANSI EIA 709.1 LonTalk Protocol networking elements to allow ease of integration of devices from multiple vendors. All materials, equipment and software shall be standard components, regularly manufactured for this and other systems and custom designed for this project. All systems and components shall be thoroughly tested.
SUBMITTALS A.
General: Submit the following: 1.
Product data on all components used to meet the requirements of the specifications such as enclosures, network transceivers, Resource files, LNS Plugins, XIF documentation, configuration parameter options, mounting details, power supplies, etc. a. Submittals shall be marked with Part Number.
2. 3. 4. 5. B.
Shop Drawings 1.
2. 3. 4.
C.
Software documentation regarding the proposed PC operating system, third party utilities and application programs, and the proposed application program for the Control Units. Logical and physical diagrams for each channel indicating each node (control devices and ID’s), node address (domain, subnet and group), channel type and router specifications. Submit functional temperature control diagrams for each Mechanical system served by the HVAC Control System. Indicate and Tag each input/output served by each Control Unit or Intelligent Device. Submit 8 sets of submittals for review within 3 weeks of contract award.
The controls contractor shall submit AutoCAD or Visio generated schematic drawings for the entire control system for review and approval before work shall begin. Included in the submittal drawings shall be a one-page diagram depicting the complete system architecture complete with a communications riser. Drawings shall include point-to-point wiring diagrams and must show all temperature controls, start-stop arrangement for each piece of equipment, equipment interlocks, wiring terminal numbers and any special connection information required for properly controlling the mechanical equipment. The submittal shall include a bill of material reference list as well as equipment sequences of operation. The submittals shall include manufacturer's catalog data describing each item of control equipment or component provided and installed for the project. System Color Graphics using the AutoCAD or Visio generated schematic drawings. Dynamic points, menus icons, commandable points, etc. should be clearly identified. Color conventions proposed for all graphics.
Close-Out Documents 1.
Submit final copies of the shop drawings outlined in paragraph B above. These final submittals shall reflect all field modifications and change orders required to complete the installation. Submit the following quantities of record submittal drawings immediately
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
2. D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
following receipt of notification of substantial completion. Auto CAD drawing or VISIO files of all shop drawings on CD ROM disks. Three complete sets of documents located in a three-ring notebook and organized by subject with divider tabs.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1.
Submit 3 sets of operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with requirements of Division 1. Include the following documentation: a. Network Management Software User Manual specific to each tool package provided. b. Maintenance Instructions: Document all maintenance and repair/ replacement procedures. Provide ordering number for each system component, and source of supply. Provide a list of recommended spare parts needed to minimize downtime. c. Documentation of network variables, network node configurations, priority interrupts, node binding, addressing structure, etc.
1.6
INSTRUCTION OF OWNER OPERATING PERSONNEL A.
All training shall be by the HVAC Controls Contractor and shall utilize specified manuals, asbuilt documentation, and the on-line help utility.
B.
Operator training shall include four initial eight-hour sessions. The initial operator training program shall be to establish a basic understanding of Windows based software, functions, commands, mouse, etc. The training shall encompass as a minimum: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
1.7
Troubleshooting of input devices, i.e., bad sensors. Sequence of operation review. Sign on - sign off. Selection of all displays and reports. Commanding of points, keyboard and mouse mode. Modifying English text Use of all dialogue boxes and menus. System initialization. GUI Software. LonWorks® Network Management Software.
ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE A.
Upon completion of the installation, Contractor shall start-up the system and perform all necessary calibration and testing to ensure proper operation of the project control systems.
B.
Schedule a hardware demonstration and system acceptance test in the presence of the Contracting Officer and/or the Engineer. The acceptance testing is defined as demonstrating the sequence of operation as indicated in the drawings. The hardware demonstration is specified in this Section. The Contractor shall perform all tests prior to scheduling the acceptance test and hardware demonstration to insure the overall system is ready for inspection and observations.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
1.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
When the system performance is deemed satisfactory in whole or in part by these observers, the system parts will be accepted for beneficial use and be deemed substantially complete as defined in Division 1. WARRANTY
A.
The HVAC Control System shall be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and service. If within eighteen (18) months from the date of substantial completion, the installed equipment is found to be defective in operation, workmanship or materials, the building systems contractor shall replace, repair or adjust the defect at no cost. Service shall be provided within 4 hours upon notice from Owner’s designated Representative.
B.
The warranty shall extend to material that is supplied and installed by the Contractor. Material supplied but not installed by the Contractor shall be covered per the above to the extent of the product only. Installation labor shall be the responsibility of the trade contractor performing the installation.
C.
All corrective software modifications made during warranty service periods shall be updated on all user documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks.
1.9
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
Do not install electronic hardware in the project until non-condensing environmental conditions have been established. Products installed in violation of this request maybe requested to be replaced at no additional cost to the project.
B.
Coordinate storage requirements for factory mounted terminal control units on air terminal devices, air handling units or other packaged control equipment. Do not store control units on site in non-conditioned areas for more than two weeks.
C.
Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping control devices to unit manufacturer.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1
OPERATOR’s WORKSTATION A.
The Operators Workstation shall be Laptop 1. Operating System - Windows 7. 2. 32bit. 3. 4 GB RAM 4. Screen Size -15”Or larger. 5. All software required for system shall be installed on laptop for owner. PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
2.2 A.
Setup Software for Lonworks data base shall be one of the following: 1. 2.
LonWorks Network Integrator Manufactured by Circon. Lonmaker Integration Tool Manufactured by Echelon.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
VisualControl Suite Manufactured by Smart Controls.
Software requirements 1. 2.
The Interface software shall utilize Microsoft Windows 7 32 bit based operating and utility software. The Software will not act as a control component for the network. In particular, it shall not perform the following functions: a. HVAC Global Sequence of Operation. b. Electrical Demand Limiting. c. Time of day synchronization for the network as desired by system operator.
3. 2.3
The graphical user interface shall be as outlined in “Webservers” below.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A.
Trend Logs. The operator shall be able to define a custom trend log for any data in the system. This definition shall include interval. Trend intervals of 1, 5, 15, 30 and 60 minutes as well as once a shift (8 hours). The system operator with proper password shall be able to determine how many samples are stored in each trend. Trend data shall be sampled and stored on the Building Controller panel and be archived on the hard disk. Trend data shall be able to be viewed and printed from the operator interface software. They shall also be storable in a tab delimited ASCII format for use by other industry standard word processing and spreadsheet packages. Trend information shall also be stored on the individual CU for transmitting to the workstation. Trends shall also be established for third party LonWorks devices.
B.
Alarm and Event Log. The operator shall be able to view all logged system alarms and events from any location in the system. Events shall be listed chronologically. An operator with the proper security level may acknowledge and clear alarms. All that have not been cleared by the operator shall be archived to the hard disk on the workstation. PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER’s and TDCU’s shall have the ability to store alarms and logs prior to transmission to the workstation. Alarms may also be established for third party LonWorks devices. Alarms shall be able to be annunciated audibly at the workstation.
C.
Object and Property Status and Control. Provide a method for the operator with proper password protection to view, and edit if applicable, the status of any object and property in the system. These statuses shall be available by menu, on graphics, or through custom programs.
D.
Clock Synchronization. The real time clocks in the building control panels and workstations shall be synchronized on command of an operator if desired. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight savings and standard time if applicable.
E.
Applications Editors. Operator Workstation shall support full screen editing of all system applications. Provide editors for each application at Control Unit(s). The applications shall be downloaded and executed at the appropriate Control Unit(s). 1.
Controller. Provide a full screen editor for each type controller and application that shall allow the operator with proper password to view and change the configuration, name, control parameters, and system setpoints.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each LON object or group of objects in the system, regardless of the manufacturer. Each of these schedules shall include the capability for occupied, unoccupied, standby and bypass. Each schedule shall consist of the following: a. Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. b. Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the year as an exception schedule for holidays or other purposes. The system operator will be presented with a calendar screen that can be browsed at least two years ahead. Exception schedules shall be dragged onto the calendar from exception day type menus on the calendar. This exception schedule shall override the standard schedule for that day. Exception schedules may be defined up to one year in advance. Once an exception schedule is executed it will be discarded and replaced by the standard scheduled for that day of the week.
3.
F.
Equipment Coordination. Provide means to allow equipment to be grouped for proper operation as specified in the sequence of operations. This shall include the coordination of airflow valves with their associated Air Handling Equipment.
Custom Application Programming Features 1.
2.
3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Provide the tools to create, modify, and debug custom application programming. The operator shall be able to create, edit, and download custom programs at the same time that all other system applications are operating. The system shall be fully operable while custom routines are edited, compiled, and downloaded. The programming language shall have the following features: The language shall be English language oriented and be based on the syntax of programming languages such as BASIC. It shall allow for free form or fill-in-the-blank programming. Alternatively, the programming language can be graphically-based using function blocks as long as blocks are available that directly provide the functions listed below, and that custom or compound function blocks can be created. A full screen character editor/programming environment shall be provided. The editor shall be cursor/mouse-driven and allow the user to insert, add, modify, and delete code from the custom programming. It shall also incorporate word processing features such as cut-paste and find/replace. The programming language shall allow independently executing program tasks to be developed. The editor/programming environment shall have a debugging/simulation capability that allows the user to step through the program and to observe any intermediate values and/or results. The debugger shall also provide error messages for syntax and execution errors. The programming language shall support conditional statements (IF/THEN/ELSE/ELSEIF) using compound Boolean (AND, OR and NOT) and/or relations (EQUAL, LESS THAN, GREATER THAN, NOT EQUAL) comparisons. The programming language shall support floating point arithmetic using the following operators: +, -, /, x, square root, and xy. The following mathematical functions shall also be provided: absolute value and minimum/maximum value from a list of values. The programming language shall have pre-defined variables that represent clock time, day of the week, and date. Variables that provide interval timing shall also be available. The language shall allow for computations using these values.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
9.
The programming language shall have the ability to pre-defined variables representing the status and results of the System Software, and shall be able to enable, disable, and change the values of objects in the system. 10. On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. G.
Physical Network and Network Management 1.
The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be either a 10 or 100 Megabits/sec Ethernet network supporting Java, XML, FTP and HTTP for maximum flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise information systems and providing support for multiple Web Servers and Web Browser Connections. a. Local area network minimum physical and media access requirements: b. Ethernet; IEEE standard 802.3 c. Cable; 10 Base-T, UTP-8 wire, category 5 Minimum throughput; 10 Mbps, with ability to increase to 100 Mbps
2.
3. 4. 5. 6.
2.4
Provide network management software package that will permit the individual network nodes to be configured. The Network Management Tool and Operating System shall conform to the LonWorks Network Services standard platform. An LNS server shall be provided for storing and enabling the network database. This tool shall manage the LNS database, all system controllers by type and revision, and shall provide a software mechanism for identifying each controller on the network. This tool shall also be capable of defining network data controllers on the network. This tool shall also be capable of defining network data connections between system controllers, known as “binding”. The network configuration tool shall also be capable of performing the above stated functions for other 3rd party LonWorks devices that may be added to the network. The Network configuration tool shall also provide diagnostics to identify system controllers on the network, to reset controllers, and to view health and status counters within controllers. On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. The network configuration tool shall be able to upload network image directly from a node when that node is connected to the network. This process does not require the .XIF file from a third party device supplier.
WEB SERVER A.
Shall be CatNet HMI CH1 manufactured by CatNet Systems.
B.
Features: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Animated graphics Internally maintained schedules with sunrise/sunset and stagger offsets Trend collection, display and export Runtime accumulation with email notification
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 12
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. C.
200Mhz ARM9 CPU 64 MB SDRAM 512 MB NAND Flash 1 10/100 Ethernet port 2 USB 2.0 Compatible OHCI ports Watchdog timer Fan less 40°to +70°C Battery Backed Real Time Clock RoHS Compliant Power: 5V DC @ 350mA Small size: 4.9 x 3.1 x 1.1 inches
LonWorks ModBus RTU/485 ModBus/TCP BACnet IP & MS/TP
Optional Interfaces: 1. 2. 3. 4.
F.
Alarm condition monitoring with email notification Calculated point values (average, min, max, etc) Simple line programming for controlling equipment Database of up to 100 users and 100 user groups Multiple simultaneous users Activity log for tracking important user actions Template system for quickly cloning points, graphics, devices or entire networks Support for OEM templates that include all points, graphics, schedules, etc. for any device Flexible point addressing system allows access to most proprietary structures, bit fields and objects Calculations may be performed on data points when read and/or written (e.g. °F to °C or scaling) Support for custom OEM plugin software device modules for more complex data access Support for up to 2,000 tree nodes which can be any combination of points, graphics, trends, etc. There are no hard limits on individual nodes. (Practical limits on control points will depend on communication speed and network bandwidth used.)
Protocols Supported: 1. 2. 3. 4.
E.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Hardware Specifications: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
CLIFT Lon interface (twisted pair) CLIPL Lon interface (power line) CMI485 Mod Bus/485 interface (isolated)
Graphics 1.
The Web Server should provide a ‘Server Manager’ application that controls all applications, communications, user rights, etc and an application to simply, create web
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 13
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7.
8.
2.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
pages for the Web Server to serve to a Browser. No HTML or Java Scripting will be required to generate the Web Pages. Real-Time Displays. The Web Server Graphics, shall at a minimum, support the following graphical features and functions: Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing package capable of generating a GIF or JPG file format. Use of proprietary graphic file formats shall not be acceptable. In addition to, or in lieu of a graphic background, the GUI shall support the use of scanned pictures. Graphic screens shall have the capability to contain objects for text, real-time values, animation, sliders, color spectrum objects, logs, graphs, HTML or XML document links, hyperlinks to other URL’s, and links to other graphic screens. Graphics shall support layering and each graphic object shall be configurable for assignment to a layer. A minimum of 15 layers shall be supported. Modifying common application objects, such as set points shall be accomplished in a graphical manner using either pre-constructed components or sliders. Selecting a number / text from a list box is not acceptable. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by clicking on active buttons. It will not be acceptable to make more than one click to achieve a simple on/off control (e.g. to just their defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or pages in the system shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link.
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL UNIT A.
General Requirements 1.
2. 3. 4. 5.
6.
Control Units shall be equipped with 3150 Neuron microprocessor as manufactured by Toshiba or Cypress for communications. There shall be intermediate device between the Neuron chip and the input and output channels. As referenced above, “Hosted” controllers that utilize a 3rd party chip for communications processing are not acceptable. The controller shall have a minimum of 32K programmable non-volatile (flash or EEPROM) memory for general data processing, power supply, input/output modules, termination blocks, and network transceivers. System controllers shall share network variable data with other LON-based devices that utilize the same transceivers as referenced in section 1.1 paragraph Q above. Operating system software, custom operating sequence software and application programs shall be stored in programmable, non-volatile memory. The programmable controller will provide time synchronization with TDCU’s when required. Programmable controller packaging shall be such that complete installation and checkout of field wiring can be performed prior to the installation of electronic boards. Make all board terminations facilitate troubleshooting, repair and replacement. The complete programmable controller including accessory devices such as relay, transducers, power supplies, etc., shall be wired and housed in an enclosure or as required by the location and local code requirements. Equip programmable controller with diagnostic indicators for the following: a. Transmit.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 14
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
b. Receive. B.
Input/Output Requirements 1.
At least 50% of the PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER Inputs shall be Universal type capable of handling current, voltage, resistance, or open and closed contacts in any mix. Analog current and voltage inputs of the following types shall be supported in the programmable controller. a. b. c. d. e. f.
2. 3. 4.
4-20 Ma. 0-1 volt. 0-5 volt. 0-10 volt. 2-10 volt. 1000 ohm RTD or 10K ohm thermistor
Provide programmable intermediate ranges and linearization table for sensor types specified under the heading, "Sensors". Standard linearization tables will be available for common sensors. Thermistor type temperature sensors shall require programmable calibration constant unique to a specific resistance group. Digital input types supported by the CU: a. Normally open contacts. (24V and 120V) b. Normally closed contacts. (24V and 120V)
5.
C.
The programmable controller shall accommodate both digital and true analog outputs. Voltage (0-2-10V) and current (4-20 mA) outputs shall be accommodated. All analog outputs shall be proportional current or voltage type with a minimum incremental resolution of 0.5% of the full operating range of the output. Match the proportional range of the output to the full operating range of the actuating device. Use zero and maximum output voltage or current values for shutdown and close-off modes. For troubleshooting and load analysis, the value of each analog output shall be available in the database for trending and display. 6. The analog/digital resolution process shall be 12 bit based. The digital to analog resolution process shall be a minimum of 12 bits. Accessories: Provide the following with each Plant Control Unit: 1. 2.
D.
On/Off switch. Over current and transient power protection.
Programmable Controller Software 1.
2.
General: A programmable controller shall operate totally standalone and independent of a central computer or master device such as a schedule module, for all specified control applications including scheduling, and trending. Software shall include a complete operating system (O.S.), communications handler, point processing, standard control algorithms, and specific control sequences. O.S. software shall reside in programmable battery backed RAM, operate in real-time, provide prioritized task scheduling, control time programs, and scan inputs and outputs.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 15
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.
4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
It shall be possible to make changes to the application program and/or configuration of any controller in realtime with no interruption of the operation of the controlled equipment. Systems that require the controller be taken offline and/or require the shutdown of the controlled equipment are not acceptable. Input/Output Point Processing Software shall include: a. Continuous update of input and output values and conditions. All connected points are to be updated at a minimum of one-second intervals. b. All input and output timing will be adjusted for network traffic and adjusted for network timing. i.e. system will be tested with protocol analyzer. c. Assignment of proper engineering units and status condition identifiers to all analog and digital input and outputs. d. Analog input alarm comparison with the ability to assign two individual sets of high and low limits (warning and actual alarm) to an input or to assign a set of floating limits (alarm follows a reset schedule or control point) to the input. Each alarm shall be assigned a unique differential to prevent a point from oscillating into and out of alarm. Alarm comparisons shall be made each scan cycle.
5.
Command Software a. A "fixed mode" option shall be supported to allow inputs to, and outputs from DDC control programs to set to a fixed state or value. When in the "fixed mode" inputs and output shall be assigned a high residual command priority to prevent override by application programs.
6.
7.
8.
Run Time Total or Point Trending: a. Run time shall be accumulated based on the status of a digital output point. It shall be possible to totalize either on time or off time up to 60,000 hours with one-minute resolution. Run time counts shall be resident in non-volatile memory and have CU resident run time limits assignable through the operator's terminal. b. Totalized run time or trended data shall be batch downloaded to the Workstation on a daily or weekly basis. Trended data shall reside on the User Interface database server. The automatic update of this data shall be determined by the User Interface and facility management application requirements. Transition Counting: A transition counter shall be provided to accumulate the number of times a device has been cycled on or off. Counter is to be non-volatile and be capable of accumulating 60,000 switching cycles. Limits shall be assignable to counts to provide maintenance alarm printouts. Custom DDC Control Loops a. Custom DDC programs are to be provided to meet the control strategies as called for in the sequence of operation sections of these specifications. Each CU shall have residential in its memory and available to the programs a full library of DDC algorithms, intrinsic control operators, arithmetic, logic and relational operators for implementation of control sequences: 1) Proportional Control, Proportional plus Integral (PI), and Proportional plus Integral plus Derivative (PID).
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 16
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
2) DDC control programs shall include an assignment of initialization values to all outputs to assure that controlled devices assume a fail-safe position on initial system start-up. 2.6
TERMINAL DEVICE CONTROL UNIT (TDCU) A.
General Requirements 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
B.
Control Units shall be equipped with a 3150 Neuron microprocessor controller, programmable non-volatile memory for general data processing, power supply, input/output modules, termination blocks, network transceivers. System controllers shall be capable of sharing network variable data with other LON-based devices that utilize the same transceivers. Operating system software, custom operating sequence software and application programs shall be stored in programmable, non-volatile memory. It shall be possible to make changes to the application program and/or configuration of any controller in real time with no interruption of the operation of the controlled equipment. Systems that require that the controller be taken offline and/or require the shutdown of the controlled equipment are not acceptable. The TDCU shall synchronize time with a PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER on the network upon power up of the network. TDCU packaging shall be such that complete installation and check-out of field wiring can be performed prior to the installation of electronic boards. Make all board terminations facilitate troubleshooting, repair and replacement. The complete CU including accessory devices such as relay, transducers, power supplies, etc., shall wired and housed in an enclosure or as required by the location and local code requirements.
Input/Output Requirements 1.
The TDCU Inputs shall be capable of handling current, voltage, resistance, or open and closed contacts in any mix. Analog current and voltage inputs shall be supported in the TDCU when appropriate for the as is appropriate for the application.
2.
As is appropriate for the applications, the Digital input types supported by the TDCU are: a. Normally open contacts. (24V) b. Normally closed contacts. (24V) c. Voltage/no voltage.
3.
The TDCU shall accommodate both digital and analog outputs when appropriate for the application. Voltage (0-2-10V) outputs shall be accommodated. All analog outputs shall be proportional voltage type with a minimum incremental resolution of 0.5% of the full operating range of the output. Match the proportional range of the output to the full operating range of the actuating device. Use zero and maximum output voltage or current values for shut-down and close-off modes. For troubleshooting and load analysis, the value of each analog output shall be available in the database for trending and display.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 17
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 4. 5. C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Digital outputs shall be capable of handling maintained as well as pulsed outputs for momentary or magnetic latching circuits. It shall be possible to configure outputs for 3mode control (fast-slow-off) and 2-mode control. The analog/digital resolution process shall be 10 bit based. The digital to analog resolution process shall be a minimum of 8 bit.
TDCU Software 1.
2. 3.
4.
General: A TDCU shall operate totally standalone and independent of a central computer for all specified control applications. Software shall include a complete operating system (O.S.), communications handler, point processing, standard control algorithms, and specific control sequences. O.S. software shall reside in programmable flash memory, operate in real-time, provide prioritized task scheduling, control time programs, and scan inputs and outputs. O.S. shall also contain built in diagnostics. TDCU’s shall have canned programs to minimize configuration and installation time. Canned programs shall be able to be changed so the same hardware component can be utilized in the event the mechanical equipment is removed, and new mechanical equipment has been added. TDCU’s shall also be available in a programmable version for unique equipment sequences of operation. Input/Output Point Processing Software shall include: a. Continuous update of input and output values and conditions. All connected points are to be updated at a minimum of one second intervals. b. Assignment of proper engineering units and status condition identifiers to all analog and digital input and outputs. c. Analog input alarm comparison with the ability to assign two individual sets of high and low limits (warning and actual alarm) to an input or to assign a set of floating limits (alarm follows a reset schedule or control point) to the input. Each alarm shall be assigned a unique differential to prevent a point from oscillating into and out of alarm. Alarm comparisons shall be made each scan cycle.
5.
Command Software a. A "fixed mode" option shall be supported to allow inputs to, and outputs from DDC control programs to set to a fixed state or value. When in the "fixed mode" inputs and output shall be assigned a high residual command priority to prevent override by application programs.
2.7
NETWORK INTERFACES, LON ROUTERS, BRIDGES, REPEATERS AND TRANSCEIVERS A.
Internet servers, Routers, Bridges and Repeaters 1.
Equip each internet server, router and bridge with a network transceiver on each network port (inbound and outbound) as dictated by the network type (Type 1 - FTT, Type 2 - TP, Type 3 - PL, Type 4 - LP, Type 5 - RF).
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 18
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
The network router shall be designed to route messages from a segment, sub-net, or domain in full duplex communication mode. Routers and bridges shall utilize LonTalk® protocol transport, network, and session layers to transparently route messages bound for a node address in another sub-net or domain exclusively. Routers, bridges and repeaters shall be fully programmable and permit a systems integrator to define message traffic, destination, and other network management functions utilize LonWorks®. Devices used for routing, bridging, or repeats The routers, bridges, and repeaters shall be capable of DIN rail or panel mounting and be equipped with status LED lights for Network traffic and power. Internet servers, and routers shall be Cisco certified Internet servers shall support read, write, and overwriting of points as well as alarm management, trending and scheduling functions.
Transceivers: 1.
Type 1 Network Transceiver, Free Topology, and Twisted Pair: Provide a transformer isolated, twisted pair transceiver capable of mounting directly on a printed circuit board. The transceiver shall meet the following specifications: a. b. c. d.
2.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Meets LONMARK™ Interoperability Association Standards. Differential Manchester encoded signaling for polarity insensitive network wiring. Transformer isolated for common mode rejection. 78kbs network bit rate up to distances of 2000m.
ELECTRONIC INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES A.
Temperature Sensors and Transmitters 1.
General Sensor & Transmitter Requirements a. Provide sensors and transmitters required as outlined in the input/output summary and sequence of operation, and as required to achieve the specified accuracy as specified herein. b. Temperature transmitters shall be equipped with individual zero and span adjustments. The zero and span adjustments shall be non-interactive to permit calibration without iterative operations. Provide a loop test signal to aid in sensor calibration. c. Temperature transmitters shall be sized and constructed to be compatible with the medium to be monitored. Transmitters shall be equipped with a linearization circuit to compensate for non-linearity of the sensor and bridge and provide a true linear output signal. d. Temperature sensors shall be of the resistance type and shall be either three-wire 100 ohm platinum RTD, or two-wire 1000 ohm platinum RTD. e. Thermistors are acceptable provided the mathematical relationship of a thermistor with respect to resistance and temperature with the thermistor fitting constraints is contained with the CU operating software and the listed accuracy’s can be obtained. Submit proof of the software mathematical equation and thermistor manufacturer fitting constants used in the thermistor mathematical/expressions. Thermistors shall be of the Thermistor (NTC) Type with a minimum of 100 ohm/°F. resistance change versus temperature to insure good resolution and accuracy. Thermistors shall be
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 19
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
certified to be stable ±0.24°F. over 5 years and ±0.36°F. accurate and free from drift for 5 years. f. CU operating software shall be equipped with a self-calibrating feature for temperature sensors. g. The following accuracy’s are required and include errors associated with the sensor, lead wire and A to D conversion. Point Type Accuracy Outside Air Chilled Water Room Temperature Hot Water/Steam Duct Temperature Sensors Used in Energy Water (BTU) or Process Calculations
0.5°F. 0.5°F. 1.00°F. 0.75°F. 0.5°F. 0.1°F.
h. Sensors used in BTU or process calculations shall be accurate to ±0.10°F. over the process temperature range. Submit a manufacturer's calibration report indicating that the calibration certification is traceable to the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Calibration Report Nos. 209527/222173. 2.
Thermowells a. When thermowells are required, the sensor and well shall be supplied as a complete assembly including well head and greenfield fitting. b. Thermowells shall be pressure rated and constructed in accordance with the system working pressure c. Thermowells and sensors shall be mounted in a threadolet or 1/2" NPT saddle and allow easy access to the sensor for repair or replacement. d. Thermowells shall be constructed of the following materials: 1) Chilled and Hot Water; brass. 2) Steam; 316 stainless steel. 3) Brine (salt solutions): marine grade stainless steel.
3.
Outside Air Sensors a. Outside air sensors shall be designed to withstand the environmental conditions to which they will be exposed. They shall also be provided with a solar shield. b. Sensors exposed to wind velocity pressures shall be shielded by a perforated plate surrounding the sensor element. c. Temperature transmitters shall be of NEMA 3R construction and rated for ambient temperatures.
4.
Duct Type Sensors a. Duct mount sensors shall mount in a hand box through a hole in the duct and be positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement. A neoprene grommet
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 20
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
(sealtite fitting and mounting plate) shall be used on the sensor assembly to prevent air leaks. b. Duct sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly including lock nut and mounting plate. Duct sensors probe shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel. c. For outdoor air duct applications, use a weatherproof mounting box with weatherproof cover and gasket. 5.
Averaging Duct Type Sensors a. For ductwork greater any dimension than 48 inches and/or where air temperature stratification exists, utilize an averaging sensor with multiple sensing points. b. Provide capillary supports at the sides of the duct to support the sensing string.
6.
Intelligent LonWorks Room Sensors a. Room temperature sensors are to be provided with a cover to prevent accidental damage. b. Terminal unit temperature sensors 10 k type 2 or 3 only c. Sensor shall be supplied with a vertical base for mounting on a standard single gang junction box supplied by the SI contractor. d. Provide an integrated thermistor, Neuron chip and FTT Transceiver for communication with the PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER communication network. e. Room Temperature sensor shall be a digital type with a digital display and setpoint adjustment.
7.
Acceptable Manufacturers a. Duct/Immersion Sensors – BAPI or ACI b. Room Sensors – Smart Controls or BAPI c. Preapproved equal
B.
Relative Humidity Sensors/Transmitter 1. 2. 3.
The sensor shall be a solid state, resistance type relative humidity sensor of the Bulk Polymer Design. The sensor element shall be washable and shall resist surface contaminations. Humidity transmitter shall be equipped with non-interactive span and zero adjustments, a 2 wire isolated loop powered, 4-20ma, 0-10 vdc linear proportional output. The humidity transmitter shall meet the following overall accuracy including lead loss and A to D conversion. a. Room Type Sensor ±3% RH
4. 5.
Provide a single point humidity calibrator, if required, for field calibration. Transmitters shall be shipped factory pre-calibrated. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. BAPI
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 21
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 b. c. d. e. C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
ACI VERIS HYCAL Preapproved equal
Differential Pressure Transmitters and Accessories 1.
General Air and Water Pressure Transmitter Requirements: a. Pressure transmitters shall be constructed to withstand 100% pressure over-range without damage and to hold calibrated accuracy when subject to a momentary 40% over-range input. b. Pressure transmitters shall provide the option to transmit a 0 to 5V dc, 0 to 10V dc, or 4 to 20 mA output signal. c. Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the flowsensing device and shall be supplied with shutoff and bleed valves in the high and low sensing pick-up lines (3 valve manifolds). d. Provide a minimum NEMA 1 housing for the transmitter. Locate transmitters in accessible local control panels wherever possible. e. Low air pressure, differential pressure transmitters used for room filter monitoring. Shall be equipped with a LED display indicating the transmitter output signal.
2.
Low Air Pressure Applications (0 to 0.5” WC) a. The pressure transmitter shall be capable of transmitting a linear electronic signal proportional to the differential of the room and reference static pressure input signals with the following minimum performance specifications. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)
Span: Not greater than two times the design space DP. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5% of F.S. Dead Band: Less than 0.3% of output. Repeatability: Within 0.2% of output. Linearity: Plus or minus 0.2% of span. Response: Less than one second for full span input. Temperature Stability: Less than 0.01% output shift per
degree F. change.
b. The transmitter shall utilize variable capacitance sensor technology and be immune to shock and vibration. c. Provide a two-year warranty for each transmitter. Replace all transmitters found to be defective at no cost to the Owner during the warranty period. d. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) VERIS - Model PXL100 2) Or preapproved equal D.
Flow, Pressure, and Electrical Measuring Apparatus 1. 2.
Traverse Probe Air Flow Measuring Stations Traverse probes shall be a dual manifold, cylindrical, type constructed of 3003 extruded aluminum with an anodized finish to eliminate surface pitting and unnecessary air friction.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 22
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
3.
4. 5.
6. 7. 8. E.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
The multiple total pressure manifolds shall have sensors located along the stagnation plane of the approaching air flow and without the physical presence of forward projecting sensors into the airstream. The static pressure manifold shall incorporate dual offset static tips on opposing sides of the averaging manifold so as to be insensitive to flow-angle variations of as much as ±20° in the approaching airstream. The air flow traverse probe shall not induce a measurable pressure drop, nor shall the sound level within the duct be amplified by its singular or multiple presence in the air stream. Each airflow-measuring probe shall contain multiple total and static pressure sensors placed at equal distances along the probe length. The number of sensors on each probe and the quantity of probes utilized at each installation shall comply with the ASHRAE Standards for duct traversing. Traverse probes shall be accurate to ±25% of the measured airflow range down to 0.25” wc static pressure. Each flow measuring station shall be complete with its own dedicated microprocessor with a 4-line, 80 character, and Alpha Numeric display and full function key pad. The panel shall be fully programmable and display calculated CFM directly on a LED monitor on the panel face. Each station shall log air flow rates in real time and download data to its control unit (CU) via a RS-232 interface. Provide 24 volt 1 phase power to each flow measuring station. Acceptable Manufacturers: Air Monitor, Brandt, Air Sentinel. Or pre-approved equal
Shielded Static Pressure Sensor 1.
2. 3. 4. F.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Provide for each zone where required a shielded static pressure sensor suitable for ceiling surface mounting, complete with multiple sensing ports, pressure impulse suppression chamber with minimum volume of 50 cubic inches, airflow shielding, and 3/8" compression takeoff fittings, all contained in a welded stainless steel casing, with polish finish on the exposed surfaces. These probes shall be capable of sensing the static pressure in the proximity of the sensor to within 1% of the actual pressure value while being subjected to a maximum airflow of 1000 FPM from a radial source. The shielded static sensing devices shall be used for both reference and space pressure sensing. Pressure sensors used for outside air pressure reference purposes shall be equipped with a conduit seal for pneumatic tubing and bushings for a weather tight installation.
Static Pressure Traverse Probe 1. 2. 3.
Provide multipoint traverse probes in the duct at each point where static pressure sensing is required. Each duct static traverse probe shall contain multiple static pressure sensors located along the exterior surface of the cylindrical probe. Pressure sensing points shall not protrude beyond the surface of the probe. The duct static traverse probe shall be of 304 stainless steel construction and (except for 3/4" dia. probes with lengths of 24" or less) be complete with threaded end support rod, sealing washer and nut, and mounting plate with gasket and static pressure signal fitting. The static traverse probe shall be capable of producing a steady, nonpulsating signal of standard static pressure without need for correction factors, with an instrument accuracy of 21.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 23
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 G.
2. 3. 4. 5.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
The current transformers shall be designed to be installed or removed without dismantling the primary bus or cables. The transformer shall be of a split core design. The core and windings shall be completely encased in a UL approved thermoplastic rated 94VA. No metal parts shall be exposed other than the terminals. The current transformers shall meet the following specifications: Frequency Limits: 50 to 400 Hz. Insulation: 0.6 KV Class, 10 KV BIL. Accuracy: 1% at 5.0 to 25.0 VA accuracy class with U.P.F. burden. Provide a disconnect switch for each current transformer.
Current Sensing Switches 1.
J.
Pressure drop on venturi type flowmeters shall not exceed 0.25" wc. Each venturi low and high pressure taps shall be equipped with nipples, valves and quick disconnects. Equip each venturi with a metal identification tag indicating the size, location, GPM and meter reading for the GPM specified. Provide (1) 6" dial differential pressure meter of the proper range to determine piping system flow rate. The meter shall be the property of the Owner. Venturi meters shall utilize flanged or screwed connections for removal purposes and shall be rated for the system operating pressures. The venturi flowmeter shall be factory calibrated to provide a minimum of flow accuracy between actual and factory flow calibration data.
Current Transformers 1.
I.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Venturi Flow meter 1.
H.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Current sensing switch shall be self-powered with solid state circuitry and a dry contact output. Current sensing switches shall consist of a solid state current sensing circuit, adjustable trip point, solid state switch, SPDT relay and an LED indicating the on or off status. A conductor of the load shall be passed through the window of the device. It shall accept overcurrent up to twice its trip into range.
Electronic Valve & Damper Actuators 1.
General Requirements a. Electronic actuators shall be electric, direct-coupled type capable of being mounted over the shaft of the damper. They shall be UL listed and the manufacturer shall provide a 2-year unconditional warranty from the date of commissioning. Power consumption shall not exceed 8 watts or 15 VA of transformer sizing capacity per high torque actuator nor 2 watts or 4 VA for VAV actuators. b. Electronic overload protection shall protect actuator motor from damage. If damper jams actuator shall not burnout. Internal end switch type actuators are not acceptable. Actuators may be mechanically and electrically paralleled on the same shaft to multiply the available torque. A reversing switch shall be provided to change action from direct to reverse in relation to control signal as operation requires.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 24
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Combination Smoke and Fire Damper Actuators a. Actuators shall be factory mounted and connected to the damper section and shall conform to UL 555S specifications. They shall be rated for 350°F.
K.
Valve Actuators 1.
Control Valves Actuators (3 inch and smaller) a. Actuators shall have a gear release button on all non-spring return models to allow manual setting. The actuator shall have either an insulating air gap between it and the linkage or a non-conducting thermoplastic linkage. Care shall be taken to maintain the actuator's operating temperatures and humidity within its specifications. Pipes shall be fully insulated and heat shields shall be installed if necessary. Condensation may not form on actuators and shall be prevented by a combination of insulation, air gap, or other thermal break. b. The control circuit shall be fully modulating using 0-2-10 volt signals. Accuracy and repeatability shall be within 1/21 of control signal. A 0-2-10 v signal shall be produced by the actuator which is directly proportional to the shaft clamp position which can be used to control actuators which are paralleled off a master motor or to provide a feedback signal to the automation system indicating valve position. c. Valve body and actuators shall be shipped fully assembled and tested at the valve factory prior to shipment. d. Acceptable Manufacturers: BELIMO ONLY
2.
Control Valve Actuators (4 inch and larger). a. The valve actuator shall consist of a permanent split capacitor, reversible type electric motor that drives a compound epicycle gear. The electric actuator shall have visual mechanical position indication, readable from a distance of 25 feet, showing output shaft and valve position. Unit shall mount directly to the valves without brackets and adapters, or be readily adapted to suit all other types of quarter-turn valves. b. The actuator shall have an integral terminal strip, which, through conduit entries, will ensure simple wiring to power supplies. Cable entries shall have UL recommended gland stops within the NPT hole to prevent glands from being screwed in too far and damaging cable. c. The actuator shall be constructed to withstand high shock and vibrations without operations failure. The actuator cover shall have captive bolts to eliminate loss of bolts when removing the cover from the base. One copy of the wiring diagram shall be provided with the actuator. d. The actuator shall have a self-locking gear train, which is permanently lubricated, at the factory. The gearing shall be run on ball and needle bearings. Actuators with 600 in/lbs. or more output torque shall have two adjustable factory calibrated mechanical torque limit switches of the single-pole, double-throw type. The motor shall be fitted with thermal overload protection. Motor rotor shaft shall run in ball bearings at each end of motor. e. The actuator housing shall be hard anodized aluminum for full environmental protection.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 25
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
f.
The environmental temperature range of the actuator shall be -30°C to +60°C (-20°F to +140°F). g. For intermittent on/off service, the actuator shall be rated at a 20% duty cycle (i.e., 12 minutes extended duty in every hour, or alternatively; one complete cycle every 2 minutes). For more frequent cycling and modulating service, an actuator shall be rated for continuous duty. The actuator rated for continuous duty shall be capable of operating 100% of the time at an ambient temperature of 40°C. h. The actuator shall have an integral self-locking gear train. Motor brakes shall not be required to maintain desired valve position. Levers or latches shall not be required to engage or disengage the manual override. Mechanical travel stops, adjustable to 15° in each direction of 90° rotation shall be standard, as well as two adjustable travel limit switches with electrically isolated contacts. Additional adjustable switches shall be available as option. i. Single Phase Motor: The motor shall have Class B insulation capable of withstanding locked-rotor for 25 seconds without overheating. Wiring shall also be Class B insulation. An auto-reset thermal cutout protector shall be embedded in the motor windings to limit heat rise to 80°C in a 40°C ambient. All motors shall be capable of being replaced by simply disconnecting the wires and then removing mounting bolts. Disassembly of gears shall not be required to remove the motor. j. Materials of Construction: The electric actuator shall have a pressure die-cast, hardanodized aluminum base and cover. The compound gear shall be made of die-cast, hard-anodized aluminum or steel. An alloy steel worm gear shall be provided for manual override and torque limiting. Bearings for gears shall be of the ball and needle type; bronze bearings shall be used on the shafting parts. k. Acceptable Manufacturers: BELIMO ONLY 2.9
CONTROL VALVES A.
General Control Valve Requirements 1.
2.
3. B.
All automatic control valves shall be linear, fully proportioning, with modulating ball, plug or V-port inner guides unless otherwise specified. The valves shall be quiet in operation and fail safe in either normally open or normally closed position in the event of control air failure or loss of electronic output signal. All valves shall be capable of operating in sequence when required by the sequence of operation. All control valves shall be sized by the control manufacturer, and shall be guaranteed to meet the heating and cooling loads as specified. All control valves shall be suitable for the pressure conditions, and shall close against the differential pressures involved. Valve body pressure rating and connection type (screwed or flanged) shall conform to ANSI pressure classifications appropriate for the system working pressures. Acceptable Manufacturers: BELIMO ONLY
Hot and Cold Water Control Valves 1. 2.
Hot and cold water globe type control valves shall be single-seated type, with equal percentage flow characteristics. The valve discs shall be composition type and shall be sized using ISA methods. Pressure drop through the valves shall not exceed 5 psi unless otherwise indicated.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 26
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.
2.10 A.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Ball valves shall be equipped with 316 stainless steel trim, Teflon seals and adjustable packing gland nuts. Provide a handle for manual operation during start-up and maintenance.
SWITCHES Current Sensing Switches 1.
2.11
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Current sensing switch shall be self-powered with solid-state circuitry and a dry contact output. Current sensing switches shall consist of a solid state current sensing circuit, adjustable trip point, solid state switch, SPDT relay and an LED indicating the on or off status. A conductor of the load shall be passed through the window of the device. It shall accept over current up to twice its trip into range.
ELECTRICAL CONTROL POWER AND LOW VOLTAGE WIRING
A.
Provide interlock wiring between supply and exhaust fans, electrical wiring for relays (including power feed) for temperature and pressure indication.
B.
Provide power wiring, conduit and connections for low temperature thermostats, high temperature thermostats, alarms, flow switches, actuating devices for temperature, humidity, pressure and flow indication, point resets and user disconnect switches for electric heating, appliances controlled by this Section.
C.
Provide all other wiring required for the complete operation of the specified systems.
D.
Install all wiring raceway systems complying with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. All installations shall be installed in EMT.
E.
Network Communication Requirements 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
F.
Wired network communication shall be via channels consisting of a 22 AWG twisted pair installed in a 3/4 EMT. Echelon approved wire only In all communication conduits, provide one spare twisted pair to be installed, tagged and labeled at each end. Communication conduits shall not be installed closer than six feet from high power transformers or run parallel within six feet of electrical high power cables. Care shall be taken to route the cable as far from interference generating devices as possible. All shields shall be ground (earth ground) at one point only, to eliminate ground loops. There shall be no power wiring, in excess of 30 VAC rms, run in conduit with communications wiring. In cases where signal wiring is run in conduit with communication wiring, all communication wiring and signal wiring shall be run using separate twisted shielded pairs (22awg) with the shields grounded in accordance with the manufacturer’s wiring practices.
Input/Output Control Wiring 1. 2. 3.
RTD wiring shall be two-wire or four-wire twisted, shielded, minimum number 18 gauge. Other analog inputs shall be a minimum of number 18 gauge, twisted, shielded. Binary control function wiring shall be a minimum of number 18 gauge.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 27
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 4. 5. G.
Analog output control functions shall be a minimum of number 18 gauge, twisted, shielded. Binary input wiring shall be a minimum of number 18 gauge.
Splices in shielded cables shall consist of terminations and the use of shielded cable couplers, which maintain the integrity of the shielding. Terminations shall be in accessible locations. Cables shall be harnessed with cable ties as specified herein.
Conduit and Fittings 1. 2. 3. 4.
I.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Splices 1.
H.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Conduit for Control Wiring, Control Cable and Transmission Cable: Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) with compression fittings, cold rolled steel, zinc coated or zinc-coated rigid steel with threaded connections. Outlet Boxes (Dry Location): Sheradized or galvanized drawn steel suited to each application, in general, four inches square or octagon with suitable raised cover. Outlet Boxes (Exposed to Weather): Threaded hub cast aluminum or iron boxes with gasket device plate. Pull and Junction Boxes: Size according to number, size, and position of entering raceway as required by National Electrical Codes. Enclosure type shall be suited to location.
Relays 1.
Relays other than those associated with digital output cards shall be general purpose, enclosed plug-in type with 8-pin octal plug and protected by a heat and shock resistant duct cover. Number of contacts and operational function shall be as required.
J.
Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than lOE9 ohms with a breakdown voltage of 1500V root mean square or greater at 60 Hz. The contact life shall be 10 x 10 E6 operations or greater. The ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be -20 to +140°F. Input impedance shall not be less than 500 ohms. Relays shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time shall be for 100 milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an integral part of the relay.
K.
Contactors: Contactors shall be of the single coil, electrically operated, mechanically held type. Positive locking shall be obtained without the use of hooks, latches, or semi permanent magnets. Contractor shall be double-break-silver-to-silver type protected by arcing contacts. The number of contacts and rating shall be selected for the application. Operating and release times shall be 100 milliseconds or less. Contactors shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices.
2.12 A.
BAS HARDWARE IDENTIFICATION Automatic Control Valve Tags
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 28
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3.
B.
2.
For valves, etc., use metal tags with a 2-inch minimum diameter, fabricated of brass, stainless steel or aluminum. Attach tags with chain of same materials. For lubrication instructions, use linen or heavy duty shipping tag. Tag valves with identifying number and system. Number valves by floor level, column location and system served. Prepare lists of all tagged valves showing location, floor level, and tag number, use. Prepare separate lists for each system. Include copies in each maintenance manual. And post in boiler room.
All multi-conductor cables in pull boxes, at end devices, controllers and terminal strip cabinets shall be labeled. Provide wire Tags as per Division 26.
Conduit Tags 1.
D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Wire Tags 1.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Provide tagging or labeling of conduit so that it is always readily observable which conduit was installed or used in implementation of this Work.
Miscellaneous Equipment Identification 1. 2.
Screwed-on, engraved black lamicoid sheet with white lettering on all control panels and remote processing panels. Lettering sizes subject to approval. Inscription, subject to review and acceptance, indicating equipment, system numbers, functions and switches. For panel interior wiring, input/output modules, local control panel device identification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Verify that systems are ready to receive work.
B.
Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
C.
The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.
D.
The contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment is installable as show, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.
E.
The Control System Contractor shall examine the drawings and specifications for other parts of the work, and if head room or space conditions appear inadequate or if any discrepancies occur between the plans and his work and the plans for the work of others, he shall report such discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer and shall obtain written instructions for any changes necessary to accommodate his work with the work of others.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 29
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A.
Install all control components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B.
If the controls contractor is responsible for providing the damper then provide mixing dampers of parallel blade construction arranged to mix streams. Provide separate minimum outside air damper section adjacent to variable outside air damper.
C.
Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration-free walls or freestanding angle iron supports. One cabinet may accommodate more than one system in same equipment room. Provide nameplates for instruments and controls inside cabinet and nameplates on cabinet face.
D.
After completion of installation, test and adjust control equipment. Submit data showing setpoints and final adjustments of controls.
E.
Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to building lines (i.e., horizontal, vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible.
F.
Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.
G.
Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds.
H.
All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices.
3.3
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION A.
Comply with all Division 26 Installation Requirements.
B.
Install low voltage power and LON and LAN communication trunks in conduit in the following locations regardless of local building code allowances otherwise. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Mechanical rooms. Electrical rooms. Vertical risers (exception: fire rated continuous closet like a telephone closet). Open Areas where the wiring will be exposed to view or tampering.
C.
Conceal conduit within finished shafts, ceilings and wall as required. Install exposed conduit parallel with or at right angles to the building walls.
D.
Where Class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that: 1.
Circuits meet NEC Class 2 (current-limited) requirements. (Low-voltage power circuits shall be sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current-limit.)
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 30
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
All cables shall be UL listed for application, i.e., cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL listed specifically for that purpose.
E.
Do not install Class 2 wiring in conduit containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing high voltage may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g., relays and transformers).
F.
Where Class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring to be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular to it, and NEATLY tied at 10 ft. intervals.
G.
All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal blocks or terminal strip. All wire-towire connections shall be at a terminal block, or with a crimped connector. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals.
H.
Plug or cap all unused conduit openings and stub-ups. Do not use caulking compound.
I.
Route all conduit to clear beams, plates, footings and structure members. Do not route conduit through column footings or grade beams.
J.
Set conduits as follows: 1. 2.
Expanding silicone fire stop material sealed watertight where conduit is run between floors and through walls of fireproof shaft. Oakum and lead, sealed watertight penetration through outside foundation walls.
K.
Cap open ends of conduits until conductors are installed.
L.
Where conduit is attached to vibrating or rotating equipment, flexible metal conduit with a minimum length of 18 inches and maximum length of 36 inches shall be installed and anchored in such a manner that vibration and equipment noise will not be transmitted to the rigid conduit.
M.
Where exposed to the elements or in damp or wet locations, waterproof flexible conduit shall be installed. Installation shall be as specified for flexible metal conduit.
N.
Provide floor, wall, and ceiling plates for all conduits passing through walls, floors or ceilings. Use prime coated cast iron, split-ring type plates, except with polished chrome-plated finish in exposed finished spaces.
3.4
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS A.
Refer to drawings for normal operating mode sequences of operations.
B.
General. 1. 2.
Provide automatic control for system operation as described herein, although word “automatic” or “automatically”, is not used. Provide control devices, control software and control wiring as required for automatic operation of each sequence specified.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 31
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. 4. 5. 6.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Manual operation is limited only where specifically described; however, provide manual override for each automatic operation. Where manual start-up is called for, also provide scheduled automatic start-stop capabilities. Functions called for in sequence of operations are minimum requirements and not to limit additional capabilities the DDC system can be provided with. Provide following functions which are not specifically mentioned in each Sequence of Operation a. For each item of equipment: 1) 2) 3) 4)
Start-Stop, manual, and scheduled On-Off status of each piece of equipment Run-time All setpoints shall be adjustable
b. Sequenced starting of all motors: 1) At initial start-up 2) For automatic starting on emergency power after power blackout 3.5
3.6
TEMPERATURE SENSORS A.
Temperature sensor assemblies shall be readily accessible and adaptable to each type of application in such manner as to allow for quick, easy replacement and servicing without special tools or skills.
B.
Strap-on mountings shall not be permitted.
C.
Outdoor installations shall be; of weatherproof construction or in appropriate NEMA enclosures. These installations shall be protected from solar radiation and wind effects. Protective shield shall be stainless steel.
D.
Sensors shall be with enclosure where located in finished space.
E.
Sensors in ducts shall be mounted in locations to sense the correct temperature of the air only and shall not be located in dead air spaces or positions obstructed by ducts, equipment, and so forth. Locations where installed shall be within the vibration and velocity limit of the sensing element. Ducts shall be securely sealed where elements or connections penetrate ducts to avoid measuring false conditions.
F.
All sensors measuring temperatures in pipes larger than 2 inches in diameter or in pressure vessels shall be supplied with wells properly fabricated for the service. Wells shall be noncorrosive to the medium being measured and shall have sufficient physical strength to withstand pressures and velocities to which they are subjected. Wells shall be installed in the piping at elbows where piping is smaller than the length of the well to affect proper flow across the entire area of the well. ACTUATORS
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 32
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
A.
Mount and link control damper actuators per manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Valves - Actuators shall be mounted on valves with adapters approved by the actuator manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following manufacturer's recommendations.
3.7
IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING A.
All wiring and cabling including that within factory-fabricated panels shall be labeled at each end within 2" of termination with a cable identifier and other descriptive information.
B.
Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served.
C.
Identify control panels with minimum 1 inch letters on nameplates.
D.
Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match record documents.
E.
Identify room sensors relating to terminal box or valves with nameplates. PROGRAMMING
A.
Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and trend logging.
B.
Point Naming: System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy operator interface without the use of a written point index.
3.8
1. C.
Software Programming 1.
3.9
DEFINE THE POINT NAMING NOMENCLATURE FOR ABOVE. COORDINATE WITH OWNER’S OPERATING STAFF.
Provide programming for the system as per specifications and adhere to the strategy algorithms provided. The HVAC Control System Contractor shall also provide all other system programming necessary for the operation of the system but not specified in this document. Imbed into the control program sufficient comment statements to clearly describe each section of the program. The comment statements reflect the language used in the sequence of operations.
CLEANING A.
This contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from his or her activities daily. The contractor shall remove all cartons, containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have been removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in a location designated by the Construction Manager or General Contractor.
B.
At the completion of work in any area, the Contractor shall clean all of his/her work, equipment, etc., making it free from dirt and debris, etc.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 33
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
3.10
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paint damage, and any factory-finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas. PROTECTION
A.
The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or workers, and shall be liable for all damage thus caused.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. The Contractor shall protect his/her work against theft or damage, and shall carefully store material and equipment received on-site that is not immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.
3.11 A. B.
C. 3.12 A.
3.13 A.
3.14 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this Section. Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of workmanship. All visible piping and/or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to building lines and properly supported. Contractor shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction over the work. CHECK OUT, START UP AND TESTING The control system shall be properly commissioned prior to acceptance. The Contractor shall coordinate with others (including mechanical, electrical and test and balance) to properly start up and verify the operation of the system. Provide as-built documentation as detailed in Part 1 of this Section. ACCEPTANCE The control systems will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of Completion until all tests described in this specification have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer and Owner. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor may be exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the Owner's representative. Such tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty. SCHEDULE OF RESPONSIBILITIES The following schedule identifies the responsible Division for the installation of the building automation system. This schedule should be used as a general guide. The General Contractor is the central authority governing the total responsibility of all trade contractors. Therefore, deviations and clarifications of this schedule are permitted provided the General Contractor assumes responsibility to coordinate the trade contractors different than as indicated herein. If deviations or clarifications to this schedule are implemented, submit a
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 34
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
record copy to the Architect. Item 1. Equipment Motors 2. Magnetic Motor Starters: a. Automatically controlled, with or without HOA switches. b. Manually controlled. c. Manually controlled, and which are furnished as part of factory wired equipment. d. Special duty type (part winding, multi-speed, etc.) e. Adjustable frequency drives with manual bypass. f. Domestic booster pump. Motor Controls 5. General equipment, disconnect switches, thermal overload switches, manual operating switches. 6. Sprinkler system water flow and tamper switches. 7. Outside fire alarm horn and light (at Siamese connection). 8. Line voltage contactors. 9. Control relay transformers (other than starters). 10. Main fuel oil tank alarms (high and low level) and remote indicating lights. 11. Day tank fuel oil alarms (high and low level) and remote indicating lights. 12. Line voltage control items such as line voltage thermostats not connected to control panel systems. 13. Loose controls and instruments furnished as part of the packaged mechanical equipment or required for operation such as valves, float controls, relays, sensors, etc. 14. Control and Instrumentation panels 15. Automatic control valves, automatic dampers and damper operators, solenoid valves, insertion temperature and pressure sensors. 17. Duct type fire and smoke detectors, including relays for fan shut down. 18. Contactors for cooling tower basin heaters. 19. Mechanical piping heat tracing (including relays, contactors, thermostats, etc.) 20. Emergency power off (EPO) shut down
Furnish By M
Install By M
Power By E
Control Wiring By
E
E
E
NI
E M
E M
E E
E
M
E
See Note 1.
NI
See Note 1. NI
E
M
M
E
NI See Note 2. NI
E
E
E
M
M
E
M
M
E
E NI M
E NI M
E E NI
NI NI NI
E
E
E
NI
M
E
E
E
M
M
M
M
NI NI
NI M
E E
NI NI
NI
NI
E
NI
M M
M M
E E
M M
M
M
M
M
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 35
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 Item
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION Furnish By
Install By
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006 Power By
pushbutton(s) (break glass station) and controls. 21. Control interlock wiring or software bindings NI NI E between chillers, pumps and cooling towers, fans and air handling units and other miscellaneous mechanical equipment. 22. Electric radiant heating panels unducted E E E electric unit heaters and cabinet heaters, and electric baseboard radiation. 23. Airflow control devices with transmitter. NI M E M M E 24. Air terminal devices (i.e., VAV and fan powered boxes). 25. Intelligent Devices and Control Units provided M M E with packaged mechanical equipment such as: Valve and damper operators. Heat pumps, AC units. Fan Coil Units. Air Terminal Units. Boilers, chillers. 26. Intelligent Devices and Control Units provided E E E with electrical systems such as: Occupancy/motion sensors. Lighting Control Panels. Switches and Dimmers. Switch Multiplexing Control Units. Door Entry Control Units. 27. Gateways for protocol conversion with a nonNI NI NI LonWorks based system 28. Routers, Bridges and Repeaters. NI NI NI Abbreviations Furnish. Furnished by Install. Installed by Power Power Wiring Connection, Low and Medium Voltage NI Network Integrator M Mechanical Contractor E Electrical Contractor
Control Wiring By NI
E NI NI NI
NI
NI NI
Notes to Schedule of Responsibilities: 1. 2. 3.
Magnetic motor starters (special duty type) shall be set in place under electrical division except when part of factory wired equipment, in which case set in place under mechanical division. Where a remote motor disconnect is required in addition to the one provided integral to an Variable Frequency Drive (VFD), the NI Contractor shall provide the necessary control interlock between the disconnects. The Network Integrator shall inform the Mechanical Contractor and the Electrical Contractor of the additional capacity required of control power transformers.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 36
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
The Mechanical Contractor shall refer to the electrical specifications and plans for all power and control wiring and shall advise the Architect of any discrepancies prior to bidding. The Network Integrator shall be responsible for all control wiring as outlined, whether called for by the mechanical or electrical drawings and specifications.
END OF SECTION 23 0900
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 0900 - 37
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 0993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1.
1.3
Section 23 0900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for control equipment and devices and for submittal requirements.
DEFINITIONS A.
DDC: Direct digital control.
B.
VAV: Variable air volume.
1.4
HEATING CONTROL SEQUENCES A.
Heating-Water Supply Temperature Control: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Input Device: Resistance temperature sensor. Output Device: Control valve. Action: Modulate control valve to maintain heating-water supply temperature. Display: a. b. c.
B.
Heating-water supply temperature. Heating-water supply temperature set point. Control-valve position.
Heating-Water Supply Temperature Reset: 1. 2. 3.
Input Device: Outdoor-air sensor. Output Device: DDC system software. Action: Reset heating-water supply temperature in straight-line relationship with outdoorair temperature for the following conditions: a. b. c.
4.
195 deg F heating water when outdoor-air temperature is minus 30 deg F. 130 deg F heating water when outdoor-air temperature is 75 deg F. 150 deg F minimum, heating-water temperature.
Display: a.
Outdoor-air temperature.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
23 0993 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 b. c. C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Heating-water supply temperature. Heating-water supply temperature set point.
Control Primary Circulating Pump(s): 1. 2. 3. 4.
Input Device: DDC system. Output Device: DDC system command to starter relay. Action: Energize pump(s) at outdoor-air temperatures below 65 deg F. Display: a. b.
1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Outdoor-air temperature. Operating status of primary circulating pump(s).
AIR-HANDLING-UNIT CONTROL SEQUENCES A.
Start and Stop Supply Fan(s): 1.
Enable: Freeze Protection: a. b. c.
2.
Enable: High-Temperature Protection: a. b. c.
3.
Input Device: Duct-mounted smoke detector, located in return air. Output Device: Hard wired through motor starter; DDC system alarm. Action: Allow start if duct is free of products of combustion.
Initiate: Occupied Time Schedule: a. b. c.
5.
Input Device: Duct-mounted thermostat, located in return air. Output Device: Hard wired through motor starter; DDC system alarm. Action: Allow start if duct temperature is below 300 deg F.
Enable: Smoke Control: a. b. c.
4.
Input Device: Duct-mounted averaging element thermostat, located before supply fan. Output Device: Hard wired through motor starter; DDC system alarm. Action: Allow start if duct temperature is above 37 deg F; signal alarm if fan fails to start as commanded.
Input Device: DDC system time schedule. Output Device: Binary output to motor starter. Action: Energize fan(s).
Initiate: Unoccupied Time Schedule: a. b. c.
Input Device: DDC system demand. Output Device: Binary output to motor starter. Action: Energize fan(s).
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
23 0993 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 6.
B.
Input Device: DDC system time schedule and output. Output Device: DDC system binary output to motor starter. Action: Cycle fan(s) during unoccupied periods.
Display: Supply-fan on-off indication.
Supply Fan(s) Variable-Volume Control: 1.
Occupied Time Schedule: a. b. c.
2.
b. c. 3.
Input Device: Static-pressure transmitter sensing supply-duct static pressure referenced to conditioned-space static pressure. Output Device: DDC system analog output to modulating damper actuator. Set inlet guide vanes to minimum position when fan is stopped. Action: Maintain constant supply-duct static pressure.
High Pressure: a. b. c.
4.
Input Device: DDC system time schedule. Output Device: Binary output. Action: Enable control.
Volume Control: a.
Input Device: Static-pressure transmitter sensing supply-duct static pressure referenced to static pressure outside the duct. Output Device: DDC system binary output to motor starter. Action: Stop fan and signal alarm when static pressure rises above excessivestatic-pressure set point.
Display: a. b. c. d.
C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Unoccupied Ventilation: a. b. c.
7.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure indication. Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure set point. Supply-fan airflow rate. Supply-fan speed.
Mixed-Air Control: 1.
Occupied Time Schedule: a. b. c.
2.
Input Device: DDC system time schedule. Output Device: DDC system output. Action: Enable control.
Minimum Position: a.
Input Device: DDC system time schedule.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
23 0993 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 b. c. 3.
b. c.
Input Device: Outdoor- and return-air, duct-mounted electronic temperature sensors. Output Device: DDC system analog output to damper actuator(s). Action: Set outdoor-air dampers to minimum position when outdoor-air enthalpy exceeds return-air enthalpy.
Input Device: DDC system time schedule. Output Device: DDC system analog output to modulating damper actuator(s). Action: Position outdoor- and relief-air dampers closed and return-air dampers open.
Display: a. b. c.
D.
Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor. Output Device: DDC system analog output to modulating damper actuator(s). Action: Modulate outdoor-, return-, and relief-air dampers to maintain air temperature set point of 55 deg F.
Unoccupied Time Schedule: a. b. c.
7.
Input Device: DDC system software. Output Device: DDC system analog output to modulating damper actuator(s). Action: Set outdoor-air dampers to minimum position.
Cooling Reset: a.
6.
Output Device: DDC system analog output to modulating damper actuator(s). Action: Open outdoor-air dampers to minimum position.
Mixed-Air Temperature: a. b. c.
5.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Heating Reset: a. b. c.
4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Mixed-air-temperature indication. Mixed-air-temperature set point. Mixed-air damper position.
Filters: During occupied periods, when fan is running, differential air-pressure transmitters exist. 1.
Occupied Time Schedule: a. b. c.
2.
Input Device: DDC system time schedule. Output Device: DDC system output. Action: Enable control.
Differential Pressure: a. b.
Input Device: Pressure transmitter. Output Device: DDC system alarm.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
23 0993 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 c. 3.
Action: Signal alarm on low- and high-pressure conditions.
Filter air-pressure-drop indication. Filter low-air-pressure set point. Filter high-air-pressure set point.
Hydronic Heating Coil: 1.
Occupied Time Schedule: a. b. c.
2.
3.
Input Device: DDC system time schedule. Output Device: Binary output. Action: Enable control.
Discharge-Air Temperature: a. b. c.
Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor. Output Device: Normally open modulating control valve. Action: Maintain supply-air temperature set point of 55 deg F.
Temperature Reset: a. b.
Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor in return air. Output Device: DDC system in straight-line relationship for the following conditions: 1) 2)
c. 4.
5.
65 deg F when return-air temperature is 70 deg F. 55 deg F when return-air temperature is 75 deg F.
Action: Reset supply-air temperature set point of 55 deg F.
Unoccupied Time Schedule: a. b. c.
Input Device: DDC system time schedule and output. Output Device: DDC system binary output. Action: Enable normal control when fan is cycled on.
Display: a. b. c. d. e. f.
F.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Display: a. b. c.
E.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Fan-discharge air-temperature indication. Fan-discharge air-temperature set point. Heating-coil air-temperature indication. Heating-coil air-temperature set point. Heating-coil pump operation indication. Heating-coil control-valve position.
Coordination of Air-Handling Unit Sequences: Ensure that preheat, mixed-air, heating-coil, and cooling-coil controls have common inputs and do not overlap in function.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
23 0993 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 G.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Operator Station Display: Indicate the following on operator workstation display terminal: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35.
1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
DDC system graphic. DDC system on-off indication. DDC system occupied/unoccupied mode. Outdoor-air-temperature indication. Supply-fan on-off indication. Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure indication. Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure set point. Supply-fan airflow rate. Supply-fan speed. Building static-pressure indication. Building static-pressure set point. Preheat-coil air-temperature indication. Preheat-coil air-temperature set point. Preheat-coil pump operation indication. Preheat-coil control-valve position. Mixed-air-temperature indication. Mixed-air-temperature set point. Mixed-air damper position. Relative humidity indication. Relative humidity set point. Relative humidity control-valve position. Filter air-pressure-drop indication. Filter low-air-pressure set point. Filter high-air-pressure set point. Fan-discharge air-temperature indication. Fan-discharge air-temperature set point. Heating-coil air-temperature indication. Heating-coil air-temperature set point. Heating-coil pump operation indication. Heating-coil control-valve position. Cooling-coil air-temperature indication. Cooling-coil air-temperature set point. Cooling-coil control-valve position. Room temperature indication. Room temperature set point.
TERMINAL UNIT OPERATING SEQUENCE A.
Cabinet Unit Heater, Hydronic: 1.
Room Temperature: a. b. c.
Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor. Output Device: DDC system binary output. Action: Cycle fan to maintain temperature.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
23 0993 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
Input Device: Line-voltage, on-off thermostat, pipe mounted. Output Device: Hard wired. Action: Stop fan when return heating-water temperature falls below 35 deg F.
Display: a. b.
Room temperature indication. Room temperature set point.
B.
Radiant Heating Panel, Electric: Room thermostat cycles power.
C.
Heating Coils, Hydronic: 1.
Room Temperature: a. b. c.
2.
Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor. Output Device: Electronic control-valve operators. Action: Modulate valve to maintain temperature.
Display: a. b. c.
D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Low-Temperature Safety: a. b. c.
3.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Room temperature indication. Room temperature set point. Control-valve position.
Radiators and Convectors, Hydronic: 1.
Occupancy: a. b. c.
2.
Input Device: Occupancy sensor. Output Device: DDC system binary output. Action: Report occupancy and enable occupied temperature set point.
Room Temperature: a. b. c.
Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor. Output Device: Electronic control-valve operators. Action: Modulate valve to maintain temperature. 1) 2)
3.
Occupied Temperature: 75 deg F. Unoccupied Temperature: 65 deg F.
Display: a. b. c. d.
Room/area served. Room temperature indication. Room temperature set point. Room temperature set point, occupied.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
23 0993 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 e. f. g. E.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Room temperature set point, occupied standby. Room temperature set point, unoccupied. Control-valve position as percent open.
VAV, Terminal Air Units: 1.
Occupancy: a. b. c.
Input Device: Occupancy sensor. Output Device: DDC system binary output. Action: Report occupancy and enable occupied temperature set point. 1) 2)
2.
Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor. Output Device: Electronic damper actuators and control-valve operators. Action: Modulate damper and valve to maintain temperature. 1)
3.
Occupied Temperature: 75 deg F. Unoccupied Temperature: 65 deg F.
Room Temperature: a. b. c.
Sequence damper from full open to minimum position, then valve from closed to fully open.
Display: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
1.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Room/area served. Room occupied/unoccupied. Room temperature indication. Room temperature set point. Room temperature set point, occupied. Room temperature set point, unoccupied. Air-damper position as percent open.
VENTILATION SEQUENCES A.
Exhaust Fan: Interlock with light switch cycles fan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 23 0993
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
23 0993 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 1123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
1.3
Pipes, tubes, and fittings. Piping specialties. Piping and tubing joining materials. Valves. Pressure regulators. Service meters. Mechanical sleeve seals. Grout.
DEFINITIONS A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings: 1.
B. 1.5
Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. 2. 3.
Piping specialties. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
23 1123 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 4. 5. 6. 7.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. Dielectric fittings. Mechanical sleeve seals. Escutcheons.
B.
Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Field quality-control reports.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B.
Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
C.
Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.
D.
Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.
1.8
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
B.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors to be equal to Milcor or Vent-Lock, 10” x 18” steel access, flush type for mounting in walls or ceilings with prime coating, ready for field painting. Access panels shall be provided by Mechanical Contractor for installation by General Trades. Locate so as to provide access for all required maintenance. Provide more than one where required. Provide UL labeled panels where installed in rated walls or ceilings, and shall match the rating of the structure.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
23 1123 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: a. b. c. d. e.
5.
Protective Coating for Underground Piping: epoxy, adhesive, and PE. a.
6.
Material Group: 1.1. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel underground.
Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.
Mechanical Couplings: a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) 2) 3)
b. c. d. e. f. 2.2
Factory-applied, three-layer coating of
Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc. Smith-Blair, Inc. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternates.
Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. Buna-nitrile seals. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory equipped with anode.
PIPING SPECIALTIES A.
Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41. 1.
Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
23 1123 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3. 4. 5. B.
2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Nitrile seals. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. For indoor or outdoor applications. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.
Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection. JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
B.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
C.
Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited.
2.4
MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES A.
See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.
B.
General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. C.
CWP Rating: 125 psig. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.
General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.38. 1. 2. 3.
4.
Comply with
CWP Rating: 125 psig. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
23 1123 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Ball Valves. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 2.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternates.
Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. CWP Rating: 600 psig. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
PRESSURE REGULATORS A.
General Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Single stage and suitable for natural gas. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. Elevation compensator. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
American Meter Company. Invensys. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div. Maxitrol. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternates.
Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
23 1123 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. Maximum Inlet Pressure: Site determined.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A.
2.7
Refer to specifications section 22 0500. SLEEVES
A. 2.8
Refer to specification section 22 0500. MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. 2.9
Refer to specification section 22 0500. ESCUTCHEONS
A. 2.10 A. 2.11 A.
Refer to specification section 22 0500. GROUT Refer to specification section 22 0500. LABELING AND IDENTIFYING Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
23 1123 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
B.
Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.
C.
Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.
3.3
OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A.
Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.
B.
Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 1.
If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in containment conduit.
C.
Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D 2774.
D.
Steel Piping with Protective Coating: 1. 2. 3.
Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating manufacturer. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.
E.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
F.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. 2.
Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
G.
Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
H.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
I.
Install pressure gage downstream from each service regulator.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
23 1123 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A.
Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.
B.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E.
Locate valves for easy access.
F.
Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.
G.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
H.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I.
Install escutcheons at penetrations of interior walls, ceilings, and floors. 1.
New Piping: a. b. c. d. e. f.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stampedsteel type. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated or rough-brass finish. Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw or spring clips. Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.
J.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
K.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
L.
Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.
M.
Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
23 1123 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.
N.
Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
O.
Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. 1. 2.
3. 4.
Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit. In Floors: Install natural-gas piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating in cast-in-place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate. In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports. a.
5.
Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker barriers.
Prohibited Locations: a.
b.
Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.
P.
Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.
Q.
Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
R.
Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.
S.
Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.
T.
Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.
U.
Install pressure gage downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
23 1123 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
VALVE INSTALLATION A.
Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.
B.
Install underground valves with valve boxes.
C.
Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.
D.
Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.
3.6
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
C.
Threaded Joints: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
D.
Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
Welded Joints: 1. 2. 3.
Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter.
F.
Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.
G.
Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten.
H.
PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
23 1123 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A.
Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B.
Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
C.
Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
3.8
NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.
CONNECTIONS A.
Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.
B.
Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.
C.
Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.
D.
Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.
E.
Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.
3.9
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A.
Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification.
B.
Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.10 A.
PAINTING Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for painting interior and exterior natural-gas piping.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
23 1123 - 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D. a. b. c. d.
3.11
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, meter bars, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating. 1.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. Color of Piping Exposed on Walls: Per Architect. Color on Roofs: Safety Yellow.
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections: 1.
Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.12 A. 3.13 A.
DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain earthquake valves. OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE Underground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following: 1. 2.
B.
Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following: 1. 2.
C. 3.14 A.
PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings; service-line risers with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints, or mechanical couplings. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings, threaded joints and painted. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings, welded joints and painted.
Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping. INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
23 1123 - 12
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3. B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Drawn-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints.
Underground, below building, piping shall be one of the following: 1. 2.
Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
C.
Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
D.
Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
3.15
UNDERGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping utility's gas mains and listed by an NRTL.
B.
Underground: 1. 2.
3.16 A.
ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. Bronze plug valve.
Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger at service meter shall be one of the following: 1. 2. 3.
C.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze plug valves. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron, lubricated plug valves.
Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. Bronze plug valve. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve.
Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. 2. 3.
One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. Bronze plug valve.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
23 1123 - 13
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be one of the following: 1. 2. 3.
Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. Bronze plug valve. Cast-iron, lubricated plug valve.
END OF SECTION 23 1123
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
23 1123 - 14
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 2113 - HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1.
1.3
Hot-water heating piping. Makeup-water piping. Condensate-drain piping. Air-vent piping. Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.
Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic piping.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.5
Hot-Water Heating Piping: 40 psig at 200 deg F. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F. Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to which it is attached.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Pressure-seal fittings. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves. Air control devices. Chemical treatment.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 5.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Hydronic specialties.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail, pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure.
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
E.
Field quality-control test reports.
F.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
G.
Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at Project site.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: 1.
Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the pressure-seal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe couplings and fittings.
B.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C.
Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1. 2.
D.
1.7
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 01. EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Water-Treatment Chemicals: Furnish enough chemicals for initial system startup and for preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve and automatic flow control valve, include flowmeter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A.
Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: Type L or Type M.
B.
Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.
C.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2. 3.
D.
Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze casting. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting. Ductile-iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated EPDM gasket rated for minimum 230 deg F for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.
Copper or Bronze Pressure-Seal Fittings: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b.
2. 3. 4. 5. E.
Stadler-Viega. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Housing: Copper. O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM. Tools: Manufacturer's special tools. Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F.
Copper, Mechanically Formed Tee Option: For forming T-branch on copper water tube. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b.
F.
Anvil International, Inc. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. Victaulic Company of America. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
T-DRILL Industries Inc. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
B.
Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
C.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
D.
Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
E.
Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
F.
Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
G.
Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 1. 2. 3.
H.
Material Group: 1.1. End Connections: Butt welding. Facings: Raised face.
Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2.
3.
Anvil International, Inc. Central Sprinkler Company; a division of Tyco Fire & Building Products. National Fittings, Inc. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. Victaulic Company of America. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternates.
Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 I.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b.
2. 3. 4. 5.
2.3
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings: 1.
J.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Victaulic Company of America. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Housing: Steel. O-Rings and Pipe Stop: EPDM. Tools: Manufacturer's special tool. Minimum 300-psig working-pressure rating at 230 deg F.
Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed. JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. b.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
B.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
E.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
F.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
G.
Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures.
2.4
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A.
Refer to specification section 22 0500.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
VALVES A.
Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
B.
Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
C.
Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. D.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. Flow Design Inc. Griswold Controls. Taco. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. Plug: Resin. Seat: PTFE. End Connections: Threaded or socket. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. Flow Design Inc. Griswold Controls. Taco. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. Seat: PTFE. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 11. E.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Amtrol, Inc. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. Conbraco Industries, Inc. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Body: Bronze or brass. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. Seat: Brass. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. Diaphragm: EPT. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber. Inlet Strainer: Removable without system shutdown. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.
Automatic Flow-Control Valves: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 2.6
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves: 1.
F.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Flow Design Inc. Griswold Controls. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Body: Brass or ferrous metal. Piston and Spring Assembly Corrosion resistant, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. Size: Same as pipe in which installed. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
AIR CONTROL DEVICES A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3. 4. B.
Body: Bronze. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. CWP Rating: 150 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.
Body: Bronze or cast iron. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
Expansion Tanks: 1.
2.
3.
4. E.
Amtrol, Inc. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. Taco. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Automatic Air Vents: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Manual Air Vents: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and stainless-steel ball check, 100-gal. unit only; sized for compression-tank diameter. Provide tank fittings for 125-psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig working pressure and 240 deg F maximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression tank, drain water, and close off system. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4-inch-diameter gage glass, and slotted-metal glass guard.
Bladder-Type Expansion Tanks: 1.
2. 3.
Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature. Factory test with taps fabricated and supports installed and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Bladder: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain required expansion capacity. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 F.
2. 3.
Tank: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to maximize air separation. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F.
Air Purgers: 1. 2. 3.
2.7
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
In-Line Air Separators: 1.
G.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Body: Cast iron with internal baffles that slow the water velocity to separate the air from solution and divert it to the vent for quick removal. Maximum Working Pressure: 150 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
CHEMICAL TREATMENT A.
Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 2-gal. capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves. 1.
B.
2.8
Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of fill water, to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.
Ethylene and Propylene Glycol: Industrial grade with corrosion inhibitors and environmentalstabilizer additives for mixing with water in systems indicated to contain antifreeze or glycol solutions. HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Basket Strainers: 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. CWP Rating: 150 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
E.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Body: Fiber-reinforced rubber body. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges. Performance: Capable of misalignment. CWP Rating: 150 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
Expansion fittings are specified in Division 23 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping."
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS A.
Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following: 1. 2. 3.
C.
Type M, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered or brazed joints. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved, mechanical joints.
Hot-water heating piping installed belowground and within slabs shall be either of the following: 1.
D.
Type M, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered, brazed or pressure-seal joints. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 125, cast-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange fittings; and threaded joints. Schedule 5 steel pipe; steel, pressure-seal couplings and fittings; and pressure-seal joints.
Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints. Use the fewest possible joints.
Condensate-Drain Piping: Type M, DWV, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints or Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent-welded joints.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 E.
2.
3.2
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Air-Vent Piping: 1.
F.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions. Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.
Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-toplastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions. VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment.
B.
Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main.
C.
Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.
D.
Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.
E.
Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.
F.
Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.
3.3
PIPING INSTALLATIONS A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
C.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
G.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
H.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
J.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
K.
Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.
L.
Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
M.
Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
N.
Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
O.
Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.
P.
Install valves according to Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
Q.
Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
R.
Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.
S.
Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, inline pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.
T.
Install expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides as specified in Division 23 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping."
U.
Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.4
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.
3.5
Refer to specification section 23 0593. PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 12
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. 2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I.
Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. 2. 3.
4.
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. PVC Pressure Piping: Join ASTM D 1785 schedule number, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
J.
Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.
K.
Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints.
L.
Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertion marks on pipe after assembly.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 13
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A.
Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.
B.
Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only. Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.
C.
Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank.
D.
Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger.
E.
Install tangential air separator in pump suction. Install blowdown piping with gate or full-port ball valve; extend full size to nearest floor drain.
F.
Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4 bypass line, from main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the main between bypass connections. Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and include a full-size, full-port, ball valve.
G.
Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank. 1. 2.
H. 3.7
Install tank fittings that are shipped loose. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building components and structural members.
Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements. TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A.
Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.
B.
Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C.
Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.
D.
Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 14
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
CHEMICAL TREATMENT A.
Perform an analysis of fill water to determine type and quantities of chemical treatment needed to keep system free of scale, corrosion, and fouling, and to sustain the following water characteristics: 1. 2. 3. 4.
pH: 9.0 to 10.5. "P" Alkalinity: 100 to 500 ppm. Boron: 100 to 200 ppm. Corrosion Inhibitor: a. b. c. d. e.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Sodium Nitrate: 1000 to 1500 ppm. Molybdate: 200 to 300 ppm. Chromate: 200 to 300 ppm. Sodium Nitrate Plus Molybdate: 100 to 200 ppm each. Chromate Plus Molybdate: 50 to 100 ppm each.
Soluble Copper: Maximum 0.20 ppm. Total Suspended Solids: Maximum 10 ppm. Ammonia: Maximum 20 ppm. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maximum 20 ppm. Microbiological Limits: a. b. c. d.
Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maximum 1000 organisms/ml. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maximum 100 organisms/ml. Nitrate Reducers: 100 organisms/ml. Sulfate Reducers: Maximum 0 organisms/ml.
B.
Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water.
C.
Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year of operation.
3.9
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 15
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1.
2. 3. 4.
5.
6. C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. Prepare written report of testing.
Perform the following before operating the system: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Open manual valves fully. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.
END OF SECTION 23 2113
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 2113 - 16
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 2123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1.
1.3
In-line centrifugal pumps.
DEFINITIONS A.
Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
B.
EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: maintenance manuals.
1.5
For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Source Limitations: Obtain hydronic pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of hydronic pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
D.
UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: maintenance manuals.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and
23 2123 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
B.
Store pumps in dry location.
C.
Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.
D.
Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
E.
Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A.
Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Armstrong Pumps Inc. Bell & Gossett; Div. of ITT Industries. Flo-tech Grundfos Pumps Corporation. Taco, Inc. Others by voluntary alternate.
B.
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-coupled, inline pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically. Rate pump for 125-psig minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F.
C.
Pump Construction:
HYDRONIC PUMPS
23 2123 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, and threaded companion-flange or union end connections. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified performance. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel spring, and Buna-N or EPT bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal. Pump Bearings: Oil lubricated; bronze-journal or thrust type.
Motor: Single speed, with permanently lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated; and rigidly mounted to pump casing. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation.
C.
Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PUMP INSTALLATION A.
Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
B.
Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
C.
Install continuous-thread hanger rods and vibration isolation hangers of sufficient size to support pump weight.
D.
Suspend vertically mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps independent of piping. Install pumps with motor and pump shafts vertical. Use continuous-thread hanger rods and vibration isolation hangers of sufficient size to support pump weight.
3.3
ALIGNMENT A.
Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundation, grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and piping connections have been made.
B.
Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
23 2123 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
C.
Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in HI 1.11.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation.
D.
After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
3.4
CONNECTIONS A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.
D.
Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
E.
Install thermostats were indicated.
F.
Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure-gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple input selector valve.
G.
Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
H.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
I.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.5
STARTUP SERVICE A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Check piping connections for tightness. Clean strainers on suction piping. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting: a. b.
c. 5. 6. 7.
Verify bearing lubrication. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation. Start motor. Open discharge valve slowly.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
23 2123 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
DEMONSTRATION A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 23 2123
HYDRONIC PUMPS
23 2123 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 3113 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1.3
Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings. Sheet metal materials. Duct liner. Sealants and gaskets. Hangers and supports.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
B.
Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible".
C.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Liners and adhesives. Sealants and gaskets. Seismic-restraint devices.
Shop Drawings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. Reinforcement and spacing. Seam and joint construction. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. Duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels.
METAL DUCTS
23 3113 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 7. 1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, and vibration isolation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
B.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."
C.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A.
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for staticpressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
C.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible."
D.
Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.2
SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS A.
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
METAL DUCTS
23 3113 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 a. b. c. d.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Lindab Inc. McGill AirFlow LLC. United McGill Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
B.
Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension).
C.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1.
D.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. 2.
E.
2.3
Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.
Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with buttwelded longitudinal seams.
Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. 2.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
C.
Carbon-Steel Sheets: exposed ducts.
D.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
METAL DUCTS
Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for
23 3113 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. E. 2.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. DUCT LINER
A.
Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2.
Maximum Thermal Conductivity: a.
3.
4.
Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.
Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. a.
B.
CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group. Johns Manville. Knauf Insulation. Owens Corning. Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Preformed, cellular, closed-cell, sheet materials complying with ASTM C 534, Type II, Grade 1; and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2. 3.
Aeroflex USA Inc. Armacell LLC. Rubatex International, LLC Other manufacturers by voluntary alternate.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
METAL DUCTS
23 3113 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 a. C.
2.
For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick stainless steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation." 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
8.
Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure buttededge overlapping. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations: a. b. c.
9.
2.5
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Insulation Pins and Washers: 1.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Fan discharges. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than 2500 fpm or where indicated.
Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.
SEALANT AND GASKETS A.
General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
METAL DUCTS
23 3113 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Application Method: Brush on. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. Water resistant. Mold and mildew resistant. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. Service: Indoor or outdoor. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
E.
Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. Tape Width: 3 inches. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. Water resistant. Mold and mildew resistant. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. Service: Indoor and outdoor. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Two-Part Tape Sealing System: 1.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Application Method: Brush on. Base: Synthetic rubber resin. Solvent: Toluene and heptane. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60. Water resistant. Mold and mildew resistant. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). VOC: Maximum 395 g/L. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative. Service: Indoor or outdoor. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1.
General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.
METAL DUCTS
23 3113 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Type: S. Grade: NS. Class: 25. Use: O. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
F.
Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
G.
Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals: 1. 2. 3.
2.6
Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.
Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B.
Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
C.
Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
D.
Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
E.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.
F.
Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. 2. 3.
Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
DUCT INSTALLATION A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.
METAL DUCTS
23 3113 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
B.
Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install round and flat-oval ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E.
Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.
F.
Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.
G.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.
H.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I.
Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.
J.
Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
K.
Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.
L.
Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
3.2
INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A.
Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
B.
Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.
C.
Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D.
Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E.
Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.
METAL DUCTS
23 3113 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
DUCT SEALING A.
Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
B.
Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
3.4
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class B. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class B. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class B. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class B. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."
B.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C.
Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
D.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
METAL DUCTS
23 3113 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
E.
Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.
F.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.5
CONNECTIONS A.
Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6
PAINTING A.
3.7
Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Leakage Tests: 1. 2.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test. Test the following systems: a.
b.
c.
3. 4. 5.
6.
Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg: Test representative duct sections, totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. Exhaust Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. Outdoor Air Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.
Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
METAL DUCTS
23 3113 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Duct System Cleanliness Tests: 1. 2.
Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems." a.
Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.
D.
Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.8
DUCT CLEANING A.
Clean new and existing duct system(s) in area of work before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1.
2. 3. C.
Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. 2.
D.
Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.
When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.
Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. 2.
3.
4. 5. 6. 7.
Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. Coils and related components. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
METAL DUCTS
23 3113 - 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 E.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. 2.
3. 4.
5.
6. 7.
3.9
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.
START UP A.
3.10 A.
Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." DUCT SCHEDULE Supply and Return Ducts: 1.
Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units: a. b. c. d.
2.
Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units: a. b. c. d.
3.
Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.
Pressure Class: Positive 4-inch wg. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.
Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. b. c. d.
METAL DUCTS
Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.
23 3113 - 12
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: a. b. c. d.
Pressure Class: Negative 1-inch wg. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and B if positive pressure. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.
Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts: 1.
Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units: a. b. c. d.
D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Exhaust Ducts: 1.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.
Elbow Configuration: 1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1) 2)
b.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1) 2) 3)
c.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1) 2) 3)
2.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."
METAL DUCTS
23 3113 - 13
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 a.
2) 3) 4)
E.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 31, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1)
b.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.
Branch Configuration: 1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections." a. b.
2.
Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.
Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. b. c.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
END OF SECTION 23 3113
METAL DUCTS
23 3113 - 14
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 3300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
1.3
Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. Barometric relief dampers. Manual volume dampers. Control dampers. Fire dampers. Smoke dampers. Combination fire and smoke dampers. Flange connectors. Turning vanes. Duct-mounted access doors. Flexible connectors. Flexible ducts. Duct accessory hardware.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.
For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.
B.
Source quality-control reports.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: maintenance manuals.
1.4
Include
For air duct accessories to include in operation and
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B.
Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.
1.5
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 3300 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. 2.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
C.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
D.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.2
BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. Greenheck Fan Corporation. Nailor Industries Inc. Ruskin Company. Others by voluntary alternate.
B.
Description: Gravity balanced.
C.
Maximum Air Velocity: 3000 fpm.
D.
Maximum System Pressure: 3-inch wg.
E.
Frame: 0.052-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.
F.
Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center-pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inch-thick, roll-formed aluminum.
G.
Blade Action: Parallel.
H.
Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 3300 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 I.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Blade Axles: 1. 2.
Material: Galvanized steel. Diameter: 0.20 inch.
J.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
K.
Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
L.
Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings.
M.
Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations. Electric actuators. Chain pulls. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve. a. b.
6. 7. 8. 2.3
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Sleeve Thickness: 20-gage minimum. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum.
Screen Material: Galvanized steel. Screen Type: Bird. 90-degree stops.
MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A.
Low-Leakage, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following and equal to American Warming and Ventilating room dampers model VC-22 for round ducts 6” through 10”, VC-23 for 12” round ducts and above, rectangular dampers model VC-21 for maximum differential pressure of 2” wg: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
2. 3. 4.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. McGill AirFlow LLC. METALAIRE, Inc. Nailor Industries Inc. Ruskin Company. Others by voluntary alternate.
Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. Frames: a. b.
Hat shaped. Galvanized-steel channels, 0.064 inch thick.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 3300 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 c. d. 5.
Oil-impregnated bronze. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration.
Damper Hardware: 1. 2. 3.
2.4
Multiple or single blade. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Galvanized, roll-formed steel, 0.064 inch thick.
Blade Seals: Neoprene. Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. Accessories: a.
B.
Mitered and welded corners. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. Bearings: a. b.
8. 9. 10. 11.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Blades: a. b. c. d.
6. 7.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
CONTROL DAMPERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
B.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. Greenheck Fan Corporation. Lloyd Industries, Inc. McGill AirFlow LLC. METALAIRE, Inc. Metal Form Manufacturing, Inc. Nailor Industries Inc. Ruskin Company. Others by voluntary alternate.
Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 3300 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
Bearings: 1. 2. 3.
2.5
Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches. Parallel- and opposed-blade design. Galvanized steel. 0.064 inch thick. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene edging.
Blade Axles: 1/2-inch-diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings. 1.
F.
Hat shaped. Galvanized-steel channels, 0.064 inch thick. Mitered and welded corners.
Blades: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
E.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Frames: 1. 2. 3.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Oil-impregnated bronze. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
FIRE DAMPERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. Greenheck Fan Corporation. McGill AirFlow LLC. METALAIRE, Inc. Nailor Industries Inc. Ruskin Company. Others by voluntary alternate.
B.
Type: Static; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.
C.
Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm velocity.
D.
Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.
E.
Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inchthick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
F.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 3300 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements.
G.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
H.
Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch-thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
I.
Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
J.
Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.
2.6
TURNING VANES A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Ductmate Industries, Inc. METALAIRE, Inc. McGill Airflow, LLC Others by voluntary alternate.
Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1.
Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.
C.
General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
D.
Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 40 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions.
2.7
DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. Ductmate Industries, Inc. Greenheck Fan Corporation. McGill AirFlow LLC. Nailor Industries Inc. Others by voluntary alternate.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 3300 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct." 1.
Door: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3.
Double wall, rectangular. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Vision panel. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. b. c. d.
2.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Access Doors Less than 12 inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. Access Doors up to 18 inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches. Access Doors larger than 24 by 48 inches: Four hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Ductmate Industries, Inc. Duro Dyne Inc. Ventfabrics, Inc. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B.
Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
C.
Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
D.
Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
E.
Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. 2. 3.
F.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1.
Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd..
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 3300 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3. G.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Minimum Tensile Strength: 500 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.
Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
2.9
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at start and stop.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
C.
Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004. Maximum of 5’-0”.
Flexible Duct Connectors: 1.
2.10
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. McGill AirFlow LLC. Others by voluntary alternate.
Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.
DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.
B.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 3300 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B.
Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C.
Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1.
Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
E.
Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F.
Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G.
Install fire dampers according to UL listing.
H.
Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
7. 8. 9.
On both sides of duct coils. Upstream and downstream from duct filters. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. At drain pans and seals. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment. Adjacent to and close enough to fire dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. Control devices requiring inspection. Elsewhere as indicated.
I.
Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
J.
Access Door Sizes: 1. 2.
One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 3300 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. 4. 5.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
K.
Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.
L.
Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
M.
Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
N.
Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop of fans.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and damper.
END OF SECTION 23 3300
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 3300 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 3423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2.
1.3
Centrifugal roof ventilators. Ceiling mounted ventilators.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.
B.
Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
B. 1.5
Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. Certified fan sound-power ratings. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. Roof curbs. Fan speed controllers.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C.
NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
D.
UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
23 3423 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.
B.
Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
C.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.8
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
Belts: One set for each belt-driven unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. Greenheck. Penn Ventilation. Loren Cook Company Others by voluntary alternate.
B.
Description: Direct- or belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.
C.
Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle, extruded-aluminum, rectangular top, or galvanized steel, mushroom-domed top; square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
D.
Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
E.
Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
23 3423 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3. 4. F.
Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.
Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan stops.
Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch-thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.2
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Accessories: 1. 2.
G.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange or Built-in cant and mounting flange. Overall Height: 14 inches. Sound Curb: Curb with sound-absorbing insulation matrix. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel.
CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. Greenheck Fan Corporation. Loren Cook Company. Penn Ventilators Other manufactures by voluntary alternate
B.
Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.
C.
Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service.
D.
Grille: Stainless steel or Painted aluminum, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.
E.
Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in.
F.
Accessories: 1. 2. 3.
Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
23 3423 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B.
Support units using Elastomeric mounts, restrained elastomeric mounts, spring isolators, and restrained spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration- and seismic-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 1.
Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete base.
C.
Secure roof-mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.
D.
Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers, and spring hangers with vertical-limit stops having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
E.
Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
F.
Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.2
CONNECTIONS A.
Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B.
Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
D.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. 2.
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
23 3423 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. B. 3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. Adjust belt tension. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. equipment.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
ADJUSTING A.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B.
Adjust belt tension.
C.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
D.
Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
E.
Lubricate bearings.
END OF SECTION 23 3423
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
23 3423 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 3600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1.3
Bypass, single-duct air terminal units. Dual-duct air terminal units. Fan-powered air terminal units. Induction air terminal units. Shutoff, single-duct air terminal units. Diffuser-type air terminal units.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of the following products, including rated capacities, furnished specialties, sound-power ratings, and accessories. 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.4
Air terminal units. Liners and adhesives. Sealants and gaskets. Seismic-restraint devices.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. 2.
1.5
Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes. Instructions for adjusting software set points.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
1.6
Fan-Powered-Unit Filters: Furnish one spare filter(s) for each filter installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 3600 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
2.2
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. SHUTOFF, SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Krueger. METALAIRE, Inc. Nailor Industries Inc. Price Industries. Titus. Trane; a business of American Standard Companies. Tuttle & Bailey.
B.
Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud.
C.
Casing: 0.034-inch steel, single wall. 1.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 1/2-inch-thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections, size matching inlet size. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
D.
Regulator Assembly: System-air-powered bellows section incorporating polypropylene bellows for volume regulation and thermostatic control. Bellows shall operate at temperatures from 0 to 140 deg F, shall be impervious to moisture and fungus, shall be suitable for 10-inch wg static pressure, and shall be factory tested for leaks.
E.
Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.
F.
Direct Digital Controls: Single-package unitary controller and actuator specified in Section 23 0900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
G.
Control Sequence: 1.
Suitable for operation with duct pressures between 0.25- and 3.0-inch wg inlet static pressure.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 3600 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
System-powered, wall-mounted thermostat.
DIFFUSER-TYPE AIR TERMINAL UNITS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. 1. 2.
Acutherm. Other manufactures by voluntary alternate.
B.
Configuration: Volume-damper, diffuser, controller assembly and wall-mounted thermostat.
C.
Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings. 1.
Damper Position: Normally open.
D.
Diffuser: Galvanized steel with white baked-enamel finish.
E.
Electronic Controls: Bidirectional damper operator and microprocessor-based thermostat with integral airflow transducer and room sensor. Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls specified in Section 23 0900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and shall have the following features: 1. 2.
3.
Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed, spring return open. Velocity Controller: Factory calibrated and field adjustable to minimum and maximum air volumes; shall maintain constant airflow dictated by thermostat within 5 percent of set point while compensating for inlet static-pressure variations up to 4-inch wg; and shall have a multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet. Thermostat: Wall-mounted electronic type with the following features: a. b.
F. 2.4
Proportional, plus integral control of room temperature. Temperature set-point display in Fahrenheit and Celsius.
Integral thermally powered actuators control diffusion dampers based on duct and room temperature. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B.
Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C.
Steel Cables: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
D.
Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
E.
Air Terminal Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 3600 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 F. 2.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum for units with aluminum casings. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880. 1.
Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum factory-set airflows and ARI certification seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
B.
Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance.
3.2
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and for slabs more than 4 inches thick. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
C.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
D.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.3
CONNECTIONS A.
Install piping adjacent to air terminal unit to allow service and maintenance.
B.
Hot-Water Piping: In addition to requirements in Section 23 2113 "Hydronic Piping" and connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union or flange.
C.
Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Section 23 3113 "Metal Ducts."
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 3600 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D. 3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in Section 23 3300 "Air Duct Accessories." IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.5
Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Section 23 0553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. 4.
After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6
STARTUP SERVICE A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
3.7
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer to achieve proper performance. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible. Verify that control connections are complete. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.
DEMONSTRATION A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.
END OF SECTION 23 3600
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 3600 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 3713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.3
Round ceiling diffusers. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers. Perforated diffusers. Louver face diffusers. Fixed face registers and grilles.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1. 2.
B.
Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
Source quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
CEILING DIFFUSERS A.
All Diffusers and Grilles: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Nailor Industries Inc. Price Industries. Titus. Others by voluntary alternate.
Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. Material: Steel or Aluminum per schedule on drawings. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. Face Style: Per schedule on drawings. Mounting: Per schedule on drawings. Pattern: Fully adjustable.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
23 3713 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 8.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Accessories: a. b. c.
Plaster ring as required. Wire guard as required. Sectorizing baffles as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B.
Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3
ADJUSTING A.
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 23 3713
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
23 3713 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 7413 - PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units (rooftop units) with the following components and accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.3
Direct-expansion cooling. Gas furnace. Economizer outdoor- and return-air damper section. Integral, space temperature controls. Roof curbs.
DEFINITIONS A.
DDC: Direct-digital controls.
B.
ECM: Electrically commutated motor.
C.
Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor-air stream to reject heat during cooling operations and to absorb heat during heating operations. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.
D.
Outdoor-Air Refrigerant-Coil Fan: The outdoor-air refrigerant-coil fan in RTUs. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.
E.
RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, outdoor, centralstation air-handling units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.
F.
Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.
G.
Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.
H.
VVT: Variable-air volume and temperature.
PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
23 7413 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
1.5
Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. 1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2.
1.7
Fan Belts: One set for each belt-driven fan. Filters: Three sets of filters for each unit.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
ARI Compliance: 1. 2.
B.
Comply with ARI 203/110 and ARI 303/110 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.
ASHRAE Compliance: 1. 2. 3.
Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
C.
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
D.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
E.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
1.8
WARRANTY A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
23 7413 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3. 4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Warranty Period for Gas Furnace Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Solid-State Ignition Modules: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 3 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
2.2
AAON, Inc. Carrier Corporation. Lennox Industries Inc. McQuay International. Trane; American Standard Companies, Inc. YORK International Corporation.
CASING A.
Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs. 1.
B.
Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I. Thickness: 1/2 inch. Liner materials shall have air-stream surface coated with an erosion- and temperatureresistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of stainless-steel sheet, a minimum of 2 inches deep, and complying with ASHRAE 62.1. 1. 2.
D.
Exterior Casing Thickness: 0.052 inch thick.
Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal moisture tight. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
23 7413 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
FANS A.
Direct-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, multispeed motor resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls.
B.
Belt-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single-speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the casing. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls.
C.
Condenser-Coil Fan: Propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated motor.
D.
Fan Motor: Comply with requirements in Section 23 0513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
2.4
COILS A.
Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: 1. 2.
C.
Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor. Baked phenolic coating.
Hot-Gas Reheat Refrigerant Coil: (NOT USED) 1.
2.5
Aluminum -plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor. Coil Split: Interlaced. Baked phenolic coating. Condensate Drain Pan: Stainless steel formed with pitch and drain connections complying with ASHRAE 62.1.
Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor.
REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS A.
Number of Refrigerant Circuits: One for units 6-tons and smaller; Two for units 7.5-tons and Larger.
B.
Compressor: Hermetic, scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.
C.
Refrigeration Specialties: 1. 2. 3.
Refrigerant: R-410A. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. Refrigerant filter/dryer.
PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
23 7413 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch. Minimum off-time relay. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor.
AIR FILTRATION A.
Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 1.
2.7
Glass Fiber: Minimum 80 percent arrestance, and MERV 5.
GAS FURNACE A.
Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with ANSI Z21.47 and NFPA 54. 1.
B.
CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA.
Burners: Stainless steel. 1. 2.
Fuel: Natural gas. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark or hot-surface igniter with flame sensor.
C.
Heat-Exchanger and Drain Pan: Stainless steel.
D.
Venting: Gravity vented.
E.
Safety Controls: 1. 2.
2.8
Gas Control Valve: Single stage, Two stage - refer to mechanical schedule. Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing pilot solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff.
DAMPERS A.
Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel- or opposed-blade galvanized-steel dampers mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized-steel operating rod in reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously. 1. 2.
2.9
Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position. Relief-Air Damper: Gravity actuated or motorized, ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, with bird screen and hood.
as
required
by
ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTION A.
Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.
PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
23 7413 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.10
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
CONTROLS
A.
Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Section 23 0900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
B.
Basic Unit Controls: 1. 2.
Control-voltage transformer. Unit-Mounted Annunciator Panel for Each Unit: a. b. c.
C.
Lights to indicate power on, cooling, heating, fan running, filter dirty, and unit alarm or failure. DDC controller or programmable timer and interface with HVAC instrumentation and control system. Digital display of outdoor-air temperature, supply-air temperature, return-air temperature, economizer damper position, indoor-air quality, and control parameters.
DDC Controller: 1. 2.
Controller shall have volatile-memory backup. Safety Control Operation: a. b.
3. 4.
Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on 365-day clock with a minimum of four programmable periods per day. Unoccupied Period: a. b. c.
5.
Heating Setback: 10 deg F Cooling Setback: System off. Override Operation: Two hours.
Supply Fan Operation: a. b.
6.
Smoke Detectors: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if smoke is detected. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel. Firestats: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if air greater than 130 deg F enters unit. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel.
Occupied Periods: Run fan continuously. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle fan to maintain setback temperature.
Refrigerant Circuit Operation: a.
b.
Occupied Periods: Cycle or stage compressors to match compressor output to cooling load to maintain discharge temperature. Cycle condenser fans to maintain maximum hot-gas pressure. Operate low-ambient control kit to maintain minimum hot-gas pressure. Unoccupied Periods: Compressors off.
PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
23 7413 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 7.
b.
b.
Provide heating- and cooling-mode changeover relays compatible with VVT terminal control system required in Section 23 0900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
Interface Requirements for HVAC Instrumentation and Control System: 1. 2. 3.
Interface relay for scheduled operation. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at the central workstation and diagnostic code storage. Provide LonWorks compatible interface for central HVAC control workstation for the following: a. b. c. d.
2.11
Occupied Periods: Reset minimum outdoor-air ratio down to minimum 10 percent to maintain maximum 750-ppm concentration. Unoccupied Periods: Close outdoor-air damper and open return-air damper.
VVT Relays: a.
D.
Occupied Periods: Open to 20 percent fixed minimum intake, and maximum 100 percent of the fan capacity to comply with ASHRAE Cycle II. Controller shall permit air-side economizer operation when outdoor air is less than 60 deg F. Use mixed-air temperature and select between outdoor-air and return-air enthalpy to adjust mixing dampers During economizer cycle operation, lock out cooling. Unoccupied Periods: Close outdoor-air damper and open return-air damper.
Carbon Dioxide Sensor Operation: a.
10.
Occupied Periods: Cycle burner to maintain discharge temperature. Unoccupied Periods: Cycle burner to maintain setback temperature.
Economizer Outdoor-Air Damper Operation: a.
9.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Gas Furnace Operation: a. b.
8.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Adjusting set points. Monitoring supply fan start, stop, and operation. Inquiring data to include outdoor-air damper position, supply- and room-air temperature. Monitoring occupied and unoccupied operations.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Duplex, 115-V, ground-fault-interrupter outlet with 15-A overcurrent protection. Include transformer if required. Outlet shall be energized even if the unit main disconnect is open.
B.
Filter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter pressure loss.
PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
23 7413 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.12 A.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
ROOF CURBS Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factoryinstalled wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards. 1.
Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb. a. b.
c.
d. B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
Curb Height: 14 inches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs.
B.
Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation.
C.
Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
3.3
Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Section 07 7200 "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts. CONNECTIONS
A.
Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain.
B.
Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance.
PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
23 7413 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 23 1123 "Facility NaturalGas Piping." Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.
Duct installation requirements are specified in other HVAC Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.
3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 23 3300 "Air Duct Accessories." Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. 4.
C. 3.5
After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans. Inspect internal insulation. Verify that labels are clearly visible. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. Verify that controls are connected and operable. Verify that filters are installed. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris. Connect and purge gas line. Remove packing from vibration isolators. Inspect operation of barometric relief dampers. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings.
PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
23 7413 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 15. 16. 17.
f.
26.
Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature. Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.
Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve. a. b. c. d.
27.
Measure gas pressure on manifold. Inspect operation of power vents. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and oxygen concentration. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.
Calibrate thermostats. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following when ambient is a minimum of 15 deg F above return-air temperature: a. b. c. d.
25.
Start refrigeration system. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient temperature. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.
Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing. Adjust burner for peak efficiency. a. b. c. d. e.
21. 22. 23. 24.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. b. c.
18. 19. 20.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Supply-air volume. Return-air volume. Relief-air volume. Outdoor-air intake volume.
Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following: a. b.
Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil or from condenser fans to outdoor-air intake.
PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
23 7413 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 28.
3.6
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Inspect the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
29.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
High-temperature limit on gas-fired heat exchanger. Low-temperature safety operation. Filter high-pressure differential alarm. Economizer to minimum outdoor-air changeover. Relief-air fan operation. Smoke and firestat alarms.
After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace existing filters with new filters.
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
B.
After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and airdistribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.
3.7
DEMONSTRATION A.
Train the Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs. Refer to Section 01 7900 "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 23 7413
PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
23 7413 - 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 7423.16 - PACKAGED, INDIRECT-FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING-ONLY MAKEUPAIR UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A. 1.3
Section includes indirect-fired makeup-air units. DEFINITIONS
A. 1.4
BAS: Building automation system. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and configuration of outdoor, indirect-fired makeup-air unit. 1.
1.5
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data: For indirect-fired makeup-air units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2.
1.7
Filters: One set(s) for each unit. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each unit.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Comply with NFPA 70.
B.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
C.
ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
PACKAGED, INDIRECT-FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING-ONLY MAKEUP-AIR UNITS
23 7423.16 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
WARRANTY A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of indirect-fired heating and ventilating units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.2
Bousquet Engineered Air. Rapid Engineering, Inc. Trane Inc. Other manufactures by voluntary alternate.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
Factory-assembled, prewired, self-contained unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, controls, filters, and indirect-fired gas burner to be installed exterior to the building.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.3
UNIT CASINGS A.
General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. B.
Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint. Casing Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets, factory sealed with water-resistant sealant. Factory Finish for Steel and Galvanized-Steel Casings: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. Factory Finish for Steel and Galvanized-Steel Casings: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on enamel finish, consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Casing Coating: Powder-baked enamel. Air-Handling-Unit Mounting Frame: Formed galvanized-steel channel or structural channel supports, designed for low deflection, welded with integral lifting lugs. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
Configuration: Horizontal unit with horizontal discharge for roof-mounting installation.
PACKAGED, INDIRECT-FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING-ONLY MAKEUP-AIR UNITS
23 7423.16 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
C.
Cabinet: Galvanized-steel panels, formed to ensure rigidity and supported by galvanized-steel channels or structural channel supports with lifting lugs. Duct flanges at inlet and outlet. Pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs.
D.
Outer Casing: Steel with heat-resistant, baked-enamel.
E.
Inner Casing: 1. 2.
Burner Section Inner Casing: 0.0299-inch-thick steel. Double-wall casing with inner wall of solid steel, for the following sections: a. b. c. d.
3.
Internal Insulation: Fibrous-glass duct lining, neoprene coated, comply with ASTM C 1071, Type II, applied on complete unit. a. b. c. d.
F.
Thickness: 2 inches. Insulation Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. Density: 1.5 lb/cu. ft.. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive, mechanical, or welding attachment to casing without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing air leakage.
Discharge Section: 1.
G.
Blower section. Filter section. Mixing box. Access Doors: Hinged with handles for burner and fan motor assemblies on both sides of unit.
Galvanized-steel assembly
Casing Insulation and Adhesive: 1. 2.
Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type II. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of section panels downstream from, and including, the heating-coil section. a. b.
c.
3.
Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive, mechanical, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet. Liner materials applied in this location shall have airstream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric, depending on service-air velocity.
Location and Application: Encased between outside and inside casing.
PACKAGED, INDIRECT-FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING-ONLY MAKEUP-AIR UNITS
23 7423.16 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 H.
2.
Panel and Door Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, single- or double-wall and insulated panels of same materials and thicknesses as casing. Inspection and Access Panels: a. b. c.
3.
b. 4.
Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure differential. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's internal components.
Access Doors: a.
Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge and two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to be opened against air-pressure differential. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.
Locations and Applications: a. b. c. d. e. f.
Fan Section: Doors. Access Section: Doors. Coil Section: Inspection and access panels. Damper Section: Doors. Filter Section: Doors large enough to allow periodic removal and installation of filters. Mixing Section: Doors.
Condensate Drain Pans: 1.
Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from condensate-producing heat exchangers and from humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection. a. b.
2. 3. 4. 2.4
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors: 1.
I.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with ASHRAE 62.1. Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep.
Formed sections. Double-wall, stainless-steel sheet with space between walls filled with foam insulation and moisture-tight seal. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.
ACCESSORIES A.
Duplex, 115-V, ground-fault-interrupter outlet with 15-A overcurrent protection. Include transformer if required
PACKAGED, INDIRECT-FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING-ONLY MAKEUP-AIR UNITS
23 7423.16 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B. 2.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Filter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter pressure loss. OUTDOOR-AIR INTAKE HOOD
A.
Type: Manufacturer's standard hood or louver.
B.
Materials: Match cabinet.
C.
Bird Screen: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
D.
Filter: Aluminum, 1 inch cleanable.
E.
Configuration: Designed to inhibit wind-driven rain and snow from entering unit.
2.6
ROOF CURBS A.
Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factoryinstalled wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards. 1.
Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. a.
2.
Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb. a. b.
c.
d. 2.7
Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or Type II.
Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
SUPPLY-AIR FAN A.
Fan Type: Centrifugal, rated according to AMCA 210; statically and dynamically balanced, galvanized steel; mounted on solid-steel shaft with heavy-duty, self-aligning, permanently lubricated ball bearings. Bearing rating: L10 of 150,000 hours.
B.
Drive: V-belt drive with matching fan pulley and adjustable motor sheaves and belt assembly.
C.
Mounting: Fan wheel, motor, and drives shall be mounted in fan casing with spring isolators.
D.
Fan-Shaft Lubrication Lines: Extended to a location outside the casing.
PACKAGED, INDIRECT-FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING-ONLY MAKEUP-AIR UNITS
23 7423.16 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
AIR FILTERS A.
Comply with NFPA 90A.
B.
Disposable Panel Filters: Factory-fabricated, flat-panel-type, disposable air filters with holding frames, with a MERV 6 according to ASHRAE 52.2. 1. 2.
2.9
Thickness: 2 inches. Frame: Galvanized steel.
DAMPERS A.
Outdoor-Air and Return-Air Damper: Galvanized-steel, opposed-blade dampers with vinyl blade seals and stainless-steel jamb seals, having a maximum leakage of 10 cfm/sq. ft. of damper area, at a differential pressure of 2-inch wg.
B.
Damper Operator: Direct coupled, electronic with spring return or fully modulating as required by the control sequence.
2.10 A.
INDIRECT-FIRED GAS BURNER Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; and complying with ANSI Z21.47, "GasFired Central Furnaces," and with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code." 1. 2.
CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA. Burners: Stainless steel. a. b. c. d.
Gas Control Valve: Modulating. Fuel: Natural gas. Minimum Combustion Efficiency: 80 percent. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor.
B.
Venting: Gravity vented.
C.
Venting: Power vented, with integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve.
D.
Heat Exchanger: Stainless steel.
E.
Heat-Exchanger Drain Pan: Stainless steel.
F.
Safety Controls: 1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
Vent Flow Verification: Differential pressure switch to verify open vent. Control Transformer: 24-V ac. High Limit: Thermal switch or fuse to stop burner. Gas Train: Regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing pilot solenoid valve, electronic-modulating temperature control valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff all in one body. Purge-period timer shall automatically delay burner ignition and bypass low-limit control.
PACKAGED, INDIRECT-FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING-ONLY MAKEUP-AIR UNITS
23 7423.16 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 6. 7. 8. 9. 2.11 A. 2.12
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Gas Manifold: Safety switches and controls complying with ANSI standards. Airflow Proving Switch: Differential pressure switch senses correct airflow before energizing pilot. Automatic-Reset, High-Limit Control Device: Stops burner and closes main gas valve if high-limit temperature is exceeded. Safety Lockout Switch: Locks out ignition sequence if burner fails to light after three tries. Controls are reset manually by turning the unit off and on.
UNIT CONTROL PANEL Factory-wired, fuse-protected control transformer, connection for power supply and field-wired unit to remote control panel. CONTROLS
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 23 0900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and Section 23 0993 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for control equipment and sequence of operation.
B.
Mixed Outdoor- and Return-Air Damper Control: When fan is running, outdoor- and return-air dampers shall modulate to supply minimum outdoor air as follows: 1. 2. 3.
C.
Temperature Control: Operates gas valve to maintain supply-air temperature. 1. 2. 3.
D.
Minimum 30 percent outdoor air. Outdoor-air quantity adjusted by potentiometer on control panel. Outdoor-air quantity to maintain minimum building static pressure.
Operates gas valve to maintain discharge-air temperature with factory-mounted sensor in blower outlet. Operates gas valve to maintain space temperature with wall-mounting, field-wired sensor and adjustment on remote-control panel. Burner Control: 20 to 100 percent modulation of the firing rate. 10 to 100 percent with dual burner units.
BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, control, and display status and alarms of heating and ventilating unit. 1.
Hardwired Points: a. b. c.
2.
Room temperature. Discharge-air temperature. Burner operating.
LonTalk communication interface with the BAS shall enable the BAS operator to remotely control and monitor the heating and ventilating unit from an operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at heating and ventilating unit control panel shall be available through the BAS.
PACKAGED, INDIRECT-FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING-ONLY MAKEUP-AIR UNITS
23 7423.16 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.13 A.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
MOTORS Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 0513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1.
Enclosure: Open, dripproof.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for piping, ducts, and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment installation.
C.
Verify cleanliness of airflow path to include inner-casing surfaces, filters, coils, turning vanes, fan wheels, and other components.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
Equipment Mounting:
B.
Unit Support: Install heating and ventilating unit level on structural curbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction. Secure units to structural support with anchor bolts.
C.
Install gas-fired units according to NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."
D.
Install controls and equipment shipped by manufacturer for field installation with indirect-fired heating and ventilating units.
E.
Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install units on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Section 07 7200 "Roof Accessories." Secure units to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts.
3.3
CONNECTIONS A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 1.
Gas Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 23 1123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." Connect gas piping with shutoff valve and union, and with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.
PACKAGED, INDIRECT-FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING-ONLY MAKEUP-AIR UNITS
23 7423.16 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Make final connections of gas piping to unit with corrugated, stainless-steel tubing flexible connectors complying with ANSI LC 1/CSA 6.26 equipment connections. B.
Drain: Comply with requirements in Section 22 1316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for traps and accessories on piping connections to condensate drain pans under condensing heat exchangers. Where installing piping adjacent to heating and ventilating units, allow space for service and maintenance.
C.
Duct Connections: Connect supply and return ducts to indirect-fired heating and ventilating units with flexible duct connectors. Comply with requirements in Section 23 3300 "Air Duct Accessories" for flexible duct connectors.
D.
Ground equipment according to Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
E.
Connect wiring according to Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.
B.
Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5
STARTUP SERVICE A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
C.
Inspect for visible damage to burner combustion chamber. Inspect casing insulation for integrity, moisture content, and adhesion. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. Verify that controls are connected and operable. Verify that filters are installed. Purge gas line. Inspect and adjust vibration isolators. Verify bearing lubrication. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.
Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. Operate unit for run-in period recommended by manufacturer.
PACKAGED, INDIRECT-FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING-ONLY MAKEUP-AIR UNITS
23 7423.16 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 4.
9. 10.
12. 13. 3.6
Measure gas pressure at manifold. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.
Calibrate thermostats. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. Inspect dampers, if any, for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown. Measure and record airflow. Plot fan volumes on fan curve. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot-operation and failure modes. Inspect the following: a. b.
11.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing, and adjust burner for peak efficiency: a. b. c.
5. 6. 7. 8.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
High-limit heat. Alarms.
After startup and performance testing, change filters, verify bearing lubrication, and adjust belt tension. Verify drain-pan performance. Verify outdoor-air damper operation.
ADJUSTING A.
Adjust initial temperature set points.
B.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.7
DEMONSTRATION A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain heating and ventilating units.
END OF SECTION 23 7423.16
PACKAGED, INDIRECT-FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING-ONLY MAKEUP-AIR UNITS
23 7423.16 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 23 8233 - CONVECTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A. 1.3
Section includes hydronic convectors. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. 1.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
HOT-WATER CONVECTORS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Engineered Air. Rosemex. Sterling Hydronics; a Mestek company. Other manufactures by voluntary alternate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas to receive convectors for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for hydronic-piping connections to verify actual locations before installation of convector.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
Install convectors level and plumb.
B.
Install valves within reach of access door provided in enclosure.
C.
Install air-seal gasket between wall and recessed flanges or front cover of fully recessed unit.
D.
Install piping within pedestals for freestanding units.
CONVECTORS
23 8233 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
CONNECTIONS A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in Section 23 2113 "Hydronic Piping Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect hot-water convectors and components to piping according to Section 23 2113 "Hydronic Piping". 1.
C.
Install shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and balancing valve on outlet.
Connect steam convectors and components to piping. 1.
Install shutoff valve on inlet; install strainer, steam trap, and shutoff valve on outlet.
D.
Install control valves as required by Section 23 0900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
E.
Install piping adjacent to convectors to allow service and maintenance.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections: 1. 2.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B.
Convectors will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 23 8233
CONVECTORS
23 8233 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 26 0010 – ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of a complete electrical system.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Work included: 1.
2.
3.
This Division includes all labor, materials, and equipment, tools, supervision, start-up services, Owner's instructions, including all incidental and related items necessary to complete installation and successfully test and start-up and operate in a practical and efficient manner all electrical work and systems indicated on Drawings and described in each Section of Division 26 and conforming with all Contract Documents. This Section defines certain terms used in the Specifications and explains the language, abbreviations thereof, format and certain conventions used in the Specifications and associated Contract Documents. The following are not intended to supersede but to clarify the definitions in the General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01.
B.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary facilities in accordance with Division 01 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls.”
C.
Site and Contract Documents Examination: Submission of a Bid is considered evidence Contractor has visited Site, examined Drawings and Specifications of all trades, and fully informed himself with all Project and Site conditions, and is proficient and experienced and knowledgeable of all standards, codes, ordinances, permits, and regulations which affect every trades' completion, cost and time required, and that all costs are included in his Bid.
D. Responsibility: 1.
2.
E.
Contractor shall be responsible for all subcontractors and Suppliers, and include in his Bid and apportion all materials, labor, and equipment to several trades involved in accordance with all local customs, rules, regulations, jurisdictional awards, decisions and secure compliance of all parts of Specifications and Drawings regardless of Sectional inclusion in these Specifications. Each electrical subcontractor and sub-subcontractor shall be responsible for all parts applicable to his trade in accordance with Specifications and Drawings and for coordinating locations and arrangements of his work with all other relevant Specifications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, and details.
Demolition:
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 0010 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
1. 2. F.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Contractor shall be responsible to remove and/or relocate any electrical equipment in conflict of new construction. Determination by Owner shall be made concerning all items to be removed from Project as to if Owner shall keep or if Contractor is to remove from Site.
Drawings and Specifications: 1. 2.
3.
4. 5.
6.
Drawings and Specifications are intended to supplement each other and all work specified or indicated in either shall be provided. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangement of systems and work included in Contract and shall serve only as design drawings and not as working drawings for general layout of various equipment and systems. Drawings do not necessarily indicate every required junction box, pull box, off-set, mounting support, access panel, etc., which shall be provided as required. Each Contractor shall examine all Drawings and Specifications of his trade and work of Drawings, Shop Drawings, and field layouts of all other trades on the Project, including Architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical. If any discrepancies occur between these various Drawings or between these Drawings and these Specifications, he shall report same to Engineer in writing and obtain written instructions for changes in construction. Should interferences develop during construction which cannot be avoided, Engineer shall decide which work is to be relocated regardless of which was first installed. This work shall be done at no extra cost to Owner. Should Drawings disagree in themselves or with Specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be provided. All schedules on Drawings and Specifications are only for convenience of Contractor. Contractor shall make his own count and where fixtures or equipment are indicated on Drawings but not on schedule, provide like equipment or fixtures for like rooms or use. Manufacturer's Model Number: a.
b. 7.
Wherever on Drawings or in Specifications that a Manufacturer's catalog number or model or type designation is made, it is intended as a general qualification and it is Contractor's responsibility before ordering to determine the proper type or model with arrangement, mounting, and accessories applicable for each location on the Project. Approval of Shop Drawings by Engineer will not obviate Contractor's responsibility.
Drawings shall not be scaled for measurement and shall not serve as Shop Drawings.
G. Definitions: 1.
3.
Furnish: Supply and deliver to Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar subsequent requirements. Install: Operations at Project Site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, protection, cleaning, and similar requirements. Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
4.
Minimum Requirements:
2.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 0010 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
a.
b. 5.
b. c.
7.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Indicated requirements are for a specific minimum acceptable level of quality and quantity as recognized in the industry. Actual work must comply, within specified tolerances, or may exceed minimums within reasonable limits. Refer uncertainties to Engineer before proceeding.
Abbreviations, Plural Words: a.
6.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Abbreviations, where not defined in Contract Documents, will be interpreted to mean the normal construction industry terminology determined by recognized grammatical rules by Engineer. Plural words will be interpreted as singular and singular words will be interpreted as plural where applicable for context of Contract Documents. "In conformity herewith" "shall be" "as noted or indicated on Drawings" "according to Drawings" "a" "the" "and" "all", etc., are omitted in places but shall be supplied by inference.
Raceway: Conduit, wireway, channels, boxes, fittings, hangers, supports, and items necessary or required in connection with or relating to raceway to provide a complete installation. Concealed: Embedded in masonry or other construction below floor slabs, installed behind wall furring, within double partitions of hung ceiling, in trenches, tunnels or crawl spaces.
H. Substitution and Changes: 1. 2.
3.
4.
1.4
Substitutions and changes shall be in accordance with Division 01 Section “Product Substitution Procedures.” When a material, method or product is listed by trade names or catalog number for one use, it is basis of design. Other Manufacturers are listed as acceptable providing specific item is comparable with basis and intent of design. Contractor and/or equipment supplier may propose other materials, methods or products of equal quality, function, durability, and appearance. Proof of equality must be submitted to Engineer at least 10 days prior to due date for Bids and, if approved, an Addendum naming the material or product so approved will be issued to all Bidders prior to Building. Acceptance and approval is responsibility of Engineer. Contractor is liable for all added costs to himself or others and is responsible for verifying adequate available space for variations in dimensions, clearance, weight, and roughing-in requirements when product not named as basis of design is used and is responsible for advising all other trades of variations and, when requested shall submit revised drawing layout for approval of Engineer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Compliance with standard codes and permits shall be in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions. B.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: All work under Division 26 shall comply with latest edition of applicable standards and codes of following: 1. 2. 3.
NEC (NFPA 70), National Electric Code. AWS Standards for welding. ANSI C2, National Electrical Safety Code.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 0010 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
ANSI C73, Dimensions of Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. NECA Standards for installation. NEMA Standards for materials and products. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials. ASA American Standards Association. NFPA National Fire Protection Association. UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act. BOCA Building Officials and Code Administrators Basic Building Codes. UBC Uniform Building Code. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
All labor, materials, and equipment shall comply with all applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4.
City, county, and state laws, ordinances, codes, and regulations. Michigan and County Department of Health. Applicable fire marshal's office. Federal specifications.
D. Excess Quantities and Sizes: Where quantities, sizes or other requirements on Drawings or Specifications are in excess of code requirements, Drawings or Specifications govern. E.
Conflicts: When conflicts exist between referenced Specifications or standards, more stringent requirements govern. No extra compensation for such compliance allowed.
F.
Notices and Payments: Contractor shall give all notices, file all Drawings, obtain necessary approvals, obtain all permits, pay all fees, deposit and expenses required for installation of all work under this Contract. Within 10 days after the contract award, Contractor shall show proof that permits have been obtained and fees paid.
G. Inspections and Certificate of Inspection: 1.
2.
No work shall be covered or enclosed until work is tested in accordance with applicable codes and regulations and successful tests witnessed and approved by authorized inspection authority. Provide to Engineer's office evidence that the installation has been inspected and approved by authorized governmental inspector having jurisdiction over that phase of work involved.
H. UL Labels: In general, all material where applicable shall be labeled or listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. 1.5
COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL WORK A. Coordination: Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent move in of large units of electrical work (equipment). B.
1.6
Locations: Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access and arrange entire electrical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance. Allow for clearance around equipment in accordance with NEC. SUBMITTALS
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 0010 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Submittal Log." 1.7
TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for general requirements on temporary facilities.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver, storage, handling, and protection shall be in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions, and in accordance with each Division 26 Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A. Product Listing: 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. B.
Prepare the product listing for electrical work, separately from the listing(s) of products for other work. Include listing of each significant item of equipment and material used in the work and indicate the generic name, product name, Manufacturer, model number, related specification section number(s), and estimated date for start of installation. Materials such as conductors, conduit, and boxes taken from installer's stock need not be listed. For principal equipment items, list the input/output ratings. Submit list within 14 days of contract date.
Compatibility: 1.
2.
Provide products which are compatible with other products of the electrical work and with other work requiring interface with the electrical work, including electrical connections and control devices. For exposed electrical work, coordinate colors, and finishes with other work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXCAVATING FOR ELECTRICAL WORK A. General: 1. 2.
3.
The work of this Article is defined to include whatever excavating and backfilling is necessary to install the electrical work. Coordinate the work with other excavating and backfilling in the same area, including dewatering, flood protection provisions, other temporary facilities, other underground services (existing and new), landscape development, paving, and floor slabs on grade. Coordinate with weather conditions and provide temporary facilities needed for protection and proper performance of excavating and backfilling.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 0010 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
B.
2.
3.2
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
General Standards: 1.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the applicable provisions of Division 31 for electrical work, excavating, and backfilling. Refer instances of uncertain applicability to Engineer for resolution before proceeding.
Replacement of Other Work: Where it is necessary to remove and replace landscape work, engage the original installer to install the replacement work; except where the work is existing prior to the work of this Contract, engage only experienced and expert firms and tradespeople to replace the work. CONCRETE FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Refer to Division 03 - Concrete for requirement on concrete for electrical work. 3.3
PAINTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the applicable provisions of Division 09 Section “Painting” for painting of electrical work.
3.4
ELECTRICAL WORK CLOSEOUT A. General: Except as otherwise indicated in this Section, closeout shall be in accordance with Division 01 Section “Project Close-Out.” B.
Coordination With Mechanical: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Coordinate closeout operations with closeout of mechanical systems and other power consuming equipment. Accurately record locations of conductors which are underground or otherwise concealed. Test run electrical equipment in coordination with test runs of mechanical systems. Clean and lubricate operational equipment. Check all fuses and thermal overload units for proper sizing as per load, as determined in the field. Instruct Owner's operating personnel thoroughly in the operation, sequencing, maintenance, and safety/emergency provisions of the electrical systems. Turn over the operations to Owner's personnel at the time(s) of Substantial Completion. Until the time of final acceptance of the total Work of the Contract, respond promptly with consultation and services to assist Owner's personnel with operation of electrical systems.
END OF SECTION 26 0010
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 0010 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 26 0500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS Applicable provisions of Bidding Requirements, Project Guidelines and General Requirements (Div. 1) apply to work specified in this Section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A.
Work Included: 1.
2.
3.
This Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, tools, supervision, start-up services, and Owner's instructions, including all incidental and related items necessary to complete installation and successfully test, start-up and operate in a practical and efficient manner, all electrical work and systems indicated on the drawings and described in each Section of Division 26 and conforming with all contract documents. This Section defines certain terms used in these specifications and explains the language, abbreviations thereof, format and certain conventions used in the specifications and certain associated contract documents. The following are not intended to supersede but to clarify the definitions used in the General Requirements (Division 1).
B.
Provide temporary facilities in accordance with Division 1.
C.
Site and Contract Document Examination: Submission of a Bid Proposal is considered to be evidence that the Contractor has visited the site, examined the drawings and specifications of all the trades and has fully informed himself as to all project and site conditions and is proficient, experienced and knowledgeable of all standards, codes, ordinances, permits and regulations which affect every trade's completion, cost and time required and that all costs are included in his Bid Proposal.
D.
Responsibility: 1.
2.
E.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all subcontractors and suppliers and shall include in his bid and apportion all materials, labor and equipment to the several trades involved in accordance with all local customs, rules, regulations, jurisdictional awards, decisions and secure compliance to all parts of the specifications and drawings regardless of sectional inclusion in these specifications. Each electrical subcontractor and sub-subcontractor shall be responsible for all parts applicable to his trade in accordance with the specifications and drawings and for coordinating locations and arrangements of his work with all other relevant specifications, drawings, shop drawings and details.
Drawings and Specifications: 1.
Drawings and specifications and intended to supplement each other and all work specified or indicated on/in either shall be provided.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 0500 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
3.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangements of systems and work included in the contract and shall serve only as design drawings and not as working drawings for general layout of various equipment and systems. Drawings do not necessarily indicate every required offset, junction box, pull box, mounting support, access panel, etc. which shall be provided as required. Each subcontractor shall examine all drawings and specifications of his trade and drawings, shop drawings and field layouts of work of all other trades working on the project, including architectural, structural and mechanical. If any discrepancies occur between these various drawings or between these drawings and these specifications, he shall report same to the Engineer in writing and shall obtain written instructions for changes in construction. Should interferences develop during construction which cannot be avoided, the Engineer shall decide which work is to be relocated regardless of which was first installed. This work shall be performed at no extra cost to the Owners.
4. 5.
6.
Should drawings disagree in themselves or with the specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be provided. All schedules on the drawings or in the specifications are only for the convenience of the Contractor. The Contractor shall make his own count and, where fixtures and/or equipment are indicated on the drawings but not in the schedules, the Contractor shall provide like equipment and/or fixtures as are indicated for like rooms or used elsewhere on the project. Manufacturer's Model Numbers: a.
b.
7. F.
Wherever, on the drawings or specifications, that a manufacturer's catalog number of model or type designation is made, it is intended as a general qualification. It shall remain the Contractor's responsibility, before the ordering of any material, to determine the proper type or model with arrangement, mounting and accessories applicable for each location on the project. Approval of shop drawings by the Engineer does not obviate the Contractor's responsibility.
Drawings shall not be scaled for measurements and shall not serve as shop drawings.
Definitions: 1. 2.
3. 4.
Furnish: Supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar subsequent requirements. Install: Operations at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring applying, working to dimension, finishing, protection, cleaning and similar requirements. Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. Minimum Requirements: a.
b.
Indicated requirements are for a specific minimum acceptable level of quality as recognized in the industry. Actual work must comply, within specified tolerances, or may exceed minimums within reasonable limits. Refer uncertainties to the Engineer for decisions before proceeding.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 0500 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 5.
b.
7.
8.
G.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Abbreviations and Plural Words: a.
6.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Abbreviations, where not defined in the contract documents, will be interpreted to mean the normal construction industry terminology determined by recognized grammatical rules by the Engineer. Plural words will be interpreted as singular and singular words will be interpreted as plural where applicable for the context of the contract documents.
Raceway: Conduit, wireway, channels, boxes, fittings, hangers, supports and items necessary or required in connection with and/or relating to raceway to provide a complete installation. Concealed: Embedded in masonry or other construction below floor slabs, installed behind wall finishes, within double partitions or above hung ceilings, in trenches, tunnels or crawl spaces. NIC: Items and/or areas shown on the drawings or identified within these specifications with "NIC" shall be considered by this Contractor as "Not In Contract". As a result, this Contractor shall take no action on those items identified as such.
Substitutions and Changes: 1.
2.
When a material, method or product is listed, shown or scheduled by trade name or catalog number for a use, it shall be the basis of design. Other "similar" manufacturers may or may not be listed as "acceptable", provided that the specific item is comparable with the basis and intent of the design. Contractors shall base their bid proposals only on those items either: a. b.
3.
4.
Originally named, listed, shown or specified on/in the drawings/ specifications. Named, listed, and/or shown in an official addendum to the drawings/ specifications. All other manufacturers or catalog numbers shall be bid as a voluntary alternate only. Any Contractor choosing to base his bid proposal on any item and/or system not either originally named or named in an official addendum as "acceptable" does so at his own risk and may be required to furnish and install the originally named product and, if applicable, bear all of the costs involved with removing the unauthorized product.
Contractor shall be considered liable for all added costs both to himself and to others (including those costs as incurred by the Engineer for redesigning or redrawings) resultant from the substitution of products not originally specified. Contractor shall be responsible for the verification of adequate space (considering dimensions, required clearances, weights and roughing-in requirements) for the installation of any items or systems not originally specified. He shall be responsible for the timely advising of all other trades. He shall submit revised drawing layouts for the approval of the Engineer and shall not proceed without this approval.
1.3
STANDARDS, CODES AND PERMITS
A.
General: Compliance with standards, codes and permits shall be in accordance with General and Supplemental Conditions.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 0500 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Electrical Work: All work installed under Division 26 shall comply with the latest published edition of the applicable standards and codes of the following: ASA....American Standards Association ASTM...American Society for Testing Materials ANSI...American National Standards Institute NFPA...National Fire Protection Association UL.....Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. NEMA...National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NESC...National Electric Safety Code OSHA...Occupational Safety and Health Act BOCA...Building Officials and Code Administrators UBC....Uniform Building Codes NEC....National Electrical Code NECA...National Electrical Contractor's Association NEMA...National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
C.
All labor, material and equipment shall comply with all applicable: 1. 2.
City, county and state laws, ordinances, codes and regulations. Applicable rules and regulations as required by the Department of Consumer and Industry Services – Fire Safety Division.
D.
Excess Quantities and Sizes: Where quantities, sizes or other requirements on drawings or in specifications are in excess of code requirements, drawings or specifications shall govern and the specified item or system shall be furnished and installed.
E.
Conflicts: Where conflicts are discovered to exist between referenced standards or specifications, the more stringent requirements shall govern. No extra compensation for such compliance will be allowed.
F.
Notices and Payments: The Electrical Contractor shall give all notices, file all drawings, obtain all necessary approvals, obtain all permits, pay all fees, deposits and expenses required for installation of all work under this contract. Within ten (10) days after award of the contract, the Contractor shall show proof that such permits have been obtained and appropriate fees paid.
G.
Inspections and Certificates of Inspection: 1.
2.
H.
No work shall be covered or enclosed until work is tested in accordance with applicable codes and regulations and successful test witnessed and approved by authorized inspection authority. Provide for the Engineer's review evidence that the installation has been inspected and approved by the authorized governmental inspector having jurisdiction over that phase or system of work involved.
UL Labels: In general, all material used on this project shall be labeled or listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 0500 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submittals shall be in accordance with Division 1.
B.
Shop Drawings: 1.
2.
3.
4. 5.
6.
7.
8. C.
1.5
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
After the schedules of equipment and Subcontractors are submitted and approved, submit electronic shop drawings covering all equipment, systems and materials to be furnished and installed on this project. Shop drawing submittals shall at the time they are submitted to the Engineer for review, include signatures or stamps of Contractor (and Subcontractor, where applicable) certifying that he/they has/have inspected submittals and have coordinated required space, services and work of other trades for the equipment or system being submitted. Submit complete manufacturer's shop drawings of all equipment, accessories and controls, including (but not limited to) weights, dimensions, capacities, construction details, installation and maintenance instructions, wiring diagrams, available finishes, all applicable manufacturer's warranties and all details involving other trades. General catalog cuts without detailed engineering and installation details will not be accepted. Submittal sheets containing or showing items not applicable to the specific project must be clearly marked to show the equipment or system being submitted. Sheets not so marked will be returned unreviewed. Submittals on items or systems clearly belonging together (such as lighting fixtures) shall be submitted as a booklet or grouping, with each "set" containing components arranged in a logical sequence. The Engineer will not assemble such booklets but will rather return unsorted submittals unreviewed. Submittals shall be maximum size of 36" x 24". Engineer's review of shop drawing submittals is a free service to the Contractor only and, as such, shall not be construed to be a guarantee of compliance with or a relief of the required compliance with the basic responsibilities of the Contractor under the contract documents. Review of submittals shall not be considered to be an approval of changes in time or cost. After review, the Contractor shall provide information to all affected trades.
Extra Copies of Submittals: Refer to "Final Acceptance, Guarantees and Warranties" later in this Section for requirements of extra copies of shop drawings and operating and maintenance information. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
General: Delivery, storage, and handling shall be in accordance with the General and Supplementary General Conditions.
B.
Inspection: Inspect all items upon delivery and remove and replace all items impossible to repair so that they are equal and indistinguishable from new items.
C.
Protection: Protect electrical materials and products and installation work against dirt, water, or mechanical damage before, during, and after installation.
D.
Repairs: All damage inflicted prior to date of final acceptance shall be repaired or replaced in a
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 0500 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
manner acceptable to the Engineer at no cost to the Owner by the Contractor or Subcontractor whose work is involved. 1.6 A.
STANDARDS General: 1.
2.
3. 4. 5.
6. 1.7 A.
All electrical material, equipment, and accessories installed under this project shall be new and shall conform to all applicable standards, requirements, and codes and all applicable local, state, and federal specifications. All products shall be of established manufacturers regularly engaged in the making of the type of materials to be provided. All products shall be complete with all parts, accessories, supports, trims, connections, etc., reasonably incidental to the product and necessary for installation. All products shall be properly tested, cleaned, adjusted, and put in complete working order ready for service before acceptance will be considered. All electrical work shall be installed in a first-class workmanlike manner. Due to the difficulty in showing the exact locations on the drawings of all raceways, offsets, boxes, fittings, or accessories, coordinate the installation with all trades and, where conflicts occur, obtain the Engineer’s approval before installation. Failure to do this shall result in rework to meet the Engineer’s approval at no additional cost to the Owner’s or Engineer’s All conductor and raceway sizes shall meet National Electrical Code (NEC) requirements.
INSPECTION AND PREPARATION General: 1. 2.
Perform inspections in accordance with Division 1, Coordination and Inspections. Prior to starting his work, the Electrical Contractor shall: a. b. c. d.
3. 4.
B.
2.
A.
Do not proceed with the work until acceptable conditions have been provided. The commencement of work by the Electrical Contractor shall signify the Electrical Contractor’s acceptance of all existing conditions.
Laying Out of the Work: 1.
1.8
Examine all conditions of all areas in which his work is to be installed. Verify all dimensions indicated of the drawings. Make all field measurements required for his work. Report, in writing to the Engineer, any and all discrepancies or required corrections.
Lay out work and be responsible for lines, elevations, and measurements for installation of the work. Construct work in conformity with lines and elevations as indicated on the drawings. Record all data on project record documents set.
BASIC INSTALLATION METHODS Equipment Clearance: Coordinate mechanical and electrical equipment locations to ensure that
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 0500 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
adequate clearance for installation, inspection, and required service is provided. Ensure that adequate clearance is maintained around equipment as required by the National Electrical Code and all applicable state and local codes. B.
General Supports: Provide all necessary angles, channels, brackets, or Unistrut supplementary steel as required for adequate support of all raceway, specialties, and equipment which is hung or mounted above the floor. Secure written approval from the Engineer before welding or bolting to steel framing or anchoring to concrete structure.
C.
Wall, Floor, and Ceiling Openings: 1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
D.
Place all sleeves and advise affected trades of details and templates of all openings necessary for the installation of the electrical work. Cracks and rough edges left following installation of the equipment shall be caulked, covered, or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Do not locate any sleeves in any structural member without written approval of the Engineer. Use rotary type drilling tools and concrete cutting saws to cut concrete and masonry walls. Do not use torches for cutting steel. Where piping or equipment is suspended from a metal deck, use “Ramset” or “Hilti” equipment as required. Floor sleeves shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit with the bottom end flush and caulked with glass wool; sealed at the top and bottom. Wall sleeves shall be the same as floor sleeves except that they shall be installed so as to be flush on both sides of the wall. All sleeves shall have an inside diameter one (1) inch larger than the outside diameter of the raceway passing through them. Where exposed pipes pass through floors, walls, or ceilings, this contractor shall be responsible for repairs and finish of all holes placed. All conduits penetrating through slabs shall be waterproofed and sealed to prevent the transfer of water. Use a grout mixture to seal the concrete or “Duxseal” to seal the sleeves. Where conduits and sleeves pass through fire rated partitions, floors, and/or walls, the space between the pipe and the sleeve shall be sealed with an approved material and system such as 3M Fire Barrier Penetration Sealing system as manufactured by the Electro-Products Division/3M, St. Paul, MN 55144.
Cutting and Patching: 1. 2.
Cutting and patching shall be in accordance with Division 1, Cutting and Patching, and this section. Cutting and patching required by the installing Contractor or Subcontractor shall be performed by the installer under the direct supervision of the General Contractor. Patching shall be, in general, to the same standards of finish and appearance as the adjacent undisturbed material. Should it be necessary to achieve this condition, the installer shall employ those specialty workmen as may be required at no additional cost to the Owners.
E.
Access Panels:
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 0500 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
Items of equipment which require accessibility, adjustment, maintenance, or observation such as junction boxes, controls, etc., shall be located and arranged for ready access either directly or through the use of access doors.
2.
Notify the Engineer and all affected trades where and of what size and/or configuration access doors will be installed. Secure the approval of the Engineer for these locations and configurations. Such access doors/panels shall meet or exceed the fire barrier rating of the floor, wall, or partition into which they are inserted. Access doors or panels, where required, shall be provided by the Contractor or Subcontractor whose equipment requires the access.
4.
Protection: 1.
2.
G.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
1.
3.
F.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Each Contractor or Subcontractor shall protect his work, fixtures, equipment, and materials at all times and be responsible for all damages caused either directly or indirectly by his workmen or by project conditions. All raceway openings shall be kept tightly closed with caps or plugs (not paper) during installation whenever openings are left unattended.
General Cleaning: 1.
2. 3.
4.
5.
It shall be the duty of this Contractor to keep the premises free of accumulations of surplus material or rubbish caused by his operations and/or the operations of his Subcontractors. Combustible rubbish and debris shall be removed immediately. The trades shall remove their rubbish and debris from the project site promptly upon its accumulation; in no event later than the Friday of each week. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all fixtures, equipment, boxes, and raceways. All patching, repairing, and painting required of surfaces damaged or allowed to deteriorate in the performance of this work made by this Contractor, where directed by the Engineer, at this Contractor’s expense. If a Contractor does not remove rubbish or clean the systems as specified above, the Construction Manager reserves the right to have the work performed by others, with the cost back-charged to the Contractor who made the removal or cleaning necessary. Clean all fixtures, boxes, controls, devices, cabinet interiors, enclosures, and other applicable equipment and accessories free of all foreign material.
1.9
FINAL ACCEPTANCE, GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
A.
General: Final acceptance of the systems, guarantees and warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions (Division 1), this section and other applicable sections.
B.
Final Acceptance: Final acceptance of the systems will be made only after final punch list completion and receipt at the Engineer's office of: . . .
All guarantees and/or warranties. Operating and maintenance instructions. Record drawings.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 0500 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
. Certificates of Inspection. . Test reports. . Health Department approval. . Required affidavits for State Fire Marshal. Guarantees and Warranties: Guarantees shall be in accordance with the applicable specification section and the following: 1.
2. 3.
4.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
All labor, materials and equipment shall be guaranteed by the Contractor and/or warranted by the manufacturer for one (1) calendar year after date of final acceptance, except where specific, longer periods are specified. Contractor shall secure such warranties from all suppliers. Acceptance data of substantial completion or Owner occupancy shall be as determined by Engineer. See "General Requirements" Division 1. Make all necessary alterations, repairs, adjustments and replacements during guarantee period as directed by Engineer to comply with drawings and specifications. Such work shall be at no cost to the Owner. Repair or replacements made under guarantee shall bear one (1) year extended guarantee from date of acceptance of repair or replacement.
Operating and Maintenance Instructions and Manuals: 1.
Submit to the Engineer operating and maintenance instructions, including the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2.
3. 4. 5.
Periodic maintenance items. Seasonal maintenance items. Preventative maintenance items. List of service agents for all major equipment. List of suppliers for replacement/service parts.
Provide the service of factory-trained personnel for such period(s) of time as required to instruct and train the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance procedures for all major pieces of equipment, i.e., lighting control panel, variable speed drives, etc. Provide instructions to the Owner on locations of hand valves, fire dampers and other concealed or partially concealed items, etc. Provide instructions to the Owner on the location and function of all control devices, fuses, disconnects, etc. A letter from the installing Contractor, certified by the Owner, shall be submitted to the Engineer when all instructions have been given.
E.
Operating Personnel and Maintenance: This Contractor shall provide operating personnel and required maintenance for building equipment being used by him, such as for temporary electricity, etc. After all or portions of the equipment or systems have been granted a date of substantial completion, the Contractor shall provide operating personnel and maintenance for such equipment or systems.
F.
Record Drawings: 1.
Provide a clean and neat set of record drawings which shall show all changes, all main control devices, all disconnecting means, all buried conduits (with dimensioned references to
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 0500 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
2. 3.
G.
1.10 A.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
building lines and grades). Record drawings shall be recorded daily. Record all elevations and locations prior to concealment. Provide these drawings to the Engineer for his transmittal to the Owner for his use.
Affidavits: The Contractor(s) shall submit notarized affidavits as required by the State Fire Marshal regarding the use of approved plastic materials required to complete this work. SUPERVISION This Contractor shall have in charge of the work at all times during construction a thoroughly competent Field Superintendent with long experience in the work to be installed under this contract. Any person not deemed capable by the Engineer shall be replaced immediately, upon the request of the Engineer, by some person who is satisfactory to the Engineer. After such person has been assigned, he shall not be withdrawn or reassigned without the consent of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 0500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 0500 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 26 0510 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.3
Electrical equipment coordination and installation. Sleeves for raceways and cables. Sleeve seals. Common electrical installation requirements.
DEFINITIONS A.
ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
C.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4.
To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
C.
Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
D.
Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, mechanical, and architectural items, so equipment and systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful interoperability.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
26 0510 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES A.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B.
Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.
D.
Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
2.3
SLEEVE SEALS A.
Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1.
Manufacturers: a. b. c. d.
2. 3. 4.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc. Calpico, Inc. Metraflex Co. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
26 0510 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
C.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.
D.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
E.
Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A.
Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
B.
Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
C.
Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
D.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
E.
Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness: 1. 2.
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
F.
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.
G.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
H.
Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
I.
Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require a different clearance.
J.
Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
K.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
26 0510 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
L.
Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with Division 7 Section "ThroughPenetration Firestop Systems."
M.
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
N.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
O.
Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.3
SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A.
Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.
B.
Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.4
FIRESTOPPING A.
3.5
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect installed sleeve and sleeve-seal installations and associated firestopping for damage and faulty work.
END OF SECTION 26 0510
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
26 0510 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 26 0519 – LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A. 1.3
This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A.
Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4.
American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. General Cable Corporation. Senator Wire & Cable Company. Southwire Company.
B.
Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, and ratings.
C.
Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 5; stranded conductor.
D.
Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN complying with NEMA WC 5.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 0519 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A.
Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International. Hubbell/Anderson. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division.
Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS A.
Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
B.
Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
C.
Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
D.
Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and in Crawlspaces: Type THHNTHWN, single conductors in raceway.
E.
Exposed Branch Circuits, including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
F.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway and Type MC cable where applicable.
G.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: single conductors in raceway.
H.
Fire Alarm Circuits: Power-limited, fire-protective, plenum rated, signaling circuit cable.
I.
Control Circuits: Plenum rated cable.
3.2
Type THHN-THWN,
INSTALLATION A.
Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C.
Use pulling means including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 0519 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
D.
Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.
E.
Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
F.
Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section “Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.3
CONNECTIONS A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
B.
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1.
C. 3.4
Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing: 1. 2.
After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.
END OF SECTION 26 0519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 0519 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.
Comply with UL 467.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r.
Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. Boggs, Inc. Chance/Hubbell. Copperweld Corp. Dossert Corp. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical. Galvan Industries, Inc. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co. Ideal Industries, Inc. ILSCO. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries. Lightning Master Corp. Lyncole XIT Grounding. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0526 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 s. t. u. v. w. 2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. Robbins Lightning, Inc. Salisbury: W. H. Salisbury & Co. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A.
For insulated conductors, comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
B.
Material: Copper.
C.
Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.
D.
Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow.
E.
Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
F.
Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following: 1. 2. 3.
H.
Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.3
Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
CONNECTOR PRODUCTS A.
Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.
B.
Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.
C.
Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written instructions.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0526 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
GROUNDING ELECTRODES A.
Ground Rods: Copper-Clad 1.
Size: 3/4 by 120 inches in diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
APPLICATION A.
Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.
B.
In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
C.
Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections.
D.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.
3.2
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A.
Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated.
B.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the following items, in addition to those required by NEC: 1. 2. 3. 4.
3.3
Single-phase motor. Three-phase motor. Flexible raceway runs. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
INSTALLATION A.
Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes. 1. 2.
B.
Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0526 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
C.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.
D.
Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
E.
Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.
F.
Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided-type bonding straps.
G.
Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff valve.
3.4
CONNECTIONS A.
General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
B.
Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
C.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.
D.
Non-contact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0526 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically non-continuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated. E.
Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
F.
Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.
G.
Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.
3.5
GRADING AND PLANTING A.
Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section. Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Comply with Division 2 Section "Landscaping." Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as indicated.
END OF SECTION 26 0526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0526 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 26 0533- RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.
1.3
Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for supports, anchors, and identification products. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box service fittings.
DEFINITIONS A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
C.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
D.
LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
E.
LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.
F.
RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0533 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.
METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A.
Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc. Alflex Inc. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. Electri-Flex Co. Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal. Wheatland Tube Co.
B.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C.
IMC: ANSI C80.6.
D.
EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3. 1.
Fittings: Steel Set-Screw
E.
FMC: Aluminum.
F.
LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
G.
Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials.
2.3
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A.
Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
American International. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. Arnco Corp. Cantex Inc. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. Condux International. ElecSYS, Inc. Electri-Flex Co.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0533 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
B.
RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC.
C.
RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
D.
LFNC: UL 1660.
2.4
METAL WIREWAYS A.
Manufacturers: 1. 2.
Hoffman. Square D.
B.
Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 1.
C.
Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
D.
Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70.
E.
Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.
F.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.5
NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS A.
Manufacturers: 1. 2.
Hoffman. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
B.
Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with no holes or knockouts. Cover is gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections are flanged, with stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.
C.
Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.
D.
Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0533 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 E. 2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70. SURFACE RACEWAYS
A.
Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with manufacturer's standard prime coating and enamel finish. 1.
Manufacturers: a. b. c. d.
B. 2.7
Airey-Thompson Sentinel Lighting; Wiremold Company (The). Thomas & Betts Corporation. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.
Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that match and mate with raceways. BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A.
Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. Hoffman. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. Thomas & Betts Corporation. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
B.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
C.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D.
Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.
E.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
F.
Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
G.
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. 1. 2.
Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0533 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 H.
2.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. FACTORY FINISHES
A.
Finish: For raceway, enclosure or cabinet components provide manufacturer's standard primecoat finish ready for field painting.
B.
Finish: For raceway, enclosure or cabinet components provide manufacturer's standard grey paint applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
RACEWAY APPLICATION A.
Outdoors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Exposed: Rigid steel or IMC. Concealed: Rigid steel or IMC. Underground, Single Run: Rigid steel Underground, Grouped: PVC Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
Indoors: 1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
Exposed: EMT. Concealed: EMT. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows: a.
Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel.
C.
Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
D.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1.
Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0533 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
INSTALLATION A.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
B.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
C.
Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
D.
Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.
E.
Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F.
Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
H.
Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave at least 2 inches of concrete cover. 1. 2. 3. 4.
I.
Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.
Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight. 1.
K.
Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Change from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor.
Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible. 1. 2.
J.
Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.
Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
Terminations: 1.
Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0533 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.
L.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
M.
Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements.
N.
Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. 2.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
O.
Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections.
P.
Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
Q.
Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.
R.
Set floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
S.
Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.
3.3
PROTECTION A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. 2.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0533 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
CLEANING A.
After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION 26 0533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0533 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 26 0553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1.3
Identification for raceway. Underground-line warning tape. Warning labels and signs. Instruction signs. Equipment identification labels. Miscellaneous identification products.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
1.4
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
B.
Color for Printed Legend:
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0553 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Power Circuits: Black letters on an orange field. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable.
C.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
D.
Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
E.
Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
F.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use.
2.2
UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE A.
Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape. 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.3
Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line.
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A.
Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B.
Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.
D.
Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted, celluloseacetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.
E.
Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1.
Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0553 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
INSTRUCTION SIGNS A.
Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 1. 2. 3.
2.5
Engraved legend with black letters on white face Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A.
2.6
Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. Tensile Strength: 50 lb, minimum. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.
Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
APPLICATION A.
Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A: Identify with orange self-adhesive vinyl label.
B.
Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems with color-coded, self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
C.
Fire Alarm System: Red. Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue. Security System: Blue and yellow. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow. Control Wiring: Green and red.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors No. 1/0 AWG and larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use color-coding conductor tape and write-on tags. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0553 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
D.
Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape and write-on tags. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number.
E.
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections. 1. 2. 3.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
F.
Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
G.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply baked-enamel warning signs. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 1.
H.
Instruction Signs: 1.
I.
Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.
Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1.
Labeling Instructions: a.
b. c.
Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 11/2-inch-high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0553 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Equipment to Be Labeled: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.
3.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. Disconnect switches. Enclosed circuit breakers. Push-button stations. Contactors. Voice and data cable terminal equipment. Television/audio components, racks, and controls. Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for signal and control functions.
INSTALLATION A.
Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E.
Attach non-adhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate.
F.
System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.
G.
Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. 1. 2.
Color shall be factory applied. Colors for 208Y/120V Circuits: a. b. c.
3.
Phase A: Black. Phase B: Red. Phase C: Blue.
Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0553 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
H.
Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
I.
Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.
END OF SECTION 26 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 0553 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 26 0923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following lighting control devices: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1.
1.3
Time switches. Outdoor photoelectric switches. Multipole contactors.
Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers and manual light switches.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
LED: Light-emitting diode. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Field quality-control test reports.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
26 0923 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
GENERAL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A.
2.3
Line-Voltage Surge Protection: An integral part of the devices for 120- and 277-V solid-state equipment. For devices without integral line-voltage surge protection, field-mounting surge protection shall comply with IEEE C62.41 and with UL 1449. TIME SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Digital Time Switches: Electronic, solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display complying with UL 917. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
2.4
Intermatic, Inc. Paragon Electric Co. TORK.
Contact Configuration: DPST, as indicated. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac. Program: Single channel, 2 on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for each day of the week. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on and off function of a program on selected channels. Astronomical Time: All channels. Battery Backup: For schedules and time clock.
OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES A.
Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Intermatic, Inc. Paragon Electric Co. TORK.
Description: Solid state, with DPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, microprocessor input, and complying with UL 773A. 1.
2. 3. 4.
Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of photocell to prevent fixed light sources from causing turn-off. Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor type, complying with IEEE C62.41 for Category A1 locations. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the North sky exposure.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
26 0923 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
MULTIPOLE CONTACTORS A.
Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. 1.
2. 2.6
Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co. Cutler-Hammer; Eaton Corporation. Square “D” Corporation Siemens
Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current). Control-Coil Voltage: Match control power source.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A.
Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG, complying with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
WIRING INSTALLATION A.
Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch.
B.
Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Install field-mounting transient voltage suppressors for lighting control devices in Category A locations that do not have integral line-voltage surge protection.
D.
Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
F.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
26 0923 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
IDENTIFICATION A.
Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B.
Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. 2.
After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements. Operational Test: Verify actuation of each sensor and adjust time delays.
B.
Remove and replace lighting control devices where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
C.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.4
ADJUSTING A.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
END OF SECTION 26 0923
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
26 0923 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1.
1.3
Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
DEFINITIONS A.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B.
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C.
RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
D.
RMS: Root mean square.
E.
SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1.
Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. b. c. d.
2. C.
Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
PANELBOARDS
26 2416 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
D.
Panelboard Schedules: balancing.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following: 1. 2.
1.5
For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of panelboards and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
D.
Comply with NEMA PB 1.
E.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2.
B.
Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. 2.
1.7
Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
Ambient temperatures within limits specified. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.
B.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
PANELBOARDS
26 2416 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
Keys: Six spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURER A.
Manufacturer: 1.
Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories: a. b.
2.2
Square D. Cutler Hammer
MANUFACTURED UNITS A.
Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1. 1.
Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. b. c.
2. 3. 4. B.
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded to box.
Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material. 1. 2. 3.
D.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame, inside panelboard door.
Phase and Ground Buses: 1. 2.
C.
Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
PANELBOARDS
26 2416 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING A.
UL label indicating series-connected rating with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices. Include size and type of upstream device allowable, branch devices allowable, and UL series-connected short-circuit rating.
B.
Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.
2.4
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.
B.
Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
2.5
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: currents. 1.
2. 3.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting. Electronic trip-unit circuit breakers shall have RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug; and with the following field-adjustable settings: a. b. c. d.
4. 5.
6.
UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
Instantaneous trip. Long- and short-time pickup levels. Long- and short-time time adjustments. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiterstyle fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5-mA trip sensitivity.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Mount top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish.
PANELBOARDS
26 2416 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers. 1.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
E.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
F.
Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
G.
Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C.
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.3
CONNECTIONS A.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
B.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. 2.
B.
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. Test continuity of each circuit.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1.
2.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
PANELBOARDS
26 2416 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 1. 2.
3. 4. 3.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.
CLEANING A.
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION 26 2416
PANELBOARDS
26 2416 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 26 2726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.3
Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters, and isolated-ground receptacles. Single- and double-pole snap switches and dimmer switches. Device wall plates. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies.
DEFINITIONS A.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B.
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
D.
RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E.
UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5
COORDINATION A.
Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 1.
Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
WIRING DEVICES
26 2726 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
Wiring Devices: a. b. c. d.
2.
Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: a. b. c.
3.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. Wiremold Company (The).
Poke-Through, Floor Service Outlets and Telephone/Power Poles: a.
2.2
Crouse-Hinds/Cooper Industries, Inc.; Arrow Hart Wiring Devices. EGS/Appleton Electric Company. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co./Hubbell Incorporated.
Multioutlet Assemblies: a. b.
4.
Bryant Electric, Inc./Hubbell Subsidiary. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
RECEPTACLES A.
Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles: 596G, and UL 498.
B.
Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: Specification Grade, Heavy-Duty grade.
C.
Straight-Blade Receptacles: Specification grade.
D.
GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, feed-through type, Specification Grade, Heavy-Duty grade, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and UL 943. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch-deep outlet box without an adapter.
E.
Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Straight blade, Specification Grade, Heavy-Duty grade, duplex receptacle, with equipment grounding contacts connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. 1. 2.
Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C-
Devices: Listed and labeled as isolated-ground receptacles. Isolation Method: Integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.
WIRING DEVICES
26 2726 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PENDANT CORD/CONNECTOR DEVICES A.
Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector, NEMA WD 6, Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, Heavy-Duty grade. 1. 2.
2.4
Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.
CORD AND PLUG SETS A.
Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. 1.
2. 2.5
Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.
SWITCHES A.
Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20.
B.
Snap Switches: Specification Grade, Heavy-Duty grade, quiet type.
C.
Combination Switch and Receptacle: Both devices in a single gang unit with plaster ears and removable tab connector that permit separate or common feed connection. 1. 2.
2.6
Switch: 20 A, 120/277-V ac. Receptacle: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-15R.
WALL PLATES A.
Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.7
Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch-thick, satin-finished #302, non-magnetic stainless steel. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. Material for Wet Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations". Covers shall be raintight while-in-use.
FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS A.
Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
B.
Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
WIRING DEVICES
26 2726 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
C.
Service Plate: Rectangular solid brass with satin finish.
D.
Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 Category 5 jacks for UTP cable.
2.8
POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES A.
Description: Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service outlet assembly. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.9
Service Outlet Assembly: Flush type with four simplex receptacles and space for four RJ45 jacks. Size: Selected to fit nominal 4-inch cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 4-inch cored openings and reestablish fire rating of floor. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors; and a minimum of four, 4-pair, Category 5 voice and data communication cables.
MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES A.
Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.
B.
Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish.
C.
Wire: No. 12 AWG.
2.10 A.
FINISHES Color: 1. 2.
Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: As specified above, with orange triangle on face.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.
B.
Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' written instructions.
WIRING DEVICES
26 2726 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
C.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
D.
Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.
E.
Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION A.
Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1.
3.3
Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on inside face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
CONNECTIONS A.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
B.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. 2.
B.
After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 26 2726
WIRING DEVICES
26 2726 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 26 2813 - FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches and enclosed controllers. Plug-fuse adapters for use in Edison-base, plug-fuse sockets. Spare-fuse cabinets.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
E.
Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
1.5
Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more than 100 deg F apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings. COORDINATION
A. 1.6
Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels. EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
FUSES
Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.
26 2813 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.2
Cooper Bussmann, Inc. Edison Fuse, Inc. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. Littelfuse, Inc.
CARTRIDGE FUSES A.
2.3
Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages. PLUG FUSES
A. 2.4
Characteristics: UL 248-11, nonrenewable plug fuses; 125-V ac. PLUG-FUSE ADAPTERS
A.
Characteristics: Adapters for using Type S, rejection-base plug fuses in Edison-base fuseholders or sockets; ampere ratings matching fuse ratings; irremovable once installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine fuses before installation. damaged.
B.
Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.
C.
Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.
D.
Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically
FUSE APPLICATIONS A.
Cartridge Fuses: 1. 2.
FUSES
Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay
26 2813 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Control Circuits: Class CC, time delay.
Plug Fuses: 1. 2.
3.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Motor Branch Circuits: Edison-base type, dual-element time delay. Other Branch Circuits: Edison-base type, dual-element time delay
INSTALLATION A.
Install fuses in fusible devices. removing fuse.
B.
Install plug-fuse adapters in Edison-base fuseholders and sockets. Ensure that adapters are irremovable once installed.
C.
Install spare-fuse cabinet(s).
3.4
Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
IDENTIFICATION A.
Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.
END OF SECTION 26 2813
FUSES
26 2813 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 26 5100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.
1.3
Interior lighting fixtures with lamps and ballasts. Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces. Emergency lighting units. Exit signs. Accessories.
Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.
DEFINITIONS A.
BF: Ballast factor. Ratio of light output of a given lamp(s) operated by the subject ballast to the light output of the same lamp(s) when operated on an ANSI reference circuit.
B.
CRI: Color rendering index.
C.
CU: Coefficient of utilization.
D.
LER: Luminaire efficiency rating, which is calculated according to NEMA LE 5. This value can be estimated from photometric data using the following formula: 1.
E. 1.4
LER is equal to the product of total rated lamp lumens times BF times luminaire efficiency, divided by input watts.
RCR: Room cavity ratio. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 5100 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Physical description of fixture, including dimensions and verification of indicated parameters. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling fixtures. Furnish data required in "Submittals" Article in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." Sound Performance Data: For air-handling fixtures. Indicate sound power level and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers and Grilles." Lamps.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.
C.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
D.
Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by product manufacturer.
E.
Source quality-control test reports.
F.
Field quality-control test reports.
G.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1.
H. 1.5
Catalog data for each fixture. Include the diffuser, ballast, and lamps installed in that fixture.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs.
1.6
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, firesuppression system, and partition assemblies.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 5100 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
WARRANTY A.
Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
B.
Special Warranty for Fluorescent Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. 2.
C.
Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Ballasts: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1.
1.8
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.
Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. Battery and Charger Data: One for each emergency lighting unit. Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1.
Products: specified.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
26 5100 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL A.
Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
B.
Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A.
C.
Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
D.
HID Fixtures: NEMA LE 5B.
E.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
F.
Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
G.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
H.
Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4.
I.
White Surfaces: 85 percent. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. b.
2.
2.3
Where LER is specified, test according to
Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 1.
J.
Comply with UL 1598.
Lens Thickness: scheduled. UV stabilized.
At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is
Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: A component of fixture assembly. Suppress conducted electromagnetic-interference as required by MIL-STD-461D. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter. LIGHTING FIXTURES
A.
See the “Lighting Fixture Schedule” on the drawings.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 5100 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS A.
Description: Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2.
B.
Electronic ballasts for linear lamps shall include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
C.
Type: Electronic. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. Flicker: Less than 5 percent. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7. Electronic Ballast Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category A1 locations. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
Ballasts for compact lamps in nonrecessed fixtures shall include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4.
E.
Comply with NEMA C82.11. Ballast Type: Instant start, unless otherwise indicated. Programmed Start: Ballasts with two-step lamp starting to extend life of frequently started lamps. Sound Rating: A. Total harmonic distortion rating of less than 10 percent according to NEMA C82.11. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.
Ballasts for compact lamps in recessed fixtures shall have the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
D.
Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output except for emergency lamps powered by in-fixture battery-packs. Externally fused with slow-blow type rated between 2.65 and 3.0 times the line current.
Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. Ballast Coil Temperature: 65 deg C, maximum. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category A1 locations. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
Ballasts for dimmer-controlled fixtures shall comply with general and fixture-related requirements above for electronic ballasts and the following features: 1. 2.
Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 5100 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. F.
2.5
Compatibility: indicated.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming system
Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic-Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for consumer equipment. HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS
A.
General: Comply with NEMA C82.4 and UL 1029. Shall include the following features, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4.
B. 2.6
Type: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F Minus 30 deg C for single-lamp ballasts. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F40 deg C. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.
Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to minimize audible fixture noise. EXIT SIGNS
A. 2.7
Refer to sheets E113, E114, E115 and E116. EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A. 2.8
Refer to sheets E113, E114, E115 and E116. FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A.
Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with Federal toxic characteristic leaching procedure test, and yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter, when tested according to NEMA LL 1.
B.
T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches610 mm, 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
2.9
HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMPS A.
Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, wattage and burning position as scheduled, CRI 65 (minimum), and color temperature 4000.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 5100 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.10
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A.
Comply with Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B.
Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.
C.
Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D.
Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated, 12 gauge.
E.
Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch-minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
F.
Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
G.
Aircraft Cable Support: Use cable, anchorages, and intermediate supports recommended by fixture manufacturer.
2.11 A.
FINISHES Fixtures: Manufacturers' standard, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.
2.12
Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer, free of defects. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Provide services of a qualified, independent testing and inspecting agency to factory test fixtures with ballasts and lamps; certify results for electrical ratings and photometric data.
B.
Factory test fixtures with ballasts and lamps; certify results for electrical ratings and photometric data.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture.
B.
Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support. 1. 2.
Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 5100 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.
C.
3.2
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.
Suspended Fixture Support: As follows: 1. 2. 3.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Continuous Rows: Suspend from cable.
Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities. CONNECTIONS
A.
3.3
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B.
Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.
C.
Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify normal transfer to battery power source and retransfer to normal.
D.
Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.
E.
Corroded Fixtures: During warranty period, replace fixtures that show any signs of corrosion.
END OF SECTION 26 5100
INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 5100 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 26 5600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.3
Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. Poles and accessories.
Section 26 5100 "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings.
DEFINITIONS A.
CCT: Correlated color temperature.
B.
CRI: Color-rendering index.
C.
LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
D.
Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.
E.
Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.
F.
Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.
1.4
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION A.
Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.
B.
Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.
C.
Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M Ice Load Map.
D.
Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire and banners and banner arms, calculated and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M. 1.
Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet high or less is 100 mph. a.
Wind Importance Factor: 1.0
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 5600 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 b. c. 1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Minimum Design Life: 25 years Velocity Conversion Factors: 1.0
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.6
Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. Luminaire materials. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for components involved.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.
B.
Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.
C.
Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.
1.9
WARRANTY A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage. 1. 2. 3.
Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 5600 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
2.2
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES
A.
Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
C.
Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
D.
Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
E.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.
F.
Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.
G.
Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
H.
Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.
I.
Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.
J.
Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. 2.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 5600 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.
4.
2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS A.
Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M. 1.
2.
Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis.
B.
Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components. 1. 2. 3.
Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: fabrication unless otherwise indicated. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.
Hot-dip galvanized after
D.
Handhole: Oval-shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches, with cover secured by stainless-steel captive screws.
E.
Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
F.
Breakaway Supports: Frangible breakaway supports, tested by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, according to AASHTO LTS-4-M.
2.4
ALUMINUM POLES A.
Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063T6 with access handhole in pole wall.
B.
Poles: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 5052-H34 marine sheet alloy with access handhole in pole wall. 1.
Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway support.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 5600 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
C.
Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.
D.
Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, with pole and adapter fittings of cast aluminum. Adapter fitting welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with stainless-steel bolts. 1. 2.
Tapered oval cross section, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire. Finish: Same as pole
E.
Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
F.
Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. 2. 3.
4.
2.5
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
POLE ACCESSORIES A.
Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and nuts. Finish same as pole.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION A.
Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. 1.
B. 3.2
Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.
Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. POLE INSTALLATION
A.
Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 5600 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and underground features unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: 1. 2.
Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet Trees: 10 feet from tree trunk.
60 inches Water, Gas, Electric,
C.
Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D.
Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level recommended by pole manufacturer. 1. 2. 3. 4.
E. 3.3
Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout firmly packed to fill space. Install base covers unless otherwise indicated. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch-diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.
Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable). CORROSION PREVENTION
A.
Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.
B.
Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 26 0533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch-thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.
3.4
GROUNDING A.
Ground metal poles and support structures according to Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. 2.
B.
Install grounding electrode for each pole unless otherwise indicated. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding system.
Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. 2.
Install grounding electrode for each pole. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 5600 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B.
Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source. 1.
Verify operation of photoelectric controls.
END OF SECTION 26 5600
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
26 5600 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 27 0528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
B.
Related Requirements: 1.
1.3
Metal conduits and fittings. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. Optical-fiber-cable pathways and fittings. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters. Surface pathways. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.
Section 26 0533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate adapters serving electrical systems.
DEFINITIONS A.
ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.
B.
GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
C.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A.
General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings: 1. 2.
Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with TIA-569-B.
B.
GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
C.
ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.
D.
IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 0528 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
E.
EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
F.
Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. 2.
Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. Fittings for EMT: a. b.
3.
4. G.
2.2
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Material: Steel. Type: Setscrew.
Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL-467, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A.
General Requirements for Nonmetallic Conduits and Fittings: 1. 2.
Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with TIA-569-B.
B.
Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.
C.
Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.
D.
RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.
E.
Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
F.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
G.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.3
METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A.
Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 0528 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with TIA-569-B.
B.
Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
C.
Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4
NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A.
General Requirements for Nonmetallic Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: 1. 2.
Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with TIA-569-B.
B.
Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have stainlesssteel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.
C.
Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners.
D.
Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
E.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
F.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.5
SURFACE PATHWAYS A.
General Requirements for Surface Pathways: 1. 2.
B.
Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with TIA-569-B.
Surface Metal Pathways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 0528 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A.
General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: 1. 2.
Comply with TIA-569-B. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
B.
Sheet-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
C.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D.
Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.
E.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
F.
Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
G.
Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.
H.
Gangable boxes are allowed.
I.
Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
J.
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.
Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Nonmetallic Enclosures: a. b.
3. K.
Material: Plastic. Finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.
Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Cabinets: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 0528 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PATHWAY APPLICATION A.
Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3.
Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: IMC. Pathway locations include the following: a. b. c. d.
4. 5.
Loading dock. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. Mechanical rooms. Gymnasiums
Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC.
B.
Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. Minimum size for optical-fiber cables is 1 inch.
C.
Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location. 1. 2.
3.
Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. EMT: Use setscrew or steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
D.
Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
E.
Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.
F.
Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
B.
Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.
C.
Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.
D.
Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 0528 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
E.
Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical-fiber cables.
F.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
G.
Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
H.
Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. 2.
Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.
I.
Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
J.
Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.
K.
Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.
L.
Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
M.
Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
N.
Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.
O.
Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use.
P.
Surface Pathways: 1. 2. 3.
Install surface pathway for surface telecommunications outlet boxes only where indicated on Drawings. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 0528 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Q.
Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
R.
Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points: 1. 2. 3.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
S.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.
T.
Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1.
2.
Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a.
3.
4. 5.
Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change.
Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
U.
Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.
V.
Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
W.
Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 0528 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
X.
Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
Y.
Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.
Z.
Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
AA. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 3.3
SLEEVE AND PENETRATIONS A.
3.4
SLEEVE-SEAL
INSTALLATION
FOR
COMMUNICATIONS
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 27 0544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling." FIRESTOPPING
A. 3.5
Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. PROTECTION
A.
Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration. 1. 2.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 27 0528
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 0528 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 27 0544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Sleeves for pathway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. Sleeve-seal systems. Sleeve-seal fittings. Grout. Silicone sealants.
Related Requirements: 1.
Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fireresistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SLEEVES A.
Wall Sleeves: 1. 2.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
C.
PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
D.
Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
E.
Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING
27 0544 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Material: Galvanized-steel sheet. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. b.
2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A.
Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable. 1. 2. 3.
2.3
Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS A.
2.4
Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. GROUT
A.
Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-firerated walls or floors.
B.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
C.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.5
SILICONE SEALANTS A.
Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. 1. 2. 3.
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated. Sealant shall have VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING
27 0544 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: 1.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: a.
b.
2. 3. 4.
D.
2.
3.2
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pathway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1.
E.
Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants." Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.
Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at pathway entries into building.
B.
Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING
27 0544 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION A.
Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B.
Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C.
Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
END OF SECTION 27 0544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING
27 0544 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 27 1500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
1.3
UTP cabling. Multiuser telecommunications outlet assemblies. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. Cabling system identification products. Cable management system.
Project Summary: Contractor responsibilities are as indicated in the Systems Plans and as outlined within this specification. Project includes, but is not limited to providing cabling for sound, data communications, sign system, television systems and specialty systems as indicated on the plans. Contractor shall make terminations and provide plates/jacks at system point of use locations, cables shall be run back to equipment rack and labeled for termination by Owner's Technician or Owners specialty systems Contractor. All work shall be closely coordinated with the Owner's Technician. DEFINITIONS
A.
BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
B.
Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways.
C.
Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.
D.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
E.
IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
F.
LAN: Local area network.
G.
MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several telecommunications outlet/connectors.
H.
Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates.
I.
RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
27 1500 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 J. 1.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.
B.
Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area.
1.5
cabling
with
Owner's
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1.
2.
Test optical fiber cables while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION A.
Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called a "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols. 1. 2.
B.
2.2
Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling. Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling.
The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet. This maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment or in the horizontal cross-connect. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1 when tested according to test procedures of this standard.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. 2.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D.
Grounding: Comply with J-STD-607-A.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
27 1500 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
DATA COMMUNICATIONS UTP CABLE A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
B.
Voice/Data Cabling System 1. 2.
3. 4. 5.
6.
7. 8.
9.
2.4
ADC. Belden Inc. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. CommScope, Inc. Draka Cableteq USA. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc. Superior Essex Inc. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand. 3M Communication Markets Division. Tyco Electronics Corporation; AMP Products.
Voice system shall utilize copper cables and shall be terminated at the user’s end and in the Comm. Room Closet 103 on the main floor. Voice and data cables shall be unshielded twisted pair (UTP) CAT 6 cable and have a total of four (4) pairs of copper conductors. Voice and data cables shall be separate cables. Voice and data cable jacket color: Jacket color of the voice cable shall be yellow, data cable shall be blue and alarm cable shall be green. Wiring code of the cable shall follow EIA-T568 (AT&T) Option “B” standards. Voice and data connectors: All CAT 6 cabling (wall jacks) shall be terminated into snapin 110-type RJ-45 connectors and shall meet TIA/EIA-568-B1 Clause 11: “Cabling transmission performance and test requirements”. Products manufactured by “Panduit” are preferred. Voice jacks shall be orange in color, data jacks shall be blue in color. Voice and data thermoplastic faceplate color shall match the adjacent electrical device faceplate in color if the electrical device plate is metallic, the voice/data faceplate shall be ivory thermoplastic. Voice and data cables shall have permanent wrap labeling installed at the end of each cable. Voice and data faceplates shall have each jack location identified with a permanent label. This label shall include the category of use and the cable number; coordinate labeling with DMVA Telecommunications Mechanic. At completion of project all lines shall be terminated, labeled and tested and an as-built drawing of the entire cable system furnished to the Engineer for review and transmission to the Owners.
UTP CABLE HARDWARE A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2.
ADC. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
27 1500 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. B.
2.5
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Belden Inc. Dynacom Inc. Hubbell Premise Wiring. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. Panduit Corp. Siemon Co. (The). Tyco Electronics Corporation; AMP Products.
General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. 1.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated.
Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals. TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS
A.
Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
B.
Workstation Outlets: Three port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate. 1. 2. 3.
2.6
Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Section 26 2726 "Wiring Devices." For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords. Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.
GROUNDING A.
Comply with requirements in Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.
B.
Comply with J-STD-607-A.
2.7
IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A.
Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
B.
Comply with requirements in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
2.8
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.
Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
B.
Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
27 1500 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
C.
Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.
D.
Factory-sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.
E.
Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
ENTRANCE FACILITIES A.
3.2
Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communications service provider. WIRING METHODS
A.
Install cables in pathways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal pathways and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1.
Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.
B.
Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.
C.
Wiring within Enclosures: 1. 2. 3.
3.3
Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure.
INSTALLATION OF CABLES A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
General Requirements for Cabling: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. MUTOA shall not be used as a cross-connect point. Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to telecommunications outlet/connectors: a.
Do not use consolidation point as a cross-connect point, as a patch connection, or for direct connection to workstation equipment.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
27 1500 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 b. 6. 7.
8. 9.
10.
11. 12. 13. C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Locate consolidation points for UTP at least 49 feet from communications equipment room.
Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot-long service loop on each end of cable. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.
UTP Cable Installation: 1. 2.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.
Open-Cable Installation: 1. 2. 3.
Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.
E.
Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
F.
Separation from EMI Sources: 1.
2.
Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. b.
Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
27 1500 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 c. 3.
6. 3.4
Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.
Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.
Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. b. c.
5.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. b. c.
4.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.
Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.
FIRESTOPPING A.
Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
B.
Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C.
Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
3.5
GROUNDING A.
Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.
B.
Comply with J-STD-607-A.
3.6
IDENTIFICATION A.
Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Comply with requirements in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.
C.
Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
27 1500 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 D.
2.
3. 4.
Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. a.
b. 5.
Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a buildingmounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.
Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A. 1.
3.7
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Cable and Wire Identification: 1.
E.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Perform the following tests and inspections. 1.
2. 3. 4.
Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection. a.
Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
27 1500 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 5.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
UTP Performance Tests: a.
Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10)
6.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Wire map. Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). Insertion loss. Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). Return loss. Propagation delay. Delay skew.
Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP and optical fiber systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed. a.
Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network.
B.
Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
C.
End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 27 1500
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
27 1500 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
SECTION 28 3111 – DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This section includes fire alarm systems with detectors, signal equipment, controls, and devices: 1.
1.3
It is the intent of this specification to require the Fire Alarm Contractor to provide a bid, for a system, which is Code compliant. The Fire Alarm Contractor is responsible for any additions required by the Michigan Office of Fire Safety Plan Review or any other review of the system.
DEFINITIONS A.
FACP: Fire alarm control panel.
B.
LED: Light-emitting diode.
C.
NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
D.
Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
1.5
Non-coded, analog-addressable system; automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors; and multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NFPA 72.
B.
Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices: 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Heat detectors. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. Fire extinguishing system operation.
Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Alarm notification appliances shall operate continuously. Identify alarm at the FACP and remote annunciators. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire alarm mode.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
28 3111 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 5. D.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
1.6
Record events in the system memory.
Operation of a fire-protection system valve tamper.
System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions: 1.
F.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions: 1.
E.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Open circuits, shorts and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification-appliance circuits. Opening, tampering, or removal of alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices. Loss of primary power at the FACP. Ground or a single break in FACP internal circuits. Abnormal ac voltage at the FACP. A break in standby battery circuitry. Failure of battery charging. Abnormal position of any switch at the FACP or annunciator.
System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Ring trouble bell and annunciate at the FACP and remote annunciators. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: 1.
Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications: a. b.
2.
3. 4. 5.
6. 7.
8.
Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire alarm system design. Fire alarm certified by NICET, minimum Level III.
System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, and cable and wire types and sizes. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Show wiring color code. Batteries: Size calculations. Duct Smoke Detectors: Performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
28 3111 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
C.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A, recommendations for Owner's manual. Include abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at the FACP.
F.
Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submittal to authorities having jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Architect for review.
G.
Documentation: 1. 2.
Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to NFPA 72 to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction. Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according to NFPA 72 to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction. Format of the written sequence of operation shall be the optional input/output matrix. a.
1.7
Hard copies on paper to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Work of this Section be performed by a UL-listed company.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Personnel certified by NICET as Fire Alarm Level III.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
1.8
EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 3.
Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but not less than 1 unit. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but not less than 1 unit. Smoke, Fire, and Flame Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than 1 unit of each type.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
28 3111 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 4. 5. 6. 7.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than 1 unit of each type. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
FACP and Equipment: a. b. c.
2.
Wire and Cable: a. b. c. d.
3.
Comtran Corporation. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.
Audible and Visual Signals: a. b. c. d.
2.2
SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International Company. Edwards Systems Technology Inc. NOTIFIER, a GE-Honeywell Company
Amseco; a division of Kobishi America, Inc. Commercial Products Group. Gentex Corporation. System Sensor; a GE-Honeywell Company.
FACP A.
General Description: 1. 2.
Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status. a. b.
3. B.
Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for adjustment of sensitivity at the FACP. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.
Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.
Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at the FACP and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
28 3111 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.
C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, three line(s) of 80 characters, minimum. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands; and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.
Circuits: 1.
Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A, Style 6. a.
2. 3. 4.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
System Layout: Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.
Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A, Style Z. Actuation of alarm notification appliances and annunciation shall occur within 10 seconds after the activation of an initiating device. Electrical monitoring for the integrity of wiring external to the FACP for mechanical equipment shutdown and magnetic door-holding circuits is not required, provided a break in the circuit will cause doors to close and mechanical equipment to shut down.
Smoke-Alarm Verification: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FACP. Activate a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence at the FACP and the detector. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified. Cancel FACP indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.
E.
Notification-Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a temporal pattern, complying with ANSI S3.41.
F.
Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for supervision of the ac power shall be from a dedicated dc power supply, and power for the dc component shall be from the ac supply.
G.
Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the FACP and remote annunciators, after initiating devices are restored to normal. 1. 2. 3.
H.
Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances until silencing switch is operated again. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.
Walk Test: A test mode to allow one person to test alarm and supervisory features of initiating devices. Enabling of this mode shall require the entry of a password. The FACP and annunciators shall display a test indication while the test is underway. If testing ceases while in walk-test mode, after a preset delay, the system shall automatically return to normal.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
28 3111 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
I.
Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory.
J.
Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, trouble, and supervisory signals to a remote alarm station through a digital alarm communicator transmitter and telephone lines.
K.
Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal, supervisory signal and supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be powered by the 24-V dc source. 1. 2.
L.
Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger and an automatic transfer switch. 1. 2.
M.
2.3
Batteries: Sealed, valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid. Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72.
Surge Protection: 1. 2.
N.
The alarm current draw of the entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating. Power supply shall have a dedicated fused safety switch for this connection at the service entrance equipment. Paint the switch box red and identify it with "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM POWER."
Install surge protection on normal ac power for the FACP and its accessories. Install surge protectors recommended by FACP manufacturer. Install on all system wiring external to the building housing the FACP.
Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A.
General Description: 1. 2. 3.
UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP. Multipurpose type, containing the following: a. b.
Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP. Piezoelectric sounder rated at 88 dBA at 10 feet according to UL 464.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
28 3111 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 c. 4.
5. 6. 7.
b. c.
Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at the FACP for 15 or 20 deg F per minute. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at the FACP to operate at 135 or 155 deg F. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.
Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.
Ionization Smoke Detector: 1. 2.
D.
Heat sensor, combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature.
Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. 2.
C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection of building wiring. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and poweron status. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP. a.
B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Sensor: Responsive to both visible and invisible products of combustion. Selfcompensating for changes in environmental conditions. Detector Sensitivity: Between 0.5 and 1.7 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.
Duct Smoke Detectors: 1.
Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: a. b.
2. 3. 4.
Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.
UL 268A listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall be designed for mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. a.
Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: UL listed for use with the supplied detector. The enclosure shall comply with NEMA 250 requirements for Type 4X.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
28 3111 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 5. 6. 7.
8. 9. 10. 2.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and poweron status. Provide remote status and alarm indicator and test station where indicated. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for the specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
HEAT DETECTORS A.
General: UL 521 listed.
B.
Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or rateof-rise of temperature that exceeds 15 deg F per minute, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.
2.5
Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A.
Description: connections. 1.
Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system
Combination Devices: mounting assembly.
Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-
B.
Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn.
C.
Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch-high letters on the lens. 1. 2.
D. 2.6
Rated Light Output: 110 candela. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
Audible Alarm Notification: By tone signals on loudspeakers. SPRINKLER SYSTEM REMOTE INDICATORS
A.
Remote status and alarm indicator and test stations, with LED indicating lights. Light is connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is flush mounted in a single-gang wall plate.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
28 3111 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification plate at the indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal and room where the smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flow switches, the identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream from the water-flow switch. 2.7
REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR A.
Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the FACP for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the FACP, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing. 1.
B.
2.8
Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Class 1.
Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the FACP. Controls with associated LEDs permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACP. DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
A.
Listed and labeled according to UL 632. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the FACP, and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with the central station(s), the signal is transmitted. The unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where supervising 2 lines, if service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, the unit initiates a local trouble signal and transmits a signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. When telephone service is restored, unit automatically reports that event to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, the local trouble signal is initiated.
B.
Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. Battery capacity is adequate to comply with NFPA 72 requirements.
C.
Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.
2.9
GUARDS FOR PHYSICAL PROTECTION A.
Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or other device requiring protection. 1. 2.
2.10
Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of the device. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.
WIRE AND CABLE
A.
Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.
B.
Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, size as recommended by system manufacturer.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
28 3111 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70 Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire alarm signal service. UL listed as Type FPL, and complying with requirements in UL 1424 and in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.
Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation. 1. 2. 3.
Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70 Type MC, copper conductors, TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, UL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A.
Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing: 1. 2. 3.
Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed the rating of the detector. Spacing of heat detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling areas, shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72. Spacing of heat detectors shall be determined based on guidelines and recommendations in NFPA 72.
B.
HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.
C.
Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of the duct.
D.
Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler waterflow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.
E.
Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.
F.
Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling.
G.
Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
H.
FACP: Mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.
I.
Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.
3.2
WIRING INSTALLATION A.
Install wiring according to the following:
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
28 3111 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
NECA 1. TIA/EIA 568-A.
Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 1.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.
Wiring Method: 1. 2. 3.
Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of 2-hour fire-rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70 Types MI and CI, is permitted, where allowed by local Code. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.
D.
Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
E.
Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
F.
Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.
G.
Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum 1-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones.
H.
Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: ¾-inch conduit between the FACP and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION A.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26 Section “Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
28 3111 - 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C. 3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM." GROUNDING
A. 3.5
Ground the FACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to the FACP. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. 2.
3.
4.
Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement using the form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in NFPA 72. Certify compliance with test parameters. All tests shall be conducted under the direct supervision of a NICET technician certified under the Fire Alarm Systems program at Level III. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built drawings and system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly located, damaged, or nonfunctional equipment, and correct before beginning tests. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in NFPA 72. a.
5. 3.6
Detectors that are outside their marked sensitivity range shall be replaced.
Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including demonstration of sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in Appendix A in NFPA 70.
ADJUSTING A.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
B.
Follow-Up Tests and Inspections: After date of Substantial Completion, test the fire alarm system complying with testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Perform tests and inspections listed for three monthly, and one quarterly, periods.
C.
Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test the fire alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
28 3111 - 12
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project # 1301006
DEMONSTRATION A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the fire alarm system, appliances, and devices. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 28 3111
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
28 3111 - 13
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 31 1000 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, and grass. 2. Clearing and grubbing. 3. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 4. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 5. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place. 6. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.
3. 4. 5.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Sustainable Design Requirements" for additional LEED requirements. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and temporary erosion and sedimentation control procedures. Division 01 Section "Execution" for verifying utility locations and for recording field measurements. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. Division 23 Section "Turf and Grasses” for finish grading including preparing and placing planting soil mixes and testing of topsoil material.
DEFINITIONS A.
Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.
B.
Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.
SITE CLEARING
31 1000 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A.
1.5
Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. SUBMITTALS
A.
Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.
B.
Record drawings, according to Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents," identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. 2.
B.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. 1.
Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect.
C.
Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated.
D.
Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.
E.
Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place.
SITE CLEARING
31 1000 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS[ (Not Applicable)] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.
B.
Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
C.
Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1.
3.2
Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
TREE PROTECTION A.
Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1. 2. 3.
Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash.
B.
Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 1. 2. 3. 4.
D.
Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1.
3.3
Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. Backfill with soil as soon as possible.
Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by Architect.
UTILITIES A.
Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor.
SITE CLEARING
31 1000 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. B.
3.4
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.
Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.
D.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 1. 2.
C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A.
Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1.
3.5
Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade.
Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
TOPSOIL STRIPPING A.
Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B.
Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1.
C.
Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.
Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1.
Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches.
SITE CLEARING
31 1000 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3. 3.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal.
SITE IMPROVEMENTS A.
Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.
B.
Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. 1.
2. 3.7
Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.
DISPOSAL A.
Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1.
Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities.
END OF SECTION 31 1000
SITE CLEARING
31 1000 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 31 2000 - EARTH MOVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
1.3
Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade walks pavements lawns and plantings. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. Subbase course for concrete walks & pavements. Subbase and base course for asphalt paving. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Soil Erosion & Sedimentation Control” for erosion control measures and procedures. 2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. 3. Division 31 Section "Dewatering" for lowering and disposing of ground water during construction. 4. Division 33 Section “Storm Utility Drainage Piping” for storm sewer piping. DEFINITIONS
A.
Structure: Shall include manholes, catch basins, etc.
B.
Backfill terminology for underground piping (see detail on drawings). 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Trench Area: From 12” above crown of pipe to finished grade. Bedding Area: From 12” above crown of pipe to 12” below invert of pipe. Special Foundation Area: From 12” below invert of pipe to satisfactory foundation soils. Drainage Area: From 12” below invert of pipe to bottom of pavement section.
Backfill terminology for structures (see detail on drawings).
EARTH MOVING
31 2000 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Trench Area: From bottom of structure to bottom of pavement section or to bottom of topsoil layer. Bedding Area: From bottom of structure to 12” below bottom of structure. Special Foundation Area: From 12” below bottom of structure to satisfactory foundation soils.
D.
Aggregate Base Course: paving.
E.
Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
F.
Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
G.
Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
H.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
I.
Earthwork: Includes all work (cut or fill) necessary to adjust the existing site to the proposed grades.
1.4 A.
SUBMITTALS Material Test Reports: The Contractor will employ a qualified testing agency, who will submit reports directly to the Architect, with copies to the Contractor, for items including: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Test reports on borrow material. Suitability of footing sub-grade material. In-place soil density tests. Tests for each layer of placed fills or backfill. a. b. c. d. e.
1.5 A.
Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt
Subbase. Aggregate base. Trench area. Bedding area. Special foundation area.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Site Information: Data in subsurface investigation reports was used for the basis of the design and are available to the Contractor for information only. Conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data by Contractor.
EARTH MOVING
31 2000 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be performed by Contractor, at the Contractor's option; however, no change in the Contract Sum will be authorized for such additional exploration.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1.
Contact utility – locator service for area where project is located before excavating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.
B.
Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C.
Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these group symbols. 1.
Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D.
Fill: Satisfactory soil materials
E.
Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
F.
Subbase Material: 1.
G.
Aggregate Base Course: 1.
H.
MDOT 902.08 Class II or suitable excavated material as approved by Engineer.
MDOT 22A or suitable excavated material as approved by Engineer.
Trench Area: 1.
Non-pavement areas: a.
2.
Satisfactory soil materials.
Under pavement:
EARTH MOVING
31 2000 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 a. I.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
MDOT 902.08, Class II or suitable excavated material as approved by Engineer.
Bedding Area: Formatted: CMT, Indent: Left: 0"
1.
MDOT 902.08, Class II or suitable excavated material as approved by the Engineer.
J.
Special Foundation Area: Verify with Engineer.
K.
Drainage Material: 1.
L. 2.2 A.
Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. GEOTEXTILES Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
B.
MDOT 902.07, 34R
Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 lbf; ASTM D 4632. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 lbf; ASTM D 4632. Tear Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4533. Puncture Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4833. Apparent Opening Size: No. 50 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. Permittivity: 150 gpm per sq. ft., minimum; ASTM D 4491. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.
Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. Grab Tensile Strength: 247 lbf; ASTM D 4632. Sewn Seam Strength: 222 lbfASTM D 4632. Tear Strength: 90 lbf; ASTM D 4533. Puncture Strength: 90 lbf; ASTM D 4833. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.
EARTH MOVING
31 2000 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
B.
Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing."
C.
Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 1 Section "Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control," during earthwork operations.
D.
Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost.
3.2
DEWATERING
A.
Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B.
Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1.
2.
3.3 A. 3.4 A.
Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. Install a dewatering system, to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.
EXPLOSIVES Explosives: Do not use explosives. EXCAVATION, GENERAL Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1.
If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
EARTH MOVING
31 2000 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.5 A.
A.
3.7
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1.
3.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A.
Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
B.
Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
Clearance: As indicated in the table below. Internal Pipe Diameter (inches) 4 - 10 12 15 18 24 30 36 42 48
C.
Trench Width (feet) 2.5 3.0 3.25 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.5 6.0 6.5
Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 12 inchesdeeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. 1.
Excavate trenches 12 inchesdeeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.
EARTH MOVING
31 2000 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.8
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A.
Notify Testing Agency when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B.
If Testing Agency determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. 1.
C.
Proof-roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. 2. 3.
D.
3.9 A.
A.
UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect.
A.
Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect.
STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1.
3.11
Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Testing Agency, and replace with specified soil material, compacted according to project specifications, as directed by testing agency.
Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
1.
3.10
Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to contract provisions for charges in the work. See Bid Alternate Section of this specification.
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.
BACKFILL Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1.
Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
EARTH MOVING
31 2000 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. 3.12
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. Removing concrete formwork. Removing trash and debris. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A.
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B.
Place and compact bedding area to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1.
Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
C.
Backfill voids with specified soil material while installing and removing shoring and bracing.
D.
Place and compact final backfill of specified soil material to final subgrade elevation.
3.13
SOIL FILL
A.
Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.
B.
Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
C. 3.14 A.
Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1.
Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
EARTH MOVING
31 2000 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.
3.15
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.
COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A.
Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inchesin loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inchesin loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B.
Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C.
Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture density relationship (cohesive soils) determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557; and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesionless soils). 1.
2.
3.
3.16 A.
GRADING General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. 2.
B.
Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances.
Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. 2. 3.
C.
Structures, Building Slab and Step, Pavements: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum density for cohesive material (modified proctor. ASSHTO T180). In uniform sands for which a proctor curve cannot be established compact at relative density of 80%. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90% maximum density for cohesive soils and 75% relative density for cohesionless soils. DO NOT COMPACT TOPSOIL. Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 92% maximum density for cohesive material or 80% relative density for cohesionless material.
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch
Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-footstraightedge.
EARTH MOVING
31 2000 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.17
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A.
Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B.
On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. 2. 3.
4.
3.18
Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. Place subbase and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.
B.
Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.
C.
Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.
D.
Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1.
2. 3. E.
Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 feetor less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 150 feetor less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace specified soil material to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
EARTH MOVING
31 2000 - 10
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.19
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PROTECTION
A.
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
B.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1.
C.
Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1.
3.20 A.
Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 31 2000
EARTH MOVING
31 2000 - 11
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 31 5000 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities and support facilities. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating and book filling and, and for existing utilities.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
1.4
Design, furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and superimposed and construction loads. 1. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 2. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation. 3. Monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements. SUBMITTALS 1.
1.5
Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjacent construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by the absence of, the installation of, or the performance of excavation support and protection systems. Submit before Work begins.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated:
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
31 5000 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from the data. 1. 2.
Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for excavation support and protection. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
To be determined by Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations. 1.
B.
Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered.
Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that forming and finishing of concrete surfaces are not impeded.
D.
Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure that excavation support and protection systems remain stable.
E.
Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and protection systems.
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
31 5000 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
REMOVAL AND REPAIRS A.
Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities.
B.
Remove excavation support and protection systems to a depth of 4’ below finished grade when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Excavation support and protection systems below 4’ below finished grade may permanently remain in place.
END OF SECTION 31 5000
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
31 5000 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 32 1216 - ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 A.
SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.3 A.
Provide hot-mix asphalt pavement according to the materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of the standard specifications of the state or of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4
1.5 A.
Standard Specification: MDOT: 2003 Edition SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. 1.
B.
Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for aggregate subbase and base courses and for aggregate pavement shoulders. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.
A.
Hot-mix asphalt paving. Pavement-marking paint. Wheel stops.
Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work.
Material Test Reports: For each paving material. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located.
ASPHALT PAVING
32 1216 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for asphalt paving work.
C.
Coring Sample Location Map: Overlay proposed core samples on site plan.
1.6 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: MDOT 502.03 J
B.
Pavement-Marking Paint: MDOT: 811.03 D
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
AGGREGATES
A.
General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations.
B.
Comply with referenced DOT standard.
2.2 A.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS Pavement-Marking Paint: MDOT: 811.02 1.
B.
Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive strength, approximately 6 inches high, 9 inches wide, and 84 inches long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside, and provide holes for anchoring to substrate. 1.
2.3 A.
Color: Blue for handicapped requirements, yellow elsewhere.
Dowels: Galvanized steel, diameter 3/4 inch minimum length 10 inches. BOND COATS:
Bond Coat: MDOT: 904.03
ASPHALT PAVING
32 1216 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
MIXES – See Geotechnical Report and Civil detail sheet
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.
B.
Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Proceed with paving only after these conditions have been corrected.
3.2 A.
Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction . Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. Notify Architect in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions.
SURFACE PREPARATION General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. 1.
3.3
Sweep loose granular particles from surface of inbound aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course. HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING
A.
General: MDOT: 502.03 F
B.
Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt-paving mat.
ASPHALT PAVING
32 1216 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. 1.
D.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course.
Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
3.4
JOINTS
A.
General: MDOT: 502.03 F.1 & 2
B.
Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
3.5
Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes work at a subsequent time. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density. COMPACTION
A.
General: MDOT: 502.03 G
B.
General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratoryplate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1.
Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F .
C.
Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.
D.
Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
ASPHALT PAVING
32 1216 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to ASTM D 6927, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.
E.
Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.
F.
Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.
G.
Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.
H.
Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.
I.
Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.
3.6 A.
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1. 2.
B.
Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straight edge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. 2.
3.7
Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
Base Course: 1/4 inch. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. PAVEMENT MARKING
A.
General MDOT: 811.03 B NCDOT: 1205-3
B.
Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect.
ASPHALT PAVING
32 1216 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.8 A.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
WHEEL STOPS Securely attach wheel stops to pavement with not less than two galvanized-steel dowels embedded at one-quarter to one-third points. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop. 1.
3.9 A.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Extend upper portion of dowel 5 inches into wheel stops and lower portion a minimum of 5 inches into pavement. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing 1.
Testing Agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from specified requirements.
B.
Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.
C.
Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
D.
Testing agency to provide three (3) cores within asphalt pavement, after placement of wearing course. Cores are to extend through bottom of aggregate base layer. Prepare a summary stating thickness of each layer. 1.
Heavy-duty pavement areas: Provide two (2) locations. a. b.
2.
Truck dock area. 200’ (min) from truck dock area.
Standard pavement areas: Provide one (1) core. a.
Within parking space and no closer than 100’ to site driveway.
END OF SECTION 32 1216
ASPHALT PAVING
32 1216 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 32 1313 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.
1.3
Driveways and roadways. Curbs and gutters. Walkways.
Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for general building applications of concrete. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
B.
ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.
C.
Concrete Testing Service: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
CONCRETE PAVING
32 1313 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
STEEL REINFORCEMENT A.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.
B.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.
C.
Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.
D.
Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
E.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:
2.2
CONCRETE MATERIALS A.
2.3
General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same manufacturer throughout the Project. Comply with division 3 section Cast In Place Concrete for concrete materials, admixtures, bonding materials, and curing materials. RELATED MATERIALS
A. 2.4
Expansion and Isolated Joint Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. WHEEL STOPS
A.
Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive strength, 4-1/2 inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate. 1.
Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch diameter, 10-inch minimum length.
CONCRETE PAVING
32 1313 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
CONCRETE MIXTURES A.
Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.
B.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the trial batch method.
C.
Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties: 1. 2. 3.
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi . Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. Slump Limit: 3 inches . a.
Slump Limit for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: Not more than 8 inches after adding admixture to plant- or site-verified, 2- to 3inch slump.
D.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicals.
E.
Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percent: 1. 2. 3.
2.6
Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-1/2-inchaximum aggregate. Air Content: 6.0 percent for 1-inch maximum aggregate. Air Content: 6.0 percent for 3/4-inch maximum aggregate.
CONCRETE MIXING A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. 1.
When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction. Proceed with pavement only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.
B.
Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
CONCRETE PAVING
32 1313 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A.
Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B.
Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.
3.3
STEEL REINFORCEMENT A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.
C.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D.
Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
E.
Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap to adjacent mats.
3.4
JOINTS A.
General: Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
B.
When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.
Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. 1. 2. 3.
Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
CONCRETE PAVING
32 1313 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Locate expansion joints at intervals of 40 feet, unless otherwise indicated. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. Terminate joint filler less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.
D.
Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
E.
Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1.
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. a.
F.
Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 1.
3.5
Radius: 1/4 inch.
Radius: 1/4 inch.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT A.
Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.
B.
Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
C.
Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment.
CONCRETE PAVING
32 1313 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
D.
Comply with requirements and with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.
E.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
F.
Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to recommendations in ACI 309R.
G.
Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading dry-shake surface treatments.
H.
Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete.
I.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1.
2. 3. J.
Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist: 1.
2. 3.
3.6
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. Cover reinforcement steel with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. Fog-spray forms, reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
CONCRETE FINISHING A.
General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations is prohibited.
CONCRETE PAVING
32 1313 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with powerdriven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1.
3.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.
CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C.
Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.
D.
Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. b. c.
2.
3.
3.8
Water. Continuous water-fog spray. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
PAVEMENT TOLERANCES A.
Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: 1.
Elevation: 1/4 inch.
CONCRETE PAVING
32 1313 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 3.9
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. Surface: Gap below 10-foot long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch . Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.
WHEEL STOPS A.
3.10
Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels embedded in holes cast into wheel stops. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel stop and to pavement. Extend upper portion of dowel 5 inches into wheel stop and lower portion a minimum of 5 inches into pavement. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article.
B.
Testing Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. 2.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained according to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressivestrength specimens. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd. plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd.. One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for a given class of concrete, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
CONCRETE PAVING
32 1313 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 8.
9.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive compressive-strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual compressive-strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
C.
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
D.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection.
E.
Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.
3.11
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet requirements in this Section.
B.
Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with Portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.
C.
Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D.
Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.
END OF SECTION 32 1313
CONCRETE PAVING
32 1313 - 9
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 32 3113 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.3
Chain-link fences.
Division 03 Section Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete for cast-in-place concrete post footings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for chain-link fences and gates. 1. 2. 3.
Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings. Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments. Gates and hardware.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show accessories, hardware, gate operation, and operational clearances.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Samples for Verification: Prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1.
1.4
Polymer-Coated Components: In 6-inch lengths for components and on full-sized units for accessories.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For the following to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals:
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
32 3113 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 2. 3. 1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Polymer finishes. Gate hardware. Gate operator.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.6
Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing fence grounding. Member company of NETA or an NRTL. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements. WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which [manufacturer] [Installer] agrees to repair or replace components of chain-link fences and gates that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2.
Warranty Period: Completion.
[Five] [15] years from date of Substantial
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC A.
General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of selvage knuckle or twist. Comply with CLFMI Product Manual and with requirements indicated below: 1. 2.
Fabric Height: 4’ Steel Wire Fabric: Wire with a diameter of 0.192 inch a. b.
Mesh Size: 2 inches Zinc-Coated Fabric: ASTM A 392, Type II, Class 1, 1.2 oz./sq. ft. with zinc coating applied after weaving.
c.
Coat selvage ends of fabric that is metallic coated before the weaving process with manufacturer's standard clear protective coating.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
32 3113 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. 2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages.
FENCE FRAMING A.
Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, including rails, braces, and line; terminal; and corner posts. Provide members with minimum dimensions and wall thickness according to ASTM F 1043 based on the following: 1.
Fence Height: 48 Inches
2.
Heavy Industrial Strength: Material IC, round steel pipe, electric-resistance-welded pipe a. b.
3. 4.
2.3
Line Post: 2.375 inches in diameter End, Corner and Pull Post: 2.875 inches in diameter
Horizontal Framework Members: top rails complying with ASTM F 1043. a. Top Rail: 1.66 inches in diameter Metallic Coating for Steel Framing: a. Type B, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of 0.9 oz./sq. ft. of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a clear, verifiable polymer film. b. External, Type B, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of 0.9 oz./sq. ft. of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a clear, verifiable polymer film. Internal, Type D, consisting of 81 percent, not less than 0.3-mil- thick, zinc-pigmented coating. c. Coatings: Any coating above.
TENSION WIRE A.
2.4
Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: 0.177-inch- diameter, marcelled tension wire complying with ASTM A 817 and ASTM A 824, with the following metallic coating: 1. Type II, zinc coated (galvanized) by [hot-dip] [electrolytic] process, with the following minimum coating weight: a. Matching chain-link fabric coating weight. SWING GATES
A.
General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for gate posts and single or double swing gate types 1. 2.
B.
Gate Leaf Width: As indicated Gate Fabric Height: As indicated
Pipe and Tubing: 1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Comply with ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083;
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
32 3113 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
C.
Frame Corner Construction: Welded.
D.
Hardware: 1. 2.
2.5
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Hinges: 180-degree Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate with provision for padlocking accessible from both sides of gate
HORIZONTAL-SLIDE GATES A.
General: 1.
Classification: Type II Cantilever Slide, Class 2 with internal roller assemblies. a.
Gate Frame Width and Height: As indicated
B.
Pipe and Tubing: 1. Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 429/B 429M; manufacturer's standard 2. Gate Posts: Comply with ASTM F 1184. Provide round tubular steel
C.
Frame Corner Construction: Welded
D.
Hardware: 1. 2.
2.6
Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate with provision for padlocking accessible from both sides of gate. Hangers, roller assemblies, and stops fabricated per manufacturers standards.
FITTINGS A.
General: Comply with ASTM F 626.
B.
Post Caps: Provide for each post. 1.
Provide line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top rail.
C.
Rail and Brace Ends: For each gate, corner, pull, and end post.
D.
Rail Fittings: Provide the following: 1.
Top Rail Sleeves: Pressed-steel or round-steel tubing not less than 6 inches long.
E.
Tension and Brace Bands: Pressed steel
F.
Tension Bars: Steel length not less than 2 inches shorter than full height of chain-link fabric. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post, unless fabric is integrally woven into post.
G.
Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: According to ASTM F 626.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
32 3113 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
H.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and frames, complying with the following: a. Aluminum: ASTM B 211; Alloy 1350-H19; 0.192-inch-
Finish 1. Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz. /sq. ft. zinc. 2.
2.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Aluminum: Mill finish.
FENCE GROUNDING A.
Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for No. 4 AWG and larger. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Material above Finished Grade: Copper Material on or below Finished Grade: Copper. Bonding Jumpers: Braided copper tape, 1 inch wide, woven of No. 30 AWG bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules.
Connectors and Grounding Rods: Comply with UL 467. 1. 2.
Connectors for Below-Grade Use: Exothermic welded type. Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel, 5/8 by 96 inches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1.
B. 3.2
Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments. INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements indicated.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
32 3113 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1. 3.4
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Install fencing on established boundary lines inside property line.
CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION A.
Post Excavation: Drill holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil.
B.
Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil. 1. 2.
Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter. a.
Exposed Concrete: Extend 2 inches above grade; shape and smooth to shed water.
C.
Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 15 degrees or more
D.
Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 72 inches o.c.
E.
Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.148 diameter hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24 inches o.c. Install tension wire in locations indicated before stretching fabric. Provide horizontal tension wire at the following locations: 1.
Extended along bottom of fence fabric. Install bottom tension wire within 6 inches of bottom of fabric and tie to each post with not less than same diameter and type of wire.
F.
Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Provide expansion couplings as recommended in writing by fencing manufacturer.
G.
Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to enclosing framework. Leave 2 inches between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released.
H.
Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches o.c.
I.
Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails. Attach wire at one end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180 degrees, and attach other end to chain-link fabric per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and clothing. 1.
Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 12 inches o.c.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
32 3113 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 J.
3.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric side. GATE INSTALLATION
A.
3.6
Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamperresistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. GROUNDING AND BONDING
A.
Fence Grounding: Install at maximum intervals of 1500 feet except as follows: 1.
Fences within 100 Feet of Buildings, Structures, Walkways, and Roadways: Ground at maximum intervals of 750 feet a.
Gates and Other Fence Openings: Ground fence on each side of opening. 1) 2)
Bond metal gates to gate posts. Bond across openings, with and without gates, except openings indicated as intentional fence discontinuities. Use No. 2 AWG wire and bury it at least 18 inches below finished grade.
B.
Protection at Crossings of Overhead Electrical Power Lines: Ground fence at location of crossing and at a maximum distance of 150 feet on each side of crossing.
C.
Fences Enclosing Electrical Power Distribution Equipment: Ground as required by IEEE C2 unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until the top is 6 inches below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor. Connect conductor to each fence component at the grounding location, including the following: 1. 2.
Make grounding connections to each barbed wire strand with wire-to-wire connectors designed for this purpose. Make grounding connections to each barbed tape coil with connectors designed for this purpose.
E.
Bonding Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gate post and gate frame.
F.
Connections: Make connections to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 1. 2.
Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
32 3113 - 7
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. 4. 5. G.
3.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
Bonding to Lightning Protection System: If fence terminates at lightning-protected building or structure, ground the fence and bond the fence grounding conductor to lightning protection down conductor or lightning protection grounding conductor complying with NFPA 780. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Grounding-Resistance Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1.
2.
3.
3.8
Grounding-Resistance Tests: Subject completed grounding system to a megger test at each grounding location. Measure grounding resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation, without soil having been moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural grounding resistance. Perform tests by two-point method according to IEEE 81. Excessive Grounding Resistance: If resistance to grounding exceeds specified value, notify Architect promptly. Include recommendations for reducing grounding resistance and a proposal to accomplish recommended work. Report: Prepare test reports certified by a testing agency of grounding resistance at each test location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results.
ADJUSTING A.
Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
B.
Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
3.9
DEMONSTRATION A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain chain-link fences and gates.
END OF SECTION 32 3113
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
32 3113 - 8
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 32 9200 - TURF AND GRASSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: 1. 2.
1.3
Seeding. Hydroseeding.
DEFINITIONS A.
Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
B.
Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.
C.
Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
D.
Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. See [Section 329113 "Soil Preparation"] [Section 329115 "Soil Preparation (Performance Specification)"] and drawing designations for planting soils.
E.
Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture, stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging.
B.
Product Certificates: For fertilizers, from manufacturer.
TURF AND GRASSES
32 9200 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to Project. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of turf during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with state and Federal laws, as applicable. FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. 1.
B.
MDOT 816.03.C.1
Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SEED A.
Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.
B.
Seed Species: 1. 2.
3. 4. 5.
Quality: State-certified seed of grass species as listed below for solar exposure. Quality: Seed of grass species as listed below for solar exposure, with not less than [85] percent germination, not less than [95] percent pure seed, and not more than [0.5] percent weed seed: Full Sun: Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon). Full Sun: Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis), a minimum of three cultivars. Sun and Partial Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows: a. b. c. d.
50 percent Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis). 30 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety). 10 percent perennial ryegrass (Lolium perenne). 10 percent redtop (Agrostis alba).
TURF AND GRASSES
32 9200 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 6.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows: a. b. c.
2.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
50 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety). 35 percent rough bluegrass (Poa trivialis). 15 percent redtop (Agrostis alba).
FERTILIZERS A.
Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. 2.
B.
Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. 2.
2.3
Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
MULCHES A.
Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley.
B.
Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic and free of plantgrowth or germination inhibitors; with a maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.
C.
Nonasphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for slurry application; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors.
D.
Asphalt Emulsion: ASTM D 977, Grade SS-1; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors.
2.4
PESTICIDES A.
General: Pesticide, registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
TURF AND GRASSES
32 9200 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
B.
Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.
C.
Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work. 1.
2. 3.
Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C.
If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil.
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Protect structures; utilities; sidewalks; pavements; and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. 1. 2.
B.
3.3
Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.
Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. SEEDING
A.
Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. 1. 2.
Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.
TURF AND GRASSES
32 9200 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.
B.
Sow seed at a total rate of 3 to 4 lb/1000 sq. ft.
C.
Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.
D.
Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:4 with erosion-control blankets installed and stapled according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Protect seeded areas with erosion-control mats where indicated on Drawings; install and anchor according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4
HYDROSEEDING A.
Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, slow-release fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. 1. 2.
3.
3.5
Mix slurry with nonasphaltic tackifier. Spray-apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply slurry at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 1500-lb/acre dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed-sowing rate. Spray-apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a two-step process. Apply first slurry coat at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 500-lb/acre dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed-sowing rate. Apply slurry cover coat of fiber mulch (hydromulching) at a rate of 1000 lb/acre.
TURF MAINTENANCE A.
General: Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. 1. 2. 3.
3.6
Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.
SATISFACTORY TURF A.
Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:
TURF AND GRASSES
32 9200 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.
B.
3.7
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches
Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements, and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory. PESTICIDE APPLICATION
A.
Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.
B.
Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.8
CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A.
Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.
B.
Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
C.
Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established.
D.
Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.
END OF SECTION 32 9200
TURF AND GRASSES
32 9200 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
SECTION 33 4100 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY 1.
1.3
This Section includes gravity-flow, nonpressure storm drainage outside the building..
DEFINITIONS A.
Drainage Structure: Manhole, catch basin, inlet, etc.
B.
Fittings: Wye, tee, bend, end section, etc.
C.
Witnesses: Horizontal measurements to 3 permanent surface features
D.
PE: Polyethylene plastic.
E.
PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic
F.
EJIW: East Jordan Iron Works
G.
ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
H.
AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
I.
ACI: American Concrete Institute
J.
NSSGA: National Stone, Sand, and Gravel Association
K.
NPS: Nominal Pipe Size
L.
CPPA: Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association
M.
ACPA: American Concrete Pipe Association
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: At least equal to system test pressure.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
33 4100 - 1
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 1.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.6
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for storm drainage piping, including materials, installation and testing. SUBMITTALS
A.
Storm Drainage Witnesses 1.
1.7
Storm sewer and underdrain termini without drainage structures or end sections: Report on record drawings.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.
B.
Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
C.
Handle manholes and structures according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.
Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Architect's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
NON-PERFORATED PIPES AND FITTINGS A.
Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76, Class IV, Wall B, with gasketed joints. 1.
2.2
Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber
PERFORATED PIPE AND FITTINGS A.
Perforated PE Underdrain Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 252, Type CP; corrugated, with geotextile fabric. 1.
Joints: Soil tight.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
33 4100 - 2
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 2.3
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS A.
2.4
See Section 31 2000 “Earth Moving”. MANHOLES
A.
Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for gasketed joints. 1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. B.
Manhole Frames and Covers 1. 2.
2.5
Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required to prevent flotation. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth indicated. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection. Steps: ASTM C 478, individual steps or ladder. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches deep. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover. Sumps: Provide 24” sump
Cover: Imprinted with lettering “Storm Sewer” Standard: EJIW 1040, Type “B” cover or equal
CONCRETE A.
General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. Water: Potable.
Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. 1. 2.
Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
33 4100 - 3
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. 1. 2.
2.6
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.
CATCH BASINS A.
Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B.
Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, 48-inch diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber. Grade Rings: Include 2 or 3 reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch total thickness, that match 24-inch- diameter frame and grate. Steps: ASTM C 478, individual steps or ladder. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches deep. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. Sumps: Provide 24” sump
Catch Basin Frames and Grates: 1.
Ditch section/Non-paved area: a.
2.7
EJIW 1040, Type 02 Beehive grate, or equal
PIPE OUTLETS A.
Riprap Basins: Broken, irregular size and shape, graded stone according to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control." 1. See plans for material size
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EARTHWORK A.
Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
33 4100 - 4
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3.2
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
PIPING APPLICATIONS A.
Non-Perforated Gravity-Flow Sewer Piping/Culverts: Use the following: 1.
B.
Perforated Gravity-Flow Sewer Piping: Use the following: 1.
3.3
NPS 8 to NPS 12 Use Reinforced concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.
NPS 4 and NPS 6: Use perforated PE drainage tubing and fittings with geotextile filter fabric sock.
PIPING INSTALLATION A.
General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.
C.
Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D.
Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1. 2.
3.4
Install PE corrugated sewer piping according to CPPA's "Recommended Installation Practices for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings." Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.
Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1.
Join corrugated PE piping according to CPPA 100 and the following: a.
2. B.
Use soiltight couplings for Type 2, soiltight joints.
Join reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber-gasket joints.
Make joints using system manufacturer’s couplings, unless otherwise indicated.
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
33 4100 - 5
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 C.
3.5
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Join dissimilar pipe materials with couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems’ materials and dimensions. MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.
B.
Install precast concrete manhole sections with gaskets according to ASTM C 891.
C.
Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlet and outlet.
D.
Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6
CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION A.
Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.
B.
Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.
3.7
STORMWATER INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION A.
Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.
B.
Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated.
3.8
CONCRETE PLACEMENT A.
3.9
Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R. CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so finished Work complies as nearly as practical with requirements specified for new Work.
B.
Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.
3.10 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Clean interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. 1. 2.
In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
33 4100 - 6
Alma Armory Modifications Alma, MI DMVA: 26A1513042 3. B.
Paradigm Design, Inc. Grand Rapids, MI PDI Project #1301006
Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. 2.
Submit separate reports for each system inspection. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. b. c. d. e.
3. 4. C.
05/02/2014 BIDS & CONSTRUCTION
Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice. Submit separate report for each test. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.
END OF SECTION 33 4100
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
33 4100 - 7
